voLUME | No. 1
1965

RECORDS

OF THE
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Adelaide, Sth. Australia.
Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer.
Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

OBITUARY AND BIBLIOGRAPHY OF HERBERT MATHEW HALE

BY FJ. MITCHELL

Summary

Born in North Adelaide on the 3 June, 1895, into a family essentially interested in
business, Herbert Hale followed his secondary schooling at Holdfast Bay and Prince
Alfred College with training in acountancy. Although he never completed this course of
tertiary study nor did he use it as his chosen profession, it had a guiding influence upon
his subsequent career.

OBITUARY AND BIBLIOGRAPHY OF HERBERT MATHEW HALE

Herbert Mathew Hale, O.B.E., 1895-1963
South Australian Museum Director 1931-1960

Born in North Adelaide on the 3rd June, 1895, into a family
essentially interested in business, Herbert Male followed his secondary
schooling at Holdfast Bay and Prince Alfred Colleges with training
in accountancy. Although he never completed this course of tertiary
study nor did he use it as his chosen profession, it had a guiding
influence npon his subsequent career,

Hale had a life-long interest in biology and in April, 114, he
sought the support of Professor Walter Howchin, who had been tutor-
ing him in science, and thereby gained appointment as a science cadet
under the then Museum Director, Edgar R. Waite. During thirteen
years of close association with Waite he was influenced to specialize
in Southern Australian crustaceans in parallel with his Director's
interests in the fish fauna of the same region. Part of his early
training included participation as junior author with Waite in a
“Review of the Lophobranchiate Fishes (Pipe-Fishes and Sea Horses)
of South Australia’? and his teenage hobby interests in the biology
of freshwater fishes and subsequently in the various aquatic inverte-
brates providing food for aquarium fishes is reflected in his early
publications, among which were several ontstanding studies of aquatic
and semi-aquatic Hemiptera.

ineonraged by Waite and the then Chairman of the Museum
Board, Professor T. Harvey-Johnston, Hale was ealled upon to use
his business knowledge and natural organizing ability fo an increasing
extent, and upon the death of Hdgar Waite in 1928 he was promoted
io Museum Curator under the direction of the Chairman of the
Museum Board. He was elevated to Director in 1981.

His crisp, analytical approach, combined with bnstling energy
suited him to executive work and by virtue of both his status as
Museum Director and his inherent interest in everything relating to
the well-being of natural science he played a prominent part in the
management of many learned societies and special advisory
committees.

A

2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In 1962 he was awarded Tonorary Lile Membership of the Royal
Society of South Australia in recognition of 31 years of continous
and prominent serviee on its Council, The offices whieh he held
inehided President (1986-87), Viee-President (1984-35, 1987-88) and
Treasurer (1988-50), 1953-56), He was also a permanent Vice
President of the Royal Zoological Society of South Australia,

In addition to many eursory appointments, he held two long term
Government advisory ¢ommissions. In 1925 he wus nominated a
member of the Flora and Fauna Advisory Committee and in 1937 he
was ¢leeted Chairman, an offiee which he held until the Committee
Was reconstituted in 1962. In 1936 he became a Commissioner of the
National Park (subsequently expanded to include control of Wild Life
Reserves) and was elected Deputy Chairman in 1955.

A Royal Commission mder the chairmanship of Ry J. Rudall MP.,
Was appointed in 1934 to inquire into the fishing indnstry in South
Australia, Ifale was inelnded on the three man Commission as
selentifie adviser, During the lollowing two years he travelled
extensively with the Commission entherine data which were prese nted
in three Government reports. Some of the recommendations in these
reports have heen implemented only recently,

Bocatse of the laree museum ethnolowical collections and wide-
spread local interest in anthropology, he developed an early interest
in the life and enulture of the aborigines and accompanied many
anthropological expeditions, THe wrote a number of papers in
collaboration with the present Cirator of Anthropology, Norman B.
Tindale, on the resnits of these excursions, Tle was a foundation
member of the Anthropological Society of Sonth Australia and was
awarded its first Tlonovary Life) Membership in 1957, Tle was
Seeretary to the Board for Anthropologie: tl Research at the University
of Adelaide from 1928-1956 and continued as a member until his death.

In 1928 he was elected to the Handbooks Committee of the British
Science Grid (South Australian Branch) and immediately took office
as Mditor, During his 85 years on the Committee he edited 15
handbooks on South Australian fauna and flora and produced a two-
volume text of his own on the “Crustaceans of South Australia’’
(1927, 1929) whieh remains a relinble and widely used reference.

The South Australian Museum was founded as the South
Australian Institute in 1856, and in record ol its first eontenary of
service fo seienee and education Tale wrote a 225 page illustrated

MITCHELL—OBITUARY OF H, M. HALF 3

historical account of the development of the institution, its staff,
collections and public displays. This was published as volume 12 of
the Reeurds of the Musenm. The review in Nature, Mebruary 1957,
concludes with the following paragraph which, not only concisely
records its scope, but also clearly shows that it achieved its objectives.

“This is a moving story of a great Museum related in
simple langnage, Lf is an important contribution to Museam
literature net only on account of the elaborate details il relates
but also as a record of a large museum and the trials and
difficulties which arose and were overcome. It is a reeord of
the acquisition and conservation, despite set-backs, of the
present important collections of ethnological, zoological and
inineralogical objects and ig in many ways an epitome of the
history of the museum movement in all parts of the world’?

Assisted by a travel grant from the Carnegie Corporation, Hale
left Australia on 28th April, 19389 on a study tour of the United States
and Bngland in which he planned to study public display methods, and
educational techniques, particularly those employing museum material
in child edueation, The onset ol the Second World War foreed him to
curtail bis tonr and return hurriedly to Australia, Tere, financial
stringenciés prevented him from carrying into effect his plans for an
enlarged and modernized museum based on experience gained oyer-
seas, and under the frustrations of greatly reduced staff and funds he
retired into his laboratory to undertake his most intensive period of
laxonomic researeh,

Using submarine light-trap aud other collecting techniques, Hale
and several of his colleagues, built wp very large collections of small
ernustaceans from various localities alone the southern Australian
coust, By systematically describing the Cumacean fauna of Australia
on the basis of material selected from this collection, Hale provided a
new foundation for the taxonomy of this little known order of
crustaceans, His work included the description of a great number of
new genera dnd speeies as well as considerable reorganization of
existing taxa,

Although his outstanding contributions to this and other fields of
research were widely recognized and he was awarded the Verco Medal
of the Royal Society of South Austraha for outstanding ‘vesearch in
scienee’’ in June, 147, L know from personal association with him
diving lis latter years that he valued one commendation above all

4 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

others. He looked to the noted British Museum Carcinologist, Dr.
W. 'T. Calman, us the basis of his inspiration, and searching through
his papers I found ‘the letter’? of which he had frequently spoken—
“oo. . bam mueh interested in your remarkable discoveries in this
group (Cumacea), and, if I may he allowed to say so, I think your
deseriptions and illustrations are models of what such thines
should be. . 27’,

Following his retirement on the 30th September, 1960 he main-
tained an active interest in his investigation of the whale fauna of the
Southern Ocean as an Honorary Associate in Zoology and added three
papers to an already valuable contribution to research in this field.
The manuseript of a further paper was completed just prior to his
death on the 8rd September, 1963, aud has now been published.

Herbert Hale enjoyed an active life and obtained a great deal of
satisfaction trom bis work. Tn addition to research, he aligned himself
closely with the causes of conservation and the sane management of
natural resources, and was instrumental in promoting many successful
inoves to inerease public knowledge and appreciation of our native
fauna and flora.

His long and conscientious service to the community was
recognized by his inelusion in the New Year Honors List for 1954,

Bibliography
Aquatic Life, Philadelphia. Sept. 1918, 14-14 and fig.

44

1918. ‘* An Aquariuin Heater,
1920. '* Notes on Mosquito Larvae’? Aquatie Life, Philadelphia, Jan, 1920, 9-11, fig. 1-5.
‘'The Masquite.*’ Acquatie Life, Philadelphia. eh. 1920, 18-20, plate.
“The Australian Congolly.?* Aquatie Lite, Philadelphia. Mar. 1920, 25-2
‘Me Leafy Ser Dragon.) Aquatic Life, Pliladelplix, Aug. 1920, 87-88, plate,
‘An Australian Cattish.”’ Aqnatie Life, Philadelphia, Dee, 1920, 128-129, fig.

,

12). +f An Enemy of the Breeder?’ Aquatie Life, Philadelphia, Aug. 1921, 11-18) fig. 18.
“Notes on the Morms and Iabits of Aquatic Tuseets. Pt. 7.1? S. Aust. Naturalist,
ii(3), d0-5A, plate.
1922. ** Notes on the Forms and Ilvhbits of Aquatie Tnsects. Pf. 17.7" 8. Aust. Naturalist
Hi(2), 5-8, plate.
“Studies in Australiin Aquatie Tauiptera, No. I, (Corixidae)"’. Tee, S. Aust. Mus.
ii(2), 209-830, fip, B&S-250,
1923. **The Brewing Mabits of the ‘Back-swimmer’, aAnisops hyupeviont? 8. Aust.
Naturalist, iv(3), 124-128, fig, I.
‘Studies in Australian Aquatic Hemiptera, No. 11, (Notonectidae).?*? Ree. 8. Aust,
Mus. ii(3), 897-424, pl. xxi and text fig. AGL ATA,

124,

1925,

1924,

1928,

MITCHELL—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. M. HALE 5

“Notes on Australian Orustacen, No. i (Squillidae).’’ Wee. 8, Aust. Mus. ii(4),
491-502, pl. xxxiiaxxxiii and texo fig, 381-484,

‘Studies in Australian Aquatic Hemiptera, No, iii (Nepidae).*’ Ree, 8. Aust. Mus,
vi(4), 508-520, pl. xxxivexxxvi and text fig. 38-38.

‘*Aquatie Hemiptera from Groote Eylandt.7? Rec. S. Aust. Mus. ii(4), 521-522.

“Notes on Australian Crustacea, No. ii (Gnathiidae).°° Trans. Roy, Soe. 5. Aust.,
xlviii, 1-6, pl. bit

‘*Studies m Australian Aquatic Hemiptera, No. iv, (genus Diapreporaris).'’ Trans,
Roy, Sow, 8S. Aust., Xlviii, 7-, pl iii,

“The Plora and Fauna of Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator Group, No. 16,
The Crustacea.’’ Trans, Rov. Soe. 8. Aust., xlvlii, 67-74, pl iv-y.

‘“*Nofes on Australian Crustacea, No. iii (Isopoda-Valvitura from South Australin).""
‘Trans. Roy, Soe, 8S. Aust,, xIviij, 208-226, text fig. 1-10,

“Two New Hemiptera from New South Wies.’* Proc. Linn. Sue. New South Wales,
41-468, pl. xbvii. (Stwilies iu Australian Aquatic Hemiptera, No. vi.)

“Notes on Eges, Mabits and Migration of some Ansiralian Aquatic Bugs (Corixidae
and Notonvetidae).?? South Aust. Naturalist v, (4), 188-135, pl. and test fig.

‘Migration of Water Beetles (Lretes australis) at Broken Oil, New Seuth Wales.’?
South Anst. Nidaralist vita), 4a.

‘Notes on an Australian Froshowater Crab (Geethelphusa).“? South Aust. Naturalist
vi( a), ded, pate,

“Notes on Australian Crustacea, No. iv (Astwillidae).'* Ree. 8. Aust. Mus, ili(1),
aa-dd, text fig, 16.

“Swedish Scientific Expeditions to Austradia 1910-1913. The Aquatic and Semi-
Aquitie [lemiptera.’’ Arkiv. Zool. K. Svenska Vet, Akad. 17A(20), 1-20,
text fig. J-8 (Studies in Aust, Aquatic Hemiptera, No. v).

‘Observation on the Yabbie (Parachaeraps bicarinatus).*" Aust. Mus, Mag. 1i(8),
371-274, text fig. 1-4.

‘Review of Australian Tsupods of the Cymothoid group. Part 1.7’ Trans, Roy, Soc.
S. Aust., 128-186, text fig. 1-28.

‘The Development of Dwo Aostralian Sponge-crabs.’* Proc. Linn. Soc. New South
Wales 1(4), 405-414, pl, xxxix-xl and text fig. 1-6,

“Review of Australian Isopods of the Cymothoid group. Parf ii?!’ Trans. Roy, Soe.
S. Aust, 1, 201-284, pl, xxxviexaxyii and toxt lig. 1-20,

‘Habits of the Smooth Pebble-erab (Philura laevis)? South Aust. Naturalist vili(3),
67-69, plate.

Studies in Australian Aquatic Wemiptera. No. vii (Gymnocerata).’? Ree. S. Aust.
Mus, iii(2), 15-218, text fig, 81-90.

“Some Aboriginal graves at Adelaide, South Australia.’’ South Aust, Naturalist
viii(1), 11, pl ivi,

‘Aboriginal Rock Carvings in South Australia.’’ South Aust. Naturalist viii(1), 72,

“The Faona of Kangaroo Island, South Australia. No. 1—The Crusfacea.?*? Trans.
Roy. Soe, South Aust. li, 407-421, text tig. 1-7.

‘(The Crustaceans of Suuth Australia Part 1.7" Handbooks of the Flores and Fauna
of South Australia. (Govt. Printer, Adelaide), 1-210, text fig, 1-202.

‘Obituary and Bibliograpiry of Mr. Bdgar RR. Waite./? Ree. S. Aust. Mus, ii(4),
345-360, with portrait, (see also Trans. Roy, Soe. South Aust. ii and South Aust.
Naturalist ix(2), 21-22.

‘“*The Mexienn Axolotl in South Australig.°’ Sotith Aust. Naturalist ix(3), 65-68,
pl. iii,

“Some Australian Deeapod Crustiaven.?? Ree. 8. Aust. Mus. iv(1), 91-104, text fig.
10-27,

“Australian Cumacen.’? Trans. Rey, Soe, 8. Aust, Tii, b1-48, tuxt figs 1-17.

1930,

1931.

1932.

1985,

19386.

1939.

1940,

1941.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

‘Crustacea from Princess Charlotte Bay, North Queensland. The Tsopoda and
Stomatopoda.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. liti, 38-26, fig, 1,

‘Notes on the Faana of Dirk Wartog Island, Western Austinlia, No. 4—
Crusticea.’' Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust. lili, 67-70, pl v.

“The Crustaceans of South Australia, Part 2.7’ Landbooks of the Vlora and
Fauna. of South Australia, (Govt. Printer, Adelaide), 202-280, text fig, 203-364.

“A remarkable Wresh-water Crayfish (Parachacraps hiearinatus).'’ South Aust.
Naturalist xi(8), 42-48, text fig, 1.

‘*Beaked Whales—Hypernodon planifrons and Mesoploden layardii—trom South
Australia’? Ree, S. Aust, Mus. iv(), 391-311, text fig. 1-27.

“The Gouse-beaked Whale (Ziphius cavirostris) in New Trelind.’’ Ree. 8. Aust.
Mus. iv(8), 812-313, fig. 1-2.

“The Pigmy Right Whale (Neobalaena marginata) in South Australian Waters.'!
Ree. S. Aust. Mus. iv(3), 314-820, text fig, 14.

“The Post-embryonie Development of an Australian Nauthid Crab (Pilumnus vestitus
Iluswell),’? Ree, 8. Aust. Mus. iv(3), 821-382, text fig. 1-17.

“The Puture of Australian Pisheries.'’ Progress in Australia, July 7, 10-138, 3
text fig.

“Obituary and Bibliography of Arthur Mills Lea,’’ Ree. S, Aust, Mus, iv(4),
411-452, with portrait,

“The New Zenlund Seamperdown Whale (Wesoplodon gravi) in South Australian
Waters.’" Ree. 8. Aust. Mus. iv(4), 489-496, text fig, 1-11,

A Cumacean new to South Australia.?? Ree, S. Aust, Mus, iv(4), 549-950, text
fig. 1.

“Tanaiducoa and lsopoda eolleeted by the Great Barrier Reef Expedition, 1928-29."?
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. xi(10), 957-562, text fig,

“The Hep-ease of a Oat Shark, Seylivrhinus vincenti (Zietz).’’ Ree, S. Aust. Mus,
v(8), 367-368, fig. 1.

“Some Aquatic Hemiptera from Western Australia.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. 8S. Aust,
lix, 249-251, text fig. 1.

‘Three New Cumacea from South Australia?’ Ree. S. Aust. Mus. v(4), 595-403,
text fig. 1-6.

'Oumacea from a South Australian Reef.’ Ree. S. Aust. Mus. v(4), 404-438, text
fie. 1-23,

‘Further Notes on the Cumac¢ea of South Australian Weefy.?’ Ree. SB. Aust, Mus.
vi(1), §1-74, text fig. 1-9.

‘““Cumacea and Nehaliacea.’’ TRLALN.Z Antare, Res. Exp, 1929-1931. Series B,
iy(2), 37-56, text fig. 1-14.

“‘Tsopoda and Tanadiacea.’’ Aust, Antare, Nxped. 1911-14. Sei. Rep. Series C—
Zool. and Bot. ii(2), 1-44, text fig. 1-19.

© Some Fishes hitherto unknown from South ‘Australian Waters.’’ South Aust.
Naturalist 19(4), 1-5, colour plate and 5 text fig.

‘Rare Whales in South Australia.'' South Aust. Naturalist 19(4), 5-8, 2 text fig.

‘*Report on the Cymothoid Isopoda obtained by the F.L.S, ‘Endeavour’ on the coasts
of Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia’?
Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust. 64(2), 288-304, pl. xvii and text fig. 1-8,

‘'Deeapod Crustueea.’’ B.ALN.Z. Antare. Ree. Exped., 1929-1931. Series B, iv(9),
257-286, pl. ili, and text fig, 1-16.

“The Smooth Pipe Bish (Lissecampus caudalis).’* South Aust. Naturalist 21(1),
5, fig.

“A new South Australian Pipe Fish.’' South Aust. Naturalist 21(2), 10, fig.
(Histinganphelus gallinaceus, )

1943.

1944.

1945,

1946,

TAs.

1949.

1951,

1952.

MITCHELL—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. M. HALE 7

“Notes on two sand-dwelling Cumaees (Gephyrocuma and Pierocuma).'’' Ree, &.
Aust. Mus. vii(+), 487-842, fig. 1-9.

‘* Australinn Cumacen. No, 7. The Genus Cyclaspis.’? Ree. S. Anst. Mus, viii(1),
63-142., fig. 1-60 (see also Hale, 1928, 1932, 1936, 1937, 1942 and 1943).
‘Anstralian Cumiuees, No. & The Family Bodotnidae.*’ Trans, Roy. Soc. Aust,

68(2), 225-286, text fig. 1-38,
'Ruecords of the Oblong Sunfish (Trmrus laevis Pennant) from South Australia,’’
South Aust. Naturalist 22(4), L2, text fig. and cover photograph.

“A strinded Selool of Whales (Pseudorca erassidens).?? South Aust. Naturalist
23(1), 15-17, 3 text fig. and plate on cover.

“The Green ‘Torthe (Chelone midis Linn.) in South <Australiv.’* South Anat
Naturalist 23(2), 9, photograph on cover.

‘Australian Cumaces. No. 9 ‘The Family Nannastacidae.’* Kee. So Aust. Mus,
viii(2), 145-218, text fig, 1-49.

“Australian Cumacea. No, 10. The Family Leuconidae.’?’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Anst,
69 (1), 85-96, text fig. 1-6,

‘Australian Cumacea, No. 11. The Family Diastylidac (part 1).’* Trans. Roy,
Soe, & Anst, 69(2), 173-212, lext fig, 1-26,

“Australian Cumacen, No. 12. The Family Diastylidae (part 2). Gynodiastylis
ani related genern.'’ Ree oS, Aust, Mus. viti(4), 857-444, text fig. 1-60.

‘fAnstralian Cimacen, No, 18. The Family Lamipropidae.’? Trans. Roy. S. Aust,
TO(2), 177-188, toxt fig. 1-4.

‘\Tsopodia-Valyifers.’’ BAN.Z. Antare. Res, Exped, I929-1981, Series B, ¥(3),
1G1-212, text fig, 1-30.

“The Tasmanian or Royal Trompeter in South Australin’’ (Lalris lineata Blowk
and Sehneider.) Sonth Aust, Naturalist 24(2), ii, text fig.

‘'Wvidence of the IUubit of Oru) Gestation in a South Australian Marine Fish
(Apegon conspersus WKiinginger).*? South Aust. Naturalist 24(8), 1-3, plates on
Cover,

The Tigmy Spernt Whale | Kogia treviceps Blainville) on Sonth Australian Coasts,
Part 1.’° Ree, S. Aust. Mus. viii(4), 531-546, pl. xiv-xviii und text fig. I-17,

‘ANnstralian Cumaeea. No, 14. Further Notes ou the Genus Cyeclaspis.*" Ree, 8,
Aust, Mus, ix(1), 1-42, text fig, 1-21.

‘Australian Cumacea. No. 15. The Family Bodotriidae (contd.).’* Ree. 8. Artist,
Mus. ix(2), 107-125, text fig. 1-9,

‘Australian Cumaces. No. 16. The Family Nannastaridae (contd)? Ree, &,
Aust. Mus, ix(2), 225-246, text fig, 1-12.

‘Australian Cumaces, No. 17. The Family Diastylidue (eontd.).?? Ree, 8. Aust.
Mus. ix(4), 348-870, text fig. 1-10.

Tsopoda: Families Cymothoidiae sand Serolidae.’’ B.A.N.Z, Antare. Res, Exped,
1929-19931, Series By vi(2), 21-46, lext fig, 14.

‘Two new Curiieca from South Africa.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 78, 45-50, text.
tig. 1-4.

‘'Austtalian Cumaeea, No, 18. Notes on Distribution and Night Collecting with
artifivial light,"’ Trans. Roy, Soe. 8. Aust. 76, 70-77, text fig. 1-4.

“The First Uundred Years of the South Australian Museum, 1856-1956."" Ree. S.
Aust. Mus. xii, i-xij and 1-266, 23 pl. ond 6 text fig.

“Der Fetzenfiseh, ein seltsames sudaustralisches Seepferdehen.’’ (Phycodurus eques
eqhes Gunther). Natur und Volk, Frankfurt s.M, 87(11), 82-385, with plate
giving lite eolouration,

The Pigmy Sperm Whale on South Australian Comsts, Part ii?’ Ree, 8. Aust.
Mus, xiii(8), 383-388, pl xl und text fig. 1-2.

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1962. ‘' The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Aogia brevieeps) on South Australian Coasts, Part iii’!
Ree. 8, Aust. Mus, 14(2), 197-230, pl. 1-4, und text fig. 1-12.
‘Occurrence of the Whale Berardius arnwri in Southern Australia.’’ Rec, S. Aust.
Mus. 14(2), 281-244, pl. 5-6, and text fig, 1.
1965. ** Young female Pigmy Sperm Whales (Hogia breviceps) from Western and South
Australia.’? Roe. 8. Aust. Mus, 14(8), 561-577, pl. 86-41 and text fig. 1-11.

1964. *'The Pigmy Right Whale (Caporea marginata) in South Australian Waters. Part
2.77 Ree, 8, Aust, Mus, 14(4), 679-694, pl. 48, text fig. 1-4, 1 map and tables 1-2.

Collaborative Studies

Edgar R. Waite and Herbert M. Hale (1921): ‘‘Review of the Lophobranchiate Fishes
(Pipe-fishes and Sea-Horses) of South Australia’’, Ree, 8. Aust. Mus. i(4), 298-824 and
text fig. 39-56.

Herbert M. Uale and Norman B. Tindale (1925): ‘*Ohservations on Aborigines of the
Flinders Ranges, and Records of Rock Carvings and Printings’’, Ree. S. Aust. Mus.
iii(1), 44-60, pl. ii-y and text, fig, 18-22.

Herbert M. Hale and Paul 8S. Hossfeld (1927): ‘!Meteorologies] Notes’*. South Aust.
Naturalist ix(1), 14-16, 3 fig. (A lightning-struck tree and some unusual hailstones.)

Frank A. MeNoill and Herbert M. Hale (1927): **A. Lilliputinn Marine Battle’’, Aust.
Mus. Mag. jii(4), 129-131, 6 text tig.

Herbert M. Hrle and Norman B. Tindale (1929): *! Further Notes on Aboriginal Rock
Carvings in South Australia’’, South Aust. Naturalist x(2), 80-84, pl. 1 and text
tig. 1.

Terbert M, Hale and Norman bB. Tindale (1980): ‘‘ Notes on sume Human Remains in the
Jower Murray Valley, South Australia’. Ree. S. Aust. Mus, iv(2), 146-218, test fig.
1-249,

Herbert M, Hale and Clarence F, Blewett (1931): ‘fA Threatening Invader—
Ichthyophthirius’’. South Aust. Naturalist xiii(1), 1-4, fig, 1.

Herbert M. Hale and Norman B. Tindale (1933): ‘Aborigines of Princess Charlotte Bay,
North Queensland, Part i7’. Ree. S. Aust. Mus. v(1), 63-116, text fip, 1-159,

Herbert M, Male and Norman B. Tindale (1984): ‘* Aborigines of Princess Charlotte Bay,
North Queensland, Part ii**’. Ree. S. Aust. Mus, y(2), 117-172, text fig. 140-250,

R. J. Rudall, HW. M. Hale and E, A, Sheridan (1984); ‘First Progress Report of the
Royal Commission on the Fishing Industry (South Australia)’. Govt. Printer,
Adelaide, 1-7.

R. J. Rudall, H. M. Hale and E. A. Sheridan (1985); ‘*Seeond Progress Report of the
Royal Commission on the Fishing Industry (South Australia)’’. Govt. Printer,
Adelaide, 1-40 and map.

R. J. Rudall, H. M. Hale and EB. A. Sheridan (1985): ** Final Report of the Royal
Commission on the Fishing Industry (South Australia) ’*. Goyt. Printer, Adelaide, 1-15.

KF. J. Mirenenn,

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AND ABORIGINAL OCCUPATION AT
NACKARA SPRINGS IN THE NORTH-EAST OF SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper records a group of rock engravings at Nackara Springs in the north-east of
Australia. The historical evidence of aboriginal occupation of the area is reviewed; the
relation of engravings to topography defined; a selection of the designs reproduced and
their antiquity discussed. Comparisons are made with engravings from other sites in the
same region and maps are provided to show the location of the various sites.

A collection of stone implements, a burial excavated from near the adjacent camp-site,
and a cairn of stone slabs on the bank of the Nackara Creek are described. The
significance of these is considered in relation to the other evidence of former aboriginal
occupation.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AND ABORIGINAL OCCUPATION AT
NACKARA SPRINGS IN THE NORTH-EAST OF SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS

Plates 1-2, and text fig. 1-4

SUMMARY

This paper records a group of rock engravings at Nackara
Springs in the north-east of South Australia, The historical evidence
of aboriginal occupation of the area is reviewed; the relation of
engravings to topography defined; a selection of the designs repro-
duced and their antiquity discussed. Comparisons are made with
engravings from other sites in the same region and maps are provided
to show the location of the various sites.

A collection of stone implements, a burial excavated from near
the adjacent camp-site, and a eairn of stone slabs on the bank of
Nackara Creek are described. The significance of these is considered
in relation to the other evidence of former aboriginal occupation.

INTRODUCTION

This investigation of the Nackara Springs was prompted by the
knowledge of their permanence as a water supply on the edge of the
drainage area of the Manunda and Yunta Creeks, where rock
engraving sites had previously been recorded (Basedow, 1914;
Mountford, 1929; Mountford and Edwards, 1963 and Edwards, 1964),
The association of engravings and permanent water is now established
as a constant factor in the occurrence of archaeological sites in this
north-east area of South Australia. This led to the examination of
Nackara Springs and the finding nearby of the rock engravings and
associated camp-site described in this paper.

ABORIGINAL OCCUPATION

Tt is significant that the owners of sheep stations in the Manunda-
Yunta Creek drainage area do not reeall any mention of aboriginals
living in this particular region at the time their properties were first

10 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

seltled, The journals of the explorers were consulted for references
to this north-east distriet and it was found that encounters with
aboriginals were limiled to the fringe of country deseribed as
“dreary’’, ‘“waterless’’, ‘‘wretched’’, ‘“Shbarren’’ and ‘sterile’. The
first explorer to record these impressions of the north-east was
Colonel Gawler (1839), the second Governor of South Australia, Tn
the heat of December, 1839, three years alter first settlement, Governor
tawler, accompanied by Captain Charles Sturt and others, set out
from the main north-west bend of the River Murray to explore the
land to the north, The party soon reached a sueeession ol sandy,
waterless plains, broken only by seattered and stunted trees, Mount
Bryan was sighted and named and the Porcupine Range (on the
present Piteairn Station) seen in the distance but not examined.
These discoveries were made alter considerable hardship in the
simmer heat and at the cost of the life of one of the party, who
beeame lost and was assumed to have perished.

After the expedition lef{ the aboriginals located on the Murray,
the only indications of the presence of other natives in the area
examined were columns of smoke seen rising [rom Mount Bryan. On
close investigation these camps were found to have been just
abandoned, Governor Gawler (1840) expressed the opinion that the
few natives he saw along the Murray ‘©... very rarely venture upon
the Creat Plain of the fossil formation, and nabubly never traverse
them in their full extent’, Contact between the aboriginals of Mount
Bryan and those of the River Murray is evident trom the report of
the Protector of Aborigines (1844), who was sent to investionte a
conthet and reprisals at Mount Bryan Station in Oetober, 1844. This
report disclosed that the local aboriginals sometimes made contact
with those of the Murray area—probably along the route provided hy
the Burra Creek (map, fig. 1). Thus, although Gawler may have
heen correct in his opinion that the Murray natives seldom left their
assured food supplies, there was certainly communication with those
to the north through the more favourable areas to the north-west of
the River.

In 1842, when Colonel Frome (1848a), Surveyor-General of South
Anstratia, led an expedition northward as far as the Black Roek Hills
which he so named, he also examined the country discovered by
Clovernor Gawler around Mount Bryan, Shortage of time prevented
furthor progress to the north-east where it was hoped better pasture
land wonld he found,

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA MW

In the following winter Colonel Frome (1843b) set out for the
north again, This time he sueeeeded in reaching Mount Serle in the
Flinders Ranges. One evening, on the outward journey, a camp was
made in the Black Rock Hills and several members of the party
climbed (6 the highest point, Trom this they wonld have had a
commanding view of the Nackara Thlls, and Poreapine Range to the
south-east (map, fie. 1). Henderson (1843), one of the party, made the
following entry in lis journal: ‘f, . . a more dreary prospect than
we had before us | eonld vot have imagined. The country appears
wretched, at Jeast as far as we conld see and not a solitary wreath of
emoke could be diseerned in the blue distance to convince ms that at
was even inhabited by the wandermg savage’’, This desertption
iNnsteates the wuavonrable impression gained in spite of heavy rains
having fallen thronghout the journey.

As the party continned northwards into the Flinders Ranges
contaet was made with the aborigimals on a number of occasions and
the atmoke trom their fires was often visible in the distanee. On
returning to Mount Bryan on the homeward journey, Colonel frome
decided to explore fo the north-east, hoping to discover the good
country thought to exist under the Poreupine Range which had been
sivlied by Governor Gawler and Captain Sturt in 1839, and by Frome
himself, both in 1842 and daring his push to the north in the Following
vear. It was hoped that the heavy rains which had fallen during the
preeeding two months wonld enable the party to penetrate some
distanee into unexplored country, As they approached the Porcupine
Range, however, all trace of water vanished and they found it
impossible to proceed; they obviously had not diseovered the nearby
permanent spring im the Manunda Creek—recorded by the present
writer (1964), Colonel Frome and two companions climbed Mount
Poreupine (Waite Hill) from which they recorded ‘ta clear view of
the horizon in every direetion’’, adding jhat ‘fa more barren, sterile
country eamot be imagined’’ (Frome, 1843p), To the southward
was the Marray serub, as level as the oeean; to the east ditto, with
a lew sroall hills covered with serub; to the westward, the distant high
land of Mount Bryan with a vast extent of serub over whieh we came
the day before; and to the north wamerous barren ranges’? (THonderson,
1843), Ou deseending the hill the party returned, with some diffenlty,
to Mount Bryan and thenee hack to Adelaide,

Although the aecounts of these explorations contain many
references to aboriginals along the Liver Mnrray, in the vicinity of
Mount Bryan, and the lower Flinders Ranges, no mention is made of

12 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PT. AUGUSTA

fx
NACKARA ~<l.@/ PANARAMITEE
SPRINGS 4)

PITCAIRN

|
|
|
|
|

MT. BRYAN @
é KETCHOWLA

Pig. 1. Map showing the location of the Mamunda-Yunta ereek drainage area and its relation
to the Naekara Springs site.

their presence in the Mannnda-Yunta Creek drainage area. The above
brief extracts from the available historical records suggest therefore
that permanent aboriginal occupation of this region was unlikely at
that time.

In spite of the unfavourable reports of this country given by the
first explorers, it attracted the attention of pastoralists who, eager to
find new land for expansion of their activities, pushed out into the low
rainfall area of the north-east to begin a series of costly experiments
in raising sheep in a semi-arid environment, In the winter of 1845,
Melrose (Cockburn 1925), examined the Nackara area. Local tradition
has it that squatters were the first to use the waters of the Nackara
Springs. It was not until 1851 that John Williams, notable for his

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 13

pastoral aetivities on the extensive Black Rock Run, extended his
holdings to incorporate the Nackara Hills. Tis pastoral lease (No.
220, of Ist July, 1851) centred around the permanent spring on a
tributary of Nackara Creck. Today it is part of a sheep station owned
hy Mr. N, C. 8. Sharkie.

Although the examination of explorers’ joarnals produced little
information about the extent of previous aboriginal occupation of
these areas, there is ample evidence to show that the country around
Nackara Springs had been inhabited or regularly visited by aboriginals,

Knvironment

Nackata Springs is located im the rugged, lilly conntry some 165
miles north-east of Adelaide and 30 miles east of Black Rock (map,
fie, 1). The Tandred of Naekara was proclaimed in 1880 and for a
short time beeame a Woods and Forests Department reserve for the
purpose of preserving the native flora ineluding mallee, sandalwood,
native pine, salt bush and blue bush.

The dominating topographical featuve near the springs is. a
eonieal shaped hill appropriately named The Cone’. Its height is
1,860 feet above sea level, This relatively high area is drained by a
complex system of many small creeks. These have cut their way
jhroneh ihe hills to the north-west of “The Cone’, and join to form
a single, large watercourse whieh, after passing through a small valley
and steep-sided gorge, enters the main Nackara Creek (imap, fig. 4).
When the infrequent thunderstorms bring rain to this semi-arid region,
they cause the normally parched creek-beds to become swift-flowing
streams and the adjacent countryside to be clothed with natural
grasses, Nackara Springs (map, fig. 4, Site A) is a permanent source
of witer, and, even in times of dronght, gives suflicient How to form
a line of rock pools in the watercourse. These haye provided
pastoralists with a water supply for their sheep for more than a
contury.

In such semi-arid country, the presence of a permanent spring,
together with watercourses and a nearby gorge—to provide soakages—
would make this Nackara site highly suitable for aboriginal occupation.
2 ROCK ENGRAVINGS
Sile ol

The adjacent sloping ground to the south-west ol Nackara Springs
rises abruptly to form a series of hills more or less parallel to the
main watercourse, A number of these hills are surmounted by rugged

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 15

otterops of slaty rock (plate 1A) on whieh engravings have been made,
Although many of these engraved rock surfaces are horizontal, as is
customary in the north-east of South Australia, there are a number
of instances where engravings have been peeked into inclined and even
nearly vertical rock faces (plate 2A),

The desiens are, in the main, similar to those recorded from other
sites in the surrounding area (Basedow, 1914; Mountford, 1929, 1935;
Monntford and Mdwards, 1962, 1963; Hdwards, 1964). Representa.
tions of animal and bird traeks are the most common (fig. 2K, M).
oe are many circles of various dimensions and combinations (fig.
2, 1, S, T, V), while barred circles (fig. 20), concentric eireles
(fig. ah engraved dots (ig. 2H, P) and Tuman footprints (fig. 2A)
occur less frequently among the designs. Creseents (fig. 2B) and
pecked Vitaglios of lizards (fig. 2D, U) are grouped together in one
place—a rave happening on the other sites examined in this north
eust urea. ‘Two distinetive peeked Jinear engravings have lines
hramehing from a hole pounded in a slopimg surface (fig. 20, Ry
plate 1B) while there are smaller examples with lines radiating from
Hn central point (fig, 2L, N). Other abstract designs are shown in
iv. 2G,

Site B

The second group of rock engravings in this locality are similar
(o those found at Site A. There are many animal teaeks of different
sivew (fig. 8B, C, J, M, V, L,Y), one set ol kangaroo tracks (fig. 3A)
sigeesting a hopping action of the animal, Other kangaroo tracks
(fig. 86 and ) may be deliberate attempts to show delormities of the
oot of this animal, They are similar to those recorded on a Hill
Grange Station site (Mdwards, 1964). ‘The cirele, in various arrange-
ments (often combined with tracks), forims the basis of many designs
(fig, 3B, CLI, M,N. VY. W, YY); there are a mumnber of pecked intaghios
of Hinman footprints (fig. 8C, M, N, Q, X); a well-exeented engraving
ol five concentric eireles (fig. 3K); 4 small spiral (fe. 3B) 5 an orderly
armangement of eight short bars (fig. SU); a simall smake-like design
(fig. 3H) and an elongated barred cirele (fig. 80). Some pecked
linen envraving’s are lar weometrical outlines (fig. 8D, 1, P, W, Y).
while others ave indefinite (fig. 8G, 8, N, 7), and impossible to identity,

There is noticeable variation in tock patination at this site, Many
ebneravings are indistinet and difficult to recognize because water and
vater-borne sand have eroded the patinated surfaces from some of the
rocks. Others on a higher level have retained their dark colour.

RECORD Sor

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 17

The pecking technique employed in making these enyravings, the
degree of weathering, patination, disintegration ol the rocks, absence
of engraved ttacks of the dingo and the depicting of all the engraved
figures in plan, are factors common to the Nackara sites us well as all
other groups forming the Manunda-Yunta Creek Series (Mdwards,
1964).

Straight-line’? Markings

Markings identical with those recorded at, other sites in the novth-
east of South Australia (Busedow, 1914; Tindale and Mountlorvd,
1926: Mountford, 1929, 1935); at Devon Downs (Hie and Tindale,
1930); Marree (Cooper, 1941); Central Australia (Mounttord, 1960)
and the Northern Territory (Davidson, 1986; Arndt, 1962), were found
to be concentrated on the rocks forming the highest ol the hills sonth-
west of the springs. This hill may have been a place of importance
in the ceremonial life of the aboriginal as it is the highest of the Tine
and gives a commanding view of the surrounding countryside
(plate LA), Kyidence that if was a place of some importance is
presented hy the rettarkable series, amounting to many hundreds,
ol! ‘straight-line’? markings made on the faces aud along the ridges
of the rocks, These markings, abraded into the rock surfaces, have a
striking V-shaped eross-section, deepest im the middle of the depression
aud tapering to a shallow thin cut at the ends (plate 2B). Tn Jength
they vary Irom small grooves of half an ineh up to a few large forms
at twelve or so inches, A close examination imider magnification
yeveals a number of longitudinal scratches adjacent to each groove,
These were apparently formed in the initial attempt to establish a
eroove of stifficient. depth to hold the entting implement im place.
Onee a purchase was obtained on the rock surface a repeated to and
fvo abrading action across the rock produced the groove.

An wnorewarding searel: was made in the vicinity of these
engravings for stone implements capable of being used in the predne-
tion of these grooves, Tindale and Mounttord (1926) figure a quarts
knife recovered from a camp-site adjacent to similay markings at
Mocowie. In their opinion this implement was capable of eutting these
erooves in the rock surface, The only likely material found at the
Nackara site consisted of pieces of the milky variety of qnartz which
eceurs in abundance throughout ihe north-east region. By experiments
with fortuitous pieces of this rock, having sharp edges, it was possible
to prodnce markings identical with those made by fhe aboriginals,

1k RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The action ol cutting the grooves caused little damage to the edges
of the stone fragments used. A close examination of plastic negative
impressions of the erooves shows that the margin of the eutting toal
Was uneven as minute seratelies on the walls of the V-shaped cavities
are evident, This gives support to the suggestion that untrimmed
quartz fragments were used for making these simple enyvavings.

The age of these markings is unknown, However, the rock
surfaces where they oeeur at Nackara Springs have been badly
fraetured throngh prolonged erosion and Weathering; so much so that

many pieces with markings occur among the debris on the talus,

As with the pecked intaglios and linear engravings the inner walls
of the abraded grooves have adopted the surface colouring ol the
rock—indicative of long exposure to weathering. Further support of
appreciable antiquity is given by Male and Tindale (1930) who found
similar markings on the baek wall of the Devon Downs tock shelter
at an excavated depth of hetween ten and thirteen feet. It was
suggested that these particular grooves had been formed by the action
of sharpening bone tools on the solt limestone (Tindale, 1957),

The origin and meaning of these sunple engravings are unkuown.
Arndt (1962) figures similar markings, known as ‘rain cuts’’, from
the “Rain Centre’? at Delemere, Northern Territory, and records a
former associated rain-making ceremony involving singing and dancing
after whieh those taking part each eut a evroove in an adjacent rock
to make the “Old man bleed and bring rain’. This statement is of
considerable interest, although as there is no known relationship
hetween these widely separated sites a common meaning eannot he
assumed, MeCarthy (1958) and MeBryde (1964) disenss another form
of abraded groove fvom northern New South Wales whieh Inay also
be related,

CAMP-SITES

Between the hills with engraved roek surfaces and the Nackara
Springs watercourse, the ground las been ent by vutters and generally
subjected to erosion by heavy thunderstorm rains, These conditions
have contributed to the exposure of groups of hearth-stones and
sparsely seattered stone implements of various types. This evidence
of aboriginal oceupation also extends along the main watereourse as
far as its junction with the Nackara Creek,

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 19

BS
NACKARA

SSERINGS®
Burial

0 CHAINS 80

139710"

Pig. t Dersiled inap tt Noekuwra Spengs ares iibinting The velative position of rock
ravings Hid am pbsibes be the Neciara Croek and olher witeremirses; shared
wrens cere alewitianea hove T4900) beet,

The following stone implements were recovered from this site:
One hundred and eighty-one large trimmed eore implements and
nineteen large trimmed llukes, Eilty-seven hammerstones; Twenty:
seven one-sided millstones amd Fourteen double-sided millstones,
Three Inuudred aad seventy-eizlt smaller implements were also
collected; ninete-Ave are reduced ‘dake’ flakes; sixty semmi-diseotdle 5
thirty-seven end “serapers’’, ninety-eight irregular shaped tlakes with
varying amounts of secondary trimming; oO small toimber of nose,
double-sided and conenve serapers’’s forme blade dakes and twenty-six
coves, Ont of 4 collection of forty-eight onterolfiths thirteen are
eoometries : Fen have cud trimming; sis are seriiecdisecidas one ciseata;

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

seyen trimmed cores and thirteen working cores, Over five hundred
discarded untrinmed flakes were also collected.

Among the material recovered were two complete australites and
a diseoidal microlith, made from one of these meteoric vluss objects,
One of the complete specimens of australite is ovate and the other a
(himb-bell form. Mountford (1949) and Baker (1957) deserihe the
use the aboriginals made of australites both for ceremonial and
magical purposes aud for the manulactnre of implements. Their
presenee ou this camp-site suggests similar uses.

No artifacts were found near rock engraving Site B,

ABORIGINAL BURIAL

On the north-east bank of Nackara Springs watercourse, erosion
had removed about twelve inches of the surface soil exposing a low
mond of small stones, Removal of this disclosed a human burial.

Excavation of the npper mound exposed a large flat stone which
appeared fo have pressed on, and broken in, the back of the skull.
After removal of the stone and trowelling away of the soil, the bones
were found to be in an advaneed stage of disintegration and broke into
powdery Tragments at the slightest touch. The soil was firmly
consolidated around the bones and quite damp, evidently heeause of
soukage from the nearby spring—no rain having fallen for the previous
eight months, No natural arrangement of the hones was evident: they
appeared to have heen separated by pressure of the overlying material.
An exeavation three feet square and one foot seven inches below the
eroded surface was made. [t is of interest 10 note that two veometric
microliths were found during the silting of the soil removed from
around the skeleton remains,

Dr. A. D, Packer, of the University of Adelaide, has examined the
bone fragments recovered and reports that they ‘*. . . are of a mature
adult aboriginal. There are not sufficient pelvie bone fragments to
determine the sex with certainty hut the slender eayieales and the
appearance of the bones generally suggest that they are rom a female.
There is nothing to indicate that the remains are other than recent’’.
Professor T. D. Cainphell assisted in the removal of the skeleton and
examined the remains of the jaw and a number of teeth. In his
opinion the shape of the mandible and sadvaneed wear of the teeth
showed they were probably of an aged female,

EBWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 21

Basedow (1925) describes the mode of burial by the aboriginals
of! the Flinders Ranges—the corpse was first covered with a layer of
foliage and bushes; over this a number of slabs of slate were placed ;
finally «a mound was erected on the site, Althongh there was no
evidence of any decaying vegetable matter in the Nackara Springs
grave, the pile of stones removed from the surface and the large stone
from over the bones suggest comparison with the burial customs of the
Flinders Ranges,

STONE CATRN
During an examination along the Nackara Creek, a solid eairn
about three feet in height was found neatly constructed of flat slabs
of loeal stone (map, fig. 4). This had been erected on the bank of the
creek opposite the entry of a large tributary. In its loeation it eould
not have been a survey trig and it was unlikely fo mark a property
houndary.

Arrangements ol stones im various forms have been found over
a wide area ol’ Anstralia (Towle, 1989) and many are known to have
heen made by the aboriginals. Mountford (1940) reeords stone
vurms in the north of South Australia and also at Waroonee and
Waukaringa in the north-east. These latter occurrences were of a
square hollow construction. Monntlord (1940) states that similar stone
structures observed in the Northern Flinders Ranges were ereeted by
adoleseent boys of the Adnvamatana tribe for ‘‘amnsement’’.

There is no evidence to indicate the origin or purpose ol this
particular example found new Nackara Springs.

DISCUSSION

he rock engravings at Nackara Spring's are another of the series
of engraving sites associated with the Maniunda-Yunta Creek drainage
area of the north-east of South Australia.

my

The engraved figures—their numbers, grouping and distribution—
al various sites present to some extent a general pattern ol similarity.
A comparative stndy is in progress by means of a quantitative analysis
of details ef the oeeurrences. This may reveal some significant
related and differing features between the respective sites,

The question of the antiquity of rock engravings in this part of
Australia is one which has generally been discussed on the basis of
the traditional assessments of the geologist. Conditions so far

22 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

presented Haye not provided associated material amenable to the
modern radiocarbon method of age computation. Further inyestiga-
tions may provide a solution for this problem by this means.
However, the suggestion of appreciable antiquity is supported by the
evidence of the slow processes of deeay, fracture and disintegration
of the outeropping rocks on which the engravings were made. Many
examples are to be seen where these processes haye taken place since
the engravings were executed; where consequent movement and wide
separation of engraved surfaces have oeeurred; and where detached
boulders with engraved designs have fallen down umong the talus
debris. Also the weathering and patination of the outcrop surfaces
und the engravings on them, are possibly processes of appreciable
slow development. All these features may indicate a long lapse of
time sinee the engravings were made.

The means by which these engravings were executed have heen
a matter ol conjeeture (Ndwards, 1964). The apparent absence of
auitable stone tools closely associated with the engravings adds te
the diffeulties, This problem is another undergoing special study by
means of ¢lose examination of the details of the intaghos under
magnification and negative and positive reproductions by means of
plaster and modern plastic materials. The evidenee so far considered
supports the idea that no specialized tool was employed as there is
a wide variation in the size of the small pits where particles were
removed in the rock surface during the process of making the
eNngravINeS,

The interpretation of the meanings of the vast array of these
engravings is a matter also lraueht with diffeullies. The observer is
confronted with a range of oceurrences from a few simple engravings
on vw rock face to the larger surfaces eoyered with s confusion of
designs, geometric ontlines, representations of animal, bird, reptile
and tuimnan tracks, peeked naturalistic intaglios of animals and
‘abstract’? or indecisive figures. All these vary in size and shape and
some designs are superimposed on others. The eroding effeets of dime
anil weathering have added to the intricaey of the problem and the
diffeulty of any attempt at interpretation,

To what extent these sites eam be looked upon as having some
sacred or ceremonial significance; an assoeiation with bunting magic;
or how many of the engravings are simply purposeless attempts at
expression before magical art developed—are questions diffienlt to
tuiswer. From what has been anthoritatively ascertained from other

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 23

examples of aboriginal art, such as the designs of rock paintings,
carved Ljirungé—and ceremonial decoration of slields and human
bodies, there is no doubt that all these designs, from the simplest to
the most complex pattorns, had a specific meaning at the time when
{hey were made.

A study of what is accessible and capable of interpretation in
present-day aboriginal art is nol entirely satisfactory for deciphering
these seemingly ancient, rock Cngravings, Tt would be dangerous to
make assumptions oy ta transpose the meanings given to the designs
and figures of eave paintings to oflen similar figures engraved on rock
surfnees. The latter on various viewpoints are usually looked upon
us being examples of aboriginal art Ina predating that expressed in
the form o! cave paintings, But here again this viewpoint rests on
the assmuption that rock paintings were not a form of aboriginal art
voutemporanvous with engravings. Tf is possible these two forms may
hive been eo-existent, but it seems doubtful whether rock painting in
the fort of a superficial application of pigments—even 1! these latter
were mimeral m eonstitiution—could withstand the effeets of time and
wenther compared with engravings, Some paintings may have heen
made on open roek surfaces but these, of course, world quiekly
deteriorate, leaving no trace,

The abraded grooves are an interesting type sometimes associated
with pecked intaglios and linear engravings. Occasioually they are
concentrated on their own. A number of writers have suggested
that these particular engravings were the results of sharpening
vertiin implements of stone or bone, This is an interpretation
assuiling a definite iwtilitarian purpose as opposed to amy ‘sacred’
sienifieanee or artistic expression, Lt is possible that both the
suggested utilitarian and the sacved could have sometimes over.
lapped—the tool being used gaining some increased magieal power
throueh the action of making a groove, The location of this type of
eneraving im great moanbers on the summit of a steep hill at Nackara
Springs gave a further opportunity for close examination, As many
were on awkward and almost inaccessible roek surfaces and across the
narrow angular margins of adjacent rock laces in a wide range of
sizes, it is hurd to reconcile them with a tool sharpening Tnnetion.
The aboriginal has abways been recognized as intensely *‘ practical?’
and il is diffieult to accept Uiat the past aboriginal occupants of this
area would climb a steep tor to sharpen lis tools when more easily
accessible arul similar snitable rock outerops were available at mueh
lower levels.

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The many indefinite factors, and probably many others totally
unknown, associated with the rock engravings of this area make a
complete assessment diffienlt, and the first stage ol the present
reseureh must be classification rather than an attempted interpreta-
tion, The more detailed and intensive studies now being undertaken
may produce evidence of when, why and by whom this interesting
series of rock en@ravings was made.

The stone implements recorded from the Nackara Springs site
are tangible evidence of ifs past ocenpation although no conclusions
are possible from surface finds of this kind. The number of smaller
implement types found at Nackara Springs was greater than that
recorded From fhe Piteairmn sites (Mdwards, 1964). For example,
reduced “tilas’’, known to have been used mounted on spearthrowers
wid other wooden handles by aboriginals until recent times, were
numerous enough at Nackara (95) to suggest a more regular oceupa-
tion there than in the semi-arid areas further to the east where only
four were found on the three Pitcairn sites.

The burial, the stone cairn, the likeness in implement types and
the historical evidence all point to a conneetion with the Flinders
Ranges tribes. It could be that they are the produet of excursions
and activities of these people into this adjoining easterly region.

Hdwards (1964) has deseribed the similarity between the large
Nartan stone implements found on Piteairn Station and those collected
hy Cooper (1948, 1950, 196L) from Hallett Cove, along the River
Wakelield, to a limited extent on Kangaroo Island, and on various
other sites in South Australia. The large trimmed implements found
scattered over the camp-site at Nackara Springs ean also be compared
with these implements and undoubtedly helong to the same industry.
Many of the large implements from Naekara Springs, as elsewhere,
have been reduced in size and weight by repeated sharpening—an
indication of intensive use. If these Kartay implements are old, as
has often been suggested, it may be that the aboriginals whe made the
large implements at Pitcairn Station and those found on the Nackara
Springs site, lived at some earlier time and made the rock engrayings.
It will he necessary however to fmd a sitnation where rock engravings
and stone implements are located in association with material to which
more positive methods of dating can be applied before the pre-history
of the area can be confidently reconstrueted,

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 25
RESUME

Art rupestre, probablement préhistorique, & Nackara Springs,
Australie du Suc.

Ktude illustrée des gravures, probablement préhistoriques, qui
décorent les parois des rochers 4 Nackara Springs, Australie du Sud.
Les sites sont de plein air. Description de lindustrie lithique.

Les gravures, semblables A celles a la conflnence Manunda-Yunta
Creek, représentent des anneaux et des pistes d’animanux.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to acknowledge the assistance of Mr. Brian K.
Sawers of Piteairn Station whose enthusiasiu and help made possible
this investigation. Mr. N. ©. 8. Sharkie kindly gave permission to
work on his property. Mr, F. K. Archibald assisted in the tracing of
the engravings. The advice and practical assistance of Professor
G. H, Lawton, Drs. T. D. Campbell and ?. 8. Hossfeld and Messrs.
@. P. Mounttord, H. M. Cooper and G. li. Pretty were appreciated.
Mr. M. R. Marehant of the South Australian Department of Lands
kindly provided the information used in the preparation of the maps.

The Board for Anthropologieal Research of the University of
Adelaide granted funds towards the expenses of field work in this
research,

Acknowledgment is also made to the Board of the South
Australian Museum for publication of this paper and to Mr. Norman
B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology, for his valuable advice,

REFERENCES

Arndt, W., 1962: The interpretation of the Delemere Lightning Paint-
ing and rock engravings. Oceania, Sydney, 32(3).

Baker, George, 1957: The role of Australites in Aboriginal customs.
Mem. nat. Mus., Melb., Melbourne, 22(8).

Basedow, H,, 1914: Aboriginal rock carvings of great antiquity in
South Australia. J. R. anthrop. Inst., London, +4.

1925; The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide.

Cockburn, R., 1925: Pustoral Pioneers of South Australia, Vol 1,

Adelaide.

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Cooper, H. M., 1941: Rock carvings and other ahoriginal relies from
near Marree. S. Aust. Nat., Adelaide, 21,
1945: Large stone implements from South Australia. Ree.
S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7(4).
1959: Large archacological stone implements from Hallett
Cove, South Australia, Trans. roy. Soe. S. Aust.,
Adelaide, 82.
————— 1960: The archaeology of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.
htec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 13(4).
1961: Archaeological stone implements along the Lower
River Wakefield, South Australia. Trans. roy. Soe. S.
Aust., Adelaide, 84.

Davidson, D. $., 1986: Aboriginal Australian and Tasmanian rock
carvings and paintings. Mem. Amer, phil, Soe.
Philadelphia, 5,

Kdwards, R., 1964; Rock engravings and stone implements of Pitcairn
Station, uorth-eastern South Australia. Ree. 8S. Aust.
Mus., Adelaide, 14(4).

Frome, Hi. C., 1848a; Report on country to the north of the Light and
Gilbert. Despatches, No. 3, South Australian Archives.

1843b: Report of the country to the eastward of Flinders
Ranges. South Australian Government Gazette, Sept.,
1843, Adelaide.

Gawler, G., 1859: Despatches to the Colonization Commissioners,
1838-41, South Australian Archives,

———— 1840: Notes regarding the Aborigines of the Murray.
South Australian Gazette and Colonial Register,
18/1/1840, Adelaide.

Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1980: Notes on some human remains
in the lower Murray Valley, Sonth Australia. Ree. S.
Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4(2).

Henderson, J., 1848: Narrative of an expedition to Lake Frome in
1843. Manuscript Journal, South Australian Archives.

McCarthy, F. D., 1958: Australian Aboriginal Rock Art. Sydney.

McBryde, Isabel, 1964: The linear engravings of the Clarence Valley,
Northern New South Wales. Oceania, Sydney, 34(3).

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT NACKARA 27

Moorhouse, M., 1844: Letter books of the Protector of Aborigines.
South Australian Archives.

Mountford, C. P., 1929: Aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia.
Rep. Aust. Ass. Advane. Sei., Hobart, 19.
1935: A survey of the petroglyphs of South Australia.
Rep. Aust. Ass. Advane, Sei., Melbourne, 22.
1940: Aboriginal Stone Structures. Trans. roy, Soe. 8.
Aust., Adelaide, 64(2).
1948: Brown Men and Red Sand, Melbourne.
———— 1960: Simple Rock Engravings in Central Australia. Man,
London, 60.

Mountford, CG. P. and Edwards, R., 1962: Aboriginal rock engravings
of extinct creatures in South Australia. Man, London, 62.
1968: Roek engravings of Panaramitee Station, north-
eastern South Australia, Trans. roy. Soc, S. Aust.,
Adelaide, 86,

Tindale, N. B., 1957: Culture Succession in South-castern Anstraha
from Late Pleistocene to the Present. Ree. S. Aust.
Mus., Adelaide, 13(1).

Tindale, N. B. and Mountford, C. P., 1926: Native markings on rocks
at Morowie, South Australia. Trans. roy. Soc. 8. Aust.,
Adelaide, 50.

Towle, C. C., 1939: A Bibliography of Stone Arrangements found in
graphy
Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 2(7).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 1 TO 2

PLATE 1.
Fig. A. General view of Nackara Springs area from summit of the hill where abraded
grooves are concentrated.
Fig. B. Unusual rock engraying with lines radiating from a small central eup-shaped hollow.
Site A, Nackara Springs. Seale in inches.
PLATE 2.
Fig. A, Sloping rock surface engrayed with many designs, Site A, Nackara Springs. Seale
in inehes.

Fig. B. §‘Straight-line’* markings or abraded grooves showing the breaking up of the rocks
since the marks were made. Seale in inches.

, Puate 1

5

1

Von.

UM

*
y

S.A. Muse

Ree,

Ree S.A, Museum Vou. 1, Pure 2

A REDISCRIPTION OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPIDER CRAB
“EURYNOME GRANULOSA” BAKER (CRUSTACEA,
BRACHYURA MAJIDAE)

BY D. J. G. GRIFFIN

Summary

The majid crab, Eurynome granulosa, known only from South Australia, is redescribed
and figured from four specimens, including the holotype, and its systematic position
discussed. Its numerous similarities to Chionognathus reini, a Japanese species, are
emphasized. Among the species at present placed within Eurynome, E. granuloa stands
closet to the South African E. elegana.

A REDESCRIPTION OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPIDER CRAB
“EURYNOME GRANULOSA”*’ BAKER (CRUSTACEA,
BRACHYURA MAJIDAE)

By D. J. G. GRIFFIN, Zoonogy Derarrwent, University oF
TASMANIA, AUSTRALIA

Text fig. 1-5

SUMMARY
The majid erab, Eurynome granulosa, known only from South
Australia, is redeseribed and figured from four specimens, including
the holotype, and its systematie position discussed. Its numerous
similarities to Chionognathus reini, a Japanese species, are emphasized.
Among the species at present placed within Hurynome, 2. granulosa
stands closest to the South Afriean FH. elegans,

INTRODUCTION

The genus Hurynome Leach, at present containing a total of nine
species of small majid spider crabs of the subfamily Pisinae, has
recently been reviewed and its limits discussed (Griffin, 1964), The
genus is distributed throughout the Indo-West Pacific, Mediterranean
and Kast Atlantic, at depths of around 100 fathoms. Characteristically,
the carapace in these crabs is pyriform and bears peculiar, flat-topped
tubereles, or large spinulated plates, the former arranged in distinct
groups and the chelipeds resemble those of a parthenopid erah.
However, other equally important characters, such as the number of
free segements of the abdomen, details of the orbit and form of the
basal antennal article, seem to have been overlooked in a few cases,

Australia is known to possess a single species of the genus,
BE, granulosa, deseribed by Baker in 1906 from a single female dredged
in 104 fathoms off the South Australian coast. It has since been
figured and briefly described by Hale (1927) but the species is
poorly known,

Baker’s (1906) original description of #, granulosa was detailed
but the fignres were hardly adequate enough to allow comparison of
this species with others at present placed in the genus. The exact
form of the third maxillipeds, basal antennal article, supraorbital and

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

infraorbital margins and ornamentation of the carapace were not made
clear, but have an important bearing on the systematic position of
(. retmi, In the present paper H. granulosa is redescribed from the
holotype and its relationships to the South African KH. elegans
Stebbing, 1921 and to the Japanese Chionognathus reint (Balss, 1924)
are also considered. The terminology used here follows that of
Rathbun (1925) and the system of measurements are those used by
Garth (1958).

This study has been made possible by the forwarding to me,
through Dr. John Yaldwyn of the Australian Museum, Sydney, of the
holotype, and three other specimens of Lyrynome granulosa, by
Mr. F, J. Mitehell of the South Australian Museum, Adelaide. [ wish
to sincerely thank Mr. Mitchell for allowing ine to examine these
specimens, Dr. Yaldwyn for helpful disenssion and Dr, EK. R. Guiler
of this Department for reading the manuscript.

SYSTEMATICS
Family MAJIDAK
Subfamily Pisinae Aleock, 1896
Genus Murynome Leach, 1815
Eurynome granulosa Baker, 1906
Fig. 1-5

Kuvynome granulosa Baker, 1906; 108, pl. i, figs. 8, 3a. TIale, 1927:
139, fie. 140.

Holotype: Female (S. Aust. Mus. reg. C1156), carapace length
&mm, This specimen is dried and in excellent condition with all the
appendages preseut except the second left ambulatory leg and the
earpus and following joints of the left third ambulatory leg.

Type locality: South Australian coast, dredged in 104 fathoms;
Dr. Vercoe, collector,

Localities subsequently reported: None.

Material examined: In addition to the holotype, the dried cara-
paces of three other small specimens (S. Aust. Mus. reg. €.1160),
6-8 mm in length, South Australia, L00 fm, no date, no collector.

Pig. 1-5. Kurynome granulosa Baker. Holotype female, curapace leugth & mm,
1, carapace, dorsal view; 2, left third maxilliped; 3, outer view of right ehela;
4, dorsal view of left orbit; 5, ventral view of left orbit.

32 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

Diagnosis: Carapace subpyrttorm to subovate, hepatie margins
laterally extended; dorsal surface bearing simple tubercles ar rranged
in groups medially only; branchial margins with several conical
tubercles, Rostral spines widely separated, less than { carapace
longth. Ambulatory lees smooth. Basal anteunal article bilobate
anteriorly, Interealated supraorbital spine a broad, distally rounded
lobe.

Description: The following description is based on the holotype,
an adult female,

Carapace subpyriform to suboyate, convex, covered by short, stiff
hairs, hepatic margins greatly expanded laterally, posterolateral
margins smoothly rounded; dorsal surface covered by low tubercles
arranged in the midline in distinet groups, regions well demareated hy
prominent smooth grooves. Rostrum of two, short, slender, s subconical
spines, separated from close to base by a broad, U-shaped hiatus,
moderately divergent, distance between {ips barely exeeeding basal
width, somewhat evreater than margins of rostrum; lateral surface
close to tips armed with three short, sharp spinules,

Hepatic margins laterally extended as very prominent, rounded,
irregularly emarginate, flattened lobes hearing a few small tubercles
dorsally, Branchial margins bearing anteriorly three or four sub-
conleal tubercles situated subequidistantly, first and second tubereles
pointed, last tubercle blunt, at widest part of earapace, a small tubercle
situated midway between second and third tubercles, a group of three
or four subdorsal tubereles curying around from last marginal tubercle
{o posteromedial corner of branchial region,

Dorsal surface of carapace covered by large and small, oval to
circular tubercles arranged in groups on the meso-, meta-, and
urogastrie regions and on the cardiac and intestinal regions. Proto-
gastric regions almost smooth, bearing a few seattered tubercles,
branchial regions bearing numerous irregularly arranged, crowded
tubercles, Mesogastric region covered lor its entire length hy close
set, small tubercles, increasing slightly in size posteriorly; metagastrie
region with six tubercles, five arranged in a transverse oval around a
central one, posterior tubercles larger; urogustric region with three
tubercles, slightly smaller than metagastries, arranged in a semicircle,
two pnterior, submedial, one posterior, medial; cardiac region weakly
fumicd, bearing a group of 10 tubereles, a single medial one surrounded
by nine arranged in aun elongate oval; intestinal region almost smooth,

GRIPFFIN—AUSTRALIAN SPIDER CRAB 33

hearing close to posterior margin a group of three close-set tubercles,
one anterior, medial, (wo posterior, submedial, the group flanked by
two larger, blunt, subeonieal tubercles. Protogastric regions with ¢
triangular group of three small tubercles laterally, vlose to base of
postorbital lobe and a pair of large, submedial tubercles slightly behind
and close to, posterior margin of mesogastric region,

Orbit consisting above of supraorbital eave, intercalated spme and
postorbital lobe, closely approximated, separated by narrow fissures;
supraorbital eave moderately wide, sharply angled antero-laterally,
nowhere extended as lobes or spines, smooth; intercalated spme a
prominent, broad lobe, rounded distally; postorbital lobe hroad, weakly
depressed, (ip rounded, posterolateral margin irregularly crenniate,
anterior face weakly excavated. Hyestalk stout, smooth, bulbous
basally, only partly visible im either dorsal or ventral yiew when
retracted; cornea terminal, éirenlar, Orbit completed below by basal
antennal article and a broad, distally rounded infraorbital lohe or
plate separated from ventral edge of postorhital lohe only hy a very
narrow fissure.

Basal antennal article subrectangular, anterior edge deeply incised
ty become bilobate, medial lobe truncate, lateral lobe rounded, lateral
and medial edges weakly concave; flagellum short, hardly extending
heyond tip of rostrum, visible in both dorsal] and ventral view.

Antennular fossae subovate, anterior margin a prominent mdge;
interantennilar spine poorly developed, blunt, weakly grooved
medially; anterior process of epistome slender, sharply pointed,
Mpistome slightly wider than long, medial rim of opening of green
cland elevated. Mowthfield subquadrate, anterior margin weakly
conenve, anterolateral angle elevated and weakly extended laterally,
Pterygostomian regions subtriangular, densely tuberculate, separated
by a very deep groove from inflated, densely tuberenlate snbhepatie
regions.

Third maxillipeds widely gaping at midline. Ischium subrec-
tangular, medial balt of distal edge moderately extended anteriorly,
rounded, lateral hall! weakly concave to bear mers, medial edge
lacking teeth, overlain by a fringe of short hairs; outer surface deeply
excavated medially as a narrow, longitudinal groove, Merus sub-
quadrate, as wide ag ischium but slightly shorter, anterolateral corner
sharply angled and strongly expanded laterally as a triangular lobe,
medial edge rounded, distal edge with a shallow, U-shaped notch,

34 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

outer surface with a deep longitudinal groove medially. Palp arising
from noteh of, and slightly longer than, merns, subeylindrical, stout,
bearing a dense Iringe of hairs later: ally.

Chelipeds stout, hardly longer than carapace, subcylindrical except
for weakly subtrigonal merus and compressed propodus, smooth,
densely covered by a mat of fine, short hairs. Basis and isehium short,
ischinm extending along ventral surface ef merns for but a short
distance; merns and chela subequal, each about 4 total lenyth of
cheliped, carpus about | merus, daetyl as long as palm. Merns stout,
following segments slender; carpus weakly ridged dorsally, otherwise
smouth; palm of almost even height thronghout, fixed finger bent at
low angle from palm; fingers gaping Hnearly thronughont their length,
amooth along inner edges except distally, fixed finger with four small
bul nevertheless prominent conical teeth close to tip preceeded by
several irregular crenulations, daetyl with several irregular, low teeth,
likewise close to tip.

Ambulatory legs short, first leg not greatly execeding varapace
in length, following legs decreasing regularly to last whieh is #
carapace, approximately; surfaces smooth, densely covered by short,
fine hairs. Meri long, about } total length of leg, carpi and propodi
subequal, about J meri, daetyli about + propodi, terminating in a

= 2

sharp, weakly faleiform ‘dlaw.

Abdomen seven-segmerted, wide, covering all of sternum, exteud-
ing laterally to base of ambulatory lege, anteriorly to posterior horder
of moutlfield ; subovate, smooth except for a prominent medial ridge
whieh appears on the first segment in dorsal view as a transversely
oval tubercle,

Measurements; Female holotype: length 8 mm, width 5 mm,
rostral length 1 mm, rostral width 1.8 mm, chelar length 2.5 mm,

Remarks: The three additional specimens differ from the holo
type ouly in some minor features. In all, the posterolateral margin
of the carapace is armed with about eight very small tubercles, there
is a small tubercle on the posterolateral eorner of the supraocrbital
eave and the hepatic margin is quadrilobate. In one specimen the first
three lobes of the hepatic margin are produced into strong tubercles,
the he a i lobe is bilobate distally and the three spinules on the
lateral surface of the rostrum near the {ip are very blunt, Exeept for
the arrangement of some of the tubercles on the gastric regions, the
three specimens otherwise exactly resemble the holotype.

GRIFFIN—AUSTRALIAN SPIDER CRAB 35

GHNERAL DISCUSSION

In the original description of Hurynome granulosa, Baker (1906)
atates that the tubercles of the dorsal surface of the carapace are not
erowded and only the larger tubercles are mentioned; his figure 6 gives
an entirely erroneous impression, showing the tubercles to be evenly
distributed over the carapace, Examination of the holotype at onee
shows that in the midline at least, the tubercles are arranged in
distinet gronps, « feature characteristic of other species of the genms.
The basal antennal article is correctly deseribed as bilobate but
Baker’s figure 3a shows this structure divided for at least the anterior
half by a distinct groove, whereas it is merely incised anteriorly and
completely lacks a groove, Further, Baker’s figure 3a does not make
elear the precise form of the third maxillipeds, although his deserip-
tion is better, Other minov errovs in Baker's deseription are that his
figure 3 shows the antennae as extending well beyond the rostral
spines, whereas it reaches only to the tip, and the fissures between the
eave, intercalated spine and postorbital lobe appear larger than they
are actually.

Among the species at present plaved in Hurynume, Le. granulosa
appears to he most closely related to the South African /, eleguns
Stebbing, Mlsewhere (Griffin, 1964) these two species have been
considered to form a separate gxronp—the ‘elegans seetion’—
characterized by having the tubercles more or less evenly distributed
over the carapace, In view of the deseription presented here, the
section would better be characterized by the possession of simple,
conical tubercles as opposed to the single or fused fat-topped tubereles
of other species. The two species further agree in having the merus
of the third maxillipeds laterally extended but several other species
of the genus also exhibit this character, 2. elegans differs from
FE, granulosa in that there is no intercalated supraorbital spine
(according to Stebbing’s plate NILL), and the posterior part of the
carapace is densely covered by tubercles, while in EF. granulosa these
parts are almost smooth. No comparison is possible as vegards the
chelipeds since these are not deseribed lor E, elegans. The basal
antennal article of FE. elegans is apparently quite different from that
of EF, granulosa in being suhovate, the hepatic margin is extended
laterally only as a small, narrow lobe and the meri of the ambulatory
legs are carinate dorsally.

Comparison of the specimens before me of EF. graulosa and the
descriptions and fignres of the Japanese species, Chionognathus reimt

36 RECORDS OP THE S.A. MUSEUM

(Balss) given by Yokoya (1933: 158, text-fie. 57, as Hurynome reini)
and Sakaj (1938; 273, text-figs. Sda, b, plate xxvii, fy. 2) shows some
remarkable similarities between the two. Both species agree in the
small size, subpyriform to subovate carapace covered by groups of
tubercles along the midline, prominently laterally extended hepatic
margins, presence of short tubercles along the anterior part of the
branchial margins, slender widely divergent rostral spines, form of
the eave (Yokoya’s fig, 57 does not show an intercalated spine, but
Sakai deseribes the eave as possessing this structure) and infra-
orbital margin, form of the basal antennal article and interantennular
spine and of the isehium and mernus of the third masillipeds. Ln
addition, the abdomen is seven-segmented and the chelipeds and
ambulatory legs are short. C. reimi differs from HM. granulosa in that
the anterior part, of (he branchial margins widen distinctly posteriorly
and are not subparallel, the rostral spines bear only a single small
tubercle on the lateral surface near the tips, the carpus of the chelipeds
bears a single small tubercle Jaterally, the fingers are short and finally
the ischium and merus of the third maxillipeds are Insed. It is upon
this last character that Rathbun (1982) based the genus Chionognathus.
Therefore it is Important to note that in HE. granulosa, while these two
segments of the maxillipeds are distinet, the junction seems a very
narrow, shallow, groove and it is possible that the merns is not freely
moveable. In view of these similarities if seems probable that F.
granulosa is closely related to (. reiwi, possibly more so than to
E., elegans, or any other species at present placed in Lurynxome.

E, granulosa differs from the type species of the genus FE. aspera
(see Hartnoll, 1960) in that the tubereles of the carapace are simple
and conical, not fat-topped, the basal antennal artiele is not truncate
anteriorly, the interealated supraorbital spine is large, not minute,
and in several other minor characters, With the important reservation
that comparison of the pleopods is not possible, I do not think that any
of these differenees warrant the exelusion of FE. granulosa from the
venus Marynome.

LITERATURE CITHD

Baker, W. H., 1906: Notes on South Australian Crustaeea, Pt. 4.
Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 80; 104-117, pls. I-TIT.

Barnard, K. H., 1950: Deseriptive Catalogue ol the South African
Decapod Crustacea. (Crabs and Shrimps), Ann, 8. Afr.
Mus, 3&2 887 pps 154 figs.

GRIFFIN—AUSTRALIAN SPIDER CRAB 37

(arth, J. S., 1958: Brachyura of the Paeifie Coast of America;
Oxyrhyneha, Allan Haneock Pacif. Exped, 21: xii +
854 pp., 106 tables, 9 text-figs., 85 pls.

Griffin, D. J. G., 1964: A Review of the genus Eurynome Leach
(Decapoda, Majidae) and a new species from New
Zealand. Crustaceana 6(3) + 195-206, figs. 1-11.

Hale, H. M,, 1927: The Crustaceans of South Australia. Pt. 1.
Adelaide: Govt. Printer. 201 pp., 202 figs,

Hartnoll, R. G., 1960: A eritical re-examination of the spider crab
Eurynome Leach from British waters. Crustaceana 2(3):
171-182, figs. 1-7.

Rathbun, M. J., 1925: The Spider Crabs of America. Bull. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 129: xx + 613 pp., 158 text-figs., 283 pls.

1932: Preliminary deseriptions of new species of Japanese
crabs. Proce. biol. Soc, Washington 45: 29-38.

Sakai, T'., 1938: Stndies on the Crabs of Japan. LT. Brachygnatha,
Oxyrhyncha, Tokyo: Yokendo Co, Pp. 198-864, 55 figs.,
41 pls.
1961; New Species of Japanese Crabs from the Collections
of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan, Crustaceana
3(2): 131-150, text-figs. 1-4, pls. HIT, TV.

Stebbing, T. R. R., 1921: South African Crustacea, (Part XI of South
Afriean Crustacea for Marine Investigations of South
Afriea.) Ann. 8. Afr. Mus. 18 (4) : 453-468, pls. XITI-XX.

Yokova, Y., 1933: On the Distribution of Decapod Crustaceans
inhabiting the Continental Shelf around Japan, chiefly
based upon the Materials collected by S. S. Séy6-Marn,
during the Year 19238-1980. J. Coll. Agric. Tokyo Imper,
Univ. 12(1): 1-226, text-figs. 1-71.

RESUME
On rédéerit et figure de quatre examplaires, comprenant |’holotype,
le erabe majid, Eurynome granulosa, ne connu que l’Austrahe du Sud,
et on traite de sa position systematiqnue. On donne emphase des
similarités nombveuses avec Chionognathus reina, un espeéce du Japon.
Entre les espéces comprises aux confins d’Hurynome, FE. granulosa se
rapproche le plus de VE. elegans de l’Afrique du Sud.

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA
DRYMINI (HETEROPTERA-LYGAEDIDAE)

BY GORDON F.. GROSS

Summary

Two species of Australia and one of New Guinea Drymini were previously known. As a
result of this study, using all available Australian collections, two species are shown to
occur in New Guinea, one a common Australian species, and seventeen species, fifteen of
them new, are recorded from Australia. All eighteen species are keyed, figured and
described, and have been placed in twelve genera, twelve of which are new. Where
available male genital capsule dorsal morphology was used along with external details to
provide a clue to the arrangement and relationships of these twelve genera.

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA
DRYMINI (HETEROPTERA-LYGAEIDAE)

By GORDON F. GROSS, Sexion Curator of ]NVERTEBRATES,
Soutm Austranian Museum

Plates 8-7, text fig. 1

SUMMARY

Two species of Australia and one of New Guinea Drymini were
previously known, As a result of this study, using all available
Australian collections, two species are shown to occur in New Guinea,
one a common Australian species, and seventeen species, fifteen of
them new, are recorded from Australia. All eighteen species are
keyed, figured, and deseribed, and have been placed in twelve genera,
eight of which are new. Where available male genital capsule dorsal
morphology was used along with external details to provide a elue to
the arrangement and relationships of these twelve genera.

INTRODUCTION

The Drymini are a tribe of the complex subfamily Rhyparo-
chrominae of the family Lygaeidae. Rhyparochrominae may be easily
distinguished from other subfamilies of Lygaeidae by having the
fourth abdominal intersegmental suture (usually the second visible,
T and IL are usually hidden by the metathorax) not reaching the outer
(or upper) edge of the abdomen ventrally, but instead it curves away
forward and becomes evanescent before reaching the apical end of the
second suture (text fig. A). The Drymini have the spiracle on segment
IV of the abdomen ventral in position and have two dull spots each
bearing a long hair (trichobothrium) on sternum V above the curved
portion of the fourth abdominal suture, the hindmost of these is placed
in front of spiracle V (text fig. A),

Three species were known from Australia and New Guinea;
Mizaldus woodwardi from New Guinea, and Paradrynus exilirostris
and Taphropeltus australis from Southern Australia.

a) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Through the good offices of the Directors of the Australian
Museum, Sydney, the National Museum, Melbourne, the Chief
U.S.1.R.0., Division of Entomology, Canberra, Dr. 'T. W. Woodward,
Department of Mntomology, University of Queensland, Brisbane, and
Mr, Cremer, Tasmanian Forestry Commission, Maydena, Tasmania,
T was able to assemble almost, if not all, available specimens of
Australian and New Guinea Drymini in Australian collections. Sinee
this paper was submitted and during proof reading T have received
notification of an impending Joan of a collection of New Giunea
Drymini from the Bishop Museum, Honolulu. This material will be
treated in a subsequent paper.

Taphropellus australis can no longer be placed in the Northern
Tlemisphere genus T'aphropeltus and for this species a new genus had
to be created. L was able to recognize 18 species of this tribe from
Australia and New Guinea, two from New Guinea and seventeen from
Australia (one species is shared). Fifteen of these species are new,
The species have been arranged in twelve genera, seven of these are
new, and apparently restricted to Australin (6) or Australia and
New Guinea (1), Of the five previously deseribed genera Paradrymus
is exclusively Australian, Breatiscerus occurs outside Australia only
in New Zealand, Appolonings oceurg also in India, Sarawak and the
New Llebrides (Seudder im lt.) and Afriea, Mizaldus in Afriea and
India, and Seolopostethus is rather widely distributed.

In arranging the genera satisfactorily a number of difficulties
were encountered using such features as presence or absence of lateral
explanate keels to the pronotum, whether the pronotum was trans-
versely constricted, and whether the scutelluam had a prominent
triradiate keel or not. To help resolve these problems male genitalia
where available were extraeted and studied after potashing the tip
of the abdomen, A discussion on these points follows the systematic
deseriptions.

In the lists of disposition of specimens the following abbreviations
have been used,

A.M... .. .. Australian Museum, Sydney.

A.N.LG. ., .. Australian Insect Collection, Canberra,
N.M. .. .. .. National Museum, Melbourne.

QM... .. -. Queensland Museum, Brisbane,

S.A.M.... ,. South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

U.Q.. 0... .. Department. of Entomology, University of

Queensland, Brishane,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 41

I wish to express my appreciation to the Directors of these
museums, the chief of the C.S.LR.O. Division of Entomology, Dr.
T. E. Woodward, University of Queensland, and Mr. Cremer,
Maydena, Tasmania for the opportunity to see their material,

KEY TO AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA GENERA
OF DRYMINI

1. 5 mm long or longer... .. .. .. -. se 2
Under 4.5 mm long .. .. .. .. -. ee 8h

2. First antennal segment just surpassing
apex of head; head apically very
acuminate; pronotum markedly sin-
uate in region of transverse con-
striction. Apex of fore tibiae of
male with a strong spine .. .. .. Paradrymus Bergroth
First antennal segment markedly sur-
passing apex of head which is not
markedly acuminate; pronotum only
vaguely sinuate laterally in the
region of the transverse constriction Megadrymus gen. nov.

3. Lateral margins of pronotum carinate
or marginate but not explanate, we.,
not forming a narrow flange along
the lateral margins ............ Mizaldus Distant
Lateral margins of pronotum haere
and explanate along most of their
1 ta eS SO, 8 eu Be

4, Lateral margins of pronotum straight
and/or convex but not or only very
slightly coneave in region of trans-
verse impression .. .. 6... 6... 8

Lateral margins of pronotum bbedneclye
concaye in region of transverse
constriction .. 2... 4... .. 2 2. 10.

5. Transverse constriction of pronotum
virtually absent .. 2... Brachydrymus gen. nov,
Transverse constriction present .. .. 6.

42 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

6. Transverse constriction placed well

behind middle .. .. .. .. -. 2... 7,
Transverse constriction placed sshioitt
middle 8.

7. Sides of pronotum in basal # virtually
parallel .. 2... 0. 2. 22. 2. 2.) ©=Retrodrymus gen. nov.

Sides of pronotum convex from
humeral angles to region of collar Austrodrymus gen, nov.

8. Sides of pronotum convex or if
straight strongly converging ante-
riad, pronotum much wider at base
than apex (2:1) . de ats"o3 u: 9
Sides of pronotum Asteatiicttt almost
parallel from base to apex, pro-
notum very little wider at base than
apex (9:7) .. 2. 0... 2. 2... .. Apollonius Distant

9. Hemelytra conspicuously wide — in
region of apical 3 of corium . .... Gastrodomorpha gen. nov.

Hemelytra with corial margin more

parallel, conspicuously convex at

about 4 of exterior corial margin .. /sopeltus gen. nov.
10. Transverse constriction placed well
behind middle .. .. 2. 2... .. 2. Pseudodrymus gen. nov.
Transverse constriction pladed about
THEE cin dete ne le eee pie be
11. Seutellum with a prominent triradiate
keel o.oo. ee ee ee ae we we a.) ©Brenticerus Seudder
Seutellum without a pr yh Went: tilted:
jate keel -2 2. 2. 2. 22 we. 2. 2.) =Seolopostethus Fieber

Mizaldus Distant 1901
Mizaldus Distant, 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7)8: 483. 1903, Fauna
Brit. Ind. Rhyneh., 2: 68. Bergroth, 1918, Philipp. J. Sei,
13(2 & 3): 87.

Head triangular, pointed in front of eyes. Eyes not quite touching
anterior margin of pronotum. Ocelli close to eyes and remote from
anterior margin of pronotum, widely separated. First segment of
antennae somewhat inerassate and extending well in front of head,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 43

second segment the longest. Pronotum with anterior margin narrower
than head with eyes, fore lobe semiglobose, a strong medial transverse
constriction separating fore and hind lobe, the latter flatter than
fore lobe; outer margins of fore lobe strongly convex to region of
transverse constriction, margins of hind lobe likewise very convex,
hind margin feebly sinuate, humeral angles slightly raised. Only a
feeble keel along lateral margins of pronotum.

Seutellum acute apieally, medially elevated into a triangular
tumescence, not into a triradiate keel as many other Australian
Drymines, in front of tumescence depressed.

Corium somewhat longer than abdomen, outer margin of cori
shallowly coneave and pilose in basal half.

Fore femora moderately inerassate, mmarmed, or with wpwards
of nine spines on the distal half of the ventral surface, the first
spine Jarge.

Type: Rhyparochromus dimidiatus Walker, 1872 — Mizaldus
woodwardi Slater & Carayon 1963, seleeted by Distant 1908, foe. eft: GS.

Mizaldus woodwardi Slater & Carayon, 1952
Plate 4, fig. A

Rhyparovhromus dimidiatus Walker, (872, Cat, Teter, 5: 107
(preoce.),

Mizaldus dimidiatus Distant, 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7)8: 484

Mizaldus woodward? Slater aud Carayon, 1968, Proce. R. ent. Soe.
Lond, (A)8&: 4.

Head, anterior lobe of pronotum, depressed parts of seutellum,
and thorax beneath piceous black. Amteclypeus, hind lohe of pronotum,
mnedian raised portion of scutellum, most of distal portion of corium
and patches on membrane, first segment of antennae, hind margin of
metathorax, femora, and whole abdomen brown, the latter with fine
golden pilosity. Terminal three segments of antennae, tibiae and tarsi,
basal third of cortum and a marginal spot near apex, and patches on
membrane luteons, veins white,

Eyes large and prominent but not pedunculate, head with a few
scattered punetations, quite difficult to see, otherwise smooth with a
scattered pilosity. Antennae pilose, hairs about as long as diameter
of second segment, ratio of segments 02:96: 37: 37.

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

suyment &
epiracle Yo apiracia pV spiracle [

concealed under
trichabothrio yo metoptourar.

A

S\ao “eG hind adge of
She qd mevapleuran

20

spitacle Ti

spitocle VW

spirocte OY

c}
FS,
£

curved IRlersegmantal
suture [Y

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI

Fig. 1

A. Side view of abdomen of Drymine (Retrodrymus abundans n.sp.) show-
ing arrangement of trichobothria on Segment IV and the typical
Rhyparochromine curved fourth intesegmental suture.

B. Male genital capsule from above of Megadrymus terracreginae n.sp.

C. Male genital capsule from above of Isopellus australis (Bergroth).

D. Male genital capsule from above of Paradrymus ewilirostris Bergroth.

E. Male genital capsule from above of Brentisecrus pallidus n.sp.

F. Male genital capsule from above of Brentiscerus major n.sp.

G. Male genital capsule from above of Brentiscerus triocellatus n.sp.
H. Male genital capsule from above of Retrodrymus abundans n.sp.
I, Male genital capsule from above of Appolonius territorialis n.sp.
J. Male genital capsule from above of Scolopostethus forticornis n.sp.
K. Male genital capsule from above of Pseudodrymus florestalis n.sp.
L. Male genital capsule from above of Austrodrymus flindersi n.sp.

M. Male genital capsule from above of Brachydrymus lateabwndans usp.

45

46 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pronotum wider than long (100-62), fore lobe almost elahrous,
smooth exeept for a few scattered small punetations; hind lohe pilose
near lateral margins with denser and large punetations.

Scutelluin sparsely punctate, almost elabrous. Hemelytra almost
glabrous but sparse hairs on ¢lavus and basal hall of corial inargin,
Clavus with three parallel rows of punetations. Corium with two
rows parallel to and immediately adjacent to claval suture and a halt
row paralleling outer basal margin of corinm, basal third of remaining
corinm almost free of punetations, apical 7 With scattered heavy
punctations,

Beneath with sparse seattered punctations on thoracic pleura,
abdomen inpunetate. Fore femora thickest, with on distal hall beneath
about ) spines in irregular row on inner edge, fourth very large, and
several spines on outer edge.

Length: 4.25 mm.

Type: New Guinea, in British Museum (Nat. Hist.). Our
specimen, a female from Mount Lamington, N.E. Papua, 1,800-1,500
feet, C. T. McNamara (S.A.M,).

Mizaldus lacks the prominent explanate margin of other Aus-
tralian Drymines and cannot be easily linked with any other genus,

Megadrymus gen. nov.

Large for the tribe, subelongate, hemelytra tapering somewhat
posteriad. Head relative small, relatively elongate, width: length
about 20:15, but not, exceptionally produced in front of eyes, tylus
normally formed, Kyes nearly touching anterior margin of pronotum,
ocelli remote from each other and in a line formed by hind margins
of eyes. First segment of antennae slender, surpassing apex of head
by about 3 of its length. Remaining segments longer, second the
longest.

Anterior margin of pronotum obviously concave, lateral margins
strongly convex in anterior third thence almost straight and diverging
to humeral angles, perhaps very slightly indented in region of trans-
verse constriction. lore lobe of pronotum moderately convex,
declivous towards collum giving pronotum an arehed appearance in
side view, transverse constriction between fore and hind lobes placed
slightly behind middle, hind lobe hardly convex.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 47

Seutellum large with a prominent triradiate keel, the basal arms
of this keel enlarged and swollen, apical arm reaching apex of
seulellum. Lateral margins of corium feebly excavate at region of
apical half of seutellum, Two rows of punetations on corimm
paralleling claval suture separated from each other by a raised
callous area, a line of punctures more or less paralleling outer edge
in basal outer hall of eorium, breaking up into seattered prnetations
in distal half. The veins apparent on corium, the callous area near
claval suture, the space between the outer line of punctations border-
ing this vein and the median vein impunetate, space between median
and outer vein with seattered punctations. Clavus with three rows
of punctations, the median converging steadily towards the outer
posteriad and coalescing with it before apex.

Whole thorax beneath strongly punctate except evaporative areas
and two shagreened areas on lateral margins of meso- and metapleura.
Underside of head parallel to vertex to level of anterior margins of
eyes, thence suddenly convex to apical margin of prothorax. Abdomen
finely pilose and impiuetate, More femora incrassate and heavily
armed with denticles on both ventral margins in apical half, one a
large spine.

Male genital capsule with upper opening partially divided into two
hy inwardly directed processes of the lateral margins, claspers shaped
rather like scorpion venom glands, proctiger covering whole of anterior
eavity.

Type: Megadrymus ferraereginae sp. uov., the only species in
the genus,

Megadrymus terraereginae sp, nov.
Plate 3, fig. D. Text fig, 1B

Fuscous black; antennae, lateral explanate margin of pronotum,
and in one specimen hind lobe of pronotim, scutelhim, and hemelytra
testaceons above, Beneath in all examples (except rostrum and legs
whieh are testaceous and in one example the hind margins of the pro
and metapleura) fuscous, Apieal 4 of last antennal segment and some
api¢al spots on the corium pale testaceous or Iuteous, membrane a
very pale smoky, veins and immediate areas on either side whitish.

Ratio of segments of antennae 12; 20:19:18. lead very much
shorter than pronotum, 10:82, Kore femora with apical halves
Hattened, beneath with smaller spines and a large spime on the
anterior margin,

48 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSFUM

Length: 5.8-6.0 mm.

Localities: Queensland holotype (female) [Reg. no, T6212],
Brisbane, 15 November 1962, coll. . B. Tel (().M.); allotype (male),
Kagle Heights Mount Tambourine, from leaf mould in rain forest,
18 July L954, coll. T. KE. Woodward; paratype (female), Toowoomba,
2 February 1951, coll, J. Letchford (U.Q.).

Paradrymus Bergroth 1916

Paradrymus Bergroth, 1916, Proe. roy, Soc. Viet. 29+ 11.

Body oyate, head elongate, anteclypeus ({yvlus) strongly produced.
Miyes prominent, remote from auterior margin of pronotum, ocelli in
a line formed by rear margins of eyes, widely separated, Amter-
nophores prominent, first segment of anteniae not incrassated, about
as thick as the terminal segments, second segment the longest.

Anterior margin of pronotum almost straight, perhaps a little
convave, with a prominent collar, Lateral margins of pronotum
inarginate and explanate, humeral angles somewhat produced, other-
wise hind margin straight or feebly concave. Fore lobe of pronotum
convex, separated from hind lobe by a transverse constriction; hind
lohe flatter, foveate anteriorly in the middle and feebly laterally just
inside the raised humeral angles. Lateral margins of fore lohe convex
to transverse impression, of hind almost straight.

Sentellum acuminate with a prominent central triradiate carina,
the tip of the central arm almost reaching apex. Lateral margins of
seutellum feebly sinuate when elayvus lifted, lateral margins of eorinm
sinuate, noticeably concave in region of about hall length of seutellum.
Clavus with three not very parallel rows of punctures, corium with
three rows adjacent to elaval suture and otherwise fairly densely
punetate, with two or three prominent longitudinal raised veins.
Whole thorax beneath strongly punctate with the exeeption of the
evaporative area, Fore femora incrassated and armed with a series
of small tnbereles and one large one distally. Abdomen inmpuuectate
and covered with dense fine pilosity.

First segment of tarsi longer than the other two together, first
segmeuf of hind tarsi very long. Apex of fore tibia of male with a
strong prouiinent outwardly directed spine. Male genital capsule with
dorsally directed opening divided into two by the outer margin giving
off two acute and inwardly directed lobes (whieh however hardly rate
as parandria). Most of Iront aperture covered by proetiger which is

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 49

prominently grooved longitudinally in the middle and cylindrically
convex on either side of this. Hind aperture with two needle shaped
claspers (parameres).

Type: Paradrymus ewilirostris Bergroth 1916, monobasic.
Only one species in the genus, the type.

Paradrymus exilirostris Bergroth 1916
Plate 3, figs. A, B, C. Text fig. 1D
Paradrymus eailirostris Bergroth, 1916, Proe. roy. Soe. Vict., 29: 12.

Black, finely and subgranulately punctate, posterior lobe of
pronotum and corium usually testaceous, punctate with fuscous, some
lateral and discal spots on corium paler. Laminate margin of
pronotum pale testaceous, also apical 3 to 4 of last segment of
antennae. Membrane luteous, variegate with fuscous.

Beneath with femora black, tibiae and tarsi castaneous. Fore
femora moderately incrassate, armed distally with six small and one
large spine on ventral anterior margin, underside of fore femora
flattened in apical half.

Length: 4.5-5.6 mm.

Loealities: Bergroth records the species from Queensland and
Victoria. I have seen specimens from South Australia: Croydon
(S.A.M.); New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko, 24 Novy. 1921, coll.
R. J. Tillyard (A.N.1.C.); Hacking River National Park, August 1952,
by sweeping bushes in forest, coll. J. Armstrong (U.Q.); Mt.
Kosciusko, 5,000 feet, March 1889, coll. Helms; Mt. Kosciusko, Jan.
1937, coll. H. J. Garter; Island Bend, Mt. Kosciusko, 4,100 feet, 27
November 1952, coll. J. Armstrong (A.M.); Victoria: Halls Gap, 20
October 1945, coll. A. Burns (N.M.). Queensland: Brisbane, 6 Feb.
1946, coll. Brimblecombe; Lamington National Park, 29 Oct. 1957,
from leaf mould, coll. I. C. Yeo; Bulburin State Forest, 27-29 May
1960, coll. EK. A. Bernays (U.Q.); Emerald District, Aug. 1904, coll.
KH. J. (N.M.).

Isopeltus gen. nov.

Moderate in size within the tribe Drymini. Head large in relation
to the size of the pronotum, strongly rugulose, anteclypeus (tylus)
prominent but not unduly produced. MKyes prominent, ocelli remote
from each other and in a line with the hind margins of the eyes.

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Antennae long, longer than the head and pronotum together, first
segment considerably surpassing apex ol’ head, second and third
segments almost equal in the type species, second segment. considerably
the longest in the other two, antennae robust in two of the three
species. Rostrum normal, the second segment the longest.

Pronotum with distinct collar, anterior and posterior margins
almost straight, lateral <eptanleeve margin of pronotum straight and
converging ante rian in basal 3 to 2 thende convex to become obsolete
at base of collar, these lateral explanate margins relatively wide.
Pronotum with a strong transverse impression in the middle, fore
lohe strongly convex, lind lobe much less so, collar and hind lohe
strongly punctate, fore lobe finely punetate.

Seutellum pinetate, moderate in size with a prominent triradiate
keel, the apical arm of which reaches the apex of the sentellam.
Lateral margins of corium moderately sinuate, two rows of puneta-
fions paralleling claval suture and a basal outer half row more or
less parallel to outer margin, remainder of corimn with seattered
punctations. Clavius with three rows of rather fine punctations, the
median one converging towards the outer row posteriad and coalescing
with it before apex,

Underside of head rugulose like upper side, thorax beneath pune-
tate, prothorax heavily punctate, meso- and metathorax more finely so.
Abdomen covered with a fine pilosity. Fore femora inerassate and
armed on anterior margin of flattened apieal ventral surface only.
One spine large. Only the male genital capsule of the type species is
available for study. The upper opening is partially divided into two
by acute inward projections of the outer rim, two blant parameres
are present in the rear cavity while the proetiger does not cover the
whole of the anterior cavity.

Type: Taphropeltus australis RBergroth 1916,

The aftimties of this genus sre undoubtedly with Brentiscerus
Seudder from which it differs in lacking a coneave hind or lateral
margin to the pronotum and the external margin of the eorium is
only feebly concave basally, There are three species in the genus, two
of them new; they may be separated by the following key :—

1, Antennae robust... 2 22. 0. we. 8

Antennae slender ,, ). .. 22 2. 2... fsopellus tenuicornis
sp, nov.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI $1

2. Hemelytra mainly black, in apical half
with about 4 pale patches .. 2... .. Tsopeltus obscurus sp. Nov.
Hemelytra mainty pale with apex and
median transverse bar across corium
fuscous .. -- -) vv ve ee ee ee es ee 6 Tpopeltus australis
(Bergroth).

Isopeltus australis (Bergroth 1916) nov. comb,
Plate 4, fig, B. Text fig. 1C

Taphropeltus australis Bergroth, 1916, Proe, roy, Soc. Vict., (N.S.)

29(1): 18.

Head black and finely and very thickly punctate, as long or longer
than anterior pronotal lobe; antennae rather robust in comparison to
the other species in the genus, piceous or testaceous, apical segment
sometimes lighter, Rostrum testaceous, reaching middle of meso-
sternum, Pronotum distinetly impressed just behind middle, anterior
lobe black, finely and very thiekly punctate, longer than the stramineous
hind lobe, the latter finely punctate and with five fuscous vittae of
varying disposition, sometimes almost parallel. Sides of pronotum
laminate, vof sinuate in region of pronotal constriction, pale,

Seutellum black, finely punetate, with a median triradiate keel,
apex and lateral vittae between the median and lateral arms of the
keel paler, Corium and clavus stramineous, the former with a median
transverse bar and apex intuscated, also the three longitudinal veins.
Clavus with three rows of punetations, corium with two rows parallel
to the elaval suture and other fine seattered punetations. Membrane
pale and fuscons variegate, veins pale.

Underside mostly black, episterna, epimera, hind margin of meta-
pleuron and legs brown to stramineous.

Fore femora ineragsate and armed with one large central spine
beneath and a series of smaller spines both interior and exterior to this.

Length: 2.5-4.5 mm.

Originally described from Victoria but quite widely distributed.
South Australia: Whyalla, 10 August 1947, coll, D. 8. (N.M.); Under-
dale, 30 December 1960, coll. G. F. Gross; 2, Mt. Lotty Ranges, 1 in
tussocks, coll, N. B. Tindale; Seeond Creek, Mt. Lofty Ranges, 7
November 1884, coll. J. G. O, Tepper; 2, Adelaide, 1 in flood debris,
coll, A. M. Lea; Lucindale, coll, Feuerheerdt; Mern Merna, at hght,

$2 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

2 Neremney 1959, coll. P. Aitken (S.A.M.), Tasmania; Hobart, coll.
A. M. Lea (N.M,) 1 ditto; Hobart, 11 August 1915, coll, GC. Cole;
Cradle eens coll, Carter and Lea; 2 , Launceston; St, Marys; 3
Strahan, 1 in moss and lichens, coll, Tikes and Carter (S.A,M.); 2
Maydena, in presence of fruits of Mucalyplus regnans, 20 November
1962, coll. K. Cremer (Tas. Forestry Commission); Mt, Wellington,
Hobart, 26-29 January 1955, coll. T. i, Woodward (U.Q.). New
South Wales: Kecleston, in flood debris, coll. J. Topson; 2, Dorrigo,
coll. W. Herson (S.A.M.); Mt, wilson, Blue aes S$ June 1962,
coll, D. KX, MeAlpine (A.M.); 2, Minna Murra, Februar y 1962, coll
T. Kb. Woodward (U.Q.). Queensland: 3, Mt, ‘Tambourine, coll, A, M.
Lea; Blackall Ranges, coll, A. M, Lea; Roekhampton, attracted in ont
(S.A.M.)3 3, Brishane, at nant 16 November 1955, 7 December 1956,
25 January 1956, coll, 'T. Woodward; Mogill, Brishane, 30 June
1956, coll, T. KE. Ws idsiAl Sunnybank, Brisbane, in light shade,
January-Deecember 1956, coll. FP. S. Colliver; 2, Binna Burra, Lamington
National Park, §.B. Queensland, in leaf debris amongst grass and
Hucalypltus spp. 28 August 1953, coll, T. KE. Woodward; 3, Noosa
distriet, in sand dunes under herbs and fallen leaves and seeds of
Casuarina, 17 April 1960, coll, T. KE. Woodward: 2, Mt. Glorious, 1 on
evunjeroi lilu, 1 From leal mould, 28 September 19638, coll. G. Monteith;
1, Imbil State Forest from Helichrysum diasmifalinm Less., 3
November 1957, coll, T, E. Woodward (U.Q.). Western Australia:
Fremantle, 4 November 1934, eoll. IK. R. Norris (A.N.LC.); King
Georges Sound (A.M.). Norlolk Tsland: &, coll, A, M. Tea (S.A.M.).
7apua; Mt. Lamington, 1,300-1,500 feet, coll. CG. TT. MeNamara
(S.A.M,).

Remarks: Circumstances indicate that this little Lygaecid may be
an Unportant consumer of seed in the forest und is under investigation
by the Tasmanian Forestry Commission as a possible cause of poor
germination of broadeast Bucalyplus regnans seed.

Isopeltus obscurus sp. nov.
Plate 4, fig. D

Head black and finely and very thickly punetate, as long or longer
than anterior pronotal lobe; antennae robust but more elongate than
T, australis, second segment much the longest, densely pilose, this
pilosity quite short; first three segments and base of lourth brown,
apical three quarters of fourth Inteous, First segment of rostrum
brown, remainder vellowish, first segment subequal to second, (hind
shorter, fourth shortest of all, black at apex.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 53

Pvonotum distinctly impressed just belind middle, anterior labe
black, finely and sparsely punetate, with a feeble longitudinal
impression posteriorly. Hind lobe testaeeous brown but with 2 semi-
lunate lestaceons patches on either side of the middle, anteriorly
touching the transverse suture, posteriorly the open ends often not
reaching the hind margin; lateral expanded margins pale, almost
straight and converging in basal 3, thence convex fo region of hind
marein of eollar where they disappear. [lind margin almost straight,
perhaps a fraction convex, auterior marein straight, perhaps a
fraction concave, a cistinet collar present.

Seutellum black, coarsely and sparsely punctate, with a median
triradiate keel, median ann of the keel reaching the apex. Apex and
two small marginal semilunate spots whieh touch neither the end of
the median arm or the ends of the lateral arms of the triradiate keel
paler, fending liteous, Sometimes two pale spots on and near the
extremities of the lateral arms ol the triradiate keel.

Corium and clayns substantially fuseons, sometimes the clavus
almost wholly stramineous, only the median and outer rows of puneta
tions fuscous, Corium basally stramineous, apically dark exeept for
a Inteous spot near the inner apical angle and two or three longi-
tndinal bars exterior to this, the outer tonching the exterior margin.
Scattered punctations over the corium, Membrane smoky, ves white.

Underside mostly very black, brown in the Cairns specimen,
episterna, epimera, bind margins of pro- and metaplenra, and legs
(except trochanters) brown, Underside of thorax sparsely and
strongly punetate, underside of abdomen pilose.

Fore femora incrassate aad armed with one large central spine
beneath and # series of smaller ones exterior to it, and perhaps one
interior to this. Male not available for genitalia study,

Length; 3.5-4.5 mm.

Localities: Queensland: TTolotype female [Reg. no, T6215 |,
Mogvwill, from leaf litter, 1 September 1963, coll. (. Monteith ().M.);
2 paratype females, Noosa, on sea shore, 2 September 1959, coll.
I. (. Yeo: 1 paratype female, Upper Cedar Creck via Samford, 8
January 1963, coll, T. Brooks (U.Q.); 1 paratype female [Reg. no,
120,154], Cairns district, attracted to light, eoll, A, M, lea (S,A.M.).
Lord Tlowe Island: a series of 6 nymphs mounted on a ecard in the
S.A.M. very likely helong to this species,

54 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Isopeltus tenuicornis sp. noy.
Plate 4, fie. B
Head black and finely punetate, about the same length as anterior
. ’ tas] rae

pronotal lobe; first segment of antennae thicker than remaining
seginents, surpassing apex of head by about twice its length; second
and fourth segments subequal, third somewhat shorter (45:55). First
and second antetmal segments and a median band on the fourth
yellowish, third segment brownish-yellow, Rostrum stramineous, just
reaching mid-coxae, Ratio of segments 37:45: 12:15.

Pronotum strongly impressed just about the middle, anterior lobe
piceous, coarsely and densely punctate, hind lobe testaceous, coarsely
punctate with brown. Anterior margin of pronotum somewhat
concave, hind margin straight, strongly impressed inwardly of each
humeral angle, Lateral explanate margins narrow in comparison to
7. australis and 7, obscurus, converging anteriad, very feebly sinuate
in the region of the transverse impression and convex in the anterior
third, pale.

Sentellum with the usual triradiate keel, the lateral arms of whieh
are expanded and bulbous; coarsely punetate in the apical 3, fuscous,
but the keels and the apex lighter.

Corium and clavus testaceous, with a fnseous mark near the apical
third of the elaval suture and another on the apical exterior margin,
Strongly and coarsely punctate, the clavus with three rows of coarse
punctations. Membrane pale brown hyaline,

Underside brown, femora tibiae and tarsi yellowish. Fore femora
inerassate, armed with one large spine beneath, five minute spines
interior to this and another five exterior to it, No males available
for study of genital capsule.

Length: 3.6 mm.

Location: Holotype female [Reg, no, T6216], Brisbane, 8
December 1951, coll. G. Saunders ((Q.M.).

This species differs from the other two in its genus by its much
thinner antennae and narrower lateral explanate margin of the
pronotum.

Brentiscerus Scudder 1962
Brentiscerus Seudder, 1962, Canad. ent., 94(9) 3 989.

Head distinctly punctate, first segment of antennae surpassing

apex of head.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 55

Pronotum with anterior collar; lateral margins with pale explanate
marein, somewhat concave in region of transverse constriction which
is placed almost in the middle of the pronotum. Hind margin sinuate,
straight or slightly coneave, anterior lobe more finely punctate than
posterior.

Seutellum deeply punctate with a prominent Y shaped keel.

Hemelytra somewhat concave in basal third, clavus with three
rows of puuctations, corium with two rows close to and parallel to
claval suture.

Fore femora incrassate with a large spine and apically to it a
series of smaller spines.

Male genital capsule with upper opening partially divided into
{wo by inwardly direeted processes of outer rim, claspers robust,
pointed, proctiger covering most of anterior opening,

Type: Scolopostethus putout White 1878, from New Zealand, by
original designation.

This genus, [sopeltus, Retrodrymus and Gastrodes seem to form
a group within the Drymini, Brentiscerus differs from the other
three in having the lateral explanate margins of the pronotum
distinctly concave in the region of the transverse impression of the
pronotum.

Brentiscerus putoni appears to have markings rather like Jsopeltus
australis and quite different from the four Australian species (all
new) of the genus. These may be separated by the following key.

1. Small, under 2 mm long, pale yellow

and brown in colour .. .. .. .. .. Brentiseerus pallidus
Larger, over 2 mm longer, darker, Sp. nov.
testaceous and dark brown .. .. .. 2

2. Large, 3.6 mm or over, fore femora
anteriorly armed with a prominent
spine just exterior to half way and
prominent, though much smaller
denticles exterior to this, posteriorly
with 12-13 smaller denticles . .. .. Brentiscerus major
sp. nov.

56 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Smaller (2-3.2 mm), fore femora not so
conspienously armed, but with one
minute tooth at about # the distance
from base beneath .. .. .. 0... 3.

3. Apical half of corinm dark, with three
prominent parallel elongate oval
pale streaks included in this dark
ATCA... 6 ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ae) =©Brentiscerus triocellatus

Corium and clavus dark brown, with a Sp, nov.
distinct pale spot at half the length
of the outer margin of the corium,
and two spots near the apical
margin .. 2... 0... 2. 2... ..) Brentiscerus diffusus
sp. Nov.

Brentiscerus major sp. nov.
Plate 4, fig. ©. Text fig. 1F

Head triangular, coarsely and densely punctate, with a Jong hair
just interior of each eye, dark brown, eyes separated from anterior
angles of pronotum, tylus promiment, paler brown. First and second
segments of antennae lighter brown, third and base of fourth often
dark brown, apical 3 to 3 of fourth very pale brown. Rostrum
reaching mid-coxae, first segment just surpassing base of head, second
segment reaching to middle of fore coxae, yellowish, first segment a
fraction darker.

Fore lobe of pronotum brown or blackish brown, distinetly and
sparsely punctate, and with just the faintest trace of a longitudinal
groove, Hind lobe luteous with seattered brown punctations, and a
faint longitudinal impression anteriorly joining the faint one on the
fore lobe; sometimes a faint tinge ol brown on the dise on either side
of the midline touching the hind margin. Pronotum with a prominent
transverse constriction about the middle, anterior margin somewhat
concave, hind margin markedly sinuate, lateral margin concave in
region of transverse constriction, and just anterior to this evenly
convex to the collar. Humeral angles slightly raised interiorly and
hind margins impressed on either side just behind these.

Scutellum triangular with usual triradiate raised keel. Brown,
parts of the keel sometimes lighter in colour,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI s7

Clavus and corium brownish-yellow, the latter with some areas
ag indicated on fienve slightly darker, Clavus with the usual three
rows of punctations, corinm with two vows close to and parallel to
elaval suture, and exterior to these one complete sinuate row, and
several incomplete rows, 18 well as seattered punctations. Membrane
brownish and clear hyaline, mottled.

Beneath brown, tip of genital segment, hind margins of pro- and
meta-pleura, femora (except base of fore femora), tibiae and tarsi
yellowish, Underside of thorax coarsely punctate, underside of
abdomen with golden pilosity. Underside of fore femora with 1 large
and exterior to it 6-7 small dentieles on the anterior margin and about
12 small denticles along the hind margin.

Male genital capsule with upper opening partially divided into
two hy inwardly directed processes of the outer surface. Claspers
fairly long and cylindrical, pygophore large, covering most of hind
opening, grooved longitudinally in the centre and convex on either side
of this groove, Length: 3.4-4.5 mm,

Localities: Queensland; Tlolotype male [Reg no. T6213],
Lamington National Park, 28 January-3 February 1963, coll G,
Monteith (Q.M.); paratype male, Lamington National Park, ea leaf
mould, 1 June 1955, eoll, T, E. Woodward; 2 paratype males,
1 paratype female, Lamington National Park, 11-17 February
19683, coll, G, Monteith; 1 paratype female, National Park,
2-6 June 1958, coll, FP. A, Perkins; 1 paratype female, Brishane,
1944, coll. T. BE. Woodward; 1 paratype female, Springbrook,
11 April 1955, coll, R. EB. Harrison; 1 paratype female, Gordonbrook,
3 June 1959, coll, I, Exley: 1 paratype, abdomen and witigs missing,
Killarney, 11 November 1958, eoll, 1. C. Yeo; 2 paratype females, 1
paratype male, Atherton, 1 2 ex Rondalesia sp. 2 22 at light, 2, 4
and 19 October 1959, coll. G. Ettershank (U.Q.); 1 paratype female
[Reg no, 120,156], Mount Tambourine, coll. A, M, Lea (S.A.M.),
New South Wales; Allotype female [Reg. no. 120,155], Dorrign:
1 paratype female [Reg. no, 120,157], Upper Wilhams River,
October 1926, coll. Lea and Wilson (S.A.M.); 1 paratype female,
Dorrigo National Park, 30 May 1963, coll. G. Monteith (W.Q.); 1
paratype male, Wilson’s Creek, near Mulhimbimby, 29 Jannary 1961,
coll. D. K. MeAlpine (A.M.), Vietoria: 1 paratype female, Ferntree
Gully, 26 July 1924, coll, Tl, E. Wilson (N.M.),

SR RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Brentiscerus pallidus sp. nov.
Plate 5, fig. C. Text fig. 114

Head coarsely punctate, triangular, pale brown or yellowish
brown, tylus protnberant and paler, HKyes blackish brown, tuward of
eyes on head on vach side a prominent hair, First two antennal
segments and apex of fourth yellowish, third and base of fourth
brown. Rostrum reaching mid coxae, yellow, extreme apex somewhat
infuseated, First segment of rostrum about reaching base of head,
second fore coxae,

Pronotum with the usual transverse constrietion about midway
between base and apex, fore lobe mainly light brown exeept collar
which is paler, extremely coarsely punctate; Lind lobe almost luteous
with dense coarse brown punetations, fore lobe posteriorly and hind
lobe anteriorly impressed at the transverse impression to form a
short longitudinal depression crossing the {ransverse suture,
Anterior margin of pronotum straight or perhaps slightly coneave,
hind margin mainly straight bat produced slightly and convexly
behind the humeral angles, humeral aneles somewhat elevated.
Lateral margins convex at humeral angles, concave at region of
transverse constriction and convex where bordering fore lobe,

Seutellum luteons, coarsely punctate with pale brown with the
usual triradiate elevated keel.

Corium and clavus in the main Iuteous with coarse pale brown
punctations, elavus with three rows, corium with two rows close to and
parallel to claval suture, vest rather more seattered, Clavus between
the median and onter rows of punetations, and corium in apical
half (except three elongate included pale patches) infuseated with
brown in the holotype, only vaguely so in the allotype. Membrane
almost translucent,

Beneath light brown, anterior and posterior margins of propleura,
hind margin of metapleura, lateral margins of abdomen and genital
segments, all epimera and episterna, trochanters, and all the legs
yellowish. Thorax coarsely punctate beneath, abdomen with a very
sparse very short pilosity. Pore femora apparently unarmed.

Male genital capsule rather flattened above, upper opening
partially divided into two cavities by two inwardly directed processes
on the outer wall of the opening, claspers short, proctiger flattish on
top and covering most of rear opening. Length: 2.20-2.25 mm.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 59

Localities: Queeusland: Holotype female and allotype male (Reg.
nos. 120,158-9], Mount Tambourine, in rotting leaves, coll. A. M, Lea
(S.A.M.),

Brentiscerus triocellatus sp, nov,
Plate 5, fig. D. Text fig. 1G

Tlead triangular, brown or black, coarsely punctate, anteclypeus
(tylus) prominent, paler, Kirst two segments of antennae and apical
2 of fourth yellowish brown, third and base of fourth brown, Rostrum
reaching mid coxae, basal segment not reaching base of head, first
segment und extreme apex olf fourth brown, remainder yellow or
luteous,

Pronotum with the usual transverse constriction about midway
between base and apex, with a strongly punetate anterior collar,
Fore lobe (except eollar) brown and coarsely punctate. Tlind lobe
stramineous or luteons with coarse brown punctations, a prominent
brown semicircular pateh on the hind margin on either side of the
middle, Anterior lobe with a definite longitudinal depression which
erosses the transverse suture aid continues on to the anterior portion
of the hind lobe, Hind margin feebly sinuate, humeral angles very
slightly convex posteriad. Lateral margins strongly concave in the
revion of the transverse suleus, anterior to this feebly convex, anterior
margin straight or very feebly coneave, Lateral keel stramineous
or Inteous.

Seutellam brown and coarsely punctate all over, with the usual
triradiate keel, this sometimes lighter on terminus ol each arm, or
only lighter on the terminus of the central arm at apex,

Clavus stramineous or lnteous with the sual three longitudinal
rows of coarse punetations, Corium usually pale stramineous or
luteous in the basal hall, sometimes infuseated basally as in the
figured specimen, but always infuseated with brown in the apieal half,
within this latter brown area three paler oval spots in a line tear
the hind margin. Membrane brownish hyaline, veins white,

Underside dark brown, collar, hind margins of pro- and meta-
pleura and genital segment a shade paler. Trochanters and femora
yellowish brown, apices of fore femora, tibiae, and tarsi yellowish,
fore femora apparently unarmed, Underside of thorax strongly pune-
tate, abdomen polished with a very sparse short pilosity. Male genital
capsule with upper opening partially divided into two by inwardly

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

directed processes of the onter wall, eclaspers relatively short and
robust. Proetiger grooved longitudinally in middle, covering most of
hind cavity. Leneth: 2.25-3.0 mm.

Localities: Queensland: Holotype male, allotype female, 2 para-
type males [Reg. nos. 120,160-3], Mount Tambonrine, in rotting leaves,
coll, A. M. Lea; 2 paratypes, one a male, other abdomen missing [ Reg.
nos, 120,164-5], Cairns District, attracted to light, A, M. Lea (S.A.M.);
2 paratype males, Lamington National Park, from leaf mould in rain
forest, 2-6 June, 1958, coll. F. A. Perkins (U.Q.).

Brentiscerus diffusus sp. nov.
Plate 6, fig. A

Somewhat larger than Brentiscerus triocellatus but very similar
in general appearance,

Head triangular, coarsely and densely punctate, tylus prominent,
paler. Tirst three segments of antennae brown, apical segment
entirely lnteous. Rostrum reaches mideoxae, first segment brown,
remainder luteous.

Pronotum very similar in shape, punctation, and colouration to
B. triocellatus, but collar entirely brown or black, like fore lobe; and
hind lobe darker, the fuscous patches on the hind margin much larger,
confluent in the centre.

Seutellum likewise formed and coloured as B. triocellatus.

Corinm and clavus deep brown in colonr, the former with a eou-
spicuous pale patch on the outer margin midway between base and
apex, and perhaps two vaguely lighter areas near hind margin, ¢lavus
with three rows of punetations, the region between the inner and
median rows slightly raised, corium coarsely punctate, membrane
brownish, veins paler.

Beneath deep brown to black (head, pro-, and meso-thorax), hind
lobe of propleuron only paler. Femora in basal half brown, apically
yellow, tibiae and tarsi yellow, fore femora armed with one small
denticle beneath apieally and a row of extremely small denticles on
the anterior margin. Male not available for study of genitalia.
Length: 3.25-3.5 mm.

Localities: Queensland: Tolotype female and paratype female
| Reg. nos. 120,166-7], Cairns District, attracted to light, A. M. Lea
(S.A.M.).

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 61

Gastrodomorpha gen. nov.

A genus in the /sopeltus, Brenfiscerns section of the tribe sharing
with these genera the sentellum with a prominent triradiate keel and
the sides of the pronotum with a prominent explanate keel; the
pronotem is divided into two lobes by a prominent transverse
impression about the middle. Like Apollonius the explanate lateral
mareins of the pronotum are straight but unlike Apollonius these
margins are strongly convergent towards the front. Like the next,
and last genus in this section (Retrodrymus) the lateral margins of
the corium are convex, giving tle iusect the same pyriform appearance
as a Gastrodes, The continuous lateral explanate margin of the
pronotin should serve to distinguish it from the latter which docs
not. vecur in this area.

Head elongate, rather pentagonal, punctate, tylns strongly
prominent. Antennae relatively thick, first segment surpassing apex
of head. Rostrum attaining mideoxac, first segment not reaching base
of head, second not quite reaching fore coxae,

Pronotum trapeziform, with a prominent collar, anterior margin
somewhat coneave, posterior very feebly so, with a prominent trans-
verse constriction just behind the middle dividing it mto two lobes.
Lateral margins explanate from just behind collar to just before
linmeral angles, very feebly concave in the region of the transverse
constrietion and feebly convex in front of this, more noliceably so just
behind the collar. Collar and hind lobe coarsely punctate and fairly
densely so, fore lobe more finely and sparsely punctate.

Scutellum triangular with a prominent triradiate keel, coarsely
and densely punetate all over,

Corium and elavus coarsely punctate, clavus with the usual three
rows, ¢orinum with the panctations arranged in more distinet rows than
in the other genera, longitudinal veins also more distinct. Lateral
margin of coritm straight in basal third, thence convex to apex,
hemelytra widest al about level of apex of elaval snture. Membrane
just reaching apex of abdomen.

Pore femora inerassate, armed on ventral surface with an anterior
and posterior row of spines in the apical third, the innermost spine
of the anterior row large. Male capsule unknown,

Type: Gastrodomorpha enigmatica sp. nov. the only species.

62 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gastrodomorpha enigmatica sp. nov.
Plate 6, fig. D

Head coarsely punctate, blackish brown, apex of anteelypeus
(tylus) lighter. HKyes remote from anterior margin of pronotum,
Antennae with first three segments brown, fourth missing. Rostrum
yellowish.

Fore lobe of pronotum including collar brown, explanate margins
and hind lobe yellowish, punctations on latter light brown,

Seutellum yellowish, punectations and extreme base light brown.

Corium and clavus yellow, punctations light brown, some vague
indications of fuscous in the apical portions of the former, Membrane
brown, veins lighter.

Beneath brown, posterior margins of pro- and meta-pleura lighter,
legs yellow. Thoracic pleura with few punctations in centre of dise,
abdomen shiny with short adpressed golden pilosity. Length: 3,2 mm,

Loeality: Vietoria: TLolotype female [Ree no. 120,168|, Ring-
wood, in tussocks, coll, F. KH. Wilsou (S.A.M.).

Retrodrymus gen. nov.

Retrodrymus is the last of the genera with an explanate margin
to the pronotum and a prominent triradiate keel to the seutellum.
It differs from the other genera in this group by having the transverse
constriction of the pronotum placed well posteriad, and by a larger
and more convex fore lobe of the pronotum.

Head elongate, pentagonal, rugose, anteclypeus (tylus) strongly
prominent, eyes remote from anterior margin of pronotum, Antennae
relatively robust, first segment snrpassine apex of head, second
segment the longest, third a little shorter than second, fourth a little
shorter than third and only slightly longer than first. Rostrum
reaches hind coxae, first segment not reaching base of head, second
segment just attaining fore coxae.

Pronotum rather elongate with a prominent coarsely punctate
collar, feebly impressed well behind midline, the division of pronotum
into fore and hind lobes is achieved not so much by a strong trans-
verse impression us in most Drymine genera but rather by the termina-
tion posteriorly of the strongly convex fore lobe onto the general
plane of the hind lobe. Fore lobe finely but fairly densely etipgtader

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 63

hind lobe densely and coarsely punetate. Anterior margin of
pronotum truncate or faintly convex, lind margin almost straight.
Lateral margins explanate from behind collar to just in front of
humeral angles, this lamina narrow and convex im outline around
raised tore lobe, very slightly coneave at the division of the fore and
hind lobes, and faintly divergent to humeral angles,

Seutellum triangular, coarsely punctate and with a very prominent
trivadiate keel,

Corium and elavus strongly punctate; clavas with the usual three
rows of punetations, corium narrowly impunetate exteriorly in the
hasal hall’, this region rather reflexed, punctate area with punetations
tending to be arranged im rows. Outer margin of corium gently
convex [rom base to apex, animal widest at a point about midway
between apex of seutellum and apex of claval suture, Membrane
somewhat surpassing apex of abdomen,

Beneath with proplenra and metapleura strongly punetate, meta-
pleura punetate only im eentre of dise, Fore femora relatively
incrassate, beneath anteriorly with a row of about seven spines in
the apical third, first of these very large, posteriorly with a row of
small spines in apienl half.

Male wenital capsule with upper opening partially divided into
two by two inwardly directed processes on onter margin, claspers
relatively long, sides of opening behind claspers with long hairs.

Type: Retrodrymus abundans sp. nov., the only species in the

PETLULS,
Retrodrymus abundans sp. nov.
Plate 5, fig. A. ‘Text fig. 1A, H

Head brown to black, apex of tylus luteous when head brown, and
brown when head black. First two segments of antennae yellowish in
brown headed specimens and apieal two segments brown; in black
leaded specimens basal two segments brown and apical pair dark
brown. Rostrum yellowish in brown headed specimens, yellowish
brown in black headed specimens, basal segment somewhat darker,
especially basally.

Swollen fore lobe of prouotum ineluding collar brown when head
brown, black when head black; hind lobe testaceous, lighter laterally,
humeral angles and lateral keel luteous.

o

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Scutellum yellowish or brownish depending on the colour of the
head and fore lobe of the pronotum, when brownish the apices of the
three arms of the triradiate keel luteous. Punctations brown,

Corium and clavus yellowish or brownish according to the dark-
ness Of the general eolouration, with a transverse infuseated bar
veross corium, somewhat oblique at a level midway between the apex
OF the setitellim and the apex of the claval suture. Membrane a deep
hrown, veins somewhat lighter.

Underside of head and thorax blackish brown, abdomen deeq)
brown, ftrochanters, femora, tibiae and tarsi yellowish. Length:
4.25-A mim.

Localities; Tasmania: Holotype male mounted on eard with
lymph, one paratype male, three paratype females [Reg. nos.
120,169-75] Devonport, coll, Lea; 2 paratype males, 2 paratype females
[Reg. nos. 120,174-7], Waratah, eo!l, Lea & Carter; 1 paratype male
[Reg no. 120,178], Ulverstone, coll. Lea (S.A.M.). Victoria:
Allotype female, Macedon, coll. Deane; one paratype male 3 paratype
females, Htham, coll. J. H. Dixon; 1 paratype female, Evelyn, 17 May
W925, coll. F. E. Wilson; 1 paratype female, Emerald District, coll.
Ki. J.; 2 paratype females, 1 paratype male, Ferntree Gully, 20
November 1920, 26 July 1924, 26 May 1925, eoll. F. E. Wilson: 1 para-
type female, Ferntree Gully, coll. J. K, Dixon; 2 paratype females,
Western Districts (N.M.).

Appolonius Distant 190]

Appolonius Distant 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., (7)8: 484, 1904,
Panna Brit. India Rhynch, 2: 62. Seudder 1956, Mnt. mo, Mag.
(4)17: 859. 1957, loe. eit.: 154.

Agqunaga Distant, 1906, Anu. Soc. ent, Bele, 50; 418, 1910, Fauna

Brit. India Rhyneh,, 5: 58.

Appolonius is the first of # series of genera in which the pronotum
has a prominent transverse impression and the lateral marging are
explanate but in which the sentellum is devoid of a prominent raised
triradiate keel, in <lppolontus the seutellum is somewhat raised
inedially, Tt differs from the other genera in this section by its nearly
rectangular pronotum with almost straight lateral margins.

Head broad, short, triangular, without eyes as broad as anterior
margin of pronotum, lMyes large, prominent, tonehing anterior margin
of provotnm, Antennae inserted well away {rom eyes, robust, first

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 65

segment not or only just surpassing apex of head, all segments
relatively short, rostrum just reaching fore coxae (crassus (Distant)
from India), or reaching mid coxae (other species).

Pronotum strongly quadrate, with a strong transverse impression
about the middle. Anterior margin straight (quadratus Scudder
crassus (Distant) and picturatus Distant), or strongly convex (cinti-
cornis Distant, territorialis n.sp. and robustus n.sp.), hind margin
almost straight. Lateral margins explanate, almost straight and
converging in the two Australian species, somewhat concave in the
region of the transverse impression in the extra-Australian species,
anterior lobe swollen and finely punctate, hind lobe flattish or arched
and more coarsely punctate.

Seutellum transversely impressed across base, medially somewhat
raised, finely punctate like fore lobe of pronotum.

Corium and elavus coarsely punctate, clavus with the usual three
longitudinal rows of punctations, punctations on corium more or less
arranged in rows, including 13-2 rows paralleling claval suture.
Lateral margins of corium almost straight, very feebly sinuate. Fore
femora very incrassate, apically beneath with one large tooth followed
by five or six spines.

Male capsule of ¢erritorialis only investigated. There is the
usual partial division of the upper opening into two by acute inwardly
directed projections of the lateral margins, the claspers are flat on
top and pointed, the proctiger covers most of the anterior cavity, but
in addition there are two larger rugose or punctate flaps lying over
this and originating from the lateral margin, strongly reminiscent of
Drymus species.

Type: Ophthalmicus cincticornis Walker 1872, monobasic.

There are two Australian species which can easily be distinguished
from the extra-Australian species by the almost straight lateral
margins of the pronotum.

Appolonius territorialis has the second and third femora pale
yellow and the dark markings in the apical region of the corium are
relatively fine, 4. robustus has brown femora except at apex, is wider
in relation to its length, and the dark markings in the hind partion
of the corium are broader, the hind lobe of the pronotum is also
more fuscous.

66 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Appolonius territorialis sp. nov.
Plate 6, fig. B. Text fie. 11

Head dark brown, finely punctate, eyes brown. [First two antennal
segments yellow, apical pair brown. Rostrum yellowish, basal segment
and basal third of second browner.

Anterior lobe of pronotum dark brown, finely punctate, hind lobe
and lateral explanate margin luteous, the former with four faint brow
longitudinal lines, one either side of the midline, sometimes fusing
into one broad median band and another close to each lateral margin.

Sentellum deep brown, almost black, finely punctate, medially
raised, transversely impressed near base.

Corium and clayus luteous with brown punetations, the former
with two fuscous spots on the lateral margin, one in the middle, one
in the apical angle and between these a prominent luteous spot. Apical
margin of corium infnseated giving off three thin fuscous lines running
more or less anteriorly, these are joined to one another where they
terminate, the outer the longest and running into the medial marginal
spot. Clavus with a brown streak in the distal half between the
median and onter line of punctations. Membrane grevish hyaline,
veins brown.

Thorax beneath deep brown, prothorax and mesothorax strongly
punctate, metathorax with only a longitudinal band of punctations
near exterior margin, lateral keel of prothorax luteous; beneath hind
margin of propleura and metapleura and episterna and epimera a
lighter shade than the rest of the thorax. Abdomen shining brown
with a fine golden pilosity. Fore femora and all coxae brown, rest of
legs yellowish, Length: 3.0-3.5 mm.

Locality: Northern Territory: Holotype male and 1 paratype
male | Reg, nos, [20,179-80], Batchelor, on fruit of Roselle (d7tbiseus
sabdiriffa), 20 October 1913, coll. presumed G. F, Hill (S.A.M.,).

Appolonius robustus sp. nov,
Plate 6, fig. C!
Head almost black finely punctate, eyes brown. First two

seginents yellowish, though apical third of second darker, terminal
two segments deep brown, apex of last a shade paler, Rostrum brown.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 67

Pronotwn tear black, lateral explanate margin Inteous only at,
and anterior to, level of transverse impression. Hind lobe with raised
humeri and two oblique lines somewhat inward of these, not reaching
transverse impression, paler. Anterior lobe finely punctate, posterior
lobe more coarsely so,

Seutellum formed and coloured substantially as in the previous
species,

Corium and ¢lavus basically luteous, elavus marked as in
lerritorialis. Corium with two prominent fuseous marks on the
exterior miurgin, one in the middle and the other apical, this latter
large and extending along the whole of the posterior margin of the
corium, these two lateral marks jomed by a fuseons line, Corimm with
three other fuscons lines, one given off in the middle of the widely
black hind margin runs forward to end freely, of the other two one
is given off about 4 out from the apex of the elavus and the other right
at the clavus to meet at about the level of the fip of the seutellum,
the inner one running along the elaval suture in its apieal third, the
other curving inward to meet it, within these lines a prominent silvery
patch. Membrane hyaline grey, veins brown.

Thorax and abdomen beneath almost black, the former punctate
as in vl. ferriforialis, the latter with a whitish pilosity, All femora
brown except at extreme base and apex, tibiae and tarsi yellow.
Length; 3.25-3.5 mim.

Localities: Queensland: Holotype male |[Reg, no. 720,181],
Magnetie Island, coll, A, M, Lea (S.A.M.)4 allotype female, Brisbane,
15 May 1954, coll, K. L, S. Harley; paratype female, Brishane, on
bark of Fiens (Indian fig), 16 May 1951, eoll. T. EK. Woodward (U.Q.).

Scolopostethus Fieber 1861

Scolopostethus Fieber, 1861, Europ. Hem, :49, 188. Stal, 1872, Ofv,
svenska Vetensk Akad. Férh. 29(7): 60. Saunders, 1892, Hem.
Het, Brit. Is. :108. Horvath, 1902, Rev. d’Ent,, 11: 253, Lethierry
& Severin, 1894, Cat. gén. Hém., 2: 228. Distant, 1903, Fauna
Brit, Ind., Rhyneh., 2: 92, Guerin & Penau 1906, Rennes Bul, Soe,
Sei, méd,, 14: 67. Horvath, 1911, Ann. Mus. nat. Hunge., 9: 337.
Van Duzee, 1917, Univ. Cal. Publ. Mnt. 2: 199. Southwood &
Leston, 1959, Land and Water Bugs Brit, Is., :49. Slater & China,
1961, Bull. Zool. Nomenel., 18(5) : 351.

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tritomacera Costa 1841, Ann. Soe. ent. France (1)10; 296-297. Fieber,
1861, Europ, Hem. 44: 163.

Tritomocera Agassiz, 1846, Nomen. zool. Index. Univ. :376,
Tritamacera 1848 ibid. 1092.

Manatanus Distant, 1909, Ann. Mag. nat, Hist., (8)3: 494. 1910, Fauna
Brit, Ind. Rhyneh., 5: 86,

Head triangular, anteclypeus (tylus) prominent, eyes not quite
touching anterior margin of pronotum, first segment of antennae just
(new species described here), or considerably passing apex of head;
rostrum reaching middle coxae.

Pronotum quadrate or trapezoidal, lateral margins straight or
sinuate in region of the strong transverse constriction which is placed
about balf way back, lateral margins explanate. Anterior and
posterior margins. straight or concave,

Seutellum triangular, somewhat tumid, without any trace of a
triradiate keel.

Clavus with the usual three rows of punctations, corium with two
rows parallel to the claval suture and the rest for the most part
scattered in the apical area, lateral margins of coria feebly sinuate.

Thorax beneath strongly punctate, abdomen shiny, finely pilose.
Anterior femora incrassate with a large spine ventrally just outward
of the halfway point and a series of smaller spines between it and
the apex. Fore femora somewhat curved, in the male enlarged apically
and bearing several teeth. First segment of hind tarsi longer than
segment two and three together,

Type: Seolopostethus cagnatus Fieber 1860, selected by Distant
1904 (loc. cit,).

This appears to he a complex and rather ill characterized genus,
some of the species appear to be among the most contrasting coloured
in the Drymini. It is with some hesitation that I place the following
species in the genus, considering its short and robust antennae,

Scolopostethus forticornis sp. nov.
Plate 7, fig, A. Text fig. 1J
Head piceous, upper surface finely punetate, apex of tylus and
eyes lighter. Antennae brown, apical half of first segment and some-
times apices of seeond and fourth yellowish. Antennae short, first

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 69

seement just surpassing apex of head. Rostrum yellowish, thin, first
seoment just surpassing apex of head,

Pronotum piceous to rather velvety brown, finely and. fairly
densely punctate, punetations tending to be diffieunlt to see, mm some
specimens hind lobe a shade paler than fore lobe, Mxplanate lateral
Wargins concolorous with rest ol pronotum, somewhat sinuate 1
region Of transverse pronotal constriction and broadly convex in
front of this to region of collum, Wind margins almost straight,
anterior margin coneave,

Sentellum somewhat convex, velvety piceous or brown, finely
punctate,

Apieal 2 of corinum and apical hal! of elavus piceons or brown,
basal area of clavus and corium and a lateral spot on the latter abont
2 the way alone the onter margin luteous, apical margins of the clavas
and along the elaval suture also yellowish in some specimens. Pune-
tations only distinct in luteous areas and brown. Membrane apically
venerully piceous with a large luteous semilunate spot at the base
oeeupying the whole of the basal margin and extending about 4-3 way
along the immer margin, this spot interrmpted by a hook shaped piceous
mark near its immer basal area,

Beneath piceons to deep brown, fore femora brown, apex lighter,
rest of lees rather yellowish brown, tibiae somewhat darker,

Male genital capsule with upper opening partially divided ito
two by inwardly divected processes on the onter margin, claspers flat,
somewhat upturned apically, anterior cavity almost wholly covered
by longitudinally impressed pygophore, Length; 3.25-4.25 mm,

—r

Localities: South Australia; TLolotype male, allotype female, 1
paratype male | Ree. nos. 120,182-4], Lock 4, River Murray, under red
gum (Auealyptus camaldalensis) bark, 1&8 May 1964, coll. G. F. Gross;
1 paratype male, 1 paratype lemale | Reg, nos. 120,185-6], Wilpena
Pound, Coll, H. M. Hale; 1) paratype male |Ree. noe. 120,187],
Pt. Lineoln, coll. A. M. Lea (S.A.M.). Vieloria: 4 paratype males,
6 paratype females, Lake Hattah, coll, J. WW. Dixon (N.M.).
Queensland: 1 paratype (genitaha missing), Gayndah, coll. Masters

(A.M.).

Pseudodrymus gen. nov.
Body oblong or oval, rugosely punctate, generally blackish, ead
with eves fonching or a little separated lrom anterior margin of
pronotum, head triangular, tylus very prominent, Pronotum relatively

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

short, generally narrower anteriorly than posteriorly with a shallow
transverse constriction rather behind the middle, anterior margin
straight or concave, posterior margin likewise variable, lateral margins
generally rather concave in region of transverse impression, convex
in front of this, lateral margins aeute, only very narrowly explanate.

Scutellum triangular, econvexly raised near base but without a
trace of a triradiate keel.

Hemelytra (except membrane) strongly and coarsely and very
densely punctate, slightly convex above.

Nore femora swollen and armed near apex with a short spine,
exterior to that several smaller ones.

Male genital capsule with upper opening strongly constructed
into two lobes by acute inwardly directed processes of the outer wall,
claspers large and flat, proctiger covering most of anterior cavity.

Type: Pseudodrymus florestalis u.sp., the only species in the
renus.

Pseudodrymus florestalis sp. nov.
Plate 7, fig. B. Text fig. 1K

Black or piceous, very coarsely aud very densely punetate above.
Apieal half of terminal antennal segment, explanate lateral margin
of pronotuin basally, and hind lobe of pronotum vaguely, and some-
times corium laterally rather paler. Several specimens in the series
are all castaneous.

Head triangular, tylus acute, antennae with a rather long pilosity,
some of it longer than the width of the segments. Rostrum thin,
reaching mid coxae.

Transverse impression of pronotum shallow, fore lobe quite low,

anterior and posterior margins almost straight, lateral margins only
feebly sinnate in the region of the transverse impression.

Seutellum rather strongly excavate at extreme base, behind this
usually transversely swollen.

Corium and clayns extremely densely and coarsely punctate,

former somewhat convex and veins distinet. Membrane dark grey
brown, veins hehter.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 71

Beneath with thorax strongly punctate, abdomen shining with a
dense golden pilosity, especially apically. Fore femora swollen and
armed with one short spine near the apex, with one or two extremely
minute teeth on both ventral margins near it.

Parandria of male genital capsule rather triangular in shape and
fairly smooth. Length: 2.75-3.2 mm.

Localities: Queensland: Holotype female [Reg. no, T6214, in
().M.|, 4 paratype females, Whiteside Crossing, N. Pine River 8.K.
Queensland, in flood debris, 12 July 1963, coll. G. Monteith; allotype
male, 8.H. Queensland, 1963, coll. G. Monteith; 1 paratype female,
Noosa District, on sand dunes under herbs and fallen leaves of
Casuarina, 17 April 1960, coll. T. EK. Woodward. Western Australia:
2 paratype males, 5 paratype females, Morley Park, Perth, ex dead
Banksia leaves, 27 August 1959, coll. T. EK. Woodward (U.Q.); 1 para-
type male, King George’s Sound (A.M.).

Austrodrymus gen. nov.

Obovate, very strongly punctate. Head broad, triangular, rather
conical in side view, strongly punetate, clypeus not very obvious.
Antennae relatively robust, first segment barely or not surpassing
apex of head. Rostrum about reaching mid coxae, first segment
conspicuously thicker than rest, reaching base of head.

Pronotum very strongly punctate, with a shallow transverse con-
striction placed well behind the middle, anterior and posterior margins
somewhat convex, lateral margins more broadly laminate than in
Drymus, straight from base to about middle of fore lobe, thence convex
anteriorad. Anterior lobe rather low, both lobes strongly and closely
punctate.

Scutellum triangular, strongly and closely punctate, fairly flat,
raised slightly basally and medially, these two raised areas separated
by a feebly marked transverse groove.

Corium and clavus punctate, the latter with the usual three
longitudinal rows, those on the corium tending to be arranged in rows,
the innermost two close together and paralleling the claval suture,
the outermost row parallel to the narrow and impunctate exterior
margin.

Underside of thorax very strongly and closely punctate, abdomen
shiny with a rather long adpressed pilosity, particularly apically.

72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fore femora rather incrassate and armed near apex with a small
tooth and apically to this some five much smaller spines.

Male genital capsule with wpper opening partially divided in two
by inwardly directed lobes of the outer wall, claspers pointed, proctiger
covering all of hind cavity and longitudinally grooved in the middle.

Type: dustrodrymus flindersi sp. noy., the only species.

Austrodrymus flindersi sp. nov.
Plate 7, fig. (. Text fie. 11

Head, anterior lobe of pronotum, and seutellim pieeous to dark
brown. Basal two thirds of first segment of antennae, hind lobe of
pronotum, and tip of scutellam brown, so also hind margin of corium,
a rectangular mark enclosing a pale smaller rectangular mark in the
inner apical angle of the ecorium, and a short longitudinal line given
off from about nuidway along the hind margin and directed anteriorly,
Remainder of corium, clavus, laminate lateral margin of pronotum,
apex of first antennal segment, and remainine segments yellowish
brown. Membrane pale whitish vellow.

Underside deep brown to brown, rostrum and legs a somewhat
lighter brown. Length: 2.5-2.75 mm,

Localities: South Australia: Holotype male [Reg no. 120,188],
Flinders Island, coll. T, D. Campbell (S.A.M.). Western Australia:
1 paratype male, Morley Park, Perth, from dead Banksia leaves, 27
August 1959, eoll. T. K. Woodward.

Brachydrymus gen. noy.

Obovate, head pronotum and hemelytra strongly rugulose,
seutellum pmictate. Head triangular, eves almost touching anterior
pronotal margins, clypeus not prominent. Antennae fairly slender,
first segment just surpassing apex of head. Rostrum reaches mid
coxae, iirst segment not attaining base of head.

Pronotum rather quadrate, broad, with very little trace of a trans-
verse pronotal constriction and that placed well behind the middle.
Anterior and posterior marging rather coneave, lateral margins acute
but hardly laminate, straight in basal 3, convex anteriorly, Pronotum
densely rugulose and shortly pilose all over.

Sentellam flat, triangular, rather more punctate than rugulose,
with a seattered short pilosity.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 73

Hemelytra micropterous, extending only to two thirds the length
of the abdomen, membrane absent, claval suture diffienlt to see, whole
surface of hemelytra rugulose with a short pilosity. Exposed dorsal
surface of abdomen similarly rather rugulose and with the same short,
pilogity.

Underside of thorax strongly rugose except for blackish hoary
evaporative area, Abdomen rugulose beneath with a scattered short
pilosity.

Fore femora mederately inerassate, very finely rugulose,
apparently without spies. Male genital capsule rngulose posteriorly,
with upper opening feebly constricted into two and with membraneous
proctiger concealing the vesiea, Claspers shortish, rather robust.

Type: Brachydrymus lateabundans sp. noy. the only species.

Brachydrymus lateabundans sp. nov.
Plate 7, fig. D, Text fig. 1M

Dorsal surlace piceous, pilosity silverish. Antennae, rostrum,
eyes and legs dark brown, in one specimen the hemelytra are also
somewhat paler than the rest of the body.

Remaining features as for generie diagnosis. Length: 2.50-
3,50 mm.

Localities: Victoria: Holotype male, allotype female, 1 paratype
female, Ferntree Gully, 26 April 1924, coll. F. EB. Wilson; 1 paratype
male, 1 paratype female, Ferntree Gully, 28 September 1914, coll,
J, K. Dixon; 2 paratype males, 1 paratype female, Croydon, coll.
J. 1, Dixon (N.M.). Qneensland: 1 paratype female [Reg. no.
120,189], Gladstone, eoll, A, M. Lea. Northern Territory: 1 paratype
female [Reg. no. 120,190], Darwin in soil and leaf litter near sports
oval, 8 December 1960, coll, R. V. Southeott (S.A.M.),

DISCUSSION
This tribe of Rhyparochrominae is undoubtedly a very difficult
one in which to characterize generic differences and relationships.

On the basis of external characters there would appear to be
three groups in this fauna. The first group represented by the one
geuus Mizaldus lacks entirely lateral explanate carinae to the rather
convex pronotim. A second group has lateral explanate carinne or
laminae to the pronotum and a prominent trivadiate keel to the

74 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

seutellum, and would include Paradrymus, Megadrymus, Tsopeltus,
Brenticerus and Gastrodomorpha. <A. third group has prominent
lateral explanate laminae to the pronotum but lacks entirely any sign
of a triradiate keel on the scutellum, although the centre of the
scutellum may be raised. In this group fall 4pollonius, Scolopostethus,
Pseudodrymus and Austrodrymus. Brachydrymus seems to be a
modified member of the last group where flattening of the pronotum
has resulted in an almost complete elimination of the lateral laminae.

An examination of the dorsal morphology of the male genital
capsule complicates this picture somewhat. The typical arrangement
is for the upper opening to be constricted into somewhat of an 8 shape
by inwardly directed protuberances, one on each of the opening. The
anterior cavity is always larger than the posterior one so formed,
In Australian species a prominent and moderately chitinized proctiger
always covers most of the anterior cavity and is located a little below
the level of the outer walls, in many species this is depressed along
the median longitudinal line and the structure rises rather convexly
on either side of this depression to meet the outer margin of the
cavity. Two claspers or parameres are present in the posterior “avity,
becoming apparent just behind the inwardly directed processes of the
outer wall. In most Australian species they are fairly short and
pointed but in Pseudodrymus rather flattened.

Two genera differ somewhat from this general type. The male
capsule of Megadrymus is rather differently shaped and has short
very acuminate claspers swollen basally and the capsule has prominent
pilose ridges apically on either side of the middle. The male capsule
of Appolonius has two prominent rugose flaps or parandria given off
from the side wall of the hind cavity (this eavity is much larger than
the anterior one in this genus) which partially overlap and which
cover part of the proctiger. These flaps are also present in British
species of Drymus Fieber and in the subgenus Sylavadrymus Le
Quesne, their bases do not cover their point of attachment as in
Appolonius (Le Quesne 1956, Ent. mon. Mag., 4(202): 337-341, or
92(4): 17. The capsule of Appolonius was the only one cleared and
permanently mounted in this study; the others were examined under
the highest powers of the binocular microscope after hydroxide treat-
ment of the tip of abdomen and extrusion of the capsule by light
pressure, In the cleared mount of Appollonins more of the basal
structure of the male claspers can be seen and in general the structure
resembles Le Quesne’s figures 19, 21 and 23. Males of Mizaldus and
Gastrodomorpha were not available for examination.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 75

REFERENCES
Agassiz, L., 1846; Nomenclatoris Zoologici Index Universalis.
——— 1848: Nomenclatoris Zoologici Index Universalis I-N:
41-1133.

Bergroth, 1, 1916: New Genera and species of Australian Hemiptera.
Proc. roy, Soc, Viet., (N.S.) 29(1)+ 1-18.

1918: Studies in Philippine Heteroptera, 1. Philipp. J.
Sci. (d) 13(2 & 8): 43-126.

Distant, W. L.. 1901: Rhynchotal Notes—X1. Heteroptera: Family
Lygacidae. Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8&: 464-486 &
497-510.
1903 & 1904: The Fauna of British India including Ceylon
and Burma. Rhynchota. 2, i-xvii & 1-242 (1908) and 245-
503 (1904). 319 text fig's.
———— 1906-7: Oriental Heteroptera. Ann. Soc. ent. Belg, 50:
405-417,
———— 1909: Oriental Rhynchota Heteroptera. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Tlist. (8)3: 491-507.
~ 1910: The Fauna of British India including Ceylon and
Burma, Rhyehota, 5: i-xvil and 1-362. 214 text figs.

Fieher, F. X.. 1861: Die europaisehen Hemiptera. Halbflugler.
(Rhvynehota Lleteroptera.) Nach der analytischen
Methode bearbeitet. Wien I-VI, 1-444. 2 tables.

Guerin, J. & Peneau, J., 1906: Fanne entomologique armoricaine.
Lyywaeides. Bull, Soc. sei. méd, Ouest, 14: 1-84. 166
text fig's.

Horvath, G., 1902: Rev. d’ Hut. 11: 255.

——— 1911: Miscellanea Hemipterologica, Ann. hist-nat. Mus.
hune, 9: 1-84, $27-338, 423-485, table TX.

Le Quesne, W. J., 1956: An Examination of the British Species of
Dirpmnd Fieber (Hem., Lygacidae) with a New Subgenus
and an Addition and a Generic Reassignment in the
British List. Mnt. mon, Mag. 92(4)17: 337-341. 28
text fies.

Lethierry, lL. & Severin, G., 1894: Catalogue général des Weémipteres.
Bruxelles. Tome 2: 1-277.

76 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sannders, li., 1892: The Hemiptera of the British Islands. A deserip-
tive account of the families, genera and species indigenous
to Great Britain and Ireland, with notes as to localities,
habitats, ete.: i-v, 1-350. 1 plate.

Seudder, G. G. H., 1956: A revision of the genus Appolonius Distant

(Hemiptera, Lygaeidae) with a New Species from South
Sudan, [Hnt. mon, Mag., 92: 359-360,

19597: The higher classification of the Rhyparochrominae
(Hem, Lygaeidae), Ent. mon. Mag., 93: 152-156.

1962: The World Rhyparochrominae (Temiptera-Lygaeidae)
Il, New Genera for Previously Deseribed species.
Canad, Ent., 94(9) : 981-989, 10 text figs.

Slater, J. A. & Carayvon, J., 1963: KMthiopian Lygaeidae TV. A New
Predatory Lygaeid from Africa with a Diseussion of its
Biology aud Morphology. (Iemiptera: Heteroptera).
Proe. RK. nt. Soe. Lond. (a)38(1-3: 1-11. 10 text figs.

Slater, J. A, & China, W. E., 1961: Scolopostethus Fieher (1860)
(Insecta, Hemiptera): Proposed Validation under the
Plenary Powers. Z.N.(S) 1475. Bull. zool. Nomenel.
18(5) : 351-352.

Stal, C., 1872: Genera Lygaeidarum Furopae disposuit. Ofvers.
Vetensk Akad. Forh., Stockh. 29(7): 37-62.

Southwood, T. BR. E. & Leston, D., 1959: Land and Water Bugs of the
British Isles. London, I-XI, 1-436, 153 text figs.
63 plates,

Van Duzee, KM. P., 1917: Catalogue of the Hemiptera of the America
North of Mexico, excepting the Aphididae, Coceidae and
Aleurodidae, Univ, Calif, Publ. Ent., 2: i-xiv, 1-902,

Walker, F., 1872: Catalogue of the Specimens of Hemiptera Heterop-
tera in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus.
Pub., Pt. Vi: 1-202.

RESUME
On connaissait autérienrement deux espéces de Drymini de
l’Australie et une de la Nouvelle-Guinée, Comme resultat de cet étude,
ol on a employé toutes les collections disponibles australiennes, on a
demonstré Voecurrence de deux especes dans la Nouvelle-Guinée, une
Welles est espece commune dans | Australie, et de dix-sept espéces, dont

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DRYMINI 77

quinze sont nouvelles, de |’Australie. On donne des clefs, des illustra-
tions, et des descriptions des dix-huit espéces et les met dans douze
genres, dont huit sont nouveaux. Ou disponible on a employé la
morphologie de la capsule male genitale en conjunction de details
exterieurs pour donner une indication a arrangement et a les rélations
entre ces douze genres.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 3 TO 7

Fig. A. Paradrymus exilirostris Bergroth, whole insect,
Fig. B. Fore leg of Paradrymus exilirostris Bergroth, female.
Fig. C. Fore tibia of Paradrymus ewilirostris Bergroth, male.
Fig. D. Megadrymus terraereginae n.sp.
PLATE 4
Fig. A. Mizaldus woodwardi Slater & Carayon.
Fig. B, Isopeltus australis (Bergroth).
Fig. C., Brentiscerus major n.sp.
Fig. D. Isopeltus obsewrus n.sp.
PLATE 5
Fig. A. Retrodrymus abundans n.sp.
Fig. B. Isopeltus tenwicornis n.sp.
Fig. C. Brentiscerus pallidus nsp.
Fig. D. Brentiscerus triocellatus n.sp.
PLATE 6
Fig. A. Brentiscerus diffusus n.sp.
Fig. B. Appolonius territorialis n.sp.
Hig. C. Appolonius robustus nsp.
Fig. D. Gastrodomorpha enigmatica n.sp.
PLATE 7
Fig. A. Scolopostethus forticornis n.sp.
Fig. B. Pseudodrymus florestalis n.sp.
Fig. C. Austrodrymus flindersi n.sp.
Fig. D. Brachydrymus lateabundans n.sp.

PLATE 3

rs]

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. 15, Pare 5

1 mer

Rime. S.A. Museum Vou. 15, Puare 4

+————? mm.——_—__,

Rec. §.A. Musrum Von. 15, Pharr 5

-— 27 mm—— 4+

-/— 2 mm ——4

Rec. S.A. Museim Von. 15, Puare 6

—. 2mm, —____,

a |

Rec. §8.A, Museum Vou. 15, PLatE

CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS INTRODUCED INTO SOUTH
AUSTRALIA AND THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

BY HELENE M., LAWS

Summary

The chromosome complement is described for seven members of the family Helicidae
(Pulmonata, Helicacea) which have been introduced into South Australia and for one
member of the Subulinidae (Pulmonata, Achatinacea) introduced into the Northern
Territory. Haploid chromosome numbers from counts made in primary spermatocytes are
as follows: Helix aspera, n = 26; H. neglecta, n = 24; Cochlicella acuta, n = 23; C.
ventrosa, n = 23 and Subulina octona, n = 31.

CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS INTRODUCED INTO SOUTH
AUSTRALIA AND THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

By HELENE M. LAWS, Sours AusrractAn Museum
Plate 8

SUMMARY

The chromosome complement is described for seven members of
the family Helicidae (Pulmonata, Helicacea ) which have been intro-
duced into South Australia and for one member of the Subulinidae
(Pulmonata, Achatinacea) introduced into the Northern Territory.
Haploid chromosome numbers from counts made in primary sperma-
tocytes are as follows: Helix aspersa,n = 27; Theba pisana, n= 30;

Helicella virgata, 1 26: HH, stolismena, n —= 26; H. neglecta,
n — 24; Cochlicella acuta, n = 23; C. ventrosa, n = 23 and Subulina
octona, Nn == al.

INTRODUCTION

All the land snails which have been introduced into South
Australia occur naturally in countries bordering the Mediterranean,
some extending to Northern Kurope and the British Isles. It is likely
(Quick, 1953) that even those of wider distribution were introduced
from the Mediterranean parts of their ranges: all flourish in the
Mediterranean climate of the southern parts of Sonth Australia.
Hight species of Helicidae and one of the Ferussaciidae are known to
occur in the State, The introduced Helicids are capable of prolonged
aestivation which has no doubt aided in their distribution by man.

In his 1954 Catalogue of Introduced Snails and Slugs, Cotton
records no species for the Northern Territory, At least two, Subulina
octona (Brugiére) and Lamellacis gracilis (Hutton), belonging to the
Subulinidae, do now occur there. 8. octona certainly oceurs naturally
in tropical America and L, gracilis probably originated there also
(Pilsbry, 1946).

80 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Among the South Australian Helicidae only Helicella caperata
(Montagu) which oceurs naturally from Bagdad to the British Tsles,
was not available for cytological study. The only non-helieid snail
iutrodneed into South Australia is a species of Ferussacia. It was
originally recorded as F. folliculus (Gronovius) (Cotton, 1954) but
Venmans (1957) suggests that it is not yet possible to make a definite
specifie identification, The population described by Cotton still
flourishes at Linden Park, an Adelaide suburb, Efforts were made to
obtain gonadal material from this Ferussacia but no satisfactory
preparations could he obtained in spite of the faet that the snails
were breeding freely, OF the two subulinid snails introduced into the
Northern Territory, Subulina ‘ectona was available for cytological
study,

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Might species of introduced land snail were used in this study,
seven belonging to the Family Helicidae and one to the Subulinidae.

The upper few whorls of each shell were removed and a small
piece of ovotestis was taken with fine forceps. This was mounted in
a drop of aceto-orcein, tapped gently to spread the tissue and then
inverted on absorbent paper and sqnashed firmly with the thumb.
Gentle warming on a hot plate intensified the staining, and while the
slide was still warm the coverslip was ringed with vaseline for
immediate observation. Chosen slides were later made permanent.
Vaseline was removed by wiping with xylene and the slide was inverted
in absolute alcohol until the coverslip dropped off. The coverslip was
then replaced with a drop of Enparal.

Duplicate voucher specimens from each collection are in’ the
South Australian Mnseum,

Tn all species, chromosomes were observed at diakinesis and
prometaphase of meiosis in primary spermatocytes; for a few speci
mens, spermatogonial mitotic division were also studied,

RESULTS
Subulina octona (Bruguicre)
Distribution: Tropical America.
Introduced: A¥riea, Ceylon, Mast Indies, Australia.
Collections Studied: S.A.M. D.14856 Katherine, N.T., Mareh, 1964.

LAWS—CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS 81

The sole collection of this species came from a shade hiouse in a
varden in Katherine. Despite its tropical origins, this species shows
the ability for prolonged aestivation. Specimens from Katherine were
maintained dry, in the laboratory, from Mareh 1964 until October of
the same year. his ability to aestivate has no doubt aided in the
distribution of the species by man. The haploid chromosome number
is 31 (plate 8, fig. F).

Helix aspersa (Miiller)
Distribution: Kurope, Mediterranean.

Introduced: North and South America, Sonth Africa, New
Zealand, Australia,

Collections Studied: S.A.M. D14859 West of Finniss, $.A.,
August, 1963. S.A.M. D.14832 Adelaide University Gronnds, §.A.,
May, 1963,

The chromosome number observed (n = 27, plate 4, fig. B)
confirms previous counts made on European and British material
(Perrot and Perrot, 19387; Perrot, 1938; Mvans, 1960). A single speci-
men of abnormality aewninala in which the whorls are less tightly
coiled (S.A.M. D.14858, Wallaroo, 8.A., November, 1963) showed no
abnormality of the ehromosome coinplement.

Theba pisana (Miiller)
Distribution: Kurope, Mediterranean, North Africa, Britain (may
be an introduction).

Introduced: North America, South Africa, Australia.

Collections Studied: S.A.M. D.14860 4 mile west of Corny Point
Post Office, S.A., November, 1963. S.A.M. D.14815 Onter Harbour,
S.A., December, 1962, S.A.M. D.14838 Port Willunga, §$.A., August,
1963.

Specimens Destroyed in Dissection: Corny Poiut, S.A., August,
1963.

Almost all previous records of Theba pisana in South Australia
were based on misidentification of Helicella virgata. LWXxeceptions are
Taylor (1928) and 8.A.M. collection D.14866. Theba pisana is however,
now known from localities as widely separated as Venus Bay, Port
Lincoln, Edithburgh and the South-Kast of Seuth Australia. Present

82 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

identification has heen based on anatomical as well as conchologiecal
characters. Anatomically, Theba is very different trom /elicella.
Theba pisana itself has only two long mucous glands and in the
Helicinae, to which Theba belongs, the right ocular retractor muscle
passes between the vagina and penis and the spermathecal duct has
a diverticulum, In the Helicellinae the ocular retractor passes to the
left of both vagina and penis, there is no spermatheeal diverticulum,
and the mucous glands are shorter and more numerous and are onee
or twice divided.

In all collections n = 30 (plate 8, fig, A) and spermatogonial
mitoses showed Zn = 60, This species shows considerable variation in
banding pattern. Shells may be densely banded with entire or inter-
rupted brown markings, or they may have no banding at all. A range of
intermediates oceurs. Individnals with different banding patterns are
identical cytologically and the two extremes may oceur in a single
population. The banding pattern is no doubt genetically determined
but it is of no taxonomic signifieance,

Cochlicella acuta (Miiller)
Thistribution: South-west Europe, Mediterranean, British Isles.
Introduced: Australia,

Collections Studied: The single collection was made at Pine Point,
Yorke Peninsula, 8.A., in August, 1963, All specimens were destroyed
in dissection; they had the caleareons penial sheath and broader penis
which are characteristic of C. acuta and distinguish it anatomically
from C. ventrosa,

Perrot (1938) showed Cochlicella acuta to have 23 pairs of
chromosomes. This count was confirmed by observations on the
specimens of the Pine Point collection (plate 8, fiz. G),

Cochlicella yentrosa (Ferussac)
Distribution: Mediterranean.
Introduced: South Africa, Bermuda, U.S.A., Australia,

Collections Studied: S.A.M. D.14819 Rosetta Head, 8.A., May,
1963, S.A.M. D.14861 Hampstead Gardens, Adelaide, S.A., May, 1963.

Destroyed wm Dissection: Outer Harbour, 8.A., July, 1963.

LAWS—CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS 83

Ag in the related C. acuta, C. ventrosa has n = 23 (plate 8, fig. H).
Two varieties have been noted in South Australia (Cotton, 1954),
C. ventrosa bizona Moquin-Tandon with banded shells and C. ventrosa
inflata Moquin-Tandon which is unbanded. Both have identical
chromosome complements and since both occur together in the Rosetta
Head population it is unlikely that the banding pattern has any
taxonomic significance.

Helicella neglecta (Draparnaud)
Distribution: Mediterranean, South France.
Introduced: British Isles, Australia.

Collections Studied: S.A.M. D.14857 4 mile north of Brentwood,
Yorke Peninsula, 8.A., August, 1963.

Specimens Destroyed in Dissection: 10 miles south-west of
Yorketown, S.A., August, 1963. Half mile east of Port Turton, 8.A.,
August, 1963.

In all collections n = 24 (plate 8, fig. C) in primary spermatocyte
division figures and in spermatogonial mitoses 2n = 48. Helicella
neglecta shows varying degrees of banding but as in Theba, H, virgata
and Cochlicella ventrosa the chromosome number was uniform through-
out the collections studied.

Helicella virgata (da Costa)
Distribution: Kurope, Mediterranean, British Isles.
Introduced: Australia.

Collections Studied: S.A.M. D. 14854 4 mile west of Corny Point
Post Office, S.A., November, 1963. S.A.M. D.14855 Souttar Point,
Yorke Peninsula, S.A., November, 1963. S.A.M. D.14816 Hallett’s
Cove, S.A., June, 1963. S.A.M. D.14821 Rosetta Head, S.A., June,
1963. S.A.M. D.14817 Glossop, S.A., June, 1963.

In all collections n = 26 (plate 8, fig. D). Helicella virgata shows
a bewildering array of variation in shell size and banding pattern.
Shells may range from 10.5 to 17.5 mm in diameter; they may be
marked with entire brown bands which vary in number and position,
the bands may be interrupted, or banding may be absent. There may
be banded and unbanded individuals and also considerable variation

84 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in the size of mature snails in a single population; this is shown very
well in the Hallett's Cove collection, Chromosome number and form
is constant throughout.

Helicella stolismena (Bourguignat)

Distributions Spain, Franee.

Inlroduced: Australia.

Collections Studied; S.A.M. D.148638° Murray Bridge, S.A.
September, 1964.

In 1914 Gude described shells from Millicent as Helicella mayeri
but they have since been found (Quick, 1953) to agree closely with
Helicela stoismena (Bourguignat), although anatomical observations
were necessary to verify the identification. The shove collection of
snails, conchologically identical to specimens from Millicent, has given
anatomical evidence for identity with H, slolismena, The Murray
Bridge snails have, on one side of the vagina, an outer larger dart
sac with a dart and an inner smaller empty sac. In this they agree
with Id. stolismena so there is now little doubt that MH. mayeri is in
Fact. H. stolismena and is not close to H. conspurcala (Draparnand)
as Gude sugeested.

Individuals from Murray Bridge have n = 26 (plate &, fig. El).
Table T summarizes the chromosome mumbers of the introduced
species deseribed above.

CONCLUSION

lt thes heen stated (Burch and Heard, 1962) that chromosome
numbers tend to remain constant within systematic groups of
elithy dei ran snails. This may however apply to taxa at very different
systematic levels. Chromosome number may be essentially stable in
genera, families, or even in higher units. A great majority of snails
which have so far been ses saa in the order Basommatophora (the

Aneylidae excepted) have 1 = 18 (Burch, 1960; Burch et al., 1964) ;
the few exceptions have n — 7 17 or 19 and some groups show

polypoidy on the base number 18 (Burch, 1964), Similarly, all 15
species of the family Polygyridae examined by Husted and Bureh
(1946), representing three genera from two subfamilies, have n — 29,
Satsuma myomphala, a member of the Camaenidae, has n = 29
(Inaba, 1959) as do nine Australian members of the same family
including species of the genera Meracomelon, Sinumelon, Huadra,
Xanthomelon, Plenroxia, and Chloritobadistes (Laws, unpublished).

LAWS—CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS 4&5

Some euthyneuran groups do however show little stability of
chromosome number. In the Suceineidae n = 17, 18, 20, 21 and 22
are known for six species (Perrot, 1988; Inaba, 1959; Koyama, 1955;
Laws, unpublished). Similarly, the Helicidae show a range of chromo-
some number (Perrot, 1938). In the seven helicids deseribed above

n— 23, 24, 26, 27 and 30 oceur. The total range now known for the
family is n = 21 to 30 with the exception so far of n = 28 Kven

within helicid genera, chromosome number may vary. It is constant
for those species of Helix which have heen studied cytologieally,
n= 27, but in Cepea n = 22 and n= 25 are known (Perrot, 1938)
and in //elicella the present study has shown variation in number;
Perrot (1938) found H. ebvia to have n = 26; H. virgata and FH,
stolismena also have this number but in 7/7, neglecta n == 24.

As yet, Subulinu octona, is the only member of the super-tamily
Achatinacea to be studied eytologically. Its ehremosome number,
n — 31, is amony the higher ones recorded for the suborder
Sigmurethra to which all snails of the present study belong; only the
slug families Testacellidae and Limacidae have members with numbers
exceeding n == 31. The Sigmurethra, considered to be the most
advanced basommatophoran suborder, show higher chromosome
numbers than the three more primitive suborders (Burch and Heard,
1962), n — 31 for S. octona adds another high chromosome number
to those recorded for the Sigmurethra, further supporting the view of
Bureh and Heard that, in snails, inerease in chromosome number tends
to accompany phylogenetic development.

TABLE I
Chromosome Nwnhers of Introduced Lands Snails.
Speeies n 2n
Superfamily Achatinacea
Family Subulinidae Subulna octona oo. ce ve ee 8
Superfamily Helieacea
Family Helicidae

Subfamily Helicinae HehaQapersa oi ck ws we ow DT
Theba pisana .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 60

Subfamily Helicellinae Helicella virgata .. .. 6. 6. 1 26
Helicella stolismena .. .. .. 1. 2
Helicella neglecla ... 0. 2. 2. «DA 48
Cochlicella acuta o.oo. oe oe 88

Cochlicella ventrosa soo... 2

46 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

HXPLANATION OF PLATE 8

PLATE 8

Meiotic chromosomes of introduced land snails: chromosomes at diskinesis of
spermatogenesis.

Fig. A. Thebu pisana. Fig, BE, /lelicella stolismena.
Fig. B. Helix aspersa. Fig. F. Subulina octona.
Fig. C. IHeliectla wegleeta. Fig, G, Coehlicella acuta.
Fig. D. Ilelieella virgata. Fig. H. Cochlicella. ventrosa,

All drawings were made with the aid of a eamera huicida,

ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author gratefully acknowledges the help of a number of
people; Mr. D. Pomeroy of the University of Adelaide, Mis, M. Kenny
and Mr. P. Aitken of the South Australian Museum, Mr. W. G. Buick
of Adelaide and Mr. A, J. Turner of Katherine, N.T., have assisted
in the study by collecting living snails.

REFHRENCES

Burch, J. B., 1960: Chromosome studies of aquatic pulmonate snails.
Nucleus 3: 177-208,

1964: (Cytological Studies of Planorbidae (Gastropoda:
Basommatophora). J. The African subgenus Bulinus
ss. Malacologia 1: 387-400.

Bureh, J, B. and Heard, W. H., 1962: Chromosome numbers of two
species of Vallonia (Mollusca, Stylommatophora, Orthu-
rethra). Acta biol. Acad, Sei. Hung. 12: 305-3812.

Burch, J, B., Williams, J. F., Hishinuma, Y. and Natarajan, R., 1964:
Chromosomes of some Japanese freshwater snails
(Basommatophora: Branechiopulmonata). Malacologia
1: 403-415.

Cotton, B. C., 1954: J eatalogue of introduced snails and slugs in
Australia. Ree, S. Aust. Mus, 11: 177-187.

Hivans, H. J., 1960: Supernumerary chromosomes in wild populations
of the Snail Helia: pomatia L. Heredity 15: 129-138.

Gude, G. K., 1914: Deseription of a new THelicoid from South Aus-
traha. Proce. malac. Soe. Lond. 11: 166-167.

Husted, L. and Burch, P. R., 1946: The chromosomes of polygyrid
snails. Amer, Nat. 80: 410-429.

S.A. Museum

Rec.

Vou. 15, Puatr 8

e
@ PS e
@ e
<i °
4, <
‘ @
wr <a
@ @
4 a
*) ° id
Pa 0G 4
3S opt
eo v@ 0%
>? ©
2 ra.
«|
Py

lO

o% *
vs cai
eo
aty gt a,X
a «* 5
eas
+°
6 &
ot Lg
°.0F 2
o° o,7 ¢
) B é
v a
] Pe |
re =a DW
» 9
° 64g
‘Sa% &
a roy Qa
rs S 6

LAWS—CHROMOSOMES OF SNAILS 87

Inaba, A., 1959: Cytological studies in Molluscs. IT. A chromosome
survey in the stylommatophoric Pulmonata. J. Sci.
Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B, Div. 1. 18: 71-93.

Koyama, T., 1955: Studies on the chromosome numbers of two species
of Succinea in Japan. Venus, Kyoto 18: 259-264.

Perrot, M., 1938: Etude de Cytologie comparée chez les Gastéropodes
Pulmones. Rev. suisse Zool. 45: 487-566.

Perrot, J. L. and Perrot M., 1937: La formule chromosomique de
lV’ Helix pomatia. Rev. suisse Zool, 44: 208-209.

Pilsbry, H. A., 1946: Land Mollusca of North America (North of
Mexico). Vol. I, Part I. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. Mono-
graph No. 3.

Quick, H. K., 1953: Helicellids introduced into Australia. Proc. malac.
Soe. Lond. 30: 74-79.

Taylor, J. W., 1928: Helix pisana (Mill.) in South Australia. Journ.
Conch. 18: 208.

Venmans, L. A. W. C., 1957: A species of Ferussacia in South Aus-
tralia. J. malac. Soc. Aust. 1: 36-44.

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Die Chromosomenzahlen, in primaren Spermatocyten, fiir sieben
in Siid Australien eingefiihrten Arten von Schnecken (Helicacea,
Helicidae), sind: [Helix aspersa, n = 27; Theba pisana, n = 30;
Helicella virgata und H. stolismena, n == 26; Helicella neglecta,
n = 24; Cochlicella acuta und C. ventrosa, n = 23. Subulina octona
(Achatinacea, Subulinidae), eine Art die in das Nord-Territor
eingefiihrt worden ist, hat n = 31.

D

ABORIGINAL ROCK POUNDINGS ON GALLERY HILL, NORTH-
WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P, MOUNTFORD

Summary

This paper records an extensive group of rock poundings at Gallery Hill about 200 miles
in a south-easterly direction from Port Hedland, and 20 miles from the Abydos research
station (map, fig. 1).

This hill, first named and investigated by the Reverend Father Worms (1954, pp. 1067-
88), is a huge pile of granite boulders, which. according to their discoverer, is 930 feet
long, 300 feet wide and 200 feet high. The base is somewhat oval in form with the major
axis lying in a north-south direction.

Gallery Hill, which rises directly out of a level plain, is only one of a number of similar
geological features in the surrounding country. There are a few rock poundings on
adjacent hills examined by the author, but none of these have such a profusion of designs
on their surfaces as Gallery Hill.

Previous research on the rock art in other parts of Australia has shown that the widely
distributed pecked engravings are, almost without exception, situated near some form of
water supply: a watercourse, rockhole or spring (Mountford 1928, p. 342).

Although at the present time, there is no evidence of a water attachment in or near
Gallery Hill, it is possible that one existed, probably on the northern end, before the
aborigines left this area to work for the white man. If this catchment had not been cleaned
out continuously it would soon fill with sand and debris and all memory of it be lost. This
has already happened to a large number of aboriginal rockholes, soaks and springs
throughout Australia.

The second possible reason for the concentration of rock poundings at Gallery Hill is that
it may once have been an important centre where, at certain times of the year, the
aborigines assembled to perform the associated totemic rituals and, perhaps, at the same
time, pound designs on the rocks relating to their beliefs.

These suggestions however are hypothetical; at present there is no direct evidence to
show why there are so many rock poundings on Gallery Hill and so few on the hills
examined in the adjacent county.

ABORIGINAL ROCK POUNDINGS ON GALLERY HILL,
NORTH-WESTERN AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Assoctare IN
KNroanonoay, Sourm Avusrranian Museum

Plate 9 and text fig. 1-8

CONTENTS
Introduction.
(1) Techniques used in producing rock poundings.
(2) Methods of recording.
(3) Distribution of petroglyphs.
(4) Deseription of rock poundings,
(5) Sequence of rock poundings.
(6) Origins and meanings.
(7) Summary.
Acknowledgments.
Bibhography.

INTRODUCTION

This paper records an extensive group of rock poundings at
Gallery Hill about 200 miles in a south south-easterly direction from
Port Hedland, and 20 miles from the Abydos research station (map,
fig. 1).

This hill, first named and investigated by the Reverend Father
Worms (1954, pp. 1067-88), is a huge pile of granite boulders, which,
according to their discoverer, is 930 feet long, 300 feet wide and 200
feet high. The base is somewhat oval in form with the major axis
lying in a north-south direction.

Gallery Hill, which rises directly out of a level plain, is only one
of a number of similar geological features in the surrounding country.
There are a few rock poundings on adjacent hills examined by the
author, but none of these have such a profusion of designs on their
surfaces as Gallery Hill.

a0) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSKUM

Previous research on the rock art in other parts of Australia
has shown that the widely distributed peeked engravings are, almost
withont exception, situated near some form of water supply; a water
course, rockhole or spring (Mountford 1928, p. 342),

Althongh, at the present time, there is no evidence of a water
catchment in or near Gallery Ifill, it is possible that one existed.
probably on the northern end, before the aborigines left (his area to
work for the white man. Lf this catchment had not been eleaned out
continuously it would soon fill with sand and debris and all memory
of it be lost, ‘This has already happened to a large number of
aboriginal rockholes, soaks and springs throughout Australia.

The second possible reason for the concentration of roek pound-
ings at Gallery Hill is that if may onee have been an important centre
where, at certain times of the year, the aborigines assembled to
perform the associated totemic rituals and, perhaps, at the same time,
pound designs on the rocks relating to their beliefs.

These suggestions however are hypothetical; at present there is
no direct evidence (o show why there are so many rock poundings on
Gallery Hill and so few on the hills examined in the adjacent country,

1) Techniques used in producing rock poundings.
i } o A

The rock markings at Gallery Hill and Wamarana (Worms, 1954,
pp. 1067-88); Sherlock Hill (Mountford, 1964, in press); Depuch
Island (MeCarthy, 1961, pp, 121-48); Petri and Schultz, 1951, pp. 70-
93), and those recorded by Davidson (1952, pp. 76-117), are produced
by a different technique from that of the pecked engravings so wide.
spread throughout Australia. EKngrayings of the latter type, many of
which are of great age consist of a series of indentations or gashes
in the rock surface, probably made by a sharp-edged boulder held in
the hand. Plate 9D is an example of rock engravings from Rock
Cod Island in the Port Hedland area,

(1) Mountford (1929, pp, 243-248), revords a rock engraving from Panaramitee North in
South Australia that beurs a strong resemblance to that of a sea-going erocodile, "The
preseut habitat of this creature is now over 1,000 miles north, Later, Mountford and
Edwards (1962, p. 172), published a deseription of a marine turtle and a fish fron the
same wren, The present coastline ia over 100 miles from these engravings.

(2) ‘Mroughout this paper 1 have used the general term petroglyphs for all types of rock
markings; reserving the term engravings for those exainples where the designs consist
of & series of ponetures or indentations (pl, 9D)5 wud poundings where the dasigna,
a8 On Gallery Hill and Depuch Island, have been made by battering the rovk surfnee
(pl 9A, B, ©),

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS 9)

1S)
INDIAN OCEAN glfedecrey
x
Port Hedland
A .
a @ Wallaringa HS.
Portree, H.S\e Ind eeHS
2B
eSatiristHS, |& Lalla Rook. HS.@
Y
e Pilbara. a
@ Kangan.H. ¥

The Pinnacles.H.S.

Pyramid Hill @

Dalton Mine @

e
Soanville Mine

@ ) Pulcunna Hill <<, Abydos. H.S.
Woodstook “
@ SHERLOCK HILL 2
See Inset
Gallery Hill @
Woodstock @ \
wameranog @Sherlock Hill
Western Show Mine @ GALLERYHILL @
Fig. 1. Geographical map of area of research in north-western Australia.

9? RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ou the other hand, the rock poundings on Gallery Till are the
result of battering the surface of the rock with a rounded stone until
the dark-ecoloured patina is destroyed, leaving a white mark the shape
of the design (plate 9A),

Withnell (1901, p, 29), deserihes a technique of rock pounding
employed by the aborigines in the Rochourne area whieh is, almost
certainly, the same as that used at Gallery Will, We writes:

‘They (the aborigines), have many rock carvings; every hill
that lias suitably hard stone will have some kind of figure
tattooed thereon. They do not choose the softer rocks, and
mainly prefer basalt and granite. The method adopted is to
draw the outline with chalk or ochre and with a hard stone
hammer within the outline until the rock is fretted away about
an eighth of an inch deep f

Clements (1908, p. 9), also made a short reference to the same
subject,

The rock ponndings on Depuch Island deserihed us rock
engravings by Wickham (1842, pp. 79-83), and later by MeCarthy
(1961, pp. 121-48) and others, have recently been examined and
photographed in detail by the author,

A elose examination of these designs showed that they, like the
rock poundings on Gallery Hill, had been made by battering the
basaltic rocks of Depueh Island with a sharp-edged stone until the
surface was eroded to the shape of the required design.

The faet that the aborigines at Depuech Island used sharp-
edged stones and those at Gallery Hill, Roehbourne and in Central
Australia (mentioned later) only rounded boulders was, no doubt,
determined by the type of material available. Whichever type of
abrading tool was employed however, the final results were com-
paratively shallow markings of similar appearance, A comparison of
the photographs of rock poundings at Gallery Hill and Depueh Island
(plate 9 A, B, C), with a rock engraving at Rock Cod Tsland in the
Port Hedland area (plate 9 D), illustrates the wide difference between
the two types of petroglyphs,

Rock pounding, the same technique as that probably used by the
aporiginal artists at Gallery Till, is still a living art over a wide area
in central Australia (fig. 2) where the author has photographed and
later recorded the aborigines producing their rock pictures by batter-
ing or pounding the rock surfaces (Mountford, 1955, pp. 845-52).

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS 93

By using the same method of rock pounding I have been able to
produce desigus on the boulders of Gallery Hill which were, to all
intents and purposes, indistinguishable from those made by the
aborigines. It was necessary however, to use larger boulders and
strike heavier blows to break through the patina on the gramite
boulders at Gallery Hill than if was on the rocks of central Australia
where, apparently, the surface is much less resistant to erosion. On
Depuch Island, too, comparatively light blows with small sharp-edged
stones, broke through the patina on the basaltic rock.“

(2) Methods of Recording.

To record the rock poundings on Gallery Hill an eye-level camera
and colour film was used, care being taken that, as near as possible,
all exposures were made at right angles to the rock face on which the
design had been pounded. An Australian florin was included as a
seale, on most, but not all of the photographs. This is the reason why
the seales on figs. 4-6, 8, are shown as approximate,

INDIAN
OCEAN

“8 Port Hedland

NSS Rock Pounding-non-living art
G7 Rock Pounding -living art

Fig. 2.) Map of distribution of rock poundings.

To prepare the illustrations for pubheation a blaek and white
photograph was first made from cach colour fransparency, and the
florin, when it was included, enlarged to the same size in all prints.
GH) Mince going to press, Mre Tan Crawford (1964), tas pablished an excellent and accurate

description of the rock engravings of Dopuch Island. ‘The rack markings illustrated
hy Grawford would fall in with my deseription of rock poundings.

94 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The image of the rock pounding was then inked in, with continuous
reference to the colour transpareney, and the photograph bleached.
The resultant drawing was then mounted with the others to make up
the text figures.

By using these techniques if was possible to obtain a lar more
accurate representation of the rock poundings on Gallery Hill than
by any other method.

(3) Distribution of petroglyphs,

An examination of Davidson's map (1952, p, 77), shows that there
is not only fully identified petroglyphie site south of an east-west line
drawn from Carnarvon, on the west const of Western Australia, Nor
is if certain, with any degree of accuracy, that petroglyphs have been
found north of the southern edge of the Great Sandy Desert.

Although Davidson’s evidence on petroglyphs (mueh of whieh was
obtained by personal interviews with local residents), is often
indefinife, it has been possible to identify from his illustrations five
localities of rock poundings, i.e, Mount Mdgar and Parri Mucean,
more or less on the southern edge of the Great Sandy Desert;
Cooupoovey, in the Roebourne area and Williamsbury and Gifford Creek,
in the country north-east of Carnarvon. Witlmell (1901, p. 29) and
Clements (1903, p. 9), record what were probably rock poandings from
the Roebourne area and, Wickham (1842, pp. 79-83) and MeCarthy
(1961, pp. 121-48), from Depueh Island. Mountford (1964, pp. )
has reeorded rock poundings from Sherlock Hill, and Worms (1954,
pp. 1067-82), from Gallery Hull.

The distribution map, fig. 2, based on the research of the above
authors, from information gathered from local residents, and my
additional investigations suggests that all the petroglyphie sites in
Western Australia, north of Carnarvon and south of the Great Sandy
Desert | with the exception of the rock engravings in the Port Hedland
area recorded by McCarthy (1962, pp, 1-74), and others] can be
elassified as rock poundings,

Included on the same map are localities of the living art of rock
ponnding found in central Australia (Mountford, 1955, pp. 845-52).
Examples of this living art extend from the Granites gold field, in
north-western central Australia, to the end of the Mann Range on the
border of central and Western Australia, There is no doubt that
future research will reveal many additional sites in this area,

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS oS

ai |
| Not to scale

Mig. 3. Rock poundings at Gallery Hill.

96 RECCRDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

As, according to Davidson (1952, p. 112), what is probably the
sume type of rock pounding extends eastwards to Opthalmia Range
Gap on the upper reaches of the Fortescue River in Western Australia,
and only 600 miles of almost unknown country separates it from the
living art of central Australia, it is more than likely that future
researeh will link the eastern and western areas. Such a link, coupled
with Withnell’s and Clement’s evidence that rock pounding was 4
living art at Roebourne within this century, would suggest that the
rock poundings at Gallery Mill have been made during comparatively
recent times,

(4) Description of Rock Poundings.

As the rock poundings on Gallery Hill are numerous, only a
limited number are illustrated on figs. 3-8. This selection however
may be taken as representative of the whole series.

(a2) Complex designs of men and women with exaggerated
genitalia.

(b) Simpler representations of men and women.

(c) Simple designs, in which figures of human beings are
reduecd to a series of lines.

(¢) Curvilinear abstract patterns without any obvious meaning,

(e) Creatures,

(a) These decorative rock poundings of men and women are more
numerous at Gallery Will than any other desien. In general the men
have exagverated penes, such as figs. 8D, K and O; 4A, B, H, J, and
M; 5B, G, J, L, N, O and Q; 6D, K; and 7B. The women, too, are
shown with much enlarged vulvae having, in a nuniher of examples,
lines leading from them. Fixamples are figs. 3h, J, M, and P; 4P;
and 6C). Some of my informants considered that these lines
represented rine, and others, menstrnal fluid.

Almost without exception, the rock poundings in group (@) showed
men and women in strong action, often in the most decorative positions,
They usually have long thin limbs and, in most examples, only two
fingers on each hand, although some have three or more. A number
of these figures are also wearing attractive head-dresses.“!

CG) Withnell (1001, p. 89) and Clements (1908, p. 9), vefer to the rovk markings at Roebourne
as depicting men and women in vulgar gttitades. This appenrs to be a chavacteristie
of the rock poundings of north-western Australia,

() Worms (1954, p. 1075, figs. A, BR) Ulustrates a number of these bead-dresses, Ho links
some of these with the gurmangara—l do not feel this is proven.

° © ppmak SCALE IN_INCHE:

Fig. 4, Rock poundings at Gallery Hill.

98 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(b) ‘Throughout the rock poundings on Gallery Hill are a number
of more or less static figures of men and women, usually without
highly exaggerated genitalia and head-dresses, Some are illustrated
on figs. SL; 41K; OK; and 6A, U. Worms (1954, p. 1078) who also
refers to some of these markings, considers that they are older than
group (a).

(c) This group consists of a number of much simplilied repre-
sentations of human beings skilfully reduced to a series of lines. Fig,
3G represents a man wearing what is probably the ceremonial engraved
head ornament, fi, and holding a stiek or a shield in vither hand.
His penis has been extended to form a meandering pattern, Fie. 3H,
probably depicts a man with a large penis. Fig. 5K is a particularly
simple rock pounding. Nevertheless it is possible to recoguize a man
with a long penis wearing a head-dress and carrying a boomerang in
one hand. Figs. 6G and Tare two more simple figures, The first,
with two fingers on each hand, is made up entirely of a cirele for a
head and narrow single lines for the limbs and body; the second
(fig. GE), with a head-dress of radiating lines, is carrying a weapon
in one hand. Fig. 7A depicts an armless individual, with the legs
turned sharply upwards, wearing a long head-dress. Fig, SL, a much
simplified design, almost certainly illustrates a long-legged human
bemg. The upper eurvying lines represents a head-dress, and the two
lower lines, the arms.

There ave a few examples of over-carving among the roek pound-
ings on the northern side of Gallery Hill, Wherever this has happened,
the older figures are indicated in the illustrations by a series of dots,
Most of the more ancient human figures (figs. 31, P and 41) are
weary a form of head-dress that is not present on any of the figures
in full line. It is possible that these rock poundings are examples of
an earlier phase of the art of Gallery Hall. On the other land, the
design of a parthy defaced man earrying a boomerang in either
hand (fig, 6(°) is almost identical with another in full line (fig. 41),

(¢d) The simplest and, without doubt, the most ancient forms of
rock pietures on Gallery Hill (fig. 8) were found sparsely seattered
around fhe base and on the eastern end.

In general these poundings consist of abstract civeular and
curvilinear patterns. There are, however, two linear designs (fig. 8A
and N), the former of which may be either an elaborated hnman
figure or a lizard, and the latter, perhaps, a series of emu tracks.

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS 99

Fig, 5. Rock poundiugs at Gallery Hill.

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(e) The rock poundings depicting creatures form a small propor-
tion of the engravings. There is a cnrious bird-like figure, wearing a
long head-drvess at 6P;'" two kangaroos at GR, T; a bandicoot-ike
creature at 6Q; a probable freshwater crab at GS and a curious
unidentified creature at 6M. There is a snake at 3b, a non-homan
figure nnder the three women at SB, and what may be a grub-like
creature at 5M, The three dotted figures at 7B are of some interest,
Qn the one hand they resemble a fresh-water turtle, whieh is present,
in the rivers and, on the other, some sting-ray like ereature whieh
belongs to the sea,

(5) Sequence of rock poundings

As inentioned earlier, Gallery Hill is a large oval pile of boulders
with the major axis lying in a north-south direction, The most
complex rock pounding’s (figs. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7), are grouped exelnsively
on the north-easterly, northerly and north-westerly sides, and the
siinple abstract patterus (lig. 8) scattered sparsely all around the hase
of the hill. On the northern side many of these simple designs (shown
as a series of dots) are partly obsenred by move complex figures,
ie., figs. SA, B, FY J, O, P and 50). These simple poundings are the
only ones present on the southern end,

The more complex ponndings, being lighter in colour, stand out
élearly against the dark-coloured rock (plate 1A) but the simpler
forms, being patinated to a greater or lesser degree, are much darker
in colour,

At present, three sequences of these simple figures can be reeog-
nized; the abstract patterns shown on fig. &, and those partly covered
by fig. 3A, B, Fo and O, and 5Q); a more advanced type under the more
complex figures at figs, 3, P; 4K; 6C; and fig. 7B. Worms (1954,
p. 1078), considers that my fig, 6A belongs to an earlier phase.
A detailed analysis of the markings on a number of sites within the
same area will probably establish a number of definite sequences,

(6) Origin and meanings.

There is a tendency on the part of some investigators to accept
the statements of aborigines as absolute fact, whereas they may have
no specific knowledge, but merely be expressing au opinion, This has
happened to me both at Gallery Hill and, many years earlier, at Red
Gorge in South Australia (Mountford and Fdwards, 1965, in press).

(©) Wonnms (1954, p. VOTI) considers that this design represents woman. This may be so,

Pig. 6 Rock poundings at Gallery If}.

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Not to scale

Fig. 7. Rock poundings at Gallery Hill.

When I asked the local aborigines about the origin of the rock
pictures at Gallery Hill, I was told that they had been made by the
Minjiburu, a group of mythical women whom the aborigines believe
had created most of the topographical features in the surrounding
country.

Later, one of the old men, in conversation, said to me:

‘Them fellows say Minjiburu women made those marks but
they’re only guessing. We blackfellows don’t know who made
them; we only think it was the Minjiburuw.’

To find out whether there was any reference to rock pounding'’s in
the Minjiburu myths I recorded a long series of chants describing the
travels of these women. The results were entirely negative.

Worms (1954, p. 1082) considers that the most recent layer of
poundings on Gallery Hill are connected with the gurangara cult
which, according to him, moved into the area from the east during
historical times. He bases his assumption that according to him, as
the gurangara ceremonies terminate in ritual coitus, and that as a
number of the rock poundings at Gallery Hill show men and women in
that act, those rituals and the rock poundings are associated.

An examination of Worm’s illustrations (plate Ile, d; 2d; and
3a, b), shows that he has based his hypothesis on faulty information.
He quotes his illustrations as—

*. . . engraved men and women in circumstances connected
with the sexual act . . . J am of the opinion that these coitus

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS 103

engravings are early reflections of the gurangara. That is the
reason I have called them the gurangara petroplyphs.’

Yet plate le, d is, according to his caption, a ‘Frieze of men’, (see my
fig. 3D) and his plate 2d, a woman and a dim figure of a man some
distance apart. In his plate 8a, the figures are not copulating, although
they may be preparing to do so (see my fig. 4H), and his plate 3b
is a male figure and what may be a female, but they are certainly not
copulating. This examination of Worm’s illustrations shows the
hypothesis that the gurangara cult and the rock poundings at Gallery
Hill are associated is based on a single uncertain design (7.e., my
fig. 4H) depicting coitus.

Nevertheless, I did find a clear-cut illustration of coitus at Gallery
Hill (fig. 7D), and McCarthy (1961, p. 27) has illustrated a number of
men and women at Depuch Island in the act of coitus.

Because of the conflicting and somewhat indefinite evidence it
would not be safe at present to assume that the rock poundings at
Gallery Hill, Sherlock Hill or Depuch Island are linked with either the
myth of the Minjiburu. women or the gurangara cult. But, on the
other hand, it would be equally unwise to deny categorically that it
was not so until much more information is available.

The vitality, beauty and wide range of designs at Gallery Aull,
Sherlock Hill and Depuch Island, and at other localities in the rock
pounding area of north-western Australia, suggests that some new and
powerful cultural influence must have stimulated the aborigines to
develop a petroglyphic art form that is more varied and decorative
than elsewhere in Australia.

The fact that the present-day aborigines have lost all memory of
the origin of these rock markings does not indicate great age. Both
Stanner (1956, p. 52) and Mountford (1965, p. 24) show that the
aborigines, having no history in our sense of the word, quickly discard
all knowledge of past events.

(7) Summary

The petroglyphic art of Australia consists of two forms, the rock
engravings and the rock poundings.

Rock engravings, widespread throughout Australia, are made up
of a number of closely-spaced indentations or punctures in the rock
surface, that have been cut with a sharp-edge stone tool. It has been
shown that many of these engravings are of great age.

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL. ROCK POUNDINGS 105

Rock poundings, on the other hand, are produced by battering the
surface of the rock with a boulder until the dark-brown patina is
destroyed, leaving the design as a white mark, This technique is a
living art in central Australia.

There is a wide range of pounded designs on the rocks of Gallery
Hill. The most numerous of them are the decorative and vital rock
pictures of men and women often with exaggerated genitalia and head-
dresses of many designs. There are also static figures of human
beings, simple pictures of men and women made up of remarkably
few lines; abstract curvilinear rock poundings and a few representa-
tions of the creatures.

Our present knowledge of the petroglyphic art of north-western
Australia suggests that the rock engravings are confined to the coastal
regions adjacent to Port Hedland, and that the art of rock pounding
extends to the south and east of that locality.

It is possible that future research will link the living art of rock
pounding in central Australia with that of north-western Australia.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

My thanks are due to the Wenner-Gren Foundation of New York,
to the Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies and the Social
Science Research Council for the funds that made it possible for me
to carry out the research in this and other units of aboriginal art in
north-west Australia. I am also grateful to Mr. Reginald Sherlock,
both for his hospitality and his kindness in transporting my party to
the rock pounding site at Gallery Hill; to Mr. KE. Roberts, District
Officer of Native Welfare for his kindness and assistance; to the
Director of the South Australian Museum for the use of his facilities;
to the Principal Librarian of the Public Library of South Australia
for photographie supplies and the assistance of his staff; to Miss
Brenda Hubbard for many of the tracings and to Miss Margaret King
for her help both in the field and her assistance in the preparation of
this paper.

REFERENCES

Clements, K., 1903: Ethnographic Notes of the Western Australian
Aborigines. Int. Arch. Ethnogr, Leiden, 16.

106 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Crawford, L, 1964; Report on the Aboriginal Rock Engraving
"GE Depuch Island, Western Australia. Spee. Publ. No. 2,
W. Aust. Mus.

Davidson, D. S8., 1952: Notes on the Pictographs and Petroglyphs of
Western Australia and a discussion of their affinities with
the appearances elsewhere on the Continent, Proc. Amer.
phil. Soe. Philadelphia, 96, 1.

MeCarthy, F. D., 1961: The Rock Engravings of Depueh Island. Ree.
Ave Mus. Sydney, 25, 8.

1962: Rock Hngravings at Port Hedland, North-Western
Australia, Kroeber Anthrop. Soe. San Francisco, 26.
Mountford, C. P., 1928: Aboriginal Roek Carvings in South Australia.
Rep. Aust. Ass. Advane. Sei., Hobart, 19,
1929: Unique Kxample of Aboriginal Rock Carving at
Panaramitee North. Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 53.
1995: An unrecorded Method of Aboriginal Roek Markings.
Ree, 8. Aust. Mus. 11(4),

1965; Ayers Rock, its People, their Beliefs and their Art,
Sydney.

1965: Rock Poundings on Sherloek Hill, Abydos Station,
N.W. Aust. Antiquity Cambridge (in pres).

Mountford, C. P. and Hdwards, R., 1962: Aboriginal Rock lngraving's
a Hixtinet Creatures in South Australia, Man, London,
62, Article 174.

1965: Rock Kngravings in the Red Gorge, Deception Creek,

Northern South Australia, Anthropos, St. Augustin 1965
(in press).

Petri, H. lH. and Sehultz, A. S., 1951: Pelsgraviernugen aus Nord-west
Australien. Zeitserift fur Ethnologie, Berlin, 76(1).

HXPLANATION OF PLATE 9

PLATE 9, ABORIGINAL PETROGLYPITIS,
A. Rock poundings, Gallery Hill,
B, Close-up of rock poundings, Gallery Hill,
©. Roek poundings, Depuch Island.
D. Rock engravings, Rock Cod Island, Port Hedland,

, Puatre 9

5)

Vou. 1

UM

S.A. Muse

AC.

Re

MOUNTFORD—GALLERY HILL ROCK POUNDINGS 107

Stanner, W. H. K., 1956: The Dreaming. The Australian Signpost,
Sydney.

Wickham, Capt., 1842: Notes on Depuch Island. Journal of Royal
Geographic Society, London, 12.

Withnell, John G., 1901: The Customs and Traditions of the Aboriginal
Natives of North Western Australia, Roebourne.

Worms, E. A., 1954: Prehistoric Petroglyphs of the Upper Yule River,
North-western Australia. Anthropos, St. Augustin (49).

RESUME

L’art pétroglyphique de |’Australie se compose de deux formes—
les gravures en pierre, et les fondus en pierre.

Les gravures de pierre, agées de bien des années, consistent en
quelques impressions serrées dans la surface, faites par un outil affile
en pierre.

On produit les fondus de pierre en battant la surface jusqu’a la
destruction de patina, ce qui laisse le dessin comme une marque
blanche.

Ce journal discute les techniques de production, la distribution, les
origines, les significations et la succession des fondus de pierre que
Von trouve A Gallery Hill, du nord-ouest de l’Australie Ouest. Ceci
deeristet en détail les dessins que l’on y trouve.

FISHING RITES AT BE-MALAI, PORTUGESE TIMOR

By MARGARET J. E. KING

Summary

This paper describes and illustrates the sacrificial rites and ceremonial fishing activities
witnessed by the writer in August 1960 at the estuary in Be-Malai in central Timor. The
region in which Be-Malai is situated is bounded on the north-west coast by the Ombai
Strait and, landward to the south-east by: the confluence of the rivers Lois and Be-Bai.
These rivers form the main hydrographic basin of Portugese Timor. (Map. Fig. 1.)

A mountain chain runs parallel to the coast, the principal peaks of which are, Kotabot
(518 m.), Saniran (759 m.) and Samoono (729 m.) which lie to the south-west of the
estuary. Ingerhitoe (464 m.) is situated on t he coast to the north-east of Be-Malai, and
the peak Atabai (991 m.) dominates. the inland area to the west of the river Lois,

The area of Atabai is the home of one of the two groups of people taking part in the
rituals to be described, their name being derived from the peak, The other clan —known
as the men of Balibé, live in the flat inland region behind Kotabot and Saniran.

Along the coastal area of Be-Malai, bounded by Cape Fatue Sue on the north-east and,
for 160 kms. In a south-westerly direction to the outlet of the river Be-Bai, the off-shore
shows markedly more shallow than in the adjacent coastal areas. For some 32 kms.
Inland the country is equally flat. The abovementioned mountain chain rises abrubtly
from this level plain.

The area in which the festival of Be-Malai takes place is dominated by the mountain
Samono. The salt-water tidal flats of the Be-Malai estuary teem with fish of excellent size
and quality and exceptionally large prawns. The sea-going crocodile, also present in
reasonably large numbers, is regarded by the peoples of Atabai and Balib6é as a mythical
ancestor,

The rites described in this paper, practised by the Timorese clans of Balibé and Atabai at
Be-Malai, apparently of great antiquity, commemorate the myth of the creation of Be-
Malai. (Be—water; Malai—foreign.) These rites take place every four years, usually on
the August 29" and 30", but this date is governed by the appearance of dead or dying fish
and prawns floating on the water. This the Timorese take as a sign that the power of the
Lulic (supernatural influence) in the water is waning and requires rejuyenation. When I
observed these ceremonies they had been advanced to August 19" and 20" for this
reason. If the rains have been exceptionaly heavy the festival is occasionally held within
the four year period. However, according to my informants, this occurs but rarely and
then only at the exrpess command of the Rai-lulic of Balibé after due discussion with the
chieftains of Atabai and Balibd. These chieftains are responsible for the assembly of their
people along the banks of the estuary, to recreate the myth and participate in the two days
of continuous fishing which follows the successful conclusion of the sacrificial rites.

FISHING RITES AT BE-MALAI, PORTUGUESE TIMOR
By MARGARET J, KE. KING
Plates 10-11 and text fig, 1
CONTENTS
Introduction and geographic detail.
(a) The myth.
(b) The rites.
(c) Deseription of ceremony.
(d) Keonomic aspects of the fishing ceremony.
(e) Funetion of the ceremony.
Summary,

Acknowledgments.

SY THAILAND \ ip 2
\ A A
LAOS VIETNAM Mn (PHILIPPINES

|
Uy CAMBODIA L y

SQUTH CHINA SEA

a

EX

PACIFIC OCEAN

f/ HY ~ }
(CELEBESY

INDIAN OCEAN . — ‘ FLORES SEA

WEST PACIFIC AREA

SCALE — 15000000

Fig. 1. Area map and inset of region in Timor connected with the fishing rites
of Be-Malai,

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

This paper deserihes aud illustrates the sacrificial rites and
ceremonial fishing activities witnessed by the writer in Angust 1960
at the estuary of Be-Malai in central Timor, The region in which
Be-Malai is situated is bounded on the north-west coast by the Ombai
Strait and, landward to the south-east, by the confluence of the rivers
Lois and Be-Bai, These rivers form the main hydrographic basin of
Portuguese Timor. (Map. Fig. 1.)

A mountain chain runs parallel to the coast, the principal peaks
of which are, Kotabot (518 m,), Saniran (759 m.) and Samono (729 1.)
which le to the south-west of the estuary, Ingerhitoe (464 m.) is
situated on the eoast to the north-east of Be-Malai, and the peak
Adahai (991 m.) dominates the inland area to the west of the river Lois.

The area of Atabai is the home of one of the two groups of people
taking part in the ritnals to be deseribed, their name being derived
from the peak, The other clan—known as the men of Balibé, live in
the (lat inland region behind Kotabot and Saniran.

Aloug the coastal area of Be-Malai, hounded by Cape Faine Sue
on the north-east and, for 160 kms. in a south-westerly direction to
the outlet of the river Be-Bai, the off-shore shows markedly more
shallow than im the adjaeent coastal areas. For some 32 kms. inland
the country is equally flat, The abovementioned mountain chain rises
abruptly from this level plain.

The area in whieh the festival of Be-Malai takes place is
dominated by the mountain Samone, The salt-water tidal flats of the
Be-Malai estuary teem with fish of excellent size and quality and
exceptionally large prawns, The sea-going croeodile, also present in
reasonably large numbers, is regarded by the peoples of Atabai and
Balibé as a mythical ancestor.

The rites described in this paper, practised by the Timorese elans
of Balibé and Atabai at Be-Malai, apparently of great antiquity,
commemorate the myth of the ereation of Be-Malai. (Be—water;
Malai—loreign.) These rites take place every four years, usually on
August 29th and S0th, but this date is governed by the appearance of
dead or dying fish and prawts floating on the water, This the
Timorese take as a sign that the power of the Lute (supernatural
influence) in the water is waning and requires rejuvenution. When
! observed these ceremonies they bad been advanced to August 19th
and 20th for this reason, Lf the rains have been exceptionally heavy
the festival is oceasionally held within the four year period. Tlow-

KING—FISHING RITES IN TIMOR TI

ever, according to my mformants, this oeeurs but rarely and then only
at the express command of the Razlulic™ of Balibé after due
discussion with the chieftains of Atabai and Balibé. These chieftains
are responsible for the assembly of their people along the banks of
ihe estuary, to recreate the myth and participate in the two days of
continuous fishing which follows the sueccess!ul conclusion of the
sacrifieial rites,

(a) The Myth.

There were once two great chieftains, one of Atabai and one af
Balibé. (Map. Fig. 1.) Beeanse there lad been much dissension
concerning the boundary lines between the two groups of peoples,
(hey met to discuss the just division of areas within the region. The
two men, inahle to reach agreement, fell to lighting with their staves,

While the fight was in progress a very aged woman appeared,
earrying on her head a large cooking-pot full of water, The chief
from Balibé struck her on the head with hig stave which broke in two
as it smashed the pot which she was carrying. The old woman
disappeared but the water from the broken pot flowed away to form
the estuary of Be-Malai,

(b) The Rites.

In former times a man lrom Balibé, renowned for his physical
strength, was killed as a part of the fertility sacrifice. T was told by
a Portuguese official that this enlt of human sacrifice was suppressed
by the Portuguese, following the 1769 consolidation of their colonisa-
tion of Timor, which commenced im 1522,°?

Before this time it was necessary for the man selected for sacrifice
to belong to the family of the chief of Balibé, But, it would seem
from the imformation gathered, that only rarely would an actual
member of the Rato (highest social caste) he sacrificed for, unless it
was obvious that a ato was an outstanding physical specimen, a
member of the Patcha (mobility ranking immediately below the Rato)
would be chosen, and formally adopted as the son of the chief of

daily lite of the clan,

(2) Bearing in mind muonerous reports of other substitution suerificial rites throughout the
world, wand the facet that To was unable to obtain any precise information from
alternative sourees (0 confirm or deny this stiutement, suggests ib may be a rationalization
davelopad over a condderable period of time. It is doubtful that the ediet against
human suerifice could have been suceessfaully imposed on the Timorese prior to the
complete pucifiention of the islind by the Portugaese in L913,

112 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Balibo. While this conferred little advantage on the vietim, it was of
considerable benefit to his mother and her childven who were older
than the sacrificial vietim (younger children did not receive a rise in
status). The mother was presumed to have been a wife of the Chief
and therefore, theoretically, her sons were in line to inherit the estates,
and her daughters free to marry into neighbouring Ratlo families.
In practice this rarely oeeurred, for the ‘sons’ would be called upon
to defend the honour of their ‘father’ upon mmerous oeeasions (and
often he killed in the process) and the daughters would be married
off to their ‘brothers’—the natural sons of the chief—thus ensuring
that the ‘saered blood’ was not mixed with any other ruling family
or caste,

At the present time a black boar and a young female buffalo are
saerificed and the human vietim offered symbolically. Tf the chief of
Balibé has no son, the substitute is also only adopted symbolically
info the Rato tamily and any elder children of his mother continue
their Patcha status. The female buffalo comes from the herds of the
chief of Balibé and he and members of his family are the first to
partake of the flesh following the death of the sacrificial animal, The
symbolical ‘victim’, although technically part of the family, does not
receive any of this flesh. Tt is possible that the black boar also comes
from the herds belonging to the chief of Balibé, but of this T have no
direct information,

(¢) Description of ceremony,

On the day preceding the commencement of the rites and asso-
ciated festivities, members of both elans and all castes gather along
the hanks of the Be-Malai estuary; the people of Atabai on the
northern, and the people of Balibé on the southern, side,

A large communal rotunda is built on the Atabai side of the
estuary, and a bridge is constructed to span the water and facilitate
social intereourse between the Rato and Patcha eastes of Atabai and
Balibé, On the night before the sacrificial rites take place they mingle
freely in the rotunda, dancing and singing far into the night.

The bridge and rotunda are constructed from bamboo and
decorated with thin sheathes of young bamboo curled and fastened
with Hana vine,

(2) Until recent economic and soci! influences contributed to a break in age-old customs, it
was. virtually impossible for marriages to be contracted between members of differing
social stratum,

KING—PFISHING RITES IN TIMOR Ws

The footpath of the bridge is formed of split bamboo and the
handrails have archways of the same material fixed at frequent
intervals, These are decorated with spirals of bamboo. Krom the
apex of the areh is suspended a coconut shell filed with oil and having
a bamboo ‘wick’. These lamps are lit immedintely the sun has set,
and are constantly replenished throughout the night.

The banks of the estuary are also illuminated by placing large
bamboo poles decorated in a similar manner at one metre intervals
vn both sides of the water, A coconut shell to hold the of] is firmly
fixed in the hollow apex of the poles,

At the setting of the sun the ‘vietim’ (plate 10C') retires to a
specially prepared Palapa™) tut, which is built well away from the
two celebrating groups of people (plate 10B), From the time he
crosses the threshold of the hut he may not hold conversation with
anyone, nor partake of food or drink until the rites of sacrifice are
completed.

On the following morning the human ‘victim’ is led to the edge
of the water and struck o1 the head from behind with a long wooden
stuye, Falling, he feigns death and is immediately bound, covered
With a tarafa (a native fishing net), and a new and beautifully woven
tai (a long skirt-like garment worn by Timorese men), is folded and
placed beneath his head (plate 11A). This method of placing the tai
is identical with normal burial practice among these people, A small
black boar (Sus scrofa vittatus) is then brought close to him and
killed by having a long thin-bladed knife plunged into its heart, The
body of the animal is then pressed by the executioner cansing the
blood to well through the opening into the enrrent of the water in the
estuary, for approximately twenty minutes. This process is termed
by the Timorese ‘giving to the water’, During the time that the
blood of the pig is entering the water, there is complete silence among
the groups congregated on both of the estuary banks and the people
surrounding the ‘vietim' and the dead body of the boar (plate
1OA, plate 11AB).

When the blood has ceased to flow from the boar, a slow
procession of decorated boats (plate 10A, plate 11B) leaves the shallow
tree-lined channel in the south-east corner of the estuary, near the
point where the man has been ‘sacrificed’.

(4) Palapo is the terin used by the Timorese for poorer Ipss durihle types of bamboa
construction,

14 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

The lending boat (a, plate LOA) is decorated with arches of
spitalled bamboo, and a large bleached cotton fabric square of
Timorese weave is fastened, like a banner, across the prow of the
boat. On this are inscribed various signs and figures,

The Rate meu of Balibé are seated in the hoat, and the profuse
decorations almost obseure them from the gaze of the people on the
banks of the estuary,

Instead of wearing their nsual colourful costumes they are dressed
in while garments, and are without the usual wold, coral and goat-hair
ornaments indicative of the ruling caste of Timor.

Towed by the leading boat in the procession, is a second boat
(b, plate 104) carrying a fisherman standing in the prow, with his
taraja ready to fling into the water, Behind him is a portion of tree
stump (which, | was told, is very lulic)™ > also covered by a bleached
cotton cloth inseribed in a similar manner to the banner of the leading
boat (g, plate 10A). Kneeling in front of this stump is a Rato of
Balibé, The steersman sits in the stern guiding the boat gently with
amooth strokes from a large single paddle which enters the water
withont a splash. If is essential that the water is not disturbed in
any way.

The remaining boats in the procession (e, ¢, ¢, e, plate 11B) which
contain the Patcha of Balibé, all carry lulre sticks. These are branches
forked in a particularly significant manner!" and bear smaller pieces
of inscribed cloth (d, d, d, d, plate 11B), Unfortunately [ was unable
to obtain a elose enough view to observe the markings on these
‘banners’.

The boats containing members of the rulmg caste and nobility of
Alahai (f, plate 11B) are moored along the processional route, while
the sleano (lowest easte) of both clans line the estuary banks
(¢, plate LOA).

When the fisherman standing in the prow of the boat immediately
behind the decorated leader (a, b, plate 10A) casts his net mto the
water, every other fisherman in the following boats (e, ¢, ¢, ¢, plate
104, 11B) then follows his example. This is the signal for the ending

(4) Lulie—having sacred supernatural power. The term is used freely as an adjective and
noun, Sometimes, though less frequently, as a verb.

(6) Talio sticks, Ut is often diffienlt for the Timorese Lo acquire lulte sticks as they may
not be cut, or shaped artificially, and the stick must ‘‘speak’’ to the owner before he
can gequire if,

KING—FISHING RITES IN TIMOR 115

of the complete silenee which has marked the proceedings until this
moment. At the same time all the Atabai boats put out from the
shore to start fishing (1, plate 11B) and there is intense rivalry to
gain the honour of being first to reach the central channel of the
estuary,

The Alcano easte of both ¢lans rush from the banks into. the
shallows, dancing, shouting and singing; J was inlormed that this was
necessary ‘in order to stir up the nud and make the fish drunk’.

Once the leading fisherman of the processional boats (bh, plate 10.4)
has cast his net and made his first eateh, the fishing net (tarafa) is
removed from the ‘vietim’ and his bonds are ent; he rises to a
squatting position on the estnary bank and, holding lis nose in his
hand, keeps his back to the water,

Preceded by the Ratlulic, who carries an unsheathed ceremonial
sword on the open palms of his hands with his arms fully extended,
the ‘vietim’ walks along the ceremonial path to a sechided banyan
tree, still maintaining the stance shown at plate 10C, leaving the tat
on which his head has been lying, and a stave broken in two nuder
the larafa (net) on the bank of the estuary,

The female bulfalo tethered to the tree has been, before the
commencement of the ceremonies, a foeal point of interest to all
members of both elans but, from the commencement ol the rites
involving the shedding of blood, only selected adult males of Atabai
and Balibé (the two clans involved in the ritual) are permitted to the
stertficial area, and only the Rai-lulie may touch fhe buffalo.

Without looking at the buffalo tethered to the banyan tree, the
‘vietim’ goes to the opposite side and squats down with his back
against the same tree, still maintaining the ‘arms folded’ position
(plate 10C), with his head sunk upon his chest.

The Rai-lulic approaches and offers betel mut on the tip of the
ceremonin| sword first to the buffalo, and then to the male ‘victim?
who nceepts the offering directly into his mouth. The ‘vielim’ chews
for a few seeonds while the Rai-lwlic retreats still facing the man
then, turuing his head from vight to left, the ‘vietim’ expectorates
five times in a semi-circle, finally returning his head to a Srontal
position and letting his ehin fall npon his chest. He then continues
chewing,

(7) The uVantonigt path to the tree of sierifien is # show noon gy plate 10 (C). The stakes whieh
border the edges of the path are decorated in on similar fashion to the stakes whieh
line the banks of the oxtuary, but do wot earry lights.

116 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Returning to the buffalo, the Rai-litice inserts the ceremonial
sword into the vaginal passage and slowly increases the strength and
penetration of the sword thrusts until, advancing beyond the
duodenum, the point of the sword encounters and eventually pierces
the major organs of the body,

With cach bellow of the wounded buffalo, the ‘victim’ expeetor-
ates five times in a semi-circle, When the animal has finally died,
and heen disembowelled by the Mai-lulie, the ‘victim’ rises from his
squatting position and, picking up the entrails, walks to the water's
edge to ‘offer them to the water’, This offering is made in a similar
manner 10 that of the pig’s blood, 7.e., 11 is allowed 10 float into the
current of the estuary before heing released,

Following this ritnal the Rav-lulic dissects the careass of the
buffalo and, after reserving certain portions for himself, hands the
rest in equal portions to the representatives of his own people, the
Balib6é. The ‘victim’, althongh a Balibé man, does not reeeive any
of the sacrifice.

The representatives of Atabai who have observed this part of the
ceremony are not handed any portion of the buffalo,

The ‘victim’, although now free to walk along the estuary banks,
observing the fishing and partaking of the eatch, may neither partiei-
pate, nor handle the live fish.

(d) Meonomie aspects of the fishing ceremony.

The entire populations of Balib6é and Atabai fish continuously for
two or three days following the conclusion of the sacrificial rites,
Quantities of fish and prawns are caught in all stages of growth, but
only the biggest of the catch is immediately utilized, and no attempt
is made to preserve the surplus for tuture use. The smaller speeimens
eanght are thrown upon the estuary bank to ret in the sun.

In view of this wanton wastage and the apparent lack of
appreciation of the dangers of overfishing in the area, it is fortunate
that fishing only takes place at widely spaced intervals.

(e) Function of the ceremony.

The fishing rites of Be-Malai have a two-fold significance, To
commemorate the myth of the creation of the estuary and to perform
the ceremony which, it is beleyed, will ensure a continuation of an
abundant supply of fish at Be-Malai.

KING—FISHING RITES IN TIMOR 117

The ceremony also propitiates the salt-water crocodiles who
inhabit the estuary and the Ombai Strait so that, during the days of
festival, fishing may be safely undertaken,

It is significant that fishing does not take place at Be-Malai except
at the times of festival,

The Timorese of this aren display a reverence and fear toward
these crocodiles and, should a woman be taken by one of them, her
male relatives consider this to be a sign that the ancestor is so well
pleased with her that he wishes to take her for a wife. If a male is
seizedL he is usually considered to have offended his crocodile ancestor
by displaying too much arrogance in his manhood,

SUMMARY

This paper deseribes and illustrates the fertility sacrifice of
Be-Malai, Portuguese Timor, It records the area where the rituals
are carried out, the associated myth and rites and comments on
the functions of the ceremony and its economic and religious
implications.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

T should like to reeord my indebtedness to Governor Themudo
Barata and the members of his Administration for the great assistance
given to me during field work in Timor. My thanks are also due to
Hedley C. Brideson, Principal Librarian and the Libraries Board of
South Australia for their generous help and interest in my work;
and to Charles P. Mountford whose advice and encouragement has
proved invaluable to me.

RESUME
Ce journal décrive et illustre la cérémonie de péche et la sacrifice
de fécondité de Be-Malai, en Timor portugais. Ceci enregistre l’endroit
oi arrivent les rites, le mythe et les rites associés de la fonetion de
la cérémonie et des ses implications économiques et religieuses.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 10 TO 11
PLATE 10
(A) Front section of procession of decorated boats belonging to Halo and Patcha castes
of Balibé.
(B) Hut ocenpied by Balibé man prioy to rommenecement of ceremony,
(C) Balibé man nsed as ‘sacrifice’.
PLATE 11
(A) Covering the ‘vietim’ with a fishing net (farafa).
(B) Rear section of procession of decorated boats belonging to Mato and Pateha castes
of Raliha.

+

Rec. S.A. Mussum Vow. 15, Puare 10

Ty = ests
Rec. S.A. Mussum Von. 15, Phare 11

_—

TWO STONE PESTLES FROM WESTERN PAPUA AND THEIR
RELATIONSHIP TO PREHISTORIC PESTLES AND MORTARS
FROM NEW GUINEA

BY GRAEME I. PRETTY

Summary

Record is made of a stone pestle collected near the Oriomo River, south-west Papua, in
1928. The owners’ story that it came to their fathers from the north-west is supported by
study of the distribution of stone implement trade routes in Western Papua and by a
report of another pestle recently discovered at a locality on the headwaters of the Fly
River. The second pestle is also described. The significance of both is discussed in
relation to other pestles and mortars from New Guinea.

TWO STONE PESTLES FROM WESTERN PAPUA AND THEIR
RELATIONSHIP TO PREHISTORIC PESTLES AND MORTARS
FROM NEW GUINEA

By GRAEME L. PRETTY, Curator or ArcHanoLocy,
Soura Avusrratian Museum

Plates 12-13 and text fig. 1-2

SUMMARY

Record is made of a stone pestle collected near the Oriomo River,
south-west Papua, in 1928. The owners’ story that it came to their
fathers from the north-west is supported by study of the distribution
of stone implement trade routes in Western Papua and by a report
of another pestle recently discovered at a locality on the headwaters
of the Fly River. This second pestle is also described. The signifi-
cance of both is discussed in relation to other pestles and mortars from
New Guinea.

INTRODUCTION

Many stone pestles, mortars and other objects labelled as
‘‘prehistoric’’ have been found in New Guinea over the last fifty years.
The present-day people frequently put them to various uses, though
betraying no certain knowledge of their original function. Of late,
these objects have been the subject of revived interest (Bulmer 1964,
Bulmer and Bulmer 1964, Chappell 1964, Galis 1964, Pretty 1964 a, b).
The following account describes two pestles, one of them surmounted
by the figure of a bird. Whereas the majority of these objects have
been recovered from the Central Highlands, the bird pestle was
collected in the far South of the Western Division, and therefore
presents a new facet to the problem of their distribution. The possible
route by which this specimen could have arrived at such a locality
will be discussed.

STONE PESTLE FROM WONITA, UPPER ORIOMO RIVER

This specimen (plate 12) is in the collection of Mr. C. W. Marshall
of Sydney, who has kindly permitted the writer to examine and
describe it. In 1928 Mr. Marshall was camped by Wonia near the

120 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

headwaters of the Oriomo River in south-west Papua (see fig. 2).
Pinoegali or Pininchelly, the site of an oil exploration bore, was just
by Wonia. His diary entry for Saturday 14th July, 1928, notes:

“Bought a most peculiar stone today of basalt—very
weathered. Unga [of] Wonia [village] gave it to me. It was
found [i.e. ‘tcame from’’; findim in Pidgin] near Pininchelly
(that [is] Wonia Bore). Tle calls it a totem signify[ing] a
(white) stone club. The Borum is the elub with » handle. He
showed me how this was grasped round the middle and used in
{he hand. Am very struck with the design’.

Marshall was then engaged on a cross-country traverse, while
surveying for Oriomo Oil Lid. He had been working in this area lor
about three months and had made it widely known that he was anxious
to acquire stone objects. This day (14th July, 1928), while sitting
in camp, the boss-boy informed him that some old men wanted to
speak with him. He consented, and a deputation of elders led by
Unga, one of his Wonia carriers, presented the specimen to him,
Marshall, in return, gave suitable presents of his own,

So far as he could ascertain they had used it as an exeention or
sacrificial club, Before this it had come to their fathers from the
north-west and belonged to something they had little conception of or
were reluctant to talk about. Sensing, from their clicking tongues,
that to press further would cause ill feeling, Marshall let the
matter rest.

These people had a story that in past times a woman also had
eome from the north-west, bringing bows, arrows, and knowledge of
fire to their lathers.

The Wonia pestle (plate 12, 183A) consists of a bird-like figure,
joined by a long stem to a bulbous base. The head and beak are well
formed and eye sockets are clearly discernible, The neek is long and
elongated and is continuous with the stem, ‘The outstretched wings
have sharply formed margins and eurve around the stem to form a
short, blunt, rounded tail. There is a faint flange separating the stem
from the bulbar base. Though almost perfectly symmetrical, closer
examination shows that a line running across the upper margins of
the wings does not meet a line through the neck and stem at right
angles. The bulbar base is slightly flattened behind.

PRETTY—STONE PESTLES FROM PAPUA 121

It measures 30 cm high and 10 em across the wings. The base
is $-10 em in diameter. The broken tip and underside of the heak
was the result of an accident shortly alter it was brought back to
headqnarters,

Marshall had been anxious to learn something of the nature of
the stone and, at the time, passed it on to Oil Company geologists for
identification. They snevested andesite as being the most likely rock
type. ‘This general identification is confirmed by Dr. D. W. P. Corbett,
Curator of Minerals and Fossils, who suggests that, in the absence of
a thin section, the composition would seem to be largely of felspars,
very heavily weathered to clay, together with dark minerals, A
xenolith, probably of epidote, can be seen projecting from the external
surface of one of the wings (plate 13A). Unfortunately the state of
weathering gives no real indication of its age.

Casts of it are in the South Australian Musenm collections and
are registered as No. A55227,

STONE PESTLE FROM OLSIVIP, FLY RIVER
MKWADWATERS

Of close velevance lo study of the Wonia pestle is the reeent
diseovery of another pestle (plate T8B) near Olsivip (Olsobip), Upper
Fly River, Western Papua. Lt was obtained by Patrol Officer R. Hoad
of the Territory Administration and brought to my attention by Mr,
B, Craig of Telefoinin (personal communication, 22nd October, 1964).
It was reported to have heen dng up somewhere in the vicinity before
being placed in the men’s louse. [{ measures 18 cm in length, and
Sem diameter at the bulb, which has been criss-crossed with bands of
red paint. It was deseribed as made from a white coloured macro-
erystalline material—perhaps a granite (B. Craig, ibid.). The
specimen was said to be intended for the Port Moresby Museum,

The unexpected discovery of an arehaeologieal stone pestle at.
Olsivip gives some substance to the report that, before the last War,
stone pestles were found at nearby Bolivip by Mr. Ward Williams
of the Oroville Gold Dredging Company (personal communication,
Mr. J. A. Davidson).

DISCUSSION
The two specimens just described are paralleled by many pestles
from other parts of the territory. They do not seem to be a culture
trait of the present-day people and are usually found in the bush or

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

‘pepnyaur jou ere AYIPBVOL Ureyedun go sueuadg ‘(snamiads v0.17}
JO SUOTPBAPUI9UOD APBoTpUL SpoqmmAs LoF1e] BI) Savptour puv sapjsad vuoJs FO UoTNGrysip Suraoys vaums) May fo dey

TL BLT

PRETTY—STONE PESTLES FROM PAPUA 123

dug up in native gardens, often to the mystifieation of their discoverers.
A considerable variety of these prehistoric atoue objects have heen
deseribed; eluh heads, perforated blades, rings, and carvings in human
and anima) forms. The most characteristic types of this assemblage
are the pestles and the mortars, which have been fully discussed by
Bulmer and Bulmer (1964, pp, 67-72). The Wonia pestle is almost
exactly paralleled by a magnificent specimen described by Captain
F. R, Barton (1908).

A tentative distribution map of the pestles and mortars has been
prepared and includes all published specimens presently known to me
(fig. 1). Lt also includes three unpublished records, two of which haye
just been deseribed, while the third, a figure of a bird with broken
sfem from Liiiagam, was examined only briefly helore its owner look
it back to the Territory im 1962. These objects scem to be densely
distributed in the Central Highlands of Australian New Guinea, being
at present concentrated in the Wahgi Valley, and extending south-
castWard alone the Central Ranges to Kokoda (8° 52/.8., 147° 45’ E.),
They ave also frequently found along the north- eat coast where the
high land comes close 10 the sea, and sare seattered throughout the
Hastern Archipelayo and in the Solomons, where they may prove to
be related to the por pounders of Polynesia, They do not appear to
ocenr in the Trobriands or the Admiralty Islands, They are almost
unknown from sauth of the Central Monntam Range, though
Williamson (1912, pp. 75- a°) has reported specimens from the ridges
beyond Matuln (8° 30° 147° 01 K). Both the ‘pestles’* from
Papua reported by De wi (1905), Livens (1911, p. 80), MeCarthy
(1949, p. 158, plate LX, fig, 9), and the stone howl reported by Biihler
from Yule Island (1946-49, fig, la, ef also Strong, 1924, p. 98, fig. 2)
seem to fall into a different category. These new records, together
with the specimens from the Wissel Lakes (3° 55’ S., 186" 15’ K.),
West New Guinea, reported by Galis (1964, p. 255), suggest that these
objects may oceur over a far wider area than has been supposed. Atry
couclasions about (he signifiesance of this distribution should be left
in abeyance until the iitervening arvas are more closely explored.
As can be seen from the tap, the position of the Wonia pestle is quite
apart from the rest of the distribution of these objects, even in its
wider sense. Tt will be the aim of the following diseussion to say
something of how the Woma pestle could have arrived at such a
locality,

Although the funetion of these objects is asually lost, the present-
day people will put those they find to use, wsually as magie stones, but

124 RECORDS QF THE 8.4, MUSEUM

sometimes in other ways, e.g., fillme morlars wilh water for mirrors
(Chinnery, 1919, p. 272; Murray 1982, p. 18; Williams 1930, p, 37;
Williamson 1912, p, 76), The Wonia pestle, although typologically
quite clearly a pestle and known by the natives to be of exotie origin,
was said to have been used as an exeeution or sacrificial club. How-
ever, there is no instance of ritual killing recorded for the Oriomo area.

In their mode of manufacture, the pestles and mortars appear to
he made by the same pecking and polishing technique as that most
recently employed in New Guinea stonework. Stone implements in
New Gninea are derived from two principal sources, quarrics and
river pebbles. Blades from quarries are made either from faked stone
blanks, shaped and ground to an edge on the spot, or traded ont in
their Haked lormi and brouglit to a finish in surrounding areas (Vial,
1940). Otherwise, blades are made from water-rounded river pebbles,
either polished into shape directly, or split and chipped into the desired
shape before polishing (le Roux 1948, pp. 42410), Clubs also appear
to have been made from rounded pebbles only, and not from (uarried
blanks. Haddon (1900) reported several instances of hardly altered
pebbles, bored and fitted to handles, serving as clubs. Williams (1930,
p. 83) describes how Orokaiva men manufactured pineapple chib-heads
from river pebbles,

Although if is possible that some may have been lnshioned from
qaarry blanks, vet from their form and variation in size, one would
expect pestles and mortars also be be made from rounded river
pebbles. In Chappell's (1964) aeconnt of a modern instance of mortar
mannglacture, the specimens were described as having been made from
sandstone river bonlders, Hence, in seeking the most likely source of
the Wonia pestle, one should look within the whole context of stone-
work in that part of Southern New Cuinea,

Western Papua, from the edge of the mountain plateau sonth to
the const, an area which for administrative purposes is known as the
Weatern Division, is alike in the almost total ahsence of Lard stone
suitable for making stone implements (Murray, 1914, p, 28; Tladdon,
1917, p. 194; Wirz, 1922, p. 114; Landtman, 1927, p. 835 Williams,
1929, p. 392; Williams, 1926, p, 108). Consisting, for the most part
of flat swatopy areas and lakes, it is intersected by two large winding
rivers, the Fly and the Strickland, with their tributaries, In the far
Sonth, alone the coast of the Western Division, a low synelinal ridge
brings the limestones well above sea level and diverts the Fly River
eastward sud into the Papuan Gulf, Kven here, save for the small

PRETTY—STONE PESTLES FROM PAPUA 125

granite outcrop at Mabaduan, there is no hard stone. The peoples of
the area are for the most part headhunters and nomads, moving
from hunting shelter to longhouse in lengthy dugout canoes. They
extend westwards well into Indonesian territory, at least as far as the
Bilanden River (Thomson 1953), and may all have the common origin
postulated by Wirz (1933, pp. 114-115). Living as they do in an area
devoid of hard stone, they are entirely dependent on trade and
conquest for their stone implements. Therefore, by study of the
literature, it should be possible to determine both the routes along
which stone implements were distributed throughout the area, and the
sources of their manufacture. Further, these trade routes, being
physiographically influenced, are likely to hold as much for prehistory
as for the immediate ethnographical past. It may then be possible
to say something of how the Wonia pestle came to its final destination.

When the distribution of stone implements and the respective
trade routes are plotted on a map (fig. 2),“ it will be seen that there
were two main sources of manufacture; one in the area of the Fly
River headwaters and the other in the Torres Straits islands.
Although there are new records of blade quarries in the former region,
they will be described elsewhere, and only that evidence which relates
to stone pebble sources will be discussed here.

The headwaters of the Fly River have pebbles in abundance.
Austen (1923, p. 344) reports that on the Ok Tedi tributary (6° 10’ S.,
141° 08’ E.), clubs were made locally. Davidson (personal communi-
cation, 10th December, 1964) was in the same area and saw clubs made
from river pebbles and perforated with a long stone. At a point on
the Upper Fly where this progress was impeded by shingle bars,
D’Alberfis (1880, Vol. 2, p. 86) made his largest collection of stone
implements. Less direct evidence is Murray’s (1914, p. 25), who
writes that, as he travelled downstream, the stone blades tended to
become smaller in size and more highly valued by their owners.
Although there are great quantities of river pebbles (Wilkinson, 1888,
p. 203; Hides, 1936, p. 40), there is no evidence of stonework along
the thinly populated Strickland River. In Torres Straits, according
to Landtman (1927, p. 34) implements were made from volcanic
pebbles taken from the seabed, This is supported by Haddon (1935,
pp. 76-77), who described what must have been an extensive stone
implement manufacturing station on Long Island.

(1) Such a distribution map of the Western Division is all the more pertinent since insufficient
material foreed Haddon to omit it from his 1900 paper.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

\TELEFOMIN

aN ©
™ / souvie

6) / Cou sivipy
4
N\=-=

SCALE IN MILES

We:

L<CKLAND

oe
s

GULF OF
PAPUA

ZA BLADE

© disc cLusB

% STAR CLUB

OPINEAPPLE CLUB |, 10°
© BALL CLUB

O Quarry

TORRES STRAITS
140°

143°

Fig. 2. Map of Fly River area in southern New Guinea showing the distribution of stone
implements and their trade routes,

PRETTY—STONE PESTLES FROM PAPUA 127

On the other hand, there are a few reports of local manufacture
in this region. Landtman (1927, p. 287) reports granite stones with
sharpening marks from Mabaduan, where the granite outcrops as
Mabaduan Hill. Marshall (personal communication, 5th September,
1962) found a grinding stone in an abandoned village seven miles east
of Wonia. Williams (1929, p. 384) and Wirz (1946, p. 80) mention
grinding stones for blades which, though of unknown origin and
revered as cult objects, could still be evidence of local manufacture.

From the manufacturing stations in the Fly headwaters the trade
routes took a south-east direction following the trend of the river.
Wirz (1922, p. 114), in noting the presence of stone blades on the
coast between the Bian and Merauke Rivers, distinguished two types,
one of which came from the Fly River to the north-east. Williams
(1936, pp. 416, 428) reports that stone implements came to the south-
coast hinterland from the mid-Fly, though a few come from the coast
itself. According to Marshall (personal communication, 19th October,
1962) stone implements entered the Oriomo district through the Fly
River people, who traded them from up-river. Chalmers (1903, p. 122)
describes the Kiwai people of the Fly Estuary as obtaining their stone
clubs from up-river to the west. Trade routes also branched out from
the Torres Straits islands to the south coast, but their relative
distance from the distribution of pestles and mortars precludes the
possibility of the Wonia pestle having originated there. Therefore
the major direction of entry of stone implements into the Wonia area
would seem to be from the north-west along the length of the Fly
River. Even if a specimen such as the Wonia pestle were not manu-
factured in the region of the Fly headwaters, it is likely that it was
distributed from the same source. This, together with the discovery
of a similar specimen at Olsivip, would tend to confirm the old men’s
story that the Wonia pestle came to their fathers from the north-west.

CONCLUSION

In an area devoid of stone and whose natural routes were the
waterways of the great rivers, stone implement trade routes of
former times should bear close relationship to contemporary routes
of distribution. Therefore the Wonia pestle would probably have
travelled down to the Oriomo area from the Fly headwaters, as
is hinted by local tradition. The recent discovery of a parallel
specimen at the source of the Fly adds to this supposition and relates
the Wonia pestle more closely to the ‘‘prehistoric’’? pestles and
mortars of the Central New Guinea Highlands.

128 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Dieses Papier beschreibt cine Pistille die nahe dem Fluss Oriomo,
in Siid West Papua, in 1928 erhalten wurde, Der Bericht der einstigen
Besitzer, dass dicselbe von ihren Vorviitern vom Nordwesten kam, ist
bekraftigt bei Studien der Verteilung von Steinimplementwegen in
West Papua, ebenso durch einen Report einer weiteren Pistille, welche
jiingst in der Umgebung der Quellwasser des Flusses Fly entdeckt
wurde. Diese zweite Pistille ist ebenfalls beschrieben. Die Bedeutung
beider, verglichen mit anderen Moérsern und Pistillen yon Neu Guinea,
ist ebenso behandelt.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

T am indebted to Mr. C. W. Marshall for permission to publish
an account of his pestle, and for the notes, maps, and extracts from
his journals. Mr. B. Craig of Telefomin, T.P.N.G., supplied field
data and has kindly provided the photograph of the Olsivip specimen
(plate 18B). Mr, J. A, Davidson of Melbourne also provided data.
Mr. N. B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology, was of much assistance
in the preparation of the manuseript.

REFERENCES

Austen, L. A., 1928: Tedi River district of Papua. Geogr. J., London,
62(5): 335-349.

Barton, F. R., 1908: Note on stone pestles from British New Guinea,
Man, London, 8, no, 1: 1-2, and pl.

Bihler, A., 1946-1949: Steingerite, Steinskulpturen und Felszeich-
nungen aus Melanesien und Polynesien. Anthropos,
Freiburg, 41-44: 225-274, 577-606 and 4 pls.

Bulmer, R., 1964: Edible seeds and prehistoric stone mortars in the

highlands of New Guinea. Man, London, 64, no. 183:
147-150,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 12 TO 18
PLATE 12
Stone pestle from Woiuia, south-west Papua, three-quarters viow.
PLATE 1%
A. Stone pestle from Wouia, south-west Papua, back view,
B, Stone pestle from Olsivip, western Papua (phote.; B. Craig),

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. 15, PLrate 12

Ree. S.A. Museum

Von, 15, Puarr 13

CM

Ce ae
a
ae m

:
“3
Sy,

PRETTY—STONE PESTLES FROM PAPUA 129

Bulmer, S. and R., 1964: Prehistory of the Australian New Guinea
Highlands. Amer. Anthrop., Menasha, 66(4): 39-76,

Chalmers, J. (late), 1903: Notes on the natives of Kiwai Island, Fly
River, British New Guinea, J. R. anthrop. Inst., London,
33: 117-124.

Chappell, J. M. A., 1964: Stone mortars in the New Guinea highlands:
a note on their manufacture and use. Man, London, 64,
no. 182: 146-147.

Chinnery, FB. W. P., 1919: Stone work and goldfields in British New
Guinea. J. R. A, anthrop. Inst., London, 49: 271-291,
and pl.

D’Albertis, L. M., 1880: New Guinea, what I did and what I saw.
London, 2 vols.
De Vis, C, W., 1905: Papuan Charms. Ann, (Jd. Mus., Brisbane, 6:
32-35, and 2 pls.
Galis, K, W., 1964: Recent Oudheidkundig Nieuws nit Westelijk
Nieuw-Guinea. Bijdr. Taal-, Land-, Volkenk., The Hague,
120(2): 245-274 and & pls.
Haddon, A. C,, 1900: Classification of the stone clubs of British New
Guinea. J. R. anthrop. Inst., London, 30: 221-250, and
5 pls.
1917: Note on the Gogodara (Kabiri or Girara), Man,
London, 17, no, 182: 198-194.
1935: Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Kapedition
to Torres Straits. General Hthnography. Cambridge, 1.
Hides, J. G., 1936: Papuan Wonderland. Wondon.
Landtman, G., 1927: Kiwai Papuans of British New Gianea, London.

Le Roux, (. C. F. M., 1948: De Bergpapoea’s van Nienw-Guinea en
hun Woongebied, Leiden.

Lyons, A. P., 1911; Magisterial Report for the Lakekamu Goldfield,
Papua Annual Report 1911, Melbourne: 75-80, and App.
D (1).

MeCarthy, F. D., 1949: Some prehistoric and recent stone implements
from New Guinea, Ree. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 22: 155-163,
and + pls.

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Murray, J. H. P., 1914: Visit to the Fly and Strickland Rivers. Papua
Annual Report 1913-14, Melbourne: 17-25.
1932: Stone mortar on the Kiapou. Papua Annual Report
1980-31, Canberra; 13.

Pretty, G. L., 1964a: Stone objects excavated in New Guinea. Man,
London, 64, no, 138: 117,
1964b: Stone figure of a crested cockatoo from Melanesia.
Man, London, 64, no. 220: 183-184,
Strong, W. M., 1924: Stone mortars and pestles in More roek paint-
ings from Papua, Man, London, 24, no, 74: 97-99, and pl,

Thomson, Donald F., 1953: War-time exploration in Duteh New
Guinea, Geogr. J., London, 119(1): 1-16 and 6 pls.

Vial, L. G., 1940: Stone axes of Mount Hagen, New Guinea, Oceania,
Sydney, 11(2): 158-163, and pl.

Wilkinson, C. S., 1888: Report on the geological specimens from New
Guinea, collected by the exploring expedition of the
Geographical Society of Australasia. Trans. R. geogr.
Soe. Anst, N.S.W. Br., Sydney, 3-4: 203-206.

Williams, F. K., 1929; Rain-making on the River Morehead. J. R.
anthrop. Inst., London, 59: 879-397, and 2 pls.

1980: Orokatra society. Oxtord,
1936: Papuans of the Trans-Fly. Oxford.

Williamson, R. W., 1912: Mafulu mountain people of British New
Guinea, London.

Wirz, P., 1922: Die Marind-Anim von MHolliindisch-Siid-Neu-Guinea,
Die materielle Kultur der Marind-anim. Hamburg, 1(1).
193835: Head hunting expeditions of the Tugeri into the
Western Division of British New Guinea. Tijdschr. ind.
Taal- Land- en Volkenk., 73: 105-122, and pl.
1946: Hiniges iiber die Steinverehrung und den Steinkult in
Neuguinea, Verh. naturf. Ges. Basel, 57: 75-117.

STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING AMONG THE NAKAKO,
NGADADJARA AND PITJANDJARA OF THE GREAT WESTERN
DESERT

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

This paper describes observations at a native mining place in the Mount Davies area of
South Australia where Nakako and Pitjandjara men quarried stone for the making of
hafting of stone knives, which they call ['tjimari]. It also records the making of ['kandi
"tjuna], hafted stone adzes (or chisels) among the Ngadadjara near Gill Pinnacle, east of
the Rawlinson Ranges, Western Australia. A supposedly new technique of pressure
flaking is described and named as the rolling pressure technique.

The Nakako tribespeople first encountered white men in 1961. Four years previously
deserted camps had been seen by the writer during a visit to the Blyth Range. Their
territory lies south of the Blackstone Range, and west of Bell Rock Range, in Western
Australia.

There is general discussion on some Australian archaelogical implement types which
parallel those obtained from these people, and in particular an account is given of the
implement called [kandi] by living Western Desert folk.

STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING AMONG THE NAKAKO,
NGADADJARA AND PITJANDJARA OF THE GREAT
WESTERN DESERT

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Sourn Ausrranian Museum
Fig. 1-28

SUMMARY

This paper describes observations at a native mining place in the
Mount Davies area of South Australia where Nakako and Pitjandjara
men quarried stone for the making and hafting of stone knives, which
they call [’tjimari]. It also records the making of ‘kandi ‘tjuna),
hatted stone adzes (or chisels) among the Ngadadjara near Gill
Pinnacle, east of the Rawlinson Ranges, Western Australia. A
supposedly new technique of pressure flaking is deseribed and named
as the rolling pressure technique.

The Nakako tribespeople first encountered white men in 1961.
Four years previously deserted camps had been seen by the writer
during a visit to the Blyth Range. Their territory lies south of the
Blackstone Range, and west of Bell Rock Range, in Western Australia.

There is a general discussion on some Australian archaeological
implement types which parallel those obtained trom these people, and
in particular an account is given of the implement called [’kandi] by
living Western Desert folk.

INTRODUCTION

In November 1963 opportunities occurred to see some stone-
implement inaking techniques aud visit a native nuning place for
implement stone. This occurred when we were visiting two groups
of aborigines, still nomadie in a large tract of Western Australian
eountry between the Rawlinson and Blackstone Ranges and ranging
eastward into the Tomkinson Ranges, at the far north-western corner
of South Australia. The oceasion was the combined excursion to Gill
Pinnacle and to Mount Davies by Drs. W. V. Macfarlane and J. R.
Sabine of the National University in Canberra with Messrs. P. Aitken,

132 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Assistant Mammalogist and the writer, of the South Australian
Museum, <A preliminary report of the work of Dr, Maefarlane.
dealing with water and salt metabolism of the aborigines, has been
given in Man in the Pacific, Honolulu (3 April, 1964) and the results
of our blood group studies have appeared in the Journal Oceania
under the joint authorship of Simmons, Graydon and Tindale (1964,
39(1) pp. 66-80),

In over a dozen previous visits to the Western Desert the present
writer has had opportunities of seeing implements made and in use.
Some observations have been recorded, Tindale (1941, 1957) and
Tindale and Noone (1941).

Qn earher occasions native mines near Maedonald Downs, Haast
Bluff, Mount Liebig and Yuendumn in Central Australia had been
visited with aborigines who have known how to make stoue implements,
but im general they were persons who had not practised their craft
for some years. In the present instance the quarry or mine was in
use by men still depending on its stone for their tools: hence its
partie ‘ular interest. The study of this mine has afforded much satis-
faction since the results suggest that what had been learned at other
mining places was equally sound and useful,

In this paper no attempt is made to trace the history of knowledge
of stone-implement making techniques, even of the few types discussed:
the principal side references are to earlier personal observations and
to a few notes directly relevant to observatious made during onr 1963
fieldwork,

The following are the principal stone implements of the Nakako,
Neadadjara and Pitjandjara peoples and the terms they apply to them.
It happens that their names are all held in common :-—

‘kandi ‘mern, a general purpose adze-knife, hafted, with T'riodia
resin, on to their spearthrower (‘meru, ‘mero).

‘kandi ‘tjuna, a halted adze or ehisel; either single or double-
ended, in the latter case one end is usually an engraving
tool.

‘tjimari, a resin-hatted knife.

‘kandi ‘minu, simple flakes used for the subineision operation.

‘kandi ‘piturn, sharp-pointed flakes, often with resin handle,
used in blood letting from the arm, [’‘minata]; the sonree
of this blood is secret and sacred to men; the flakes are also

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 133

used in cutting the subincised urethra to obtain blood; this
is regarded as a less secret practice.

‘jerabuta or ‘kandi ‘jerabuta, cirewncision knife; traded from
the North.

‘tjanari, nether stone of any pair used in milling or food pound-
ing; also any stone used as a working bench, hearth stone,
or ironing stone in the preparation of T'riodia resin,

‘mirl, hammer stone.

miri, licking stone, a special type of millstone used in the
crushing of oily seeds fvom the surface of which the bruised
food is then licked, From its mode of use it develops
special angular polished facets.

Four principal sources exist for the raw materials of these
implements :
(a) Stone mines or quarries.
(b) Detrital fakes resulting from insolation or frost shattering
of suitable siliceous rocks.

(c) Boulders and pebbles in ereek deposits.

(d) Obsidian of meteorie origin (native name [’mapunba] in
the Neadadjara tribe).

FIELD WORK AT KUDJUNTARI

Our first field station was on the plain south-east of Gill Pinnacle,
about a mile from the pool at the base of a waterfall, native name
Kudjuntari, at the eastern end of the Rawlinson Ranges (24° 04° 8.
Lat. x 128° 50’ E. Long.). We were with a party of about twenty-five
nomadic Ngadadjara people, including a family from the Victoria
Desert area west of Lake Christopher. Other folk arrived from the
eountry north of the Western Petermann Ranges the day after we
appeared, having been driven south by lack of water in that direction;
the early summer season had been without rain.

Older men showed us the making of and uses for hafted stone
adzes (or chisels), ones mounted with [’keiti] (Triodia) resin and
placed on the ends of handles they called [’tjuna]. These tools are
termed [’kandi ’tjuna], occasionally [‘tjunakand1).

134 RECORDS OF THE S.A- MUSFUM

Brew KK. Husaaag

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 135

Cutting blades for imust of these adzes were insolation flakes
found among the detrital rocks im creek beds running down from the
mountains. A few randomly struck flakes olf a dark grey rock,
seemingly igneous, were brought in by one man and nsed as cutting
blades on several chisels that were made while we were at Kudjuntari.
He told us he had obtained them at a mine. Unfortunately it was not
possible to visit the place but it was deseribed to us as west of
Kndjuntart waterhole, The rock there ts called [‘malurakandi |, und
is said to be ithe possession of the males of a species of bandicoot
I‘makira |, of which the females are known as [/walilja]. An elaborate
myth was recorded about the |’walilja],

Mie. 1 shows three views of a hafted adze or chisel, as made and
used by r jupurnla (his male elass name), a man of about 60 years
of ave of the country west of Lake Christopher on the western border
of Ngadadjara territory, He picked ap the stone for this [’tjana
‘kandi] as a random flake ol opaline silies at [’Patnpiri], Kathleen
Range, while engaged in a kangaroo hunt on the 7th November 1963.
The following day le made the |’tjuna] handle from |’kurara |
l’wakalbuka |, a kind of ironwood (Acacia). He had sent his wife the
same morning to the southern slopes of Gill Pinnacle to gather Triordia
erass resin for the haft. The [’tjuna] had on it lines ineised by
runing the edge of a stone fake |/kandi] around the ends of the
shalt. These lines are called [‘yamiri] and on tools, and partienlarly
on spears, they serve as identification marks.

When found as a natural flake, 10 he hafted on flis implement,
it was (liscoidal in shape. T saw it before it was halted into the
\’keiti], There was no delicate trimming on its cutting margin when
first inserted in the resin, but shortly afterwards during use in the
making of the landle for a further chisel, it was sharpened. Tn doing
this the eutting edze was tapped, using the rounded snrface of one
end of the second handle whieh Tjupurnla was shapiig with its atd.
This single act of resharpening resulted m the apperance on the
chisel edge of a regular series of tiny semi-circular stepped flake
aears, It should be noted that even before this sharpening, the edge
which met the wood, was slightly convex and took off a very neat

Pig. 1-2, Hafted adaes or chisels |‘kandi /tjann |.
Wig, 1. Ngadadjara tribe example made by Tjuparaln of Lake Christopher wren (spect
mew No, A.b4726 in 8, Aust. Museu).
Wig, 2. Nakuke tribe example made and ongrayed with [’kare] or * teroek’! designs, by
Tjibukudu of Marutjara (ASd7Nd), (Reales to he rear jn contimeters.)

136 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

smooth shaving. Some archaeologists may not appreciate that the
test for a good chisel edge is the sighting of if in the plane at whieh
the stone meets the work, and that the native craftsman holds his
chisel up to eve level in this plane to check on its suitability. This is
a better test for a good native chisel than any other.

During the sharpening process Tjupurula did not remove the stone
from its setting in the resin. Among the Walpiri, at Yuendumu,
skilled old men often remove the stone from the resin and reset it
at right angles to the cutting position, before they (ap off their
sharpening flakes. This is considered partieularly necessary when
drastic resharpening is desirable; less so when only minor retouch is
required. Among the Walpiri the sharpening is often done with taps
from the flat face of a hunting boomerang. Such weapons are unknown
in the Ngadadjara territory. The removal of trimming flakes in this
mariner tends to give the profile of the well sharpened stone, in section
normal to the cutting edge, an outline which is coneave: » similar
silliouette to that of a hollow-ground razor.

Several other Neadadjara [‘kandi ‘tjuna] were made during our
stay and are now in the South Australian Museum collection, The
technical processes involved in making them were filmed in 16 mm
Kodachrome,

At Mount Davies also both Pitjandjara und Nakako men were
found to possess and use [’kandi ‘tjuna|. Fig. 2 shows seven views of
a double-ended one (specimen A.54764) made by 'Djibukudu, a man
of about 55 years of age of the Nakako tribe. This man was born at
Mamutjara, a water sonth-west of Bell Rock Range in Western
Australia and he was over 50 years of age when he saw his first
white man,

The designs on the handle made by Tjibukudn represent |‘Iearo |
or creeks. They had been cut by him in two stages; first lie had
marked them with a stone flake, using the teehnique of rocking the
tool from side to side to lift off slivers of wood, The design had then
been more deeply ineised with an engraver of stone, similar to that

Hig. 4-0
Wig, 8. [andi tjumaj, Pitjandjara tribe, nme by Malutjukirrupa, (lree views
(A.HATAN),
Wig, 4. [/Miri] or **Heking stone’ used by Malutjukurupa em lariner at Pudang
puluuj nitive mine, two views (A444),
Vig o Piljandjarn tribe knife, called (“ft pimaei |, mene by Malutjukneupa ae MC, Davie
(Malupiti] ani sharpened by the ** rotting pressare’? feelniqne (Ad 784),

147

MAING

IMPLEMENT

NDALE—STONE

an

Tetrion Ki Hiagaan

138 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

at one end of the present tool. It should be noted that giant carpet
snakes, called |‘leirn|, or [‘leiro| are associated in native mind with
permanent waters and creeks and the |’karo| design therefore is one
also ealled [‘leirn ‘walka], i.e, snake mark,

The principal |’kandi] stone of the Tjubukudu implement was a.
random flake which had had some large secondary flukes removed
from it before if was halted. An adveititions flake scar can be seen
on oné margin. ‘he crigraving tool at the opposite end appears to
have been a thin |’kandi| flake which had already been used and had
been ‘Sworn’? by re-clipping ou two margins. However it might have
been made for the purpose; there was no opportmuity to enquire and
imfortunately the halting of it was not witnessed. Before being given
to the author this specimen was lreshly ruddled by the owner. The
use of red ochre in this manner is an almost invariable practice among
Desert aborigines, especially when they have ouly lately come into
contact with Muropeans. [t is a normal custom whenever weapons
and implements are given in trade or as gifts such as are passed from
one ta another during arrangemeuts for marriage, ete.

Fig. 3 gives three views of a Pitjandjara adze or chisel made by
Malutjnkurmpa at Mount Davies, This [kandi ‘tjumal, (now A.54758)
has a knob af one end. This swelling facilitates ifs being carried
tucked under a hairstring belt; in addition to its uses as a ehisel or
adze it may he thrown as a club, Again the |’kandi] was a random
flake, one of those struek off at the Pulanj-pulanj mine (deseribed in
later paragraphs) and it had been trimmed to a eutting edge, using
a small hammerstone no more than two inehes long, alter it had been
set in the resin of the handle. There is a casually developed striking
platform at one end of the eutting edge but this does not possess a
revular symmetry such as is characteristic of the [’tula], which is a
truly knapped implement of peoples living further east in Australia.
Beeause if possesses this platform, however irregular and adventitious,
some may eonsider it to be a borderline or ‘*transitional’? example.
Piljandjara men live nearest to the Lake Mvre Basm area and some-
times obtain [’tula] type implements from their eastern neighbours,
so they are aware of such implements.

Mr. P. Aitken recently pieked up 200 archaeological stone
implements on a lately occupied site near Tallaringa, east of the
present border of Pitjandjara territory. There was no local anplement
mine, all the utilized stone being imported material. Ninety per eent
of the adze stones were [’tula]; all but two very worn, and all were

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 139

of the milky white opaline silica of the Stuart Range country to the
east; the rest were [’kandi], all on random flakes of jasperoid
chaleedony typical of the country far to the west. There was in
addition one flake of the type of stone found at Eucla.

There are three hafted adzes of [’/kandi]-stone-bearing type from
Nannine, Western Australia, in the Leipzig Museum (their Nos. Au
240, 241, and 238). They were collected by a Mr. Streich. I saw
them and made the following notes in 1936. The last numbered one
has a small knob at one end of the shaft much as in the specimen
figured here from Mount Davies.

Each of the handles of the Nannine specimens is longitudinally
grooved with many rather continuous shallowly engraved lines 0.3 em
in diameter. Au 240 is grooved for the whole visible length of the
wood; this specimen is 84.5 em long, the length of resin haft being
8.0 em and there is 0.5 em of visible stone. The general diameter of
the handle is 2.4 em and the shaft is very slightly curved. The cutting
edge is transverse and straight with secondary trimming on the stone.
The other two specimens are shorter, 75.5 and 74.0 em in length with
about 10 em of the stone-bearing end not longitudinally grooved.
The cutting edges are convex and have been secondarily trimmed,
evidently while in the haft. At the best cutting angle all three of
these chisels present a smooth and slightly convex cutting edge to the
work surface.

There are several dozen other hafted specimens of this [’kandi
‘tjuna] type in the South Australian Museum collection and their
distribution ranges from near the Western Australian coast, as far
east as the Western MacDonnell Ranges and the Musgrave Ranges.

NATIVE MINE AT PULANJ-PULANJ

On 13 November 1963 we were able to see aborigines gathering
stone for implements at one of their mines. Several of them went
with us to the quarrying site, including three Nakako and one
Pitjandjara man. Malutjukurupa, the Pitjandjara, took along a
[‘miri], ‘‘licking stone’’, as a hammer, it weighed 3302. (fig. 4).
Tjibukudu the old Nakako individual relied chiefly on blocks of matrix
when rough-trimming the more desirable pieces he obtained.

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ten miles south of our camp at Malupiti on the plain west of
Mount Davies there is a creek, not yet named on official maps, which
flows south-eastward out of the Tomkinson Ranges, The mine outerop
is situated in Pitjandjara territory close to their western border with
the Nakako, whose eountry begins uear Bell Rock Range. There is a
roughly horizontal bed of white ehalecdonic silica exposed on both
banks and in the bed of the creek, at the native place known as
’Pulany ‘palanj)]. The approximate position is 26° 19 S. Tat. x
129° 8 BK. Long, Tt is considered an important local source of stone
for implements. here are said to be similar outerops near Bell Roek
Range in Nakako territory.

On arrival at Pulanj-pulanj two ol the vounger men pried out
slabs and fractured boulders of the siliceous rock up to two feet in
(iameter from the red earth eovered walls of the dry creek. Boulders
lying in the open were considered to he not suitable for attention,
The largest bonlders they eould lift they raised high above their heads
and hurled down on to the rocky pavement, attempting to shatter them
into smaller pieces. They endeavoured to stand on move elevated
places, seemingly both to inerease the effeet ol their throws and to
escape flying splinters of silies.

Smaller pieces were then struck, virtually at random, either with
the abovementioned hammer stone, whieh was passed from hand to
hand as required, or with a piece of the mother rock. When a
suitable-sized flake was detached by the hit-and-miss process, if was
set to oe side. When a boulder of particularly good stone was
diseovered it was alternatively hurled down and struck at with the
hammer until no further flakes could be obtained from the core which
remained, A sample core, at a stage when rejected, was a subspherical
mass seven inches in diameter, weighing 248oz. (specimen .A.54731
in the South Anstralian Museum).

The aim of the knappers seemed to be to obtain flakes from which
they could fashion subrectangular pieces with one thick obtuse longi-
tudinal margin, destined to he the back, and a thinner opposite margin,
the potential cutting edge of the implement.

Useful-seeming flakes, however irregular in shape at first, were
set aside until quite a series had accumulated. Then, using the
hammer, rough trimming was done on the best of them. Well over
two-thirds of the flakes were discarded in this phase of trimming,

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 141

The ones set aside for further development tended to be semi-circular
in outline; they were short blades measuring three to four inches along
one axis and one-and-a-half to three on the other and from one-half
to three-quarters of an inch in thickness. A few had remains of a
striking platform along the straighter and thicker side but in general
there were few indications of intentionally developed or planned
striking platforms; indeed the flakes had been detached from the
matrix in a variety of random ways. Hach man carried back to the
camp between a dozen and twenty pieces; these were chosen from his
second pile of better-shaped flakes during a final selection.

Viewed as a potential archaeological find, the researcher of the
future, if he discovered this mining area, after it had been used for
the first time would see the remains of a series of about 20 large
boulders up to a foot in diameter which had been broken into several
pieces and then abandoned. Half a dozen further boulders would be
found broken down into many smaller irregular pieces. Lying nearby
there would be a subspherical core-like block or two. From such cores
it would be difficult, perhaps, to break off any further smaller pieces.
This kind of core would be lying among a variety of pieces of broken
stone. Nearby he would find a series of perhaps 50 or more sub-
rectangular flakes. He would note that most of those of the general
dimensions of about four by two inches (10 em x 5 em) were absent.
There would be an abundance of small chippings. Finally nearby he
would find a dozen or more flakes, roughly of the order of two by four
inches, with a tendency to possess one blunt, thick margin and a
sharper somewhat more arcuate one opposite. He would not find any
worked flakes. He would see bruise scars on nearby rock surfaces
and perhaps would find a hammer stone with which knapping work
had been done (in the present instance one core, the hammer and
some discarded flakes were retrieved by the observer, but only after
it was clear that they were going to be left behind).

Unfortunately for the future archaeologist, the site we visited
had been worked over many times in the past. Some parts of it had
been subject to flooding and other earlier workings either had been
disturbed or washed away. Where earlier men had chosen higher
parts of the bank as workshop area their successive efforts had led
to the strewing about of an entirely confusing mass of debris of
all kinds.

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Baenoa K. Hussaan

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 143

The white implement stone of Pulanj-pulanj and its vieimity is
called [kandi ‘teilka| and its origin is ascribed, in Pitjandjara tradi-
tion, to a partly initiated ancestral Being, called “Minn, who lived at
Mount Davies, This man detected ring-vecked parrot men |’Padilka
‘wati|, eating the food of his country and attacked them. He eaused
hailstones to rain down and when they were maimed by the iey
missiles he used his [’winda] or heavy wooden javelin to stab and
kill the injured ring-uecked parrot men. The home of Minu was on
the Mount Davies Range, at Windalka; this is a hill to the south of
the plant at Malapiti lately used as an airplane landing field, and
near where we were camped. The term [’minu] is applied to all men
who have been civcumeised, but have not vet been snbjected to the
later rite of subineision. In Neadadjara stories Padilka men were the
bringers of the rite of subincision and they arrived from the north.

WESTERN DESERT HARTHD KNIFE
The word |‘tjimari] was spoken by a Neadadjara man in a text
being recorded on tape at Gall Pinnaele. This was a first appreciated
clue that the same form of knife used among the Mangala and others
of the Desert south-east of Broome, and there known as [‘jimari],
might be known also among the Neadadjara,

Very soon therealter we transferred to our second field station
west of Mount Davies in South Australia (26° 10° S. lat. x 129° 8 Ki.
Long.) where we found Nakako and Pitjandjavai men who were
familiar with the mannfacture and nse of these knives. They offered
to take us to their mining place at Pulanj-pulanj, as deseribed im the
previous section of this paper.

It soon became evident that knowledge of this type of knife, known
to the Nakake by the same term |[’tjimari], was widespread in the
Western) Desert, and T discovered that during the 1985 Expedition to
the Warburton Ranges I had already heard and published a
Negadadjara term |’japu ‘tjimari|] with a meaning of ‘stone used for
eutting’’, but had not then realized its true significance, [‘Japul) or

4

|’jabu] means ‘stone’.

Pig G4, Kaiwes valled [tjimari],

rig. 6. Pitjmidjarn exuoiple made by Majutjukurupa at Malupiti ot stone from Pulaay
pulauj, three views (Ad4¢738)),

Wie, 7. Nakuka example made by Tyihokuda, of Mamiutjarn, three views (A54738),
fig. 8. Another exumple, Pitjandjara, made by Malutjukurupa, three views (A54739).

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

L had already deseribed and figured speeimens (Tindale, 1957,
p. 13, Ya-e), of the Mangala knife or [’jmmari], had referred to and
figured a somewhal similar specimen made by a Piniubi man of the
eountry west of the MaeDonnell Ranges, and had spoken of others
used by Njangamarda, Njamal, Bailgu, Wanman and Indjibandi tribes-
people. [had also proposed the term jimari for use by archaeologists
in referring to archacological examples of the type, sueh as are found
in the Tartangan horizons of Kastern Australia (Tindale, 1957, two
papers),

In my notebook | found recently also notes and sketches of a
specimen (D2690) in the Peabody Museum, Marvard, of typieal janari
form; it is a random Hake made Irom pale translucent siliceous rock,
f.6 cm in transverse diameter and 5,8 em high of which 3.8 em is
masked by Triodia resin, According to their reeords if had been
eollveted by EK. Clement in 1926, from a member of the '*Qualluana’’
(sic) Le. the Nealuma tribe; [ presume their rendering is a mis-
reading of the incorrect version Gnalluma which T have elsewhere
seen aseribed to Clement,

Many, if not all of the hoard of large flakes described by Tindale
und Noone (1941) from Enela now seem fo me, after eritical
re-oxamination, to have been intended for hafting in the manner of
Nakako and Pitjandjara [‘tjimari|. The existence of a possible trade
route running in that direetion is implied hy a Nakuko myth and song
eyele (recorded on tape) which deseribes how Kite-hawk Beings ealled
[’paninka| had saved fire for mankind by resening it as it was about
to be drowned in the great southern waters by [‘keibara|, the Turkey
Bustard Being, There is a memorial to this great event in an arrange-
ment of pated stones at Mamutjara, which T saw during a brief
Journey down into Nakako territory with Mr. W. B, MacDougall
during our stay at Mount Davies, and lengthy tapes recording «a
Ngalea version of a similar song cycle were made more recently at
Yalata in October 1964, The Keibara song series is associated with the
flint gathering place at the western end of Wilson Bluff, east of Huecla.

It was possible to observe and film the making of [‘tjimari] hy
both Pitjandjara and Nakako men, The Pitjandjara individual
Malutjukurupa prepared several examples. Fig. 5, 6 and 8 depict
ones he made on 14 November 19638 from his stock of flakes obtained
at Pulanj-pulanj.. His equipment inclnded a hearth stone, a small sub
spheri¢al stone hummer (A.54825) of gneissie roek weighing 1loz., and

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 145

several adventitiously present smaller angular stones which played
minor parts as temporary hammers in trimming. With the hammer
he struck the blunt back-edges of the flakes to trim them to shape.
These roughly trimmed ‘‘backs’’ were then covered over with T'riodia
resin so that only the future cutting edge remained exposed. The
first knife he made (fig. 5) required little secondary work because the
primary flake was already thin and sharp. Delicate edge trimming
by rolling the smooth face of the hammer against the margin was
sufficient to prepare the cutting edge

The second example, fig. 6, was a thicker flake. The back required
little treatment, but the planned convex cutting margin needed many
trimming blows, more than 25 successive strikes with the hammer
being necessary. These produced a rather evenly spaced series of
sears and gave a semicireular outline to the cutting edge. Once the
desired shape was achieved by this trimming Malutjukurupa struck
off a series of very carefully spaced smaller flakes working from the
ends towards the middle of the knife blade. His blows were stzuck
obliquely and directed slightly away from the central point of the
semicircular knife edge. After covering the roughly-shaped back with
Triodia resin he critically examined the planned cutting edge, then
pressed the smooth surface of the hammer stone against it with a
rocking motion and pressed off a few small tertiary flakes.

All completed knives were painted over with a dull-coloured red
ochre mixed with water,

We learned that [’tjimari] should be kept wrapped up in eagle
down or underfeathers; several knives may be kept together and made
up into a package bound around with human hair string.

The old Nakako man Tyjibukudu made the [’tjimari| knife shown
in fig. 7 as one of several fashioned from the random flakes he had
brought back from Pulanj-pulanj. He made preparations to haft and
trim two of these knives on the afternoon of our return from the mine
but was out of Triodia resin. By the following morning he had
acquired an additional supply of [’keiti] and finished the placing of
resin along the roughly-trimmed back of the figured specimen (now
A.54738). In the field I had made an assessment that this flake had
been detached from a natural cleavage face of the stone but closer
examination suggests that it is more likely to have been made from a
piece taken from an old flake sear surface. The resin handle was
placed on the stone before any real secondary trimming of the

*

146 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

proposed cutting edge was attempted and it seemed it might be ready
for use without further effort. However, after looking at it, he elected
to trim it by striking at it with his hammer along most of the exposed
cutting edge. Strong blows were directed first at the middle of the
length of the knife edge, thus bringing into better shape the semi-
circular profile of the knife edge. His trimming method was less
systematic than was that of Malutjukurupa and his rule seemed to be
to hit successively at the highest projecting points until he had
achieved the desired symmetrical profile. He avoided striking off
flakes from that part of the edge where there was previous flaking,
in the form of ‘‘natural’’ scars; as it happened these were on the
opposite side of the margin. The final pressure flaking was then
executed by rolling a stone against the edge.

This work was done on the 14th November. There was a shortage
of |’keiti] in the camp. At the request of several men we made a
visit to Wingelina, about 20 miles away, using a four-wheel drive
vehicle, over rough country, to the nearest point where good [’keiti]

Brenos K. Huaaaro

Fig. 9-10. Small knives.
Mig, 9. Example of Pitjandjara |’kandi] without secondary work, made and used during
circumcision rites witnessed af Konuapandi, Musgrave Ranges, on 23 June 1933 (A.21645),

Mg. 10. Pitjandjara example of [kandi] made and used by Malutjukurupa; handle of
Triodia resin (A.54740).

TINDALE,

NT MAKING 147

resin was obtainable. At this place the process of T'riodia resin-
gathering was witnessed and. filmed. Viles of Tyiodia grass were
nladed on an area of hard flat termite mound and beaten with sticks.
The resinous dust was gathered, melted with a cool fire of strips of
burning mallee bark held over the dust, gathered up on stick handles
and compressed into cakes using hol stones as irons.

Some men who went part way with us on the journey gathered
white opaline silica implement stone at W ingelina and from these
further implements were made on other davs Of our stay at
Mount Davies.

SMALL KNIVES

Neadadjara, Nakako and Pitjandjara men all wear their hair
tied up ina elugnon (althongh this fashion is fast falling into disuse),
Offen they carry, tucked into their hair bindings of kangaroo fur
string, one or more gum-hafted small flakes [’kandi], (fig. 9). The
resin hafts sometimes haye hair or {ur fibres clinging to or melted
info theiv surfaces. These ‘kandi they use as general purpose tools,
also as spares for placing on the handles of their [’mern] or
spearthrowers.

The Wingelina Hfakes were all rather small and suitable chiefly
for the making of saw-like knives and small knives of this kind,
When new they are merely selected primary flakes, with a handle of
‘keiti]. This resin is placed on the potentially less attractive margin
and covers from one-third to one-hall of the edge of the stone. By
the time it is discarded after much use and resharpening the stone has
assuined a familiar archaeological form loosely deseribed as a
“seraper’’ or ‘“adze stone’* but usually it is not used up to the point
where if assumes the ‘‘burren adze’’ form because such a form
requires it to have been used as a hafted chisel or anata
cutting tool and reversed in setting as illustrated in fig. 19. Fig, 10
shows such a |’kandi] made by Malutjukurupa from one of the Jarger
picces of Wingelina stone, used, and resharpened, Straight-margined
knives like it ave used in making |’yamiri] lines and similar marks on
spear shafts, When the edges are trimmed so that they are serrated,
they serve very efficiently as saws. Fig. 11-14 show various other
halted specimens from the South Australian Museum collection, They
were obtained in Western Australia,

14% RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

ANS

bay

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 149

When blunted by use the resharpening of these originally simple
flakes is done in one of several ways :—

(a) By striking with another stone.
(b) Striking with a piece of hardwood.

(c) Pressing with a hardwood edge either to make a continuous
cutting margin or at intervals along the edge to make a
saw-like one.

(d) Pressing on the edge with a smooth stone, using a slightly
rolling motion to fashion a very delicate series of tiny
pressed-off flakes.

(e) Pressure-flaking by nibbling the edge with the teeth and
spitting out the detached pieces.

The smaller and more delicate the tool the more likely that. it
will be pressed rather than struck. All the above methods of
resharpening are known to Nakako men.

The making of such small gum-hafted knives is widespread, In 1938
a Tjapukai man at Mona Mona, on the Atherton Tableland, (Queensland,
took a small core of milky quartz rock (fig. 15) and struck off
several flakes which he halted with beeswax. Fig. 16 illustrates one
example. Such quartz knives were then still being used in the entting
of body cicatrices, Their name is [’ba:bulai]. He demonstrated only
the one method of sharpening, that of striking the edge with a
hammerstone,

Archaeological examples have been found. Fig. 17 illustrates a
recently discarded example found lying in a camp a quarter of a mile
from Erliwanyawanya, Musgrave Ranges, in 1933,

Fig. 11-14. Small resin-hafted knives.

Fig. 11, Retrimmed example with decoration of eagle down set in Triedia resin,
Kalgoorlie area, Cook tolleetion (A.387212).

fig. 12. Cireumeision knife [‘kandamu] with human hair incorporated in resin handle,
Bailgu tribe, Upper Portesene River, W. Australia; stone is from native mine at [’Tambasa],
a spring on Tambrey Station: this stone has a reputation for allowing quick healing of
wounds (A.45159).

Pig. 18. Cireumeision knife of Indjihundi tribe, Lower Fartesene River, also of Tambatha
stone; used near Roebourne during the initiations of December 1952 (A.45160).

Fig. 14, Circumeision knife of Pandjima tribe, Hamersley Ranges, W. Australia; their
name [kandi]; held with the chipped fare upwards when in use (AA45111).

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

TINDALF—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 151

Mr. Paul Lawson of the South Australian Museum staff, placed
his hand in a small hole in the eliff wall above an aboriginal rock
shelter at Mypolonga on the River Murray, Sifting through the dust
with his fingers he recovered two ernde resin-hatted flakes, one of
flint of the type fonnd in the South-Kast of South Australia and the
other of Mount Lofty Range quartz rock. These archaeological
examples were made at an unknown date in the recent past. The
floor of this shelter contained only debris of the latest or Murundian
eultire phase. They indicate knowledge of the use of such simple
tool flakes as far south as the vieinity of the Murray River mouth,
Neither of the Mypolonga examples showed secondary working and
if they had heen without resin hafts wonld have been ignored, as
“owuste Hakes’’, by the archaeologist. Our knowledge of them in the
living cullure warrants us regarding them as prepared but as yet
unused small knife flakes. Fig. 18 illustrates the flint example; the
quartz one ts so similar to the present-day Queensland example
(fig. 16) as not to require & separate illustration,

Quartz flakes showing few signs of secondary working but with
the edges dulled as if by use are found frequently on late
archaeological sites in South Australia, Often they are ignored by
those who ave mterested in collecting stone implements, It is possible
that these were hafted in like manner with resin, although nntil after
this paragraph bad been dralted no specimen had been found with
such a handle other than the abovementioned Mypolonga one. A
further example is now known trom Mootwingee, New South Wales
(A.59221), found with adhering remains of the halting resin,

According to Angas (1847, 1, p. 111) the Pangkala of the eountry
north of Port Lincoln ‘scraped [their spears] to a sharp point with
pieces of quartz’, Their spears were similar to those of Western
Desert peoples such as the Pitjandjara. They had composite shafts
with a single curved barb of hardwood, lashed to the wooden spear
{ip with kangaroo sinews. An indication that the Pangkala scraper

Mig. 15-18,
Wig. Lo. Milky quart, vore from whieh knife flakes were siruek, Monnitons, Queensland,
Tjapukui tribe CASTAOFY,
Wigs 16, Quarta knife Tlike, walled [*basbulat], from above core; hiatted with native
beeswax; used in -eutthing cWutrives (ABT),
Pig, 17, Arelaeologien! [’kandif-lype Ueke fonud daa late eump, Srliwanyawanya,
Misgraye Nanges, 1988 (A212), :

Wig, Tk. One of two hatted flakes touted ta tole in the elif? wall at Mypooraga, River
Murray, South Australia (AA2480),

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

was not the adze knile implement found on the spearthrower of the
Western Desert tribes is given by the fact that the Pangkala spear-
thrower is entirely without the grass tree resin knob on the handle
such as is found on those used by tribes north and north-west of
Spencer Gulf.

According to Angas quartz flakes also were used by the Pangkala
for the eutting of deep cicatrices such as they, and the Wirangu to
the west (personal observation) incised on the backs of their men in
the final stage of initiation, called [’Wiljalkanje|. At a specific stage
in the proceedings the ‘‘sponsors’’ of those to be operated on (in the
Wirangu the potential wife’s father and persons called by the same
kinship term) ‘‘sharpened’’ their pieces of quartz. The principal
operator made a deep incision in the nape of the neck, then cut broad
gashes from the shoulder to the hip down each side, making each
groove about an inch beyond the next.

The Nan:a and Ngadadjara during their subincision rites, which
I witnessed in 1935, used simple flakes of a jasperoid rock for the
operation. The Nan:a tribespeople who took part then had just made
their first contact with Kuropeans, the members of our Expedition.
The edges of the simple flakes, used in subincision, if unsuitable as
they are, may be trimmed by biting or nibbling the margin, spitting
out the tiny waste flakes resulting from tooth pressure on the edge.

These [’kandi ’‘minu] and others may be seen in course of trimming
by biting, and in use in 16 mm cine film No. 39 of the Board for
Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide. At a specific stage
in the subineision ceremony an old man is seen to walk into the area
where preparations are under way for the initiation. He throws a
handful of simple flakes on the ground before a circle of men who pick
them up, examine them carefully, and trim them by biting with their
teeth (tooth-pressure flaking).

The same general type of flake is used whether it be for the
primary cutting of the penis along the midline to open up the whole
urethral pipe while the victim is held, or to extend the cut towards
the base. This takes place in a later operation when young men stand
up and offer themselves voluntarily for further cutting. Still older
men may trim pieces of flesh from their own urethral cuts as a form
of self mutilation using these same [’kandi ‘minu].

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 153

di
mS g/

A, .

Sidi

i)

Hig, 19. Observed life of the stone on a spearthrower over two week period.
a, Pitjandjara [’meru| with |*kandi| hafted in [‘keiti] or Triedia resin, Konapandi, Musgrave
Ranges, 8, Australia, collected by N, B. Tindale, June 1983, length &1 cm. (specimen No.
A21673). bes, Progressive stuges in life of a [‘kandi|] from this spearthrower when in use
in the Mann Ranges. b, Random flake wewly inserted in position of use; c-e, two views 4nd
eross-seetian of same; fi, seeond day, showing retouch; j-m, seventh day, with cutting edge
ineffective Lhrough continual resharpening; u, eighth day with stone reversed; o, twelfth day
wilh second margin slowing resharpening; p-s, three views and cross-section of a stone at
nonment of discarding; r, shows the even cutting edge as it meets the work surface, The
figures les are based on sketehes and are therefore slightly diagranimatic.

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The use of the [’kandi] flake as a general cutting tool on the
handle end of the Western Desert spearthrower [’meru] is well
known and all spearthrowers seen on our journey had a mounted stone,
Kach adult man possessed one aud several examples were colleeted,

The fact that the Western Desert implement flake is a random
one, and not a [’tulal is not clearly uniderstood by some, Therefore
I have chosen to figure m spearthrower, the use of whieh T made a
point of observing daily over some weeks during a wander tour in
the Western Musgraves and Mann Ranges in 1988 with nomadic
Pitjandjare aborigines and in company with Dr. C.J. Hacketl. In
afternoon sessions over a period of about two weeks the spearthrower
itself was ineised with a design by the owner using an opossum jaw
and tooth as engraving tool, During this time a simple flake was
inserted in the resin of the handle. Tt was used, and resharpened,
then reversed in position and subjected to further use and resharpen-
ing until it assumed the ‘*worn’’ form of the so-called barren adae of
the archaeologist. During this time it served all funetions required
by the owner, in cutting meat, sharpening spears and making new
spear shafts, This |[’meru] is now specimen A.21675 in the Sonth
Australian Museum. The series of drawings is based ou sketehes
made at the time, The birth of sueh a |’kandi] thos is entirely
different from that of a [’tula] of the Lake Kwre Basin.

A [‘tula] starts off as a systematically knapped discoidal
implement. Kor confirmation one should read cither the eyewitness
deseription by Roth (1904, p. 17) of the manulaeture of what he calls
a‘ potlid’’ flake, ne, the true (ula of the archaeologist, or examine
one of the trade parcels of such pot-lid flakes which have originated
at one of the mining places near the Lake Kvre Basin.

CIRCUMCISION KNIFE OF SPECIAL TYPE

Beside the locally made |’kandi] and [/tjimari) knives there is
arare item of trade of which several are possessed by the Neadadjara,
A single one was in the possession of the Nakuko man Tjibukudn at
Mount Davies. These are [/jerabuta] or [‘kandi ‘jerabuta], eireum-
gision knives. These are shaped like projectile points of biface type,
are pressure flaked, and have a small handle of resin at the butt end,
The example which Tjibukudu produced was made fron a material
very close to the white chaleedonic silica found near Hall Creek in
North Western Australia, and it had been fashioned in the exact

TINDALF—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 153

n
4

ig, 20-238, Bifaes knives,

Big, 20. Nakako eiteunielsion knife, [jerabutaj, Mt. Davies, 8. Australia, traded Prom,
the north (specimen A.54+730).

Fig, 21, Ngadadjara knife, sed i) cireaueision operations of 24 Aupoah 1935, witnessed
ab Warupaja, Warburton Beage, W, Australia (specimen A22821),

Wig, 2. Cireumeéision Knife with rosin hath and wooden handle decorated with pchres
and pipeciay, labelled onky as Pron Central Australi (specimen A.So11),

Fig. 28. Kuite with resin halt and leearuted wooden handle from west of Tennant
Creek, Notthern Territory (specimen A42555),

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ey

manner of spearheads made for me in 1953 at Moolabulla, North
Western Australia, by Kitja and Djaru men. Sixteen mm cine films
of tle manutaeture of the Jatter are available and were shown to
anthropologists in March 1963 at the Australian Institute of Aboriginal
Studies Conference on Nomenclature of Implements and Cultures, but
await formal publication.

This [‘jerabnta], (fig. 20) was the only specimen in the possession
of the Nakako people; it had been received by [’Tjibukudu] from
l’Modonja|, the father of [’Warutju ‘tjukurupal, a recently initiated
young Nakako man who was vee in camp at Mount Davies. It had
been used at this young man’s initiation, several years previously,
before ever they had met white men. The knil'e had come by trade
from the direction of the Warburton Ranges. It was known only as
having come ultiinately from |‘kaieli|, ie, from north or north-west,
The speeimen is now A.54730 in the South Australian Museum, Jt
seems fo be the south-cast-most recorded example of this type of
traded implement and it must have been transported for at least 600
miles, even if if exme by the most direct possible route, Tlall Creek
is due north of the Nakako tribal territory and separated from it by
at least six tribal boundaries.

The mode of use of such [*jerabutal is clearly depicted in the
Board for Anthropological Research 16 mm film No. 38 where two
examples of [‘jerabuta] may be seen in use during the circumcision
operations observed by the writer and his party at Warnpuju in the
Warburton Ranges in August 1935, Biting of the edge to sharpen it,
may be noted as a happening during a eritical stage ol the operation.
Fig. 21 shows one of the two Warburton Range examples (specimen
A.22821 in the South Australian Museum),

Wood and resin halted examples traded from N.W. Australia
are known from Central Australia (fig. 22) and from west of Tennant
Creek in the Northern Territory (fig. 23) and are treasured specimens
in the South Australian Museum. In both these examples the handles
are decorated with white spots and black lines on a red ochre
background,

TRIMMING TECHNIQUES

The rolling technique of pressure flaking with a smooth pebble
which T deseribe in this paper is an entirely distmet method ol stone
working which has never been noticed, to my knowledge, hy any of
those who have sought theoretical ways of working stone.

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 157

The implement tu be worked by this method is cushioued in the
palin of one hand, bulbar face upward, and gripped with the finger tips
so that the edge to he worked is cushioned on the pad at the base of
the thumb. A rounded, generally smooth flat pebble or similar presser
is laid on the bulbar flake surtaee, rolled towards the margin and
pressure is exerted. Tiny flakes are removed by this pressure, These
tend to be thin, often markedly senii-cirenlar in shape, with only the
pressed edge itself approximately straight. Successions of such flakes
are removed, either hy working systematically along the edge or more
or leas at random. The relatively continuous sharpened edge whieh
results tends to be vather straight, much more so than if either a
knapping techique or pressure: flaking with a pointed or blunt-ended
presser or hone or wood is employed. As compared with the above
the pointed presser is applied to a series of points along the edge
tending to ereate a rather serrated margin, ¢ach flake scar possessing
an obvious negative bulb at the point of pressure.

Becanse pressure exerted by the rolling technique is likely to be
well controlled, fake sears left on the sharpened implement tend to be
subequal and to present a uniform line of rather shallow impressions.

Variations occur according to the texture of the implement stoue,
the thickness of the Hake and the individual habits of workers,
as exemplified by the differing approaches of 'Tjihukndu and
Malntjukurupa.

Sufficient clutracter seems to he registered by the rolling pressure
techniqne to enable one to detect its utilization whenever found,

| have experimented following the indieations of my native
teachers, Seemingly point pressure type sears cannot be made nsing
only the roanded surface of a flat pebble or similarly shaped wooden
tool, nor have T found it possible to make rollmg pressure types sears
on flakes nsing either a knapping hammer or a pointed presser,

The technique was first brodglt to wy notice in 1953 when men
were making cirenmeision knives in the Pilbara district of Western
Australia. J ee mentioned these implements in an earlier paper
(Tindale, 1957, p. 15), Tt was again seen in use at Kudjuntari and in
the Tominson TRaakes as a technique of Nakako, Ngadadjara and
Piljandjara men. The vesults achieved by this method possess a
charaeter so different from any other that it seems to me that it may
be detected whenever used. The combination of primary and

158 RECORDS OP THE S.A, MUSEUM

secondary knapping with delicate tertiary trimming by stone pressure
vives the worked knife edge, in section, a eonvex profile significantly
different from the concave profile achieved by some other methods of
sharpening, Archaeological Tartangan implements of the South-Kast
of South Australia appear likely to have been resharpened by a
similar method, 1 propose that it be known as the ‘rolling pressure
technique’’.

The only early report T have discovered, of flaking by the applica-
tion of pressure against the edge of an implemen with » rotary
motion, is the observation by Basedow (1907, p. 50). He reports that
among the tribespeople south-west of Darwin the ventral edge of a
strong bivalve shell (Cyreva essingtonensis) was used in the secondary
pressure chipping of the edges of stone spear heads. The spear head
was gripped in the lelf hand, and the shell, with the umbonal portion
in the palin of the hand, convex surface outwards, was held firmly
with all the fingers of the right hand, in sueh a way that the ventral
edge of the shell was away from the palm of the hand. This border
was pressed against the edge to be chipped and by careful wrenehing
of the wight hand in soeh a direction that the thumb moved down-
wards, the required chipping was done,

By test this process, which is a kind of pressure flaking, yields a
highly characteristic sear type and such work is apparent on pirrilike
small hlades of spears (in our Musenm) from the Katherine
River area,

A similar technique is used, with a piece of quartz as presser, in
the making of temporary saw edges on long blades in several different
parts of Australia T have seen it at Yuendumu and among the
Pitjandjara, Here the sharp edge is rolled against the margin to
produce serrated flake seats.

Tala | and |’kandi|, the edges of which have been tapped with
the flat face and the edge of a boomerang or any similar hardwood
piece, used aus a mallet, in the manner practised by Walpiri, Ngala
and Anmatjera meu when resharpening stone implements, also have
a characteristic sear form.

There are nimerous variations in the methods of sharpening by
flapping with wood. In November 1968 1 saw a Neadadjara man at
Gill Pinnacle use the flat base of the head of his eomposite, single
wooden-hook-harbed-spear to tap off a flake or two from the stone
blade fastened at the handle end of his spearthrower, The quick and
casual way in whieh he did this indicated a techniqne of long standing.

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 159

As he sat he held the spearthrower in his left hand, the hooked head
ruming obliquely behind him aid the handle end, w ith its stone, lying
cushioned by his hand, on his thigh, The spear lay in front of him,
its point near and the shaft directed away trom hin, shehtly to the
right, with the butt end resting on the eround. He had been seraping
the spear tip. Taking hold of the spear just behind the join of the
flat head piece he brought it smartly down with «a surprisingly well
controlled series of movements and knocked off a row of tiny flakes
from the |’kandi] in his spearthrower. In a matter of moments the
operation was complete and he resumed the seraping of the spear
point, the object of his attention when the stone had developed signs
of bluntness.

DISCUSSION

Looking at the present-day Australian cultures we see that all
the Jiving peoples have similar basic needs Lor stone tools or
substitutes.

Sedentary tribespeople may tend to have more possessions,
idnddic ones have had to adjust needs to the necessities of travel and
be more lightly burdened.

A people wearing skin cloaks have additional tool needs over
{hose who habitually are naked. Those who live near water and eat
fish need toggles, hooks or barbed spear heads, absent when their meat
foods exclusively are the larger mammals sueh as kangaroos, while
the very impoverished relict peoples ol the western part of the
Western Desert such as the Wanman, Mangala and Mandjildjara,
whose daily animal diet is virtually confined to lizards and [/witjuti]
erubs, use spears only in rare bonts of fighting and therefore tend
to preserve ar chaic forms of weapons and may carry nothing during
their hunting forays beyond a short throwing elub, This latter is an
all-purpose implement suitable for digging, hurling and, if armed
with a vesin-hafted [‘kandi] flake, is useful for all ordinary eutting
Purposes.

The present-day tala of the Lake Hyre Basin and country to the
north, shows vital teehnical differences in its processes of manufacture
which differentiates it strongly from the [kandi] made and used by
Nakako, Pitjandjara and other peoples of the Western Desert.

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The fa is a stone which has heen systematically prepared on
and knapped from a core by striking at a carefully chosen point on
a prepared platform in such a manner that a potentially diseoidal
flake is detached, The pot-lid flake of Roth (1904), the flake has a
sizeable platform piece on one side of the disk. The skill with which
it if made, the consisteney of form and the numbers of sinilar-sized
flakes which may come together in a single traded pareel suggest a
highly skilled, almost professional approaeh to implement making,

| have long known of this important differenee between fala and
kand: but the overall signifivance was at first masked by knowledge
that the tribes on the Western Desert fringe commonly use some of
the many detrital and insolation flakes whieh lie almost everywhere
in ther country, and it was assumed, with no real grounds, that when
they had to nse mined flakes they would make lwla types, Lt is now
clear that even when breaking out stone from their mines these people
do not use the sophisticated techniques of the twa maker Inuit employ
only the erudest modes of obtaining their requirements. Their flakes
originate from the breaking up of large boulders and their further
reduction is by a erude hit-or-miss procedure and leads to random
pieces of small size, 'rom which final selections of flakes can be made.

This brings up a point important for the archaeolowist. A Nakake
or Pitjandjara [’kandi| flake is placed in a chisel or on the end of a
spearthrower handle and resharpencd many times, then it may be
turned about so that two opposite margins become ‘worn’. Finally
it assumes a character which has led the archacologist to suggest it
is a tool type of its own, In Australia it hag heen termed the
hurren adze,

When a |‘tulal is resharpened to the limit in the most usual
manner it becomes the so-called ‘worn tila’? ov “tula slug’? of the
archeologist. In such a speeimen the upper margin of the platform
becomes the median keel of the ‘slug’. Allowing lor easual varia-
tions in the methods of nse and rehafting whieh ean determine the
final appearance, the differences between the barren slug and the
“work tula’’ bear witness to the existence of two entirely different,
procedures in manufacture which probably have lad entirely different
histories of origin, Some arehacologists confuse the two types,

There should be room, in the archaeologist's list of named lypes,
for recognition of an implement like the [’kandi], The ohjeetion
which some may make is that a new [’kandi| flake, being merely a

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 161

simple one, is not recognizable, It only becomes important if found
hafted with resin, or when retrieved after use at some stage of
resharpening, when gradnally it becomes another archaeological
‘Implement type’? the ‘“burren slag’’.

The following type of incident has occurred to me several times
when collecting archaeological [’kandi] implements in tribal territories
where |/kandi] are still actively in use and the vagaries of archaeolo-
gists completely misunderstood by aboriginal inhabitants, I quote
from a 1957 entry in my journal, made at Lightning Rocks, in

Tvadadjara territory, We had arrived there one afternoon to find a
small nomadic party in temporary residence while travelling west to
Warupnju, a jonrney of about 70 miles. 1 went collecting archaco-
logieal stone implements on red sandhills near the native well on the
north side of the granite outerop and was soon busily picking up
“worn? |‘kandi] which lay about in profusion on the wind-eroded
chine. Most of them were ones reduced to the burren condition,

“One of the old men came np and politely asked to see what 1
was pieking up. He looked at me a little sorrowfully, and said im his
Neadadjara tongue, ‘Those are useless!’? He drifted away and half
an hour later he returned with «a small handful of primary flakes of
the same stone and pressed them mto my hands. To pick up worn
[‘kandi|] stones my need must have been very great!’ ‘This points
up a difference between the living way of seeing things and that of
the archaeologist.

CONCLUSION

Tn 1964 it was still possible, in more than one area of Australia,
to see aborigines knapping flints, cherts, quartzites and other rocks,
employing a variety of techniques, and using and resharpening several
kinds of these tools, The (ools in many instances are similar fo
those which have been the stock-in-trade of varions peoples of the
Stone Age past, and certainly ones used for many centuries in
Australia,

Yet so little advanced is our appreciation of this faet, that the
owners of this kind of data have not been the subject of a single
specially ordered study, Therefore an observer like the present
author, has been able to see and learn about more than one technique
whieh must be age-old in its application vet has altogether escaped
modern notice. Some of his observations were first made as long ago

162 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

as 1921 and at intervals since then when casual opportunities have
occurred For field work. Only very few observers have ever put pen
fo paper specifically on the subjeet ol stone working among living
Australians.

For this seeming apathy | blame in part the archaeologists, but
doubtless such a statement will bring down a flood of wrath on my
head. How many of todays’ great archaeologists have spent time
working with native peoples on the subject of stone knapping?

Tt seems evident to me that no student of stone implements and
no archaeologist can afford not to test each of the methods ol stone
knapping outlined in this paper, to observe the types of flake sear
which results from each, and apply the knowledge he gains to the
clearer reading of the data provided by the implements he gathers
duving his exeavations. Indeed it is high time that at least a few
archacologists should take note of Australian and New Guinea stone
knappers and temporarily at least emerge from their eave holes ta
study at first hand the data provided by living peoples.

or several years yet it may be possible to see how Anstralians
do this work, but time is passing. The Ildawongga of JInpiter Well
are the last major remaining tribal group in Australia to be intro-
duced to us, Up till now they have happily avoided contaet with
Western men but this year (1964) have been brought in to Papunya
on the premise that they were ‘starving’. These people surely eould
vive stone-implement working data, entirely without ontside influence,
bias, or degeneration being imputed to them.

The Nakako, who have provided some data for this paper, met.
white men in 1961 for the first time. For: years earlier the present
author had followed their tracks and seen vacated eamps in the Blyth
range of Western Australia in company with Mr. W. B. MacDougall
but could then find no trace less than about two weeks old. In 1968
they were still using their stone implements equally with a few
precions pieces of metal which had newly come into their possession,

Bartlett (1964)? has shown that at least one of the peoples of the
New Guinea Highlands still can make and use stone implement flakes
lor several purposes, so that even in New Cuinea flint knapping
eould be studied,

(1) We have just heard of the death of Rev, AH. K, Rartlett, in May, 1905, Wik coleations
und notebooks are in the South Australian Museun.

TINDALE—STONE IMPLEMENT MAKING 163

Should archaeologists avoid interpretations of archaeological
material guided by knowledge gained from the living? Do they fcar
that ‘complexities’? may thereby be eliminated from the art of
archaeological deduction? Surely if we work from known bases better
results must follow than if we adopt what seems to be a very
prevalent myopic attitude. ‘*Hmus with their heads in the spinifex.’’

It should be noted that some of the facts given in this paper are
supported by motion picture films. So far the originals of most of
these have been viewed only with a hand viewer pending opportunities
to finance the cost of reprodnetion and titling, When this is done
some refinements in the deseriptions given herein can be expected,
Ineluding films of observations on Bentinck Island (1960, 1963), Ut
North Western Australia (1953) and field work in the Western Desert
(1957, 1968) there are m the South Australian Museum about 5,000
feet of 16 mm film, principally in colonr, recorded at 24 frames per
second, which ean yield information on stone working techniques.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The combined expedition from the National University and_ the
South Australian Museum received support for its work trom several
sources, including the United States Surgeon General, the Wenner
Gren Foundation lor Anthropological Research, the Australian
National University, Canberra, and the Board of the South Australinn
Museum,

The authorities of Weapons Research Mstablishment helped with
the use of two land rover vehicles for the 2,000-mile journey whieh
the visit entailed.

Mr. W. B. MacDougall, Chie! Native Patrol Officer at Woomera,
helped in finding our principal nomadic hosts, the Nakako and
Neadadjara aborigines of whom some had enconntered white folk lor
the first time only within the past three years. We also owe much to
our helpers, Malutjukurupa (Harry), and Tommy Dodd,

Lam indebted to my companions on the Expedition for their help
and interest in these studies, which formed only a modest part of the
aims of the Expedition.

Miss Brenda Hubbard drew most of the implements illustrated in
this paper and [ am indebted to Miss Faye Hiehett for her clever
deciphering of my manuscript.

164 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES CITED

Angas, G. E., 1847: Savage life and scenes in Australia and New
Zealand, London, 2 vol.

Bartlett, H. K., 1964: Note on flint implements found near Nipa,
ventral Papuan Highlands. Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide,
14, 669-673.

Basedow, H., 1907: Anthropological notes on the Western coastal
tribes of the Northern Territory of South Australia.
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 31, 1-62.

Macfarlane, W. V., 1964: Water and salt metabolism of primitive
people. Man in the Pacific, Honolulu, 3 April 1964, 5-6.

Roth, W. E., 1904: North Queensland Ethnography: Bulletin No. 7,
Brisbane.

Tindale, N. B., 1941: Hand axe used in the Western Desert of South
Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 3(2), 37-41.
1957: Culture suecession in South Eastern Australia
from Late Pleistocene to the present. Rec. S. Aust.
Mus., Adelaide, 13(1), 1-49.
1957: Dated Tartangan implement site from Cape Martin,
South-Hast of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. S.
Aust., Adelaide, 80, 109-123.

Tindale, N. B. and Noone, H. V. V., 1941: Analysis of an Australian
aboriginal’s hoard of knapped flint. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.
Aust., Adelaide, 65, 116-122.

A NEW SPECIES OF HOLOCHILA (RHOPALOCERA, FAMILY
LYCAENIDAE) FROM VICTORIA AND SOUTHERN NEW SOUTH
WALES

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

A new species of Lycaenid, Holochila goodingi Tindale is described from subalpine
valleys of South Eastern Australia. Some notes and distribution records are given for

kindred species.

A NEW SPECIES OF HOLOCHILA (RHOPALOCERA, FAMILY
LYCAENIDAE) FROM VICTORIA AND SOUTHERN NEW
SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Sours Avsrratiin Museum
Plate 14 and text fig. 1-4

SUMMARY

A new species of Lycaenid, Holochila goodingt Tindale is described
from subalpine valleys of South Eastern Australia. Some notes and
distribution records are given for kindred species.

INTRODUCTION

An elusive form of /Tolochila has been taken on a few oceasions,
and seen flying on others, in southern Victoria during the past 40 or
more years.

In 1962 Mr. C. G. L. Gooding showed me two specimens which he
had received from Mr. V. Smith, who had taken a small series at the
junction of the McAlister and Barclay Rivers, Victoria, on the 11th
and 12th of November 1950, Previously on 20 November 1919 Gooding
had taken a female example at Moe, and in November 1962 had seen
but missed taking another specimen perched on a native clematis vine
in a grove of eucalyptus near a fern gully at Buln Buln, Victoria.

Mr. J. C. Le Souef earlier also had shown me two specimens he
had taken at Warragul in Mareh 1939; they were in fact the first two
butterflies he had ever collected. On 12 January 1963 I took a worn
example, which seemed to be the same species, near a creek above
Tom Groggin, New South Wales, at an elevation of about 3,500 feet
in a Pomaderris apetala thicket among Mountain Ash trees. Still
more recently Mr. D. F. Crosby has sent me a male specimen from
Cement Creek, Victoria, taken in December.

Study of these specimens has indicated the presence of a rarely
taken new species, and this paper is the result.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Il am indebted to Messrs. C. <t. L. Gooding, J. C. Le Souef and
D. F. Crosby for the loan of material. Mr. Gooding kindly has
deposited the type specimens of the new species in the South
Australian Museum and Mr, Le Souef has given one paratype.

Opportunities were taken to check the G, A. Waterhouse Collee-
tion at the Australian Museum, Sydney, and the material in the
C.S.LR.O. collection at Canberra. L am indebted therefore ta My.
C. N, Smithers of the Australian Museum and to Dr. D, Waterhouse
and Mr, [. F, B. Common of the Entomological Branch, Canberra,
for courtesies received.

Holochila genus Felder 1862

Holochila Felder 1862: 490. Type species, olochila absimilis Felder
1862.
G. KE. Tite (1963) recently revised the species of the genera allied
to Candalides and has revived Felder’s generic name for about 20
species formerly placed chiefly in Candalides. That genus is now
restricted to its genotype, Candalides xanthospilos (Hiibner).

Tite placed six Australian species in Holochila but regarded one,
HH, persimilis (Waterhouse) as of uncertain status. One species is
Found only in the Schouten Islands, and others range from Misol to
the Ara Islands and through New Guinea to the Louisiade
Archipelago.

In the present paper | recognize IH. persimilis as a valid species
and add a seventh species to the Australian list.

Tite, in his review, indicated the relatively seant material he had
available for study of some of the Australian species. I take this
opportunity to list some of the more significant localities and speci-
mens represented in the collections to which [ haye had access.

Holochila goodingi sp. nov.
Plate 14, fig. 1-6a and text fig. 1

Male. Forewing purplish-blue with wide black margin along
costa; a narrower one on termen; the dark markinys of termen extend
inward midway befween the veins to form a series of obseure dark
triangles; a broad discal patch of sex seales extends towards termen
along M,, Cu, and ('n,,; it tends to form a broad trident-shaped
area, With special seales lying between the veins as well as along them.

TINDALE—NEW HOLOCHILA 167

Hindwing purplish-blne with dull black costal band and terminal
marks as on forewing. Wing below pale silky-blue, almost grayish-
white, with inconspicuous black spots and marks: these spots are
more conspicuous in basal half of hindwing.

Forewing length 15 mm, expanse 38 mm.

Female. Forewing broadly dull black with a eireular diseal white
puch; this extends towards base with a bright blue flash; hindwing
dull black with a diseal area flashed only with blue. Wing beneath
similar to male, but with evident traces of the diseal white spot of
forewing above.

Korewing length 17 mm, expatse 36 mm,

Loe, Vietoria: MeAlister River, V. Smith, 12 November 1950,
holotype male and allotype female, same locality, 18 November 1950,
in South Australian Museum Collection, presented by C. G. L. Gooding
(no. 1.19133); Moe, 20 November 1919, C. G. L. Gooding, paratype
fomale in lis collection; Warragul, in Bull Swamp four miles south of
the town, 20 March 19389, J. C. Le Sonef, two paratype males, one
specimen in his eollection, the other (1.19128) am S.A. Musenn;
Delburn, 18 December 1962, A. M. Lineas, paratype female in lis
collection; Cement Creek, 14 December 1958, D, lf. Crosby, paratype
male in his collection. New South Wales: Tom Grogein, at 8,500 feet,
12 January 1963, N. B. Tindale, presented to S.A. Muserm.,

The male wvenitaha have c¢laspers of the same type as
I, consimilis, terminating in two outwardly directed spines (fig. 1).
In TJ, consinilis there is an additional spine in all the specimens I
have examined, including the material originally figured by Waterhouse
(1942, p. 123).

IT, goodingi is clearly a distinet species related to I7. consimilis,
differing in the darker purplish-blne colour and the wide black margins
of the male and in the female by the smaller white diseal spot of
forewing, In the male of 7, consimilis there are also present termiial
black triangular markings bat these are far less conspicuous a Teatire
of the wing markings.

T have considered the possibility that //, geoding? is a southern
subspecies of 77. cousimilis but judge them to be separate species.

In the trident form of the male sex brand on forewing it is
closest to Hl. consimilis, but the special scales on the wing itself are
move extensive.

RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

168
i
’ €
,
i
F)
]
4
i
|
}
Fig. 1-4. Male elaspers of species of Holochila.
Hig. 1. Holochila goodingi Tindale, Warragul, Victoria (specimen 1.19123),
Fig. 2. Holochila consimilis (Waterhouse), Mt. Tambourine, Queensland (specimen
1.19132),
Fig. 3. Holochila absimilis Felder, Atherton, Queensland, 22 March 1906 (specimen
1.19127).
Fig. 4. Holochila persimilis (Waterhouse), Mackay, Queensland (specimen in Waterhouse

Collection, Australian Museum),

TINDALE—NEW HOLOCHILA 169

There is a single female from Eden taken 12 November 1914
(Marked Z4 and KL 16521) in the Waterhouse Collection, and there
placed with H. consimilis, but evidently it is this species. The white
patch on the forewing is similar in extent to that on the figured female
specimen from Delburn. Like other female examples of H. goodingt
it lacks traces of any white patch on the hindwing.

Mr. CG. G. L. Gooding has seen the species flying around a native
clematis near Buln Buln and believes this is the food plant. Flowering
specimens of this vine were kindly identified for me by Dr. H. Kichler,
as Clematis glycinoides D.C.

Holochila consimilis (Waterhouse) 1942
Fig. 2

The type is from Killara, near Sydney, and the species has been
recorded from Stanwell Park and Narabeen in the Sydney area, also
from Ballina, Lawson, the Blue Mountains and from Lismore and it
ranges northward to Southern Queensland.

The female has the white discal patch on forewing suffused with
blue along the inner marginal side and towards the base; the hind-
wing has a blue suffusion over the whole area of the discal patch;
occasionally a few white scales appear near the centre of the patch.

The male genitalia, described and figured by Waterhouse (1942,
pp. 123-124) were found in the Australian Museum Collection and
re-examined. The preparation is from a male labelled Sydney, 27
November 1941, K., G. A. Waterhouse. It may be presumed the K.
stands for Killara. One of the claspers is intact, the other seems to
have suffered postmortem damage. As normally viewed the full length
of the larger lateral spine is not appreciated; when viewed obliquely it
is seen to be longer than the width of the clasper itself; the third spine
is very evident from the same direction.

The original paper did not mention details about the type material.
There is a specimen KL. 16533 in the Australian Museum marked as
Holotype, labelled Sydney, N.S.W., 3 December 1941 K., G, A.
Waterhouse; here again the K. presumably stands for Killara. An
allotype female is marked (no. KL.16531) and labelled as from Killara,
29 December 1935. The other New South Wales specimens are from
Lawson, Blue Mountains, Clifton, Helensburgh and Stanwell Park.

170 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In the C.S.1.R.0. collection there are others from Narara (males
in September, females in November), Ebor (January), Saddleback
(February). The last named were taken by TH. Thirkell.

Mr. C, G, L. Gooding has specimens from Manly Vale (December)
and Grafton (June and August).

(Jueensland localities are Toowoomba (Oetober and November)
and Monnt Tambourine. | have examined some 40 males and 28
females,

Holochila absimilis Felder 1862
Fig. 3

The type is trom Ash Island, New South Wales, and the reported
range of the species is from the Dandenone Range in Southern
Victoria to the Cairns district, Queensland,

In the female the white patch on the hindwing is present but does
not run to the costa. The blue flash on the white pateh of forewing
usually covers the inner half of the discal area and is present to a
lesser extent in the same position on the hindwing,

The male genitalia have been figured (fig. 3) for comparison with
H. persimilis from which it differs in the absence of the spine on the
shalt of the clasper.

Of this species 57 male and 453 female specimens have been
examined from the following localities :— Vietoria: Dandenong Range.
New South Wales: Kiama (November), Bundeeua (September),
Jamberoo (Febrnary), West Ryde (September); Sydney: Yamba
(September), Narara (December), Grafton (October), Bruuswieck
Heads (May, reared material), Port Maequarie (February), Lismore
(October), Ballina, Burleigh Heads. Queensland: Brishane, Bunya
Monntains.

JT have not seen specimens from northern Queensland. According
to Tite (1963, p. 211) specimens from North Queensland show racial
differences, examples from Mackay being intermediate, with males like
the northern form and females like those from Brisbane. Unfor-
tunately he has not differentiated between JT. persimilis and Hi,
absimilis—his records should be considered with this in mind.

The Dandenong Range pair in the Australian Museum, taken
many years azo by C. French, do not differ from typical specimens
from Ballina, New South Wales.

TINDALE—NEW HOLOCHILA {71

In this species the male sex seales are confined to the veins of
the forewing and do not extend on to the wing surface between. Bred
and captured specimens from Ballina clearly indicate that there ig no
difference in bred specimens in the development of this character.

The late Dr. G. A. Waterhouse reared a male specimen which
pupated 81 December 1940 and emerged on 27 September the.
following year.

Mr. Tom Guthrie, in May 1963, reared several specimens from
pupae on Cupania, associated with black ants. The species has also
been reported as feeding on a native Wisteria,

Holochila persimilis (Waterhouse) 1942
Wig. 4

The type series of thirteen males and seven lemales Trom Mackay,
is in the Waterhouse Collection at the Australian Museum. A male
dated February 1899 has been marked by Waterhouse as Holotype
with register numbers 1.9255 and KL.16496. The specimens were
taken by R. EH. Turner,

The male elasper of a Mackay example, January 1899, R. Ki,
Turner, is preserved on a celluloid strip pinned beneath the specimen,
It seems to be the one figured by Waterhonse (1942, p. 125). Tt was
not well shown in the original and therefore has been redrawn, as
fie. 4, Tt will he noticed that a spine, not shown in the earlier drawing,
is present about half way down the shaft of the clasper. This spine
is absent from the exaniples of M absinrilis T haye examined.

It seems clear that the species is a perfectly valid one, The
Maekay males have a relatively conspicuous diffuse pateh of sex
geales on the forewing as well as on the veins and the wing colour is
best deseribed as lilac; in southern males the sex scales perhaps fend
to be slightly less conspicuous. The females have white patches on
both fore- and hindwings; these are broadly margined towards the
base with blne scales, somewhat as in H. whsimilis, Females of the
latter species tend to be larger and to have the white pateh of hind-
wing smaller and narrower than in IT. persimilis,

In addition to the type series | have seen 29 males and 19 females
from localities between Narara, New South Wales and the Cairns
district in Queensland.

172 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

Localities and months of capture are:—New South Wales:
Narara (November), Port Maequarie (February), Grafton (August,
October), and Byron Bay (January), Queensland: Willarney (Meb-
ruary), Southport (January, February). The male figured by
Common (1964, p. 121) is from Brishane (14 Feb. 1907, ex A. J. Turner
Collection). Brisbane (January, Webruary), Bunya Mountains, 3,000
feet Dies ata February), Fairy Bower near Rockhampton (January),
Mackay, Cairns, Kuranda (January, February).

Holochila helenita Semper

The type is a male from Cape York in the British Museum. The
Australian range of the species is from Sydney to Cape York, and
a separate race, H. h, dimorpha (Rober) 1886 is recognized from
New Guinea.

Messrs. I. FP. B. Common aud M, 8, Upton took a series of five
males and eight females at Lockerbie on Cape York, Bamaga and
Iron Range, between Ist and 12th April 1964, also two females at
Crystal Caseades on 24th March 1964. The trident sex mark on
veins Mz, Cu,, and Cn,, is very evident.

In all the females taken on Cape York the white patch of hind-
wing is as large as that on the forewing and reaches to the eostal
margin, without traces of blue seales, except for a slight fringe on the
inner side of the forewing spot.

Holochila margarita Semper 1879

The type, from Bowen, Queensland is in the British Museum and
the reported range is from Sydney to North Queensland; a race
HT, m. maria (Bethune-Baker) 1908 extends the distribution to New
Guinea, the Arm Islands and Misol.

There are six specimens including a female in the Gooding
Colleetion from Gratton (June, September and December).

The Waterhouse Collection material (36 males, 33 females) is all
from Queensland, including Burleigh Heads, Stradbroke Island,
Mackay, Gayndah, Cairns, Kuranda, Herberton, Claudic River,
Thursday Island and Prince of Wales Island.

Messrs, Ll. F. B. Common and M.S. Upton took examples of both
sexes on Cape York, a male on 26 March 1964 at Bamaga, a single
female at Lockerbie, 2 April 1964, and another at KE] Arish on 7
Mareh 1964.

TINDALE—NEW HOLOCHILA 173

Other localities represented in the C.S.1.R.O. collections are five
males from south of Atherton (May), Innisfail (November), Lake
Barrine (May) and Montville (August).

The male of this species is well characterized by the trident sex
mark on the forewing.

The male example figured by Common (1964, p. 125) was reared
from a pupa taken at Yeppoon; it emerged on 14 January 1962; the
female he shows is from Brishane,

In the female of this species the bluish flash at the base of the
large white patch of the forewing covers much of the basal half of
the area and also extends along the inner margin; this contrasts with
the more limited aveas covered with blue in the case of the ecorres-
ponding spot in H. helenita. The size of H. margarita females tends
also to be greater than in that species. In all female specimens
examined the white of the hindwing patch runs to the costa,

Holochila gilberti (Waterhouse) 1903

The type is from Port Darwin and it has been taken also at
Adelaide River. Common (1964, p. 123) figures a female from
Melville Island. The Queensland localities reported for this species
are doubtful,

A specimen taken at Darwin by F. P. Dodd in April 1909 is in
the C.S.1.R.O. collection.

REFERENCES CITED
Common, |. F. B., 1964: Australian Butterflies. Brisbane. 131 pages.

Felder, C., 1862: Verzeichniss der von dem Naturforschern der k. k.
Fregatte Novara (Macrolep.) Verh. zool. -bot. Ges.
Wien, 12: 478-496,

Semper, G., 1879: Beitrag zur Rhopalocerenlauna yon Australien.
J. Mus. Godeffroy, 5: 188-194 (reprints were issued in
1878 fide Waterhouse),
Tite, G. K., 1963: Revision of the genus Candalides and allied genera.
’ , & s

(Lepidoptera: Lycaenidae). Bull. Brit. Mus. (nat. Hist.),
Entomology, London, 14(5): 197-259,

174 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

G. <A. 1903: Notes on Australian Rhopalocera:
Lycaenidae, pt. 8. Proe, Linn. Soe. N.S.W., Sydney.
28: 132-275.

1942; Notes on Australian butterflies in the Australian
Museum. No, 2, Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney. 21: 122-125.

Waterhouse,

HXNPLANATION OF PLATE 14
Holochila goodingi Tindale

Fig. 1. Holotype male, MeAlister River, Victoria, 12 November 1950, V. Smith, ea
Gooding Collection, 1.19133 in S. Aust. Museum; upper side.

Fig. la. ditto underside.

Fig. 2. Paratype male, Warragul, Victoria, March 1939, J. CG. Le Souef, 1.19123 in
S. Aust. Museum; upper side.

Mig. 2a. ditto underside.

Fig. 3. Paratype male, same details as fig, 2, in J. C. Le Souef collection.

Fig. 3a, ditto underside.

Vig. 4. Allotype female, McAlister River, upper area, 18 November 1950, V. Smith, ex
Gooding Collection, 1.19138 in 8, Aust. Museum; upper side.

Fig. da. ditto underside,

Pig. 5. Paratype female, Delburn, Vietoria, 18 December 1962, A. M. Lueas, in his
collection; upper side,

Fig. 5a. ditto underside.

Fig. 6. Paratype female, Moe, Victoria, 20 November 1919, C. G. L. Gooding, in his
collection, upper side.

Fig. 6a. ditto underside.

Rea. S.A. Musruw Vou. 15, Prate 14

NOTES ON SOME WESTERN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA-
RHOPALOCERA WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SUB-SPECIES
OF ANISYNTA ALBOVENATA

BY FRANK E.. PARSONS

Summary

Rhopalocera have been collected in Western Australia during three car journeys
extending from Geraldton in the north to Albany in the south, and to Norseman and
Esperance in the eastern part of the state.

On the first visit, during October and November 1959, we found, between Norseman and
Esperance, a series of Hesperid, Anisynta albovenata, thus extending the range of the
species from Gunnedah in New South Wales through South Australia to about 450 miles
west of the Western Australian border. The Western Australian border clearly is a new
subspecies, and is described below.

The second visit was made between April 1961 and February 1962, and the third from
October to the end of December of that year. I was accompanied on my first visit by Mr
F. M. Angel, who added series to his collection.

NOTES ON SOME WESTERN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA-
RHOPALOCERA WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SUB-
SPECIES OF ANISYNTA ALBOVENATA

By FRANK HE, PARSONS
Plate 15

Rhopalocera have been collected in Western Australia during
three car journeys extending from Geraldton in the north to Albany
in the south, and to Norseman and HKsperance in the eastern part of
the State.

On the first visit, during October and November 1999, we found,
between Norseman and Esperance, a series of a Hesperid, Anisynta
albovenata, thus extending the range of the species from Gunnedah
in New South Wales through South Anstralia to about 450 miles
west of the Western Australian border. The Western Australian
insect clearly is a new subspecies, and is described below.

The second visit was made between April 1961 and February
1962, and the third from Oetober to the end of December of that year.
1 was accompanied on my first visit by Mr. F. M, Angel, who added
series to his collection,

Jalmenus inous Hewitson 1865

This butterfly appears to be confined chiefly to the coastal belt
from Fremantle to Bunbury, and on the first two visits fair numbers
were eollected in the sandhills at Bunbury. On the third visit I found
them extremely numerous about five miles north of Mandurah and in
one day collected some 70 pupae in less than one hour. Approximately
one-half of them were parasitised,

The larvae and pupae, attended by many small black ants, were
found either on dead leaves or in the sand under leaning branches.
The fvod plant is a sprawling bush of a species of Acacia.

T could find none before the first week of November, and by mid-
December they had become scarce again,

a

176 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hypochrysops halyaetus Hewitson 1874

A dozen of the adults were collected at Geraldton at the end of
October 1959; they were not at all plentiful and considerable effort
went into finding then.

On my second trip to Western Australia early in November |
found # spot in the Chittering district a lithe more than 40 miles
from Perth where they were present in considerable numbers. Four
trips were made to the area during the following three weeks and
over 160 specimens were colleeted, but I could find no indications as
to the likely food plant. By the end of Noyember their flights were
over and on the last occasion none could be found.

On my third trip to Western Australia I visited the same spot in
the Chittering district at the end of October 1963, but there was no
sign of this butterfly. I visited the spot again on 7th November,
when they were as plentiful as in the previous season and was able
to catch a representative series. By the last week in November they
had all disappeared. lvidently they have a very short fight season
and should be sought during the first three wecks of November. They
are very easy to net and appear only on the spike of small yellow
flowers of Verreanwia retmawvardta, a plant not very widely distributed ;
it occurs chiefly on the gravelly ironstone soils of the Darling Range.

Ogyris idmo idmo Hewitson 1862
During the first three weeks of November a few of the Western
race of this rare species were flying in the same place as Zypochrysaps
halyactus. TL saw them settled only on flowers of the white Pimelia
and collected two males and six females,

Hesperilla donnysa albina Waterhouse 1932

Several pupae of this subspecies were collected from their
shelters in sword grass at a swamp about three miles south of
Fremantle, during early September, and several males were caught
while settled on sword grass at Albany, during the first week in
December,

Anisynta albovenata fuscata subsp. nov.
Plate 15, fig, 5-8

Male above, dark grey-brown. Fore-wing with a spot at end of
cell, three subapieal spots, two below these, nearer the termen in areas
4 and 5, spots in 2 and 3, and a very small and faint spot just above
vein 1; the subapical spots and those in 4 and 4 ave very small.

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. 15, PLatre 15

PARSONS—WESTERN AUSTRALIAN RHOPALOCERA 177

Underside of forewing dark grey-brown, the basal hall a shade
lighter than the outer half; the ends of the veins white, and the spots
reproduced as on the upper side, All spots whitish, not yellow as in
the subspecies A, albovenata weemala,

The male hindwing has no spots on upper or lower sides, but on
the lower side all the veins are white from their bases to the termen,

Female above, dark grey-brown, with all the spots as in the male,
but they appear more pronounced. Female underside, marked
similarly to the male, but the spots again are more pronounced,
Length of forewing, male 15.7 mm, female 18.0 mm.

This race is distinguished froin the Sonth Austrahan one by its
more prominent markings, larger size, and the much darker colouring.

The average length of forewing in my specimens is:—male
15.6 min, female 17.8 mm.

In a series of 25 examples of A. a. albovenata the average length
of forewing is:—male 12.7 mm, female 14.1 mm.

The holotype male and allotype female bear the following data :—
Male, Salmon Gums, W. Austr, 12 Oct. 1963. Female, Esperance,
W. Austr, 14 Oct. 1959, and are deposited in the South Australian
Museum Collection where they bear the number 1.19134. In addition
there is a paratype series of 20 specimens in my own collection
including the specimens figured to show their under sides. A series
(nine paratype males and three females) taken by Mr. Frank Angel
during our first visit, are in his collection,

I am indebted to Mr. J, O, Wilson for the accompanying plate and
to Mr. Norman B. Timdale for his interest and advice.

EXPLANATION OF PLAT 15

Wig, 1-4, Anisynta a, albovenata Waterhouse. 1, Male, Point Pearce, 8. Aust. 11 Oct.
1842, 2. Male, underside, Ardrossan, S. Aust. 2 Oct. 144. 3, Female, Point Pearee, 10 Oct.
1942. 4, Female, underside, Point Pearee, 11 Overt. 1942.

Bip, a-5, sluisyata a. fuseata Parsons. 35. Holotype male, Salmon Gums, W. Aust,
12 Oct. 1963. 6. Paratype imale, underside, same data as holotype. 7. Allotype female,
Esperunee, W. Aust, 14 Oet. 1959. 8 Paratype female, underside, same data as allotype.

‘i

THE AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA
MITCHELL (LACERTILIA-AGAMIDAE)

BY F. J. MITCHELL

Summary

Cleared and stained skeletal material is used to compare the osteology of 14 species of
the genera Amphibolurus and Tympanocryptis, and thereby reassess the generic status of
the dragon described as Tympanocryptis maculosa Mitchell (1948).

It is concluded that the closure of the tympanic membrane is a secondary feature and that
species referred to the genus Tympanocryptis should be primarily distinguished by the
reduction of one phalanx of the fifth digit of the pes. Despite its possession of a
concealed tympanic membrane and other features most strongly developed in
Tympanocryptis, maculosa agrees with the Amphibolurus in possessing primitive
phalangeal formulae and is now considered a specialized member of that genus.

THE AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA
MITCHELL (LACERTILIA-AGAMIDAE)

By F, J. MITCHELL
Figs. 1-2

SYNOPSIS
Cleared and stained skeletal material is used to compare the
osteology of 14 species of the genera Amphibolurus and Tympano-
cryptis, and thereby reassess the generic status of the dragon described
as Tympanocryptis maculosa Mitchell (1948).

It is concluded that the closure of the tympanic membrane is a
secondary feature and that species referred to the genus T'ympano-
cryptis should be primarily distinguished by the reduetion of one
phalanx of the fifth digit of the pes. Despite its possession of a
concealed tympanic membrane aud other featnres most strongly
developed in Tympanocryptis, maculosa agrees with A mphabolurus
in possessing primitive phalangeal formulae and is now considered a
specialized member of that genus.

INTRODUCTION

was accepted hecause of its obvious close relationship to the orthotype,
T. lineata Peters, However, the description of a species with a con-
cealed tympanic membrane, but possessing 5-8 femoral pores on each
side and an Amphibolurus-like general habit as T'ympanocryptis
maculosa Mitehell, the close superficial resemblance between several
spinous scaled species of Amphibolurus and recently deseribed species
of Tympanocryptis, and the discovery of an agamid (identity as yet

180 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

uncertain) possessing partial concealment of the tympanic membrane
have cast doubt on the yalue of the enclosed ear-opening as. the
indicator of a monophyletic assemblage.

The present study was undertaken in an effort to find alternate
means of defining these genera and, in particular, of reconsidering
the generic status of maculosa on the basis of comparative skeletal
morphology.

METHODS AND MATERIAL WXAMINED

Skeletons were prepared by standard clearmy and alizarin stain-
ing techniques permitting calcified parts of the anatomy to be clearly
distingnished, Cartilaginous parts were not differentially stained.

Five skeletons of 7. imaculosa were prepared from specimens
varying in snout-vent length from 28 mm to 65 mm and compared
with the following specimens in the South Australian Museum
reference collection,

Species with an exposed tympunnms

Amphibolurus adelaidensis (Gray )—Two adult specimens collected
at Hyres Sand Pateh, Western Australia.

cLmphiblolirus veticulatus inermis (De Vis)—One subadnlt speci-
men collected at Mnloorina, South Australia.

Amphibolurus maculatus gularis Sternteld—Two adult specimens
collected at Woll Creek, Western Australia.

Amphibolurus pictus Peters—Three specimens; one subadult
collected at Mount Myre; one adult trom Tailem Bend and one
adult from Western Gawler Ranges, South Australia,

Amphibolurus diemensis (Gray)—Two adult specimens collected
at an unknown locality in Tasmania.

Amphibolurus darlingtoni Loveridge—Oune adult specimen collected
at Ooldea, South Australia.

Amphibolurus eristatus (Gvay)—One snbadult specimen collected
at Koonibba, South Australia,

Amphibolurus decresit (Dum. and Bibr.)—Two specimens; one
subadalt and one adult collected at Mount Aroona, Flinders
Ranges, South Australia,

Amphibolurus fiowi Proctor—One adult specimen colleeted at
Mount Wedge, Hivre Peninsula, South Australia,

MITCHELL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 181

Species with u concealed tympanum:

Tympanoeryptis tetraporophera Lucas and Frost—Two adult
specimens collected near Leigh Creek, Minders Ranges, South
Australia.

Tympanoeryptis intima Mitchell—Three adult specimens; two
collected at Finniss Springs and one at Mtadunna, South
Australia.

Tympanocryptis lineata lineata Peters—Two adult specimens; one
collected near Port Lincoln, and the other near Adelaide, South
Australia.

Tympanoeryptis cephalus gigas Mitchell—One adult specimen
collected in the Murchison District, Western Australia.

“i

SKELETAL MORPHOLOGY

The following is a summary of the variation observed in a number
of key features which were considered adequate to provide a guide
to affinities,

The general skeletal morphology is relatively uniform and the
range of variation appears to be in part correlated with body form
and related behaviour. While possessing the basic pattern of
Amphibolurus, the skeleton of T. maculasa shows several of the
specializations most strongly developed in Tympanocryptis. Its
skeletal detail is figured in fig. 1 and used as the main point of
reference.

The Skull: The cartilage bones roofing the skull are subject to
little variation other than relative proportions. The extent of penctra-
tion of the paired nasals between the prefrontals and the penetration
of the premaxilla between the nasals are subject to interspecific
variation, The relative proportions of the premaxilla appears to be
constant and diagnostic, varying at the extremes from long, slender
and aeute in A. maculatus qularis through long, parallel sided and
rounded in t. diemensis to short, wide and obtuse in 1. refieulatus
mermMIs.

Beddard (1905) accepted the osteology of A. barbatus as typical
of the genus and used it as part of the foundation for his comparison
with Chlamydosaurus. Apart from the facet that lizard osteology is
subject to greater interspecific variation than was suspected by
Beddard, the examination of several dried skulls supports Beddard’s

MITCHRLL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 183

comparisons, but reveals barhatus to be atypical of the genus as a
whole in several respects, The palatines meet on the midline in adult
barbatus and Beddard contrasted this with — the condition in
Chlamydosaurus. In all species examined the present study the
palatines were clearly separated on the midline, Also, the pre-
maxillary bone usually fails to reach beyond the posterior margin of
the external nares and frequently if only extends approximately two-
thirds the way along the median border. Species with short, wile
premaxillas, such as 4, reticnlatus inermis, possess small external
nares to matelh,

The parietal are invariably fused posteriorly but display wide
‘ariation in the size and form of the parietal foramen, which is
ereatly enlarged and emarginate anteriorly in most species. In many
species there is also retardation or failure of ossification in median
parts of the posterior border of the frontal (see fig. 1). In fully adult
specimens of several species examined, 7’. lineala, A. pictus, A. decresu
and in one eael) of the two specimens of A, diemensis and A,
adelaidensis tie parietal foramen is a simple perforation at or
immediately behind the centre of the fronto-parietal suture,

In the large and probably senile specimen of A, pictus from
Tailem Bend, South Australia, the perforation is in a backward exten-
sion of the frontal whieh intrudes the transverse line of the normal
fronto-parietal suture to fill the parietal foramen, In all other species
examined this foramen is enlarged to varying extents, and a large
part of the cranial cavity remains unprotected through to adulthood.
The relative size and shape of the parietal opening appears constant
for adult specimens and could be of diagnostic value if required. The
ontogenetic sequence of 7, maculosa clearly shows the latter stages in
the ossification of the parietal and indicates that the enlarged foramen
indergoes little change in relative size or shape during development
in this species, This feature is most strongly developed in species
inhabiting open stony or sandy desert.

Fig, 1. Tumpanoeryplis macutosa (adnlt. male)

A. Dorsal view of the skull oriented so that the frowtal is at 90° to the angle of view.

B. Ventral view showing the relationship between the Juwer jaws and fhe hyo-branchial
apparatus,

(, Pelvie girdle,

D, Pectoral girdle,

E. Pes of Tympanocrypbis maculosa,

¥, Pes of Tympanoeryplis lineata shown for comparison,

G. Manua of Tympanooryptis macuoasa,

184 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The hones comprising the superior temporal arch vary consider
ahly from one species to another, The Jugal anc post-orbital bones
are in part compensatory in size and shape. VT. lineata, 7. letraporo-
phora, T, intima, 1, cephalus gigas and A, diemensis possess enlarged
jugals extending well upward into the femporal arch; 1. adelaidensis
possesses an enlarged jugal which is wide but not high. In 7. cephalus
gigas and A, adeluidensis the post-orbital bridge is conspienously wide,
In A. maculatus gularis, A, eristatus, A, darlingtoni, A, retionlatus
and 7. maeculosa the jugal is comparatively slender and does not
extend as far np the arch, the post-orbital frequently exteuding down-
ward along the margin of the orbital vaenity. The post-trontals
are absent.

The form of the remnant of the supratemporal in relation to the
siperior artiewation of the quadrate is of interest. The supra-
temporal ts rather superficially attached to the parietal proeess in
micnlosa, but in the majority of species it is a flattened splinter
embedded in the lower lateral edge of the process. Its distal end
passes under the squamosal where it thickens to articulate against
the quadvate. In 4. fionii and A, deeresii the quadrate articulates
well forward on the squamosal and the enlargement of {he supra-
temporal under the squamosal is quite considerable.

The dentition is heterodont, the posterior 12 or 13 teeth in both
upper and lower jaws being acrodont and strongly compressed and
the anterior teeth subtheeodont and eonieal. In a. eristalus, A,
diemensis and to a lesser extent in 4. maculatus gudaris the posterior
acrodont teeth are enlarged and tend trieuspid. Bach central eusp 18
sharply pointed and the lateral cusps are flat or only slightly raised.
The upper jaw closely overlies the lower jaw, the central enusps of
the six enlarged posterior upper teeth interlocking into grooves in
the outer face of the dentary. In T. cephalus gigas and 7’. intima the
enlarged teeth in the upper jaw are inclined slightly so that the teeth
themselves interloek. In both of these species the size of these teeth
decreases rapidly towards the front and anteriotly are kept
permanently separated by the interlocking of the enlarged incisors,

The first and second maxillary, first and seeond mandibular and
the two or three premuaxillary teeth are conical in all species except
A. cristatus which appears to lack conical mandibular teeth. These
teeth are firmly attached to the bone at the base, but are separated
by porous bony septa, In all species referred to Tympanoeryptis,
including maculosa, they are considerably enlarged and _ slightly

MIPTCHELL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 185

reeurved, An enlarged mandibular tooth fits into a noteh in the upper
jaw between the maxilla and the premaxilla on each side, and an
enlarged maxillary tooth fnetions as a canine and overlies the dentary
on cach side, The lower jaw is slightly longer than the upper jaw to
allow these teeth to interlock in this manner (see fig. 1),

TTyo-branchial Structures The hyoid displays litthe variation from
that figured for maculosa (fig, 1), The first branchial arch is strongly
developed in all species examined, the bony ceratobranchial articu
lating on the body of the hyoid.

Because non-caleified eartilaginous structures were not adequately
differentiated in the material studied it was not possible to trace the
epibrauchial T elements, but in several species, 7, maculosa (see fig. 1),
T, lineata, and VT. tetraporaphora the ceratobranchialepibranchial
connection is very strong and the epibranchial can be seen turning
abruptly away in a manner which suggests that it joins the erantal
wall near the auditory strnetures. The ceratobranchial is also strongly
developed in several species of Amphibolurns examined, but the epi-
branchial councetion is usually weaker and situated further hebind
the quaadrate,

Assuming the closure of the ear membrane refleets the need for
substantial modification of the anditory mechanism, a detailed study
of eartilaginois parts of the branchial arch and of the structure of
the anditery capsule may reveal some significant parallels,

Pectoral Girdles The detail of this girdle is composed of both
stable and nnstable characters. All species possess simple rod-like
elavicles with no median fenestrae, lave the scapula and eoracoid
lused in the adult, have a supra-coracoidal foramen, a lateral cora-
coidal fenestra formed by the extension of the calcified cartilage of
the epicovacoid to join the anterior corner of the coracoid and a very
distinet and heavily reinforced articulating glenoid for the forelimh,

The minmber of sternal ribs is three on each side in the majority
of species with one rib attached to each xiphisternal horn, but some
vartalion was noted, A, macilalis qularis possesses Four sternal and
no xiphisternal ribs; 7. fefraporophora and ul. darlingloni also possess
four sternal ribs, but the lower pair in each case are attached at the
base of the xiphisternum. This also applies to one of the two
specimens of A, dienmensis, Single specimens of al. pictus, a.
adelaidensis and T. intima possess three sternal but no xiphisternal
ribs. ‘The ribs are attached to the 9th, 10th, 11th and 12th vertebrae.

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2.
Pelvic Girdles of :— Interelavieles of :—
A. Amphibolurus maculatus gularis. F, G. Amphibolurus pictus.
B. Amphibolurus pictus. H. Amphibolurus adelaidensis.
C, Amphibolurus adelaidensis, I, Amphibolurus maculatus gularis.
D. Tympanocryptis lineata. J. Tympanocryptis tetraporophora,

1. Lympanoeryptis intima, K. Tympanocryptis lineata,

MITCHELL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 187

he interclavicle is subjeet to wide variation, but the limited
matevial available for study did net permit its interspecific stability
to he adequately assessed. [t varies from broad, short, arrow-shaped
in T. lineata (fig. 20), 7, tetraporophora and 2, cephalus gigas to
broad, short, tending ernciform in A, adelaidensis (fig. 2H), A. fionit
and a. deeresit to long, arrow-shaped in 7. intima (fig. 2K), A.
maculatus gularis (fig. 21), A, reticulatus, A, darlingtoni and dA,
diemensis to dagger-shaped in J’, maculosa (fig. 1D) to simple blade-
shaped in one specimen of A. pictus (fig. 21) collected at Mount Myre,
Sonth Australia. The interclavicle of A. pictus appears to be snbjeet
to wide individnal variation. The interelaviele of the Western Gawler
Range specimen is figured (fig. 2G) and that of the Tailem Bend
specimen is long and broadly arrow-shaped (similar to fig. 2K). The
interclavicle of 7. maculose is constant for the five specimens examined.
A. cristatus Was an wiusual interclaviele, Tt is dagger-shaped with
two oblique elub-shaped lateral (rojections commencing two-thirds the
way down the ‘“handle’’,

Pelvic Girdle. Within the limitations of the material available for
study the pelvic girdles appear constant and vary sufficiently to be of
value as supporting data im speeies taxonomy,

The pubis and ischium are indistingnishably fused in adnits of
A, adelaidensis, T. lineata and T. cephalus gigas and retain a faint
suture in young adults but are probably indistinguishably fused in
senile specimens of 7, intima and T, maeulosa, Adnits of 7. tetra-
porophora, A, decresti and A, fionti possess firmly united bones but
retain distinct sutures, while 4, maculatus gularis (fig, 2A), A. pietus
(fiz, 2B), A. davlingtoni and in subadults of A. erisfatus and 4,
reticulatus inermis these bones are clearly separate. The girdles of
A. eristatus and A. darlingloni are ‘fopen’’ structures similar to that
figured for A, maculatus qularis (fig. 2A).

In the majority of species the ischio-pubic fenestra is divided
by a strong cartilaginous structure involving hoth the liypo-ischiam
and the epipubis. In 7. lineata, T', tetraporophora, 1. maculosa and
A, adelaidensis this median strueture is heavily ealeified throughont
(see fig. 2), but in A. maculatus gularis, A, rehieulutus inermis, A,
cristalus, A. fionii and A, decresti calcification only oecurs at the pubic
and ischial ends. In 7. cephalus gigas, T. imtioma, and «A. diemensis
the ischio-pubie fenestra is not completely divided,

188 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The pubis is piereed by an obturator foramen, but beeause of
the shape of the pubic bones this is partly or completely obscured in
some species. When the girdle is viewed ventrally, the anterior process
is transversely compressed and curves upward and outward in the
form of a prepubie lip, on the lateral end of whieh is attached a
ligament connected obliquely across to a point on the corresponding
ischium. Jn species in which the process is strongly compressed and
the lip well developed—T. intima, T. lineata, T. tetraporaphora, T-
maculosa and <A. adelaidensis the obturator foramen is directed
forward. In 7. intima the foramen is directly below and completely
concealed by the prepubie lip (see fig. 2). OF the species of
Tympanoeryptis, cephalus gigas is the only species examined which
does not possess this feature, [ft possesses a very narrow girdle with
the obturator foramen situated well below and across from. the
prepubic lip, being clearly visible when the girdle is viewed squarely
from below.

Limb Structure: The structure of the forelimb was found to be
constant, the primitive reptile formula of 2,3,4,5,3 being retained for
the manus of all species examined.

Hxamination of hindlimb structure revealed the only clearly
definable dichotomy evident from this study, All species of
Amphibohous examined possessed the primitive 2,3,4,5,4, lormula for
the pes while all speeies of Pympanoeryptis, except maculosa, show
a reduction of one phalanx in the fifth toe to a formula of 2,8,4,5,3.
T. maculosa retains the primitive formula for both manna and pes,

There does Not appear to he any significant variation in tarsal
or carpal structure, The astragalus and ealeaneum are fused in adults,
but the suture is frequently distinct. These two bones are separate
in juveniles of 7. meaeulosd,

Vertebral Colima: Vhe number of presacral vertebrae (including
the atlas) varies from 21 to 24 (see also Mitchell, 1948), The majority
ol species possess twenty-two, but the following exceptions were noted.
T. lineata (21 and 23), 7. letraporaphora (21 and 28), 4. adelaidensis
(21 and 25), A, cristatus (23) and cL. reticulatus inermis (24).

The atlas has paired neurapophyses which are widely separated
in most species. All presacral vertebrae exeept the atlas and three
cervieals have ribs attached. There is much variation in the relative
size and form of the neural spines, the spines being conspicuously

MITCHELL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 189

,

larger in long-limbed species possessing ‘open’? type pelvic girdle
structure (see fig. 2A) such as A. maculatus gularis and A. eristibus,
This may be related to their ability to adopt a bipedal mode of
locomotion,
DISCUSSION

Ol the features examined, only the hindlimb structure shows a
definable dichotomy which can be clearly correlated with taxonomic
characters currently in use. The variation in all other features shows
varying degrees of overlap between speeies in the two genera.

To further assist in determining the stability of the phalangeal
structure, two unique specimens in the South Australian Museum
collection were radiographed. The holotype of 7, wiformis Mitchell,
which is superficially unlike any other member of the genus, was
photographed under X-rays and proved to be typical of the genus,
It has a reduction of one phalanx in the fifth digit of the pes. A
small dragon collected at the Silverband Falls, Grampians, Victoria
and registered No. R8294 in the South Australian Museum colleetion
shows close superficial similarity in size, sealation and colouration to
T. lineata Peters, but differs in possessing a tvinpanic membrane which
is only partially concealed and in having four or five femoral pores
on each side. The whole membrane appears to be eovered by a thin
veneer of epidermal tissue, the central and upper parts ol which are
thiekened, sealy and pigmented to match the surrounding epidermis.
The radiograph of this specimen revealed no reduction in the number
of phalanges of either manus or pes.

The support of 7. uniforms leaves no doubt that the reduction of
one phalanx in the pes in combination with the external features
currently used to delimit Tympamovryptis will serve to maintain Th as
a useful taxonomic unit. Whether or not it is safe to assume a
monophyletic origin for the species so grouped must remain a matter
of opinion until more is known about the iuterspecifie stability of
osteological characters in this tamily,

Hypophalangy has been recorded as a species character in other
families, Stephenson (1960) records variation m the formulae for
both manus and pes im two speeies of the genus Nephrurus
(Giekkonidae); Mitehell (in press) records the loss of one phalanx
in the manus of a species of Diplodactylus (Gekkonidae) ; Mitehell
(1955 and wipublished data)—pvogressive hypophalangy in both manus
and pes is an important aspeet of speciation in the Seincidae.

190 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The discovery of a further species of Amplibolurus obviously
not closely related to the progenitors of maculosa, which is developing
a close resemblance to T'ympanocryptis including a scaly covering for
the ear membrane suggests that this feature is a recent and secondary
development.

Within the range of variation recorded, T'ympanocryptis species
lie near one extreme and are subject to less interspecifie variation,
Features usually combined, such as the strong development of the
bones in the superior temporal arch, the enlargement and interlocking
of the conical anterior teeth, the short, wide, arrow-shaped inter-
clavicle and the form of the pelvic girdle are characters developed
independently in Amphibolurus species.

The species maculosa agrees with Tympanocryptis in dentition,
pelvic girdle structure and concealment of the tympanum, but is typical
of short-limbed species of Amphibolurus in all other respects, Lf ts
therefore proposed that maculosa be regarded as a specialized member
of that genus. As such it would become Amphibolurus maculosus
(Mitehell). The closeness of the specifie names maculosus and
maculatus is regrettable, but both appear to be admissible ander the
International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Tam grateful to Dr. N. Ballai for his assistance in radiographing
the two specimens referred to in discussion and to my assistants,
Miss Lois Jaques for her assistance in the preparation of the illustra-
tions and much of the material examined, and to Miss Patricia
Muggridge for the typing of the manuscript.

RESUME
Dans ve travail on traite et illustre lanatomie de l’esquellette
de Vagamide Tympanocryptis maculosa Mitchell (1948). Comme
resultat des comparisons faites entre cetfe espéce et autres des
genres Tympanocryptis et Amphibolurus on transfére maculosa au
Amphibolurus.

REFERENCES CITED

Beddard, F. E., 1905: A contribution to the Anatomy of the Frilled
Lizard (Chlamydosaurus kingi) and some — other
Agamidae. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond. 1: 9.

MITCHELL—AFFINITIES OF TYMPANOCRYPTIS MACULOSA 191

Mitchell, F. J., 1948: A Revision of the Lacertilian Genus Tympano-
cryptis, Ree. S, Austr. Mus. TX: 57-86
1955: A Preliminary account of the Reptilia and Amphibia
collected by the National Geographical Society-Common-
wealth Government-Smithsonian Institution Hxpedition
to Arnhem Land. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. XI: 373-408.
(in press): Australian Geckos assigned to the Genus Gehyra
Gray (Lacertilia: Gekkonidae).
Peters, W., 1863: Monatsb. Akad. Wiss. zu Berlin: 230.

Stephenson, N. G., 1960: The Comparative Osteology of Australian
Geckos and its bearing on their morphological status.
Journ, Linn. Soe. Lond. Zool. XLIV: 247-299.

CONTENTS

Obituary and Bibliography of Herbert Mathew
alent seme rade tere rae we rer

Rock engravings and aboriginal occupation at
Nackara Springs ai. ericrcieucaret cat w

Redescription of the Australian- spider crab
‘‘Eurynome granulosa’’ ...........d.c0eesce ees

Revision of the Australian and New Guinea
Drynguin yeti nrg ripe batters ree

Chromosomes of snails introduced into South
Australia and the Northern Territory ...

Aboriginal rock poundings on Gallery Hill,
North-Western Australia. -..............0

Fishing rites at Be-Malai Portuguese Timor......

Two stone pestles from Western Papua and
their relationship to prehistoric pestles
and mortars from New Guinea ............

Stone implement making among the Nakako,
Ngadadjara and Pitjandjara of the Great
Western Desert ....ccccccccecseesseaseee eens

New species of Holochila from Victoria and
Southern New South Wales «..........0:

Notes on some Western Australian
Lepidoptera-Rhopalocera. with descrip-
tions of a new subspecies of Anisynta
alboyvendta! 25 tcdeoy isaac capo Nees sre

Affinities of Tympanocryptis maculosa Mitchell

Page
F-jeMitchell oo rasiace, es! 1
R. Edwards ........ccccesseee <)
D. J. G. Griffin oc... 29
G-FeGress <2irttiet es 39
HaMakawst si cisae 0. 79
C. P. Mountford 3......02.. 89
Mel Ee KING eee toe 109
Gu Pretty san ate 119
N. B. Tindale ...0........... 131
N. B. Tindale ..,......0.... 165
EAE.-Parsons: 5 aeceeern 175
E:-yeMitchell?csa 179

VOLUME | No. 2
1966

RECORDS
OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Adelaide, Scuth Australia.
‘Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer.
Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

AN OCCURRENCE OF SELENITE NEAR WHYALLA, SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY DAVID W. P. CORBETT

Summary

A recently discovered occurrence of crystallized gypsum in South Australia is described,
and a wide variety of crystal forms defined. Interim results of field and laboratory
investigations currently being undertaken are given, together with chemical analyses of
saline water samples. The general environment of the occurrence and the origin of the
gypsum are discussed.

AN OCCURRENCE OF SELENITE NEAR WHYALLA,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, Crraror or Fossrus axn Minerana,
Sourn Atstrawan Museum

Fig. 1-4

SUMMARY
A recently discovered occurrence of crystallized gypsum in South
Australia is deseribed, and a wide variety of erystal forms defined.
Interim results of field and laboratory investigations currently being
undertaken are given, together with chemical analyses of saline water
samples, The general environment of the occurrence and the origin
of the gypsum are discussed.

INTRODUCTION

Two small saline waterholes in an otherwise dry creek bed some
20 miles north-east of Whyalla were discovered by Mr. Barry
Whittard of Whyalla, in February, 1962, The waterholes contained
humerous crystal groups of the mineral gypsum yar. selenite,
CaSO,2HeO, WMurther investigations of the ocenrrence were made hy
Mr. Whittard in the company of Mr, B, Flounders, also of Whyalla.
Several specimens were collected and some of these presented to the
South Australian Musenm by Flounders.

Since December 1963, a joint investivation has been earried on
by Flonnders and the South Australian Museum into the origin of
the gypsum at this wnnsual locality, ixeept for the removal of «a
representative collection for scientific purposes, the pools have been
leff in their original state and used as a natural laboratory, In this
paper the site will be referred to as the Lineoln Park locality. The
locality is shown on fig, 1,

DESCRIPTION OF THE OCCURRENCE.

The two waterholes under consideration appear to be permanent
features in a shallow creek channel which terminates in a saltpan.
The two waterholes, henceforth referred to as the upper and main
pools, are found immediately below a breakaway in the channel, and
are bounded by banks four to six feet high,

The dimensions of the pools are:—Upper pool—30 yards hy
3 yards, average depth 6 inches: Main pool—30 yards by 3 yards,
average depth 2 feet. A general view of the locality is shown in
fie, 3A,

A

194 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Q& SELENITE LOCALITY

40
miles

PORT AUGUSTA.

A
WHYALLA.

Fig. 1.

Crystallization is concentrated around the margins of the pools,
with a prominent shelf developed below water level (see fig. 3B).
Twigs and dead branches have frequently formed centres for
crystallization. In the centre of the main pool, islands of gypsum have
formed over the carcasses of two sheep. A test pit sunk between the
two pools to a depth of 6 feet revealed a mass of thick, bladed erystals
growing in mud. Infilling water prevented excavation to greater
depth.

The Classification of the Gypsum Crystal Forms

Gypsum crystals are found in three different environments at
Lincoln Park—in mud, in water and in air. The various forms
developed can be classified as follows :—

1. Crystals in mud.
a. Thick-bladed groups (fig. 3C).
b. Layered groups (fig. 3D).
ce. Desert rose form (fig. 4B).
d. Transitional groups.
2. Crystals m water.
a. Bladed clusters (fig. 4A).
b. Rosettes and pompoms (fig. 4C).
c. Individual crystals on vegetation (fig. 4C).

CORBETT—SELENITE NEAR WHYALLA 1uS

3. Crystals im air.
a. Coraline’? gypsum (fie, 4D).

Deseriptian of Crystal Forms

da. Bladed qrovps: These inchide the largest individual crystals
found (up to 16 mehes in leneth), All the well-developed crystals
have grown In an nupnight position. The development of secondary
and tertiary crystals results im a crude reticulate pattern, the largest,
and primary erystals forming the basic framework. In almost all
cases the large bladed crystals show strong evidence of resolution,
having ragged terminations and corroded edyes, The bladed erystal
groups are generally free from impurities, but have a milky appearance
due to entrapped air,

Ib. Layered erystal groups: The layered struetuve is clearly the
resull, of a eyehe growth whieh is probably seasonal. In the fignred
specimen, six erystal luyers have developed in a block 6 inches deep.
The average thickness of each layer is 1 neh. When the layering is
well developed, the vertically disposed erystals are capped by a thin
mat of finely erystallived gypsum which is in tur sueeeeded by a
further layer of vertical laths, This is well shown by the bottom
layer in the fignred specimen, The upper layers are coloured brown
by the inelusion of fmpurities. Colour zoning is shown by some of
the larger erystals,

le. Desert rose groups: These are well developed in the ereek bed
abont half a mile south of the Lincoln Park pools. Single lens-shaped
crystals have developed by the enlargement of the O11 lace and the
suppression Of tle O10 face. These faces are frequently eurved,

1d. Transitional groups: The largest single specimen taken from
the Lincoln Park pools measures 19 inches by LO inches and consists
of clusters of thick, vertically disposed, bladed erystals, the whole
having a rongh stratification, The bottom layer ts coniposed of clear
crystals developed in mud; the second layer is of impure hrown-
coloured erystals grown in water; anil the tap layer shows a develop-
ment of fhe corallime gypsum grown at about water level,

Ya, Bladed clusters: These may have their origin in oud or upon
Ya, Bladed cluster ; © |
twigs and dead vegetation blown into the pools; however the major
part of their growth has taken place freely in water. They are most

often stained a yellowish-brown due to the inelusion of impurities.

2h, Rosettes and pompoms: These forms are found growing on
pieces of vegetation and inelude the most beautiln) of the erystal
groups developed, In the rosettes, erystallization has proceeded

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

outwards from a point, producing a series of radially arranged lath-
shaped crystals. Pompoms are smaller groups, where there has been
a close packing of the erystals to prodnce a compact vrystal mass.

20, Single Crystals: These ocenr growing on dead twigs in the
inanmner of leaves upon a tree.

8a. “‘Coralline’ gypaum’’: This is the name given to milky-white
crystalline material developed close to the surface of the water and
readily exposed to the air with a slight fall in water level. Under
magnification this form is seen to eonsist of small, fine laths of
radiating crystals massed together,

INVESTIGATION OF THE OCCURRENCE
Tnvestigations have heen directed along the following lines :—

1, Setting np and maintenance of test pits at the sile for the

controlled growth of gypsum crystals,

9. Experimental studies of gypsum crystal growth in glass

tanks.

3, Analysis of saline waters for dissolved salts and pI

measurement ol pool and ground waters in the field and

in the Jaboratory,
4. A study of the natural environment of the gypsum site.
These points will be treated in turn.

1. Test pits; Three pits approximately 5 feet by 3 leet were dug
within the creek hed adjacent to the two pools. Their positions are
shown on fig. . Hach was seeded with pieces of vegetation and
gypsum crystals to act as centres for crystallization, The pits were
covered with wire netting to prevent the entry of extraneous matter.

Within three weeks of establishing the teat pools, fine, needle-like
crystals up to three-eighths of an inch long were noted forming on
veeotution in the lowermost pit, Further developments in the test
pits were retarded hy the unexpected rise of the water table. At its
height this rise caused flowage down the creek bed two-thirds of the
distance to the salt pan, and the newly formed crystals in the test pit
were re-dissolved. The water table remained high until October 1964,
when a drop in level and a cessation of flow has resulted in the
renewal of crystallization in the pools and test pits.

The summer of 1963-64 was one of the driest for 380 years, sa
(hat the marked rise of the water table ean be taken to be a lag
effect from the heavy rains of the previous winter, whieh caused a
flooding of the neighbouring creek.

197

CORBETT—SELENITE NEAR WHYALLA

‘O[U}-LOpVM THOLF o}BM Jo Hd [YIM sofoy eLoq Fo WorRoo, Surmoys uepg yoy *g “By

om 4)
cve
p2q 42242 Ul AVMVAVSHE =>, ,
, .
Sild ISS. ; °
i) ; vO
“WOE! UY | = . / :
DIDP 2joy2Joq wWody parlsap ry > ‘
219D} J23DM Jo uolyDUI/Du| > y4pdp
. “spd Ge
2]|qD} 4J23DM wWoJ}) ; *xouddp
12D JO 41d YIM STIOHSYOR =O GEG $2|0y210g

ood saddy

6€

2\lw 7/e =uDd 4)Ds
upd 3)DS It oF [ood vist .
WO4} 29UD451q ,

198 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2, Experimental lank studies: These have been varried out by
B. FPlounders using both natural saline waters and also prepared
solutions of varying composition, Tests were condueted on the
solubility of gypsum in salt solutions of different densities, The results
of experimental work to date can be summarized as follows:—

(w) Greatest snecess bas been achieved in erowme gypsum
erystals from the natural water from the Lineoln Park
locality. Crystallization from prepared waters has
heen almost entirely ‘seed’? gypsum found settling on
the bottom of the tank.

(b) Crystallization rates were noted during the experimental
work, Inereases in excess of one grain per day have
heen reeorded, supporting the view that crystallization
of gypsum under natural conditions can proceed rapidly
in a suitable environment,

(c) In all cases where a small crystal of a certain type was
used as a seed, crystallization followed the same
pattern, For example a bladed erystal would continue
{0 develop the bladed form.

(d) Problems of duplicating the natural environment in a
elass tank were probably the cause of difficulty in
producing erystal groups similar to those formed im
nature, Factors to be considered include cireulation of
water, surface turbulence due to wind and currents,
and the effeet of mud and dust.

(ec) A more elaborate tank is at present being constructed in
which it will be possible to maintain a flow of water
and regulate the physico-chemical conditions to simu-
late a variety of environments.

(/) Tt has been noted that gypsum readily crystallizes on
organic substances in the tank experiments, for example
on the inside of a plastic bueket, on a nylon line, and
on vegetation as in the natural environment. Crys
tallization docs not take place on the sides of the glass
tank or on rock surfaces.

3. Analysis of saline waters: The analyses of four water samples
from Lincoln Park are given in table 3 and compared with an analysis
from a water bore in the same region. (This is the only bore water
analysis available for comparison.) Unexpectedly, the Lincom Park
waters are all highly acid, with a pli range of 2.95 to 4.15, Wield
tests earried out in the area on both pool and water table samples
confirmed these results. The field results are plotted on fig. 2 and

CORBETT—SFLENITE. NEAR WHYALLA 199

indieate a local concentration of the acid waters im the vicinity of the
(wo pools. Tlowever, a pH of 2.0 obtained from a ground water sample
taken from a salt pan in the Kimba Gap area, 25 miles S.W. of
Whyalla, sngeests that local concentration of highly acid waters may
be expected in the region. For comparative purposes pH readings
made ou ground water samples from similar environments in Sonth
Australia are given in table 1,

TABLE J
pl of Some South Austratian Natural Waters.

Loeality. pH,
Uypsom pools, Gineoln Park oy cc ue ce ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee BAS
Lake Bombungi, Loehiel oo. probs jold allele w blo} cyteherecys bacy “tobe 6.0
Salb pan, south of ponds, lincoln Park, : tial 6.6
Wirter from gypsum stulvetite, Murray River eliti’s, Waikerie -. -. 8
Sali Hlat, tear rifle pane, Whyalla at PUN OT yt bd CeMate CF oe 09 7.0
Myull Creek, near Lincoln MWighway crossing... ce ee ee ee 7A
Sea water, Hallett Cove .. 6. 0.6 ee bo ee ta ee eb at ne ue ad cae |

THE, GEOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT OF THE LINCOLN PARK
GYPSUM OCCURRENCKH

The area is inehided in the Geological Survey of South Anstralia
1:866280 sheet, Cultana, and is underlain by siltstones and sandstones
of Proterozoic age, An area of igneous rocks occurs to the eastward.
Drainage in the area is devived from the watershed formed by the
flat-lying quartzites of the Tent Hill Formation which are elevated
to a height of 912 feet at Tregolana triangulation station, The oldest
sedimentary rocks in the area, the Mbouabte Formation, are notable
for the prevalence of heavy mineral banding and the inelusion of
nodular iron oxide,

It is of interest that in the Katunga Hills boreholes deserihed hy
Miles (1954), tron sulphides were encountered at depth. In borehole
No, 1 pyrite appears at 880 feet, and both pyrite and pyrrhotite are
more pleutiful below 1,000 feet. In borehole No. 2, pyrite ocenrs at
226 feet, pyrrhotite increasing below 600 feet. The snlphides are
described as imetasomatic replacement (deposits, particularly intense
mineralization oceurring along formation boundaries,

The structure of the northern part of Kvre Peninsula is econ-
trolled by a series of roughly north-south trending faults. Although
these were initiated at an earlier date, the latest movement along
these faults was probably of Pliocene or Pleistocene date, Within the
Cultuna shvet area, a distinet fault scarp marks the margin of the
outerop of the cca isnonie Formation. It is possible that other faults
are present in the area, but are obscured by recent deposits.

200 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SUB-SURFACK WATERS

Little information is available regarding the acidity and alkalinity
of sub-surface waters in South Australia. The chemical characteristics
of waters in the Great Artesian Basin have been deseribed by Jack
(1925) and diseussed by Ward (1946). Jack recognized an easterly
derived carbonate water and a westerly derived sulphate water moving
towards their natural ontlet along the line of mound springs, A pH
reading of $.95 is quoted by Baas Becking and Kaplan (1956) from a
bore in the Lake Frome area, This bore is situated in the region of
the carbonated waters. The sulphate waters of the western section
of the basin ean be expected to have a lower pH. The brines and muds
from Lake Byre are almost neutral, having a pH range of 6.6 to 7.2
(ihid 1956),

The Lineoln Park waters are closely comparable with sea water
in chemical composition, and the comparison is made in table 2.
Their high ealeium content is due to the solution of the surface kunkar
limestone.

TABLE 2
Pereentage at Major Dissolied. Constitvents,

Water-table, Brine,
Sea water*., Lincoln Park. Lake Eyre.
ID gf we Wet es wet tie eee te SOD SANT 57.00
80, se ew et oy peat’ cre bei 7.68 RST 4.00
NL rine a drtgtea ee 04 potas es BM 30.4 BHT
MED o wk chmes Jam of se whale wis 8.69 2.04 1,83
Cath ac Cabok io ap etd ay Let 451 ih]
o8.19 GO.) NS.3t
Dissolved Constituents—Parls Per Thousand,
Water-hible, Brined,
Sen wotert. Lincolu Park. Lake Eyre,
SY vs bebe fete deo pre lee perieret ewe ot 6 1S,EG 17,269 171,000
Oye ewe we le a ale 2.049 2.688 12,900
INA Sen le wee cgiee ce elt oe ene | SOLOS 9,700 107.000
Mec oe one, He et ae ev as 1.2728 0.940 ADD

Cie ee a ve a ae ay why 1h400 1.385 (),950
“Tom Mason, Th. 1h, Prineiples af Geochemistry, John Wiley and Sons, London,
+ From Rankwna and Bulan, Geochemistry, University of Chicago Press,
| Trom Baas Beeking and Kuplan (1056),

ORIGIN OF THE GYPSUM
he deposition of the remarkable crystal groups at Lincoln Park
must be attributed to local physical and chemical factors. In partienlar
there is a direct causal relationship between the high acidity of the
gypsum pools and the erystal growth. Highly acid waters (ph less
than 4) have a restricted occurrence, being confined to thermal springs
in regions of recent voleanicity; peat soils; and areas where H2SO,
is generated by the oxidation of sniphide deposits. The first two
possibilities can be ruled out for the region under review, which fulfills

yp

CORBETT—SELENITE NEAR WHYALLA 201

neither of the necessary conditions, The third possibility, however,
deserves consideration.

No evidence of sulphide inineralization is found at the surface in
the area, However, the presence of pyrite and pyrrhotite in the
Katunga Hills boreholes is of interest, and it is coneeivable that similar
metalhe sulphides could exist at depth below the Lincoln Park locality,
and that their oxilation has resulted in the formation of sulphurie
acid, The reactions involved are ag follows :—

FeS2 + 70 + THeO = FeSO. + HeSO,

2FeSOs; + HaSQy, + O = Fe2(SO.)s + HO

Fes(SOi)s -+ 6H20 — 2Fe(OH)s + 3HsSO,
Vpward migration of acid-charged waters could have taken place
alony a fault line, several of which are known to occur in the region.
The surface or near surface kunkar limestone could supply the calcium
necessary to produce gypsum according to the formula:

CaCOs + HeSO, = CaSOs + HO + COs
The present water table stands only a tew feet helow ground level,
so that oxidation must have taken place at a time when the water
lable was lower, or alternatively aerated waters gained access along
the Tault line and caused oxidation below the general Jevel of the

water table.
TABLE 3

Water Analyses from Lincoln Parl Typsuin Loealily, Water bore,

Wiarter Td. of Gillen

20)0yds. down- = table hetween 6m, NNW.

Main pool, Upper pool, stream from upper and of Lincoln

Hun pool. main pools. Gap Homestead,
ppm, p-p.m pep, p-p-m. p- Pm,
Chloride G)o.. .. 85,725 a7410 105,200 17,269 5.856
Sulphate SO, . .. 5,068 6,880 6,400 2,693 1,802
Carbonate COs .. Nil Nil Nil 8 284
Nitrate NOw sy. Nil Nil Nil Nil —

Sodium Na’... 2. 20,820 31,035 57,630 9,700 Ys ash
Potassium KK... — ra = ia ew
Calcium Ca... 4. 1,882 105 1,925 1,385 605
Magnesium My .. 2.075 4,890 6,055 O40 484.

Siliew SiO, .. .. — —_— —

Total saline matter 65,080 101,520 177,210 41,985 11,460

ehssun ed campast-
tion of salts:

Caled carbonate = — —_ la 474
Culeiim sulphate . 4.693 HA65 6,545 3420 1410
Magnesium sulphate 2,880 2,907 2,230 S06 384
Magruesium chloride 5,883 10,978 21,945 4,048 19%
Sodium chloride... 51,675 $1,170 146,490 24,708 7,699

pH 3.55 pH 2.95 pl 3.55 pH 4.15 pl 7,00

CONCLUSIONS
The water in the Lincoln Park gypsum pools is ¢ssentially sea
water modified by a slight increase in the sulphate ion and the addi-
tion of calcium locally derived from the surface and near surface

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

kunkar limestone. The cause of the high acidity of the Lincoln Park
‘aters has not been determined, although one possibility has been
snggested in this paper. It is considered that the livh acidity has
been the direet cause of the gypsum erystallization at Lincoln Park,
The apparently continuous formation of gypsun, jovether with the
velatively low concentration of the sulphate ion in the analyses quoted,
indicates that sulphate is being continually replenished.

evidence from the Kiba Gap area shows that gypsum formation
in a highly acid environment is not restricted to the Lincoln Park
locality. The physico-chemical enviroument at Lincoln Park is, how-
ever, very different from that in which gypsim is normally found in
South Australia, The conditions described are local and unusual, and
the extent of the area in which these local conditions can be found is
anknown, but their development may be related to the surface and
sub-surface geology of the region, It is hoped that further studies on
a regional scale may help to resolve this problem,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Mus author wishes to thank Mr, Ben Flounders of Whyalla, the instigator of the gypsum
project, for the imporiant part te las played in the work. On his shoulders has devolved
the navjor port of the field work, and Tis neverfie ding enthusinsin has in large measure
misured the continuity of observation whieh is go necessary in w Peojeet of this kind, Als
stimulating views on the gypaam problem lave heen a sontinued source of tnapitation.

Thanks are also tue to Mr, Batry Whittard and Mr. Peter Floanders for their help
in the field, and to Mr. Len ese for the transport of specimens From Whyalla to Adelaide
ou nimervns ovensions.

The chemical analyses of the Gineoln Park waters were earrivd out by fie Australian
Minoral Development, Iaboratorios, Varkaide, South Australia, and their assistance 78 love

acknowledged.
REFERENCES
Boas Beeking, I. G. M. and Kaplan, 1. R., 1956: ‘The Microbiologiew Origin of the Sulphur
Nodules of Lake Eyre, Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Anst., 79, pp. 92-64,
Jack, R, L., 1983: ‘The Conrposition of the Waters of the Great Artesian Basin in South
Australia nud its signifieanue. ‘Trans, Roy, Soe, S. Aust. 47, pp. 816-324,
Milos, K. R., 1954: The Geology und Tron Ore Resources of the Middleback Range Ares.
Geol, Sury, 8 Aust, Bull. No. 33,
Ward, ln K., 146: Thr Occurrence, Composition, Testing wid Utilisation of Underground
Water i South Australia, aod the Search for further Supplies. Geol, Burk &
Anwt. Bull. No. 28.
EXPLANATION OF FIG, 3-4
"ia, 3
A. General view of the Lincoln Park gypsum site looking south-east. Main pool ta the
foreground.
Bh. The edge of the main pool showing the development of the underwater shelf of bladed
erystul gvoups. Coralline gypsum above the water level.
O. Group of thick-bladed erystals. Maxima length of group 15 inches,
D, Layered group. Thicknexs of the bloek 6 inches,
FTG. 4
A. Bladed cluster. Mauch of the gypsum forming the underwater shelf is of thia type.
Neight of specimen TA inehwr,
i. Desert rose gypsum grown in mud. (Natural size.)
C, Urystal rosette growing on veootition, Titividual erystals of common form ovcur at
(We right of the photograph. Length of specimen 54 inches, Inset shows the pompom lype
of arystallization, (Natural size.)
hy. ‘*Quralline'? gypsum developed ou a mat of small pompoms. Length of specimen
6 inehes,

Pi
4
4

NEW SPECIES OF OLOGAMASUS BERLESE (ACAR:
RHODACARIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

BY DAVID C. LEE

Summary

Olagmasus, is re-defined and considered to be closely allied to Gamasellus Berlese. A
key is given for identification of the known adults of 12 new species of Ologamasus ( O.
cymosus, mansoni, leptosceles, dumosus, nucilus and validus from New Zealand, and O.
pyrenoides, discutatus, litophrothrix, tindalei, southcotti and virgosus from Australia)
which are described in three groups.

NEW SPECIES OF OLOGAMASUS BERLESE (ACAR: RHODA-
CARIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND

By DAVID C. LEK, Cusaron or Aracanonocy, Sourm AvstnaLtan
Mvcsecm

Text fig. 1-54

SUMMARY

Ologamusus Berlese, is re-defined and considered to be closely
allied to Gamusellus Berlese. A key is given for identification of the
known adults of 12 new species of Ologamasus (QO. cymosus, mansoni,
lepltosceles, dumasus, nucilis and validus trom New Zealand, and
O. pyrenoides, disculalus, litoprothrix, tindalei, southeolti and virgosus
from Australia) whieh are described in three groups,

INTRODUCTION

The limits of the Rhodacaridae are uncertain, but Eyans (1963)
pointed out that, on the basis of leg chaetotaxy, it contained a natural
assemblage of genera which he termed the Rhodacarus-group. Genera
of the Rhodacarus-group oceur in both of the subfamilies that Ryke
(1962a) separates on the structure of the adult dorsal shield; which
is entire in the Ologamasinae and divided in the Rhodaecarinae, Since
L consider that the mites described in this paper belong to Ologamasis
and are closely allied to Gamasellus, whieh is placed in the Rhoda-
¢arinac, | have had to disregard these subfamilies. Instead, | have
separated off some of the genera of the Rhodacarus-group, that are
listed below, by the form of their dorsal setae. This character has
been used by Eyans (1957) to separate Cyrtolaclaps and Eurypara-
situs, To apply it, as a diagnostic character to divide the Rhodacarus-
group of genera into two groups, is unsatisfactory and it is used
here only as a temporary measure. It splits Gamasellus into two
groups and leaves only Ologamasus aberrans, of the previously
déeseribed species, in Ologamasus,

The following genera of the Rhodacarus-group contain species
with One or more pairs of obviously pilose or paddle-like setae on the
dorsal shield :—

C'yrfolaclaps Berlese, 1887. Ryke (1962b) lists as a subgenus of

Cyrtolaelaps sens. lat,

Gamasellus Berlese, 1892 (in part). Ryke (1962b) lists as a sub-

genus of Cyrtolaelaps sens. lat.

206 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gamaselliphis Ryke, 1961, Subgenus of Cyrtolaelaps seus, lat.
*Periseius Womersley, 1961.
"Heterogamasus Tragardh, 1907.
Bvanssellus Ryke, 1901,
Qlogamasus Berlese, 1888,
*Buepicrius Womersley, 1942.
*Siylogamasus Womersley, 1956,
* — gonus not listed as belonging to Rhodacaridae by Ryke (1962a)-

Of the genera listed above, Ologamasnus and those listed before il
may be elosely allied, while the position of Buepicrius and Stylo-
gamasus is uncertain.

There are four species from Argentina, previously in Ologamasus
(O. coleoptratus Berlese, 1888; OQ. simplicior Berlese, Lod: O. striolatis
Berlese, 1916 and QO. eave Sheals, 1962), that are exeluded by this paper,
| have examined O. cavei type material and its undeseribed male, as
well as specimens which may be QO. simplicior, and consider that
they have affinities with South American and Australian ‘‘//ydro-
gamasus’?, Since these “Hydrogamasus™ are not eongeneric with
Hydrogamasus salinus Laboulbene, 1851, but appear to be more allied
to Parasitiphis littoralis Womersley, 1956, T would temporarily place
the above species in Parasitiphis, These relationships are confused
but, if the Gamasiphis 1 have examined are congenerie with G.
pulohellus Berlese, 1887, it is certain that the above species do not
belong 10 Gamasiphis, which differs, among other characters, im
haying a reduction in the munber of setae on genu TIL and LV,

MATHRIAL AND METITODS

The mites belonging to Ologamasus are from New Zealand and
Australia, and were extracted from moss and litter by using
desieeating funnels, They have been mounted in either a gum chloral
medinm or in laetie acid, before being drawn with the aid of a camern
lucida, The use of two methods of mounting means that the specimens
were squashed in varying degrees. The distortion of squashed speei-
ens is mainly lateral and the effect can be seen by comparing fig, 36
and fig. 42, which are of mites of about the same shape.

The following type material has been deposited outside the Senth
Australian Museum, Adelaide. Female and male paratypes of
Ologamasus cymosus and pyrenoides, and male paratype of (.
diseutatus, at lhe British Museum (Natural History), London. emale
and male paratype of O. cymosus at the Dominion Museum, Wellington.
Female and male paratype of O, pyrenoides at the Natal Musewn,
Pietermaritzburg,

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 207

The terminology generally is that of Evans (1957), except that
apotele is used instead of palptarsal seta and spermodactyl instead of
spermatophoral process, The position of post-lateral setae is shown
on fig. 1. The terminology for leg and pedipalp chaetotaxy is that of
Evans (1963 and 1964), see fig. 1 and 2. The terminology for dorsal
chaetotaxy merely approximates to that of Lindquest and Evans

2O-um4z>
pO-am4Hn0R

PROXIMAL

* = ventral setoe

* = Idtera! setae

® = dorsal setoe

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES
Vig. 1-2. Diagrammatic representation of the chaetotaxy of Ologamasus discutatus
sp. noy. female.
Fig. 1. Dorsum. post-lateral setae and basal segments of palp and leg.
Fig. 2. Tarsus of legs (1, IIL or IV,

(1965), since [ know of this paper only through correspondence with
Dr. Evans. One certain difference is that I have numbered the setae
of each dorsal row as if that species had a complete series; see fig. 1.
The single measurement given is the length of the idiosoma of the
mounted holotype, allotype or morphotype, to the nearest 10p,

208 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

Family RHODACARIDAE Oudemuns, | 902,
Genus Ologamasus Berlese, 1888, nec Berlese, 1906.
Syu: Ologamasellus Berlese, 1914,
Type: Qlagamasus aberrans Porlese, 1888.

The following characters of the genus place it in the Rhoducarns
sroup. The leg chaetotaxy is of the type in which the setal formula
of tibia T is (2-6/4.2), The apotele is three tined, with one tine
reduced amd without an associated hyaline fap, In the female the
metasternal setae are on the sternal shield, and the eenital shield is
Iriticated posteriorly and separate from a ventrianal shield. tn the
Inve the genital orifice is presternal, and there is a distally free
spermodactyl and an armed lee L.

Within the Rhoducarus-gzronp, Ologamasus is limited to (he fist
of genera given in the above introduction by the presenee of obviously
pilose setae on the dorsal shield, it is separated from all the yvenera
listed before it and from Hnepicrius by having an entire dorsal shield
in the female and usually iu the male also. It can be separated from
Stilogamasis, whielr has an entire dorsal shield in the adult, by
having the sternal shield separate trom endopodal shields TV in all
species that have the ventrianal shield separate from the dorsal shield,
and also by the ventral setav on the eenu and tibia of legs [1 and TV
ual being pilose,

There are a diimber of characters, uot mentioned ahove, whieli
occur in all, or most, of the adults of the genus. The denticles on the
dewlosternum are not always very clear, but they appear to he in six
or seven transverse rows and never nine rows as in Cyrtolvelaps and
Kurypavasitus, The idiosomm is strongly convex dorsally and well
covered with sclerotized shields. Most speeies seem to have produced
u sticky exudation, similur to that of some Crytostigmata, whieh may
cover a lot of the opisthosoma and have dirt and tnneul hyphae
adhering to it. The degree of fasion of the shields is very variable,
but the peritrematal shield always merges with the dorsal shield
anteriorly and exopodal shields TV posteriorly. The sternal shield is
always fused to endopodals IT, In the female there is a ereseont
shaped, endogymal slield fitting into the posterior coneavity of the
sternal shield and the anterior margin of the gvenital shield is thin
and almost luyaline, The chaetotaxy of gen DL and TV is (2-4/2-1)
and (2-5/2-1) which differs from Cyrtolaelaps, genu TID is (2-4,/2-2) ;
Kueperins, wenn VV is (2-5/1-1); Sessilnmens, venu TL (2-4/1-1) und
wenn TV is (2-5/1-1); Gamasiphoides, geny WT is (2-4/1 or 21) and
gent TV is (2-5/1-1); antl Gamasiphis, genw TIT is (2-4/1-1) and genn
TY is (2-5/1-0), On the pabp genu, af is short and spatilate with a
lateral tine, while a@/s is longer aud slightly spatulate near the (ip.

LEF—AUST. AND. N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 209

On the palp femur, «/ is short and pilose near the tip. The dorsal
sctue of leg TV have been drawn for all species and it cau be seen
that on the tarsus, md is long and filamentous, while pds is shorter,
or if subequal, it has a tip whieh is blunt, spatulate or pilose. This
is also true of a number of Gamasellus and Gamaselliphis with pilose
dorsal setae, The smallness of pl: and pds compared with adi and
adz on lemur TV, oceurs in all bat one Ologamasus species, and is
found in a number of Rhodacarid genera, The ambulacral apparatus
of leg T has smaller claws than those of the other lees and is without
a pulvillus,

In the deutonymphs of the three species deseribed there is a
divided dorsal shield and the setal form is similar to that of the adults.
The deutonymph of Ologamasus cymosus, unlike its own sdult but like
the adults of the other two groups of species, las twenty-two pairs of
setae on the anterioy dorsal shield. Only one protonymph has been
deseribedt,

The new species of Oloyamasus ave dealt with in three groups.
From Berlese’s description of Ologamasus aberrans, it could belong
fo the pyrenoides-zvonp or cymosus-group, but it should probably
he placed in a group of its own, Tt should he noted, that in
my re-definition of Ologamasus, 1 no longer exclude species in which
the female ventrianal shield is not {used to the dorsal shield, as was
done by Berlese (1888), This change may haye to be revoked later,
in which case the disculalus-ervoup will be excluded from Olagamasus,
fo form a new genus, or to be placed in Gamasellus, which would in
turn have to be re-defined to inelude species with an entire dorsal
shield in the adult.

KMY TO OLOGAMASUS SPECTRS FROM AUSTRALIA AND
NEW ZBRALAND
FremMaLre

1, Ventrianal shield fused to dorsal shield and
sternal shield fused to endopodal shields
IV. cymosus-group .. .. 0. 0. 0. we se

Ventrianal shield fused to dorsal shield and
sternal shield not fused to endopodal
shields IV. purenoides-gvoup .. 2... .. pyrenoides sp, nov,
Ventrianal shield not fused 10 dorsal shield
and sternal shield not fused to endopodal
shields TV, discutatus-group......- .. &
2. Vertieal setae simple .. .. .. .. oo... 8
Vertical setae pilose... 0. 0.

210

[=r

_

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Femur IV with 2 conical spurs .
Femur IV without conical spurs .. .. --

Dorsal setae in row R of normal length (sub-
equal with $1) and on femur IV, pd: about
4 the length of ads bes yas

Dorsal setae in Tow R very ~ shill (subequal
with 21) and on femur IV, pd2 is longer
haath: ide fo pe ne age ghee ale Ha ets

Femur III without conical spurs and dorsal
setae in row R are pilose... .. .
Femur LT with 1 conical spur and dorsal

setae in row R are simple

. Vertical setae are simple .. .. -.

Vertical setae are pilose

No dorsal setae on leg LV are pilose
Pilose dorsal setae on leg TV .. -.

Femur |V without a sickle-like spur... ..
Femur IV with sickle-like spur .. .. .. ..

One pair of ventral setae are pilose and seta
vy on femur LV is maul Ls, ra

Three pairs of ventral setae are pilose and
seta v on femur LV is a short spur

Mates
Sternogenital shield not fused with ventri-
anal shield and peritrematal shield fused
with ventrianal shield. cymosus-group ..
Sternogenital shield fused with ventrianal
shield and peritrematal shield fused with
ventrianal shield. pyrenoides-group
Sternogenital shield not fused to ventrianal
shield and peritrematal shield not fused
with ventrianal shield or, if partially fused,
the ventrianal shield is not fused to the
dorsal shield. disentatus-group

Vertical setae are pilose and tibia I is
MPM... 2. ae ee adh ye 8 ee tee
Vertical setae are simple and tibia II is
vnarmed 2. 4... ne ee A Sa ba bE Ba

cyMasus SP. NOV.

4

mansoni sp. Tov,

leptosceles sp. nov.

dumosus Sp. NOV.

nucilis sp. nov.

litoprothrix sp. nov.

nd
(

pio a

discutatus Sp. NOV.
tindalei sp. nov.

southcotti sp. nov.

VviTrgosUs Sp. Noy.

bo

pyrenoides sp. Nov.

validus sp. Nov.

3

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z, OLOGAMASUS 2

3. Dorsal setae in row #? are simple and there
is a nodule on the posteriolateral surface

of femur ID 2. 6. ue ce ee ee ee ee ee ee NN BONT BP, NOV.
Dorsal setae in row & are pilose and there
is no nodale on the posteriolateral surfaee

of femur Wow. ek wy ee ee ee ve ee ee ve) CYMRASUS SP. NOV.
4. Dorsal shield divided into two parts .. .. disentatus sp. nov,
Dorsal shield entire .. 0. 0. 00 0. 0... .. 8
». Ventrianal shield is fused {to the dorsal
Shield 2. cc se ly we oe ee ee os ew fee ap, TOV.
Ventrianal shield is not fused to dorsal

Shield oe. ey ee ee ee ee ee ge SOUthCOFD SP. Nov.

CY MOSUS—GROUP

The six species belonging to this group ave from North Island,
New Zealand, The adults range in length of idiogoma from 3850p
lu 890m,

Female, Ghathosoma. The anterior edge of the tectum eitves
forwards from the sides to a central, pointed process. The margin
is denticulate, some of the teeth may be large, sometimes forming a
pointed process each side of the central process, The chelicerae have
(liree teeth on the movable digit and three or Jour teeth, sometimes
with a series of small teeth distally, on the fixed digit. The rostral
and internal posterior rostral setae are longer than the external
posterior rostral and capitular setae. On the palp trochanter, av is
pilose near the tip, while pr is simple,

Idiosoma. Obvious reticulation on the sclerotized shields ocenrs
in the three species with pilose vertical setae. The dorsal shield is
fused posteriorly with the ventrianal shield, a short lateral fissure
separating it from the anterior of the ventrianal shield and the
posterior of the peritrematal shield. ‘Che peritrematal shield is some-
times fused with the ventrianal shield, but when it is separate, it
proceeds posteriorly well on io the opisthosoma, coming gradually to
a point. There is a single pair of prae-endopodal shields, The sternal
shield is fused with all the endopodal shields. There are fewer setae
on the idiosoma in this group compared with the other two groups
of species and the post-lateral setae and dorsal row of setae,
UR, are not considered to exist. There are usually twenty-one pairs
of setae on the podonotum, the anterior seta of row rin the two other
groups being missing, he chaetotaxy of the opisthonotum is
more variable, especially laterally, but there are always five setae in
row 4 and four setae in row S. In the three species with pilose

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

vertical setae there are five, instead of fonr, sefae in row J. There
are always both pilose and simple setae on the dorsal shield. The
pilose sefae sometimes have at their tip what may be the rudimentary
equivalent of the diaphanous flap that oecurs in the disentatus-group.
The chaetotaxy of the vevter is regular,

Lees. There is a conical spur on at least femur TL, and sometimes
on femur IIL and IV as well, Also a number of setae, especially on
the proximal segments of lee TV, are large and thorn-like.

Male. The moyable digit on the eheheerae has the same number
of teeth as the female. The spermodaetyl is only slightly longer than
the movable digit and is nirly stout. The dorsal shield is always
entire, The sternogenital shield is separate from the ventrianal
shield. In O. validus there are eight ventral setae amd not seven as
there are in the other two males, Also it has tibia UL armed as well
as femur Tl and genu Tl. There are never any conical spurs on
femor LH and TV.

Ologamasus cymosus sp. nov.

Female. Fig. 8-5. Idiosomal length, 400p,

he peritrematal shield is separate from the ventrianal shield.
The vertical setae, and two other pairs of dorsal setae, are simple,
the others being pilose. The central dorsal setae are bhint ended and
oly pilose distally, The lateral dorsal setae, including the whole of
row rand R, ave filamentous and pilose alone most ol their length.
The first pair of sternal setac are bhint at the tip and the fourth patr
are small, The anterior four pairs of ventral sefae are smaller than
the others and the posterior two pairs are pilose, as in row A. There
is a conical spur on femur Tl and LIL, and two conieal spurs on fennr
IV. On trochanter TV, af is thorn-like.

Male. Fig, 6 and 7, Idiosomal length, 350,.

The spermodacty] is slightly sinions, tapering eradually to a bhint
point. The dorsal setae are similar to those of the female, but the
lateral ones are less pilose, as is also true of the posterior two pairs
ol yentral setae. The first pair of sternogenital setae are less than
half the leneth of the others. The femur and genn of leg IT are armed,

Devionymph. Fig. 8 and 9, Idhosomal length, 360,

There igs obvious retienlation on the shields. The dorsal chaetotaxy
is similar to the adults, but there is one more pair ol setae on the
anterior dorsal shield. The form of the eentral dorsal setae is like
that of the adults, but the lateral ones are small and less pilose, Ags
in the adnli the posterior two pairs of vertrals are pilose and on
trochanter [V, al is thorn-like,

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 213

Pig. 8-5. Ologamasus cymosus sp. nov.

Fig. 3. Venter of fomalo.
Fig. +. Dorsum of feniale.
Fig, 5, Dorsum of distal segments from leg 1V of female.

Locality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype female, allotype
male, morphotype deutonymph, 6 paratype females, 8 paratype males
and 2 paratype deutonymphs from leaf mould, Botanical Gardens,
Wellington, December, 1960, coll. D. C. M. Manson.

Ologamasus mansoni sp. nov.

Female. Fig. 10-12. Tdiosomal length, 470s.

The peritrematal shield is separate from the ventrianal shield.
The vertical setae are simple. There are nore simple dorsal setae
than on O. cymosus, which is most striking in row R. The sternal
setae are as O, cymosus. All the ventral setae are simple. The lateral
fissure is notched around a pore, about the level of the posterior

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Fig. 6-9. Ologamasus cymosus sp, nov.

Fig. 6. Venter of male.

Fig. 7, Dorsum of male.

Fig. 8. Venter and dorsum of deutonymph,

Fig. 9. Venter of basal segments from leg IV of deutonymplh.

LEE—AUST, AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 215

Big. 10-13. Qlogamasus mansoni sp. nov.
Fig. 10.
Fig. 11.
Fig. 12.
Fig. 13.

Venter of female.

Dorsum of female.

Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of female.

Venter and dorsum of male (N.B. leg IT shows posterolateral
surface),

216 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

margin of the podosoma. There is a conical spur of femur IT and
LL, but not on femur TV. On femur IV, ad2 is not so robust as in
O. cymosus, On trochanter TV, al is filamentous.

Male. Fig. 18. Idiosomal length, 410,,

As in O. cymosus the dorsal setae are less pilose than in the
female, Otherwise, as in the female, except for the male characters
which are mainly as in O. cymosus. There is a nodule on the posterio-
lateral surface of femur [I which is not present in O, cymosus.

Wig. 14. Qlogamasus leptosceles sp, nov.
Fig. 14. Venter of female.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 217
Locality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype female, allotype

male, 2 paratype females and 1 paratype male from leaf mould,
Botanical Gardens, Wellington, December, 1960, coll. D. C. M. Manson.

100,

Fig. 15-16, Ologamasius leptosceles sp. nov.

Fig. 15. Dorsum of female.
Vig. 16, Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of female.

Ologamasus leptosceles sp. nov.

Female, Fig. 14-16. Idiosomal length, 570z.
The peritrematal shield is separated from the ventrianal shield.

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The vertical setae are simple. There is a reduction in the number of
dorsal setae, there being only five setae in row Z and four setae in
row R. The setae in row R are very small and subequal in length to
zl. The sternal are as in O. cymosus. The anterior of the posterior

1OOp

Fig, 17. Ologamasus dumosus sp. noy.
Fig. 17. Venter of female.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z, OLOGAMASUS 219

two pairs of ventral setae is only half the length of the other and not
subequal. There is a conical spur on femur IL and IIL only. On
trochanter TV, a/ is filamentous. The dorsal setae of femur IV are
unusual in pds being larger than dds.

Locality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype female from leat
mould, Khandallah, Wellington, 19 December, 1961, coll. D. C. M.
Manson.

Ologamasus dumosus sp. noy.

Female. Wig. 17-19. Idiosomal length, 560p.
There is obvious reticulation on the shields, The peritrematal
shield is fused to the yentrianal shield. The vertical setae are pilose.
There are two more pairs of opisthonotal setae, one in row J and

Fig. 18-19. Ologamasus dumosus sp. Noy.

Fig. 18. Dorsum of female.
Fig. 19. Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of female.

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

one in row R, than in O, cymosus. The opisthonotal setae are strongly
pilose. The sternal setae are as O. cymosus. Three pairs of ventral
setae are pilose. There is a conical spur on femur II only. Dorsgally,
on leg TV, adi and ads on the femur are equally thorn-like, and on
the genu, pds is thorn-like, also pds on the tarsus is pilose at the tip.
On trochanter IV, al is thorn-lke.

Loeality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype female from leaf
mould, Botanical Gardens, Wellington, December 1960, coll. D. C. M.
Manson,

Ologamasus nucilis sp. noy.

Female. Fig. 20-22. Tdiosomal length, 800p.

There is obvious reticulation on the shields. The peritrematal
shield is partially fused to the ventrianal shield. The vertical setae
are pilose, As in O. dwmosus, there ave five setae in row J. The
setae in row Ff are simple. The first pair of sternal setae are only
slightly longer than the fourth pair. All the ventral setae are simple.

@ = setal base

Fig, 20-22. Ologamasus nucilis sp. nov.
Fig. 20. Venter of female.
Vig. 21. Dorsum of distal segments from lee ITV of female.
Fig. 22. Dorsum of female,

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 221

There are conical spurs on femur IL and III only. A number of
dorsal setae on leg TY, ineluding pds on the tarsus, are slightly pilose
near the tip. On trochanter IV, ul is thorn-like.

Fig. 23-25. Ologamasus validus sp. nov.
Fig. 23. Venter of male.

Fig. 24. Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of male.
Fig. 25. Dorsum of male.

222 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

Locality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype female trom leat
mould, Botanical Gardens, Wellington, December, 1960, eoll, 1), ©. M.
Manson,

Ologamasus validus sp. nov.

Male, Wig. 23-25. Tdiosomal length, 890p.

The spermodactyl is robust, with straight, parallel sides coming
io a point suddenly, There is obvious reticulation of the shields.
The vertical setae are pilose, As in O. dwmosus, there are five setae
in row J. The setae in row # ave simple, The venter is similar to
the male of Q. eymosus, the posterior two pairs of ventral setae, for
instanee, are pilose, But it is unusual in having an extra, eighth
pair of ventral setae. The tibia, as well as the femur and genu, of
lee TT is armed, On femur TY, a/ is unusual in being filamentous,
while # and ads form unusually stont thorns. A number of dorsal
setac on leg TV, including pds on the tarsus, are pilose. On trochanter
TV, af is thorn-like.

Locality: North Island, New Zealand; holotype and paratype
male fram Waimamaku (about 100 miles north of Auckland), 21
October, 1938, eoll, f. D. Pritchard,

PY RENOIDES—GROUP
There is only one species belonging to this group and that is from
Victoria, Australia. he characters of the group are therefore limited
to those of the species,

Ologamasus pyrenoides sp. nov.

Female, Fig, 26-28. Idiosomel length, 730z,

(nathosoma, The anterior edge of the tectum hardly curves
forward at all from the sides and a robust, sword-like process projects
trom its centre. The margin is denticulate with a pair of small spines
on the central process. The chelicerae have four large teeth on the
movable digit and a single, large proximal tooth on the fixed digit,
but mueh of the apposed cdges of the two digits have a series of small
uniform teeth. On the palp trochanter, a@v is obviously pilose and pe
is thorn-like, as is 7 on the palp femur.

Idiosoma. There are two anterior protruberances bearing the
vertical setae and a humeral protruberance on either side, which give
the body a characteristic shape. There is obvious retienlation on the
shields. The dorsal shield is fused posteriorly with the ventrianal
shield, a short lateral fissure separating if from the anterior of the
ventrianal shield, and the posterior of the peritrematal shield. he
peritrematal shield is separate from the ventrianal shield and is
truneated behind, at the level of the posterior margin of podosoma.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 22

ws

Fig, 26-27. Ologamasus pyrenoides sp. nov.
Fig. 26. Venter of female,
Fig. 27. Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of female.

There is a single pair of prae-endopodal shields. The sternal shield
is only fused with the endopodal shields II. Anteriorly, the genital
shield comes to a point, which overlaps the sternal shield, reaching as
far forward as the anterior edge of coxae III. There are twenty-two
pairs of setae on the pronotum and twenty-three pairs on the
opisthonotum. The vertical setae are large and spatulate. Three
pairs of setae, j4, 25 and r2, are obviously pilose, but some of the
posterior setae are slightly pilose. The second and third pairs of
sternal setae are more robust. The dorsal setae row, UR, is considered
to have only one pair. There are five pairs of post-lateral setae,
which are smaller, the further anterior they are.

‘ape JO JayuaA "6s “BLT
‘ayRulay FO wMsioqy "gg “SLT
‘sou ‘ds Sapioussid snsvwybojQ “6-85 “ST

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z, OLOGAMASUS 225

Legs. There are a number ot thorn-like setae on the legs as in
the cymosus-group, but there are no conieal spurs. The last three
pairs of legs have ad: and pd) on the tarsus longer than yd and with
a slight, diaphanous flap.

Male, Fig, 29, Idiosomal leneth, 640..

Cnathosoma. The movable digit on the chelicerae has a single
tooth and the rest of the edge is smooth, The spermodactyl is bent
over near its base so that it points backwards, The cornienli are
shghtly stalked,

[dhosoma, "Che dorsal shield is eutire. The peritrematal shield
is fused to the ventrianal shield, The sternogenital shield is frsed to
the ventrianal slueld, The first pair of sternogenital setae are less
than half the length of the others, nowe of which are spine-tike,

Legs. Leg IL bas the femur, genn and tibia armed,

Locality: Victoria, Australia; bolotype female, allotype male,
12 paratype females and 20 paratype males from ‘Antaretie Beech”
(Nathofagus cunninghame) litter, Beachamps Falls, Otway Ranges,
19 January, 1962, coll, G. FL Gross and P, FY Aitken,

DISCUTATUS—GROUP

The five species belonging to this group are from localities near
the south-eastern coastline of Australia. The adults range in length
Of idiosoma from 5504 to 1,000,,

Female, Gnathosoma. The anterior edge of the tectum enrves
forwards from the sides to a central pointed process. The margin is
denticulate, sume of the teeth may be large, sometimes forming a
pointed process each side of the central process. The chelicerae have
larger teeth, proximally and small teeth, distally, and the movable
digit is less dentiewlate, On the palp trochanter hoth av and py are
simple,

Tdiosoma, Obvious reticulation on the dorsal shields ocenurs on all
species, except O. litaprothrix, which has simple vertical setae. The
dorsal shivld is separate (rom the yentrianal shield. The pevitrematal
shield is either separate from the ventrianal shield or it is partially
fnsed to it, If it is separate, it is truneated behind at the level of
the posterior margin of the podosoma, There are two or three pairs
of prae-endopodal shields, The sternal shield is fused to the endopodal
shields ID and III. There are twenty-two pairs of setae on the
podonotum. The setae r3, are off the dorsal shield. In three species
there are thirty-three setae on the opisthonotum, but in the other two
species this number is less, There are both pilose and simple setae
ou the dorsal shield, The pilose setae sometimes have a diaphanons

"

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

fap at the tip, as is found in some Gamasellus species and in OQ,
aberrans, Also the simple setae, especially on the periphery, have
a diaphanous, ventral ridge. The chaetotaxy of the venter is regular
except that the post-lateral group of setae sometimes contains eight
and sometimes seven pairs, Sometimes, one or more of the posterior
pairs of ventral setae are pilose.

Legs, There are no thorn-like setae on the legs as there are in
the previous two groups, and no conical spurs as there are in females
of the eymosus-group.

Male. Gnathosoma. The movable digit on the chelicerae has a
gingle tooth and the rest of the edge is smooth, The spermodactyl is
longer than the movable digit, and quite slender, tending to be sinuons
and swollen slightly at the tip.

Idiosoma. The dorsal shield is entire in all but one species,
QO. tliseutatus, where it is divided. In two out of the three described
males, the dorsal shield is fused to the ventrianal shield, in whieh ease
the peritrematal shicld is separate from the ventrianal shield, but
where the ventrianal shield is separate from the dorsal shield it is
partially fused to the peritrematal shield, The dorsal chaetotaxy is
as in the female, but in O. tindalei, r3 is on the peritrematal shield,
The sternogenital shield is separate from the ventrianal shield.

Legs. Lee TT has the femur, genu and tibia armed,

Ologamasus discutatus sp. nov.

Female. Pig. 380-382, Tdiosomal length, 820.

The vertieal setae are pilose. Thirty-three pairs of opisthonotal
setae, Besides jl, the following setae are pilose; /4, 25, r2, 78, J4, J6,
23, 26, 81 and S6, The posterior pair of ventral setae are pilose.
All eight post-lateral setae are on the interseutal membrane.

Male. Fig. 33 and 34. Idiosomal length 740z.

This male is umusual in being the only adult in the genus with a
divided dorsal shield. The ventrianal shield is fused to the dorsal
shield, Except for the aboye points and the sexual characters which
are as for the group, the male is like the female.

Denutoanymph. Pig, 85. Idiosomal length, 550,.

The setal form and chaetotaxy is similar to the adult, but in row
J and Z there appears to be a pair of setae missing, and in rew J
none of the setae are pilose,

Protonymph, Vig, 36. Idiosomal length, 490,,

The number of setae is considerably reduced.

LEE—AUST, AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 227

Rig. 30-82. Ologamasus disewtatus sp. nov.
Fig. 350. Venter of female.
Fig. 31, Dorsum of female.
Fig. 32, Dorsum of distal segments from leg TV of female,

Locality: Victoria, Australia; holotype female, allotype male,
morphotype deutonymph, morphotype protonymph, 2 paratype females,
) paratype males, 13 paratype deutonymphs and 2 paratype proto-
nymphs from leaf litter, 2-6 miles north of Sardine Creek (just south
of the Australian Alps), 28 November, 1959, coll. G. F. Gross.

Ologamasus litoprothrix sp. nov.

Female. Fig. 37-39. Idiosomal length, 750).
Vertical setae are simple. Thirty-three pairs of opisthonotal
setae. There are four pilose pairs of dorsal setae; 74, 25, r2, and Z6.
None of the ventral setae are pilose. Three pairs of the post-lateral

Fig. 33-36. Qlogamasus discutatus sp, nov.
Fig. 33. Venter of male.
Fig. 34. Dorsum of male.
Fig. 85. Venter and dorsum of deutonymph.
Fig. 36. Venter and dorsum of protonymph.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 229

Fig. 37-39, Ologamasus litoprothria sp. nov.
Fig. 37. Venter of female.

Fig. 38. Dorsum of female.

Fi ) of distal segmeuts

230 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

are on the interseutal membrane and five pairs on the dorsal shield.
Trochanter [TV has a small spur on its postero-lateral surface.

Locality: Victoria, Australia; holotype female, and 2 paratype
females from leaf litter and moss, Turtons Track, Otway Ranges,
18 January, 1962, coll. G. F. Gross and P. F. Aitken.

Ologamasus tindalei sp. nov.

Female, Fig. 40 and 41. Idiosomal length, 1,000».

This species is very like O, discutatus. There are two obvious
differences; only four pairs of post-lateral setae are on the interscutal

Fig. 40-41. Ologamasus tindalet sp. noy.
Fig. 40. Venter of female.
Fig. 41. Dorsum of female.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z, OLOGAMASUS 231

44

Hig. 42-44, Ologamasus tindalei sp. nov.
Fig. 42. Venter of male.
Fig. 43. Dorsum of distal segments from leg IV of male,
Fig, 44, Tectum of male.

membrane, the other four are on the dorsal shield; femur TV has a
sickle-like spur on its posterolateral surface.

Male. Wig. 42-44. Idiosomal length, 930p.

Differs from QO. discutatus in having an entire dorsal shield. Also
the spermodactyl is somewhat angular and the fixed digit has a dorsal
crest. The posterior spur on genu IT is raised on a process,

Locality: Australian Capital Territory, Australia; holotype
female (LF3M1) and allotype male (LF'3M2) from moss and litter
among ‘‘Snow Grass’? near ‘‘Snow Gums’? (Hucalyptus niphophila)
at 5,700 feet on Mount Ginini (northern edge of Australian Alps),
17 October, 1965, coll. N. B. Tindale.

232 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Ologamasus southcotti sp. nov.

Female. Fig. 45-46. Idiosomal length, 730,.
The dorsum is similar to O. discutatus, but there are only twenty-
nine pairs of setae on the opisthonotum, the reduction in number being

Fig. 45-49. Ologamasus southcotti sp. nov.
Fig. 45. Venter of female.
Fig. 46. Venter of femur IV of female,
Fig. 47. Venter of male.
Fig. 48. Dorsum of male,
Fig. 49. Dorsum of distal segments from leg TV of male,

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 233

in the peripheral rows, # and UR, There are two pairs of prae-
endopodal shields, fhe small posterior pair appears to be fused with
the sternal shield. The peritvematal shield is partially fused to the
ventrianal shield, The posterior pair of ventral setae are pilose.
There appears to be only seven pairs of post-lateral setae, all on the
interscutal membrane. Seta ¢ on femur LV is simple. A number of
dorsal setae on leg [LV are pilose.

Male. Fig. 47-49. Idiosomal length, 690».

The spermodactyl and spurs on leg IL are similar to those of
QO. diseutatus. lt is the only known male in the genus with the
ventrianal shield separate from the dorsal shield. There are three
pairs of prae-endopodal shields, The sefae ave as in the female, but
one post-lateral pair is on the ventrianal shield.

Locality; New South Wales, Anstralia; holotype female (LE72M1)
and allotype male (LF72M2) from Kucalyptus leat litter and grass,
Gogerley Point (about 20 miles sonth of Sydney), 7 August, 1965,
coll, KR. V. Southeott.

Ologamasus virgosus sp, nov.

Female. Wig. 50-52, and 54. Idiosomal length, 550p.

Besides 2] being pilose, the pilose dorsal setae are as in O.
disculatus, Wut because there are only twenty-three pairs of setae on
the opisthonotum their numbers are different (Le, J3, J4, J6, 22, 24,
Sl and $2) in this region, The peritrematal shield is partially fused
fo the ventrianal shield, Three pairs of ventral setae are pilose. One
pair of post-lateral setae is on the veutrianal shield. Seta » on femur
TV is modified to a short spar, More setae on leg IV are pilose than
in QO. soulheoltls and there are pilose dersal setae on lews TT and TIT,

Deutonymph. Fig. 58, Idiosomal length, 460,,

A lot of dorsal setae are pilose, but the setal pair, 71, are not,
There are twenty-four pairs of setae on the opisthonotum, there being
al extra pair between what would be 48 and 44 in the female. The
form of the leg setae is as in the female, except that » on the femur
ix riot so stont.

Locality: New South Wales, Australia; holotype female (LF72M3),
miorphotype deutonymph (LEF72M4) and paratype dentonymph
(L72M5) from Eucalyptus leaf litter and grass, Gogerley Point
(about 20 miles south of Sydney), 7 August, 1965, coll, R. V. Southeott.

234 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

52

Fig. 50-54, Ologamasus virgosus sp. nov.
Fig. 50. Venter of female.
Fig. 41. Venter of femur IV of female,
Fig. 52. Dorsum of female.
Fig. 53. Venter and dorsum of deutonymph.
Fig. 54. Dorsum of distal segments from leg LV of female.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Tam indehted to Messrs. D. C. M. Manson and E, D, Pritchard of New Zealand, and
to Dr. R. V. Southeott and Messrs. N. B. Tindale, G. F. Gross and P. PF, Aitken of the
South Australian Museum for collecting the mites described in this paper. Also, [ would
like to thank Dr, G. Owen Evans of the British Museum (Natural [fistory) and Mr,
G. C. Loots of the Potchefstroom University, for their helpful correspondence, and
Mr. G. I’. Gross for translating Italian.

REFERENCES
Berlese, A., 1888: Acari Austro-Americani, Bull. Soc, ent, Ttal., 20: 171-222,
1914: Acari nouvi TX, Redia, 10: 113-150.
1916; Centuria Seeunda di Acari Nouvi. Redia, 12: 125-177.
Evans, G. O., 1957: An introduction to the British Mesostigmata (Acarina) with keys to
families aud genera, J. Linn. Soc. Lond., 43: 208-259.
1963: Observations on the chaetotaxy of the legs in the free-living Gamasina
(Acari: Mesostigmata). Bull, Brit. Mus. (nat. Hist.) Zool, 10(5): 275-303.
1964: Some observations on the chaetotaxy of the pedipalps in the Mesostigmata
(Acari). Ann, Mag, Nat, Hist., (13)6: 618-527.

LEE—AUST. AND N.Z. OLOGAMASUS 235

Lindquist, BE, BK. and Evans, G, O., 1965; Taxonomic concepts in the Ascidae with a modi-
fied setal nomenclature for the idiosoma of the Gamasina (Acari: Mesostig-
mata). Mem. ent. Soc, Canada (in press).

Ryke, P. A., 1962a: The subfamily Rhodacarinae with notes on a new subfamily Ologama-
sinae (Acarina: Rhodacaridae). Entom. Berich., 22: 155-162.

1962b: A revision on the subgenera Cyrtolaclaps Berlese and Gamascllus Berlese
and descriptions of new species (Acarina: Rhodacaridae). Mem, ent. Soe,
S. Afr., 7: 1-59.
Sheals, J. G., 1962: Mesostigmata: Gamasina (Acari), Biol. |’Amérique Australe, 1; 83-110.
Trigardh, 1., 1907: The Acaria of the Swedish South Polar Expedition, Wiss. Ergebn.
selwed, Sudpolarexped., 5 (Zool., 11): 1-34.
Womersley, H., 1942; Additions to the Acarina-Parasitoidea of Australia. Trans, roy. Soe.
8. Austr., 66; 142-171,

1956: Some additions to the Acarina~Mesostigmata of Australia, Trans. roy. Soc.
S. Austr., 79: 104-120.

1961: New species of Acarina from the inter-tidal zone in Netherlands New
Guinea, Zool. Meded., 87(12): 189-209,

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Ologamasus Berlese, ist als solehe wieder-definiert und wird als der Gattung Cyrtolaclaps
Serlese nahestehend betrachtet. Ein Schliissel wurden ausgearbeitet fiir die Bestimmung
bekannter Adulten von zwélf, neuen Spezies der Gattung Ologamasus. Der folgenden neuen
Spezies, die zu drei Gruppen gehéren, wurden beschreiben: von Neussecland, Ologamasus
cymosus, mansoni, leptosccles, dumosus, nucilis und validus; von Australien, O. pyrenoides,
discutatus, litoprothria, tindalei, southcolti und virgosus,

ABORIGINAL CAMPSITE ON THE STURT RIVER AT
COROMANDEL VALLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper records a former aboriginal camp-site overlooking the Sturt River at
Coromandel Valley, South Australia. Large stone implements collected on the site are
described, figured and compared with similar trimmed cores from another site on the
Sturt River and one at Hallett Cove. Sand quarry operations have now obliterated the site.
The implements described in this paper are the only surviving relics of aboriginal
occupation in this area.

ABORIGINAL CAMP-SITE ON THE STURT RIVER AT
COROMANDEL VALLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS, Curator or AnTHROPOLOGY,
Souter Austrauian Mussum

Text fig.

SUMMARY

This paper records a former aboriginal eamp-site overlooking the
Sturt River at Coromandel Valley, South Australia. Large stone
implements collected on the site are described, figured and compared
with similar trimmed cores from another site on the Sturt River and
one at Hallett Cove,

Sand quarry operations have now obliterated the site. The
implements deseribed in this paper are the only surviving relies of
aboriginal oceupation of this area.

INTRODUCTION

A sand quarry is located on a ridge near the jnnetion of the Sturt
River and Chambers Creck at Coromandel Valley (map, fig, 1).
During a visit to this quarry, Mr. F. K. Archibald of Blaekwood
noticed a number of untrimmed quartzite flakes lying on the surface.
On subsequent yisits by Mr. Archibald and the writer—over a period
1962-65—an interesting eollection of stone implements was made,
including some large trimmed cores,

Quarrying activities were responsible for the removal of the
surface vegetation from an area of some five acres so permitting wind
erosion, The continual displacement of sand revealed stone imple-
ments, both in the quarry and on the hard, clay surface which underlies
the sand deposit. There is no possibility of dating the artifacts
collected as any stratification was destroyed by the quarrying and
erosion, Mxamination of the adjoining region shows that there is a
surface layer of whitish sand ranging from 2 to 4 feet im depth.
Underlying this is a thicker deposit of clean red sand some 6 feet deep.
This sand is very suitable for building operations. The complete
obliteration of the camp-site now disposes of any likelihood of further
collection of archaeological material,

The observations of Mr. Archibald have fortunately provided the
significant colleetion of implements indicating the location of a former
camp-site and showing evidence of the type of implements used.

238 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ABORIGINAL OCCUPATION
The Sturt River and Chambers Creek are semi-permanent streams
providing drainage for the surrounding hills area having an annual
average rainfall of over 80 inches. During the summer months,
springs in the bed of the two streams provide a small but permanent
supply of water now used by local orchardists for irrigation. Reports

HAPPY
VALLEY
RESERVOIR

HALLETT COVE Miles
Ll

Camp-site

Fig.1. Map showing location of former aboriginal
camp-site near the Sturt River at Coromandel Valley

EDWARDS—COROMANDEL VALLEY CAMP SITE 239

of 1842 (Ga, Btn, Parl.) provide evidence of abundant water im the
Sturt River when aboriginals. were known to oeetpy the adjacent
region.

In 1848, Mv. Archibald’s grandfather, Mr. J, Turner, settled on
ihe large estate still oceupied by the family at Blackwood. The Sturt
River runs through this property. Accounts of aboriginals camping
along its banks in the early days of settlement are recalled by members
of the family.

Hdwards (1964) records aboriginal oecupation of an area near
the Sturt River on the Adelaide Plains (map, ig. 1). This could have
heen their winter camp, as habitation along the River, particularly
during the cold winter months, would tend to be away from the hills
{0 the adjoining plains where conditions were more amenable.

STONE [IMPLEMENTS

A total of 127 artifacts and 88 discarded, untrimmed flakes were
collected on the Coromandel Valley site, Four pieces of slate likely
to be portions of reniform skin serapers (KHdwards, 1963), two
fragments of red ochre and turee cock erystals were also found. All
of these were collected from the hard elay horizon exposed by the
removal of sand by quarrying activities and wind erosion,

The collection is not extensive, but is of interest as it contains
1h laree trimmed core implements (see fig. 2 for typical examples) of
a type found elsewhere in South Australia (Cooper, 1945, 1961) and
believed to be of some antiquity.

The smaller implements were made [rom fine-grained quartzite
(G6 specimens) and milky quartz (88 specimens), These materials
are readily available in the nearby ereeks. The implements comprise
hammerstones, flaking cores, semi-diseoids, coneaves, terminal and
margin trimmed flakes and trimmed irregular pieces. These imple-
ments haye heen compared with others from enmp-sites on the Sturt
River (Mdwards 1964), Moana (S.A. Museum colleetion) and the type
specimens figired by Howehin (1984). All are similar im form,
mutorial and type of trimming and ean be attributed to the Kaurna
(Adelaide) Tribe,

The larger trimmed core implements are identical to those belong-
ing to the mdustry given the name Aartan in South Australia,
Bulwards (1964) vecorded this type of implement from the Marion
camp-site, Cooper (1959) also figures these large trimmed cores from
the coastal site at Hallett Cove (map, fig. 1), There appears to be
evidence to sugvest that the occupation and relationship between these
sites—indicated by the similarity of smaller implements-—have
persisted over an extended period,

241) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Betnbs 1 Hussey,

Figure. 2,

Howelttn (1954) deseribes the existence of deposits of (luviatile
stinds in the Blackwool-Happy Valley Distriets, As the aboriginal
showed preferenvee for snidy camping plices, the oecurrence of other
urehavological sites may be auliviputed fur this aren and intensive
investications ure needed for the collection of examples of the stone

EDWARDS—COROMANDEL VALLEY CAMP SITE 241

industries of the Kaurna Tribe before the Adelaide Metropolitan area
extends over their former territory and disperses all evidence of
previous aboriginal activities,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The interest and active assistance of Mr, F. K. Archibald made this paper possible.
The stone implements colleeted have been donated to the South Australian Museum,

Thanks are expressed to Miss Brenda Hubbard for preparing the text figures of
implements,

REFERENCES
Cooper, H, M., 1945: Large Stone Implements from South Australia. Ree. 8. Aust. Mus.,
Adelaide, 7(4).
1959; Large Archaeological Stone Implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia.
Trans. R. Soc. 8S. Aust., Adelaide, 82.
1961; Archaeological Stone Implements along the Lower River Wakefield, South
Australia, Trans. R. Soc, 8. Aust., Adelaide, S4.
Edwards, R., 1963: Preliminary Survey of the Aboriginal Reniform Slate Serapers of South
Australia. Ree, 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide. 14(3).
——— 184; A Former Aboriginal Camp-site on the Sturt River at Marion, South
Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 6(4),
Howehin, W., 1934: The Stone Implements of the Adelaide Tribe of Aboriginals, Adelaide,

Great Britain Parliament, 1843: Papers relative to South Australia presented to both Houses
of Parliament, London.

RESUME

On signale pour la premiére fois les vestiges d’un ancien camp, au bord de la rividre
Sturt, & Coromandel Valley, en Australie du Sud. Ces outils en pierre, trouvés dans un
ehantier, devenu sur le tard sabli¢re, sont Jes seuls de leur genre trouyés dans ee territoire.
Cette étude systématique et illustrée dresse une comparaison entre ces outils et d'autres
provenant des sites au bord de la méme rividre et A Hallett Cove.

EXPLANATION OF FIG, 2
Lcamples of the Large Trimmed Core Implements from the Coromandel Valley Camp-site.

A-Al1-A2, Massive core implement manufactured from a large block of quartzite. ‘There
are twa main functional margins roughly at right angles to one another, Specimen Reg. No,
AS56105 in South Australian Museum.

B-B1-B2, Core implements made from a water-worn angular pebble. The funetional
margin extends around the periphery of the tool. The natural smooth surface of the original
pebble has been retained on the nnderside of the implenent. AS56106.

C-C1-C2, Trimmed core implement with step-trimmed functional margin around the base,
Re-touching as a result of wear is evident. There are indications of a well-worn working
edge around the top of the implement. A5G107.

AUSTRALITES USED FOR ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENTS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper records the occurrence of implements made from australites in South
Australia. Specimens in the South Australian Museum and private collections are listed.
The composition of australites and their suitability for use in implement production is
discussed. Examples are figured and the distribution considered.

AUSTRALITES USED FOR ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENTS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS, Cursror or Anruropovocy,
South Austrantay Museum

Plates and text fig.

SUMMARY
This paper records the occurrence of implements made from
australites in South Anstralia, Specimens in the South Australian
Maseum and private colleetions are listed. he eomposition of
australites and their suitability for use in implement production is
discussed, Kxamples are hgyred and the distribution considered,

INTRODUCTION

Tektites, small bodies of silica-vich glass thought to he of extra-
terrestrial origin, are found in a number of widely separated areas
of the carth’s surface and named according to the main sites of
ocenrrence, The Australian tektites are known as australites and were
first recorded by Charles Darwin in 1844. They show a patchy
(istribution over the southern hall of the continent and are believed
tn have fallen some thousands of years ago, Mxtensive collections
have been wade, The largest, numbering ever 18,000, is in the South
Australian Museum, The recent developments in space research have
focussed attention on the idea of australites having a lunar origin,
This has led to more intensive collecting and study of these interesting
objects.

Australites are black in colour, lrequently have a distinctive pitted
posterior surface and are wsnally round, oval, hoat-shaped, canae-
shaped oy dnmbbell in form (Fenner, 1934), These special features
nvast have attracted the attention of the aboriginals who made use of
australites in magic, eevemony and medicine over a wide area of
sonthern and central Australia (Baker, 1957), In places these tradi-
tional practices still persist, While at Yuendumu Settlement—sitaated
in the north-west of Central Australia—during August 1965, the
writer Was told of an incident showing the present day persistence
of the aboriginal custom of using australites to cure sickness. The
informant was an intelligent aboriginal, 20 years of age, who stated
tleat recently when lying sick in his shelter, he was visited by an elderly
wornan, From a small bag she reverently took out a number of
australites, rubbed them with fat and placed them in rows across his
cheat. During these procedures she chanted aboriginal songs which
apparcutly were an essential part of the treatment. The next morning

244 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

his condition was much improved, But the young man said he
considered a penicillin injection had etfected the change, rather than
the medical ‘‘magic’’ of the native woman. This incident has an
added note of interest in that the treatment was carried out by an
elderly female, whereas it has generally been recorded that these
practices were the skill of the tribal ‘‘medicime man’. Rinquiries at
the time about the use of australites in native treatment of sickness
provided no satisfactory information for it is apparently a closely
kept secret, Such customs had considerable psyehological influence
over these primitive people in past times,

Anthropologists have also recognized the use of australite glass
hy the aboriginals as a material for implements (Baker, 1957),
Complete australites, flakes, chips and broken pieves have been found
on camp-sites. Some have been identified as microlithic implements
identical in form to types made vom conventional stone materials.

A evensns bas been made of specimens in the South Australian
Musenm and several private collections, Tt must be assumed that
eeneral collections of australites also coufain many specimens that
were collected from camp-site areas by people who would have heen
tnaware of the association of the specimens with aboriginal activities,
Whore specific information was available indicating the likelihood aft
an aboriginal source, the examples are classified as follows:;—

Coniplete specimens; those showing the natural form of the

anstralites and believed to have been used in aboriginal
‘magic’,

Fractured specimens: pieces having flaked areas but without

purposive trimming.

T'rimmed pieces: those with fractured areas and marginal trim-

ming but of indefinite shape,

Implements: specimens with secondary trimming and similar im

form to the stone orieroliths of particular types,

Of « total of 445 specimens, approximately 29% are complete
australites, 86% are fractured specimens, 18% are trimmed pieces,
and 22% are implements. The amount of secondary trimming: on
definite implements and on the trimmed pieces. varies considerably,
Some have only four or five flake sears (plate 1 L, M: plate 2G, FH):
others have well formed functional margins (plate 1 A, B, FE to K,
P,Q). The untrimmed, fractured speciinens range in size from
minute to large pivees (plate 2 KE, F). Most of these are Makes with
a well developed bulb of percussion. Since they were collected on
former camp-sites they probably were produced by hnman agency,
Some are small cores having indieations of flake removal (plate
2 A, B)

EDWARDS--AUSTRALITE INSTRUMENTS 245

AUSTRALITES FOUND ON CAMP-SITES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

Loeality. Complete | Fractured Trimmed | Implements.
australites. | specimens, Picees,

Areoona . .. a Beis) gee ays 81 9
Bimbowie (Otary) ee ee 2 1
Bordertown .. . b pace a ee e's 1
Canewood .. . 19 24. .. oh VW 1 2
Corella (Pine Creek) | On ot Tee PhS 15 14 8
Edeowie .. 1. 5. ee ue ae ee oe 2
GJevorehy. we 44 dees Ga e's G8 1 3 1
Kalabity . ge FR at he os Hy 1 4
Kenmore Park ., .. -. 4. 1. ee 2
Beetehowla. occ tele eet eee we a 1 4
Luke Wilson . .. 2. 4. 4. 22 oe 1a 1 2
Leigh Creek . 2. 6... we ee ee 1
Lyndhurst 2. 6. 2. wk ee ee ae l
NEOOREE: os seed yo 0 Sig tes Uo ee 18 J
Morialpa .. 2. 6. 2. we ee kn 1
Musgrave Park... .. 2. 0... g 9 3 a
Nackara Springs .. .. 2, 14 4. 1 2 ]
Oakvala 2. 66 64 ee ca ee ee 2 4 14
Olary ... seg aw Ba th ty | a | 1 1
Old Whydown het eae mts oc! dete ge | 1 4
Panaramitve . 2. 2. 6. ue ee ee a 2
Pareoola . .. ae is g 1
Pine Creek (Barra Fe gE per ed 5 4 9
Pine Valley . .. 35-2 ae oy 2 14 2 4
WHMBIPM 62) Sai. SS ges cee Gs i) 1 2
Pi TROY Foy dares eel ag aly 1
Tomkinson Range .. .. .. .. ..
Waroonie . .. .. 2. wk ee ee ae | 1
WBE ee tee Herd pia 14 51 3] a7
Winnininnie . .. 0... wk ae | |

Tofal as cae shih te ak 130 161 56 96

FRACTURING PROPERTIES OF AUSTRALITE GLASS

Australite glass breaks with a pronounced conehoidal fracture,
the bulb of percussion and negative scar being usually well developed
as also are the radiating and concentric ripple lines. All of these
features result from the mechanies of fracture and are more obvious
in this than in those materials generally used for stone implements.

A readily obtainable, clear fracture is not the only desirable
quality In a material used for implements. Structural toughness is
essential for the maintenance of a good functional margin and this
quality is lacking in the brittle, glassy nature of the australite.
Through long experience, the aboriginal learnt to maintain a strong
working margin of his stone tools by trimming a beyel which provided
a supporting mass of material to the requisite sharpness of the work-
ing edee of the tool.

Another factor limiting the use of australites as a material for
implements is their small size. Although a few have been found up

246 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

to 85mm in leneth, the majority are between 20 and 30mm and
weigh 5 to 10gm. Their small size and brittle nature limited the
usefulness of australite glass compared with fine grained forms of
chaleedony materials like porcellanite, agate, and jasper which were
used extensively im certain areas. Australites obviously held a very
milor place as 4 suitable material for impleraents, but nevertheless,
a number of interesting examples have been found,

ANTIQUITY

When a dating of the terrestrial deposits of australites from outer
space lias been established, it will give some indication of when they
were first recognized and used by the aboriginal. Gill (1965) has
reported the finding of australites in a selected site excavated at Port
Campbell on the south coast of western Victoria, Fourteen specimens
were discovered in situ associated with material suitable for radio-
¢arbon dating, The specimens were found amid horizons ranging
between 4830 = 250 and 5700 ~ 350 B.P. (belore 1950), There is
no indication in this report that any of lhe examples had been
fractured or trimmed m any way.

Although australite implements are ivierolithie, this may not he
of technological significance as the small size of the available raw
material was obviously a definite limiting factor, Tindale (1957) has
assigned microlithie implements to his Mudukian enlture of the general
period 3,800-2,000 years ago, on the lower Murray River. Australite
implements may have been made during this period when interoliths
were predominant. The trimmed forms of australites occur as niero-
lithie diseoids (plate 1, K to I), semt-discoids (plate 1 J, .N), terminal
trimmed flakes (plate 1 A, B) and even retouched implements (plate
1 P.O), indicating conformity with some of the well known mie
lithic forms.

There is insufficient evidence at the present tine to permit the
datiney of australites used as implements. The discovery of trimmed
specimens im silu with associated material that eould he radiocarbon
dated may help to elarify the problem,

DISTRIBUTION

Collections of australile implements have mainly been limited fe
a few speeimens from widely separated sites, so that no particular
distribution was iIndieated. In more recent times, experienced
collectors, recognizing their importance, have deliberately looked for
and found specimens in signifvant numbers, Mr, and Mrs. K, Treloar
hove foved 87 implements on their Wiawera Station (map, fig. 1):

EDWARDS—-AUSTRALITE INSTRUMENTS 247

J. Ki. Johnson (1963) collected numerous specimens from Corella
Station near Coekburn, on Yorke Peninsula and in the north-west of
South Australia: M. Mudie, of Arcoona Station, has 81 complete

®@ i yNoHURST

(b
LEIGH CREEK

@® EDEOWIE

KALABITY

MORIALPA @
OLD WHYDOWN CORELLA
@WINNININNE |

|
OLA
NACKARA @ ART WI AWERA
@ cANEWwoo@ |

PITCAIRN @ ~ PANARAMITEE |
{ | -@—
OAKVALE

e :
KETCHOWLA FINE VALLEY

BURRA @

64

Fig. 1,

248 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

australites and nine fractured pieces from sites on that Station, The
present writer has made systematic searches for these implements
and found them at eleven localities in the north-east of this State.

Continned attention to the occurrence of these small objects among
the material on aboviginal sites will help to establish the extent and
mode of their distribution, However, a study of present available
collections has enabled some tentative observations tu be made on this
aspect of the subject. The main australite implement finds in South
Australia extend over a region between the River Mrrray and the
Peterbovough-Broken Hill railway line (map, fig. 1) where good
quality stone for implements is practically non-existent and nsually
obtained by trade, Tn the Lake Torrens and Lake Myre regions,
abundant supplies of suitable stone are readily available, Australite
specimens ¢ollected [rom camp-sites in such areas are generally totact
and ontrimmed and were possibly used hy the aboriginal in his prae
tice of “magie’’ (plate 2, 1 to N). It may be that the availability of
stone for implements influenced the use of australite glass.

The distribution of australites not. associated with aboriginal
camp-sites has been the subject of intensive study (Baker, 1999),
Mapped concentrations could include areas covered by informed
collectors. Barnes (O’Keele, 1963) suggests the sporadic finds made
between areas of major accumulations were probably carried there hy
aboriginals or in the gizzards of large birds sueh as the emu,

The australites in use at Yuendumu in Central Anstralia were said
by the aboriginals to have come froma great distance and were possibly
transported by them from the Musgraye Park or Mownt Davies-Lake
Wilson areas where nomerous speeimens lave heen recovered. The
dispersal of australites from their original strewu-fields can be
attributed to many agencies. There is insufficient evidence to indicate
whether their use by the ahoriginals had any significant effeet on
their chsetribution.

The work of Johnson (1964) in the Wingelina-llineckley Range
aren just over the Western Australia-South Apstralia border beyond
Mowrt Davies, and that of Baker (1957) in western Vietoria is
indiextive of an area of distvibution for australite implements extend-
ing far beyond South Austratia,

CONCLUSION
The Austratau aboriginal used australites in mythology and for
the manufacture of implements, The latter use appeirs to be of minor
importance and mainly confined to areas where suitable stone materials
are in short supply. Use in mythology is wide-spread as the compara.
tive rarity and distinctive appearance of australites world have made

EDWARDS—AUSTRALITE INSTRUMENTS 249

them highly desirable for this purpose. It seems likely that apart
from the recognized fracture quality of australites as a material for
use as small implements, the main factor in its attractiveness to the
aboriginal was similar to that of modern man—something as unusual
as terrestrial objects and material,

The present notes list the occurrences and discuss their apparent
significance. It is hoped further attention will be directed to the
archaeological aspect of australites and encourage research and
collecting, thus contributing to the study of this interesting aspect of
aboriginal lite,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Appreciation is expressed to Dr. T. D, Campbell and Mr, 1). A. Casey, whose encourage:
ment led to the writing of this paper.
The advice of Mr. Edmund D_ CHM, Drs, George Baker, P. S, Hossfeld and D. W. Corbett
wis Invaluable.
The following people kindly permitted examination of their ¢alleetions: Mr. and Mrs,
K. Treloar, Mr, and Mrs. R. D. J. Weathershee, Dr. G. Gregory, Messrs. M, Mudie, Brian

Sawers, Andrew Bailey and B. O'Connell, Mr, J. E. Johuson has donated his collection to
the South Australian Museum,

Mr. Denis Martleet assisted with the photographing of the australite specimens.

REFERENCES
Baker, George, 1957: The réle of Australites in Aboriginal Customs, Mem. natn, Mus.,
Melb., 22(8).
— 1959: Tektites. Mem. natn. Mus., Melb., 23.
Founer, Charles, 1985: Australites, Part IT. Numbers, forms, distribution and orivin,
Trans, R, Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 59.
‘Gill, Edmund D., 1964: Quaternary Geology, Radiocarbon Dating, and the Age of Austra-
lites. Bull. geol. Soc. Am., Roehester. NvY., S4.
Jolinson, J. W., 19638; Obseryations on some aboriginal campsites in South Australia pnd
udjoining States. Part 1. Mankind, Sydney, 6(2).
19642 Observations ou some aboriginal campsites in South Australin and adjoin-
ing States. Part 2. Mankind, Sydney, 6(4).
O'Keefe, John A., 1963: Toktites, Chicago.
Tindale, Norman B,, 1957: Culture Suceession in South-eastern Australia from Late
Pleistocene to the Present. Ree. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 11).

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Die vorlvgende Thesis behandelt die von Anstraliten gefertigten Geriiteyorkommen in
Sudaustralien.

Exemplire des Museums von Sudausivaliens wie auch solehe aus privaten Sammlungen sind
sigee Puberty

Khenfalls beriieksichtigt sind die Zusammenstelluang der Australiten sowie deren Brauuh-
Darkeit. fur die Gerite-herstellung,

Die Exemplare sind nummeriert und deren Verbreitung in Betraecht gezogen.

250 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 1 TO 2

PLATE 1
Views of Both Outer and Inner Faces of Bach Implement.

Fig, A. B. Flake with end trimming. Most of the outer surface of the australite has
been removed during the manufacture of the implement. Loeality: Piteaim Station, South
Australia.

Fig. C.D. Trimmed core implement made from the central core portion of a worn
australite. The surface shows differential weathering (fig. D) suggesting two periods of use,
The high vitreous lustre of some flake sears is evidence of recent trimming. This could be
accidental rather than archaeological and purposely produced. Locality: Ketehowla, South
Australia.

Vig. BE. F. Discvidal flake, margin trinmed. Typiex! bubble pitted outer surface can be
seen on fig, BE, Loevality: Ketchowla, Sonth Australia.

Fig. G. H. Discoidal flake with steeply trimmed functional margin, The conchoidal
fracture is distinct (fig. HW). Locality: Nackara Springs, South Australia.

Fig. I. J. K. Core implement with fine secondary trimming on the margin, Flake scars
are weathered (fig. J). Loeality: Kalabity Station, South Australia.

Vig. L. M. Simple trimmed flake showing radial and conchoidal fracture lines (fig. M)..
Loeality: Canewood Station, South Australia.

Pig, N. O. Core implement with semi-diseoidal trimming. The base has been formed hy
the removal of two flakes. The concentrie ripple fractnte lines sre pronounced (fig. O).
Locality: Kalabity Station, South Australia,

Vig. P. Q. Flake with distal end trimming, Reduced in size ly marginal re-touching.
Locality; Ketehowla, South Australia.

PLATE 2

Fig. A.B. Core implement with trinrmed margin. Lrregular in shape, Much of the
original australite surface has been retained, Locality: Kalabity Station, South Australia,

Fig. @. D. A small oval to boat-shaped australite core found on an aboriginal camp-
site. Locality: Kalabity Station, South Australia.

Fig. i. FL Flake with distinctive conchoidal fractare and lines radiating from the point
of impact (fig. BH). Flakes haye been removed from the butt end of the outer faee, Loeality:
Canewood Station, South Australia.

Fig. G. Tl, Worn dumbbell-shaped australite with terminal flakes removed to produce
a working margin, Loeality: Canewood Station, South Australia.

Fig. I, J. K. Dumbbell-shaped australite found on an aboriginal eamp-site, The circum-
ferential flange has been lost. The distinctive shape is believed to be pre-determined before:
atmospherie entry, Locality: Areoony Station, South Australia.

Fig. L. M. N. Flanged australite. This form is rare. The flow ridges on the anterior
surface (lig, M and N) are partly visible; close ¢xamination of the specimen reveals that
these ridges are concentric in character, Locality: Areoona Station, South Australia.

Ree, S.A, Museum Vou. 15, Phare J

Rec. S.A. Mussum Vou, 15, Prare 2

ZOILA MARGINATA (MOLLUSCA, CYPRAEIDAE) IN SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY HELENE M., LAWS

Summary

Three specimens of Zoila marginata (Gaskoin, 1848), recently rediscovered in Western
Australia, have been found in South Australia, one at Cape Jervis and one each at Taylor
Island and Grindal Island near Port Lincoln. The specimens are described and the range
of Z. marginata and the validity of the species are briefly discussed.

ZOILA MARGINATA (MOLLUSCA, CYPRAEIDAE) IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By HELANK M. LAWS, Curaror or Marie Tyverresrates,
Sout Avsrrarian Maseum

SUMMARY

Three specimens of Zoila marginala (Gaskoin, 1848), reeently
rediscovered in Western Australia, have been found in South A ustralia,
one at Cape Jervis and one each at Taylor Island and Grindal Island
near Port Lincoln, The specimens are described and the range of
Z. marginata and the validity of the species are briefly discussed.

INTRODUCTION

One of the most interesting recent rediscoveries in the Cypraeidae
is that of Zotla marginata (Gaskoin, 1848). The holotype remained
miique for 118 years until Cate (1961) published a description of a
second specimen thought to have heen trawled in Albany Bay. This
locality is, however, open to doubt (Cate, 1964). The only locality
viven for the holotype is ‘*New Holland’? and Cate (1964) has there-
fore designated Pelsart Island, Ioutman Abrolhos Group, as the
type locality for the species. Since Cate’s deseription in 1961, of
Z, margimata, «a number of other specimens have been taken off the
Houtman Abrolhos Ishimds and at several other localities in Western
Austria (Cate, 1961, 1964; editorial note, Tawaiian Shell News, 1962;
Weaver, L961).

In September, 1962, a live eowrie from Cape Jervis, South Aus-
tralia, was given to the present owner of the shell, Mr, KB. L. Johnson
of Adelaide, Comparison of the shell with photographs of the holo-
type and with published photographs and descriptions have shown il
lo he Z. margmatu—the first specimen to be taken in South Australian
waters. ln November, 1964, a further live specimen was found at
Taylor Island near Port Lincoln by a skin diver, Mr, N, Williams:
this is the seeond record of the species in South Australia, Following
this discovery Myr. Williams found yet another living specimen off
Jrindal Island, a few miles from Taylor Tsland.

DESC i IPTLON
The Cape Jervis shell (fig. 1, 2, 3) is ereamy in colony and the
dorsim 1s irregularly, but quite densley, blotched with pale brown;
spotting on the side is so faint as to he harely discernible, The Taylor
Island specimen (fig, 4, 5, 6) is pinkish-eream, whiter where the shell

252 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM

is thickest, and the dorsal blotching is also pale brown but is very
sparse and the right side of the dorsum is almost unmarked, The
shell from Grindal Island is similar to that from Taylor Island, bunt
the brown blotehing extends over the right side of the dorsum. The
columella and the interior of all shells are pink, Im addition, all show
a feature which has not previously been noted in the literature, On
the sides there is a very fine pattern of lighter spotting on a shghthy
durker background, This is particnlarly clear in figs, 1 and 4.

All specimens have the exagverated margins, prominent spire anil
well developed teeth which are characteristic of Z. marginata, Within
Zoila, only Z, rosselli Cotton is comparable in the degree of deyelop-
ment of both labial and columellar teeth, Surface coneavities which
distingnish Z, marginala trom other known eypraeids, are present on
{he base and margius producing nncdulations along the well developed
marginal ridges (fg. 8 and 6). The bases of the shells are spotted
with brown, the Taylor Island specimen most densely and with very
dark brown, In all three, as is characteristic for the species, these
spots correspond with concavities of the shell surface, On the labial
side of the base the spots and concavities are elongated towarils fhe
aperture and in the Taylor [slind shell a majority of these concavities
are continuous with (he hollows between the labial teeth.

Meastvements aud teeth numbers are given in table [Atl
animals were taken alive and it is rather surprising that the colour
of the Cape Jervis animal was greyish-green while that of jhe Taylor
Island one was pinkish-white. Little is known of the habits and
habitat of Sonth Australian specimens. At Cape Jervis the animal
was taken in 70-80 feet of water, The Taylor Island specimen was
found at a depth of 40 feet erawling on weed ona rocky reel, and the
Grindal Island specimen at the same depth,

DISCUSSTON

These records of Zotla nuarginata trom Cape Jervis, Taylor [sland
and Grindal Island, South Australia, extend the known range of the
species hy more than 1,000 miles, The ranges of species and suh-
species of Zoila ave shown on fig. 7 which has been prepared using
information from Cate (1964), Wilson (1958), localities of Zola
specimens in the South Australian Museum and the new reeords of
Z. marginata in Soath Australia. Z. margimata is now known from
widely separated lovalities. It oceurs within the ranges of the
Western Australian /friendi friendi (Gray), f. vercot (Sechilder),
renusta venusta (Sowerby), o. sorrentensis Schilder and rosselly
Cotton, and also within that of the southern thersites (Caskoin)

LAWS—ZOILA MARGINATA IN S.A. 253

(including ¢. contraria Iredale), This, along with the number of speci-
mens now known, eliminates the possibility that Z. marginata might
be an abnormality of some other Zoila species as suggested by Allan
(1956).
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer wishes to express her thanks to Mr. E. L. Johnson of Adelaide and
Mr. N. Williams of Port Lincoln who made their specimens ayailable for study, and to
Mr, N. Tebble of the Mollusea Section, British Museum of Natural History, who sent

photographs of the holotype for coimparison with South Australian specimens. Mr. J. Veiteh
of Port Lincoln also gave valuable help in the preparation of this paper.

REFERENCES
Allan, Joyee, 1956: Cowry Shells of World Seas. Georgian House, Melbourne, 170 pp.
Cate, C. N., 1961: Rediscovery of Cypraca marginata Gaskoin, 1848, Veliger, 3: 76-78.
1964: Western Australian cowries. Veliger, 7: 7-29,

Gaskoin, J. 8., 1848: Description of new species of the genus Cypraca. Proe, zool. Sue.
Lond, 1848-1850; 90-91.

Hawaiian Shell News, 1962, Hawaii. Shell News, 10(11): 1.

Weaver, C, S., 1961: Rare shell borrowed and photographed for HSN readers. Hawaii.
Shell News, 9(8): 1.

Wilson, B. R., 1958: A deep-water cowrie from the West Coast, West. Aust. Nat,, 6: 129.

TABLE I
Shell measurements of South Australian Zoila marginata,

Cape Taylor Grindal

Jervis. Tsland. Island.
Length (afm) 2. 0. 6. ae ce ee ee ee we ee 5D 62 57
Width (min) posi ds ae Sb ee de eee ae te. BBS 89.5 46
Height (mm) .. 6. ek wk ee ee ee ee ee DD 31.5 29
Number of labial teeth ., .. .. oe... ..) 22 26 26
Number of columellur teeth .. .. .. 0... 19 23 19-+-*

* The Grindal Island shell has been chipped and the posterior columellar teeth
are missing.

LEGENDS TO FIGURES
1. Zoila marginata, Cape Jervis, right side,
2. Zoila marginata, Cape Jervis, dorsal view.
3. Zoila marginata, Cape Jervis, ventral view.
4. Zoila marginata, Taylor Tslund, right side.
5. Zoila marginata, Taylor Island, dorsal view.
6. Zoila marginata, Taylor Island, ventral view.

7. Map showing distribution of 2. marginata in relation to known ranges of other species
and sub-species of the genus Zodla.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

256

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Yenusta sorrentensis

‘Pe

oN

Occurrence of

132°

Zoila marginata: @

Fig. 7.

THE CYTOLOY AND ANATOMY OF OXYCHILUS ALLIARIUS
(MILLER) (MOLLUSCA, ZONITIDAE), A NEW INTRODUCTION
TO SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY HELENE M., LAWS

Summary

Oxychilus alliarius (Miller), previously recorded from New South Wales, is now known
to occur in South Australia. The radula, reproductive system and chromosomes are
described from specimens taken at Glen Osmond, Adelaide, South Australia, in 1965.

THE CYTOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF OXYCHILUS ALLIARIUS
(MILLER) (MOLLUSCA, ZONITIDAE), A NEW INTRODUCTION
TO SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By HELENE M. LAWS, Curaror or Mantwe INVERTEBRATES,
Soutn Avsrranian Museum

SUMMARY
Oxychilus alliarius (Miller), previously recorded from New South
Wales, is now known to oceur in South Australia. The radula, repro-
ductive system and chromosomes are described from specimens taken
wt Glen Osmond, Adelaide, South Australia, in 1965,

INTRODUCTION

Oxychilus alliarins (Miller), a member of the family Zonitidae, is
mulive to central and western HMurope and Iceland. Tt has been intro-
duced into the United States (Burch, 1960; Pilsbry, 1946; Taylor,
1914) where in New York, New Jersey, Colorado, Michigan and
California it is a pest of greenhouses and sometines gardens; it has
also been recorded from South Africa ( Quick, 1952) and New South
Wales (Cotton, 1954),

In June, 1965 snails were collected in quantity from a garden in
Glen Osmond, Adelaide, South Australia; these agree most closely
with descriptions of O. alliarins,

METHODS

The reproductive system was dissected ont from snails drowned
overnight in water; it Was spread on a slide, held flat by the weight of
# second slide, and fixed in Bonin, Staining was with borax carmine
(short method; Pantin, 1948) and dehydration followed Grege’s
method for pulmonate reproductive systems (1958).

For cytological observations squash preparations were made in
uceto-oreein,

Voucher specimens and slides of the radula, reproductive system
and chromosomes are in the South Australian Mnseum collection,
Ree, No. D14884.

OBSERVATIONS
The shell (fig. 1-3) is small, highly polished and of a transparent
pale amber colour although in life the darkly pigmented body of the
animal shows through; the size range for seven specimens is as

258 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

3

LEGEND TO FIGURES

Fig, 1-3. Lateral, dorsal and ventral views of a shell of Oxychilis alliarius (Miller).

Fig. 4. Reproductive system of QO, alliarius:—alb, albumen gland; e.d, common duct;
e, epiphallus; gl, glandular tissue; h.d, hermaphrodite duct; p. penis; p.t, penial retractor ;
sp, Sspermatheea; v, vagina; v.d, vas deferens.

Fig. 5. Radula of O. alliarius:—med, median; 1, laterals; m, marginals; ect, ectocone;
end, endocone,

Vig. 6. Meiotie chromosomes of O. alliarius at diakinesis of spermatogenesis; mn = 30.

LAWS—ONYCHILUS ALLLARIUS 259

follows: yreatest diameter, 6.0 10 6,7 mm, mean, 6.38 mm; height,
28 (0 3.3 mim, mean, 3.038 mm, It is depressed and nmbilicate
(umbilical diameter, 0,8 to 1.2 nm, mean 1.02 mm), the wmbilicus
clearly showing the penultimate whorl; the apertiuve is ovate-lunate
with a straight and unthickened lip and the last whorl does not descend.
There are 4 to 44 whorls and the sculpture of the shell surface consists
of very fine growth lines,

The animal is dark grey on the dorsal surface of the head region
and collar, shading to lighter grey and with a pale sole. Pedal and
supra-pedal grooves are present and the sole of the loot is faintly
tripartite. When disturbed and particularly when the upper visceral
whorls were opened for gonad samples, the ‘inhabitant smells
strongly of garlick'’ (Miller, 1822),

The Radula, The radula (fig. 5) is similar to that shown (Taylor,
1914) for O, alliarius but ii the Glen Osmond specimeius the ectocone
of the first and second laterals is a simple, but very reduced, cusp
rather than a serrated one, as in Taylor’s material, The third lateral
is transitional, being very similar to the marginal teeth except for a
weakly developed endocone, It is closer to the vadular pattern shown
by O. cellarius (Miller) (Taylor, 1914; Pilsbry, 1946), The radular
formula, is 11.3,1.3.11.

Reproductive System. In Oxychilus the atrium is short and the
vagina long by comparison and eovered by glandular tissue which
als extends over the base of the spermathecal duet; this duet is
considerably shorter than the eommon duet. There is a terminal
penal retractor and the epiphallas is inserted well below the apex
of the penis. The Glen Osmond material shows all these features
(fiz, 4) but the spermatheed is more elongate than in Taylor's
muterial,

Cytology. Verv few meiotic figures could he obtained from the
Glen Osmond specimens and only one snail, of many which were tried,
gave a satisfactory chromosome eount. he ehromosome number trom
meiosis in primary spermatocytes, is n — 30 (fig. 6). There are two
large bivalents and a gradual rednetion in size throughont the remain-
ing chromosome pairs; this can also he seen in spermatogonial mitoses
although there aeeurate counts could not be made.

DISCUSSION
The snails deseribed above agree with deseriptions of Oxychilus
aliarius (Miller) in most respects—the size and shape of the shell,
number of whorls, broad umbilicus, strong garlic smell and the body
pigitentation. They do, however, show two points of difference; the

260 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

first and second lateral radular teeth have simple ectocones rather
than the serrated eusp described by Taylor. In addition, the
spermatheca is elongate rather than oval to spherical. Taylor’s
observations were, however, made ou British material; there is no
information available for continental representatives of O, alliarius.
With regard to radular and spermatheecal anatomy the Glen
Osmond specimens come closer to O. cellarius (Miiller), but the balance
of characteristies do tend towards O. alliarius and it seems best to
regard the South Australian material as belonging to this species.
The collection of O. alliarius from Glen Osmond is not, in fact, the
first to be made in South Australia. In the South Australian Musenm
there is a single collection of O. alliarius shells made at Linden Park
in December, 1962; their identity had not previously been realized.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to express her thanks to Miss M, Augel, University of Adelaide, for
the Glen Osmond collection of living Oxyechilus alliarius.

REFERENCES

Bureh, J, B., 1960: Some Snails and slugs of quarantine significance to fle United States.
Sterkiaua, 2: 13-43.

Cotton, B, C., 1954: A catalogue of introduced snails and slugs in Australia. Rec. S, Aust.
Mus., 11: 177-187.

Grege, W, O., 1958: A technique for preparing jm telo mounts of rolhisean anatomical
disseetions (abstract). Rep. Am. malac, Un. Pacif. Div, 1948: 39.

Miller, 7. S., 1822; Ann, Philos. (N.S.), 4: 379.

Pantin, C. FF. A., 1948: Notes on microscopical technique for goologists, Cambridge
University Press, 79 pp.

Pilsbry, H. A., 1946: Land Mollusca of North America (North of Mexico). Monogr, Acad.
unt. Sei. Philad, No. 3, Vol. IT, Part I.

Quick, IL. E., 195%: Ielicellids introduced into Australia, Proe, malae. Soe, Lond., 80: 74-79.

Taylor, J. W., 1914: Monograph of the Land and Freshwater Mollusca of the British Isles,
Zonitidae, Endodontidac, Helicidae, Taylor Brothers, Leeds, 522 (pp,

ZUSAMMENPFASSUNG

Oxychilus alliarius (Miller) ist in Stid Australien cingeftilrt worden, Die Chromosomen-
zahl, in priniren Spermatocyten, ist on = 30, Die Anatomie der Gesehlechtsorgane und der
Radula. wird beselrieben,

NEANURID COLLEMBOLA OF AUSTRALIA PRESERVED IN THE
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

BY RIOZO YOSHII

Summary

Collemba of the Family Neanuridae of Australia, collected by late Prof. Womersley and
preserved in the South Australian Museum have been studied from a new viewpoint.
Nine forms including four new species have been detected and a new diagnosis is given
for each species.

By the kindness of Mr D. H. Murphy and Mr G. F. Gross who have sorted out the
Neanurid material of Jate Prof. H. Womersley, preserved in the South Australian
Museum, I was privileged to investigate the precious material treated herein. Twenty-
three tubes containing alcoholic material and two boxes of 48 microscopic slides have
been studied. Some of them had been rendered quite useless by desiccation, but others
were in good enough condition to warrant this taxonomic work. The results of their
examination follow.

The Neanurid collembola of Australia may be split into two large groups. The first of
these is the Lobellini, in which the body tubercles do not form areolae. To this group
belong L. rosacea, newmani and australica. A feature common to all these species 1s that
the mouth parts are strongly reduced, the mandible is bi- or tricuspidate apically and the
maxilla is styliform. To this group I have already given the name Propeanura (Yosii,
1956, p. 46). Whether this is a genus or subgenus is the matter of discussion, but I am
using it as a subgenus for the moment. In all events Propeanura is the predominant group
in the Australian continent. The second group is the the Neanurini, in which the body
tubercles are divided into areolae, more or less. With the exception of Neanura
muscorum, whose existence in Australia might be reckoned as an introduction from
Europe, there are some six further species to be included in this group. They are N.
citrata, wellingtonia, schoetti, cf. Novae-caledoniae, womersleyi, and grossi. In contrast
to those of the northern hemisphere all of them are without body colour when preserved
in alcohol. Their body tubercles are strongly warty in profile, especially upon the
posterior body segments, Thus they would comprise a special natural group within the
Neanura, and which is nearly related to Bilobella in appearance. However, I could not
find any fundamental difference to separate them from the coloured section of the genus.
This problem must be studied in the future.

NEANURID COLLEMBOLA OF AUSTRALIA PRESERVED IN
THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

By RLOZO YOSELILIL, Yostitus Cottear, Ryvoro Universrry, Jarax

SUMMARY

Collembola of the ainily Neanuridae of Australia, colleeted by
late Prot. Womersley and preserved in the South Australian Museum
have been studied from a new viewpoint. Nine forms including four
new species have been detected and a new diagnosis is given for
acl species,

By the kindness of Mr, D. Ul. Morphy and Mr, G. FL Gross who
have sorted out the Neanuridl material of late Prot, I, Womersley,
preserved in the South Australian Museum, | was privileged to
investigate the precious material treated herein, Twenty-three tubes
confining alcohol material und two boxes of 48 microseopie slides
have been studied, Some of them had been rendered quite nseless by
desiccation, but others were in good enongh condition to warrant this
taxonomie work. The results of their examination follow.

The Neanurid collembola of Australia may be split into two large
groups. The first of these is the Lobelloni, in which the body tubercles
dy not form ureolae, To this group belong L. rosacea, newmani and
awustralica, A feature common to all these species is that the mouth
parts are strongly reduced, the mandible is bi- or trieuspidate apically
and the maxilla is styliform. To this group I have already given ihe
name Prapeanura (Yost, 1956, p, 46), Whether this is a genus or
subgenus is the mutter of discussion, hut 1 am using it as a subgenus
for the moment. fn all events Prapeanura is the predominant group
in the Australian continent. The seeond group is the Neannurini, in
which the hody tubercles are divided into areolae, more or less, With
the exeeption of Neawura muscarum, whose existence in Australia
might be reckoned as an introduction Troi Hurope, there are some six
further species to be ielnded in this group. They are N. cirrata,
wellingtonia, schoelti, el. nonae-caledoniae, womersleyt and grossi. In
contrast 10 those of the northern hemisphere all of them are without
hody colony when preserved in aleohol. Their body tubercles are
strongly warty ti profile, especially upon the posterior hody segments.
Thos they would comprise a special natural group within Neanura,
and which is nearly related to Bilobella in appearance, However, T
could not find any fundamental difference to separate them from the
colored section of the genus, This problem must. be studied in future.

262 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

|. Lobella (Propeanura) rosacea (Schott, 1917)
Achorutes rosaceus Schott 1917

The species was described from North Queensland, Many
preparations labelled as rosaceus by H. Womersley are present. How-
ever they differ from the Schott’s description by having an inner tooth
upon the unguis, The real yosaceus peems to he still mmrecognized,

Achorutes rosdeeus Trom New Tlebrides (Womer sley, 1987) is repre-
sented by an aleohol preserved specimen. Lt is not properly preserved
and, although very near 4. rosaceus, cannot be identified with certainty,
Lobella rosacea inst remain a species inquirenda tor the moment.

2. Lobella (Propeanura) newmani (Womersley 1933)
Fig. 1
Achorutes newmani Womersley 1933

Vilteen examples in aleohol and four slides labelled as cotype
were seen of this large species of Lobella. The aleohol material seems
to have heen once dessicated, as the specimens are very brittle and
partly shrivelled. By handling it carefully in lactic acid the follow-
ing characters are observed,

Body length 3.0 mm, breadih 1.6 mm, the ontline is rather
elliptical. Colour dirty white, but creamy white in life (fide
Womersley), Antennae subequal to head, Ant. TY with 8 apical
bulbs and S$ well differentiated sensory setae in the usnal arrange-
ment. Ant. [Ll-organ normal, p-, d-, v-seta all present. Buccal cone
well developed, Labraum short, truneate apieally and with 2 + 2
setae, the distal pair poorly developed, not much larger than the other.
Mandible elongate, apically tridentate weakly and the apieal tooth ts
divided into 3-4 minute teeth, Maxilla narrowly pointed, Labinn
narrow, pointed distally, all setae except one pair are small. Myes
3 + 8) mmeolonred, anterior 2 remote from oenlar tubercle, Post
antennal field vestigially present, Unenis with well developed dorsal
side, liner side densely granulated until near apex, Tnner tooth
one alwiys present (deseribed originally as abseut). A) pair of
vonspicuons lateral teeth are present near the basis aud this character
would serve as a good mark of wemmani. Ventral tube with 4 + 4
es Wureal rest is a median, rounded hamp wpon which 5 setae
(3,1 + 1) ave located. All segmental tubercles are well developed,
they are hemispherical, bat often mammillate upon posterior
abdominal segments. Upon head all tubercles including a par of
anteunal ones are present. Central tabercle bears 3 subequal setae.
As ‘ape in the figures all tubercles bear the maximum number of
setae, there are small difference of length and form among them,

YOSHII-—-NEBANURID COLLEMBOLA 263

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES

FIG. 1
Lobetla (Propeanura) newmani (Womersley), Cotype.

A, Anterior part of body; B, Posterior part of body; C, Nead; D, Byes aud postantential
field; 1, Tavbrum; I, Mandible; G, Maxilla; MW, Labium; I, Mid elaw; J, body seta,

which is also true of the body setae. The antennal tubercle bears 3
setae, the median (dorsal) tubercles of ovcipital region with 2 setae
each. All the dorsal tubercles of body are well represented, th. I
with 3 + 3 tubercles having 2, 2, 1 setae. Upon th. IT, TIT there are
4 + 4 tubercles having 3, s + 3, 2, 1-2 setae. Ahd. [-IIT with 4 + 4
tubereles having 8, 3 + s, 2, 1-2 setae. Upon abd. IV the tubercles are

264 RECORDS OF THE. S.A. MUSEUM

elongate and with 2, 2 + s, 3, 4 setae each, Upon abd, Vo2 + 2
distinct tubercles having 3, s ++ 3 setae, Another pair of well
developed tubercles are located ventrally and can be seen from above
(when the example is slightly pressed). A pair of tubercles of abd. Vi
are well developed, well separated and capitate in outline, The body
setae are long, there are no large difference between long and short
setae, they are parallel-sided, upivally obtuse, and slightly rugose
throughout their whole length.

DL. vewmani is a pecniiar species by virtue of the well developed
chaetal arrangement of the body, Tt is near L, savtert Borner of
Japan in the well developed tubercles of the body, but the mouth parts
are quite different. Some examples from other localities of Asst valie
and labelled as L. newmani proved to be different to this species.
Kixanples from Beleraye, Victoria have sinaller body setae, without
the tooth apon the mguis, Those from Waterfall Gully, Belair and
Ferm Tree Gully are near vewmani, but the unguis is without lateral
teeth and the bedy setae are smooth, tapering and pointed on apex.

3. Lobella (Propeanura) australica sp. n.
hie, 2

Four expls, Perth West Australia VII, 1985 K. Morvis leg.
One expl, Belgrave, Victoria 19,.0V.1931 TGA. leg.

Body long, somewhat similar to Quychivrus in outline. Length
24 mm, breadth 0.9 mm, Colour of aleohol preserved specimen dirty
white. Antennae short, ant; head as 18:20, Antennal ratio as
1:1:2, Distal segment with 3 apical bulbs and 7 curving, blunt sensory
setae, p-seta present, Ant, Tll-organ and d-, v-seta all normal.
Lead with 2 + 2 large, unpigmented eyes, situated longitudinally.
Post-antennal field very small, but really present. RBueeal cone pro-
{rnded and apieally pointed, Labrum not observed, Mandible fechle,
apically with an inner lobe, and the apical tooth is finely dentieulated,
Maxilla stvliform, Ungnis earinate dorsally, without inner tooth and
its inner side is without structures. Ventral tube with 4 -+ 4 setae.
Furcal rest is a median rounded area, feebly defmed and with 1 —+ 1
setae, All body tubercles are reduced, represented jy a ronghly
evinulated area, where setae are to be found, Upon head only a
median transverse area between eyes can be defined, Oeeipital setae
in a row, without tubercles at all. From the trunk uo dorsal tubercle
(— area) can be defined. Th. f with 4 + 4 setac, without grannlated
avea, Th. 1], If. is with 3 + 3 ant. — post. <med,) dorsal setae, sub-
dorgal area rounded and with s + 1 selae. Sublateral area with 2+ 8
aud lateval area with 3 setae. pon abd. T-1V dorsal group of setae are
9 +.9 (ant. <post.), subdorsal with 1 + 8, sublateral 1 and lateral 3-4

YOSHII-—NEANURID COLLEMBOLA

Nv
=)
A

FIG. 2

Lobella. (Propeanura) australica sp, n.

A, Dorsal side; B, Eyes and postantennal field; C, Mandible; D, Maxilla; E, Fore claw;
FP, Dorsal group of setae of th, IIT; G, Subdorsal tubercle of th. ITT; H, Sublateral tuberele
of th, IIT; 1, Dorsal group of setae of abd. ITI; J, Subdorsal tubercle of abd. TIL; K, Abd. V
and VI (right half).

setae, Abd, V is very unique, dorsal and lateral tubercles are quite
reduced to an oblique area postero-lateral to the segment, where 5 + s
setae are located. he slender s.s. is the third seta of them. Abd. VI
bears a pair of low tubercles, remote from each other. All body setae
are short, uncoloured and setaceous. Larger ones are often with a sigm
ol roughness.

The examples were labelled as N. rosacea Schott by Womersley.

266 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

No other Propeanura species with sueh reduced segmental tuber-
cles are yet known, In this respect the present species is very
characteristic,

4. Neanura muscorum (Templeton, 1835)
Achorutes muscorum Womersley 1939
Seven expls, Mount Wellington, Tasmania 9. X11.1987,.

These examples have been compared with the description of Stach
1951 and with two examples of this species from Belginm. In all
details they agree, Thus the species certainly occurs in Tasmania.
Probably if 1s an introduction from Hurope.

5. Neanura cf. citrata (Schott, 1917)
Achorutes cirratus Schott 1917
rie. 3

N, cirratu has been deseribed from North Queensland, Sehott’s
fie, LO (p. 8) indicates a very peculiar feature of abd. VI, which cannot
he detected in any examples of the material at hand. The exact
determination must be reserved. Examples determined by Womersley
as this species have the following characters, (The deseription is
based on four examples from Glen Osmond, South Anstralia. )

Body length from 1.8 to 3.0 mm. Large examples are more
intensely granulated and each of the eranules strongly protrude from
the surface, while in smaller examples with a well developed genital
orifice the granulation is not so cubically produced. Body colour white
in alcohol. Upon head no antennal tubercles. Frontal tuberele with-
om, a central seta. Eyes 2 + 2, unpigmented. A median pair of
oecipital tubercles ave united in one mass medially, having 1 + 1
seta on if. Bueeal cone cuspidate. Labral and labial setae as in
N. wellinglonia. Mandible bidentate apically and slightly denticulated,
Maxilla styliform. Unguis without tooth and the immer side is
vranulated, Fureal rest is a median, low, transverse swelling of the
intorumenl. Th. T with 1,2, lL setae. Th, 11, M11 with 3, s + 8,2 +4 s,
—setae. Upon abd. I-11] with 2, 2 -+- s, 3,—setae, Upon abd, TV
one seta is lacking from the suhdorsal tuberele (1 +--+ s) and the s.s.
is lovated proximal to one ordinary body seta, Upon abd. V dorsal
tubereles are united in one central mass having 2 + 2 barbed setae.
ss. Hes on the lateral tuberele, Abd. VI is not mueh produeed and
grantlated all over. Body setae are rather short, thick and intensely
barbed all over.

This species differs fvom N, ef. novae-caledoniae by the union of
a pair of tubereulated areas of abd. Vl. Womerslev’s A. hirtellus

YOSHII—NEANURID COLLEMBOLA 267

—

ES ees
Rea) CAUSA
“el 5

WES
a : we ~
al

Al
Te,
pe eee

opeene

FIG, 3

Neanura cf, civrata (Sehitt) from Belgrave, Victoria,
A, Head; B, Tubercles of th. [IT and abd. I (left half); €, Abd. IV, V and VI;
D, Mandible and maxilla; FE, Mid claw.

var. cirratus in 1985 (p, 209, fig. e-) would be another independent
species. In his fig. ¢ he has shown a pair of dorgal tubercles of abd. V
as widely separated to each other,

6. Neanura cf. novae-caledoniae Yosii, 1960

Four expls. Long Gully, South Australia 11,V1.1938 H, Womersley leg.
Hour expls. Mylor, South Australia 14.1X.1935 H. Womersley leg.
These examples are very near N, novae-caledoniae in the distribu-
tion of segmental tubercles and in the form of body setae. The
differences are as follows. Body larger, 2.46 mm in length or more

268 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All body setae are larger and longer, although the serration of them
and the rugose structure are pot different. Compared to fig, 2, 3 of
my description in 1960 the anterior margin of the frontal (— ceutral)
tnbercle of head bears 4 stont setae instead of the 2 in the New
Jaledonian specimens. The clypeal (= apical) tubercle of the head
bears 1 + 1 smooth anterior setae instead of the one median seta of
the cited species. Subdorsal tubercle of the occipital row of head
bears 3 setae in both lots, but one of them lyig on its dorsal side is
short and setaceous in New Caledonian examples, well developed and
modified in the Australian examples. Upon abd, V the dorsal tubercles
are united into one central mags and beset with 2 + 2 setae. In New
Caledonian examples the anterior pair of setae are smooth and
eetaccous, while they are rugose and roughly barbed as the posterior
pair in the present examples. In other details including mouth parts,
form and sculpture of yungnig, ete, no differenee is to be detected
between them,

7. Neanura wellingtonia Yosii sp. n.
Fig. 4
Five aleohol specimens and 2 slides from Mount Wellington, Tasmania,
1936 J. W. Kvans lee. They are cotypes of Womersley’s Achorules
hirtellus var. wellingtonia described in 1936.

Body length up te 4.0 mm but usually about 2.8 mm. Body colour
unknown, alcoholic specimens are white. Ant.: head as 3:5. Ant. TV
with 3 end buibs apically and with 8 cnrving sensory setae dorsally
in usual arrangement, p-seta small, Ant. ITl-organ is a pair of
rounded rods in a groove, accompanied by blunt d- and v-seta. Ant. TI
and 1 dorsally granulated and with modified setae. Bueeal come
avotely protruded, Labram clongate, with 1 + 1 strong apical and
1 + 1 weak hasal setae, Mandible slender, with 3 apical teeth,
Maxilla styliform. Labium smooth, with 1 -+ 1,8 + 3,24+2,4+4
setae, the basal one very strong. Unguis carinate, without inner tooth
and ifs inner side is minutely granulated. Ventral tube with 4 + 4
setae. Furcal rest a median transverse tubercle with paired granulated
spots. It is located near the posterior margin of abd, TTT, posterior
to a row of 5 setae, Dorsal side of the trunk with distinctly separated
segmental tubercles. Upon head the clypeal tubercle is fused with the
frontal tubercle and the ocular tubercle is slightly separated from it.
Eyes 2 + 2, unpigmented, Dorsal tubercle of the occipital row
dorsally fused in one mass. Others as in cage of N. novae-caledoniae
Yosii. Th. I with 8 + 3 tubercles, having 1, 2,1 setae each. Th, TT,
JIT as usual for the group, with 3, s + 3, 3 + s,—selae, Abd, T-1TT
tubercles have 2, 2 + 5, 2,—-setae each, Abd. IV lacks one seta of the

YOSHII—NEANURID COLLEMBOLA 269

re,

me i TASS t . Cie
Sy : ey Do (ICT ae.
rS wee: SRN SD

~e Oe BOS AY sh Ney pr ke

EJ SUDY Ae Ve

3

FIG. 4

Neanura wellingtonia sp. n.
A, Head; B, Antennal end; C, Labrum; D, Mandible; E, Maxilla; FP, Labium; G, Mid
elaw; If, Fureal rest; T, Body seta from dorsal tuberele of abd. T; J, Posterior part of
abdomen (abd. TL-V13); K. Subdorssl tubercle of abd. 1V showing the position of s.s.

270 RECORDS OF THE S\A, MUSEUM

subdorsal tubercle and s.s. is placed at the same leyel of one seta,
Upon abd. Vo an unpaired median tubercle is placed with 2 + 2 setae,
the lateral tibevele is slightly separated from it and with a weak s.s-
on dorsal side. Abd, VI is broad, a paired tubercle is well separated
from if and its surface is nnilormly fielded and grannlated all over,
Body setae strong, lirsute and somewhat patellate apically,

This strikingly large species is apparently endemie to Tasmania.
It 18 to be separated from N. of. eirrata (Schott) and others of this
group by the fusion of clypeal and frontal tabereles of the head, by
the form of patellate hody setae and especially by the position of s.s.
upon subdorsal tuherele of abd, TY,

8. Neanura womersleyi sp. n.
Fig. 5

One expl. Inglowood, South Australia 23.V.1988 H. Womersley leg.

Body length 1.4 mm. Totally white in aleohol, Outline of the
body rather eloneate, breadth being 0.4 mm on abd. 1. Ant.: head
suberjual in length, As the antenna is shrivelled, details are not clearly
visible, Yet the terminal segment has 3 apical bulbs and many curving,
blant sensory setae, d- and y-seta are long, similar to other sensory
selac. MWyes 2 + 2, mipigmented, Bueeal cone protruded, labrum
apically converging, with 3 ++ 3 setae, the most distal pair longer than
others. Mandible bidentate, the apieal tooth somewhat serrated,
Maxilla styliform, Labinm usual, the basal portion equally granalated.
Uneuis strongly carinate dorsally, without inner tooth and the inner
side is practically smooth. Voutral tabe with 3 ++ 3 setae. Fureal
vest is a median lamp with 2-- 2 setae and a small, rounded tubercle
is posteriorly attached to i. Memale genital field elliptical, with ca. 16
simple setae. Anal flap distinetly divided into two lobes having 10
setae each. Body tubercles very characteristic, Upon head the frontal
(= eentral) and ocular tubercles are miited in one thass, the eyes are
located at the lateral margin of it. Occipital tubereles are very
reduced, the dorsal pair almost imperceptible and united with the snb-
dorsal one. Upou th. T the dorsal tubercvle is absent, subdorsal one
yery prominent, Fach with 1 seta, Upon th. 11, 110 dorsal tuberele
bears 1 + 1 large and 2 + 2 thinnte setae, subdorsal one with 2 -+- s,
sublateral with 8 -+ s, lateral with 1 large and 2 usual setac. Ujyon
abel. I-LLD dorsal tubercles are all reduced, represented hy 1 large and
1 minute setae, snbdorsal with 1 large, 1 smalland Is.s. Upon abd. IV
dorsal tubercle is again vestigial, subdorsal with 1 large seta and ss,
The most vonspieuons ehavacter is the tubercles of ahd. V, where
dorsal and Jateral inberclos are nnited in one mass, leaving a Tirrow
modian streak, whieh civides the taberele of eneh side. ss, is located

YOSHIL—NEANURID COLLEMBOLA 271

FIG. 5

Neanura womersleyi sp. m1
A, Head; B, Labrum; C, Mandible; D, Maxilla; E, Labinm; I, Th. IIT (left half);
G, Mid claw; H, FPureal rest; [, Posterior part of abdomen,

at about the middle of them. Abd. VI is half concealed by abd, V,
divided by a broad median smooth area. Large body setae not con-
verging, obtusely rounded apically and always smooth. s.s. short, All
hody setae nneoloured.

This species is very unique in the structure of abd. V and other
features,

to
Mm

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

HIG. 6
Neanura grossi sp. n.
A, Head; B, Abd, TV-VI, C, Body seta; D, Buecal cone.

YOSHII—NEANURID COLLEMBOLA 273

9, Neanura grossi sp, n.
rie. 6

One expl, Bells Creek, Vietoria 24.V 1.1941.

sody length LS mm. White in aleohol. Ant: head as 8:5,
Antennae usual in every respect for the group and sensory setae of
aut, TV not coiled, Bueeal cone very poorly developed, far hehind
the fore margin of the head. Labral and labial setae feeble, not
exactly determined, Mandible feebly bidentate apically, maxilla styli-
form when observed by transmitted light. Ungnis carinate, without
inner tooth and the inner side is almost without granulation. Ventral
tube with 2+ 2 (?) setae. Eireal rest absent, Body tubercles very
peeuhar and gnite different from other species, Upon head elypeal
tuberele slightly divided trom the small frontal tubercle, The latter
is inversely trapezoid in form, without ventral seta and the posterior
pair of setae are small and setaceous, Ocular tubercle with 2 setae.
ives 1 + 1, the posterior pair being absent, They are uneoloured.
On the oe pipttal region the dorsal tubercles are fysedd medially, having
1+ 1 setae. Th. T with 8 + 8 tubercles liaving 1, 2, 1 setae cach,
Th. U1, TL with 4 + 4 tuberelos baving 8, 5 -+ 2,3 + s,—setae. Upon
abd. LIL setae ave arranged as 2, 2 - s, 2,—and upon abd. 1V they
are 2,1 + 4,2,—. The dorsal tubereles of th, Ol- abd. 1V ave rather
small and only one seta of them is lirge, others being setaceous, pon
alul. V dorsal tabereles are fused in oue median large mass having
2-++ 2 sctae, the anterior pair of which is short and setaceous. Lateral
tubercle bearing ss. on dorsal side, Upon abd, VI a pair of tubereles
are well developed and remote to each other, All larger hody setae
nucoloured, blunt on apex and minutely serrated,

This is a distinct species having only 1 + 1 eyes and peculiar
inode Of fuberculation of the trunk, J may he neat el, eirvata and
el. novae-caledoniac, but the tubercles of the head are quite different.
to those on either ol them, Jn the form of body setae it is near the
figure of Womersley's Achorutes hirtellus var, schoetti in 1935 (fix.
2, 1), but, as stated below, we have no reliable data about this form.

Beside the speeies emimerated above we have two names whieh
must be included in Neanuridae, They are:

Achorutes hirtellus yar. schoetti Womersley, 1935

There are two slides determined var. sehuelli by Womersley, one
of which is eu Millbrook Reservoir (type loc: ality) and the other is
from Knmara, New Zealand. he latter is nothing but N, al . cbrrata.
deseribed above: while the former is a very striking new species having
only one pair of tubercles upon abd. V. Howeyer, all body setae of

274 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

this example are quite smooth and as Womersley (1935, p. 209,
fig. 2,1) has deseribed the body setae of schoetti as minutely ‘serrated,
it w ould be better not to discuss the form at present.

2. Paranura australasiae Womersley, 1935

In all probability this is a kind of Neanuridae nearly related to
Lobella (Propeanura) australica sp. n. with its reduced body tubercles.

REFERENCES

Schétt, H., 1917: Results of Mr. E, Mjéberg’s Swedish Scientific Expedition to Australia,
Collembola, Ark. f. Zoologi 11, no, 8, 60 pp.

Stach, J., 1951: The Apterygotan Fanna of Poland, Family Bilobidae. Polska Akad. Nauk,
97 pp., 16 pls.

Womersley, H., 19385: Collembola Arthropleona of Australia, TI. Poduroidea, Trans. R.
Soe. 8. Australia, 57: 48-71.

——— 1937: On some Apterygota from New Guinea and New Iebrides. Proce. R, entom,
Soc, London B 6: 204-210.

1939: Primitive Insects of South Australia, Adelaide, 1939, 322 pp.

Yosii, R., 1956: Monographie zur Héhlencollembolen Japans. Contr, biol. Lab, Kyoto Uniy.

no, 8, 109 pp. 50 pls.

1960; On some Collembola of New Caledonia, New Britain and Solomon Islands,
Bull, Osaka Museum Nat. Hist., 12: 9-38,

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Die Collembolen der Familie Neanuridae, gesammelt von Prof. Womersley und aufbewalirt
in South Australian Museum, wurden mit neuem Gesichtspunkt untersucht. Es wurden dabei
9 Formen, unter denen 4 neuen Arten entdeckt. Alle diesen wurden mit eingehender
Diagnose belegt.

ARADIDAE IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, ADELAIDE
(HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA)

BY NICHOLAS A. KORMILEV

Summary

By the kind offices of Mr Gordon F. Gross, Senior Curator of Invertebrates at the South
Australian Museum, Adelaide, I have been privileged to study an important lot of
unidentified Aradidae, mostly from Australia and Pacific Islands South of Equator, for
which I wish to express my sincere gratitude to him.

Of particular interest was a batch of material collected by A. M. Lea on Fiji, Norfolk
Island, Lord Howe Island, Tasmania, and Australia amongst its many new species.
Because of the large number of species involved, this paper treats only the the
subfamilies: Isoderminae, Prosympiestinae, Aradinae, Calisiinae, Aneurinae, and
Carventinae, the Mezirinae will be treated separately in the next paper. All measurements
indicated in this paper were taken with a micrometer eyepiece, 25 units equalling | mm.
The first figure in the ratio represents the length, and the second the width of the
measured part. The length of the abdomen was taken from the tip of scutellum to the tip
of hypopygium ( ), or segment IX respectively ( ), only in the genus Calisius Stal was it
taken from the fore border of connexivum II to the tip of hypopygium, or segment IX.
Fourteen of the species of the species of Aradidae treated in this paper were found to be
new; of these only five were from continental areas, the other nine were from islands. It is
significant that five new species belong to the genus Calisius Stal, 1860, and four to the
genus Carventus Stal, 1865.

ARADIDAE IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM,
ADELAIDE (HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA)

By NICTIOLAS A, KORMILEV, Brooxnysx, NvY., U.S.A,

dy the kind offiees olf Mr. Gordon KF. Gross, Senior Curator of
Invertebrates at the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, T have been
privileged to study an important lot of unidentified Aradidae, mostly
from Australia and Pacifie Islands South of Kquator, for whieh T wish
10 eXpress Thy sincere gratitude to him,

Of particular iuterest was a batch of material collected by
A.M. Lea on Fiji, Nortolk Island, Lord Howe Island, Tasmania, and
Australia, amongst it many new species,

Becanse of the large number of species involved, this paper treats
only the snblamilies; Lsoderminae, Prosympiestinae, Aradinae,
Culisiinae, Aneurimac, and ‘urventinae, the Mezirinae will be treated
separately in the uext paper, All AASUTSIDE DES indicated in’ this
paper were taken with a micrometer eyepiece, 25 units equalling 1 mm.
The first figure in the ratio represents the leneth, and the second the
width of the measured part. The length of abdomen was taken fron
the tip of sentellum to the tip of hypopygium (2), or segment LX
respeetively (%), only im the genus Calisius Stal was it taken from
the fore border of connexivum IT to the tip of hypopygium, or
seement LX,

Fourteen of the speeies of Aradidae treated in this paper were
found to be new; ol these only five were from continental are as, the
other nine were from islands, It is significant that five new species
belong to the genus Calisius Stil, 1860, and four to ihe genus
Carventus Stal, 1865.

Subfamily ISODERMINAE Stal, 1873
Gen. Isodermus Erichson, 1842
In Australia and Tasmania only one species is known, Isodermus
planus Krichson, 1842. Other species have been recorded from New
Zcaland and South America. /sodermus has a curious habit of break.
ing off its hemelytra at the level of the tip of the seutellum, this
probably occurs after copulation,

1. Isodermus planus Erichson
Tsadermus planus Krichson, 1842, Arch. Nat.Ges.: 8: 280 ¢. 5, fig. 9.
Some of the specimens represented in this lot were very old,
colleeted by Tepper in 1884, most of them already damaged,

276 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1 ¢@ & 1 2, Tasmania, Burnie—Lea coll: 1 9, Tasmania,
Marrawah—Lea ecoll.; 2 2, 8, Australia, Meningie—H. Mincham eoll.:
1é, Victoria, Mt. Buffalo—F, BH. Wilson coll. 21.X11.51; 1 nymph,
Victoria, Beaconsfield—F, KH. Wilson coll. 3.VIL18; 2 4 & 10 nymphs,
Avenue Range—D. J. Barret coll, VII1.55; 1 4, Konttums Poultry
Yard—1.1X.1886; 1 ¢ & 1 9, 8. Australia, Mt. Lofty—Tepper coll,
4.XT1884; 1 2, Bridgewater—Tepper coll, 2.111884; 1 4, 4 8 & 5
nymphs, Kangaroo Is—G. W. Mellor coll. X.1908,

Subfamily PROSYMPIESTINAE Usinger and Matsuda, 1959

The Prosympiestinae have the same pattern of distribution as the
Isoderminae, there are only four genera, of which only Prosympiestus
Bergroth, 1894, is represented in Australia and Tasmania, Others
have been recorded from New Zealand and South America,

Gen. Prosympiestus Bergroth, 1894
Prosympiestus has four species distributed in Australia and
Tasmania, of which three were represented i in this lot. Prosympieslus
has a curious seent gland opening in the form of a pit with a stiff seta
in it, Other genera of this subfamily have the normal seent gland
opening similar to [soderminae,

1. Prosympiestus nasutus Bergroth
Prosympiestus nasutus Bergroth, 1894, Ent. Tidskr.; 15: 117.
1 g, Tasmania, Waratah—Lea coll.; 1 ¢, Tasmania, Wilmot—
Lea & Carter coll,

2. Prosympiestus subparallelus Usinger and Matsuda
Prosympiestus subparallelus Usinger & Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae ;
p. 66, fig. 23C.
1¢,$8.A., Adelaide.

3. Prosympiesius constrictus Usinger and Matsuda
Prosympiestus constrictus Usinger & Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae ;
p. 64, fig. Q3A,
22 & 1 9, Tasmania, Wilmot—Lea & Carter coll,; 1 ¢, N.S.W.,
Dorrigo—W. Heroit coll,

Subfamily ARADINAE Amyot and Serville, 1843
The Aradinae contain only a single cosmopolitan genus, drdadus
F., 1803, distributed mostly in the Northern Hemisphere (Palaearctic
and Nearctic Regions).

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 277

Gen. Aradus Fabricius, 1803

From Australia and Tasmania only three species have been
recorded to which I may add two species more, which are described
elsewhere in this paper. All Australian species of dradus belong to
the ‘“‘lugubris group’’, and are very good flyers. These species may

be separated by the following key.

KEY FOR SEPARATION OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIHS OF
THE GENUS ARADUS PF,

1. 2nd antennal segment depressed — longi-
finde ted ce Belnie ab ot) ote eta

2nd antennal segment rounded, not depressed

2. 2nd antennal segment in the middle, 3rd
entirely, and 4th with exception of the tip,
white; lateral borders of the pronotum
irregularly denticulate

Antennal segments IT to [V are brown, or
light brown; the lateral borders of the
pronotum are very finely granulate, not
irregularly denticulate

3. Antennal segment IV white; lateral borders
of the pronotum parallel .. .. .. ....

Antennal segment [V brown or black, never
white; lateral borders of the pronotum
more or less convergent from the middle
badkwarddes. 24 fn £222, 2. Ge ate

4, Antennal segment I] longer, longer than the
distance between eyes; antennal segment
Ill slightly depressed; antennae black, or
very dark brown ..

Antennal segment II shorter, as long as the
distance between eyes; antennal segment
TI rounded, taperine toward the base:
antennae light brown, antennal seement, TI
whitish in the middle, with brown base and
Tp Ab SE BC a ey, ep at

A, albicornis
(Walker), 1873

A, fuscicornis n. sp.

A. leucotelus

(Walker), 1873

A. australis
Brichson, 1842

A, errvaticus 1. sp.

278 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. Aradus albicornis (Walker)
Fig. 1-2
Meziva albicornis Walker, 1873, Cat. Hem, Tet. Brit. Mus., 7: 28,
Aradus albicornis Distant, 1902, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist, (7) 9: 358.
2 8, Tasmania, Launceston; 1 3, Tasmania, Ulverston—Lea coll. ;
1 2, Queensland, Emerald—tLea coll.; 2 ¢, Northern Territory, 30 m.
Hast of Darwin—G. I. Hill coll.

2. Aradus fuscicornis n. sp.
Hig, 38-4

Male. Head longer than width through the cyes (4@—25:20.5,
9—28:22). Anterior process strong, with parallel sides, rounded
anteriorly, reaches to 2 of antennal segment TT. Antenniferous
tnbercles strong, dentilorm, acute, slightly divergent, and. slightly
curved inward, reaching to 3 of antennal segment |, Eyes large,
vlobose; distance between eyes equal, or slightly larger than the length
of ant. seement LT (4 —12:12, ?—13:12). Preocular tubercles distinet,
acute; postocular blurred, Vertex with an ‘'U'' shaped, moderately
deep depression; the white stripe behind the depression is clearly
visible. Antenriae less than one and a hall times as long as the head
(§ —29.5:25, ¢—28.5:23). Antennal segments IT and TIT compressed ;
proportions, I to TV, are: ¢—8:12:7.5:7, ?—3.5:12:7:6. Rostrum
reaching middle of prosternum.

Pronotum more than half as long as its maximal width ( ¢—20:388,
@—21:58). Collar with two (1 + 1) high tubercles. Anterior angles
with a tooth; lateral borders firstly convex, then sinuate, and finely
denticulate, on the fore lobe; parallel, and finely erenulate, on the hind
lobe, Pronotal carinae subparallel, or parallel, sometimes shightly
convergent backward on the hind lobe. Interlobal depression deep.

Scutellum long, triangular (4¢—80:18, ¢@—25:18), raised in the
middle anteriorly, and transversely depressed on the elevation along
hasal border; deeply concave, and trausversely rugose behind eleva-
tiou; Jateral borders veflexed, straight, ov slightly convex, tip acute,

Hemelytra reaching almost to the hind border of paratergites (é ),
or to 2 of tergum VIIL (2? ). Corium reaches to heyond fore border of
connexivnmn VI (2), or to 2 of connexivum V (¢).

Abdomen longer than maximal width aeross segment V (4 —d4:44,
9—60:50), Length of the abdomen is taken from the begining of
connexivum LL (the first visible) to the tip of paratergites. Lateral
borders convex, more so in the fernale. PH-angles of connexiva not
protruding,

Leos slender; fore femora thicker than antennal segment I,

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 279

Colour black; PH-angles of connexiva. whitish; antennae, and
tibiae, light brown; basal segment of tarsi whitish, apical light brown.

Total length: ¢—4.72, 2—4.72 mm; width of pronotum @—1.d2,
° —1.52 mm; width of abdomen é—1.76, ¢—2.00 mm,

Holotype ¢, West Australia, Mullewa—Miss F, May eoll.;
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Allotype @, S. Australia, Adelaide; in the same collection.

Paratypes: °, 8. Australia, Murray R—F. R. Zietz coll.; 1 2,
Ss. Australia, Murray R—H. 8. Cope coll.; 1 ¢, S. Australia,
Lucindale—Feucrheerdt coll; 1 4, 8. Australia; 1 @, 8. Australia,
Klemzig—hi, T. Giles coll, 14.1156; 1 ¢, Third C* J. Jenning coll.
IS.1L190L; 1 2, Queensland, Cunnamulla—H. Hardcastle ecoll.; 1 2,
Queensland, Emerald—hLea eoll, and 3 2, Kangaroo Is.

Aradus fusetcornis nv sp. belongs to “lugubris group’’, and is
related tol, albicornts (Walker), 1873, from which it may be separated
as is indieated in the key. 4. fuseicornis no sp. was probably often
confused with 4. australis Byrichson, 1842, from whieh it ean be
separated at onee by eompressed antennal segment Il, snd lighter
flere,

3. Aradus leucotelus (Walker)
Fie. 5-6
Meza lencolela Walker, 1875, Cat. Them. Het. Brit. Mus., 7: 28,
Aradus antenmatus Distant, 1902, Aun. Mae. Nat. Hist., (7) 9: 558.
Aradus leucotelus Kormileyv, 1965, Proe. R. Soe. Queensland, 77: 13.
1 9, 8. Anstralia, Mt. Lofty; 1 9, N.S.W., Dorrigo—W,. Feron

eoll,

4, Aradus australis Erichson
Fig. 7-10
Aradus australis Hriehson, 1842, Arch. Nat. Ges., 8: 281.

It is the commonest Anstralian species of the eenus dAradus 1,
The shape of pronotum is rather varinble: in specimens trom the
Australian mainland the lateral borders of the hind lobe of pronotum
ure only slightly convergent backward, whereas in the specimens From
Vasmania this convergence is much more pronounced.

1¢ &1 9, NS.W., Dorrigo; 1 2, N.S.W., Dorrigo—W. H. Teron
eol.; 1 6 & 8 9, Tasmania, Launceston 3@ and 1 2? Tasmania,
Launeeston—Lea coll.; 1 @, Tasmania, Cradle Mts—Carter and Lea
eoll.; 1 @, Tasmania, Hobart—Lea coll, and 1 ?, Tastnania, name of
locality illegible.

280 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

5. Aradus erraticus n. sp.
Fig. 11-12

Female. Closely related to A, westralis Evichson, 1842, but.
smaller; antennae relatively shorter, antennal segment IT only as long
as the distance between eyes; antennal segment ILL rounded, tapering
toward the base, where as in wl. australis it is slightly compressed
longitudinally. Corinm reaches to the fore border of connexivum VI
(produced over this border in cl. australis). Other characters in both
species are similar: shape of pronotum, seutellum, and abdomen,
Colour also is the same, with exception of antennae, which are brown,
segment TL whitish in the middle (black, or very dark brown in
A, australis).

Table of Comparative Measurements in Both Species.
A.erraticus A. australis

n.sp. & Krich. 2
Head’... fee, A. 2S BOEZS 26 224
Distance between eyes... 12,5 14
Proportions of ant. sew... 4:12.5:7.0:7 9 O:l8.as9e7.0
Pronotum .. 1. .. 4. +. 21:40 26:50
Seutellum ., 6, 5. .. .. 20:18 80328
Abdomen .. .. .. 2. .. 57:49 71:59
Total length .. .. .. .. 45 nm 5.52 mm

Holotype @, Queensland, Yorke Is. in the Torres Straits—C, T.
MoNamara ecoll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Subfamily CALISIINAE Stal, 1873

Calisiinae show a curious mixture of yery primitive and rather
advanced characters. Amone the four genera now recorded for the
subfamily, Paracalisiopsis Kormilev, 1968, is the most primitive,
Aradacauthia Costa, 1864, the most advanced. As primitive characters
Calisiinae have :—connexivum I, which is superimposed on connexivunt
Il as a small, triangular selerite (in Paracalisiopsis i is completely
developed and placed in front of connexivuim IT); chitinized tergum
VIII in the males, which is discernible as a small sclerite in all four
genera. As advanced characters should be mentioned: highly
developed scutellum, covering most of hemelytra, and also the tergum
wp to tergum VIE (in Calisius imtervenius Bergroth, 1894, there may
be observed a seeundary reduction of the scutellum, which leaves
tergum VI exposed); a notable reduetion of ecorium, with correspond-
ing reduction of venation in the membrane; a double row of granules
on exterior borders of connexiva (in Paracalisiopsis these rows have

KORMILEV—-AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 241

disappeared, and ave substituted with flat teeth); momiliform first
three antennal segments, and enlarged, granulate segment IV in
Calistapsis Champion, 1898, a1 Paracalisiopsis Kormilev,

Ol the four genera Celisivus Stal is almost eiremmntropical, pene-
trating ito subtropical, and even into temperate areas im the
‘alnearetic. Calisiopais Champion is American (Neotropical) ;
Aradacauthia Costa Ortental, and Paracalisiopsis Kormiley is
Kithiopian, tn Australia only Calisius Stil is represented,

Gen, Calisius Stil, 1860

Calisivx Stal has to date 45 described species, of which one is
fossil fram the Baltte amber; to these L can new add five more species,
As all speeies of Calistus are small to very small (2.2 to 5.0 num
miixitinm) and as such are diffiendlt to colleet we consequently know
almost nothing about theiy habitat. Oceasionally simele specimens
have been found sitting on a jeal, or on a wall, Matsuda and Usinger
iidieate that they live in foliage and dead branches of trees,

The distribution of the 50 known species of the genus Calisius
slows firstly, that each species is limited to a relatively small area,
and seeondly, that the genus as a whole is not spread over an
uninterrupted area, but forms five belts, which are not in contact with
each other, The first belt, in the Palnearetic, stretches along the
Mediterranean sea into Central Asia (Tadjikistan), The second belt,
in the Mthiopian region stretches across tropical Africa, [rom Senegal
fo Seychelles, Tt is separated trom the first by the desert belt. The
The third belt, Central American, stretches from Balamas, and Lesser
Anthiltles to Central America, and Northern Sonth America. The
fourth belt, South American, stretches from 8.14. Brazil to North
Arventina and Bolivia. Jt is possible that the third and the lonrth
belts will he later united, but so far they ave separated by the Amazon
hasin. The fifth belt, West Pacific, stretches from the Mariana Islands
sotlhward, actoss the Carolines, New Guinea, igi, Norfolk Island, to
Australia and Tasmania, Usinger and Matsnda reeord Culistus in
New Zealand, but so far no species has been described trom there
(1959: 44), Such a curious pattern of distribution sug@ests that the
vents previously was distributed all around the tropies, and later
atarted to shrink, and split in a few separate areas.

LIST OF SPISCINS OF THE GENUS CALLISTUS STAL, 1860
T Belt—Palaearetic,

1. Calistus balticus Usinger, 1941, fossil, in Baltie amber.
" Culisins ghiliani Costa, 1864, France, Italy, Algeria,
S. Calising satieis Horvath, 1913, Yugoslavia, Syria.

tt
pd
ra

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

4, Calisius turanicus Kivitshenko, 1959, Russian Ceutral Asia
(Tadjikistan).
Il Belt—Kthiopian,

5, Calisius schoutedent Hoberlandt, 1954, Senewal.

6. Calistus lativentris Horvath, 19138, Cameroun.

7. Calisius nypelsi Schouteden, 1919, Cameroun,

S. Calistus horvathi Schouteden, 1952, Congo,

9, Calisius stappersi Schouteden, 1910, Congo,
10. Calisius verruciger Horvath, 1915, Kenya.

V1. Calisius seychellensis Kormiley, 1963, Seychelles Ts.

ITT Belt—Central American.
12. Calisius affinis Barber, 1954, Bahamas Is. (Bimini).
13. Calisius contubernalis Bergroth, 1915—Lesser Anthilles (CGuace-
loupe), Florida.
14. Calisius elegantulus Bergroth, 1918, Guadeloupe.
15. Calisins anaemus Berervoth, 1913, Florida.
16. Calisius farri Kovmiley, 1964, Jamaica.
17. Calisius gracilis Kormiley, 1959, Guatemala.
18. Calisius insignis Kormiley, 1959, Guatemala,
1, Calistus ferox Champion, 1898, Panama.
20. Calisius longiventris Kormileyv, 1959, Panamna.
21. Calistus major Bergroth, 1913, Venezuela.

1V Belt—Sonth American,
22. Calisius pallipes Stal, 1860, SE. Brazil,
23. Calisius placidus Horvath, 1913, 8.K. Brazil.
24. Calisius confusus Kormiley, 1958, S.H. Brazil, North Argentina.
25. Calisius bilobatus WKormilev, 1959, Bolivia,

V Belt—West Pacific.
26. Calisius saipanensis Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Marianas (Saipan).
27, Crlisins tintunensis Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Marianas (Tinian).
28, Calisius dilaticeps Usinger, 1946, Marianas (Guam).
29. Calisius infuscalus Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Marianas (Guam).
30. Calisius longivornis Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Carolines (Ponape).
al. Calisius trukensis Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Carolines (Truk),
32. Calisius aeutus Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Carolines (Palau).
33. Calistus araklat Msaki & Matsuda, 1951, Carolines (Palan).
34. Calisius micronesicus Matsuda & Usinger, 1957, Carolines (Palau).
3h. Calisins anlennalis Worvath, 1913, N.H. New Guinea.
36, Calisius cognatus Horvath, 1913, N.H. New Guinea.
37. Calistus notabilis n. sp., N.E. New Guinea.
38, Calisius papuanus Horvath, 19138, NE. New Guinea.
39. Calisins pieturatus Horvath, 1913, NA. New Guinea.

40.
41.
42.
45.
44.
40.
46.
47.
48.
49,
50,

Calisius
Calisius
Calistus
Calisius
Calisius
Calisius
Calisius

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 283

magdalenae n. sp., Fiji.

pacificus Karkaldi, 1908, Fiji.

leai n. sp., Norfolk Is.

australis Kormilev, 1959, Australia (Queensland),
grossin. sp., Australia (Queensland),

hackert Kormilev, 1959, Australia (Queensland),
intervenius Bergroth, 1894, Australia (S. Australia),

Calisius septimus n. sp. Australia (S. Australia),

Calisius annulicormis Bergroth, 1913, Australia (Tasmania).
Calisius tasmanicus Kormileyv, 1963, Tasmania.

Calisius spirulosus Blote, 1965, Java.

KEY FOR SEPARATION OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIBNS OF

THE GENUS CALISIUS STAL

1. Anterior process of the head narrowly trape-
zoidal, tapering toward the base; its tip is
rounded, granulate, and incised in’ the

middle ;

smooth

lateral borders straight, and
be ke ee tie eld ee le ald ald chet oe “Ch QROSsi th sp,
(Jueensland

Anterior process of the head obovate; its

lateral borders convex, and granulate... 2
3 fond

Larger species, over 4.0 mm; antennal seg-

ment IIT is whitish, other segments brown,
or dark brown; segment III is distinetly
longer than IT (5.5:4) 2. 0. 0. 0. 0... 2. CL annulicornis

Bergroth, 1913.
S.A., Tas.

Smaller species, less than 3.5 mm; antennal

segment IIT is concolorous with I and TTI,
and is as long, or only stightly longer, than

Seutellum short, leaving tergum VI exposed
in both sexes .. 2. 2. 2. eee ee ee ee.) 6, intervening Ber-

eroth, 1894, S.A,

Scutellum longer always covering tergum VI 4

Antennal segment IT] subeylindrical, taper-

ing toward the base; white band of the
scutellum in the shape of two divergent
hooks, united by their bases, and forming
an angle; median carina of sentellum with

sharp, erect granules .. 20 2. 2... 2. 2. CL australis Kormilev,
1959, Qld.

284 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Antennal segment IIT ovate; white band of
the seutellum in the shape of an inverted
“Wt. median carina of scutellum with a
rounded, and somewhat blurred granulation 9

5. Antennae robust, longer than width of the
head through the eyes; white band of
scutellum is clear white, very conspicuous C. fasmanicus Kormi-
lev, 1963, Tas.
Antennae slender, anc shorter, at most as
lone as width of the head through the eyes;
white band of the sentellum yellowish, and
Jess Conspieuous 2. 2... ee ee ee ee ee 6

6. Side strips of white band narrower; its tip
placed at } of seutellum’s length .. .. .. C. septimus n. sp.,
S.A,
Side strips of white band wider; its tip
placed more posteriorad, at 4 of seutellum’s
length .. 2. 0. 1. ee ee ee ee ee ee ee we =O hackeri Kormiley,
1959, Qsld.
1. Calisius grossi n. sp.
Fig. 13
Female. Wlongate ovate, partially covered with erect, blunt
granules.

Head as long as width through the eves (16.5:16.5). Anterior
process narrowly trapezoidal; its lateral borders straight, smooth, and
convergent posteriorly; its tip rounded, granulate, and incised in the
middle, reaching to the middle of antennal segment IIT. Antenniferous
tubercles dentiform, subacute, with almost parallel outer borders, not

EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS

Aradus alhicvornis (Walker), 9, Fig, 1—pronotum and seutellam; Fig. 2—antenna.

Aridus fuscicornis nu. sp., 9, Pig. d-—pronotum and seutellum; Fig. 4—antenna,

Aradus Teucotetus (Walker), 9, Fig. 5—pronotum and scutellum; Fig. 6—antenna.

Aradus austratig Eriehson, 9 from N.S.W., Fig. 7—pronotum and seutellum; Fig. 8—
antenna; 9 from Tasmania (other extreme), Fig. 9—-pronotum and seutellum; Fig. LO—
antenna.

Aradus erratiens nu, sp. 9, Fig. 11—pronotum and seutellam; Wig. 12—antenna.

Calisius grossi n. sp, 9, Fig, 18—head, pronotum and seubelum.

Cahsivs dnnulicornis Bergroth, 9, Fig. 14—scutellum,

Calisins tatervenius Bergroth, 9, Fig. 15—seutelum.

Calisius tasmanicus Kormiley, 3, Fig, 16—seutellum,

Calisius hackert Kormiley, 9, Fig. 17—seutellum,

Calistus septimus n. sp. 9, Fig. 18—head, pronotum and seutelum,

Calisius australis Kormiley, 9, Fig. 19—seutellum,

Calisius magdalende n. sp.. 3, Fig. 20—head, pronotum and svutellum,

Calisius leai n. sp., @, Fig. 21—head, pronotum and seutellum,

Calisius notabilis n. sp., 9, Fig. 32—head, pronotum and seutellum.

285

KORMILEV—AUST,. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE

Pigs. 1-22,

286 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

quite reaching to the tip of antennal segment 1. Kyes protruding,
reniform, but not pedunenlate, Postocular tubercles formed by a
small granule, not attaining the outer borders of the eyes by a
considerable amount. Vertex with a blunt, ‘*V’’form granulation,
Antennae slender, longer than width of the head through the eyes
(19.5:16.5); segments T and IL ovate, ITT more slender, and tapering

toward the base, IV fusiform; proportions, [ to PV, are; 8:5:3.025.

Pronotum hal! as long as its maximal width (15:29), Fore lobe
with four (2 + 2) parallel, blunt tubereles, and in addition two
(1 + 1) smaller ones somewhat laterally placed to the former, and
near the hind border of fore lobe. Lateral borders of fore lobe with
a few long, blunt spicules, directed sideways. Hind lobe much wider
and higher than fore lobe, with six (8 -+ 3) rews of smaller, blunt
tubercles; the dise between them is finely punctured.

Sentellum large, long, and wide (86:22) reaching almost to bind
border of tergum VL; basal elevation relatively small, and high, with
lonr (2 + 2) rows of tubereles: each outer row made up of one large
tubercle, each inner row made up of two somewhat smaller tubercles,
Median carina high, and granulate; with a small ciuster of granules
at the base, and a single row (intermittently) of more elevated then
lower grammes more posteriorly, At the base of sentellum laterally
run two (1 +1) urenate, dense rows of smaller tubercles, reaching La
{ of seutellum’s length. Along the middle portion of medinn carma
are located on both sides a few smaller, and more distant, tubercles.
Dise roughly and densely punctured,

Homelytrva are visible only as a row of clense, bhint eranules,
. . PY

Abdomen longer thin width across segment TV (48:54). Tn this,
and the following species of the genus Calisius, the length of abdomen
is taken from fore border of connexivum - to the tip of abdomen.
Connexivium wide and reflexed; comiexiva ave wider than their length:
otter horders of counesxiva with a double row of bhint tnherelos; exch
connexivun from LL te VI bears in each row two smaller, dark
tubercles, and one larger whitish one. Connexivum I is small,
triangnliv, superimposed on connextvnm TT, Tergum VIT (2) iu a
form of an inverted trapezoid. Segment IX is long, much longer
than small paratergites. Spiracles trom [1 to VI are ventral, and not
Visible from above; VIT lateral, placed on a large inberele, and VU
torminal.

Colour; pale testaceons; seutellim on the hind half mottled with
ereamy-yellow; inverted ‘VY’? band is also cresmy-vellow, and some-
whal blurred.

KORMILFY—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 287

Total length, 312 mmm; width of pronotum, 1.16 mm: width of
abdomen, 1.86 mm.

Holotype: ?, Australia, Quensland, Cairns distriet—A. M. Lea
eoll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

It is a pleasure to dedicate this species to Mr. Gordon F. Gross,
Senior Curator of Invertebrates in the South Australian Museum, by
whose kind offices I have been privileged to study this important, and
interestiug, lot of Aradidae in his charge.

Calisius grossi n, sp. is very different from all Australian species
of Calisius, and may be separated trom them at onee by the Shape of
anterior process of the head, and colour; its antennae somewhat
resemble those of C. australis Kormiley, 1959, but the shape of the
hody, head, and colour, are quite different.

2. Calisius annulicornis Bergroth
Fie. 14
Calisins cnnulicornis Bergvoth, 1913, The Can. Hint, 45: 9,
1 4, South Australia, Lucindale—Fenerheerdt coll.

3. Calisius interyenius Bergroth
Fig. 15

Calistus mnfervenins Bergroth, 1894, Ent. Tidska., 15: 97.

1 ¢ & 5 ?, South Australia, Mt. Lofty Res.; 1 ¢ & 2 %, S.A,
Mi, Lofty Res—S, H. Curnow coll.; 1 ¢ & 1 9, S.A,, Mt, Lofty—
Tepper coll, 14.VIL1884; 4 ¢, S.A, Mt. Lofty, Second Creek—Tepper
voll, ENTTS884; 1 ¢ & 1 2, S.A., Second Creek—Tepper coll. 9.X.18863
26 & 2 9, Magill—Tepper coll, 7.VIL1884; 2 4, S.A., Mt. Lofty—
Tepper coll, 11.1X.1887; 1 ¢ & 2 ¢, Mt. Torrens—Oct. 1916; 1 4 &
1 9, Vietor Harbour—H. Womersley coll. Jan. 1934; 1 9, S.A,
Lueindale—Fenerhardt coll.; 2 ¢ & 1 9, Clarendon (under bark of
Bucalyptus);1 9, S.A. Kangaroo Is.—A. M. Lea coll,

4. Calisius tasmanicus Kormiley
Fig. 16
Calisius tasmanious Kormiley, 1963 (1962), Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist.; Ser.
13, 5: G04, fies. 3-5.
2 ¢, Tasmania, Hobart—A, M. Lea coll.; 1 ¢, Tasmania, Ton
R.A, M, Lea eoll.; 204, Tasmania—A. Simson coll; 1 ¢, St. Marys.

5. Calisius hackeri Kormiley
Hie, 17
Calisius hackert WKormiley, 1959 (1958), Proe. U.S. Nat. Mus.: 109
(No. 8415): 219, fig. 13-14.

th

288 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1 @, Australia—Blackb’s eoll.; 2 ¢, Flinders Range—K, lL, 5 favage
coll.; 2 9, Mt. Serle, N. Flinders Ranve—Hale & Tindale coll.; a,
$.A., Quorn,

6. Calisius septimus n. sp.
Fig, 18

Female. Blongate ovate; closely related to C. hacker’ Wormiley,
1959, from which it may be separated as is incicated in the key. Tn
other characters, and colour, they are pretty sumilar,

Measurements: head almost as long as width through the eyes
(15:14); proportions of antennal segments, I to TV, are 2.9:8:3:9.5;
pronotum half as long as its maximal width (12:23); seutellum much
longer than its maximal width (S3:18)4 abdomen longer than its
maximal width (40:26).

Total longth, 8.0 mm; width of pronotum, 0.92 mim; width of
abdomen, 1.04 min,

Holotype: 2, South Australia, Pt. Lineoln—A, M. Lea coll;
deposited in the South Australian Musenm, Adelaide.

vatype: 1 2, Clarendon—Tepper coll, 19.1V. 1884; in the collec
tion of the author.

7, Calisius magdalenae n. sp.
Fig. 20

Male, Blongate ovate, partly covered with rough, blunt g ‘anules.

Head longer than width through the eyes (¢é—17.0:19.9,
9—17.5:16). Anterior process long, with parallel sides, uuteriorly
flattened, and ineised in the middle of fore border, reaching almost to
the tip of antennal segment [Ll Antenniferous tubercles dentiform,
acute, divergent, reaching almost fo the tip of antennal segment I.
yes, sthall, semigloboxe, very protruding, but not peduneulate. Post:
ocular tubercles consist of 2 or 3 small grannies, not reaching to the
outer border of the eyes by quite a large amount. Vertex with sey
shape rough granulation, Antennae short, and slender, slightly
shorter than width of the head through the eves (6—14.6:15.5,
?—15:16); first two segments subeylindrical, 3rd tapering toward the
base, 4th (nsiform; pr oportions | of the antennal segments, | to TV, are:
4—9.759,75:8.75:5, 9 —2.75:2.79:4:5.5. Rostrum short, does not reach
to the base of rostral groove,

Pronotum half as long as maximal width (¢—14:29, 15:81).
Collar distinct, with two (1 + 1) small granules on upper side. Fore
lohe convex, with two transverse rows of rongh granules: two (1 ++ 1)
in the front row, and four (2 -+ 2) in the hind row. Lateral borders
provided with 8 or 2 rough, ‘blunt spicules. Interlobal depression

KORMILEVY—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 289

varrow and deep, Tine lobe much wider, and higher than fore lobe,
provided with six (8 + 3) longitudinal rows of granules, divergent
backward: four rows on the dise, and two along the: humeri,

Sentellum longer than its maximal width (6—-84;22, 9—89;32).
Literal borders slightly sinuate in the middle; hind border sul-
trincate, Basal, triangular elevation is rather small, but high;
provided with four (2+ 2) rough granules, placed along basal border,
aud slightly overlapping the hind border of pronotum. Median earina
is high, and thick at the base, but rapidly tapering, and hecoming lower
foward the tips granulation of carina is blunt, dense, and low, Two
(1 -}- 1) arenate rows of granules near the base are fine, and vather
short, gradnally disappearing behind the level of connexivum 7,
Lateral borders of hind hall, and the tip of sentellam, are earinate,
bit without gramntes, Dise roughly pumetured, particularly rough on
(he bined helt,

Hemelytva seen as narrow carinae, with blurred granulation;
corium reaches to comextivuin TY,

Ahdomen longer than as maximal width (¢—42:38, @—44:59).
Connexivim wide, and slightly reflexed; conuexiva wider than their
length, Lateral borders with a double row of rough, bhint granules,
particularly rough in the female; each connexivum has two erannles
(one black, and one white) in the apper row, and three granules (two
Dlaek, and one white) in the lower row. Terenm VIL in the mule is
raised in the middle for reception of hypopygium; tereum VTL in the
Wale is seen as a narrow border behind, and a little below teream VIL.
Hypopygium is ventro-caudal in position; paratergites small and bhaint.
Terenm VIL in the female js flat, and rather smooth, with srl
grates along the fore, and hind, borders; paratergites bicuspidate,
short; segment TX long, and narcow, tricuspidate af the tip. Spiracles
ventral from TD to Vy lateral, placed on eranule on VI; terminal
ow VIEL.

Colour; dark reddish brown to black; clypeus, and vertex, with
pinkish tinge; sentelluam with two (lL + 1), anteriorly contignous,
“S-shaped, whitish spots, forming a kind of an inverted U's in
(le anterodatoral angles of seutellam: two (1 + 1) elongate, whitish
spots, and nen the tip, along mecian varina, two (1 + 1) more, small,
whitish spots, Commexivum T whitish, Antennae greyish brown,
progressively becoming lighter toward the tip; ant. segment IV is
pale brown to whitish. Lees ochraceous; bases of femora brown.

Total length: &@=3.2, @—3.4 iim; width of pronotum: 4-116,
Pee12+ mm; width of abdomen: ¢—1.32, ?—1.56 mm,

Holotype: ¢, Tiji, Sava Sava, Vanua Leva—A. M. Lea coll:
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

290 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Allotype: &, collected with the holotype; in the same Museum.

Paratypes: 2 4, collected with the holo, and allotype; in the same
collection, and collection of the author,

Ii is a pleasure to dedicate this striking speeies to my wile, Mars.
Magdalena Kormilev, as a sign of my gratitude to her constant help
in my entomological work,

Culisius magdalenue n. sp. is related to C. tintanensis Matsuda &
Usinger, 1957, from Tinian, Mariana Is, from whieh it differs by
anteriorly more dilated, and flaitened anterior process of the head;
different proportions of atitennal segraents, and larger sive,

8. Calisius leai n. sp.
Nig. 21

Male. Wlongate ovate, rather eonvex; partially finely granulate.

Hond as long as width through the eves (12.5:12.5), Anterior
process robust, high, with slightly convex sides, its tp is rounded,
reaching slightly over the tip of antennal segment I, Antenniferons
tubercles small, dentiform, acute, their outer borders parallel; reach-
ine almost to the tip of antennal segment 1. Kyes moderately large,
semivlohose, protruding. Postocular tubercles consist of a few very
smell, whitish granules, reaching or almost veaching to the outer
horder of the eyes, Vertes with “V' U-shaped granulation, and laterad
of it two (1 + 1) vows of sinaller granules, Antennae short, and very
slender, shorter than the heacd’s width through the eyes (11.5:12.5),
Antennal segment | subeylindrieal, Wand IIL tapering toward the hase,
IV fusiform, Proportions, T to TV, are: 2.5:2.5:2.5:4. Rostrum
reaching to the hind bordev of rostral groove.

Pronotum half as long as its maximal width (10:21), and strongly
declivous forward. biterlobal depression narrow, and shallow. Collar
with two (1 + 1) erect, small grannies, Fore Jobe with two (1 + 1)
vrannles placed behind those of the collur, and two more, more widely
part, plaeed near hind border, Lateral borders each with three
inclined spicules, Hind Jobe is wider and higher than lore lobe,
provided with six (8 + 3) rows of granules: the inner oues have two
(1 + 1) ereet granules near fore border, and behind them very thin,
ond low, fmely granulate earinne. Middle rows have six (8 - 3
small granules, and outer rows, running along humeri, have four

9 + 2) larger granules, disc between granules is very finely
punetured.

Scutellum is longer than its maximal width (28:17); its lateral
horders sinuate at the middle, apical border rounded. Basal, triangular
vlevation is small, and moderately high; at its foreborder are placed

KRORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAF 291

eight small granules; in the middle of lateral borders are placed two
(1 + 1) granules more. Median carina is thin, and high, finely
gruimlate. Laterad of the basal elevation are placed two (1 + 1)
areuate rows of fine granules, reaching laterally a little over eon-
nexivum L; further backward lateral borders of the seutellum are
ceorinate, but without granulation. Dise densely, and moderately rongl
punetured,

Hemelyira ure seen as earinae, reaching to the hind border of
connexivum LV.

Abdomen longer than its maximal width (28:23.5); connexivim
narvow (connexiva are longer than their width); lateral borders with
a double row of very fine gramiles, three on cach conmexivum: these
granules are almost evanescent in the lower rew. Connexivam T in
the shape of a whitish triangle, superimposed on eonnexivum IT, On
connexivum VIT granules are larger than on IT to Vi. Tergnm VII
very short, with four (2 + 2) small granules at the hind border.
Hypopygium small, yentro-caudal in position, Spiracles very small,
I} to Vi ventral; VIL placed on tubereles, VIIL lateral,

Colour: brown to dark brown; grannlations on vertex, basal row
on the seutellom, and ecoumexivum VII, are whitish: inverted “V"'
band of the scutellum is also whitish. Four spots (2 + 2) in front,
and behind inverted “V""-band, light brown. Antennal segment [ to
HLL are brown, TY piceous; femora piceous with whitish tips; tibiae,
wid tarsi whitish,

Total length, 228 mm; width of pronotium, O84 mm: width of
abdomen, 0.04 mm,

Htolotype: 2, South Pacific, Norfolk Is—A,. M. Lea coll.; deposited
in the South Aastraliaw Museum, Adelaide,

This species is dedicated 10 Mr. A. M. Lea, who was an excellent
collector, and collected many species on Viji, South Pacifie Tslancds,
Vasnvona, and Australia.

Cuhsius leadi nu, sp. is somewhat related to CL acevtus Matsuda &
Usinger, 1957, from which it differs by: different proportions of the
antennal segment; by a very narrow connexivum; by an almost
evanescent granulation in the lower rew on the borders of the con-
nexivurn and by a different colour.

9. Calisius notabilis n. sp.
Fig. 22
Female, Klongate ovate; upper surface covered with a very thin,
white inerustation.
Head slightly longer than width through the eyes (15:13.5).

292 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Anterior process robust, obovate, rounded anteriorly, and slightly
convex laterally, reaching to the middle of antennal segment TTI.
Antenniferous tubercles tiny, acute, slightly divergent, not quite reach-
ine the tip of antennal segment |. Kyes large, suheonical, protruding,
Postocular tubercles tiny, dentiform, do not reach to the outer border
of the eyes; behind, and mesad, of them are placed four (2 -- 2) small
vranules, Vertex with two (1 + 1) contiguous rows of tubercles,
threw in each row. Antennae slender, and short, distinetly shorter
thaw the head (12:15). Antennal segment | subeylindrical, HL ovate,
ILE tapering toward the base, TV fusiform, proportions, IT to TY, are:
9.9.5:.95:5, Rostrum reaches to the base of the head.

Pronotum rather fat; hall! as long as its maximal width (12,9 ;20 ).
Collar high, distinetly separated Irom the dise by a thin, and deep
sulens, aud provided with two (1 + 1) larger vranules. Lateral
hordervs of the tore lobe with six (8 -- 3) larger, blont spicules, which
are larger than gramiles on the lind lohe. Fore dise with four (2+ 2)
epaniles; two (1 + 1) of them placed behind those of the collar,
and two (1 -+ 1) more laterad, and more backward of them, Hind
dise with six (B + 8) rews ol three granules each; (he inner rows are
parallel; the middle ones slightly eonvex exterionly, and the outer ones
rin adeross bert.

Seutellum mich longer than its maximal width (32:20). Six
(3 +3) vrannles placed along basal border, of which the inner ones
are smaller; two (1 -- 1) granules more are placed at lateral borders.
Basal, triangular elevation is small, moderately High; median carina
thin, relatively low, granulate; lateral, urenate vows (Lo 4+ 1) of
progressively diminishing gramiles reach laterally to. the middle oF
eonnexivum Vo Dise finely punetured,

Homelytra with corium reaching to hind border of commexivum LV,

Abdomen longer than its maximal width across segment IV
(86:29). Connexivim moderately reflexed ; exterior borders of von
nexiva with a double row of granules, whieh are as large as those on
the Wind dise of pronotum, Spiracles ventral from I to Vis lateral.
placed on a small tubercle, on VITy lateral on VIL, Paratergites
small, each bearing two granules; segment IX narrow, moderately
lone, very slightly ineised at the tip.

Colour: pale greyish-ochraceous; eyes black, Black spots: lwo
(1 + 1) transverse spots along horder of pronotum, between inner
and middle rows of granules; triangular elevation of seutelham (the
black colour is concealed by white inernstation, and looks rey); two
(1 + 1) quadrangular spots at the hase of the median carina of
aeutellim: two (1 + 1) small streaks at the middle of the Jateral

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 293

borders of scutellum; two (1 + 1) larger spots in the shape of an
inverted ‘‘L’’, together forming a ‘‘T’’-shaped large spot at the tip
of seutellum. Basal half of connexivum IT, and the middle granule in
the upper row of connexia III to VII; one median spot at the hind
border of tergum VII; the middle of tergum VII I, and the base of
segment IX, are also all black. Antennae, legs, and the ventral side
of the body greyish-ochraceous.

Total length, 2.8 mm; width of pronotum, 1.0 mm; width of
abdomen, 1.16 mm,

Holotype: ?, New Guinea, Finsch Haven—Rev. L. Wagner coll. ;
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Calisius notabilis n, sp. is related to C. cognatus Horvath, 1913,
also from New Guinea, and may be separated from the latter by
different proportions of antennal segments (segment IV is twice as
long as III, as long as II and III together), and by a different pattern
of black spots on the seutellum.

Subfamily ANEURINAE Douglas and Scott, 1865
There are only two genera of Aneurinae: Aneurus Curtis, 1825,
a cosmopolitan genus, and Avneuraptera Usinger and Matsuda, 1959,
with a single, micropterous species from New Zealand.
Gen. Aneurus Curtis, 1825
Hive species have been recorded from Australia. The species
may be separated by the following key:
KEY TO AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS
ANEURIS CURTIS
1. PK-angles of connexiva II to VI distinetly
produced, forming an angle .. .. 2. 2... A. angulatus
Kormilev 1965

PK-angles of connexiva not produced... .. 2

2. Antennal segment IIT subeylindrieal . .. 2. 3
Antennal segment III regularly tapering

toward the base .. .. . .. 4

5. Antennal segment ITI more than twice as
long as II; terga IV and V in the male
provided with small tubercles, absent in
thé fomite so ocak ese pda ee he 3 eft androphymus
Bergroth, 1914
Antennal segment ITT subequal in length to
IT; male without tubercles on terga TV and
VOR. GO eae ib lyn std ile. o bay Sal abbaetus
Kormileyv, 1957

294 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

4. Antennal segment IIL distinetly longer than
If (4:3); larger species, over 5 mm .. .. A. australicus Stal,
1873
Autennal segment IT as long as IT; smaller
species, 4mm or less, exceptionally females
may reach 6 mm .. 6. eee ee we ee ee ee A. crenilatus
Kormiley, 1957
|. Aneurus australicus Stal
Aneurus austraticus Stil, 1873, Enum, Hemipt., 3: 146.
2 9, South Australia, Lucindale—Fenerheerdt coll.; 1 4, S.A.,
Lucindalo—F, Secker coll.; all three specimens are mutilated,

2. Aneurus crenulatus Kormiley
Aneurus crenulatus Kormilev, 1957, Quarterly Jour, Taiwan Mauseumn,
16; 45.
2 @, New South Wales, Sydney—Lea coll.; 1 ?, S.A., Lucindale—
Feuerheerdt coll, the latter is abnormally large, 5 mm, whereas
normally females of this species are about 4 mm Jong.

3. Aneurus robustus Kormiley

Anenrus robustus Kormiley, 1957, Quarterly Jour, Taiwan Museum,
LO: 44.

This is the commonest species in Mastern Australia, particularly
in Queensland and New South Wales.

4 4, New South Wales, Dorrigo—W. Heron coll.; 7 3,2 2, &
5 nymphs, N.S.W., Upper Williams R.—Lea & Wilson coll. N.1926;
9 4 & 5 2, Queensland, Mt. Tambourine—A. M. Lea coll.; 2 2,
Kuranda—F. P. Dodd coll.

4. Aneurus micronesicus Esaki and Matsuda
lneurus micronesicus Esaki and Matsuda, 1951; Mushi, 22: &3,
Deseribed trom Caroline Islands, now recorded from Papua,
3 ¢, New Guinea, N.B. Papua, Mt, Lamington, 1,300-1,50011.—
(. T. MeNamara coll.

5. Aneurus cetratus Bergroth
Aneurus celratus Bergroth, 1894, Ann, Mus. St. Nat., Genova, 34: 112.
Deseribed from New Guinea, later recorded from the Philippine
Tslands, Sumatra, and Java; and here recorded from the Malay
Peninsula.

2 8, Malaysia, Malay Peninsula, Gap, Fraser’s Thll—A. M. Lea
& wife coll.

lr

KORMILEY—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 29

Subfamily CARVENTINAE Usinger, 1950
Gen. Carventus Stal, 1865

The genus Carventus Stal also has a very wide range of dis-
tribution; from Burma, across Tndonesin, and New Guinea, to
Anstralia, then again in the Pacific Islinds (Samoa), One species
oceurs jn Central America (Mexico), and a few species in Lropical
Africa, and Madayasear, Hihiopian, and Malagasian species previously
were placed in the genus Burgeaua Schouteden, 1919; later this genus
was svnonymized with Carventus Stal, by Usinger and Matsuda
(1959; 778). The venus Cameravins Distant, 1902 also was syvnony-
mized with Carventus by the same authors (1959: 120), though both
these genera could perliaps he retamed as subgemera, as they lave
heen treated by this author, but if ts diffieult to say without a thorough
revision, It is interesting to note, that half of all speeies of the genus
Curventus Stil, recorded trom the Onental Region and the Pacifie
Islands, come trom New (latnes and adjacent islands,

|. Carventus malayensis n. sp.
riz, 28

Female. Elongate ovate, covered with brownish inerustation,

ILead as long as wich through the eyes (22.5:22.5), but shorter
(lin width weross postocular tubercles (22.5;:26). Anterior process
strong, slightly constricted in the middle, and ineised in front, reaches
to } of antennal segment [. Antenmiverous tubercles strong, denti-
form, acute, divanieating, provided with a small tubercle on exterior
harder near the base, reaching to 4 oof antennal segment 1 Mves
moderately large, protruding, Postocular ftubereles dentiforn,
adjacent to the eves, produced far beyond the outer bordey of the
eves. Vertex with a high, grailate, median carina, and two (1 + 1)
lower, and thinner, smooth carinae laterad of the median. Postocular
borders carinate, and sinnate, terminating with a toherele directed
backward. Antennae are one and a half times as long as the head
(57 :22.5); antennal segment UT eclavate; [TT ane TL) tapering toward the
base; TV elongate fisiform, Proportions, Pte PV, ave: 10.5;7:1009.5,
Rostrum reaches to the bind border ot rostral eroove,

Pronotam shorter than width aeross the humeri (27:47), distinetly
divided into two lobes by a deep, and wide, depression. Collar clearly
separated from the dise, Just behind the collar is placed a erescent-
shaped, transverse ridge; and behind the latter a short, thin median
snlens, terminated with a tubercle placed in the interlobal depression.
Anterotateral angles prodneed as lobes, rounded anteriorly, and
laterally, separated from the collar by a deep ineisure, Along the fore

296 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

horder of the lobes runs a granulated ridge, and another one, erescent
shaped, is placed behind the latter, and along the lateral border of
fore lobe, Lateral borders twice, deeply sinnate, and with a strong
tooth between them, Hind Jobe much wider than the fore lohe (47:38),
raised at limmeri, and declivous anteriorly; along the hind border runs
a fine, transverse suleus. Lateral borders of hind lobe strongly
eonyex, and with a tuberele in the middle, Tind border straight in
the middle, angularly produced laterad of seutellam (hind angles).

Seutellum subtriangular, shorter than width at the base (15:26).
Lateral borders convex; tip angularly rounded; dise transversely
raised at the base, and with a low median earina behind basal
elevation,

IHlemelytra reach to 4 of tergum VII; corium reaches a little
over the middle of seutellum; its exterior border is earinate, conver.

Abdomen ovate, longer than maximal width across segment [TV
(75:68), Connexivum wide and flat. Connexiva IT and LT semifused,
others clearly separated from each other, PE-angles IL to VI barely
protruding; PH-VII form an obtuse angle, Posterior border of teremn
Vil, and connexiva VIL form together a barely sinuate line. Para-
tergites strong, conieal, reach to “ of seement LX; the latter trunente
posteriorly. Spiraeles Tl to VIET lateral, and visible from above.

Legs: unarmed.

Colour; dark reddish-brown; connexivum, tibiae, and tarsi,
yellow brown,

Total length, 6.84 mm; width of pronotum, 1.88 mm; width of
abdomen, 2.02 min,

Holotype; 9@, Malaysia, Malay Peninsnla, Gap (Fraser's Till) —
A. M. Lea & wile coll; deposited in the South Anstralian Museum,
Adelaide.

Carventus malayensis no sp. is related to €. gestrot Bergroth,
1892, from Burma, but differs from it by: Jarger size; antero-lateral
angles of the pronotnm rounded anteriorly and laterally, wot obliquely
truncate, and by different proportions of antennal segments,

2. Carventus ovatus n. sp,
Fig. 24

Male. Ovate, regularly tapering from the middle of abdomen
forward, and less so backward; more or Jess covered with a e@reyish
inerustation, with exception of antennae, lees, and membrane,

Head almost as long as width through the eyes (19:20), shorter
than width across postocular tubercles (19:21.5). Anterior process
stout, with parallel sides, notehed anteriorly, reaching to the middle

KORMILEV—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAF 297

of antennal seement T. Antenniferous tubercles moderately large,
dentitorm, aeute, their exterior borders parallel, reaching to $ of
antennal sewment |. Kyes large, semiglobose, protruding. —Post-
Henlar tubercles small, dentiform, prodoced heyond the outer border
of the eyes. Vertex with “V" "form rows of fine granules, and laterad
of them, with two (1 + 1) ovate, and finely granulate elevations,
Antennae long, and slender, (wice as Jong as the head (40:19), Tirst
seyment robust, clavate: 2nd mueli thimer, tuperme toward the base;
3rd subeylindrical, shiehtly dilated apically; 4th elongately fusiform,
Proportions, f to TV, are: 12:7:12.5:8.5. Rostumm short, reaching to
the base of vostral groove.

Provotum much shorter than width across humeri (25:40); divided
into two lobes ly a thin, transverse sulens. Fore lobe is distinetly
narrower than the hind lobe (80:40), Collar clearly separated from
the dise. Behind tt is placed a short, subtriangular, almost an extended
“V-shaped, cavina, Antero-lateral angles produced into lobes,
rounded anteriorly and laterally, reachiug forward as Paras the collar.
They are separated from the latter by deep ineisures. Lateral border
in doubly sinuete, and with a small tooth between sinuses. Lateral
horders of the hind lobe convex, and slightly simuate at the postero-
lateral angles, Fore dise with two (1 -+ 1) oblique, granulate ridges
nt the bases of antero-lateral angles, and with two (1 + 1) callosities
mesml of the latter. In the middle of the sulens dividing both lobes
is placed a sinall tubercle, Hiud lohe finely granulate; a fine suleus
vuns along the hind border of pronotum, The Jatter is straight in the
middle, and angularly produced backward laterad of seutelliom,

Scutelham short, wide, and semicircular, half as long as its width
at the base (1122.5). Dise is slightly raised, and granulate,

Hemelytra reach ovey fore border of tergum VIL. Corium short,
reaching 4 of the length of seutellam, its exterior border ts carinate.
Membrane hurge, transparent.

Abdomen ovate, slightly longer than maximal width across seg-
ment TV (58:54). Connexivim wide, and slightly reflesed, Conthexiva
I] und IT semifused together; others clearly separated from each
other, PR-angles of connoxiva IT to VI progressively protruding,
rounded; PE-VI1I angularly produced backward, but not reaching the
tips of paratergites. Paratergites subevlindrical, reaching to 3 of
cordate, declivous hypopygium. Spitacles TT sublateral, and wot visible
front above: IIL to VIIT lateral, and visible.

Legs nnarmed,

Colour: bead, pronetum, seutellam, femora, chuws, and autem
seoments 1, TL, and 1V, are dark brown; abdomen Leht brown; the base

298 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

of ant. segment L, the whole U1, tip of TV, and tibiae are ochraceous,
partly infuseate,

Total length, 4.56 in; width of pronotum, 1.6 mm, width of
wbdomen, 2.16 tm,

Holotype; &, Fiji Islands, Viti Levu—aA. M. Lea eoll.; deposited
in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Paratypes: 2d, and 1 nymph, collected with the holotypes in the
same collection, and colleetion of the anthor.

Carcventus ovatus n, sp, is related to C. malayensis i, spy bit ts
smaller; anterior process ol the head shorter, reaching only to the
middle of anteunal segment ; seutellum is semicirenlar, not sub-
triangular; PK-angles of connexiva more protruding.

3. Carventus robustus n. sp.
Me. 25

Male. Elonwate ovate, rather robust; covered with brown
incrustation, and neeumiulated dirt.

Head shorter than width through the eves (¢—20:238, 8—21L,25),
Anterior process robust, slightly constricted in the middle, and a
little incised in front, reaches to # of antennal segment T. Arten-
niferous tubercles demtitorm, acute, divarieating, reach to 4 of
antennal segmem |. Eyes large, semiglobose, protruding. Post-oeular
tnbercles small, dentiform, slightly produced bevond the onter border
of the eyes. Vertex with a high median ridge, and with two (1 + 1)
thin, lower carinae alone the latter. Laterad of them are placed two
(1 + 1) ovate, raised ecallosities. Antennae one and a half times as
lone as the head (30.5:20). Segment 1 robust, clavate; 11 and TII
tupering toward the base; IV fusiform, Proportions, [ to TY, are:
é—10;:5:8:7,.5, ?—11:6:9:7. Rostrum short, reaching to the hind
horder of a wide, and deep, rostral eroove, which is closed posteriorly.

Pronotum shorter than maximal wilth across lumeri ( ¢—27 46,
9—28:50), Hore lobe narrower than lind Jobe (é—87:46, ¢—88:50).
Collar high, clearly separated from the disc. Just behind the eollar
is placed a narrow, transverse, graunlate ridge; behind the ridge, on
the median line runs a short and narvow suweus, ferninatinge with a
high tubercle, placed on the interlobal depression. Laterad of the
median suleus are placed two (1 + 1) eallosities, each of them bearing
an oblique, granulate ridge. Antero-lateral angles form two (1 + 1)
expanded lobes, truncate anteriorly, and rounded antero-laterally.
Just behind these lobes are placed two (1 + 1) high, oblique ridges,
divergent backward, Interlobal depression deep, and rather wide.
Lateral borders doubly sinnate, with a large tooth between the sinuses,

KORMILEV—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 299

Carventus malayeusis u. sp. 9, Fig. 28—head and pronotum,

Carventus ovalus n, sp., 3, Fig. 24—head, pronatum and seutellum,

Carventus robustus n. sp, ¢, Fig. 25-—head, pronotum and seatellun,

Carventus brachypterus n. sp. 2, Fig. 26—head, pronotum, scutellum and hemelytra (pads);
Fig. 27—lip of abdomen, dorsal aspect, \

Acaraplera dimorpha n. sp. 3, Fig. 28-tip of abdomen, dorsal aspect, Fig, 29-—-ventral
aspect; 9, Fig, 80—tip of abdomen, dorsal aspect.

Acarapléra (Lissaptera) denticeps un. sp., o, Fig. $1—tip of abdomen, dorsal aspect.

Hind lobe higher than lore Johe, granulate; a thin, transverse suleus
runs alone hind border. Hind border straight in the middle, protruding
backward laterad of sentelhim.

Seutellam semicirewar, half as long as its basal width ( ¢—13:25,
9—15:28). Dise slightly raised, scabrous; median carina distinet on
the hind half of the dise.

300 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Hemelytra reach to the middle of tergum VII (4), or to 4 of
terenm VII (?). Corium rugose, reaches to 4 of sentellum; tts
exterior border carinate, reflexed.

Abdomen slightly lonver than its maximal width across segment
LV (¢—d8:55, @—69:68). Connexivum wide; segments I] and TTT
semifused together; others clearly separated from each other, PI-
angles Ll to VI progressively protruding, rounded; PH-VUL prodneed
backward as subaneular, apically rounded, and reflexed lobes, whieh)
do not reach the tips of paratergites, Paratergites (4) conical, reach-
ing to the middle of a subecordate, declivous hypopygium; the latter
with a median ridge tapering backward, In the female, paratergites
short, conical, rounded apically, reaching slightly over the middle of
segment IX; the latter is short, and rounded apically. Spiracles TL
to VIII lateral, and visible from above.

Logs unarmed,

Colour: dark reddish brown; libiae slightly lighter; tarsi yellow-
brown.

Total length: ¢—.64, e—6.44 min; width of pronotum: ¢—1,82,
¢—2.00 mm: width of abdomen: ¢—2.20, 2?—2.72 mm.

Tlolotype; ¢@, Fiji Islands, Tavanui—A, M. Lea coll; deposited
in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Allotype: ¢, eolleeted with the holotype; in the same Museum,

Paratypes: 2 8, 8 9, and 1 nymph, collected with the holo,
and allotype; 5 ¢ &1 9, Fiji, Viti Levua—a. M. Lea coll; deposited m
the same Museim and collection of the author.

Carventus robustus i. sp.is not closely related to any of Oriental
species of Carventus, may be the nearest is C. birer Kormilev, 1954,
hut it may be separated from the Inter by: different shape of pro-
notum; all ridges and depressions of the latler are more pronounced ;
PE-angles of connexiva more protruding. The whole aspect of
CO. yobustes 1. sp. is that. of sturdiness.

4. Carventus minutus Kormilev
Carventus minutus Wovmiley, 1955, Rev, Menat, Mat, Par, 2: 486.

Deseribed from Deslacs Tslands, it is now recorded from Papua.

1 3, N.K. Papua, Mt. Lamington, 1,800-1,500ft,—C. 'T, MeNamara
coll

5, Carventus australis Kormilev
Carventus australis Wormilev, 1958, Jour. N.Y. lint. Soe.: 66: 87,

3 ¢@ &2 @, Australia, Queensland, Mt. Tambourine—A, M, Lea
eoll,; 3 &, Australia, N, Queensland, Cairns—A. M. Lea coll; 1 2,
Australia, N. Queensland, Cairns; 1 specimen without tip of abdomen,
Australia, N.S.W., Dorrigo.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 301

6, Carventus kirkaldyi China
Carventus kirkaldyi China, 1930, Inseets of Samoa, Part I, Hemip-
tera, fase, 8; 109; Brit. Mus., London,
Deseribed from Samoa, now 1s recorded from Fiji.
G 2,4 9 & 4 nymphs, Fiji Islands, Viti Leva—A, M, Lea coll.

7. Carventus brachypterus n. sp.
Vig, 26-27

Female, Klongate ovate, brachypterous; the whole dorsal surface
roughly eranulate; incrustation almost absent.

Head slightly shorter than width through the eyes (18:19).
Anterior process deeply cleft, genae being much longer than elypens;
reaches to the tip of antennal Rae paeay TI. Antenniferous tubercles
dentiform, acute, slightly divaricating; reaching to the middle of
antennal segment lL. Eyes small, Seatielaboets protruding, Postoenlar
tubercles blunt, separated from vertex by a fine sulens; reaching to
the outer border of the eyes. Vertex with a triple row of fme granules,
Antennae short and slender, one and a hall times as long as the head
(26:18), Proportions of antennal segments, T to TV, are: 7:4:7.5:7.5,

Pronotum trapezoidal, half as long as its maximal width (17:54),
Collar clearly separated from the dise. Antero-lateral angles lobulate,
though the lobes are greatly reduced compared to macropterous species
of the genus Carventus Stal; ncisure between collar and antero-lateral

aineles also reduced, shallow, Lateral borders shehtly sinuate before
the twiddle, slightly convex alter the middle. Hind border slightly
vonvex, The whole prouotum, particularly the hind lobe, is reduced
compared with fully winged Curventus: antero-lateral angles form
subangnlar lobes, rounded at the tip, produced as far as lore border
of the collar. Hind lobe is shorter, and only slightly wider than the
fore lobe,

Seutellum subtriangwar, short, and wide at the hase (10:25).
Lateral horders slightly sinuate, and subcarinate; dise convex, roughly
eranulate,

Metanotum consists of two (1 -- 1) plates which are deeply
depressed anteriorly, and hear an '*S**-shaped transverse carina on
each plate; their limits with seutellam and tergum T are formed by
narrow, and moderately deep snilei,

Hemelytrva reduced to small pads, without division into eorium,
clavits, and membranee, The latter is completely absem. Pads are
convex exteriorly, and slightly excavate posteriorly; reaching to the
middle of seutelhim,

302 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Abdomen longer than its maximal width across segment IV
(60:49), Lateral borders regularly convex, Connexivum reflexed:
PK-angles barely protruding; PH-VI1 subangularly rowided, and
slightly produced backward. Connexiva 1 and IL semifused, others
separated. Terga T and TT fused together, separated fron the meta-
notum, and central dorsal plate, by fine sulei. Central dorsal plate
consists of terga ILL to VT flat, slightly raised only along the median
line, The first tergal gland opening is large, the 2nd reduced, the 8rd
ohsolete, Terga T and Tl roughly granulate. Tergnim VIT raised
backward; along its hind border runs a double, fine suleus. Vergum
VILI very short and wide, Paratergites rather larwe, dentiforn;:
segment TEX with parallel sides, tricuspidate apically. Spirncles Tl to
V ventral, and not visible from above; VI sublateral, slightly visible;
VIT lateral, and visihle; VIL] dorso-laieral.

Lees mnarimec.

Colour; testaecous, partly darker; connexiva bicolorouss; thei
mater borders dark brown anteriorly, and yellow posteriorly,

Total length, 428 mmm; width of pronotum, 136 mm; width of
abdomen, 1,96 mm,

Holotype: &, Tasmania, Manawah—A. M. Lea coll; deposited in
the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Usinger and Matsnda mentioned the existence of brachyptery in
Carrentus (1959; 120), but to date no brachypterous speeies has heen
deseribed (fo uvy knowledge), Lt is rather diffientt to locate Carventus
brachypleraus u. sp. taxonomically beeause its pronotum is modified
by braehypterism, lt the head is typieally that of a Carrentuss
connexiva Tand Il semifused as in the macropterous species; antennae
and logs are also as in macropterous species,

Gen. Acaraptera Usinger & Matsuda, 1959

This eurious, apterous genus was recorded Irom Samoa, Fiji,
New Zealand, aud adjacent islands. Now we have three more species
frou Lord Howe Island, a small istand in the Southern Pacifie between
New Zealand and Australia. Usinger and Matsuda split this genus
ito three subgenera: Acaraptera sensu strietu, Nesiaptera, and
Lissaptera, One of the new species belongs clearly to Lissaptera, but
the other two, though with some diffieulty, [ have placed into
Aravaplera sensu stricto,

One of the new species, belonging to dearapterd s. str, slows
curious sexual dimorphism; the males have on the ventro-lateral side
ol counexivam VIL two (1 + 1) large, obovate tubercles placed on a
protuberance; these tubercles are absent in the females, Moreover in
the males, sterna TT and LIT are fused in the middle, but dhey are

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC: ARADIDAE 303

separated in the females, Another new species, belonging to
lrariplerd s, ste, is represented only by the females, so it could not
he proved if it also has this dimorphism, In Acaraplera myersi
Usinger & Matsuda, 1959, the males do not have pedunculate, ohovate
tubercles, as in the abovemeutioned species, but on corresponding
places muy be seen ovate callosities,

The second new species differs from other dearaptera species by
a highly elevated median portion of the body, forming a stont ridge
mining from the pronotum to tergum VIL, similar to some species of
the venus Birowna Kormilev, 1957. but the pattern of stall ridges oni
the pro, meso, and metanotum is more similar to that of Araraplern,
than of Biroana; also the hody is not pilose, but only seabrous because
oY inmerons small ridges, and fine punctures, so that T have decided
fo prt it also in vlearaplera,

1. Acaraptera dimorpha n. sp.
Bie. 28-30
Male. Elongate ovate, rather (lat: covered with evroyish merusta
tion; apterous,
Head transverse, much shorter than width through the eyes

(2 —169.9:21.5, @—1:22). Anterior process short, anteriorly clelt,
wenae being longer than elypeuss reaching 10 4 Of antennal seement T,
Auiemiferous luberclos strong, acute, flat, and divergent; reaching to
{ of antennal segment T. Eyes small, prot miding, Postoeular portions
of the head produced into hhint teeth, reaching to the onter borders of
eyes, Hind border slightly conyex in a wide are. Vertex with “V7
shaped carina, and laterad of it with two (1+ 1) ovate callosities.
Antennae twiee as long as the head ($—$1.5:15,5, 9 —29.5 16).
Proportions, | to TV, are: ¢—10;6:7,.5:8, 9—10:6:6.5:7.5. Rostrum
short, reaching to hind border of a shallow rostral £roove,

Pronotum distinctly separated from mesonotum, much shorter
(han the maximal width aeross humeri (4 —9:30, ¢- -10382), Colhur
indistinetly separated from the dise, and in the middle produeeck haek-
ward as a median carina Antero-lateral angles shghtly expanded,
aud depressed, subangularly rounded: at their base ran areuate carinae
(1 - 1) starting from the collar, and reaching to the hind border ol
the (ise laterally. Dise itself is irregularly rugose, Median carina
finely suleate on median line.

Mesonotum wider than pronotum (4 —34:30, ¢—40:82); its
Intecal borders carinate, and divergent backward: median carina
widening backward, aud fused with a median elevation of metanotium,
and tergmnm 7. The latter is finely, longitudinally suleate. Hind

304 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

homers finely carinate. Dise with six (3 + 3) semifused, depressed,
irregular carinae, and deep depressions between the middle and outer
varimae.

Metanotum forms two (1 + 1) large irregularly rounded plates
separated by a median elevation, From the middle of the round plates
run backward two (1 + 1) longitudinal carinae, produced posteriorly
across terga Land I, and reaching central dorsal plate, dividing terga
T and 1 into a median and two lateral portions,

Abdomen longer than maximal width across segment Vo (¢), or
IV (2) (6 —5048, 9 55:50), Tergum T separated from metanotum
by u fine carina in the middle, and by fine sulci laterally. Tergam in|
separated from tergum 1, and central dorsal plate by fine anlet ¢ fentral
dorgal plate consists of terga TIT to VI, if is raised on the median
line, and sloping laterally. It is provided with the usual pattern of
callosities, surrounded by flat carinae. In the tale, PH-angles of
connexiva ITT to VI are slightly and progressively produced, and
rounded; in the female, not produced. by the male, PH-VI is
angularly rounded, and reflexed; on its yventro-lateral side are placed
two (1 + 1) protuberances, terminating in obovate, shiny tubercles,
Mn ihe female, lateral borders of abdomen evenly arcuate, without any
protuberances. Paratergites, in both sexes, small, and blint, direeted
obliquely upward in the male, Hypopyginm elongate ovate, caudal in
position, produced as far as obovate tubercles. Segment TX in the
female small, rounded posteriorly, produced slightly beyond para
tereites, Spiracles [Land M1 are lateral and visible from above; TV
to VII ventrotateral; VITL terminal,

Meso, and metasternum, are fused in both sexes; sterna [and TL
fused only in the male, free in the female. Sterna TV to VIET separe ted
from each other,

Legs unarmed, rochanters I'ree; femora slightly mated; claws
with small arolia,

Colour: yellow brown; lateral borders of pro, meso, and
metanotum, median elevation on terga | and I, fat earinae on central
dorsal plate, PH-angles of connexiva JIL to VIT, and tarsi, yellow. In
the female, body dark brown to reddish brown, with even, yellow
lateral horders from pronotium to tergum VIT,

Total Jeneth: ¢—38.6 mm, 2?—8.82 mm; width of pronotum:
$—12 mm, 2—1.28 mm; width of abdomen; 4—172 mn,
2 —2.00 mm.

Holotype: ¢, Lord Howe Island (Southern Pacific) —A, M. Lea
coll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Allotype: @, collected with the holotype; in the same collection,

KORMILEV—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 305

Paratypex 1 ¢, collected with the holo, and allotype; in the
collection of the author.

Jlearaptera dimorpha a. sp. may be separated trom A. myecrsi
Usinger & Matsuda, 1959, from New Zealand, by its much larger size,
by a different pattern of cavinae, and (depressions, on pro, meso, and
mefanotim, and abdomen; males also have peduneulate processes on
PE-VU, which are absent in uf, myersi, and replaced there by ovate,
shiny tubercles,

2. Acaraptera minuta n. sp.

Female, Ovate, seabrous; vaised on median line from provotium
to tergum VIL. Head finely granulate; body very finely punctured,
vovered with thin imerustation,

Head shorter than width through the eyes (10:14.5), Anterior
proeess stout, short, and subtruneate anterior ly, elypens being very
slightly longer than genae, reaching to # of antennal segment 1.
Antenniferous tubercles very short, robust, reaching very sliglithy over
the hase of antental segment I. Hyves very small, semiglobose, pro-
fruding; their facets are convex, Postocular tubercles suiall, bhint.
almost reaching to the outer border of eves, Vertes with a “Vit
shaped earina, Adternnie almost twice as loue as the head (18.5310),
Antennal segment [ vobust, fusiform; TL ovate; LU and TV semitused
logether (fused in nymphal stage), TLL tapering toward the base, and
petiolute, LV robust, pyriforin Propertions, T te TV, ame: 9:2.5:3s4.
Rostrum short, but robust, reaches to the base of the lead.

Pronotum one third as long as its maximal width (722). Collar
il defined; anterioy border truncate; anterolateral angles rounded
lateral borders convex, Dise with a {T?\form median ridge, whieh is
silvate on inedian line; along lateral borders rum two (1 + 1) robust
ridges. A lew raised, shiny eallosities laterad of median ridge.
Pronotium is fused with asihtate i the middle, separated laterally
liv deep furrows, or depressions.

Mesonotium and metanotam are fused in the middle into a thin,
hivh vidge; separated laterally hy deep sulci. Median ridge suleate on
median Jine. Posteriorly if is connected with diverging ridges of
lergum Lt. Mesonotum with i defined carinae along lateral borders,
and with four (2 + 2) raised, earved callustties on each side of median
ridwe, separated from the latter by deep depressions, Metanotum las
six (2+ 3) similar eallosities on the dise laterally, and even deeper
depressions along the median ridge,

Abdomen shorter than width across segment TV (27:32), Terewm
J is completely fused with metanotnin, but separated trom tergum TT
by a transverse depression, Tergnm IT is split into two (1 + 1)

306 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ridges in the middle, and deeply depressed laterally, Central dorsal
plate consists of terga IIT to V1; it is highly raised in the middle, form-
inv a stout median ridge, abruptly sloping laterally, Laterad of
median ridge are placed fine carinae, and depressions; each segment
hears six (3 + 3) round, callous spots, Tergum VIT has a thinner
median ridge tapering, and sloping, backward, Connexivum wide, with
uv sublateval, longitudinal carina, sloping medially, and bearing on
‘mer side round, eallous spots. PR-angles not protruding; PE-VII
rounded, Spiraeles TI, TT, and VIL lateral, and visible from above:
TV to Vi sublateral, but still visible; VII terminal. Paratergites
small, blunt, reaching to the middle of segment IX which is short,
rounded posteriorly,

Lees robust, and unarmed,

Colour evenly testaccous; PE-THL to PH-VT, and tarsi, are yellow,

Total length, 212 mm; width of pronotum, 0.88 mn; width of
abdomen, 1.28 mm.

Holotype: &, Lord Howe Tshind (Southern Pacifie)—\, ML Lea
eoll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Paratypes: 3 2, collected with the holotype; in the same eallection,
and collection of the author.

3. Acaraptera (Lissaptera) denticeps n. sp.
Fig. 3

Male. Ovate, flat; head, antennae, and legs partinily, finely
granulate: rest of the body very finely punctured,

Tfead shorter than width through the eyes (17:22.5), Anterior
process strong, forked in front, genac being much longer than clypeus
and divergent; they reach to 3 of antennal segment I. Anteniferous
tubercles strong, acute, slightly divaricating. Eyes small, protruding,
with couvex facets, Postoeular portion of the head produced into fat,
acute angles, produced as far as onter border of the eyes. Vertex
with two contiguous earinae, and laterad of them with two (1 + 1)
ovate callosities. Antennae short, only one and a half times as long as
the head (26:17); proportions, L to TV, are: 9:4:6:7, Rostrum reaches
to the base of a shallow rostral groove,

Pronotum four fimes as wide as long in the middle (8:33), Antero
lateral angles slightly expanded, and rounded, forming small, rounded
lobes, Collar poorly separated from the dise. Along anterior, lateral,
and posterior borders run thin carmae, slightly blurred at humeri.
Dise nneven, finely punctured; with a low, ill defined, median carina,
And with ten (5 -- 5) small callous spots laterad of it.

KORMILEY—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAR 307

Mesonotum and metanotum completely fused together, and with
terga T and TT, in one large plate, half as long as wide (23:42), Meso
wuMl metanotum are separated only laterally by fine sulei, evanescent
before the middle of the disc, Dise is slightly longitudinally raised
on the median line on meso, and metanotnm, slehtly depressed on
fergnm Il; dise is provided with a few small, irregularly shaped,
symmetric, callous spots. Lateral borders of meso, metanotum are
slightly swollen, and fused with eounexivim IT,

Abdomen (inclusive of terga | and I1) as long as wide across
seyment TV (45:45), flat, slightly raised on median line, sloping
laterally, Central dorsal plate subrectangular, with rounded postero-
lateral angles, Dise finely punctured, and provided with 20 (10 + 10)
stnall, round, callous spots, distributed into six (3 + 3) rows. Con
nexivim wide, slightly raised lnterally: all segments clearly separated
froin each other. P-angles Il to VI slightly protruding, and rounded;
PH-VIT angularly rounded, and produced backward. Paratergites
small, clavate. Hypopygium conical, slightly produced beyond PH-VII,
Spiracles lateral and visible from above on I, ITT, VI, VIT, and VILL;
sublateral and not visible on TY and Y,

Legs unarmed.

Colour: ferrugincous to chestuut-brown; PI-aneles of connexiva
I} io VI, and tarsi vellow.

Total length, 3.64 mm; width of pronotum, 1.82 mm; width of
abdomen, 1.480 mm.

Ilolotype: 4, Lord Howe Island (Southern Pacific)
coll; deposited in the South Australian Musemn, Adelaide.

dAcaraplera (Lissaptera) denticeps n. sp. may be separated at once
from st, (da) completa Usinger & Matsuda, 1959, hy the developed
postoenlur tubercles, which are almost absent in the latter.

A, M. Lea

REFERENCES

(singer, Ryo. und) Matsuda, RR. 1959: Classifeation of the Aradidas ( Hemiplera-
Heteroptera); London, Brifish Museum, VII—1tL0 pyp., 101 figs.

RESUMEN

Bl autor lia estudiqdo un importante lote de los Arididos (Uemiptera) dé las coloceiones
dal Museo de Austridia del Sur en Adelvide: Debido a la eantidad grande de las espreies
estidiadas, en este trabajo erin tratadas solimente Jas sulfiunilins Tsoderminae, Prosymipies-
finae, Aradiuie, Calisiitae, Anecurinae y Carvyentinae, dejando a Ja. subtamilia Mezirinae para
el frabiajo préxsino. En este parte erin deseriptas 14 especies nuevas para la cieneia,
proceiontes de Australia, Nueva Guinea, Fiji, algunas islas peqnefas del Pacifieo Meridional
y Malisia,

ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM A LAGOON
BED, KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER

Summary

This paper records the presence of a series of stone implements discovered upon the bed
of a fresh-water lagoon situated on Kangaroo Island. Reference is made to the principal
types and two possible explanations for their existence in this unusual situation are
discussed. A general description of the Kangaroo Island stone material culture is included
for comparative reasons. The topographical features and vegetation of the region
surrounding the lagoon are referred to briefly.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM A LAGOON
BED, KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

$y H. M. COOPER, Honorary Associare in Anriroprouocy,
Sourn AusrraniAN Museum

SUMMARY

This paper records the presence of a series ol stone implements
discovered upon the bed of a [resh-water lagoon situated on Kangaroo
Island. Tteference is made fo the principal types and two possible
explanations for their existence in this unusual situation are diseussed.

A general deseviption of the Kangaroo Island stone material
cullare is included for comparative purposes.

The topographical features and vegetation of the region surround-
ing the lagoon are referred to briefly.

TOPOGRAPITY

The topography of the area in the vicinity of the unnamed fresh-
water lagoon, upon the bed of whieh the stone implements were found,
is portion of a relatively low undulating plateau, about 300 feet above
sea level. This is the dominating feature of the surrounding country.

Fresh and salt-water lagoons and swamps, usually dry in a summer
season alter an average annual rainfall of about 23 inches, oceur here
and there in some of the larger depressions, The surface soil is often
loamy in character and in places somewhat shallow. Travertine lime-
stone (kunkar) is exposed upon the surfaee of many of the ridges
mostly in the form of large quantities of weathered out blocks,
Deposits of lateritic gravel, often of considerable depth, occur in many
places. This gravelly material sometimes exists in the form of large
aid small partly consolidated blocks and lumps. There are a few
scattered onterops of quartzite, sometimes flaggy and friable, also
weathered out blocks of the same material which in a few places are
interspersed with large massive pieces of milky vein quartz.

In some localities whitish sand overlies heavy, almost impervious
clay and in these areas there exist many small depressions or claypans
which retain surface water for a considerable period alter rains. These
valuable little water supplies, as will be mentioned later, were favoured
as temporary camps when the former native inhabitants wandered
about the countryside,

310 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

BOTANY

The yewetation around the lagoon and in the adjoining area is
characteristic of this part of Kangaroo Island, the dominant large
trees being Huealyptus eneoripolia (Eucalyptus Oil Mallee), Bucalyptus
diversifolia (White Mallee), Bucalyplus cosmophylla and Casuarina
stricta, The dense serub, almost impenetrable in places, inclides
Xanthorrhoean tateana (Yacen), Myaporum insulare (Native Juniper),
Correa spp, Callistemon aacrapunctalus (Scarlet Bottlebrush),
Banksia ornala, Banksia marginata, Melalenea sp. (Teatree), ewera
(several handsome species) and mmnerous other shrubs, bushes and
CPCOCPGTS,

The natural serub, however, is rapidly being removed in order 10
provide additional cleaved land for pastoral and agricultural purposes.

LAGOON BED CAMP-SITE. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

An inferior form of quartzite—the country rock of the vieinity—
which oceurs in places upon rising ground along the northern side of
the lagoon, in the form of small isolated outerops and scattered blocks,
tends by exposure to rot and become friable in some places, as i ready
deseribed. This poor quality rock was employed occasionally im the
niaantaeture of large implements sueh as fig. 1, 2 and 4, probably in
the nbsenee of suitable transported material such as fine-grained
quartzites in the form of water-worn round beach pebbles which the
aborigines transported from seattered places along the shove-line.
This material, so attractive to the Kangaroo [sland natives, was used
by them almost exclusively in the manufacture of their large pebble
vhopper implement industry,

Vein quartz stones of various shapes and sizes ocenr apor ising
eround sloping eradually upwards on the northern side of the lagoon
which is approximately one third of a mile in length (see accompanying
sketeh), A large quantity of this muterial also exists along {he south-
western shore in the form ol an extensive bed, both a little above and
a little below the clearly defined marginal edge of the lagoon, The
amoothed and sometimes rolled surfaces of these stones, irregular in
shape and of various sizes, appear to indieate thei subjection to water
action extending over a cousiderable period of Gime, which sinall waves
npon the sorface of the lagoon, caused by wind storms, would tend
to inerease, These fragments are coated with a rusty brown layer,
lnteritie in origin, but breaking the exterior discloses their respective
colourations.

This interesting strip of vein quartz, so conveniently situated, was
probably (le main source of raw material supply for the prodnetion

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 311

of implements, mostly small, found upon the floor of the lagoon, (The
more correet term—vein quartz—is abbreviated to quartz or milky
quartz in the remainder of! this paper.)

The exterior surfaces of the quartz stones, which occur upon the
ridge adjoining the lagoon’s northern side, have retained their natural
surface colouration with the exception of a few which seem to have
been affeeted by the presence of patches of lateritic gravel in their
vicinity. The quality of the quartz in this place appears to be superior
to that upon the lagoon bed.

Hd. of HAINES

312 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The floor of the lagoon is overgrown with a thick growth of a
mitive reed (probably Chorizandra enodis) whieh has produced a
dense, deeply interwoven sohd math of roots.

The surface discolouration deposited on the quartz stones, lying
npon the lagoon bed, is probably due to their immersion for a consider
able period of time, in water containing irou derived and washed down
from patches of laterite occurring upon rises which border it and also
perhaps trom water running into the lagoon from the watercourse.

The principal water supply to the lagoon at present has its source
in a small watercourse, shown upon the accompanying map, which
draing some of the country to the north-east, This intake is augmented
somewhat by a small scour which runs down a little to the north of
the watercourse after whieh ifs flow enters the lagoon in the same
loulity, Additional water formerly ran into its south-western corner
bul the small supply from this quarter has now ceased owing to
structural alterations to the adjoining main highway and as sorte of
jhe water which Formerly flowed down the north-east ereek lias been
diverted and diffused, the volume reaching the Jagoon will be
appreciably less in future when compared with the quantity captnred
under earlier natural conditions,

The lagoon oeeupics the whole of the depression ino undulating
eouutry and is enciveled by an almost continous sloping ridge of
regular height which attains a maximum elevation of alout 40 feet.

A e¢onsiderable uumber of stone implements, chiefly the large
trimmed pebble types of Kangaroo Island, Cooper (1943) were cis-
covered by the writer upon the eastern and sowlhern portions of the
eneireling ridge, on sandy cultivated ground, in the course of many
examinations iu the period 1984-1962, During these years the dense
mnatted growth of reeds and roots upon the bed of the lagoon obseured
all traces of any former oecupation, in the form of stone implements,
the existence of which remaimed mmsuspeeted ontil 1962 when its floor
wus laid bare by fire.

The depth of water amouuts to a maximum of abont 3 feet at the
close of a winter of average rainfall after which it gradually dries out
during the early course of the following sammer,

The lagoon, however, after heavy winter rains oveasionally vetains
water during the whole of the ensning dry season but owing to. the
lack of rain in 1962, when almost dronght conditions prevailed on
Kangaroo Island, if remained dry throughout—an extremely rare
OCCUTTETICE,

This lavonrable climatic condition enabled the suecesstul removal
tu be earried out, by fire, of the dense mass of reeds upon the bed of

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL, IMPLEMENTS MGS

the lagoon revealing the existence there of many stone implemerts,
both large and small, briefly referred to earlier in this paper, together
with disearded fakes and miscellaneous rock material,

The unusual situation in which these implements were found, that
is upou the bed ot a lagoon subject to regular inundation, is most
nunsual and direetly contrary to the aborigines’? practice of carefully
avoiding places liable to flooding hut who selected instead, elevated
sites for their encampments, Two possible explanations for the
existence upon the lagoon floor of all the essential components of a
stone material culture—hammer-stones, trimmed and autrimmed flakes
snd cores—are disenssed in detail later in this paper,

The distribution of the implements upon the bed of the lagoon is
widespread as indicated wpon the sketeh although most were found
alone the western shore in the vicinity of or direetly upon the quart
deposit itsell, already mentioned, where detecting and collecting spect
ens under these eirewmmnestanees proved most diffenlt, (Tt is desirable
to examine, as lar as possible, partly buried or obscured stones tpor
(lie surface of a camp-site, however unattractive at first sight they
appear to he, otherwise valnable specimens from time to time will be
passed by unnoticed). An additional laver of similar quartz stones,
also tron stained, was found to exist below the closely matted rool
mass at seattered places in the same area hut a somewhat Driet
examination failed to disclose the existence of any prepared implements
Where.

The small quartz implements diseovered upon the lagoon hed,
awmionuting 10 approximately 200 in all, vary greatly in shape as
indieated by the figured specimens in this paper. They have heen
prepared from small, apparently fragmentary stones tn the form of
a trimmed core or fake. The size, shape and general appeatanee of
the implements suggest thal the nearby quart, deposit upon the lagoon
hed was the aborigines” source Of supply or at least a major portion
of it.

The velative positions of the trimmed cutting, scraping or sawing
odwes are generally dependent upon the nondescript shapes of the
stones chosen, there heme little if any indication of premeditated,
svunmetrical trimming. 11 7s impossible in most eases, fo prodnee
implements, under these cirenmstanees, of any one particular type
whiel closely resemble gach other in form, The principal aim of the
native tradesman in the produetion of implements of this mature, how-
ever, appears to have been salely one which would yield a simple brut
effective straight or curvedl euffing, seraping or sawing edge, the
shape of the original stone ov flake or finished prodnetion being of
secondary tnportanee,

314 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This method and form of trimming stones and (lakes, mostly sinall
ail offen of nondeseript shapes, may be observed upon Kangaroo
Island in other situations. The incidence of flake-making milky vei
quart, cores of wood quality upon the lagoon bed is very smal) which
explains the existenes i that locality of eore and flake implements
derived from iiferior quartz stones and a searcity of those made brom
snitable flakes. There are other camp-sites upon the island, however,
where milky vein quarta flake-anmaking cores, of good quality, are
nimerous aud in consequence there ig a marked inerease in the
number of superior flake implements in those places, some primarily
trimmed and others secondarily trimmed.

Many of these primarily trimmed flakes are so keenly edged smd
of sueh useful shapes that the question of their heing deliberately
mile, and in consequence used, should be given consideration. Some
possess chipped and damaged edges suggesting wear. ‘The reason for
this divergence in the relative imunbers of small flake and core
imiplements, althongh by no means important, is interesting,
appears to be largely dependent npon the quality of the quart, locally
available whieh differs appreciably in the various localities from poor
Ht the lagoon bed deposit—where much of if is coarse, gritty, impure
dnd nnever ii eomposition to good at other places, parti¢nlarly where
akeamaking cores ave plentiful and of superior quality, sneh as those
mentioned previously,

Some of the small quartzite implements from the ligoou bed sueh
as shown in fie. 9, 18 and 20 may have been derived from either of two
sources: (L) from random flakes strnek off transported fine-grained
quartzite pebbles during the process of shaping them into the large
pebble choppers of the Kangaroo Ishind industry: (2) from deliberate
flakes struck off fairly sinall quartzite cores whieh oeeur oceasionally
upou some eamp-sites. Wie, 16 is an example. The neatly oxecnted
secondary trimming upon them is due to dhe superiority of the rock
emploved which possesses a wood conchoidal fracture. Tt certainty
does not necessarily imply greater skill on the part of the operator nor
does there appear to he any evident reason for believing that
they represent another and more refined Kangaroo [sland material
enlture period,

NOTES ON THE MATERIAL CULTURE OF KANGAROO
ISLAND
The simplicity in form of the large and small Kangaroo Island
stone implements and the absence of many refined types, so widespread
upon the taimland, probably associates them with a corresponding
simplicity in the design and limited variety of the wooden hunting,

COOPER—ARCHAEBOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 415

lighting and domestic implements in nse there at that tine, L! this is
true, these could lave been restricied te little more than elementary
forms of javelin type spears. thrown dtreetly by hand, elubs, shields
andl a few essential domestic objects sach as food vessels and digging
sticks aul also others for various purposes whiell the ¢limate, if
different from that at present prevailing, would have demanded, It
ix possible, therefure, that the inhabitants of Kangaroo Tsland had
no knowledve of the light spear Qvoomera thrown), the boomerans,
polished stone axe-heads and ather vefined constituents of later periods
which appear to have been similarly wiknown to the aborigines of
Tasmania—also an isolated eonumiuity.

It may be useful to peter briefly tu earher diseoveries of the
arelieologieal stone implements of Kangaroo Island before desenbing
those found anon the floor ol the fresh-water lagoon and iliscussing
wiv possible dednetions reluting to ther existence there.

Captain Matthew Flinders, BLN,, who diseovercd and named
Kanearao Island in Mavel 1X02, correctly determined that it was ay
uninhabited land at the time of his arrival, basing his couelusions wypon
(he absence of smokes--defmite proof ol the existence of amitives on
the mainland—the fearlessness of the kangaroos in striking contrast
fo their timidity on the continent{—ind the usnal signs denoting the
presence of primitive man. Subsequently, however, proof of a former
Wmifive OceHpUtON Was diselosed by the (iseovery of some liinimer-
stones (Howehin, 1903) and tater by the finding of interesting large
hand axes or choppers made from water-worn pebbles, first deseribed
by Tindale and Maeeraith (1081) ad Cooper (1943), Wiather inten-
sive search revealed that thoy represented the dominant liarge type
ii the Kangaroo Island (native name Warta) eulture, termed Karlan
ly Tindale,

The existenee of a well established small type industry, an indis-
pensable part oof any stone implement eultuve, however primitive,
remained obsenre with the exception ol a few specimens, chiefly made
from quartzites, found by the weiter during 1934-1939, The discovery
of many small flakeanaking milky quartz cores upon several eamp-
aifes, af a later period, however, disclosed the e@existenee of numerous
Nake impleinents associated with them whieh, owing to the rouwhuess
of their trimming, and noudeseript shapes, had been passed by
imnoticed, as already referred to. Some of these were descrihed hy
Cooper (1960),

It is most difficult to contvol the removal and direction of tolerably
wood flakes, by meats of a hamnier-stone, from blocks of quartz unless
of fatvly good quality, owing to the irvegniar nature of the rock. The
occurrence of quartz, strewn in large quantities upon the surface over

316 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

lurge areas on Kangaroo Island, explains the reason for its use, despite
its inherent limitations, in the production of many small implements,
inade necessary by the absence or scareity of more suitable material.

The trimming method adopted and the final nondeseript shapes
of the implements produeed, found upon the lagoon bed, as described
above, although they may appear to be somewhat primitive and
immature, are attractive by the reason of their simplicity and there
in no evidence to suggest that they failed to accomplish snecessfully, the
preparation of the wooden implements ol the current period and other
work which their use required,

Many stone implements designed in this manner, may appear at
first glance, to workers acenstomed to more advanced types, to be tou
casual and primitive to tunetion with efficiency and their actual
existence in the field, at least primarily, could be easily overlooked.

This simple trimming may also be observed in the preparation of
certain large arehaeologieal trimmed core implements found pou
Kangaroo Tsland, at Hallett Cove and elsewhere on the nearby
mainland.

The acceptance of these types as implements, formerly considered
rather questionable, is now firmly established, following the discovery
in more reeent years of so many similar examples both large and small.

The elementary technique deseribed above is in marked contrast
to that of many of the more vefined and additional implements of
Inter periods whieh received careful primary and secondary trimming,
to ensave that all conformed, as nearly as possible, to predetermined
essentials including shapes, These advances in the functions of stone
implements probably ran concurrently, ina general way, with additions
{0 and improvements in the earlier wooden and other material
eulture fields,

The collection of certain apparently casual stone material, hitherto
unnoticed or rejected, but whieh, after a subsequent examination van
firms the presenee of a definite type, is most important and the
ev(hering of a large mmber of such specimens-—sometimes deemed
nnnecessary—npon which to base a firm opinion, either positive or
negative, is vial. This ean hardly be effective il the examination 18
confined to avery few available examples, any decision so made
rendering it Hable tu errticisin,

he absence of sufficient reliable evidence makes if tmpossible to
date the occupational period of Kangaroo Island, the only unassailable
proo! at present being the stone implements whieh survive if, The
reason for the disappearance of the former inhabitants and the drara-
tion of their oeenpation are also tuknown,

COOPER—ARCHAEBOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 317

Kangaroo Island, over 90 miles in length and separated trom the
mainlind by a narrow strip of sea, merely nine miles in width, was
uninhabited at the commencement of the Muropean occupation,
significantly Incomparable with the wide distribution of natives upon
the Australian continent and also in Tasmania at that period.

Tt is not yet clear from u stody of the implements—many of whieh
have heen disearded owiny to their severely worn condition and the
necessity for replacement hy others—to determine whether the oeenpa-
fion was one of considerable duration and the population corres.
pondingly small or, alternatively, whether if Was shorter and the
Watives more numerous.

The o¢ceupational pattern disclosed by their camping places is an
interesting one, The principal settlements, somewhat limited in
number and probably semi-permanent at least, are indicated by the
colleentration of inary taplements, including hammerstones, Upon
seattered but attractive spots chiefly adjoining inland ereeks, swamps
and Iigoons, Small groups of implements occur at many other places
hit these seem to indicate temporary camps made by people from the
main sites when wandering about the countryside curing hinting
expeditions,

These temporary eatups melade some interesting little elaypan
depressions (referred to in the topography section) whieh retain
surface water for a considerable time, Mere and there, two or three
large pebble choppers and perhaps a hammer-stone or two, may be
seen dying near the margins of these valuable water supplies, perhaps
disclosing the former presenee of small parties of wandering native
liners,

Stone iplements being the only tangible evidenee, if is most
difficult or impracticable to date the occupational period, as already
mentioned, the only other possibility at present being the discovery
of certain sea-shells perhaps representing food remains, This has
nol yet been determined. There remain, however, several other aspects
of some significance whieh may assist in assigning the oeeupation to a
fairly remote date, The don-existence, 1p to the present time of any
fovmner trace on Kangaroo Island of the Dingo, a recent arrival in
Australia, seems to suggest that the habitation ol the island, repre-
sented by the stone implements, pre-dates the coming of this animal,
provided that the islanders erossed over from the mainland either on
foot or by wading belore it was cut off and assumed its present form,

Althongh the large stove implements are abundant npon inland
sites on Kangaroo [sland as already deseribed, no traces of them have
yet been found upon its long stretches of white recent coastal sand-

318 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

dunes. This was a type of location so highly attractive to the
aborigines of recent periods upon similarly placed shore-line dunes
along the nearby mainland, as made evident by their now abandoned
and widespread camp-sites. These dunes, similarly to those upon
the island, also appear to be devoid of large archaeological stone
implements but they commence to occur (upon the mainland) as soon
as closely adjacent rising ground or cliff tops are reached. Localities
include Hallett Cove, at the head of Gulf St. Vincent, Cape Jervis
and elsewhere.

The heights and other topographical features of these mainland
sites are significantly comparable with those upon the island and this,
if finally substantiated regarding Kangaroo Island, might indicate that
the occupational period there could have pre-dated the formation of its
recent coastal white sand-dunes.

The scanty evidence available at present may favour, therefore,
an early dating for their arrival, that the natives were few in number,
consisted of small wandering communities and groups and that their
habitation of the island lingered on over a considerable period
of time,

THE LAGOON BED SITEH, DISCUSSION

The reason for the existence of a considerable quantity of large
and small implements upon the lagoon floor, together with hammer-
stones and waste flakes, is difficult to determine. Two of the most
important problems involved, not yet manifest, are their time dating
and in close relation to it the climatic conditions prevailing. It seems
advisable, therefore, to attempt little more at this time than discuss
some possibilities relating to the existence of the material upon the bed
of a lagoon only habitable, at least during recent years, for limited
annual periods, ranging from nil to six or seven months with one
definitely known exception already mentioned.

The natives of Kangaroo Island, as already stated, chose for
their eamp-sites rising ground around swamps and lagoons and upon
the banks of creeks and watercourses. The occurrence, therefore, of
many implements along the ridges overlooking the lagoon bed, as
described in this paper, is conventional in its situation.

The writer, alter examining the topography of the surrounding
country as carefully as time would permit in the course of several
visits, offers two alternative possibilities, both conjectural, to account
for the existence of many stone implements upon the lagoon’s bed.

(1) It may have possessed some attraction, somewhat supposi-
tional at present without knowledge of climatic conditions prevailing at

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 31y

thal time, such as an arid period, if one or more did oceur durmg the
oecupation, either as an alternative or combined eanip-site i connec
tion with that whieh formerly existed upon the adjacent vidwe.
Another possible attraction may have been the possibility of procuring
water from wells dug in the hed of the lagoon after its disappearance
from the surlace. The permanent green appearance of reeds and
indergrowth in a small hollow over clay suggests the presenee of
water at shallow depth. The existence and utilization of vegetation
vrowing opon the lagoon bed, for domestic purposes, may he eon.
sidered and also the possible presenee there of certain vegetable foods
perhaps not available in the suvvounding higher country. Most of
these snegested deductions might need revision should climatie condi
tions prevailing during the occupational period become better known.

It seems rather surprising that unploments of the various types
would have been left upon the floor of the lagoon instead of being
temporarily removed il it weve liable at that time to periodic flooding.
If however, it weve dry for a long period or periods whilst oceupied,
due (0 aridity, the removal of the implements daving snch beeasions
would have become unnecessary and, similarly, io a dry period were
in progress at the tine of its relinquishment, perhaps the result af
some How unknown calamity related to their ultimate disappearance
Under these cireamstances the implements conld have been te sib
when abandoned and discovered tater,

(2) Mie seattered siftitions ol the iinplements, hammer-stunes,
waste material and fairly large flat slabs, possibly used for sone
domestie purpose, upon the lagoon bed, appeared to be toa orderly
to have heen caused by the action of flowing water in transporting
{lem from their original positions elsewhere, The extensive strip of
quartz stones upon the lagoon bed (as already described) 1s compact
and not widespread as are the tiplements, It scems reasonable to
consider that this str of stones, so conveniently sitnated, was (he
souree from which {he small iniplements or at least most of them,
were derived, This is strengthened by the existence amongst this bed
of some of (he larger xtewes which show evidence ol Lavine heen
shattered by hainmer-stone blows cul also by the presence in the same
place ol a few cores fram whieh flakes had been stroek for implement
making.

The writer, in order to ascertain whether the tiiplements might
have been washed down from elsewhere, examined the simall water.
course Wwhiel) drains some of the country to the qorth-east bat no
evidence wus discernible to mndivate that they veached the lagoou from
(hat cireetion nor was there any quartz supply seen in the area,

s

320 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 321

There does not appear to be any indication elsewhere of sufficient
water flow to wash down and deposit in a totally new position, stone
implements, particularly the larger ones, upon the lagoon bed unless
all traces of this have now disappeared.

The location and distribution pattern of the implements discovered
here, supported to some extent by local topographical features, seem
to favour a deduction, admittedly far from proven, that they have
not been redeposited upon the bed of the lagoon after removal from
their original position by water flow but have remained in situ since
the time of abandonment by their former owners.

It would be dangerous to ignore however the possibility that some
other explanation, perhaps rendered obscure by the passage of time
and not necessarily related to those now being considered, may have
had an important bearing upon the reason for the existence of these
relics—devised by primitive man—upon the bed of a fresh-water
lagoon.

322 RECORDS OF THF, 8.4, MUSEUM

COOPER—ARCHAFOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 323

324 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Figs. 16, 17, 18.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS 325

Pips, 1, 20, 21

326 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURED SPECIMENS

ig. 1. Made from a flat pieee of rock; badly weathered. There is a little evidence of
use as tt lammerstane upon the nether side as indicated by pit marks. This dual use is
charaesovistie of many large Kangarvo Island stone implements. The weathering las almost
obliterated the trimming,

Win, 2 A flat core implement with stepped trimming slong its working edge.

bl 1 PE B

Mig. & Derived from a durable fine-yrained quartzite pebble with the typical stepped
secondary (rimming of the island's pebble chopper industry although this specimen is not
characteristically symmetrieal in shape. There is distinet evidence on its under surface of
casual employment as a Teunmer-stone,

Fig. 4. Mado from an irregular block of country rock. Uf has a fairly straight working
edge with elearly defined secondary trimming. This simple teelmique is identien] with that
whieh has been found at Hallett Cove. Its weight, 8} 1b, is not unduly heavy for Kangaroo
Island implements whieh oveur to a maximom of at least T1h. Pide Cooper (1943) for
comparative weights,

Fig. 9. A flat milky vein quartz core of fairly good quality with stepped secondary
trimming around half of ifs basal margin.

Fie. 6& A small water-worn pebble hammer-stone with evidence at both ends of well
defmed wear from usage which has also eaused the removal of several flakes. A larger but
similar water-worn pebble hammer-ston’ was found in the same vicinity, ‘Chis specimen,
much battered, was doubtless used for lieavier duties.

Fig. 7. Prepared from the corner of a fine-grained pebble, It possesses a well used but
(istinet stepped trimmed working edge, Secondary employment as a hammer-stone is indicated
by well developed pit marks upon the nether side and at its apex.

Fig. 8. Maile from a small block with somewhat massive and thick but good trimming
along both murginal edges, This eould signify employment for heavy work. Tt possesses
a keeled base,

Fig. ® A thin flake with 4 well defined prominent bulb of pereussion and very light
aymmetrien! trimming along its edges. This has the appearance of same form of pressure
(taking,

Pig, 10, An irregular lamp but las nent even trimming snd a thin working edge.

Wigs 11, An implement with a long (einimed marginal edge, unusually keen and sharp,

Fig. 12. A long end-seraper, of nondeseript shape with rounded frimmod edge.

Wig, 18, A small well prepared care with w keeled: dase.

Pig, 14. A core implement with a flit base, larger than fig. 18 but otherwise similar to it,

Mig, 15. Tas the sppearance of a Make-making cove originally, but during its subsequent
Jife, seems to lave been converted, by menns of stepped trimtming into a core implement anid
when badly worn, finally employed as a hanmer-stone or pounder, made opparent by its
battered condition,

Vig, 1G. A flat triangular sluyped implement with a rather thick trimmed edge.

Bip. 17, Very similar in shape and design to fig, 10 but slightly smatter.

Fig. 18. A semi-diseoidal implement with a strongly baill trimmed edge of rounded form
and cousiderable thiekness, Two sections of this edge lave become convave, probably due to
consideruble wear caused by tnch ose.

Mig. 1, A small Hat semi-biface implement with sections of the alternating sevondary
trimmed margins placed upon its two respective sides. These two sections are so placed that
{lvur fotal is equivalent te a completely eireular working edge cby simply reversing the
innplenient.

Fig. 20. An almost rectangular specimen trimmed upon three edges.

Fig, 21. A small implement, roughly trinngular in shape with An irregular Ieeled base,
trimmed along the two margins which meet af its apex.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL IMPLEMENTS

ee]
ie]
~

ROCK MATERIAL EMPLOYED

Fig, 1, 2 and 4. Inferior country quartzites which sometimes weather badly.

Fig. 3, 6, 7 and 15, Fine-grained quartzite rounded beach pebbles,

Fig. 9, 16, 18 and 20. The same material as used for fig. 3, 6, T and 15. Probably
derived from several sources—eores, fragments or waste flakes struck off in the produetion
of the large pebble choppers.

Fig. 5, 8, 10, 11, 12, 18, 14, 17, 19 and 21, From vein quartz rocks yarying from
superior milky quartz, with a good conelioidal fracture downwards to inferior types, lumpy,
gritty or impure in texture,

The widely diverse qualities of quartz, as previously mentioned, control the direction and
desired shapes of the flakes which are straek off them. The inferiority of finished implements
derived from poor vein quartz, therefore, should not be considered as a rellection upon the
skill of the native operator,

Tt appears to We diffeult or perhaps undesirable to determine, without reservations, the
use or uses to which small archaeological implements, such us these, were applied, An
exumination of the various finished specimens themselves, however, can offer some evidence to
assist in suggesting possible teutative uses such as shape, design and perhaps most important
of all—the thinness or thieknoss of their various working edges after final trimming has been
applied; that is the amount of material available, large or small, to cope successfully with the
work involved,

The following figured specimens may have been designed for the attached purposes:—

Fig. 9, 10, 11 and 17.) For sawing ar cutting.

Fie. 8, 12, 18, 14, 16, 18, 19, 20 and 21. Por seraping and adzing.

B.S, , r ’ 1 , ’ jute #

Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7. For chopping and seraping.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Assistance rendered by the following is acknowledged with appreciation ;—

Mr. KB. Davies of Kangaroo [sland for permission to carry ont field work upon lis
property, including the lagoon referred to in this paper, for a period extending oyer 30 years;
Miss B, K. Wubbard, South Australian Musenm, for executing the drawings aud sketeh plan
and Dr D. W. P. Corbett, Curator of Fossils and Minerals at the same institution for
identifying certain of the rocks to which refereuce is made.

REVERENCES
Cooper, HL. M., 1943: Large stone implements from South Australia, Ree. S. Aust. Mus,
Adelaide, 7(4)+ 343-369.
1959: Largo archacological stone implements from Tlallett Cove, South Australia.
Trans. Roy. Soe, 8. Aust., Adelaide, 82: 55-60,
— 1960: The archaeology of Kangaroo Tsland, South Australia, Ree, S. Aust. Mus.,
Adelaide, 13(4): 481-508,
Uowehin, W., 1903: Further notes on the geology of South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soe. 8.
Aust., Adelaide, 27: 90,
Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: Traces of an extinet aboriginal population on
Kangaroo Island, Ree, 8, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4(3): 275-289.

NOTES ON SOME OPISTHOBRANCHIS MAINLY FROM SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT BURN

Summary

Of a collection of ten opisthobranch species (Mollusca: Gastropoda) from South
Australia, three are described as new: Haminoea maugeansis (Atyidae), Neodoris
subaustralis and Aphelodoris lawsae (Dorididae), and one is a new record for the State :
Chromodoris tasmaniensis Bergh, 1905 (Dorididae). A study of the genus Aphelodoris
Bergh, 1879, in south-eastern Australia indicates six distinct species, of which two are
named, berghi Odhner, 1924, and varia (Abraham, 1877), and four are described as new :
lawsae rossquicki, juliae and greeni. According to the literature, Aphelodoris in Australia
differs from other species of the genus in that the insemination duct between the female
gland mass and the spermatheca is divided into a true small uterine duct and a wide
terminally dilated large uterine duct. The spermatocyst is attached to the terminal dilation
of the large uterine duct.

NOTES ON SOME OPISTHOBRANCHS MAINLY FROM
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT BURN*

SUMMARY

Of a collection of ten opisthobranch species (Mollusca: Gastro-
poda) from South Australia, three are described as new: Haniunoea
maugeansis (Atyidae), Neodoris subaustralis and Aphelodoris lawsae
(Dorididae), and one is a new record for the State: Chramodoris
lasmaniensis Bergh, 1905 (Dorididac), A study of the genus Aphelo-
doris Bergh, 1879, in south-eastern Australia indicates six distinct
species, of which two are named, bergh? Odhner, 1924, and varia
(Abraham, 1877), and four are deseribed as new; /awsac, rossquichi,
quliae and greent, According to the literature, Aphelodoris in’ Aus-
tralia differs from other speeies of the genus in that the insemination
duct between the female gland mass and the spermatheea is divided
into a true small uterine duct and «a wide terminally dilated large
uterine duet, The spermatoeyst is attached to the terminal dilation of
the large uterine duet.

INTRODUCTION

Seven species of opisthobranch mollises from the collections of
the South Australian Museum were forwarded to the writer for
identification hy Dr. Helene Laws. Deseriptions of these and three
other species, all from South Australia, are presented in this researeh,
Five species of the genus Aphelodoris Bergh, 1879, from New South
Wales, Victoria and Tasmania are inclnded,

This research was completed while the writer was in receipt of a
grant from the Science and Industry Endowment Fund, C.S.LR.0.
The survey of the genus Aphelodoris is part of a comprehensive study
of the Opisthobranchia of Australia being undertaken by the writer,
Due acknowledgement is made also to Dr. Tlelene Laws, South
Australian Museum, Adelaide (S.A.M.), Mrs. J. Hope Black (née
Maepherson), National Museum of Vietoria, Melbourne (N.M.Y,),
Dr. D. F. MeMichael, Australian Museum, Sydney (A.M.), Mr. R. H.
Green, Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston (().V.M.), and Mrs. Julia
Greenhill, Tasmania Musewn, Hobart (T.M.), for the loan of material
considered in this research,

* Honorary Associate in Conchology, National Museum of Vicloria, Melbourne.
. = '

3340 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SYSTEMATIC SECTION
Order CEPHALASPIDEA
Suborder SCAPHANDRACEA
Family ATYIDAE

Haminoea maugeansis sp. nov.
Fig. 1-2
Haminoea tenera. Pritchard and Gatliff, 1903: 217, non H. lenera
(A. Adams, 1850; 583; Pilsbry, 1993: 871; Angas, 1871: 98).
Haminoca tenera. May, 1921; 104; 1928; pl 46, fig. 17.
Haminoea tenera, Cotton and Godfrey, 1935: 86.
Haminoea tenera, Maepherson and Gabriel, 1962; 248, fig. 283.

Material examined. SOUTTE AUSTRALIA: Port MacDonnell,
1962, 3 specimens, G. Causer, N.M.V. reg. no. 26,18 (Holotype),
125,658 (dissected Paratype), S.A.M. reg. no. D.14868 (whole Para-
type), VICTORIA; Rhyl, Flinders, * Shoreham, Pt. Lonsdale,
Torquay, numerous examples in the writers’ collection,

Habitat. Crawling and browsing on Zostera and Positonia, and
on short brown algae on rock platforms,

Description, The shells of the type series are each 7 mm long and
Simm broad. The shell (fig. 1) is delieate, broadly ovate but somewhat
contracted above and rounded below, Apex very slightly impressed:
outer lip rising above the apex, slightly rounded in the middle and
narrowly rounded at the bottom of the aperture, Columella short, its
edge reflected and continued over the inner lip as a thin glaze. The
shell is entirely smooth except for minute growth lines parallel to the
border of the shell. Dry shells ave translucent yellow green,

The crawling animal is about twice the length of its shell. Live
colouration is pale dull yellow hody, everywhere suffused with dark
erey pigment. Racemose orange pigment cells are prominent on the
head and inside the shell, Preserved specimens soon lose all sign of
the orange cells.

The head shield is broad anteriorly and slightly rounded, narrower
and bilobate behind. Small black eyes show at the anterior third of
the head. The parapodia are small and nearly meet in the middle
line, Sole elongate oval, minutely notched in the front edge, with a
staall pyriform pedal gland in the rear middle line, sole length about
two-thirds total animal length, Bebind, in the sole plane, projects the
taiLlike epicochlear expansion, The shell mantle projects Irom the
small end of the aperture and lies at the left posterior of the shell.
In the wroove on each side of the head is a narrow fleshy ridge; these
are the organs of Tlancock,.

BURN—S,A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 331

The brownish jaws consist of fine rods set end on, the projecting
ends rounded, Radula (fig. 2) colourless, formnla 24 x 6.1.6, he
rhaehidian has a broad base, a vather small eusp and a pair of
insignificant lateral denticles. Lateral teeth 1-5 are Meh with large
cusps, the marginal is shorter and blunt. The three brownish gastral
plates each have 14 transverse ribs.

The anatomy was not investiguted further.

Discussion, Angas (1871: 98) first introduced the name //, lenera
(A, Adams, 1850: 583) into the Australian fauna when he recorded a
species from the central New South Wales coastline, Whether or not
the New South Wales species is correctly named does uot concern us
herve, It is however specifically distinet: from the species deseribed
above, The name AH, tevera has Ween taken ap in South sustratia,
Tasmama and Vietoria for a shell of rounder shape that is smoother,
more fragile and without periostracum, Consequently, the southern
species is described as new,

TT, mangeansis is recorded muthentically from Tasmania (May,
1923), Vietoria and South Australia, Its range into south Western
Australia (Cotton, 1959; 404) needs to be verified.

Provisionally at least, the new species can be assigned fo the
section Huloa Pilsbry (1920: 367) whieh is charaeterized by ‘columella
deeply coneave, the refleeted columellar margin creseentic, rather
thick, its edge separated from the whorl by a furrow’, Under more
recent classifieations, it belongs to the genus Lamprohamimoed Kuroda
and Hahe (1982: abe, 1952: 150) with a smooth polished shell, green
animal with many red markings, and the first lateral tooth with one
cusp. Zileh (1959: 48) ineludes Lamprohaminoea and latoa as sub-
venera iy bis treatment of Maminoea, The new species is retained
in /laminvea until the species of this group are better known
anatomically.

The specitie name maugeausis veters to the distribution of the
species throughout the Mangean cooltemperate province (Tasmania)
and the adjacent Vietorian and South Australian mainland eoasts
(Bennett and Pope, 1953).

Suborder PHILINACEA
Family PHILINIDAE
Philine angasi (Crosse and Fischer)
Bullaca angasi Crosse and Fischer, 1865; 38, pl. 2, fig. 8.
Philine anqasi. Cotton and Godfrey, 1988: 88, pl. 1, fig. 16.

Material ecomined. SOUTH AUSTRALIA; Peak Bay, Spencer
Gulf, 16 February 1956, 1 specimen, Mrs. J. Hope Black, NALV. reg.
no. W17,475.

332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Habitat. Burrowing just below the surface of sandy mud,

Distribution, Southern Australia, from south Western Australia
to southern Quceusland, littoral to 25 fathoms.

Discussion. The type locality of P. angasi is Spencer Gulf, South
Australia. The present specimen, though topotypical, is too contracted
and distorted to be examined anatomically. The radula has been
figured from Victorian specimens (Maplestone, 1872; pl. 27, fig. 23)
and the gastral plates from New South Wales specimens (Hedley,
L12: ph 44, fig. 42-48).

Order NUDIBRANCHIA
Suborder DorIpACEA
Division EUDORIDACEA

Subdivision CRYPTOBRANCHIA

Family DoripIDAE

Subfamily CHROMODORIDINAE

Hypselodoris saintyincentius Burn
Hypselodoris saintvincentias Burn, 1962B: 151, pl. 1, fig. 1-2.

Material examined. SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Reel, Christies
Beach, near Adelaide, Gulf St, Vincent, 2 May 1963, 1 specimen, Dr.
Helene Laws, 8S.A.M. reg. no. D.A4869,

Habitat. Under stones at low tide.

Discussion, This is the first record of the species from the eastern
side of Gulf St. Vincent. The type locality is Coobowie on the western
shore.

Chromodoris tasmaniensis Bergh
Fis. 3
Chromodoris tasmantensis Bergh, 1905: 69, pl. 5, fig, 12-15.
Glossodoris tasmaniensis. Burn, 1957: 17, pl. 2, fig. 10.
Glossodoris tasmaniensis. Burn, 1961: 56, pl. 15, fig. 4.

Material examimed. SOUTIL AUSTRALIA: Port MaeDormnell,
January 1965, 2 specimens, Mrs, and the late Mr. Ross Quick, S.A.M.
ree, no, D,14870,

Habitat, Beneath stones at low tide.

Description. The two living slugs were ‘white with orange spots
around the margins’’, Preserved they are purple-erey and 18 mm
lone,

The labial armature of the more contracted slug is brownish and
eomposed of minute straight simple elements set end on in a wide
band, The colourless radula has the formula 45 x 340.34. The first
lateral tooth is broad and set a little way apart from the others in
the half row as in Vietorian slugs (Burn, 1961: 56); if has two

BURN—S,A,. OPISTHOBRANCHS 333

deutieles on the inner side and three on the outer side. The other
laterals are hamate with three to five denticles, The marginals are
smaller,

In the genital organs (fig, 8), the ampulla (am) is rather long,
{he inner prostatic male duet (pr) is very long, winding and thiu
willed, the vas deferens is short, slender and muscular, and the penis
(pe), in both specimens, sabot-shaped with a wide seminal aperture.
The spermatheca (sp) is ovoid, the spermatoeyst (se) slender
pyriform,

Discussion, The two slugs are identical with specimens trom
Vietoria (Burn, 1957, 1961) in colony and radular formula and shape.
They differ from the Ulverstone, Tasmania type specimen in the
smaller number of branchiae, the shape of the labial clements and the
radular formula. However, until Tasmanian slugs can be reliably
ilontified with Bergh’s description, it is better to canserve the name
C. fasmaniensis Cor the present species and not rename it. The out-
standing characteristic of the South Australian and Victorian slugs
is that the first lateral tooth of the radula is set apart from the other
teeth in the half row.

CU. tasmaniensis is anew record for South Australia, It apparently
has a wide range along the western Victorian coastline.

Subfamily MIAMIRINAE
Ceratosoma brevicaudatum Abraham
Ceratosoma brericaudatum Alraham, 1876: 142, pl. 4, fig. 6.
Ceratosoma brevieaudatum, PBasedow and Hedley, 1905; 154, pl. 1.
Ceratosoma brevicaudatum. Cotton and Godfrey, 1933: 105, pl. 3,
fio. 4.
Coratosoma brevicandalum, Purn, 1962B: 159,

Material examined, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Whyalla, October
1964, 1 specimen, 8,A.M. reg. no. D.14871; Pelican Lagoon, Kangaroo
Island, 28 April 1953, 1 specimen, S.A.M. reg, no. D.14874: unlocalized,
2 specimens, SAM. reg. no. 1.14877; Sir Joseph Banks Group,
Spencer Gulf, Us June 1965, 1 specimen, R. Bentley, S.A.M, reg,
no, D.A4SS1,

Habitat, Under stones and erawling in rock pools at low tide,
dredged to 20 fathoms (Basedow and Hedley, 1905),

Discussion, Two synonyms of this species are C. ablongum
Abraham (1876; 148, pl. 7, tig. 7) and C, adelaidae Basedow and
Hedley (1905; 156, pl. 10, fig. 8-4), The former is based npon a spirit
distorted specimen (O'Donoghue, 1924; 558) and the latter deseribes
very small juvenile specimens (Burn, 1957: 18),

334 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Subfamily DiscoDORIDINAE

Neodoris subaustralis sp. nov.
Fig. 4-6

Material examined, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Sir Joseph Banks
Group, Spencer Gulf, 13° June 1965, 1 specimen (Holotype), R,
Bentley, S.A.M. reg. no. D.14876,

Habital. Dredged (? in shallow water).

Description, The strongly eurled holotype is 14 mm long and
12 mm broad; the length along the curve of the notum is about 30 mm.
The preserved colour (after five months in 70% aleohol) is entirely
eveam with the exeeption of the retracted branehiae which are
grey-brown,

The body (fig. 4) is convex in section, rounded in front and
behind. The notum is a little wider than the foot and thick edged.
The rhinophores and branchiae have no sheaths or pustular ornament
around their cavities. The entire notum is covered by low pustules
disposed in four longitudinal series of larger pustules, each surrounded
by five or six smaller pustules, in the median area, and a wide band
of very small and erowded pustules encircles the notum, Foot rounded
and bilaminate anteriorly, obtusely pointed behind and extending a
little way posteriorly beyond the notum. Mouth not prominent, bral
tentacles an oblique grooved fold on each side,

The thickened labial cuticle is entirely smooth. The pale yellow
‘adula (fig. 5) has the formula 38 x 40-41.0.40-+1. The inner teeth are
small aud erect with straight cusps. The teeth gradually increase in
height and cusp length to about teeth 35-87. The outer 4-5 teeth are
much smaller with reduced cusps. The large ear-like expansion on the
immer side of the larger teeth is very distinctive.

The anterior genital mass (fig. 6) has a small winding ampula
(am) lying behind the large knotty prostate gland (pr). The vas
deferens (vd) is short and straight, the unarmed penial sheath (ps)

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES

Fig, 1-2. Naminoea maugeansis sp. nov.
1. Ventral aspect of shell of dissected Paratype,
2, Tlalf row of radula.

Fig. 3.) Chromodoris tasmaniensis Bergh.
3, Anterior genital mass.

Fig. 4-6. Neodoris subaustratis sp, nov.
4. Dorsal) view of finttened THoloty pe,
5. Walt row of radia,
f Anterior genital inass.

Fig, 7-9. Aphelodoris lairsae sp, nov.
T. Dorsal view of slug trom Sir Joseph Banks Group.
8. Half row of radula,

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 335

feces

3
gn0t
a

%

"So ose 3
Ah
& fa G0
0O0o
. °%a
0

© 2%
oO

2
4
3
a
;
;
;
i
“|
;
f
f

336 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM

widens towards the atrium, The vagina (va) is wide at tts aperture
beside the penial sheath, slender thereafter, The cireular spermathecs
(sp) is white and attached directly to the vagina, The red-pink
sperhiatocyst (se) is smaller and connected by a short duet to the
wterine duet (ut). The mucus gland is briek-red and encased in the
yellowish albumen gland.

Diseussion. N, subaustralis elosely resembles N. chrysoderme.
(Angas, 1864; 46; Burn, 1957; 19, Praegliseda) trom New South Wales
and Vietoria. But N. chrysoderma has fewer more widely spaced
pustnles apon the notum, 78 slender hamate teeth in the radular half
vow, & thinner labial cuticle and an elongate winding prostate eland.

From the literature, VN. subaustralis ts as notally pustulose as
N. tricolor Baba (1988; 1949; 150), NV, erinacea Marens (19592 58) and
N. carvi Mavens (1959; 39), All thivee speeies have far more teeth
(respectively 60-80, 75, 60-62) per radular hall row than the new
species with 40-41 teeth.

Subfannly HALGERDINAE
Genus Aphelodoris Bergh (1879: 107)

Six species’ of Aphelodoris oveur in south-eastern Australia
inehiding one species in South Australia. Four of the species are
deseribed below as new and the other two species are redeseribed from
lresh material,

Species of clphelodoris ave characterized hy their ‘glosso-
dovidiform" or high, slender, elongate body shape with usually narrow
notal brim, smooth notum, high econieal rhinophoral and branchial
sheuths, laterally grooved oral tentacles, five-branched brancliae,
smooth labium, hook-shaped radular teeth without denticles, unarmed
penial sheath, large prostatic part in male duet, and spermatheea and
spermiatoeyst arranged ‘serially’? (Odhner, 1954: 270) or semiserially,

Marens (1965: 33) (ound the innermost lateral tooth of the rndwar
half row to be simply hooked in the type species, 4. anfillensis Bergh
(1879: 108), Bergh, however, reported it to hear an inner denticle
(1879: 111; 1880: pl. 16, fig, 18a), As simple teeth have been deserihed
in all other species attributed to the genus, it seems likely that Bergh’s
material had a malformed radula,

A striking feature observed in each of the six species studied for
{his resenreh coucerns the formation of the uterine or iusemination
duet of the anterior wenital mass, The uterine duct comprises always
two parts; an outer large diameter part with a dilated inner end to
whieh the spermatocyst is attached, and an inner very slender part

+A seventh species, bright orange with brown streaks on the moturn, wis (aken at.
Suin Remo, Vietoriy, 27 February 1966, A description will be published at a later date.

BURN—S.A. OPISTHOBRANCHS 337

connecting the dilation of the outer, here termed large, uterine duct
lo the ampula of the hermaphrodite duet, It is supposed that the large
uierine duct and in particular its dilated end serve as a lertilizing
chamber, Consequently, it is supposed that the inner, here termed
small, ntovine duet is the true uterine duet.

This division into large and small uterine duet is not indicated for
fhe type species, 4. antillensis Bergh parte 118), nor in A. braownea

Bergh (1907; 60, pl. 12, fig. 1) und A, luetvosa (Cheeseman, 1882;
Odliner, 1984; 270, fiz, 87). Bereh Here pl. 5, fig, 82) shows precisely
the vterine division in af, berght Odhner (1924: 58; = cf. Inetuasa

Bergh, 1905) but from his text it is evident that the condition was
misunderstood (1905: 77).

Odhuer’s contention that .phelodaris speeies have a serial con-
nection between the Vagina, spermatheca, spermatocyst aud uterine
duet (1984: 270; 1926; 54, Halgerdinae) eannot now be justified.
Amnon the present six species, Only A. Jawsdae and sl. rossquichi have

| frne serial connection. The three species, il. juliae, A. greeni and
t herghi have the vagina and uterine duet contignons, thereby con-
forming to the semiserial eonnection, A, varia has neither the vagina
and uterine duct diametrically opposite (serial) nor contiguous (semi-
serial), Tnstead, they are mid-way between these two forms. of
connection, and indicate the development of the two other forms,

The six species diseussed here are loosely divided into two groups
aecordoig to the liye colour pattern, The first group has lines of laek
or brown around the notum and forming a reticulate pattern in the
median area: cl, dawsae, A. rossyuicki, A. varia, he seeond eroup
has 20 lines on the notum but has a variable pattern of brown and
maroon hlotehes im the median area; A, julia, A. yreeni, A, berqghi.
The shape of a mid half row tooth of the radula is probably the
sinplest characteristic to separate the species,

A New Zealand species, 4, affinis Bliot (1907: 348) has heen
reported from Western Australia by O'Donoghue (1924: 556), Absenee
of actual material denies its verification or otherwise, hut it is highly
unlikely that the species is correetly identified.

Aphelodoris lawsae sp. nov.
Vig. 7-9, 30
Archidoris varia Basedow and Hedley, 1905: 150, pl..5; non Doris aaria
Abraham, 1877: 209,
Archidovis varia. Cotton aud Godfrey, 1933: 100, pl. 2, fig. 6-7, pl. 4,
fie. 11-18.

338 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSFUM

Material examined, SOUTIL AUSTRALTA: Reel, Christies
Beach, near Adelaide, Gulf St. Vincent, 2 May 1965, 1 speeimen (fHolo-
type), Dr. Helene Laws, SAM. vee. no, D.48725 2 tuloealized spee-
mouts (Paratypes), SAM, veg. no, D878; Sir Joseph Bautks Group,
Spencer Gulf, 15 June 1965, 1) speeciinen, R, Bentley, SAA reg.
no, D.14880,

TMabital. Under stones at low tide, dredged (? in shallow water),
{0 20 fathoms (Basedow and Hedley, 1905; 150).

Deseription, Living slugs grow to 44 mm in length, the preserved
type series is 2429 mm long and 12 mm wide. Living colouration ts
generally as depicted by Basedow and Hedley (fig. 30), that is pale
hyewn with darker brown and fawn mottles around the notal margin,
over which lies a fine tracery or retienlate pattern of brown lines, and
tho rhinophores and brauchiac parple-brown, Preserved sligs vary
from pale yellow with grey patches to reddish brown with brown
patches, The specimen from Sir Joseph Banks Group (fig. 7) is
chocolate brown with three large pale areas in the median line,
minuerous varving sized rays of brown around the margin, anid the
whole overlaid with a fine dark brown reticulation,

The body is rather clongate and high, the notal margin is distinet
aid narrow, the rhinophores have high collar-like sheaths and the
branchial eavity has a similar sheath. The rhinophoves lave 24
lamellae, the branchiae number five tripinnate plimes.

The strap-like salivary glands are short and iwisted. "The labial
eiticle is smooth, The radular formula is 25 x 70.0.70. The inner and
outer teeth (fie, 8) are high with short cusps, those in the middle of
jhe half row are longer with long eurved ensps,

The anterior genital mass (fig. 9) is us usual in the genus,
Ampulla (am) long and sinuons, Prostrate gland (pr) very large, Hat
and thin walled, vas deferens (vd) muscular, at first slender ance
coiled, then wider and straight, penial sheath (ps) long, eylindrical,
musewlar, somewhat wider near atrium, Vagina (va) short, large
iWerine duet (Int) long and coiled, a litth® wider at its end, small
uterine duet (sut) slender and straight, Spernmintheea (sp) large,
ovoid, spermatocyst (se) sinaller, pyriform, arranged serially. Conical
genital atrium stroguly musenlar.

Diseussion. A. lawsae is closely velated ta the new species, 4.
rossqnicht from Vietoria, Both have a reticulate pattern on the notum,
in the former dark brown on chocolate brown, in the latter blaek on
rec-brown, 4l. Jawsae has more, less crect and less élegant teeth in
the radula, and a much shorter vagina and smaller prostate gland im
(he genital organs to distinguish if from A, ressquichi,

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 339

This species has in the past been identified with wf, varia
(Abraham, 1877: 209) Irom New South Wales. Ilowever, the latter
species is larger, paler with a large marbled pattern on the notum, and
has slender more erowded radular teeth,

The specios is dedicated to Dr, Helene Laws, Curator of Marine
Invertebrates, South Australian Museuin, who so kindly arranged the
loan of material for this paper, and who also colleeted the holotype,

Aphelodoris rossquicki sp. nov.
Fig. 10-11, 31
Aphelodoris varia Odlmer, 1984: 270, non Abraham, 1877: 209,

Material examined, VICTORIA: Ocean Beach, Flinders, 11 April
1960, 1 specimen (Holotype), T. Crawford, N.M.V, reg, no. 25,659;
May 1965, 6 specimens (Parutypes), R. Burn et al, NADY. ree, HO,
26,130; Cape Patterson, 29 November 1958, 1 specimen, Mrs. Hope
Black, N.MAW. reg, rio, 80112.

Habitat, Under stones near low tide level,

Deseriplion, The largest living slig was 35 mm long ancl 14 nm.
wide; the largest preserved one is 25 mm long and 14 mm wide, The
colour pattern varies greatly; the Holotype (fig. 31) hud a ereant hody,
the notin was reddish-brown over a darker, nearly blaek, fine retieula
tion and with three irregular eream patelies in the median line, and
around the margin alternately red-brown and cream, The Paratypes
differed regarding the amount of red-brown on the nolum: some lad a
fow small patehes in the median area and one was entirely eream, in
every case the Ilack reticulation being present though even this is
comfined to the marginal area in some specimens, The foot is outlined
in orange, the rhinophores and branchiae are purplish-hrown.
Preserved slugs retain much of their living colour.

The hody is rather lonw, soft and smooth, the notum is fnirly wide
and tnarginally undulate. The rhinophores have 18 fine lamellae and
high evlindvical sheaths, The five branchiae are tripiimate, the cavily
has a low sheath. ‘The oral loutacles are as usual grooved on the
outer side,

The salivary glands have broad hook-shaped ends, The labium is
amooth. The radular formula is 28 x 62,0.62. The inner teeth (fig, 10)
have long cusps, those of the middle half row are hieh with » rather
short easp, the marginals shorter with slender cusps.

The anterior genital mass (fig, 11) has a wide twisted ampuila
(at) the inner end of whieh is hidden behind the prostate eland,
Prostate gland (pr) long and winding, vas deferens (vd) slender and
musenlar, penial sheath (ps) at first bent double, wider at (he atrinm.

340 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12, 18, 14

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 34]

Vas deferens and penial sheath of equal length. Vagina (va) slender
and very long, entering top of large ovoid spermatheca (sp). Large
uterine duet (Int) winding, dilated at inner end, small uterine duet,
(sul) very slender. Spermatocyst (se) small, elongate pyriform; with
spe rmathee ‘al, arranged serially.

Discussion, Though similar in external appearance io A. laiwsue,
this new species differs in its prominent red-brown pigmentation over
a black reticulation. Special anatomical characteristics are the elegant
shape of the larger radular teeth, the exceptional length of the vagina,
and the bent over first part of the penial sheath.

Odhbner's A. varia from Vietoria (1984: 270) is certainly this
species. Serially connected seminal receptacles occur here and are
considered diagnostic for this identification,

This species is dedicated to the memory of my Ite friend, Ross
Quick, amatenr conchvlogist and sehoolmaster, and member of the
party that collected the Paratypes.

Aphelodoris juliae sp. nov.
Fig. 12-14

Material examined, TASMANIA: Off Green Island, Simpsons
Bay, Huon Channel, 21-25 July 1948, 2 specimens (Holotype and cis-
seeted Paratype), D. F. Turner, TM. 1 reg, no. E3587,

Habitat, Dredged in 5-7 tathoms.

Description, The larger slug is the dissected Paratype; it is
0 tm long, 28 mm wide and 15 mm high, and the sole is 1213 mm
wide for most of its length. The Holotype is strongly curled.
Preserved colouration (fig. 12) consists of a creamy-orange body with
large irregular sketehy patches and streaks of light maroou seattered
over the notum, Around the notal margin the maroon forms alter-
nating patches with the body colour. The foot and edges are orange,
the rhinophores and branchiae black.

The hody is large and rounded at each end, the notal margin is
wide, very thin and wmdulate, The notwn is entirely smooth. Rhino-
phoral and branchial cavities with high eylindrical sheaths.

EXPLANATION OF PIGURES (cantinued)

9. Anterior genital mass,
Fig. 1-1), dphelodoris rossquteki sp, nov.

10, Walf row of radula,

11, Anterior genital mass,

Fig. 12-14. atphelodoris jutiae ep, nov

12. Dorsal view of flattened Holotype,

13. Half row of radula,

Lb. Anterior gonital mass.

342 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A pair of glands with long slender duets and ramose ends are
attached to the oral tube. The salivary glands are short and spatu-
late. The labium is very weak and quite smooth, The radular
formula is 24 x 600.60; inner 12-15 teeth (fig. 13) small, slender and
short ensped, those of middle large and strongly hooked, marginals
short with long eusps.

Anterior genital mass (fig. 14): ampula (am) Jong, winding, parthy
hidden behind prostate gland; prostate gland (pr) very long, at first
wider: vas deferens (yd) short, once coiled, musewar; penial sheath
(ps) rather short and slender, at atrium with vestibular gland (vg).
Vagina (va) short, spermatheca (sp) clongate oval, spermatocyst (se)
small, pyriform, arrauged semiserially. Large ulerine duet (Int)
short, its end ereatly dilated, small uterine duct (sut) very slender,
winding.

Diseussion. A. juliae is a distinetive species easily recognized by
its large size and the sketehy maroon on the ereamy-orange body
eolour. In the shape of the radular teeth, it is closest to af, /awsae,
hut the latter las an even shorter base and longer ensp. In the length
of the prostate gland and penial sheath, it approaches near to 4.
rossquicki, but the greater vas deferens length in the latter, plus a
far longer vagina. indicate specific differences,

This species is dedieated to Mrs, Julia Greenhill, formerly Keeper
in Tuvertebrate Zoology, Tasmanian Museum, Hobart, who so kindly
forwarded a collection of opisthobranchs for stndy and later report,

Aphelodoris greeni sp. nov,
Mie, 15-17

Material examined, VASMANLA: Green’s Beaehl, Kelso, Tamar
River Estuary; January 1964, 1 specimen (Paratype), Q.V.M. reg. mo.
1965.9.1; 29 September 1964, 1 specimen (Paratype), Q.V.M. reg. no,
1965.9.2; 11 September 1965, 1 specimen (Holotype), QVM, reg. no.
1965.9.3. 30 October 1965, 10+ specimens, all collected by Mr. Robert
Green and family.

Habitat, Under stones and crawling on weed in pools at low tide.

Deseriplion. The largest preserved slug is 32 min long, the TTolo
type (fig, 14) is 27 mm long and 10 mm wide. The body colour is
white or eream, the foot ontlined with bright orange, The notal
patlern eousists of varying sized spots, blotches and patches of dark
maroon, generally collected into three areas along the middle line.
Pale hrown epidermal pigment surrounds the dark maroon. The notal
mareiy is lined alternately with dark maroon aud orange, Some
specimens have the maroon areas ronning into one another and oxtend-
ing nearly to the margin; others have orange pigment in place of the

BURN—S.A. OPISTHOBRANCHS 343

pale brown, The rhinophores are blue-brown, the branchiae maroon.
The maroon colour patterning persists in preservative but the orange
gradually disappears.

The body is rather long, solft and smooth. The notal margin is
fairly wide and wundulate. The rhinophores and branchiae have
prominent sheaths,

The salivary glands are long, strap-like and lolded several times;
ina fresh specimen they ave bright pink in colour, The labinm is
smooth, The radular formula is 23 x 47-51.0.47-51, The inner 13
tooth have small cusps with a lateral curve, the others (fig, 16) are
much larger, ereet and the eusp is net greatly hooked,

Anterior genital mass (fig, 17) very small and compact. Fernale
duets not unlike those of 4, juliae, It here spermatheca (sp) and
spermatocyst (se) smaller, large uterine duct (lut) longer, its dilated
end much bigger, Male duets have slenderer prostate gland (pr),
much shorter penial sheath (ps) and larger vestibnlar gland (vg),

Discussion. A. greeni is closely related to uf. juliae from southern
Tasmania, It is distinguished externally by smaller size, narrower
nolal brim and intensity of colour patterning, and internally by the
smaller radular formula, the erect shape of the larger teeth and details
of the genital organs, The colour patterning of A, rossquichi is
somewhat similar, buf this new species lacks the black reticulation that
is always present in the Victorian species.

This species is dedicated to my Triend and able collector of
Tasmanian opisthobranchs, Mr. Robert Green, Zoologist, Queen
Vietoria Museum, Lanneeston,

Aphelodoris berghi Odhner
Fie. 18-20, 32
Apheladoris berght Odliner, 1924: 58; nom. nov. pro.
lphelodoris luctnvosa Bergh, 1905: 75, pl. 5, fig. 26-32, pl. 6, fie. 1-2, nen
Doris luctuosa Cheeseman, 1882.
Aphelodovis berghi. Burn, 19624: 102, fie. 6-7.

Materiat ceanined, VICTORTA: Off Portsea pier, Port Phillip
Bay, 15 April 1962, 1 speeimen, Peter Goadby, and colour slides,
J, Hope Black, NAMLV. ree. no, P22,358; Point Danger, Torquay, 380
Mareh 1959, 1 speeimen, R. Burn, N.MLV, vee, no. 25,026: 10 December
165, 4 specimens, Ro Burn, N.MLV. ree. no. F26,132; reef south of
Sain Remo, 27 February 1966, 1 specimen, R. Burn, N.M.V. reg.
no, P3613.

Tabitat. Crawling on weed and stones at and below low tide level
to 4 fathoms (Portsea),

b]

344 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

——

Figs. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 345

Description. The animal, colour and radula of! this species have
previously been deseribed from Victorian slugs (Burn, 19628A), A
bew figure of the animal is reprodueed here (ig. 82). The labium is
smooth, not armed as formerly stated (loc. ctt.: 103), The radular
formula of the Portsea slug is =) % . 50.0.50; the innermost teeth have
short blade-like cusps, the others (fig, 18) se¢ree precisely with the
Tastianian figures (Bergh, 1905: pl. 5, fig. 27-28, pl. 6, fig. 1).

Anterior genital mass (fig, 19-20) very compact, Ampulla (am)
two loops, little differentiated trom hermaphrodite duet. Prostate
gland (pr) very large, yellowish, folded in two; its cells lie in two
series that meet in iniddle line in regular patter, Vas deferens (vd)
long, slender, Penial sheath (ps) wider and strongly coiled, outer walls
hiusewlar, smooth, amer walls raised into distinctive oval pads.
Vestibular eland (yg) forms large male atrium,

Vagina (va) bursa-lke at atrinm, then narrower to oval sperma-
theea (sp). Large uterine duct (lut) shorter than yagina, inner end
dilated, spherical; small uterine duet (snt) very slender, rising from
rear Of dilation, Spermatoeyst (sc) elongate, ils duct long and slender;
in the Portsea specimen, spermatocyst contained three whitish masses
which upon removal easily broke apart. Common genital aperture
conical,

Discussion, Despite the fact that the original Tasmanian speei-
men was black on the bael and yellowish underneath (Bergh, 1905:
75), the present material is identified with uf. berghi Odhner
(1924: 53). Radnlar fornila and shape of the teeth agree closely as
do certain features of the anterior genital mass, such as the raised
pads of the ponial sheath, the spherical dilation of the large uterine
duet and the wide spacing of {le points of attachment of the small
trterine duet and the duet of the spermatocyst,

A, berghi is by its colouration alone an easily distinenished species.
lt is also the smallest species of the genus recorded from the Aus-
tralian coastline, growing to about 80 mim in leneth when erawling.

Tt would appear that the black colour of the type specimen is of
little consequence, An entirely black specimen, both externally and

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES (continued).
Pig, 1-17. Aphelodavis arent ap, aay
15. Dorsal view of MWolotype,
Iti, Tooth front raduler luile row,
L7. Pomile and pant of male duets, anterior venital mass
Bip. 18-20, Aphelodarty bverghi Odbnor.
1S, Tooth from radulir half row,
10. Anterior genital muss,
20, Detail of fomale oats,
Big, 21-22. stpheladaris varia (Abraham),
SL. Thi? cow of wndula.

346 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 347

internally, oceurs among the specimens of A. varia (Abraham, 1877)
examined for this research, Morphologically, the specimen 1s identical
with others of normal cream and yellow colouration from the same
veneral area of coastline,

Aphelodoris varia (Abraham)
Pie. 21-22, 85-5
Dovis variabilis Angas, 1864; 44, pl. 4, fig. 1; non Kelaart, 1859.
Davis varia Abraham, 1877: 209.
Doris practenera Abraham, T8772 258, pl. 30, fig. 10-12.
Aslevovolus varius. Ivedale and MeMiehael, 1962; 95.

Material eramined. NEW SOUTIL WALES: Sydney Harbour,
1 specimen, J.P. Till, A. M. reg. no, C1488 (black in colour) ; Pambula,
1957, 1 specimen, Mrs. T. W. Hartley, NAMLV. reg. uo, 26,151; Bare
Island, Botany Bay, 24 February 1961, 1 specimen and colour slide,
\. Healy, AM. ree, no, C.63086; Woody ead, Clarence River Heads,
1 May 1965, 1 specimen, Mrs. A. A. Cameron, A.M. reg. no. C.63087 ;
7 February 1966, 1 specimen, A. A. Cameron, A.M. veg. no, C.63088,

Habilat. Under stones and erawling on weed at low tide, to 2
fathoms on alwae eovered rocks (Bare Island).

Description, Crawling slugs measure at most 50 mm in length and
18mm in breadth; a preserved slug of these live dimensions measures
34 mm lone and 25 mm wide. Living slugs (fig. 83-54) have the notium
yellowish white with alternates of white and brown around the margins.
immediately inside the margins lie as many us six somewhat irregular,
discontinuous lines of light or dark brown. The median area is
variously marbled with brown lines and small patches, rather sketehily
in some specimens (fiz. 38), prominently in others (fig. 34). The
underside of the body is white, sometimes with small brown dots on the
notal overhang. The rhinophores and branchiae are brownish-black.

The animals is rounded in front and behind. TRhinophoral and
branchial cavities have high, cylindrical sheaths, The rhinophores
linve ahout 15 oblique lamellae. The branchiace consist of a single

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES (online).
22. Anterior perital mass.
Vig, 23-25. Doviopsilla carncole (AinwaAs),
23. Anterior alimentary tract.
24, Bueenl miass, flattened, from ahove,
25, Anterior genital miss,
Pig. 21-20, Doriopsiiln aurea (Quoy and Guinnrd),
2H. Anterior alimentary triet,
OT. Bueeal mass, from the right, retraetur ivuseles not shown,
8S. Bucen] mass, flattened, from above,
29. Anterior genital miaris

348 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pig. 50-34.

1. Aphelodoris lawsas sp. nov, trom Basedow aml Tledlew, 1908.
Aphilodoris rossquieki sp. noy,, Holotype, photo. T, Crawford,
. Aphelodoris berqhi Odhuer, Portsea Pier, photo. J. A. Black,
3. Aphelodovis varia (Abraham), Bare Island, photo. T. Healy.
J4. dApheladoris varia ( Abraham), from Angas, 18604,

nH
oe

BURN—S.A. OPISTHOBRANCHS 349

plume divided into a pair of laterally directed three-pronged bipimmate
branchial ribs, each rimmed with short conical fliments and continuous
even between each branchial vib and between each set of three ribs.

The salivary glands lie on lop of the pharynx; they are flat,
elongate and folded in two. The labium is usually smooth; in the
Bare [sland specimen, the surlace was malleate and underside covered
with clonwate papillae, The radular formula varies from 21 x 66,0,56
to 85 x 63.0.63. The inner teeth (lie, 21) have short laterally eurved
cusps, those of the middle are strongly hooked and the marginals have
a short hase and long ensp, The teeth in each half row differ less im
heiwht from side to side and are more slender and erect than in other
species of the genus.

Anlerior genital mass (fig. 22); ampuala (am) a brief winding of
the hermaphrodite duet as it meets the genital mass; prostate gland
(pr) large, bent double, at first narrower; vas deferens (vd) several
short fight folds and narrow straight section; penial sheath (ps) long,
wider towards atrium, vestibular gland (vg) large, sac-like, Vagina
(va) short; spermatheca (sp) large, ronghly eirenlar; large uterime
duet (ut) long, folded donble, end little swollen; small uterine duet
(sut) very short and slender; spermatoeyst (sc) elongate, sausage-tike.

Discussion. The encircling brown lines and the marbled pattern.
ine of the notal median area are decisive for the identification of
lt. varia, The shape of the radular teeth, the length of the large
uterine dnet and the sausage-like spermatoeyst are also diagnostic,

dA. varia is a common New South Wales species extendimg along
the whole coastline,

Section POROSTOMATA
Family DENDRODORIDIDAE

Dendrodoris nigra (Stimpson)

Doris migra Stimpson, 1855: 380.
Dendrodoris nigra, Burn, 19628: 166.

Malerial examined. SOUTH AUSTRALIA; Ameriean River,
Kangaroo Island, 11 specimens, S.A.M, reg. no. D.14878,

Habitat. Under stones between and at low tide levels,

Distribution. Indo-Pacific, Queensland, New South Wales, Vic-
foria, South Australia, Western Australia.

Discussion. The present preserved specimens are 30-40 mm in
lenyth, and uniform smoke-grey with paler notal margins. The species
is already reported from Coobowie, St. Vincent CGhilf (Burn, 1962B).

350 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Doriopsilla carneola (Angas)
Wig, 23-25
Doris carneala Angas, 1864: 48; pl. 4, fig. 7,
Dorinpsila carneola. Burn, 1962B: 169.

Material ecamimed. SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Sir Joseph Banks
Group, Spencer Gulf, 14 June 1965, 3 speeimens, R. Bentley, SAM.
reg. no, D.AAS7o.

Habitat. Dredged (? in shallow water) and under stones at low
tide level,

Distribution. New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, South
Australia,

Description, The largest preserved slug is 30 mim long, dull
purple-red on the notum and paler on the sole. The notum is entirely
vranular in each specimen.

The pink pharynx (fig. 23-25, pb) is long and wide when stretched
out but is thrice folded in life, Paired vetractor muscles (1m) are
attached to the posterior of the conical white oral cavity (o¢) and the
pharynx (ph). The nerve ring (mr) lies immediately behind the
pharynx. The white oesophagus (oe) is long, slender and eurved to
the left. At its end bes a muscular cream coloured gizzard (gi) with
a pair of small retractor muscles (1m).

Aiterior genital mass (fig. 25); ampula (am) small, branching to
male and female ducts. Prostate gland (pr) large, flat; vas deferens
(vc) slender, long, looped; penial sheath (ps) short, musenlar, immer

rally with several spiral series of minute hooks. Vagina (ya) long,
very slender, winding; spermatheeca (sp) large, pyriform; spermato-
cyst (se) smaller; uterine duet (ut) short, straight.

Discussion, The constant red colouration of the granular notum,
the position of the nerve ring immediately behind the pharynx and the
large size of the prostate gland distinguish D. carneolu trom the species
listed by Mareus (1961: 144-146).

Doriopsilla aurea (Quoy and Gaimard)
Fig. 26-29

Doris aurea Quoy and Gaimard, 1832; 265, pl. 19, fig. 4-7.

Doriopsilla anrea. Bran, 1962B: 168,

Material evamined. SOUTIT AUSTRALIA: Sir Joseph Banks
Group, Spencer Gulf, 18 Jnne 1965, 1 specimen, R. Bentley, S.A.M.
reg, no. 14883; Neapean Bay, 7-14 May 19388, 1 specimen, I. Moorhouse,
S.AM. reg. no. D.14882,

Habitat. Dredged (7 in shallow water); under stones at low tide
level.

BURN—S.A, OPISTHOBRANCHS 331

Distribution. New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, South
Australia.

Description. The larger preserved specimen measures 32 mm lone
and 19mm wide. The colour of both is pinkish yellow, the retracted
rhinophores orange. The notum is fairly soft and pustuloge, partien-
larly near the margins.

The orange pharynx (fig, 26-28, ph) is short and fairly broad
When rolled flat, In life it is curionsly rolled or looped to the left side
and held in place by the diverging pair of retractor muscles (rm)
attached to the conical white oral cavity (oc) and the dextrally direeted
parallel pair of posterior pharynx vetractors (vm). The nerve ring
(ur) lies some distance behind the pharynx. The cream oesophagus
(oe) is long and curved to the left; the muscular gizzard (gi) is pale
yellow,

Antevior genital mass (fig, 29); ampulla (am) small; prostrate
gland (pr) large, flat, lobate: vas deferens (vd) slender, long, looped;
pemal sheath (ps) short, stout, inner walls armed with hooks. Vagina
(va) very slender, long, winding: spermatheea (sp) large, ovoid:
spermatoeyst (se) small, pyriform, very close to spermatheca; uterine
duet (ut) rather lone.

Discussion, In life, the orange colouration of D. aurea is its chief
characteristic, OF the anatomy, the rolled-up pharynx, the lobate pros-
slate gland and the proximity of the seminal vesicles are features
lo separate the species from its congeners.

REPERENCHS
Abviham, P.oS., 1876; Notes on some Nudibranehiate Mollusea, ete, lia, Mig, Nat Mist,
(4), 1S: 132-144, pl. Ts,
——— 1877: Revision of the Anthobratehiate Nudibranchinte Molluseay ele. Prac. Zant.
Soc, London, VATT: 100-269, pl. 27-0,
Aslams, A. 1850; Uhes. Conch. 2: 58%, pl, 124, fie. 108.
Angus, GR. 1804; Description (espeees nouvelles... Mollusques Nudibrauehoe
do Port Jackson ete. a. Conehyltiol, (2; 48-40, yl, eA.
— ASTI: A list of additional species of Marina Mollusen oo. . New Sonrh Wales,
Pio, Bool, Soo, London, WT R711,
Buln I. WS: Opisthobranchia of Sagat Bay, ote. Tokyo, 194 + 7 pp, 80 pl
Barnard, Ke Th, 127: South Africae NSudibranch Mollasea, ete, lnm 8. Ark Mua. Sa:
171 Lia, pl 19-20.
Basedow, Uh and Hedley, O., 105; South Australian Nudibranelis, ete, rans. oy. Soe,
S. Aust, 20: Dha-10, pl debe.
Bennett, bound Pope, 1. 18532 Intertidal Zonation of the Exposed Rocky Shores of Vietoria,
ete, elahod, Mia, Fresh Rew. 41): 105000, pe Ley
Bergh, Ry O78; Neue Chroniodoriden. Valakozool Bh ON. Wo, Te 87-116. ph &.
——— Iss0) On the audibranchiate gasteropod Mollnses of thea North Ttaeitle Conat, Lt
Proc deel Nat, Sei, Phiteedy Iphia, VAS: d0-T27, pl. (76,
— 15: Malicologisehe Untorsachungen, Semper, Relive im lvehtped der Philippenon,
M(2)2 H7-114, pl as,
-— 107: "Me Opisthobranelinta of South Atriea. Trans, 8. ofr. Lol. Sne,, V7(1):
l-l4l, pl del.
Born, K., 1957: On seine Opisthebrichin Peon Vietorin, of. alee, Soe. cluate. ds vie,
We LA,
—_— — Te A new Doridid Nudibraneh from Torquay. Meliger, 4(2)7 55-56, pl 15,

'

352 RECORDS OF THE $.A, MUSEUM

——— — 1962A: Deveriptions of Vietorian Nudibrancliate Motlusea, ete, Mem, Nat. Mewes,
Viet, 20; 95-128,
ING2R; Notes on a collection of Nudibranehia from South Austratia, ute, hid,
ah: 14-172, pl. 1,
Wotton, BoC, 1959; Archacopashropoda, South Lust, Molluges, Adelaide, 449 -- % py, Toph
Gotion, By CG, and Godfrey, PLA., Was: South Australian Shells, Te 8. dust, Nat, (days
72-108, pl. Id,
Crosse, Heand Miselher, PL, 1868: 7. Conehyliol, Vay a8, pl a.
Kijot, €,, 07: Nudibrunehs from New Zealand and the Palkia Islatids. Tye, Walae, Son,
Lonwlon, 7) 487-381, pl, 2a,
Halny T, 1958: Atyidiie in dpa 7, Cat. Jap. Shells, no. 20; 187 Yoo, pl. 20-u1,
Holley, (., 1912: Deseriptions of some new or noteworthy shells ete, Lee, dust, Mia, SCS);
TL-160, pl. 40-15.
Tredale, ‘TD. nd MeMiehael, DO. 1, 1962: A Reflerenea Lash of the Murine Molfases of New
Sonth Wales, Mem. santt. Mi, Dy bL0o.
Maephersou, J. WH. and Gabriel, GC. d., M802; Alanine Molluwes of Miatonia, Melbourne,
79 + 18 yp., 486 fige.
Maylystone, (2 M,, I&72; Notes on Vietorian Mallinsea and (heiy palates. denthtly Mier.
Tourn, IST2: 45-54, pl, 25-27,
Mavens, @, 1959: Janmetarincea, and Opisthobennehia, Liaise Orin, devs (NS M2),
Aa(Mys 1-185.
—— 1961; Opisthobeanelig from North Carolin, oe Bbiahet Mitehell Sei, Soe, T7C2)¢
MW1-JAl.
Mater. @. and W, 1962; Opisthobrauchs from WPlorida aod the Virgin Tslands. fall, Mar,
Sei, Gulf Carihh,, 208) 2 450484,
——— 1968: Opisthobranchs trom the Tosser Antilles, Std, Faun Curacaa, Wy Wit,
May, Wo day W080: at Cheelelist of the Molhusea of Tasmania, Wobart, TH pp
— {928+ An Mluartited Index of Tasmanian Shells Hobart, 100 pp. 47 ph
Odhner, N, H, 1984: Now Zealand Mollasen, Madensh. Meddel, Dansk Naturh, Faren., 17:
J-90, pl, 1-2,
1926; Die Opisthobranchien, Kintther Zool. Res, Swed. Antarch. Wap, WiY-08.
2(1): 1-100, ph 1a
184: The Nudibronelinta. Brit, tntaret. Terra Nova Buped. 19210, Zool, 7(5)4
229.300, pl. 18,
O'Donoghue, C. H., 1924: Report on Opisthobrinchiat from the Abrothos Tslands, Weatnnn
Australia, ete. J. Linn, Soe, London, Zool. 85, no, 287: F21579, pl, 27-80.
Bilsbry, TT. A. 1808; Toetibranchin, ‘Pryon, Manuel af Conchology, Vos l4-436, pl, TR-61.
——— 1920: Marine Mollusks of Hawaii. Pree. dead. Nat. Sei, Philadelphia, 1920:
860-882,
Pritehard, G. B. and Gatlift, J. H., 1908; Catalogue of the Marine Shelly of Victoria, 6.
Prac, fiay, Soe, Viet, 15 (CN. Si): 176-228.
Quoy, J) and Gaimard, 7., 1882: Moyaye de déeorvertes de UaAstrotabe, ote. Zeal, 2, Parts.
Stimpson, W., 1855; Doseviptions of sonw of the new Marine Invertebrata from the Chinese
and Japanese Seas, Proc, Aen. Nat, Sei, Philadelphia, 7: 378-389.
A\leh, A. 19590: Gastropoda, 2: Euthyneura. Schindewolf, Handhbueh der Paliezoologie, 6:
12 + $34 pp,

SOMMATRE

Dans une collection de dix espiees d'opisthobranches (Molluseay Gastropoda) de
Australie da Sud, on en déorit trois comme nouvelles: Taminoca maugeansis (Atyidae),
Nuodoris snbaustralls ct Apheladoris lansae (Dorididac), et Juno des autres ost wn nouvel
enregistrement, pour cet Ktat: Chromoderis lasmuniensis Bergh, 1905 (Dorididac). Des
(udex du genre Aphelodoris Bergh, 1879, dans le sud-ost de 1’ Austratic indiquent six spices
(distinetes, dont deux portent déjA les noms berghé Odlner, W024, et varia (Abraham, 1877),
tandis qufon en déerit quatre comme nouvelles: lawsae, rossquichki, jntiag ol yreent. Selon
la lilterature, Aphelodorty en Austrilie an distingne des autres esphees du genre on ee que
Voviduete entre los glandes du mucus et de Malbumine ef la spermatothéeque so divise dans
un wear petit conduit utirin at un grand conduit utérin qui se dilate ferminalement, Le
spermaloeyste sfattache & cette dilation terminale du grand conduit utérin,

ABBREVIATIONS
win—ampula; gi—gizzard; Jol—large uterine duet; me—nerye ring; ot—oral Cavity}
oc—vesophagus; ov—oviduet; pe—penia; plh—pharyns; pr—prostate gland; ps—poniul shonth;
mm—retractor muscles; se—spermatoeyst; sp—spermatheon; sat—small uterine duet; ut—
uterina duct; va—vagina; vd—vyas deferens; vg—vestibulur gland,

CONTENTS

An occurrence of Selenite near Whyalla, South Page
Australide, ete. eee cote ae cas: D. W. P. Corbett ......... 193
New Species of Ologamasus Berlese from
Australia and New Zealand ................5. DiCr Users tctsirwartiees 205
Aboriginal Camp-site on the Sturt River at
Coromandel Valley, South Australia ...... R, Edwards ........:c:c00cee 237
Australites used for Aboriginal Implements in
South Australia ..........scccesesneeeeeneereeees R. Edwards ............c0000 243
Zoila Marginata in South Australia ............ H. M. Laws ....ccceeeeeee 251
The Cytology and Anatomy of Oxychillus
Alliarius, a new introduction to South
Austiallatergrenctctctimscccs tana eter rete HooM laws ace 257 |
Neanurid Collembola of Australia preserved
in the South Australian Museum _......... Reoshite. At. aise eat 261
Aradidae in the South Australian Museum,
Adelaidertnirnr aici iw astewss ctr iedtcec see N. A. Kormilev ............ 275
Archaeological Stone Implements from a j
Lagoon Bed, Kangaroo Island, South
Auistrallacnon stg cea arnsves coats Menges H. M. Cooper ........cee 309
Notes on some Opisthobranchs mainly from :
South Australia ..........0.ccecceesesereseneeers RoiBURNs ene aeacare: 329
SHOPENOtes =... iccssvs cc gteetasag Se ebeeen eh, Oeind es indevaskeaicaherthaey reeates kerehe 353

a ee

VOLUME | No 3 |
1967

RECORDS
OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Adelaide, South Australia.
Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer.
Registered In Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS FROM THE ORROROO DISTRICT, SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY H.. E. BURROWS

Summary

This paper refers to three rock engraving sites in the vicinity of Orroroo, Upper North of
South Australia. Reference is made to the topography of the surrounding country and
some of the designs, incorporated in the engravings, are described and discussed.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS FROM THE ORROROO DISTRICT,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. i. BURROWS, Soura Avsrrauian Musecm
SUMMARY

This paper refers to three rock engraving sites in the vicinity of
Orvoroo, Upper North of South Australia, Reference is made to the
topography of the surrounding country and some of the designs,
incorporated in the engravings, are deseribed and discussed.

LOCALITY AND ITS TOPOGRAPHY

An interesting series of aboriginal rock engravings exists in the
Upper Wepowie Creek, about ten miles south of Orroroo in a rock
hole situated in the bed of a deep watercourse, which, when in flood,
runs into the nearby main creek,

Following the Wepowie Creek downstream to the Wynflete
distriet, there are permanent springs (Wepowie Waters), From here
this gum creek runs in a north-westerly direction and fimally enters
Pekina Creek, a large watercourse.

The surrounding country consists of undulating hills with large
areas of cultivated land. Today very few trees exist, with the exception
of large gum trees farther downstream upon the banks of the
main creek,

The Upper Wepowie Creek is also known to nearby property
owners as Bullyacre Creek, but this is now believed to be a local name
of unknown origin.

The rock engraving site is situated on a farm property owned by
Mr. T, Clark at Section 22 in the Hundred of Blaekroek.

The existence of the engravings was unknown during the period
1921-24 when I was employed on an adjacent property. Tlowever, in
1959, Mr. M. Cottrell (a grandson of my former employer) informed
me that some years earlier he had found rock engravings which he
believed to be of aboriginal origin. As far as can be ascertained they
are still known only to loeal farmers in that area,

The writer’s first visit to the Rock Hole site was in September
1959, The second visit was made a year later, with the intention
of examining the engravings more closely and recording the designs.
The rock hole, however, was then in a flooded condition with only the
higher engravings visible, so that it was impossible to carry out the
proposed work,

4

364 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pig. 1. A. South wall of Rok Hole Site—Upper Wepowie Creel,

B, Engravings on south wall of Kock Hole Site—Upper Wepuwie Creck.

BURROWS—ORROROO ROCK ENGRAVINGS 365

During March, 1965, the writer was able to photograph and also
make tracings and latex moulds of this group of engravings.

A further visit was paid to the area during May, 1965, On this
oceasion the writer was accompanied by Mr. Tl, M. Cooper, Honorary
Associate in Anthropology, South Australian Museum, The Upper
Wepowie Creck was more closely examined and another group of
engravings Was discovered, about 300 yards from the Rock Hole site.
We cul this the Upper Wepowie site.

DESCRIPTION OF KNGRAVINGS

The desivns at the Rock Tole site are -exeented on vertical rock
faces on the north and south sides of the rock hole and the patterns
are generally well defined, Others however, are barely visible owing
to the sinoothing effect of runing water. They appear mostly to have
heen pecked out and the designs are chiefly conventional circles, There
are also others of indefinite shapes and evidence of easual pecking
marks on various parts of the reek faces. So far as could be
ascertained these do not form any particular pattern or design,

Mie, 1, A, shows a general view of the south rock face at the Rock
Hole site, The line of lichens above the engravings is an indication
of the level to whieh flood waters have risen in this reek hole,

The X marks the position of a barely diseernible pecked circle,
the design of whieh finishes several inches helow the present silt
floor level,

iv. 1, B, shows details of a group of engravings on the same
rock face, Note the massed pecking marks within the circles and also
others scattered around the group,

In the ease of the Upper Wepowie site there are high rock faces
on the west side of the ereek at this spot, but the aboriginal artists
appear not to have considered them suitable for their purpose and
have recorded their art on smooth rock faces in the bed of the creek.
This second series, perhaps, is more interesting than those at the
Rock Tole. The main motifs again are conventional circles, but some
of the designs are more eoinplexs. The engravings generally are cut
deeply into the rock.

It ix interesting to note that here and also at the Rock Hale there
are two or three places in which portions of the engravings tend to
disappear under the present hed of the watercourse, This seems to
indicate that at this spot the conrse of the ereek has silted up since
the eneravings were made,

366 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Rig. 2. A. Hugravings on face of rock in hed of Upper Wepowie Creek,

B, Deep engravings ou face of rock in Upper Wepowie Creek.

BURROWS—ORROROO ROCK ENGRAVINGS 367

Fig. 2, A and B, show two of the many designs pon the
smooth surfaced rocks in the hed of the Upper Wepowie Creek at the
second site, The desiens shown in the second fig. B are deeply ent.
Note the central cirele with a hoomerang-shaped appendage and
immediately below it a straight line of well-defined peck marks.

Most of the designs in fig. 3 sve trom the two Wepowie sites.
The exception is fig. 8, A, which is from the well known site im
Pekina Creek near Orroroo, These ave included for comparison with
the new finds.

The desiens in fig. 3, Band (, from the Upper Wepowie site seem
more complex in form than those in fig. 3, D and EK, from the Rock
Hole site.

The broken lines of fig. 3, C. show where the design is worn and
barely discernible owing to the abrasive effect of food waters.
Fix. 3, D, is a design of civeles from the north wall of the Rock Hole.
The broken lines at the top indicate where a water-worn gap has
developed in the rock taee; the remainder of the design is still intact,

The design in fig. 3, BE, is also represented photographically 1
fiv, 1, B, to assist in the interpretation of detailed drawings,

DISCUSSION

During 1915, an isolated group of rock engravings similar to those
now being described, was discovered on a sloping rock of considerable
size low down on Pekina Creek, near Orroroo and reported by Hosking
(1926). The Pekina Creek engravings resemble those here deseribed,
consistine cliefly of plain cireles, some of which are concentric. There
are, in addition, several indistinct designs in pairs, believed to be
representations of animal tracks.

The loeations of all three of these sites is well within the area
formerly occupied by the Ngadjami Tribe (Tindale, 1940). The rock
engravings at these three localities are so similar in form that it
scems probable they all represent the work of members of a common
tribe or group of people occupying this district. However, it is quite
possible that they were not all made at one special time.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Vhe writer is mueh indebted te Mr. M, Cottrell for his observation and interest io
lomting the Rock Hole engravings and ta Mr, T. Clark for the courtesy of aecess tthe
property on Which the engravings were found,
Appreciation is expressed nlso ta Mr, Wy, M. Cooper tor the henefit of his experience
und for te beste of working under his guidance in the field,

Mr N. B. Tindale gave encouragement and advice and my daughter, Lynoudy helped in
thas work ut revording: Fhese engravings im the field,

368

hig.

3.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A. Part of engravings on rock face in Pekina Creek.

B. ©. Engravings from rocks in bed of Upper Wepowie Creek.

D. Engravings on north wall of Rock Hole Site, Upper Wepowie Creek.
E£. Engravings on south wall of Rock Hole Site, Upper Wepowie Creek.

BURROWS—ORROROO ROCK ENGRAVINGS 369

REFERENCES
Hosking, J. W., 1926: Native Rock Engravings at Pekina Creek, Orroroo, South Australia.
South Aust. Naturalist, Adelaide, 8(1): p. 12 and pl. 4.
‘Vindale, N, B., 1940: Results of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities Anthropological Expedi-
tion, 1938-39. Trans. Roy. Soe. South Aust., Adelaide, 64(1): pp. 140-231
and map.

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS, MOUNTAIN CREEK WATERHOLE, ST.
VIDGEON, NORTHERN TERRITORY OF AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD AND ERIC BRANDL

Summary

Mountain Creek Waterhole is situated near the old St. Vidgeon Station, south of the lower reaches
of the Roper River (fig. 1).

The unusual group of cave paintings at this site has recently been photographed in considerable
detail by one of the authors (E.B.). Later, in collaboration with the companion author, the
illustrations and descriptions for this paper were prepared from the photographs.

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS, MOUNTAIN CREEK WATER-
HOLE, ST. VIDGEON, NORTHERN TERRITORY OF AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD axp ERIC BRANDI

Mountain Creek Waterhole is situated near the old St. Vidgeon
Station, south of the lower reaches of the Roper River (fig. 1).

~~... Milingimbi. ;

ort Bradshaw

Amhem Land

Groote Eylandt

Katherine et R.
e oF

a

es
St. Vidgeon

"Delamere
Fig. |. Map of Northern Australia.

The unusual gcoup of cave paintings at this site has recently
heen photographed in considerable detail by one of the authors (1.B.).
Later, in collaboration with the companion author, the illustrations
aud descriptions for this paper were prepared from the photographs.

It would seem that the paintings at the Mountain Creek Waterhole
have been known for a considerable time. Tindale (personal ecom-
munication) claims to have visited this site about 1922, 45 years
ago, but it was not until 1957 that McCarthy in dustralia’s Aborigines,
thelr Life and Culture (p. 159), illustrated a single figure from this
fave. Later, another painting from the same locality was included in
Australian Aboriginal Art (pl. 41, 1964, Berndt, Ed.).

The cave paintings have been found on the walls and ceiling of
a tunnel in a line of cliffs, some 700 yards south-west of the Mountain
Creek Waterhole (fig. 2). Vhis tunnel is over 160 feet long, seven
to 12 feet high, and averages about 25 feet wide. It is lit, somewhat

372 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

=== => >= 1o ROPER BAR,32 MILES
i*3 MILE TO ST. VIOGEONS
{OLD HOMESTEAD SITE?

i MOUNTAIN CREEK WATERHOLE
—_, _ — — © PERMANENT WATER (APPROX }
|
\
\ ‘
i} .* ahi,
a 5
j > mnt
be, ils
i we we
Nl any ys
re wie 4?
~ = >
13 nS SANOSTONE

jf Za i ot >

an

‘ MAIN CAVE & TUNNELS

APPROX. SCALE!
ROCKY SLOPE

CEASY ACCESS TO CAVE? 100 YDS.
Fig. 2. Locality plan of Mountain Creek Waterhole.

dimly in places, by a number of small openings in the walls and
ceilings, and by a cave, in about the centre, which has eut right through
the tunnel to the hack wall (fig. 3).

BONES ON er eh CAVE
aT

Z Ms Se
ee ee

Ss TUNNEL —>,

rE, | ad re ty Oe ae Oe EE eee re

fxpsrone ¢ / // ///, Yi L x Niche

NICHE 12°
HOLES IN CEILING & waLts APPROX. SCALE.

OF TUNNEL 20 FEET AO Ie toe

qt

Fig. 8. Cave painting site, Mountain Creek Waterhole,
a] c=] 3

Most of the paintings are concentrated on the walls and ceilings

of the cave and tunnel, although several haye been found on isolated
outerops adjacent to the main site.

Many of the examples of cave art in this loealitv are similar to
those found elsewhere in southern Arnhem Land. T

There are, however,
a number of painted figures, for example, A, fig. 4, of which we have,

aw
~
a

MOUNTFORD axnp BRANDL—NORTHERN TERRITORY
CAVE PAINTINGS

as yet, no parallels in other eave painting sites. There is little doubt,
however, that further research in the adjacent country will reveal
similar desigus.

Fig. 4. Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek Waterliole.
bal >

Figure 4

A, represents an aboriginal, presumably a male, although the sex
is not indieated"!, wearing an elaborate head-dress with horn-like
projections, and decorated with lines indicating body decorations. The
posture of the figure suggests that the subject of the painting ts taking
part in a dance,

B, although incouplete, is another equally spirited dancing figure ;
( is indecipherable, but the shape of the head suggests that of the
spiny ant-eater, or echidna.

374 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek Waterhole-

MOUNTFORD anp BRANDL—NORTHERN TERRITORY 375
CAVE PAINTINGS

D and &, EB, are incomplete paintings of aborigines; J is an
unidentified fish; K is a dancing figure, in black, which is obscured
hy a number of crescent-shaped designs ; aud R, and H, are other
incomplete figures.

L, L, L, represent bird tracks, probably those of emus, and P,
those of a smaller bird. M, N, and F, are daneing figures in white;
(he first pair are holding hands.

Seattered throughout the whole site are a nomber of negative
luud-prints, These are made by pressing the hand against the rock-
face and squirting chewed-np white pigment over it from the mouth,
When the hand is removed, a negative stencil remains",

Figure od

A, is a male figure wearing a form of head-dress not unlike that
of A, fie. + and J, fie. 5, the only difference being that the body
J, fig. 5, is devoid of decoration. The meandering line terminating
in a cirele on his abdomen, is probably a simple form of X-ray art
depicting internal organs.

Ai B,D, H, and 0, are spirited dancing fignres in white; and F
and L, similar designs outlined im white dots. F, is attached to a
reptile-like design Q, and Lo has a primitive X-ray symbol on its
abilomen (see A, fig. 6).

C, is a dancing figure with his hands held above bis head and G,
a reptilian design, [is an incomplete human figure attached to some
form of reptile; M may be a representation of a sea-gomg turtle,
and K is a wobbegong shark (Oreetolobus sp.). A human figire in
bluck at the bottom of K partly obsenres a series of concentric
circles which may represent a head-dress. There is no explanation
for the design immediately above the concentric circles.

J, another sexless human creature, wearing the elaborate head-
dress characteristic of this loeality, is carrying a shield in either hand,
It is not, however, decorated on the body as is A, fig. 4, or D, fig. &.

(2) Hand prints, both nevative and positive, have a wide distribution both in Australia and
in other parts of the world. Tn the eaves of Ocnpelli there are three forms of hand-
prints, negative, positive (when the palm, loaded with colour, is pressed againsf the
rock Rr and negative prints decorated with abstract patterns (Mountfoerd 1956,
pl 48),

(3) Groups of concentric vireles such as these and at B, fig. 5, are a dominant motif in the art
af ceuteal Australia. Nevertheless, they are uncommon, if not entirely absent, in the
art of Arihem Land, The concentric eiveles at this site may be the most northerly
extension of this central Australian design. i .

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

376

onczynte

.
“se

oe
-
ee SY Ce

Ping:
: Ae
: = : aa

; ets
PRia veces

eg Rte,

a

ole

k Waterh

in Cree

Mounta

intings,

ve Pa

a

6

1g

F

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDL—NORTHERN TERRITORY 377
CAVE PAINTINGS

N, is a human figure in an inverted position, Although we have
no information of the meaning of this particular design, it has a wide
distribution, extending from the Cape York area, where it is common,
across southern Aruhem Land to Delamere (fig. 1), and probably
beyond, Tt is almost, if not entirely absent from the cave art of both
Arnhem Land and the central areas of the continent,

Pignre 6

A, represents a crocodile, which, on account of the long snont,
is possibly the freshawater species (Crocodilis johnson), The
meandering lines on the stomach possibly vefer to the internal
organs’), By is an excellent representation of the sea-going crocodile
(Crocodilus porosus), and C, possibly that of a goanna, D is an
incomplete human figure with wpheld arms.

Ih, is a distorted Jizard-like creature; Fy a cross-like design, an
uncommon motif in Australian eave art; P is a partly obliterated
painting of a long-necked fresh-water turtle, and G is a pair of
kangaroo tracks. The meaning of the oval design J, to the right ts
unknown.

H, probably illustrates two stingrays and the tail of a fish, the
remainder having disappeared through erosion, K is an indecipherahle
abstract desig; I, probably a garfish, M an unidentified reptile,
wnd Na kangeroo, partly obliterated by a negative hand stencil, There
is no explanation for the parallel marks at ©.

Figure T

A, is another of the typical hutnan figures of this site, with
elahorate head-dress and painted body decorations. B, is a curious
male figure in black, with a tall head-dress, and large ears; C, is a
simple male figure in black, while D is a snake design surrounded hy
a decorative pattern of white dots; & is a badly executed cave painting
ofa frog; Fis an mdecipherable painting; G, a snake design outlined
with white dots, and H a dugonye, dolphin, or similar mammal J is
nu cave painting that strongly resembles the small water-hen which
frequents the reeds at the edye of the water-courses, and K is an
eagle, an identification suggested by the stance of the bird and the
shape of the body.

On some of the Arnhem Land bark paintings the design L, is
used to indicate yams in the ground (Mountford 1988, pls. 16 and 17).

(4) A design which appears to be charneteristic of this site.

378

.

id
.

°

*

e
J
*
LJ

*
e

?
e
«
=
.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 7. Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek Waterhole.

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDIL—NORTHERN TERRITORY 379
CAVE PAINTINGS

lt is likely that this design has a similar meaning. M is a badly

drawn footprint, probably that of a wombat; N, N, are both indeciper-
able designs, and O is au unknown lizard, possibly a goanna.

Figure &

A, is an excellent painting of wi emu over a series of well-drawn
concentric cireles, B. This motif, as mentioned previously, 1s
uncommon in the art of northern Australia; C, similar to K, fig, 5, is
a vonyentionalized painting of a wobbegone shark.

1), similar to A, fig. 4, depicts an aboriginal wearmg a heacd-dress
With projecting horn-like appendages and complex body decorations,
and Man unidentified fish. The two ovals on the body, similar to those
on the sharks and stingrays in the bark painting art of Arnhem Land
(Mountford 1956, fig, 119, B), probably represent the Hyer of the
creature, a favourite aboriginal (lelicacy.

Fy is a long-necked fresh-water tortoise aud G, a daneing man
with hands clasped over his head. This is an almost identical design
to that on Cy fig. 4.

HH, is an armless human figure, J, two unidentified suakes, while
KN is a envious design which may represent one of the long-legged
wading birds.

LL, is an illustration of more than ordinary interest, which has
been painted on an isolated onterop at the Mountain Creek Waterhole
(A, Fig, 2). In the first place it is an excellent example of a female
xytlatting figure’. As far as we are aware, this design is eonfined
lo the northern coastal fringe, extending from Cape York (Mounttord,
168 unpublished data) to western Arnhem Land (Mountford, 1956,
pl. 93D). This motif does not appear to have penetrated much further
westward or southward, Mountain Creek Waterhole (fig. 1) is ne
distance from the northern coasts.

In the second place, this figure has swellings on the limbs and
joints of the body. Sehuster (1951) has shown that these ‘joint
, ' . ‘Ne . . . . . . Je
marks'’, with considerable variations in desien, have a wide distribu-
tion over the whole Pacifie avea, from north-western Canada to Central
America, Polynesia, Melanesia, Micronesia, Indonesia and Australia.
These ‘joint marks’? are also sparsely distributed nloug the northern
coasts of Australia.

(Since writing this paper Dr, Douglas ‘Frazer (1966, pp. 84-97) has shown that this desipn
in its various forms whieh he has called “the Heraldie Woman’? has been found in

England, Kurope, southern Italy, throughout Asia, the Pacific area, north-western

Canada, central America and Peru. This paper shows that similar designs have been
found on the eastern section of the northern coasts of Australia.

380 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

nen aint nteanaell

s
Peere.

ve

f
i

lig. 8 Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek Waterhole.

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDL—NORTHERN TERRITORY 381

CAVE PAINTINGS
M, is a female in black with greatly exaggerated ears and sex
organs. The marks on the chest probably indicate body scars, while
N is a small human figure in white with outstretehed Jews and arnis.

DISCUSSION

The paintines af the Mountain Creek Waterhole are the first
examples of cave art to be recorded from this part of Australia,

Most of the designs are similar to those found elsewhere in the
area, Nevertheless, there are several of particular interest, lor
example, the widely distributed **Heraldie Women’, or squatting’
fizures; “joint marks’? which have been diffused from the Pacific
areas to morMthern Australia, and the eoneentrie eireles, a dominant
mouif in the art of central Australia (Mountford, 1965, fig. 9-25).
Miture research may show that the Mountain Creek site is one of the
meeting places of three different motifs—the ‘joint marks’? and
“squatting ' figures from the north, and the concentric eireles from
the south,

The tall, human figures, with elaborate bhead-dresses, lightly
decorated hoi iex, and absence of sex characteristics, appear 1o be
eonfined to this site. These figures may illustrate one or another of
the important mythieal beings who, during the early days of the
world, created some of the natural features in the surrounding country.
Unfortunately there is uo direet information available from. the
aborigines that would provide us with a clue to either the Meanings
of these paintings or of their place in the philosophical life of the tribe,

It was noticeable, too, that the influence of the highly elaborate
X-ray art of western Arnhem Land (Mountford, 19% 56, pl. 89, 44, ete.),
has almost expended ifself at the Mountain Creek site, the only X-ray
Inotifs that vemain are meandering lines and small eireles on the
ubdomens of certain of the men and the creatures, These probably
indicate the internal organs.

The tunnel in which the paintings have been found is also a burial
eave, Where, at the present time, the floor is littered with human hones,
It is, however, normal practice among the aborigines of this area to
deposit the bones of their dead in the clefts and crevices of dry eaves
at the conclusion of the burial ceremonies.

SUMMARY
This paper describes a group of eave paintings at Mountain Creek

Waterhole, adjacent to the St. Vidgeon Station in the Northern
Territory of Australia,

382 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The paintings are illustrated, and the motifs and distribution of
the main types discussed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors wish to thank Mr, Hedley Brideson, the State Librarian of South Australia,
for his generous assistance in providing the photographs necessary for the preparation of
the illustrations for this paper,

BIBLIOGRAPHY
Berndt, R. (1964): Ed. Australian Aboriginal Art,
Frazer, Douglas (1966): The Many Faces of Primitive Art.
McCarthy, F. D. (1957): Australian Aborigines, their Life and thew Culture.
Mountford, C. P. (1956): Records of the American-Australian Scientific Kxpedition to Arnhem
Land, Vol. 1. The Art, Myth and Symbolism.
(1988): Aboriginal Decorative Art from Arnhem Land, Northern Territory of
Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., Vol. 63.
(1965): Ayers Rock, its People, their Beliefs and their Art.
Schuster, C. (1951): Joint Marks, a Possible Index of Cultural Contact between America,
Oceania, and the Far East, Royal Tropical Institute, Amsterdam, Communication
No. 44, Department of Cultural and Physcial Anthropology, No. 39,

STUDIES ON THE HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT LASIORHINUS LATIFRONS
(OWEN 1845)

I. MEASUREMENTS AND TAXONOMY

BY PETER CROWCROFT

Summary

The body and skull dimensions of samples of wombats (Lasiorhinus latifrons) mainly from Portee,
Yardea and Nullabor Stations are summarized, and some morphological differences between the
populations are noticed.

The type specimens of L. latifrons, L. gillespiei and L. 1. barnardi are figured. It is considered
advisable to regard the three forms as separate species. Although most Portee and Nullabor
specimens are readily distinguishable, no races are recognized within L. latifrons.

STUDIES ON THE HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT LASIORHINUS
LATIFRONS (OWEN 1845)

I. Measurements and Taxonomy
By PETER CROWCROFT, Dimncror, Sours Avustrantan Museum

SUMMARY

The body and skull dimensions of samples of wombats (Lasiorhinus
lutifrons) mainly trom Portee, Yardea and Nullarbor Stations are
summarized, and some morphological differences between the popula-
tions are noted.

The type speciinens of L. lutifrons, L. gillespici and L. l. barnardi
wre figured, [t is considered advisable to reward the three forms as
separate species. Although most Portee and Nullavbor specimens are
readily distinguishable, no races are recognized within L. latifrons.

INTRODUCTION

Few specimens of the hairy-nosed, or ‘*broad-frented’? wombat
Lastorhinus latifrons, apart from those retrieved from Zoological
Gardens, haye been preserved in museums. The Mammal Section of
the British Museum (Natural History) houses the type and 13 other
skulls, all except one having been aequived in the 19th century. The
largest assemblage of skulls, before the present material was obtained,
was in the South Australian Museum, but tost of the 31 speeimens
lacked data on sex, size, pelage and locality.

Kiven fewer skins have been preserved. The British Museum
(Natural History) has only two; the type of Gray's Lasiorhinus
necoyt (= L, latifrous), and a fragment mounted on wood. Stuffed
specimens are to be found on display in Australian and many overseas
inuseums, but they are useless in taxonomic work within this #enns.

The present collection was made hecanse of the planned destrue-
fion during 1963 of some hundreds of wombats on the western hank
of the Murray River, between Swan Reach and Blanchetown, South
Austraha, While collecting on Portee Station and adjacent properties,
we learned of a protracted shooting campaign against the same species
on Nullarbor Station, about S00 miles to the West, and near the
western extremity of the animal’s range. Three expeditions to
Nullarbor during 1963 and 1964 produced a sample comparable with
that from the Murray River. In October, 1964, following up informa-
tion vom Ma. John H/dkins, we sampled a large colony on the shores

384 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of Lake Acraman, to the North of the Gawler Ranges. This provided
specimens from a locality about half-way between the two extremities
of the present range, Only a small number were taken, as we were
averse to killing animals not under sentence, Another small sample
Was obtained from this area (Yardea Station) during August 1965,

The isolated pockets of this species surviving on Eyre Peninsula
and Yorke Peninsula have not been sampled, A map of their distribu-
fion is being prepared by the Curator of Mammals, Ma. Py BL Aitken,
and the writer.

METHODS,

The wombats were collected ly shooting in the neek with a
ngh-velocity 243 calibre rifle, Unless shot with accuracy and killed
ontright they are lost down their burrows, There is a slightly higher
nuliber of females than males in the shot sample. All animals were
weighed and measured in the field, and the reproductive organs were
lixed Tor later study.

The bodies were weighed to the nearest half-pound with a torsion
spring balanee of 100 Tb, range, but because of variation in gut contents
the weights have heen reduemd to the nearest pound. Total length
Wis measured by laying the animal on its back upon a measuring
hoard, with the muzzle against a vertical stop, and reading off the
length at the tip of the tail to the nearest centimetre. The hody was
then tumed over and the tail flexed and measured on its dorsal side
with a steel rnle. As it is difficult to position the rile exaetly at the
tail base, measurements te the nearest millimetre may convey a false
lmMpression of acenvaey, The tail is very short relative to total length,
however, and the head-and-body leugth has the same order of accuracy
aus the total length. Both have heen reeorded below.

The ear length was measured from the basal notch to the tip,
the right ear being used unless damaged. The right hind foot
measurement taken was the greatest leneth without the claw. Here
again, there is difficulty in exactly placing the rule in position, but
repeated measurements taken as a check, showed a maximum error of
two millimetres, and usually less,

Fourteen measurements were taken from the skulls, but the main
differences between samples can be expressed by means of the
following five; A. Condylo-incisive length; B. Zygomatie breadth;
C. Maxillary tooth-row length; D, Anterior nasal width; FE. Maximum
nasal length. Measurements B, C, and D are easily defined (fig. 1)
and can be reliably taken to the nearest 0.1 mm. ‘A?’ has heen taken
only to the nearest 1.0 mm. because of the looseness of the incisors

wi

mr)

HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON

THM G'REL “TTNYS JO Wypweaq wn “LT Ey

UE Post SpuswWeds ball ediound ald Suinyep “spe cLoqleyoaA 8 0 ys
t OUT iy t N

iL

“Tard

ohn S)

386 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

after skull cleaning. An alternative skull length measurement, the
condylo-basal length, as defined by Thomas (1905), is difficult to obtain
accurately in this species, without a specially constructed instrument.
‘Ki’? can vary greatly due to the irregular and variable course of the
naso-frontal sutures, and includes any projection of the nasals into
the frontals.

The ages of the individuals are unknown, but only sexually mature
aninals are included, This eliminates all those less than three years
old. A discussion of the problems of sampling has been deferred until
a note is prepared upon reproduction and population dynamics. For
taxonomic purposes, the present samples from Portee and Nullarbor
are sufficiently representative of the populations, but the Yardea
semple is rather too small.

MEASUREMENTS
The principal body measurements are summarized in table 1.
There are no statistically significant differences between the sexes
within each of the populations sampled, in respect of any single
measurement, except in hind-foot length, in which the males are larger.

Weight. Sexual maturity is not reached or maintained at less
than 40 lb. (18 kgm.), and the weight thereafter can vary enormously
according to ‘‘condition’’. Only exceptional individuals exceed 70 Ib.
The significant difference between the Portee and Nullarbor weights
(P = <.01) might not be found in samples taken in other years,
but the existence of a difference of similar order in body length (see
below) suggests that the weight difference is a real one. The Yardea
wombats do not differ significantly in weight from those of Portee.

Length. The Portee wombats are significantly longer than those
of Nullarbor (P = <.001 with tail; P = <.01 without tail). The low
variances of the measurements suggest that there is little erowth in
length after sexual maturity is reached. The measurements of the
small Yardea sample suggest greater affinity with the wombats of
Portee. There appear to be more big individuals on Yardea, where
there is little shooting.

It is unlikely that the Portee and Nullarbor populations differ
fundamentally in age-structure. When severe drought conditions
prevail, they extend over the entire range. Both populations have
been under severe shooting pressure for some years, but it has been
greatest upon Portee. Thus it seems safe to assume that the Nullarbor
wombats are, in fact, slightly smaller at maturity than those at the
eastern extremity of the animal’s range.

387

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT

6L90'0 F SOOT 0@ cOL0'O + L66 £096 It LLEVO > OTOL LOL-¥'6 6
6L80°0 + 26 0@ 90210 + FSS TOI-6°8 Il T8OT'0 + €0°6 96 -9°8 6
66690 F ELS | 0g &¢66'0 > €Ls 086-208 Il OSL60 + BLS 6 C6-G'ER 6
66000 + ZeF 0@ L420 + OF OF —CE Il SO9T'O + OFF og —C'E 6
PIOLO > FIG 0G Tes60 + 816 0°96-0'¢8 Il 90IOT + OI6 0'L6-0'98 6
PLICL FF oPag 0@ IlgU'z + L'9¢ 289-0 LF I 6FklZ + 6'es OF9-0'SF 6
yaduy
(LOL = U ‘EIFS = 9) .
w> =d EOL | TLS0°0 F 826 fOL-@8 19 FIGO'O + FFB FUI-E'8 GF
ZELO'O + BF'6 £0T | 96900 + G6 FOT-€E'8 19 G9L0'O + EF'6 FOI-G8 cr
gozeo + ees | ZOL] ss6s'o + Tes Se6-alLL | 09 o9ze0 + g's #E6-8'08 CF
6LFO'O + 668 TOL | TiIg00 > L6"E Te -86 6g 1600 + ZOF | 9 -SE GF
£10 + Z'68 101 | 19cF'0 + 0°68 86-018 6¢ 0LE0 + S68 | 0°66-0'°S8 CF
psseo F ote SOL | OTTL'0 — 6'S¢ 0'69-0' GF 19 1696°0 + Fee O'89-0°CF CF
HOPUV TION
(L6 = U ‘6L8°S = 9) 4
10> =—d)| 66 8c90°0 + 98°6 LOL-0'6 g¢ ees0'0 + OTOT GIL-0'6 OF
9FFO'O + 96°8 66 FELO'D + 868 OOT-6'L £¢ SOLO + €6°8 TO1-0'8 OF
s9eco -F Ls 66 FITEO + HLS © 16-218 &¢ Tist'0 + L'98 0°86-0'08 OF
eEo0'U + 12'F 66 L890'0 + LUF Te -0'€ €¢ E6800 — LaF 09 OE oF
LOBEO + ¥F 16 66 SaFE0 + 816 Ve6-7'Gs €¢ LOSFO — 6°06 O'S6-1 FR OF
LeOS'O + L9S | 86 BLLE0 + Le ¢'99-0°0¢ eg co9s'0 + Z9e | O'TL-O'SF oF
TaLYOg
‘TS + uve N aS - ueeyy asury NX ‘A'S F uray aauRy N
ajdmeg e107, Saye]

L AIA

“wa**

“THD *
“Wh
"wo"

“mott
| ae

“UID *
“Wa:
“uD*
“lu”
“UD

‘a. ¢

qooy PULA
vere eee rae
poq pure prop
reverses Tp
“+ ygBuey [820 7,

nereeses quia

reny
Apoq pue pray
terete py
“* yyBuay peqoy,
tbe eeee qWYSIB AY

joo} PUrAL
Deere ee Tee
Apoq pux proyy
LAD
"+ yyBue] [RIOY,
eee eee TYsIA MW

388 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tuil length. The wombat’s tail is a vestigial organ and subject
to wide variation in form and size. The variation shown is not due to
the difficulty of taking the measurement; differences in tail length are
sufficiently striking to he noticeable in a shot sample before measuring.
The Portee measurements are ouly slightly, but significantly, greater
than those from Nullarbor (P — <.01), and the Yardea sample is
inseparable from the Portee.

Ear length and Hind-foot length. The Nullarbor wombats tend
to have longer ears and shorter feet than those of Portee. These
differences are sufficiently consistent to provide a fairly reliable
diagnostie character, provided all measurements are taken by the same
observer. When the ear length of the males is plotted against hind-
foot length (fig. 2), there is a good separation of the two samples,

° O°

Ear length in em,

i] 10 11
Hind foot length in em.

Fig. 2. Seatter diagram of ear lengths and hind-foot lengths of male wombats, Open
«ireles, Nullarbor; closed circles, Portee; ¢rosses, Yardea.

and when Yardea animals are added, they fall within the Portee
distribution. This degree of separation applies only to males. The
Portee females, having smaller hind feet, show more overlap with the
Nullarbor animals in respect of the ear/hind-foot ratio.

389

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT

(ST= u ‘ss0az = 4)

vo> =d OOOMT + ZLFe VI9 Fee 6 EFFG'O = LoLe FI9 —9'&¢ 8
8080 = 96°8% LT | 0628°0 > [2°82 Les -8°c% 6 SLOL'O + 086% 8'6E —o°9e 8
LOGO + 86°LE LT | 69190 F Zehr fos osF | 6 Té8L0 + ZO'St | | OIG —O'C 8
GFSE TL F es'GIl | 21 | ehoe'O + BE LIT foz-elt 6 peges F L9Zsl | GS eel-e FIT | 8
WET F Seor| L 66ITT + GEST | OOLT-O'SST 6 Ligse 7 9991 OFLLO'LST 8
vaquv ya
c61e0 + SULs | Is | FOTFO + 96°99 oe9 -VTe cp | ceeeo + crLe 699 —0'SS | Ng
(6L = ‘CIES = ») | 7 | 7
1o'> Fi S008" 0 a GB'LE Lee -ez | Se | Z80z'0 + Z9'8z Bee -LES OR
SL8T0 + GELF OS: | FSET OF CT LE 609 -Z'FF SF | PLOT O FT GOLF | FOS -9 SF | 9€
(64 = U ‘ezz6'e = 9) *
wo> =d T66¢°0 > TLLTI eezi-e601 ok | ce6LO F Lg TZ || LTeI-zsIt | 98
(6L = 4 ‘gzg0°% = 9) nll |
co> = d | 1s0s'0 | GIST) WELL OOST CF TSISGO FT SPOT) = WLLT-O'ReT 98
BoOwUVTLIN
EFFEO F OLE ¢9 | eLsr'o F erie ze | 6LS:0 = Oe LE Gay wee | 1k
COFZ'O TF Lez 69 | F8FE'O F ST'Ge ce | screo F 91e% LO€ -9%s OT
G9GE'0 F SELF £9 | SFIS‘0 © 69°LF | && | o98e'0 + 66°9F 8'6F -O SF 1¢
(19 = u ‘gezs's = 9) | b 1 |
w> =d} 9g09°0 = SUSIT | SE | €889°0 + 69°02T FLZI-Z'SIL OS
OF990 TF FIT | 89 LFIZOT FT 9F9T ze | LooTT > 6 e9l | O'SLI-OFEL TE
aL g
- I }
‘HS + UBeTy | N Qs + uve asuRy NX ‘a8 + uvsy | asuRy ' oN

ajdues yejoy,

so]RwWay

Seley

“yysuay [BsRU TUNUIX Ey
**) U9PEM jeseu JoLayuy
"+ MoTy}OO} ATRTTIXR PL
“+ ygpraq onRwoaAy
yiZuey aarstout-opApuo;y

*YQSug] [BSBU WNUEXR py

TPE [wseu soLoyuy
“ * Modyjooy ArBypSeyy

‘7 Uppradg oeMoasy

Wiss] saiswui-oApioy

"Yyysugy [ese UNWIXRyy
“+ UQpIA [pseu JoLeyUy
“7 wamqqooy ArerprxEyy

‘** WypRemqg aRUIOsAZ
Y.Sua] sArsiour-ojApuoy

aTaV.L

90 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

Skull Size. The principal skull measurements are summarized in
fable 2, The skulls of females tend to be smaller than those of males,
but in the Portee sample the mean condylo-incisive length is slightly
ereater, and the difference between the sexes is significant only in
ayromatic breadth,

When the Portee and Nullarbor samples are compared (keeping
the sexes separate where necessary), there are few significant
differences in respect of single measurements, Those whieh do oceur
indicate a difference in skull proportions; the muzzle region is
markedly broader in the Nullarbor animals, Although the nasals,
which are very variable in form, show no significant difference in
length, the differences in anterior breadth (defined in fig, 1) are highly
significant in both sexes (P == <.001), A broader mnzzle in the
Nullarbor wombats is also indicated by the greater width across the
premaxillae and greater breadth across the nostril openings. These
figures are not ineluded here, but are available with the rest of the
raw data in the library of the South Australian Museum,

The Yardea wombats, contrary to expectations based upon the
body measurements, resemble those of Nullarbor in skull proportions,
Although their mean condvlo-ineisive length is only about 1.0 mm.
vreater than that of the Portee sample (i,¢., 0.5%), the anterior nasal
breadth ig more than 3.0 mom, greater (13.7%).

DISCUSSLON

The skull of a South Anstralian ‘throad-fronted wombat’? was
exhibited and briefly deseribed by Owen (1845) at a meeting of the
Zoological Society of London. He named it Phascolomys lati[rons,
and gave a more detailed account, with illustrations, im the Soeiely’s
Transactions (Qwen, 1849). The external features of the animal
were unknown, but Angas (1861) described a wombat in the Adelaide
Zoo, and suggested that Owen’s specimen had come from an individual
of the same species.

The genus Lasiorhimus was erected by Gray (1863), who described
LL, necoyt from a livine wombut, also from South Australia, in the
Londen Zoo, The same individual bad previously been deseribed by
Gould (1863) as Phascolomys lasiorhinus. When the animal died two
years later, examination of its skull showed it to belong to Owen’s
spectes (Murie 1865).

The early literature on the genera Phascolomys and Lastorhinus
has been summarized by Spencer and Kershaw (1910). Modern
workers, such as Tate (1951) tend to consider the differences between
the coarse-haired short-eared wombats having a hairless rhinarium,

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT 391

Wig. 3. The type specimen of Lasiorhinus latifrons (Qwen) 1945. Reproduced by
purmission of the Zoological Society of London. Maximum breadth of skull, 131.1 umm.

392 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and the silky-haired long-eared wombats with a furred muzzle, to
Warrant wenerie distinction. Mohr (1942) preferred to treat
Lasiorhinus as a sub-genus, but this seems an unnecessary complica-
fion in such a small group.

Two other modern hairy-nosed wombats have been described;
L, gillespie’ (De Vis 1900), and Lb, lL barnardi (Lougman 1939), the
former from southern, and the latter from central (Queensland, Tredate
and Troughton (1934) introduced the name Wombatila for L. gillespier,
without giving any explanation or generic diagnosis, Later, Troughton
(1954) gave as his main reason for the generic rank, the striking
shortening of the frontals in gillespie’. Tate (1951) regarded the two
Queensluid forins as races of falifrons,

The type material of the three deseribed forms has been examined.
The free projections of the nasals have been broken from Owen’s type,
but their original form is shown in his illustrations (Owen 184)
(fig, 3). De Vis (1900) based his deseription of gillespiet upon three
skulls and two skins and did not designate a type. The sole illustra-
tion proves to be a distorted dorsal view of the skull of No. J13143
(Queensland Mnseum) (fig. 4) deseribed as ‘ta young male’’, whose
skin ix the only one extant, The type skull of the race barnardi
(fig, 5) ix also associated with the only skin known. There are three
other ineomplete skulls,

No further specimens of either Queensland form have been found,
and inquiries have failed to produce evidenee of their continned
existence, The wombats taken at Deniliquin in New South Wales, and
deseribed by Kershaw (1909) were clearly the remnants of a colony
of gillespiei, No hairy-nosed wombats now ocenr in the vast areas
between the Queensland border and Deniliquin, or between Deniliquin
and the Murray River, as far as ean be ascertaimed,

In the absence of adequate material, the status of gillesjei and
burnardi can only be assessed subjectively, having due regard for the
great variability within latifrovs,

In spite of a high degree of inherent variability in skull form,
it is possible to separate Portee and Nullarbor skulls, with few errors,
by means of the form of the naso-frontal sutures. The Portee skulls,
like the type, frequently possess a wedge-shaped protrusion in the
mid-line of the frontals into the nasals, and even when this central
wedge is lacking, the sutures remain forwardly directed. In Nullarbor
skulls, on the other hand, the course of the sutures rons backwards
towards the mid-line, and when there is a central wedge, its base lies
posterior to the lateral extremities of the sutures (figs. 1 and 6),

Mig, 4,

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT 393

Dorsal view of type of L. gillespie De Vis 1900.

Maxunum breadth, 132.2 mm.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5.
breadth, 155

Dorsal yiew of type of ZL. gillespiei barnardi (Longman) 1930.
mm.

Maximum

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HALRY-NOSED WOMBAT 395

This ability to separate the two populations, added to the morpho-
logieal differences already noted, would justify placing the Nullarbor
wombats in a separate race, if it were not for our knowledge of the
Yardea population. In these, the naso-frontal sutures tend to take
an irregular but transverse course, at right-angles to the mid-line
(fig, 6). This variation was also noted by Owen (1872) in one specimen,
probably from Port Lincoln. Nasals of the Yardea type oceur rarely
in both Portee and Nullarbor samples.

A more detailed analysis of the morphological variability within
these three samples would undoubtedly confirm that they are from
populations in the process of divergence into distinguishable races.
Although agricultural and pastoral development has drastically
changed the pattern of distribution of hairy-nosed wombats, it seems
highly likely that the main populations were genetically isolated before
Huropean settlement. More intensive study of these and other colonies
will probably reveal a tendency to local differentiation similar to that
in the North American pocket-gophers.

The naso-frontal sutures take a highly convoluted course in
gillespier (fig. 4), and it is similar in all known skulls. This kind of
convolution is only rarely suggested in latifrons (fig. 6, ¢). L. 1.
barnardi is remarkable mainly for its massive skull, which gives the
impression of great age.

j roth dies A {
A
tat eh fo a's yy
ee salt ae oe! ie

non a

B

C
4 \ fo ae ‘\
Sane coe od aaa _ aay
E j f

Fig. 6, Examples of variation in naso-frontal sutures in South Australian L. latifrons.
A-B, Portes miles; O-D, Nullarbor males; E-l", Yarden males.
i 7 3 ’

B

396 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In spite of the striking size difference between gillespier and
barnardi, the two forms exhibit common features in skull proportion
which set them apart from Jafifrons. The distinetive muzzle region
is best exhibited in lateral view (fig. 7). The greater forward
projection of the nasals and their downward flexure, together with
less obyious differences in the mavxillary region, distinguish the
Queensland torms (ineluding the Deniliquin skulls) from the South
Australian species. In addition, their nasals are always longer than
the frontals, measured in the mid-line, while the nasals of latifrons
are always shorter than the frontals.

B a D

Fig. 7. Lateral view of muzzle in: A, L. latifrons from Nullarhor; B, L. barnardi
(type); C, L. gillespie’ (type); D, L. gillespiet from Deniliquin,

CROWCROFT—STUDIES ON HAIRY-NOSED WOMBAT 397

I cannot agree with Troughton (1954), that gillespiei should be
given generic status, but it should be recognized as a distinet species,
Unless more specimens of barnardi are discovered, it will be preferable
to regard it, too, as a separate species. It certainly has greater
affinity with gillespier than with Jatifrons and in such a small group
the use of trinomials is hard to justity.

As the differences between the Portee and Nullarbor populations
of Jatifrons are of a lower order and are mixed in the sample [rom
half-way between them, no races of lafifrons can be distinguished at
the present time.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Lam indebted to the Keeper of Zoology, and Dr. G. B. Corbet for seccess to the Britis
Museum material, and to the Direetors of the Queonsland Museum and the National Musevain
of Vietoria for the loan of specimons.

Great assistance im the field was rendered by Messrs. A. Kowanko, H. Bowshall and
W. Head of the South Australian Museum. The photographs were taken by fie stale
photographer, Mr. R. Ruehle.

T should also like fo express my thanks to the owners and managers of Portee, Nullarbor
and Yardea, for their assistance and co-operation, and especially to Mr. &. B. Armstrong of
Koonka, Blanehefown, for help and accommodation om many oreasions.

BIRLIOGRA PHY

Angus, G. F., 1861: Notes on the broad-fronted wombat of South Australia (Mhaseolomis
latifron Owen). Pro. 20ol, Sov. liond., 1861, 268-271.

De Vis, CO, W., 1900: On a new species of hairy-oused wombat. Ann. Qd. Mus, 5, 14-16, pl. X.

Gould, J., 1859-1863: The Manmats of lustratia, 1, pl. 59 60.

Gray, Joh. S864: Notiee of three wormbuts in the zoological gardens. Ann. Mag, nat. Hist,,
11 (3rd ser.),, 457-459,

trode, T, aud Troughton, EB. Lb. 1984: A checklist of the manmals of Australia. Mom,
Aust, Mus., 6, 1-128.

Kershiw, d. A. 1809: Notes on the hairy-nosed wombat Phascolomys latifrons Owen,
Vietoriaun Nut. 26, 118-119.

Longman, He oA., 1959: A central Queenshind wombat. Mem. Qd. Mus,, 11, 285-287,

Mohr, EK, 142: Winiges tiber Wombatformen vind Marsupialia Rentel. Zool. Garb. Lpz.,
now ser, 14, 35-68,

Murie, J, 1865; On the identity of the hairy-vosed wombat (Phascolomys lasiorkiwis Gould)

With the broad-nosed wombat (Po latifrens Owen). Proc. zool. Sav, Tandy
SOS R5AL

Owen, Wh, S45; (Exhibition of wombat skulls). Proce. zool. Soe, Lond. 1845, 82-88,

— 1849; On the osteology of the Marsupialia TL. Comparison of the skulls of the
wormbats of Continental Australia and of Van Diemon’s Land, whereby their
specific distinction is established. Trans. zool. Soe. Lond., 4, 80a-a06, pl 87,

L872: On the Fossil taninds of Australia Part VI Genns Phasvolomys Gealle,
Phil, Trans, 162, 173-196,
Spencer, W. B. and Kershaw, J. A., 1910: The existing species of (he genus Pheseolomys.
Mem. Nat. Mus. Melb., 3, 37-45.
Tate, G. He H., tat: The Wombats (Marsupialii—Phascolomyilac). Am. Mus, Novil,,
No, 1525, 11s.
Thomas, Oldfield, 1905; Suggestions for the nomenclature of the cranial length measurements
and of the cheek-fecth of mimmals. Pree. biol. Soe. Washington, 18, 11-196,

Troughton, K, Mad: Furred Animals of Australia. Angus and Robertson: Sydney, 5th Ed.
(Lat Rd. 1941),

398 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

NOTE ADDED IN PROOF

The continued existence of a colony on Epping Forest Station was confirmed when
Messrs. D. P. Vernon and M. E. McAnna, of the Queensland Museum Staff, took a female
of weight 80 1b. on 5th September, 1966, at Wombat Bore, 85 miles N.W. of Clermont.

CRANIAL AND MANDIBULAR CHARACTERS OF MODERN MAINLAND
WOMBATS (MARSUPILIA, VOMBATIDAE) FROM A
PALAEONTOLOGICAL VIEWPOINT, AND THEIR BEARING ON THE
FOSSILS CALLED PHASCOLOMYS PARVUS BY OWEN (1872)

BY D. MERRILEES

Summary

Samples of the two kinds of wombats (Lasiorhinus latifrons and Vombatus hirsutus) at present
living on the Australian mainland are compared in this paper in order to establish criteria for the
identification of fossil wombats. Wide ranges of variation are demonstrated in many structures and
it is shown that tooth size has not the same diagnostic value in wombats as in most mammals.
Phascolomys parvus Owen, 1872, as it is exemplified by its lectotype (herein selected as British
Museum (Natural History) specimen 32893) is shown to be a juvenile wombat probably not
separable from Vombatus hirsutus (Perry, 1810).

CRANIAL AND MANDIBULAR CHARACTERS OF MODERN
MAINLAND WOMBATS (MARSUPIALIA, VOMBATIDAE)
FROM A PALAEONTOLOGICAL VIEWPOINT, AND THEIR
BEARING ON THE FOSSILS CALLED PHASCOLOMYS
PARVUS BY OWEN (1872)

By D. MERRILEES, Wesrern Avsrranian Museum, Pervir
With 5 figures in the text

SUMMARY

Samples of the two kinds of wombats (Lasiorhtinus lalifrons anc
Vombalus hirsutus) at present living on the Anstralian mainland are
compared in this paper in order to establish criteria for the identificn-
tion of fossil wombats. Wide ranves of variation are demonstrated
in many structures and if is shown that tooth size las not the same
diagnostic value it Wombats as m most mammals.

Phascolomys parvus Owen, 1872, as it is exemplified by 1s
leclotype (herein. selected as British Museum (Natural History)
specimen $2893) is shown to be a juvenile wombat prohably not
separable from Vombatus hirsutus (Perry, 1810).

INTRODUCTION

It is generally considered that two kinds of worbats inhabit the
Australian mainlind at the present time. They are conveniently
distinguished by the appearance of the rhinarium as the hairy-nosed
wombhats of the drier south-central and east-central regions, and the
bare-nosed wombats of the wetter south-eastern region, Bare-nosed
wombats also inhabit Tasmania and Flinders Island at the present
lime, and have inhabited other Bass Strait islands in historie time,
Fossil wombats have been reported from many localities,

Several genera and many species have been proposed for the
modern and fossil wombats, and these are reviewed by Tate (1951).
I refer to the modern South Australian hairy-nosed wombats studied
as Lasiorhinus latifrons (Owen, 1845) and to the modern south-eastern
mainland bare-nosed wombats as Vombatus hirsutus (Perry, 1810).
The type locality of Opossum hirsutum Perry, L810 is fixed to the
Australian mainland by Ride, W, D. L. (Gan press). This paper reports
studies on some samples of LL. latifrons and VW. hirsutus designed to
facilitate further studies on fossil wombats,

The largest of the samples studied consisted of 52 skulls and
associated mandibles of bare-nosed wombats, all drawn from an area

400 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of a few square miles near Canberra, all but one collected in 1960-
161, and all believed to be drawn from the same breeding population,
This sample was loaned to jue by the C.S.1-R.0. Division of Wildlife
Research, and is deseribed below as the Dingo Dell—‘Fairbank’’
sdmple, individual specimens being referred to hy their collection
numbers, eg. (CSALRO, Wildlife) CM 297, Another five bare-nosed
wombat specinens from localities other than Dingo Dell—‘ Fairbank’?
were loaned to me by the C.\S.LR.0O. Division of Wildlife Research,
and these also are mentioned below under C\S.1,.R.0, Wildlife CM
numbers, The Western Australian Museum collection contained two
specimens of modern bare-nosed wombats, referred to by their
eatalogue numbers, e.g, (W, Aust. Mus.) M 1621,

Modern hairy-nosed wombats examined ineluded six skulls and
mandibles of young animals loaned to me by Dr. P. Croweroft, Director
of the South Australian Museum, and these are referred to below
under their field collection numbers, e.g, P.C. 108, The other nine
skulls and mandibles of hairy-nosed wombats examined, plus some
incomplete specimens, were those of the Western Australian Museum
collection, referred to as (W, Aust. Mus.) MP 6552, ete,

One skull and mandible of a bare-nosed wombat from Flinders
Island (CM 354) and one from Tasmania (M 6555) have been
examined by me in detail, and T have been able to examine many other
Tasmanian and Bass Strait islands specimens from the collections of
the National Museum of Victoria and the Queen Vietoria Museiwn and
Art Gallery, Launceston. T have also been able to examine many other
fossil anc modern specimens in the National Museum of Vietoria,
fossil specimens in the Australian Museum, Sydney, and a few fossil
specimens from other mstitutions. But TI have not attempted to review
all the vesniting data in the present paper, and in partienlar, have
made no attempt to assess the taxonomie relationships of the Bass
Straif islands, Tasmanian aid mainland popubutions of modern basre-
nosed wombats.

My coneclisions on Western Australian fossil wombats are to be
reported separately, and Mr. H. EK. Wilkinson (National Musemn of
Vietovia) and T have work in hand on certain eastern Australian fossil
wombats, also to be veported separately.

Copies of the raw data on which the present studies are based,
together with notes on the nature and accurney ol these data, hive
heen lodged in the libraries of the Western Australian Museum, Perth,
the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, and the C.S.I.R.O. Division
of Wildlife Research, Canberra,

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 401

VARIABILITY IN MODERN WOMBATS

Variability is a striking characteristic of modern wombats. The
Dingo Dell—* Fairbank’? sample of V. hirsntis is perhaps as uniform
genetically as one could expect of any sample of relatively large
mammals in the wild. Yet within this sample of 52 individuals, 35
show abnormalities of some kind, Relatively minor aberrations inelude
foramina in the ectalveolar grooves, doubling of the (normally single)
masseteric foramen, and rugosity of the eranium. Major aberrations
inelndy supernumary teeth and cranial sutures, palatal asymmetry,
and malformation of the supraoeccipital. In the more heterogeneous
sample of L. lulifrons available to me, a still greater range of aberra-
finns is present, affecting 16 out of 25 specamens. These aberrations
inelude mequality in the masseterie foramina of opposite sides, super-
nnmary teeth, asymmetry in frontals and parietals, and distortion
of alveoli,

Details of these aberrations are recorded with the raw data
mentioned shove, but some striking examples may be quoted here.
Among the specimens of 1. latifrons, W. Aust. Mus. M 3410 shows
both a right wpper and a left lower supernumary molar; M 4551h
shows asymmetry in frontals and parietals, while its left post-orbital
process is so recurved as to touch the skull wall; P.C, 82 shows the
interparietal suture dividing to enclose a separate median plate, not
usually found in wombats. Among the specimens ol VV. hirsutas
CS.LR.O. Wildlife CM 350 shows a shallow pit of about, 5 mm.
diameter in the left frontal; CM 815 and 316 show wide infraorbital
foramina (comparable with (hose of L, latifrens); (OM 345 shows
supernumary needle-like teeth albead of P* on both sides and (M 296
shows the prezygomatic ridge ending posteriorly in a tubercle,

Longman (1939) and Tueker (1954) ilbistrate and deseribe a
striking aberration in a specimen of the Queensland race of L. lafifrons,
which shows marked curvature in the long axis of the skull, with
marked inequality jo the lengths of the cheek tooth rows of
Opposite sides,

Tn addition to these ‘‘aberrations'’, wide ranges are deseribed
below in what appears to be “normal”’ variability in certain characters.

lhitraspecifie vanations of such magnitude cast strong doubts on
the taxonomic validity of the minutiae which have heen used to
distinguish sueh fossil wombat ‘tspeeies’’? as Phascolomys thomsont
Owen, 1872.

The teeth of wombats are open rooted, and continue to grow
through the animal's life-time (Jones, 1924). In this respect, they
resemble incisor teeth m rodents and incisor and check teeth in modern

402 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

lagomorphs (Dechaseaux, 1958) but differ from the teeth of most
mammals. In most mammals the size as well as the shape of each
kind of tooth may have diagnostic value, but wombat species cannot
be differentiated on tooth size alone, since a juvenile of a large species
may have smaller teeth than an older individual of a smaller species.

Figure 1 shows the very wide range in length of the cheek tooth
row (as expressed in greatest length of the alveoli of Ps-M, inclusive)
in my samples of L. latifrons (all included) and V. hirsutus (Dingo

160

140

120

length of skull —mm

Basal

30 40 50 60

Length of alveoli of Py-My—inclusiyve —mm
L. latifrons, either sex A, regression of basal length on R—M, length
V Airsutus, female *, "
V hirsutus, male xX, *

big. 1. Relationship between basal length of skull and length of the lower cheek tooth
row im modern bare-nosed and hairy-nosed wombat samples. L. latifrons, all available speci-
mens; V. hirsutus from Dingo Dell—‘‘ Fairbank’’),

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 403

Dell—‘‘ Fairbank’’ only). Figure 2 shows the very wide range in width
of one particular tooth (Ms, fore-lobe) in these same samples. Figure
1 shows also that length of the cheek tooth row is closely dependent on
the size of the individual as expressed by basal length of the skull.
Figure 2 shows in turn that width of one particular tooth is closely
dependent on length of the whole cheek tooth row and hence on size
of the individual. Individual differences are evident at a glance in
figs. 1 and 2, whereas species differences are only clear from the fitting
of regression lines.

M, -mm

Width of fore-lobe of

30 40 50 60

Length of alveoli of Py-M, inclusive — mm

L. latifrons, either sex A
Vv hirsutus, female e
MW hirsutus, male x

Fig. 2. Relationship between length of the lower cheek tooth row and width of a
representative constituent tooth (M,) in modern wombats. (Same samples as in figs. 1 and 4.)

404 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(wen (1872) and many other writers have suggested size eriteria
for distinguishing wombat species from the teeth, but figs. 1 and 2
suggest that size eriteria can be used only with eaution.

COMPARISON OF MOLAR TEETIL OF L. LATIFRONS WITH
THOSKH OF PL HIRSUTUS

All cheek teeth in both species of wombats are open rooted, and
throughout its length, cach tooth is uniform in cross-sectional shape
and size. In hoth species, the curvature appears to he more pronowneed
(7.e., the radius of curvature appears to be smaller) in upper than in
lower teeth, but the difference is more noticeable in WV. hirsufis than
in L. latifrons, Tn both species, the curvature appears to be more
pronounced in the forward than in the rear teeth in a given tooth row,
c.g, Mi is more curved than Mi, In both species, the nature of the
curvature differs hetween wpper and lower cheek teeth, the convexity
being lingual for the upper and buceal for the lower tooth rows.
Consequently, when seen in contact from behind or in lront, eaeh
upper cheek tooth and its corresponding lower form a sigmoid curve,
and the grinding surfaces in contaet form part of a horizontal plane
intersecting this sigmoid curve.

Both upper and lower molar teeth in both species are bilobate
structures, with a deep embayment in the lingual aspect of each upper
and the buceal aspeet of each lower tooth, and with a smaller embay-
ment on the opposite side, In the words of Bensley (1903), ‘each
tooth shows two triangular pillars; the sectional apices are directed
outwards in the lower teeth aud inwards in the upper’.

Presumably because of their open roots, wombat teeth very easily
fall out of their soekets in dried skulls and mandibles; in’ fossil
deposits, wombat cheek teeth are separated from their maxillae or
mandibles more commonly than in most other kinds of marsupials,

Only in the very youngest mdividual wombats does any trace of
cusps persist. For example in C.S.1.R,0, Wildlife CM 359 (the poueh
young of CM 358) of basal length of skull only 65 mm., with P3
and Ma not fully erupted, and with M* and M! still in alveolis, wear
faeets are discernible on Tj, Mj and M3, ie, on all fully erupted
teeth, though the eusp pattern predominates over the wear pattern,
On the next smallest individual available to ie (CM 316, of basal
length 103 mm.) the whole ovelnsal surface of each cheek tooth is a
flat wear face, with no remaining trace of eusps.

Sometimes in M' and M‘, less often in My and My, Inequalities in
size between the lobes indicate the antero-posterior axis of a molar
tooth, but often with isolated wombat teeth with nearly equal lobes,

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 405

there is no indication of their life orientation, Often with isolated
fossil wombat molars, breaks occur along the coustrictions separating
the lobes as well as tm accidental positions across the length of the
teeth, Thus, a curved fragment may be readily identifiable as part
of the molar tooth of a wombat, but it may be diffienlt to go beyond this.

Absence of cusps, gradations in the degree of enrvature between
upper and Jower or front and rear teeth in a given imdividual, and
lack of marked inequality between imokur lobes, may render diffieult
or impossible a decision on the approximate place im the tooth row or
fhe species of the animal concerned, Sometimes, kuowledge of the life
position of an isolated tooth could facilitate identification of its species,
so that the common nnecertainty about position is very unfortunate.

Various observers have snevested eriteria for distinguishing
between wombats affiliated with V. Airsutus and those affiliated with
L, latifrons on the basis of morphological characters in the molars.
For example Tate (1951) contrasts ‘molars not narrowed’? i
Vombatus with “molars narrow in Lesiorhinus in his ‘hey to the
Genera of Wombats?’ and De Vis (1891) contrasted his ‘‘ Phascolomys
anquslidens’* with P, mitehelli and P. platyrhinus partly in its showin
eeth narrow, in a relatively Jong seres’’. My comparisons, how-
ever, do not suggest any readily recognizable differences in tooth
width between the L. lati/roms and VW. hivsuties samples studied. The
diffeulties are Ulustrated by fig, 8, which plots lateval width at the
oeclusal face of the forward lobe of Ma teeth in the two species agaist
total length of the alveoli of the cheek teeth (Paua-Ma). 0 have not
measured width of other molars, but visial inspection fails to reyeal
any conspicuous narrowness in molar teeth in L. lalifrons.

Dealing with isolated wombat teeth from the Balladonia Fossil
deposits, Glanert (1912) states that the outline of the working surface,
the extent of the external enamel, and the hature of the longitudinal
erooving are diaguostie of wombat speeies, but he gives no details,

My own comparisons between modern L. ladifrons and V. hirsutus
in respeet of distribution of enamel on molar teeth do not support
Glavert’s assertion, Mnamel distribution appears to be very similar
in the two species,

With ‘longitudinal grooving’’, one distinction does appear in
lower molars of L. latifrons, namely, an inward curvature of the
antero-buceal aspect of the fore lobe, extending rom root to occlusal
face, This inward curvature is apparent when viewing the ocelusal
surface from above, and manifests itself as a depression along the
tooth which might be deseribed as a ‘‘vroove’’ when isolated teeth

406 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

are viewed, All 16 right Ms teeth of LZ. latifrons examined in detail
by me show this depression, whereas none of the 57 right Ms teeth of
V. hirsvftus examined does so, and visnal inspection of other lower
molar teeth suggests that the difference is almost constant. However,
Mi im W, Aust, Mus. M 6554 (1. lati/rans) shows a depression on the
postero-bueeal, not on the antero-bueeal aspeet, and Ma in C.S.LE.O.
Wildlife CM 608 (WV, hirsufus) shows a somewhat similar meurving of
the postero-buceal aspect. Neither species shows any similar feature
in upper molars,

Thus in an isolated wombat molar, an inward curvature or groove
along one but not the other transverse face of the tooth would strongly
sugvest that if was a lower molar of 1, lafifrons,

Striations on a seale not much above the limif of naked eye
observation oceur on molar teeth in both modern species examined,
but 1 eould find no constant differences between the species in the
seale or distribution of these fine striae,

Many molars in I. hirsutus, especially lower imolars, show
relatively deep lurrows along their coneave aspects (buceal in wppers,
lingual in lowers), These furrows, of a greater order of magnitude
than the striae just mentioned, are apparent only in Isolated teeth,
and do not often or mach affect the oeclusal outline. ‘Che hinder lobes
of right Ms, 2,4 in C.S.LR.O, Wildlife CM 314, or both lobes of right
M*' in CM 828 provide examples. However, occasional furrows of
comparable size ocenr in L, latifrows alone the coneave faces of molar
teeth, e.g, left Mi m W. Aust. Mus, M 6554, These furrows do not
appear to me to be of much diagnostic value,

Ag to the ‘‘outline of the working surface" said by Glauert (1912)
to be specifically diagnostic, this is a refleetion of the general form of
the tooth, and my comparisons of molar feeth do suggest specific
distinetions, particularly with lowers. The distinction may be summed
up as greater angularity in V) hirsutus, In 387 rieht Ms teeth of
PL hirsulus examined in detail, 29 show a distinetly angular corner
between the lingual lave and the posterior faee, and cross-sectional
outlines iv all 87 show an abrupt change in direction Irom approxi-
mately antero-posterior to approximately lateral. By contrast, in all
16 right Mes teeth of 4. lalifrows similarly examined, the transition
from lingual to posterior face is a smoothly rounded curve. Not only
do My teeth show this speeific contrast, but so do other lower molars.
Upper molars in PM. dirsutus also show sharper transition from lateral
to bueeal (coneave) faces than do upper molars of L. latifrons, but
the eoutrast is less marked than in lower molars,

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 407

Likewise the apices of the lobations in V’. hirsutus molars appear
very often to be much sharper than in L. latifrons—tor example, the
right Me of C.S.1.R.0. Wildlife CM 603 (V7. hirsutus) contrasts with
W. Aust. Mus. M 6552 (Z latifrons). This apical angularity is not
invariably distinetive—for example, right Mi is comparable in CM 314
(V. hirsutus) and M 6558 (L. latifrons)—but it appears to me to be
of sufficient constancy to have some diagnostic valne.

Angularity in V7, hirsutus, both in apices of the molar lobes and
in sharpness of transition from lingual to lateral faces in lower molars
or buecal to lateral faces in upper molars, 1s illustrated in fig. 3 below,

anterjor

inflected

lingual

S3 =)
ae

rounded sharp

Fig, §. Occlusal outlines of lower molars in niodern Lasiorhinus latifrons (ett) and
Vombatus hirsutus (right) to show diagnostic charaeters. Not to seale.

and is discernible three-dimensionally in isolated teeth removed from
their sockets as well as in the two-dimensional view presented by the
occlusal faces. Contrast between the species shows quite clearly in the
illustrations provided by Owen (1872); contrast, for example, his fig. 1
(**Phascolomys latifrons’’?) of pl. XX with his fig. 3 (‘*Phascolomys
platyrhinus’’).

COMPARISON OF PREMOLAR THETIL OF L, LATIFRONS
WITH THOSE OF V. TIRSUTUS

Lower premolars in both species may show polygonal cross-
sections, but whereas in L. latifrons the polygons are approximately
equidimensional, in V. hirsutus they are usually elongate, with longer
horizontal axes making angles with the antero-posterior axes of the
mandibles varying from about 10° (i.e¢., nearly antero-posterior, in
CS.LR.O. Wildlife CM 350) to about 50° (an CM 3818 or CM 849).

408 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

Some VW. hirsulus Pa teeth are very narrow relative to theiv greatest
diameter, eg, CM 358 is 7.4 mm, in greatest diameter, 46 mm. in
least diameter, at the oeclusal face, The most elongate Py seen ly me
in L, latifrons is W. Aust. Mus. 45511, measuring 6.1 mm. in greatest
Heclisal diameter, 42 mm, in least. A more typical L, lalifrons Pa is
M 885, with an irregularly pentagonal oeelusal surface 6.5 aim, in
greatest diameter, 5.4 mm. in least,

On the other hand, Py teeth in Vy hirsutus sometimes resemble
those of L, latifrons in appearing to be nearly equidimensional, e.g,
CM. 317, 337, 347. CM 347 shows an ivregularly pentagonal occlusal
surface, 6.1 mm, in greatest diameter, 5.2 mm, in least. However, of
oO? right Py teeth of WV. hirsutus examined in detail, only four in my
judgment might be confused with L. lu/ifrons in being: equidimensional
und distinetly polygonal, Many Py teeth in FP. hirsutus (21 of 59 in
my seauple) could be described as rounded (sub-elliptical rather than
polygonal) in cross-section, whereas only one of 20 L, lalifrons speei-
mens (PLC. 29) could be so deseribed,

Thus an isolated Py tooth of markedly polygonal and nearly equi-
dimensional cross-section strongly suggests latifrovs Whereas an
elongate Pa, partienlarly of almost elliptical cross-section, strongly
sugevests VP, hirsatus,

In upper premolars, perhaps the most conspicuous difference
between L. latifrons and V, hirsutus is the presence in the latter of
a wellanarked groove in the antero-lingual (i.e., convex) aspeets, Of
59 right I teeth of V. hirsutus examined in detail, not one lacked such
a groove, and in nearly all, it was very conspicuous. Furthermore, the
existenee of this groove is usually revealed by a corresponding curve
in the alveolus, However, of 15 Ly. latifrons right P* teeth examined,
seven also showed something of the kind, although in all seven,
“shallow depression’? (of gentle eurvalare) vather than ‘‘eroove™
(with steep walls and sharply-eurved floor) might better deseribe the
character. In both species P* teeth otherwise show a similar cross:
section, broadly triangular, with the apex of the triangle direeted
postero-buceally and with the base (containing the groove previously
deserihed) facing antero-lingually,

With isolated wombat premolar teeth, confusion in identifieation
might arise between a Py in Vy hirsutus which happened to show
reduction at one end of a polygonal cross-section (e.g., CS.LR.O,
Wildlife CM 42) and a P* in L. latifrons with 2 similar section
(e.g., PC. 29). The sense of the curvature would not he distinctive
in this case, the left Py of CM 342 curving in the same sense as left
P* in P.C, 29 viewed in the prone position. If the teeth were isolated,

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 409

not only would this confusion (of left Ps in CM 342 with left P* im
P.C. 29) remain, but also right Ps in CM 342 could be turned to curve
in the same sense and to show a somewhat similarly orieuted and
similarly shaped cross-section as left PY in PLC. 29, Tn this latter case
(right Pa in CM 342 and left P! in P.C, 29), both faces then interpret-
able ag the antero-lingually facing bases of the ‘triangles’? of P! teeth
show a slight indentation. Not only would there be uncertainty about
whether one was dealing with an upper or with a lower premolar, but
also there would still be uncertainty about the species even if the tooth
were known in some way to be an upper premolar, not a lower.

With isolated premolars there would appear also to be some
possibility of confusing Pa of Li. latifrons (¢.g., W. Aust. Mus. M 4551e)
with P* of V. hirsulus (e.g, CSAR.O, Wildlife CM 335), both showing
a relatively slight depression or very shallow groove nulone thie
convex aspect.

COMPARISON OF INCISOR 'TEETH OF L. LATIFRONS
WITH THOSK OF VV. WIRSUTUS

Lower incisors of L. Jatifrons are easily distinguished from those
of V, hirsutus by their cross-sectional form and proportions, In both
species, enamel appears to be restricted to the lower face of an th tooth,
and the ‘width’? of the tooth across this lower enamelled face was
recorded for 16 right lower incisors of J, latifrons and 52 of V7. Hersinties,
Another qnantity, called height’? not quite perpendieylar to ‘owidth”
was also recorded, ‘Height’, ‘width’? and another quantity (not
measured) representing the length of the (eurving) tooth eould he
regarded as % axes in some sense expressing the three-dimensional
size and shape of the whole tooth, though not coinciding respectively
with the striet vertical, lateral and antero-posterior axes of the
mandible, Tn all 16 examples of L. latifrons “height’’ exeeeded
‘width?’ whereas in all 52 examples of I. horsutus, width?’ exceeded
‘height

Thus, as viewed trom the front, protruding from their alveoli,
lower incisors of L, latifrons ave seen as high, narrow teeth, whereas
those of Vy hirsutus are low and wide, Furthermore, they are
differently emplaced in the jaw, in that the enamelled surface in
L. lutifrons lower incisors faees more directly downward, whereas in
Vo Jovsutus it faces as mueh laterally as downwards, Owen (1872
deseribes und figures this contrast—see his pl xxii, fig. &
(*Phascolomys platyrhinus’) and 9 ((*Phascolomus latifrans’’) and
pl. xx, fig. 2a ('Phaseolomys Krefflii’'’) and dai (*Phascolaniys
plotyrhinus’’).

410 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Upper incisors are also distinetive in the two species. Viewed
in position in the skull, I! in L. latifrons is more nearly sealpriform
and more nearly laferally placed than is |’ in V. hirsuluss the latter
has a more nearly equidimensional cross-seetion, and is placed very
obliquely, These differences are also clear in isolated teeth. In
L, latifrons it is in general the broader faces of an 1 tooth whieh are
curved, in FP. harsufus the uarrower faces. Tlowever, individual I'
leeth are not so geometrically regular that gradations are impossible,
and a decision on specific identity might be difficult if one had only
the isolated Jeft T' teeth of W. Aust. Mus, M 6552 (L. latifrons) and
CO.S.1R.0, Wildlife OM 885 (M. hirsutus). T! in M 6562 is rather more
equidimensional than is typieal of L. latifrons, and T' in CM. 335 is
rather less equidimensional than is typical of [. hirsutus.

One very distinetive difference hetween L. latifrons and V.
hirsutus lies in the velative proportions of lower incisor and premolar
teeth, These relative proportions may be expressed as the ratio
between mininmm diameter of Py at the occlusal surtace (irrespective
of direetion), and ‘*width’’ of I; measured as described above across
the enamelled face. In 16 lower incisors of L, latifrous, the ratio
minimum diameter of Pi/‘*width’’ L varied between 78% and 98%.
Tn 51 lower incisors of I’. hirsutus (excluding pouch young specimen
CM 859) this ratio varied between 44% and 64%. In rough terms,
lower incisors and lower premolars are of comparable size in
L. latifrons, whereas in I’. hirsutus, the ineisors are much larger than
the premolars,

Wear on upper incisor teeth in L. latifrons commonly produces
an almost vertical facet on the hinder surface, whereas upper incisors
in TV’, hirsatus commonly show an almost horizontal wear facet. Flow-
ever, Wear facets in other planes commonly accompany these vertieal
or horizontal facets, to the extent that the difference between the
apecies may he obseured.

COMPARISON OF L. LATIFRONS WITH V, TIRSUTUS IN
SKULL AND JAW STRUCTURES OTTER THAN TEBTIT

Since tooth differences between wombat species are to some extent
overshadowed by differences between individuals, bone struetures
assume relatively greater diagnostic importance in fossil wombats
than in many other mammals. Fortunately, many such bone strue-
tures clearly differentiate L. lalifrons from V. hirsutus, and some of
the differences likely to be useful to palacontologists are summarized
in table 1.

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 411

Some of the characters listed in table 1 are reported here for the
first time, others have heen noted by earlier observers (especially
Owen, 1872; Lydekker, 1887; De Vis, 1891; Jones, 1924 and Tate, 1951)
but all have been tested in direct comparisons among my samples.
Amplification of the short statements in table 1 follows.

Minimum width between the alveoli of M? teeth of opposite sides
(measured in a horizontal straight line) appears to me to be a
particularly useful diagnostic character, because it is easily expressed
numerically, and because the numerical values i in the two species show

TABLE 1

Summary of non-dental structures differentiating modern Lasiorhinus latifrons from Vombatus
hireutus. Kor furtiig ‘ry details, see text,

Structure

Nature in L. latifrons

Nature in lV’, hirsutues

. Palate between M! teeth of opposite sides
2, Nasals, ratio (combined) breadth :

length
(of either)

3. Angle between fronto-nasal and inter:

nasal sutures

Wide
About 1

| Close to 90"

Narrow
Much Jess than 1

Much less than 90"

4, Laerymal tubercle 2.0... 0.....0.. sa. | Small Large. with distines
| “neck”
5. Postorbital process . 2.2.0... eee eee Large Small
6. Premaxillary portion of palate ......,., Deeply hollowed Shallow
7. Anterior palatal vacuity .............. Short Long
8, Palate between molars ..........0..04. Smooth Patterned with minor
_ rugosities
9). Bulla, extent of opening (as viewed in | Small Large
prone position)
1), Narial opening, vertical extent (as viewed | Low High
from front)
11, Infraorhital foramen ..............04. Wide Narrow
12, Jugo-masxillary suture abowe M! and M® Markedly convex Weakly or not convex
(as viewed from side) downwards downwards
13, Convexity outwards of maxilla above M* | Flat or slightly concave Convex
14, Supratympanie cell .......20 02. tw Very deep and very long — Shallow
1H. Paroccipitul process 2.2.0... 0.006.060 6. Small Large
16, Upward convexity of 5 symphysial region | Flat. Convex

behind incisors

17, Maximum heivht of ramus ...,...,.... More anterior (below M,) | More posterior (below My)

18. Anterior border of coronvid process at iat anterior (level with © More posterior (level with
molar occlusal level M,—M, interspace) a)

1). Maaseteric fossa .. 0.22.06... aeergaace Shallow Deep

20. Maasseteric foramen .....0...,.-.....-- Absent or small Large

almost no overlap.

“*Wairbank’’ sample of V’.

See fig, 4, which compares my (rather hetero-
geneous) sample of L. latifrons with the homogeneous Dingo Dell
harsutus ; clarity of separation is not blurred

hy the inclusion of seven specimens of V. hirsutus trom other localities,
nor even by the inclusion of my single specimen each of the Tasmanian

and of the Bass Strait islands bare-nosed wombats,

In addition,

412 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

measurements from fragmentary specimens, split along the inter-
maxillary suture, may be used with confidence, since in only one of
my modern specimens of both species (CM 307, V. hirsutus) is there
perceptible asymmetry in this region.

160

&
€ 140
|
3
x
uw
we)
so
~
oO
Cc
i)
a 120
7)
So
m

5 7 9 nN

Least width of palate between M! alveoli of opposite sides—mm

L. latifrons, either sex &
Vv hirsutus, female °
\' Airsutus, male x

Fig. 4. Relationship between basal length of skull and palate width at M1 in modern
wombats. (Same samples as in figs. 1 and 2.)

Not only does fig. 4 show a marked difference between L. latifrons
and V. hirsutus, with very little overlap, by absolute width of palate
at M', but it suggests also that this quantity is almost completely
independent of skull size and therefore probably of age of the

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 413

individaal animal, Thus it may be ¢laimed that the quantity “least
Width of palate at M'"* in wombats can serve much the same diagnostic
Minetion as tooth size serves in the majority of mammals, in which
the teeth, once fully formed and enamelled, do not change further
during the lite of the individual, Fignres 1 and 2 show that size of
the tooth in moder wombats is elosely linked with skull size, and
therefore will not serve to differentiate species; this is a point of some
iiportanee, with a corollary affecting Owen's species ‘\Phascalomys
pareus’*, disenssed below,

Other non-dental distinetions between I’. lalifrows and V, hirsulus
set out m table 1 are in many eases not absolute, Ranges of variation
shown by the composite J. latifrows sample may be vontrasted with
the homogeneous sainple of PV. hivsutus from Dingo Dell—* Fairbank",
for example, in the ratio of combined breadth/length in wasals
(L. latifrons 96% 118% and Ve hirsitus 66%-889-), But in angle
between fronto-nasal and internasal sutures the ranges are L, latifivons
SO-LO0', F. harsilas 50-80°; of 62 skulls of PL hirsulus only one reaches
80°, whereas of 19 Gneasurable) skulls of L, latifrans, only three do
not excecd 80°. Length of the anterior palatal vacnity ranges from
Sto 7mm, in 1, latifrons and from 3 to 13 inm. in WV. hirsndus, though
in the samplo of 52 speeimens of VM. hirsatus, 47 exeeed 7 mm, in leneth
of anterior palatal vacnity, whieh accordingly is entered as ‘long’?
for this species in table 1.

Wor Jess easily measurable characters, it is evrrespondingly less
tasy fo express the extent of any overlap, Por example (huceeal)
convexity in the maxilla just above M* is most easily registered by
touch; #1 of 52 specimens of 1, hirsvfus from Dingo Dell—* Fairbank’
are so registered as markedly convex in this region, and ouly one is
not pereeplibly convex, this one being flat. In 19 specimens of
L, latifrans, eight are slightly convex, eight flat and three. slightly
concave above Mt, Maximum vertical hei@ht of the mandibular ramus
Was judged {to be greatest beneath the posterior lobe of My in one
specimen of L. latifrans and beneath the Ms-Ms intevspace in three
specimens, but in ten (of a total of 19) it is beneath some part of Ms.
Among 52 specimens of 1. hirsutus, the ramus is highest as far forward
as Mz in two specimens (or even the posterior lobe of Mi in pouch
young CM 359) and as far baek as the Ms-My interspace in three
specimens, but in 35 specimens the ramus is highest below some part
of Ma. In L. latifrons, the anterior borders of the eoronoid processes
of opposite sides, lined up in side view at the molar oeclusal level,
fall opposite the hinder lobe of Ma in seven specimens and the middle
of Main one specimen, but in the majority (11 of a total of 19), opposite

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the interspace between Ma and Ms or opposite the forward lobe of
My. In Vy hirsutus, on the other hand, the anterior border of the
coronoid ascends as far forward as the hinder lobe of Ma only in one
specimen (pouch young CM 349), and is as far or further back than
the middle of My in 50 specimens in a total of 62,

The masseterie foramen is recorded in table 1 as ‘large’? in
V’. hirsutus, though its (horizontal) diameter ranged from 7 mm, (in
pouch young CM 359) to 54 mm, in each of two specimens (CM 295
and (M 343); in 87 of 52 specimeus, the diameter of the masseteric
foramen was 4 nun, or more, No speeimen lacked a masseteric
foramen, and three specimens (CM 340, 342, 348) each bore two
foramina. In L. latifrons, three specimens in 19 lacked a masseteric
foramen altogether, one specimen (M 385) lacked one on the right but
showed one on the left, one speeimen (PLC. 152) showed two on the
right side and one on the left, But in no specimen of L, latifrons did
the diameter of the masseteric foramen execed 34 mm.; therefore it
has been entered as ‘tabsent or small’? in L, lalifrons in table 1,

In V. hirsitus the masseteric fossa is generally a deep pouch
separated from the alveolus of Ma by only a thin wall of bone, The
muasseteric fossa is generally much shallower in L. lalifrons, Neverthe
less there is much gradation between the species. [Tf one had only a
small portion of the mandible of the tmmature L, lalifrons specimen
PC. 108 (with a relatively deeply pouched masseteric fossa and a
relatively large masseterie foramen) one might well remain in doubt
whether it represented a very immature VP. hirsulis or a somewhat
older L, latifrons.

Similarly, althoneh the lacrymal tubercle is generally larger in
V. hirsulus than in Ll. letifrows, there is little difference in size of the
lacrymal tubercle between P.C. 162 (L, latifrons) and C.8S.1.R.0. Wild-
life GM 3387 (VM. hirsutis).

Of the other differential characters set out in table 1, there is
considerable gradation between the species in nos. 6 (depth of pre-
axillary portions of palate), 10 (height of narial opening), 12 (down-
ward convexity of jugo-maxillary suture above M' and M*) and 16
(size of the paroeeipital process), On the other hand, nos. 5 (size of
the postorhital process), 9 (extent of the bullar opening) and 14 (size
of the supratympanic cell) appear to be highly diagnostic,

Phascolomys paryus Owen, 1872
Phascolomys parvus is a species of fossil wombats distinguished
hy Owen (1872) [rom other wombat species known to him by the small
size of specimens he assumed to be adult because their teeth were very

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 415

worn. Owen's eoneept of this small wombat species was based on
three specimens now in the fossil maramal collection of the British
Museum (Natural UWistory), and the name 2. paurvus is here fixed impon
one of these specimens by leetotype seleetion,

Selection of lectotype: 1 hereby designate as the leetotype of
Phasecolomys parvus (Owen, 1872) specimen no, 52893 in the collection
of the British Museum (Natural History), This is the specimen stated
hy Lydekker (1887) to be ‘‘the type speeimen’’, The type locality for
P. parvus is Wing’s Creek, Darling Downs, (Queensland,

Qwen (1872) deseribes and figures (wo specimens (specimen
82893—Owen’s pl. 20, fig. 6, 7, 8 and pl. 23, fie, 6, 7 and specimen
82899—pl, 19, fig, 6, 7); lie mentions a think speeimen (829118), and
he figures a fourth specimen (48308x—Owen’s pl. 38, fig, 5, 6) with
deseription in Part 7 of his ‘* Phil. Trans." series, that dealing with
jhe larger fossil wombats. Speeimens 828938, 82899 and 32911 are all
stated by Owen (1872) to come from King’s Creek, Darling Downs,
Queensland, while speciinen 43303 is stated by Lydekker (1887) to come
from ‘fa eavern in the Wellington Valley, New South Wales”.
(liydekker, L887 states that 43303 is a fragment of the right ramus of
a mandible, whereas Owen's (1872) figure shows a left ramus.)

Owen (1872) states that his specimens must be adult heewuse of
“the well worn crowns of the molars’’, Tlowever, marked signs of
wear on molar teeth, even the hindmost molars, do not distinenish
very young from old wombats. For example, CAS.LR.O, Wildlife skull
CM 516, a young female with its basisphenoid-basioceipital suture still
wide open, its interfrontal suture still plainly visible and a ‘basal
length?" of only 105 mm., shows wear on M} teeth comparable with the
wear on M4 teeth in CM $32, an older female ol basal length 166 mm,
with completely fused basioceipital-basisphenoid and interfrontal
stilures. Wear on the teeth of pouch young specimen ('M 359 (basal
length 65 moi) has been mentioned above under the heading
“Comparison of molar teeth of 4, lahfreus with those of V. hirsutus?’.
Mividently, at some growth stage between basal skull lengtls of abort
65 in, and about 100 mm,, all molar teeth in imodern TW) hirsutius
nssume flat wear faces.

AMthough Owen (1872, p. 185) realized that wombat teeth increase
in sive as the individual grows, apparently he did not appreciate the
mawiitude of this growth, for he used tooth size aniong other variates
fo draw distinctions between P, platyrhinus, Poomitehelli and P,
vonbatus, as well as elsewhere citing small tooth size as one of the
characters diagnostic of Po parvus. Figures 1 and 2 above show that

416 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tooth size in both modern L. latifrons and modern V. hirsutus varies
directly with ave (as measured by basal length of skull) in the
individual.

[ suggest that Owen's P. parvus was based on juvenile specimens
of some other species. Figure 5 below shows smaller and larger
spee'mons of VW. hirsudis, both females, both taken in the same year
from the sane breeding population, and yet differing from one another
in the same manner as Owen (1872) differentiates his P. parvus lrom
P. vombatus (iis name for the living bare-nosed wombats of Tasmania)
and P. platyrhinus (his name for the living bare-nosed wombats of
the Australian mainland). Table 2 below sets Owen’s description of
P. parvus alongside descriptions of two young specimens of VW. hirsutus
from the Dingo Dell—*Fairbank’’ series,

OS2kO
Wilditte

UM Sie

Fig. 5. Compxrison of footh sizes in younger (left) and older (right) speeimens, beth
fomales of Vombatus hirsutus taken in 1960 trom the Dingo Dell—** Fairhank?* population
near Canberra, Specimen CM 312 agrees with Phascolumys parvits Owen, 1872.

This detailed comparison of P. parvus with juvenile V. hersutus
reveals some discrepancies. But Owen’s statements in his text (Owen,
1872) sometimes do not quite agree with his illustrations, which are
stated all to be ‘‘of natural size’’; examples are marked * in table 2

=.

MERRILEES—HEAD CHARACTERS OF WOMBATS 417

Further, Owen’s (Queensland) specimens and Dingo Dell—‘‘ Fairbank’’
specimens OM 312 and CM 316 certainly represent different popula-
tions and may have been of slightly different growth stages. Therefore,
it is still reasonable, in spite of the slight discrepancies, to suggest
that Phascolomys parvus Owen, 1872 is conspecific with the Dingo
Dell—*‘ Fairbank’? sample of Vombatus hirsutus (Perry, 1810). If
so, Owen’s prophecy (1872, p. 255) that ‘*. . . the diminutive Phase.

parvus may yet be found living .’’ had probably been fulfilled
even before he made it.

TABLE 2

Comparison of Phascolomys parvus Owen with juveniles of Vombatus hirsutus (Perry)—left

mandibular rami.

Character Examined

P. parvus
Data from Owen
| (1872) and Lydekker
| (1887) anatomical

V. hirsutus—juveniles
Original data from C.S.1.R.0. series,
Dingo Dell—‘‘Fairbank”, N.S.W.

notation revised D.M. CM 312 CM 316
Length P,—M,, at occlusal faces | 34mm,-36mm. | 35.6mm. .......... 35.5mm.
Backward extent of symphysis | *M,-M, .......... Me-My -. eee veut Hind lobe M,
Hind contour of symphysis ... | Lobate ........... Lobate ........... Lobate

Occlusal face P,

Major and minor axes of P,
Maximum length or width in
any molar
Fore lobe M,
Hind lobe M,
Hinder part of diastemal tract.

Mental foramen

Outer enamelled surface I, ...

Floor of pterygoid fossa
Length of base of coronoid process
Vertical diameter I,..........

axis nearly parallel*

with jaw-line
4.3x2.2mm.......
*Less than 7.5mm.

Smaller than other
lobes of molars
Bounded by ridge,

and transversely
concave
About half-way
between alveoli of
P, and I,
Transversely and
vertically convex
Partially divided
ce. 18mm...........
*Equal to occlusal
length M,

Sub-elliptic, long
axis transverse to
jaw-line

4.4.x 2.9mm. ......

M, = 7.8mm. .....

Slightly smaller than
other lobes

Bounded by ridge,
and slightly
concave

Nearer to P,

Transversely and
vertically convex

Partially divided

ce. 16mm...........

Less than occlusal
length M,

Elliptic, long axis
transverse to
jaw-line

4.6 x 2.8mm.

M; = 8.1mm.

Slightly smaller than
other lobes

Bounded by ridge,
and slightly
convex

Nearer to P,

Transversely and
vertically convex

Partially divided

ce. 15mm.

Less than occlusal

length M,

In all specimens, lower contour of ramus, relative depth of masseteric fossa, relative width of
ectalveolar groove, and shape and relative size of lower incisor agree with older specimens from C.S.1.B.0.

series.

* Owen’s statement, apparently not in agreement with his illustrations.

IT am grateful to Mr.

J.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Hi, Calaby (C.S.1.R.O, Division of Wildlife Research) for

arranging the loan of the large sample of Vombatus hirsutus skulls and jaws on which this
study is largely based, and for his comments at several stages of the work. Dr. P. Croweroft
and Mr. P. F. Aitken (both of the South Australian Museum) very kindly supplied juvenile
specimens of Lasiorhinus latifrons to supplement the sample otherwise available to me.

418 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dr. W. D, L. Ride and Dr. G. M, Storr (Wesvern Australian Museum) have given me valuable
advices and criticism at several stages. I am grateful to the Directors of the National Muscum
of Victorian and the Australian Museum, Sydney, for permission to examine specimens in their
care, and to Messrs. T, A. Darragh and MH, O, Fletcher for facilitating these observations.
I have profited from discussions with Mr. H, E, Wilkinson (National Museum of Victoria)
on the interpretation of numerous fossil wombat specimens under investigation by him,
Mr. D, G. Gordon took the photograph here reproduced as fig. 5.

REFERENCES

Bensley, B. A., 1903: On the evolution of the Australian Marsupialia. ‘Trans, Linn. Soe.
Lond. Zool. (2)9: 88-217.

De Vis, C. W., 1891: Remarks on post-Tertiary Phaseolomyidac. Proe, Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
(2)6: 235-246.

Dechaseaux, C., 1958: Traité de Paléontologic, Tome 6. L’origine des Mammiféres . .
Vol. 2 (ed. J. Piveteau--Masson: Paris).

Glauert, L., 1912: Fossil remains from Balladonia in the Eucla Division. Ree. W. Aust.
Mus., 1: 47-65,

lredale, T. and ‘Troughton, E. le G., 1984: A check-list of the mammals reeorded from
Australia. Mem. Aust. Mus. 6.

Jones, F. Wood, 1924: The Mammals of South Australia, Pt, 2 (Govt. Print.: Adelaide).

Longman, H. A., 1939: A central Queensland wombat. Mem. Qd. Mus., 11: 283-287.

Lydekker, R., 1887: ‘‘Catalogue of the fossil Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural
History)’’. Pt. 5 |Phascolomyidae 146-160]. (Br ‘ish Museum (Natural
History): Tondon.)

Owen, R., 1872: On the fossil mammals of Anstralia. Part 6. Genus Phascolomys Geoffr.
Phil. Trans. 1872; 173-196.

Tate, G. I, IL, 1951: The wombats (Marsupialia, Phascolomyidae). Amer. Mus. Novit. no,
1525: 1-18,

‘Tucker, R., 1954; Pronounced parameral differentiation in the wombat (Lasiorhinus).
Proce. roy. Soc. Qd., 65: 71-74,

aD

RON SCEPARNODON RAMSAYI OWEN 1884: THE SELECTION OF A
LECTOTYPE, THE CLARIFICATION OF ITS TYPE LOCALITY, AND ON
ITS IDENTITY WITH PHASCOLONUS GIGAS (OWEN, 1859)

BY W. D. L. RIDE

Summary

In 1873 Gehard Krefft wrote, “I found one very thin tooth some years ago of a very peculiar form.
It has the shape of a piece of hoop iron, is 5 % inches long 1 /% inches wide and 1/8 of an inch thick,
and much worn below, showing the marks of the great lower tusks, and has belonged to a peculiar
type of Diprotodon”.

ON SCEPARNODON RAMSAYI OWEN, 1884: THE SELECTION
OF A LECTOTYPE, THE CLARIFICATION OF ITS TYPE
LOCALITY, AND ON ITS IDENTITY WITH PHASCOLONUS
GIGAS (OWEN, 1859)

By W. D.1L. RIDE, Tan Western Avsrracian Mussum, Perera, WA,

Jn 1873 Gerhard Kretft wrote, ‘Tl found one very thin tooth some
years ago of a very peculiar form. It has the shape of a piece of hoop

iron, is 54 inches long, 1$ inches wide and #th of an inch thick, and

much Worn below, showing the marks of the great lower tusks, and has
helonged to a peeuliar kind of Diprotodon’’.

Some years later, Kretft’s successor at the Australian Museum,
I. P, Ramsay, saw a similar tooth among a collection of fossils which
he was asked to determine at the Melbourne Kixhibition of 1880
(October 1, 1880-April 18, 1881), Ramsay knew nothing of the loeality
from which this specimen came beyond the fact that it was the property
of the South Australian Institute and came from ‘the eentral part
of South Australia, T believe near Lake Kyrie’? (Ramsay, 1882).
Ramsay had this tooth cast and set it, together with a cast of another
specimen which he found in the collection of the Australian Museum
(no, F 9928), to Sir Richard Owen.

At the meeting of the Linnean Society of New South Wales on
October 27, 1880, Ramsay exhibited his discovery, proposing the new
generic name Scepurnodon tor it ‘ffrom the adze-like character of the
upper incisor’, Ramsay, too, thought that if represented a new
marsupial allied to Miprotedon (Ramsay, 1881).

Like the South Australian speeimen, the tooth in the Australian
Muscum was also from a locality unknown to Ramsay but its measure-
ments agree reasonably well with those originally mentioned by
Krefft in 1878 and it is presumably the same specimen, At present
nothing is known of its origin beyond Krefft’s original statement.
Additional copies of the cast of the South Australian specimen are in
the Australian Museum today (A 9851, lL 1308); these were east by
H. Barnes.

Soon alter Owen reecived these casts he received a specimen of
Sceparnodon sent by Mr. (. H. Hartiann® of ‘oowoomba, Queensland,
who had collected it at King Creek on the Darling Downs (Brit. Mus.
(Nat, Hist.) no. M1917). The two casts and the Queensland specimen

"The donor Was cited aa Harman by Owen, eorreeted to Martmami by Lydakker (1887) p. 158.
Mr. A. Bartholomai informs mo that a Mr. WH. Thirtmnun of Toowoomba, Old, collected
Tossil mammals now in the Queensland Musean

420 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

formed the basis of lis description of the new species Sceparnodan
ramsayi Owen, 1884 but, to the present, the whereabouts of the South
Australian syntype has been unknown.

Comparison of the casts retained by Ramsay in the Australian
Musenin (of the South Australian specimen) with Sceparnodon teeth
in the South Australian Musenm leaves no doubt that the original of
them is South Australian Museum specimen no. P 5018 (see fig. 1,
B,D). This tooth was collected in the bed of Salt Creek, Normanville,
South Australia (Stirling 1913, p. 140).

P 5018 agrees closely with Owen's figures and with the original
casts in the Australian Museum except that today its proximal part
has been further broken away. By modern standards, the casts are
rather poor but are nevertheless good enough to show that the distal
edwe of the fossil and its shape agree with therm and, in partienlar,
such individual peculiarities as the rugosities in the enamel, its wear
facets, and {he minor chips in the cutting edge of the tooth, are matched
perfectly by similar peculiarities in the casts. his specimen was also
fiewred and deseribed by Stirling (1913, p. 140 and pl, 45, fig. 6, 7);
although he need it as a basis for comparison with his specimens of
Phaseolonus gigas, he was not aware thal it was one of the syntypes.
Its registration number (P5078) has been given in recent times and
there is no original lubel, The souree of it is given as Sir Kdward
Stirling, Unfortunately, Stirling has given no precise date of
collection of this specimen, but says of fossils from Normanvyille
(footnote to p. 162) ‘fas recorded in the Proceedings of the South
Australian Royal Society vol, TIL (Abstract of Proceedings), p. Xx,
remains of Phascolonns were obtained from this locality as early as
1879, some of which are those stated to have been sent to Professor
Owen for identification, but the remainder cannot be traeed’’, His
statement that specimens from Normaniville were seul to Owen cannot
refer to any incisors of Phascolonis becanse Owen determined the
material and identified it with Diprotoden, Procoptodon qohah and
Phascolomys gigas (Waterhouse 1880); Owen regarded Sceparnodon
as being «distinet from P. gigas and would have used that name lor

FIG. |

Comparison of one of the original casts. ( A, () of Seeparnedon Siinsiat Owen with
SA. Mos, specimen No. A018 (1%, D) the designated lectotype.

‘he occlusal (lingual) surfaces (A, B) show position of wear facets and of individual
damape (the specimen seem to have sutvered some slight ndditional damage of the centre of
ite purfuce sinee the vast was (akon),

Although the cast is net good Ty modern stundards, sutlieiont surface texture remains
to allow Comparison of individual fewtures such as the pattern of ewarnel ripples CA, D),

RIDE—SCEPARNODON RAMSAYI

422 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

incisors. Moreover, had the flat incisor been sent to Owen at that.
time, it would have reached him before the casts from Ramsay upon
which Owen based the name Sceparnodou ramsayt.

It is known that collections of {fossils were also made from
Normanville subsequent to 1879 but beyond a note in Stirling
(pp. 161-2) that one of these specimens was a femur of P. gigas, it is
not known what these comprise, There is certainly no evidence that
P 5018 belones to this later collection, and its agreement with the
casts of the syntype is so good that 1 have no hesitation in deciding
that it is the original from which they were made,

There is some confusion over the localities from which Owen’s
original specimens were collected due to the mention of Gelgoine
Station as a loeality in Owen’s original description. In this, Owen
published a paraphrased version of a letter from Ramsay to lim in
whieh he describes the teeth to which he had earlier given the generie
name Sceparnodon. The last sentence of the letter says “‘thore
numbered A 3292, A 3295 came from Gelgoine Station . . .’? and the
impliestion is that this locality applies to the Sceparnodon teeth.
ITowever, Mr. J. A. Mahoney (pers, comm.) has established that the
specimens sent to Owen from Gelgoine Station sare mandibles of
Diprotodon, and the full text of Ramsay’s letter (Ramsay, 1882) makes
it eloay that it is about a consignment of speeimens which comprised
more than the flat teeth alone.

Designation of lectotype: ‘Vhe locality from which the incisor
tooth specimen no, P5018 in the South Australian Museum was colleeted
is well established and since it (and additional material from Salt
Creck, Normanville) formed the basis of comparison —hetween
Sceparnodon and Phascolonus in Stirling’s (1913) monograph on
Phasvolonus gigas, | hereby designate no, P 5018 to be the lectotype
of Sceparnodon ramsayi Owen, 1884.

Identity with Phascolouus gigas (Owen, 1859); From the time of
Krefft’s first statement that Scepernodon teeth came from aA
Diprotodon, to the present, there has been considerable diseussion as

FIG, 2

A. © Phagenlomyst! medins Owen: to show characteristic fared premaxilliiry patiobe
common to giant wombats (Specimen Brit, Mas. (Nat. Hist.) no. 32904, from Owen, 1877
Foss, Mam. .lust., vol. 2, pl 58, fig. 2),

BK, Photographie reconstruction of Stirling’s specimen, The maxilliny toothrows hive
heen straightened and symmetry restored in the premaxillary region.

(‘The palate of Stirliny’s specimen as restored by Stirling. Displieement OF Tet
P4 aul M1 towards the midline hag not been corrected; the premaxillary region has been
poorly restored with plaster and the left imeisor inserted.

RIDE—SCEPARNODON

RAMSAYI

423

424 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

to whether these strange incisors belong to a wombat or to a
diprotodontid (see Ride 1964, p. 125); the argument was thought to
have been settled by Stirling who claimed to have found Sceparnodon
teeth in the skull of the giant wombat Phascolonus but, in recent
times, Stephenson (1964) has claimed that the premaxillary teeth of
Stirling’s specimen (which are undoubtedly Sceparnodon incisors) ilo
not belone with the maxilla (which is undoubtedly Phascolonus). I
have examined Stirling’s specimen carefully and am satisfied that
Stephenson’s conclusion is false; the restoration only looks improbable
(see fie, 2 C) as a result of the distortion of the maxilla through
erushine in the region of the left P! M', If this seetion of the maxilla
is straightened out (as it is in the photographie restoration presented
here, fig. 2 B) the resulting fossil is no more improbable in structure
than the premaxilla of any of the other giant wombats (¢.9.,

LG. 3

Stirling's specimen of Phascolonus gigas trom the right side, The ventral surface is
uppermost. Note the coutinuity of bone from the alveolus of the right ineisor through to the
maxillary toothrow. Note also the correspondence of the bony ridge on both sides of the
fracture which runs vertically from the anterior root of P4 (see insert for detail). The white
scale block on the top right hand side of this illustration is 4 mm. wide.

RIDE—SCEPARNODON RAMSAYI 425

“Phascolomys’’ medius Owen; see fig. 2 A) which are characterized
by a widely-flaring and deeply-domed premaxillary palate like that of
a much-exaggerated Lasiorhinus latifrons.

Moreover, if the lateral aspect of the right side of the rostrum
of Stirling’s specimen he inspected (fig. 3) bone is found to he
continuous from the alveolus of the Sceparnodon. incisor to the
maxillary teeth except where the rostrum is fractured through the
anterior edge of the premolar. At this point of break, the two edges
fit well together and I have no doubt that they are correctly positioned
because the bony ridge which marks the position of the buecal-mass
is present and continuous on both sides of the break.

REFERENCES
frefft, G., 1873: Sydney Mail, Sept. 6th 1873, p. 302, eol. 2,
Liydekker, BR., 1887: Catalogue of the fossil Mammalia in the TPritish Museum (Natural
History), Part V, p. 158.
Owen, RK. 18S4: Description of teeth of a large extinet (Marsupial ?) genus. Phil. Trans.,
175; 245-248, pl. 11 (numbered 12 in error).
Kamsay, E, P., 1881: Notes and exhibits. Proc, Linn. Soe, N.S,W., 5: 495.
— 1882: Letter Ramsay to Owen dated 27 Oct. 1881, in N.S.W. Votes und Proceedings
of the Leyistative Assembly during the sessian 1882. **Pxploration of the Caves
and Rivers of New South Wales (Minutes, Reports, Correspondence, Accounts) ’?,
pp. 37, 8.
Ride, W. DD. L., 1964: A review of Australian fossil Marsupials. J. roy. Suc. W. Aust.,
47: 97-131.

Stephenson, N. G., 1964; On fossil Giant Wombats and the identity of Seeparnadon ramsayi.
Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., 142: 537-546.

Starling, E., 113: On the identity of Phascolomys (Phascolonus) gigas, Owen, and
Sesparnodon ramsayi, Owen; with a description of some of its remains, Mem,
Roy. Soe. 8, Aust., 1: 127-178.

Waterhouse, F. G,, 1880: Exhibits and notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 3: xx,

A NEW TERTIARY FORMATION AND FAUNA FROM THE TIRARI
DESERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. A. STIRTON, R. H. TEDFORD AND M. O. WOODBURNE

Summary

This report describes a new continental formation and vertebrate fauna from the east shore of Lake
Negapakaldi, a salt pan in the central Tirari Desert lying between the Birdsville stock route and the
eastern shoreline of Lake Eyre in South Australia. The formation is a stream channel of friable,
poorly sorted, pebble conglomerates, and shales cut into folded claystones of the mid-Tertiary
Etadunna Formation.

The mammals are mostly woodland kinds, including koala-like, and ringtail and brushy-tail arboreal
forms. A dasyurid, two bandicoots, a wombat, two rat kangaroos, a protemnodont macropodid, and
a diprotodontid are also present. Most of the fossils are isolated teeth but there are several well
preserved mandibles and numerous foot bones. Four isolated teeth questionably referred to the
Monotremata are described. A new genus of wombat and a new genus of koala are proposed.

Other fossils include fish, chelonians, crocodile teeth, a lizard jaw and foot bones of a large emulike
bird. Associated with the vertebrate fossils are impressions of Eucalyptus leaves and evidence of
other plants.

The age of the formation and fossils is tentatively dated as Miocene.

A NEW TERTIARY FORMATION AND FAUNA FROM THE
TIRARL DESERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(A Contribution from the Museum of Paleontology, University of
California, Berkeley)

By R. A. STIRTON', RB. H. TE DFORD?, anv M. O. WOODBURNE?

ABSTRACT
This report describes a new continental formation and vertebrate
fauna from the east shore of Lake Ngapakaldi, a salt pan in the central
Tirari Desert lying between the Birdsville stock ronte and the eastern
shoreline of Lake Kyre in South Australia. The formation is a stream
channel of friable, poorly sorted, pebble conglomerates, and shales ent
into folded claystones of the mid-Tertiary Etadunna Formation.

The mammals are mostly woodland kinds, including koala-like, and
ringtsil and brushy-tail possum-like arboreal forms. A dasyurid, two
bandicoots, a wombat, two rat kangaroos, a protemnodont macropodid,
and a diprotodontid are also present. Most of the fossils are isolated
teeth but there are several well preserved mandibles and numerous
foot bones. Four isolated teeth questionably referred to the
Monotremata are described, A new genus of wombat and a new genus
of koala are proposed.

Other fossils include fish, cheloutans, crocodile teeth, a lizard jaw
and foot bones of a large emulike bird, Associated with the vertebrate
fossils are impressions of Muealyptis leaves and evidenee of other
plauts.

The ave of the formation and fossils is tentatively dated as
Miocene,

INTRODUCTION

During the past ten vears a sequence of middle to late Cainozoic
formations and vertebrate fuannas have been recognized by the South
Australian Museum-University of California Expeditions in the Tirari
Desert of the Lake Eyre region m South Austraha. A preliminary
report on this sequence was presented by Stirton, Tedford and Miller
in L961, The oldest unit is the vather widespread laenstrine Mtadunna
Formation (see Johus and Ludhbrook, 1968) and its Neapakaldi verte-
brate fauna which was tentatively dated as late Oligocene. Following

Museum of Paleontology, University of California, Berkeley,
2 Department of Vertelrate Paleontology, The Araerieain Museurn of Natural History, New York
* Departuent of Geolovies! Seienees, Coiversity of California. Riverside.

428 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

deposition, the Fitadunna and underlying Mesozoic formations were
moderately folded by an uplift that is thought to have ocenrred along
un antielinal axis roughly paralleled by the Marree-Birdsyille stock
ronte east of Lake Eyre.

Uplift along the eastern margin ol (he Lake Hiyre basin modified
the depositional regime within the basin with the result that stream
channel and floodplain sands, silts and ¢lays were snperimposed on
fhe folded Mdadunna lacustrine deposits. The deposits of the new
regime were recognized (Stirton, Tedford, and Miller, 1961) as three
formational units, the Mampuwordu Sands, the Tirari Formation, and
the Katipii Sands which probably range in age from late Pliocene
through late Pleistocene respectively. Tt was formerly thought that
(he relatively long period between the deposition of the Mtadunna
Formation and the Mampnwordu Sands was not represented hy
recognizable reek units or by fossil vertebrates in the Tirari Desert.

Myvidence of an old strean-chanunel deposit that falls within this
interval was discovered by Paul F. Lawson during the course of field
exploration on the 1962 expedition, ‘These deposits, hereim deseribed
as the Wipajiri! Wormation, were the subject of a preliminary
deseription by us in 1964. The Wipajirt Formation contains a diverse
vertebrate assemblage designated as the Kutjamarpn® fauna, Leal
Impressions were found in the shales of the upper part of the Wipajirt
Formation. Collection of the leal impressions was hindered by the
fuet that the damp shales enrled upon drying, They also were
broken apart by the expansive nection of salt erystals which formed on
and between the laminae when exposed to the san and air, We were
able to seenre a few impressions, however, and these, aloug with
earefenl sketches (fig, 5) made at the oulerop in the field, have been
studied by Dr. Harry D. MacGinitie, Research Associate of the Museum
of Paleontology. Dr. MaeGinitie has kindly permitted us to use the
following statement, sent to the senor author in the form of a letter
dated February 19, 1965:

"Nhe lat fossils brought to me by Mr. Michael Woodburne trom the Australian locity
ba V GSE on the east shore of Lake Nyapakeldi are claurly the impressions of some: species
Ot Biedhyphis, Al ough there is not enough material on whith te formally deseribe a new
spadivs, Poa definitely say that the identification is without question,

Phe jimpressions are those of Janveolare faleate lewyves, width 2 om., length 4 em,
(from the drawing made at the site); midril slender; secondaries numerous. thin, fexnous,
unsing af angles of 46°, branching and duastomosing tear the margin to form a characteristic
neeginad hem jast within (he margin; lertinry venation consisting of elongated meshes, the

greatest langth of the moshes parallel to fhe secondaries, Tho loaf is marked by tumerous
xonbterdd, sclerophyllous dots which are navally seen in the leaves of the living speeies,

VHopayet. Trani name for a site along the eastern side of Lake Nyapakaldi, meaning
walereourse or stream; approved by the State Nomenclature Conuniltes of South Australia,

Sulianorpa. New faunal name from the Tirari word moaning “many leaves ’’; approved
by the State Nomenclature Committee of South Australia.

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 429
TERTIARY FAUNA

‘Although it does not seem possible tu distinguish the living speeies of Fucalyptis on
the basis of their foliage alone, it may be profitable to eall attention to the resemblance of
the fossil impressions to the lenves of several species of Janeeolate-leafed gums such as
Kk. margineata Smith, A. longifolia Link, or FB. propingua Deane & Maiden.*?

| Aagenorie L/
pew , lL, Howilr

Kalom vA

I)
Mungoranieg@y_,
C2

4 Nga, 5 kaldi
bhi igapakaldi
pee i sWipajiri

S3V6213
Pi ikea tol Sy 5858

OL Kanunke
4 L. Puntawolona
ns)

\ “Cap,
r ¢
P Vereoe!
White Crossing er
iat

@ Mulke

Mam puwordu,
L Pal k f ordain
. a/an aie Bore

oF i

@ Dulkaninna

‘wEtodunna

ras

oO

n
3
a
n
So

V62|35' Kutjamorpu fauno. n Base from Stirion, Tedford ond
V5858: Ngapakaldi founda. Miles Miller, [963
X= position of L.Ngapakaldi on jndex map.
RIG. 1
Map of Tirari Desert, east of Lake Eyre, South Ausiralia, Note position of Lakes
Neapakaldi, Puntawolona and Palankarinna,

Beginning about 1,200 feet uerth of Locality V5858 on the east
shore of Lake Neapakaldi (fig. 1), ferruginous conglomerates, sand-
stones and dark grey claystones crop out in an area about 50 feet wide
and 900 feet long which follows the northeast trend of the shoreline of
the lake (fig, 2). At the south end of the onterop, the deposits are
lost in the eypsiferous silts of the salt pan; to the north they are
covered by Quaternary or Recent sand dunes. The Wipajiri Formation

430 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

¢
Meosveed Sectivn #3
ve2i3
A

Mecsuree Section wt

Ftedunne furmation, covered by dune sone

B

Meceolen Teche WE

;

PLAN VIEW OF EAST SHORELINE
OF LAKE NGAPAKALDI SHOWING
POSITIONS OF MEASURED SECTIONS
AND OUTCROP PATTERN OF WIPAJIRI n
FORMATION (245), ‘ a

CROSS SECTION BETWEEN POINTS
A.B, AND C OF ABOVE PLAN VIEW. 4

SYMBOLS

DOLOMITIC a INTRAFORMATIONAL

CHANNEL MUDSTONE GLAYSTOWE BRECCIA

GRAY wnAY
CLAYSTONE CLAY STOWE

FIG, 2
(Above.) Plan view of east shore of Lake Ngapakaldi between fossil sites V-5858
and V-6213,
(Below.) Cross-section constructed between measured sections 1, 2 and 4 of the above plan
view, showing northward dip of Etadunna Formation. Wipajiri Formation is channelled
into the Etadunna at V-6213.

occurs in a north-easterly trending stream channel which is cut down
into the claystones of the Etadunna Formation. Although the relations
hetween the two formations appear disconformable, a slight angular
unconformity is indicated by low angle tilting of the Etadunna Forma-
tion (strike N. 30°H., dip 2°NW). There is, however, no evidence for
or against the Wipajiri being involved in the tilting, because of the
limited extent of the exposure and the nature of the contact between
the formations,

STIRTON,

TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT
TERTIARY FAUNA

ection 3

\ x
ANN oS
ANY ¥
AMY) =
SATA \ =
ww Wy E
Vy Le

da 44l
saa

yi
tty!

: i
4 jit ad
pe aTTAL I
Nii | =|
a
=]
«
I
rs »
z =
Fo) ra
ea A
25 CS
=3 =
5 =|
ra
<
c ec
5 t
= =
a
Ps
=
x
rn =
an 22 oS
HAH 2 aos
| coo — 2
it az ote,
mu 5
g= Hos
5
S
&
— =
ll) 2 hal
nV Fe tod
ly i
i] | 4 x
| 2 =
ily
=
cd
=
: 2
ws foal = w
23) fico) we Ei
oT Wy oe i=
Ve ‘lat
oe Was &
7 rip] a
ig) ae Sn
: x
we é =
a)
7s
v
3S
=
roe [ae]
. =
7 oy
or als at
* 2
7 a
Let 5

asured sections 5, 4 and 5 from which the block diagram was

drawing shows location of me

eonstrueted,

431

432 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The Wipajiri Formation can be subdivided into a basal coarse
clastic portion overlain by finely laminated leaf-bearing shales (fig. 12,
B). The coarse clasties (units 3 and 5 of measured section 5 in
Appendix) contain the vertebrate remains, while the upper shales
contain impressions of Hucalyptus leaves. The type locality of the
formation is at UCMP Locality V6213 (fig. 12, A), 1,835 feet ... 1°R.
of Locality V5858 (fig. 2). The outline of the main quarry at V6213
as well as the positions of other pits and measured sections is shown

in fig. 4.

Sketch map of pits and measured
sections at V62I3

Shore line
of ~ V62/3
Lake Ngapokaldi Prk A QUARRY

Line of Section 5

Section 4

Pit 2

Section 3

FIG, 4
Diagram showing location of pits. measured sections and outline of main quarry at
V-6213,

STIRTON, TELFORD, anp WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 443
TERTIARY FAUNA

The lower part of the Wipajiri Formation is composed of # basal
conglomerate sequence (see measured section 5, Appendix A). The
basal conglomerate is considerably coarser and more heterogeneous
than the pebble conglomerate and apparently represents a more
youthlal stage of erosion with greater competence and velocity of the
stream. The first two units ave limited to the central part of the
channel (see the block diagram, fig. 5) and are truncated by the pebble
conglomerate, The latter unit contaims the bulk of the Kutjamarpu
fauna. The Fucalyptus-bearing shales of the upper, fmely laminated
portion of the formation lave also yielded oceasional turtle and fish
remains in association with lenses of white sand.

Fortinately, the excavation represented by seetion 4 (fig. 4) 1s
nearly perpendicular to that of section 5 so that the configuration of
the channel may be readily seen (fig. 8). The trace of the deepest
part of the ehamnel trends about N. 26°K,, whieh may explain the
north-easterly trend of the ovterop pattern along the east shore of
the lake. Figure 2 shows the northward element of the north-westerly
dip of the Mtadunna Formation between Vo8o8 and V6213; fig. 2 and
8 show that the Wipajiri is channeled into the hght grey and dark
erey claystones of the Etadunna Formation. The dip of the Mtadunna
accounts tor the fact that the Wipajiri Fomnation does not extend
down to the fossiliferous green claystone of the Etadunna Formation,
eyen though V6218 is topographically lower than V5858,.

The Mampuwordu Sands at Lake Palakariuna represent a later
pliase of fluviatile deposition in the Tirari Desert. This deposit is
composed of relatively clean white sands, ght grey lenticular elay-
stones, alone with fragments of limestone derived from the Kftadunna
Formation and shows the following differences when compared with
(he Wipajiri Formation:

Mampuwordu Sands
| Lake Palankarinne |
1, Main clastie constituent is quarhe sand,
white to yellow, with only Toeal centers of
limunite stain.
2, Clay oecurs mainly ns lenses,
3. Derived lasts inelude durivrust pebyles,
Etadunna linwstone fragments, milley quarts
pebbles.

4. Crosshedding canspiious and obrerae-
feristie,

5, Commanty a gypsum dayer at bosal
eontiet.

6, On the whole, finer grained, cleaner,
bobher sorbed.

Wipajirl Mormation
| Lake Nygapakuldi]
1, Main ehistic constituent is quitnta sand,
clear fo amber, but more uniformly eoveved
by limonite stain.

2. Choy overs in anere persistent berks.

i. Derived clasts inelace durierust pebbles,
ervopulir Cragments of ehert, forrupinaus
pebbles and cobbles, pre-Kiadunna sand
stone pebbles, Mtidunnat claystone, sancdatone
iol enlenreous midstone pebbles and cobblas,

4. Crovshediding vot evident,
5. No gypsum laver at basal contaet,

6. On the whole, coarser grained (in basal
4), more heterogencous, less well suerte,

444 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The ‘dirtier’, generally coarser, more heterogeneous character of
the Wipajiri Formation in contrast fo the Mampuwordn Sands may be
explained by au differenee in souree. The Wipajirt may also represent,
at least in its initial deposits, a time of greater stream velocity and
competence in a younger stage of erosion due to greater topographic
elevation of the source area associated with regional uplift. ‘Regional
uplitt is reflected in the change from fine grained elastic and chemical
sediments of the Mtadunna to the coarser fluviatile deposits of the
Mampuwordu Sands . . 2°? (Stirton, Tedford and Miller, 1961, p. 87).
The contrast between the Etadunna and Wipajir Formations affords
the same inference, Also, the Mtadunna is tilted at both Lakes
Palankarinna and Neapakaldi, although to a greater dewree at the
former, “At Lake Palankarinna the Ktadunna Formation was folded
into a broad syneline before the Mampuwordn Sands and horizontally
bedded 'Tirari Formidion were deposited. This folding may have
rorresponded with movements along the Mesozoic-early Tertiary anti,
clinal axis immediately to the southeast because the formations over
Iving the Etadunna are poorly sorted fuviatile deposits viel in
fragments derived trom a durierusted terrain’? (Stirton, Tedford and
Miller, 1961, p. 82). Sueh an uplifted Mesozoic-early Tertiary anti-
elimal axis also may have served as the source for the Wipajiri
lormation, in whieh case the terrain between the source and site of
deposition (V6213) would have been of sufficient diversity to supply
the durierust and chert fragments, large hematitie clasts, pre-Ktadunna
stndstoue clasts, and large Mtadunna green claystone, sandstone and
caleareous mudstone clasts fonnd in the basal unit of the Wipajiri.

Nearly all of the larger closte within (he Wipagirt Bormation (iu le brieed ta souries
Weothe Himediaie aren or régions farther Gast or southeast. Mie coarse elastic portion of this
Povoiation ia ide up fod Tere ested Dy round pebble to volidle sived olusts of green and
grey sandstone and elaystone, mod white (usually mottled yellow by secondary Timonite)
eolanreoue mniistone derived From the immediately underlying Etadunon Pernintion The
Holk Of est chiate are freon anntstones. and Silty ar chivey sandstotes whieh de mot crap
mt Tn the wear Vieiniby and aire relitively rue in the Iciown oufevops of the ftadanna
Mormation. These pratwhly represent basin margin fieies of that formetion whieh waa berg
aively stripped when the Wipijia Was being dni clown, Other qepilinecous Btedlunnw eliste
cha he ftraiced to sonteoe af duals Naonpekeld) or in the mete vicinibys

Vio itedbaaek elasty include a variety of corks mest uf whieh have leon observed ia oulenops
iH He aeticlinal oplifts to the ere. These inelude duricrust fragments roid trgwnente at
hlisvehead sandstone, The patishal gry dirierast pebbles, atten thteme sided, abe types
eheommbered: Tn the Tita oratationy aon fie tive beon derived: (rode Chat Coroation.
hoe drreguhor chert chosbs aired Tyree Cerragiyous Craaients tiaye diol Teen observed in aay
vt the previously degeribod Chinozoie deposits in the "Pirael Desert,

The thunkont ferrovinate elasts resiible lateeties in that thes rere heave, wesiealar, den
Heh CAL MevOn) vorke. They hive d granular ftestore, with grins aboat me size of a
fheditne to ties sed CPhie reteets fhe fective of the parent sridatane: heemise abindan
Qderty gosias Of somaibor sive dirs pregerverl ETese ae seer ba be more eoriplataby replaced
ie Timenite ar hematite ia the parte of Che elists whieh Jawe The peddest colour. The Targest
Vermigihous ehists observed were over 12 feelies tay ein ciioeosion, bap the avernge world
he qridy ken dnehos. Their site indieatee that they were dorived) Peon a teuasive outerop of
Toreipitions sanacwtone rather than ane with ww pisalige steneture. They enmnot have heen
Hromeported Tar as they aie rither sath iid vet have retained an aregaler subrodtueed alia pe

STIRTON, TELFORD, anb WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 455
TERTIARY FAUNA

The only local outerop Known to us in whith simikur iron-rich rocks are found oeenes
Woniles to the south-west wong the north-eastern shore of Leake Pantawolous. Phase deposits
ive Terroginogs motthay fine grained qiauty sandstones containing patelos whieh jee highly
Fovrupinived, This Ovterop seems lo be a part of the irregular surface upon whieh the
Etadunia Pownation was deposited, Goth Etadinna green eluystones and fhiviitile aanda
tefereed To the Batipiri Sade oeeur in the outerop at Lake Puntawolona. south of the
lerroginized veninant, bat their relation ta the latter is ohseured hy drift sand. Offiee sueh
remnruiiy oiay oe in the Veinily ot the Wipajiri type seetion, now buried under Tater
(eposits car exposed in osall pans nor vet visited.

The irregular, subangular chert clasts riage in size from less than an ineh ta several
inehes in fongest dimension, ‘They all have a conspicuously fihrous uppearance whieh was dt
fiat roistalcen for the texture of fossil woud. When broken, they aro yellow brown, prey or
Dueshlack amt noarly completely replaced by sities, although they often show the renin
fihivus foxtire of their stietaees. Those ro¢ks have not been encountered. in ouiterapy they
May De a pronary siliew deposit, as at siliveona spring deposit, or replacoment of limestone,
Thore ie vo ‘oxemblines to the Khown chert nodules in the Etaduann dolomitie limestone ner
Ho These siliceous roeks show tay tenes of veninunt enleareous material,

Most of the lithostratigraphie evidence merely indicates that the
lower limit to the age of the Wipajiri Formation is post-Ktadunia, as
is that of (he Mampnwordu Sands. Sinee outerops of the Mampnuwordnu
Sunds oceur some 35 miles south of those of the Wipajiri, the relative
ages of these formations cannot be determined by physical stratig raphy,
At Lake Palankarinna, the Mampuwordu Sands are overlain by the
horizontal ved argillaccous. sandstones and arenaceous claystones of
the Tirari Mormation. These horizontal deposits also occur at Lake
Ngapakaldi but, unfortunately, not in conjunction with the Wipajiri
Formation, They are exposed near the top of the bluffs on the western
aide of Lake Ngapakakli where they appear to directly overlie the
Mindunna Formation (Stirton, Tedford and Miller, 1961, p. 57; note,
the words ‘‘eovered interval’? should appear between units 3 and 4 of
{his section), The Wipajiti is covered only by Quaternary or Sub-
Recent sand dunes so that its apper limit is not closely determinable
by stratigraphic means, The geologie evidence indicates a post-
Ktadunna age for the Wipajiri Formation. Preliminary studies on
the elements of the Kutjamarpnu fauna corroborate this conclusion and
huther suggest that the Wipajiri is much older than the M ampuwordn
Raruls.

KUTJAMARPU FAUNA

The type locality of the Kutjamarpu fauna is COMP Locality
V6213, 1,835 feet No 1° K, of UCMP Locality Vo858 on the east shore
Of Lake Neapakaldi, South Anstratia (fig. 1 and 2), The vertebrate
fossils oceur in the basal clastie portion of the Wipajiri Formation
(Units 3 and 6 of section 5; Appendix) where they are found as
disarticulated skeletal elements. Spines of teleost fish are by far the
most abioidant, but mammal bones, jaws and teeth are common. ‘The
jumbled, disartienlated nature of the fossil remains is consistent with
the atream-channel character of the deposil, Tn view of the relatively

436 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

high competence and velocity of the stream suggested by the size range
and angularity of the clastic particles, the unabraded nature of the
fossil remains indicates that they were derived from the immediately
surrounding area rather than being brought in from far away. The

FIG. 6

Drawing of Hucalyptus leaf impression from the upper dark shale portion of the Wipajiri
Formation at V-6213, One-half natural size,

leat-bearing shales produced a tew complete turtle carapaces and
plastra and fish skeletons, and a partially complete lower leg and
foot of an emu-like ground bird. These deposits contained the only
associated skeletal elements.

The following preliminary [faunal list will give an idea of the
content of the Kutjamarpu fauna. Because of the preliminary nature
of the present study, only a possible monotreme, a new wombat and
a new koala will be deseribed now. The diprotodontid, Neohelos
tirarensis, has heen deserihed by one of us in another publication
(Stirton, 1967b), The following Kutjamarpu vertebrates will be
deseribed at a later date:—Teleostei, parts of skeletons with bones in
place, spines; Dipnoi, teeth; Chelonia, three carapaces, plastrons and
foot bones; Sqnamata, mandible; Crocodilia, part of eranitum, teeth,
vertebrae, dermal scutes; Casuriiformes, part of pelvis, leg and foot
bones: Dasyuridae, right mandible; Permelidac, upper and lower
molars, and parts of mandibles; Phalangeridae (trichosurine and
pseudocheirine), upper molars and mandibles; Potoroinae, maxilla,
upper molars, mandibles, incisors, upper molars, lower molars,
foot bones.

Class MAMMALIA

Subclass PROTOTHERIA
We have followed the practice of Simpson (1945, 1959, 1960) in
retaining the Prototheria in the Class Mammalia. We agree, however,
with the principle advocated by Huxley (1958) that any given category
of classification should include the form, if known, which is ancestral

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 437
TERTIARY FAUNA
to the other taxa of that category. We thus believe that classifications
should be formulated in the vertical, or clade, sense in so far as
is possible.

Often, however, fossils are so poorly represented or preserved that
the generie, familial or even infraordinal ancestor of a particular
‘“ategory cannot be determined. This is certainly true of the mammal-
hike gronps of the Mesozoic. There is promise that the ancestral
relationships of most of these groups will be clarified with future
discoveries. Kyidence from new discoveries, especially trom the
Rhaeto-Liassie, when adequate, supports the conclusion that most of
the Mesozoic orders as well as the monotremes arose from different
groups of marmmal-like reptiles,

I¥ the class Mammalia is to be restricted in scope we favour
including therein the Theria and their Rhaeto-Liassie ancestors. In
the meantime it is preferable to maintain the status quo.

Order ?Monotremata
Family Ektopodontidae, new family
Family diagnosis: That for genus until other genera or species
are found,

FIG. 6
Ektopodon serratus, u. gen, et. sp. Holotype. «@ occlusal, b labial, ¢ posterior, d@ ventral
views of SAM P13847, left upper molar, Four times natural size, Note appression facette
at posterior base of crown, Arrow indicates anterior tip of tooth.

438 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ektopodon* Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, new genus
(Figs. 6, 7)
Genotypic species: Lktopodon serratus Stirton, Tedford and
Woodburne, n. sp.

FIG. 7
Elittopodon, serratus, vn. gen. et. sp. Paratypes. a occlusal, b anterior, ¢ ventral view of
UOCMP 67173, left lower molar; @ occlusal, e anterior, f labial view of UCMP 67174, left
lower molar, Four times natural size, Note appression faceile at anterior base of crown
Arrow indicates anterior surface of tooth.

Saroa—odd, strange; wd sboros—tootl

STIRTON, 'TELFORD, anon WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 439
TERTIARY FAUNA

Generic diagnosis: Mammals with triangular upper and sub-
quadrate lower teeth of lophodout construction, Lophs (ids) divided
info muimerous eusps (ds). Basie construction of upper and lower
teeth nearly identical. Largest cusp of upper teeth on lingual side
of each loph, largest euspid of lower teeth on labial side of each lophid.
Lophs (ids) strongly separated by narrow, deep, transverse valley,
Labial and lingual occlusal outline constrieted at transverse valley.
Roots of lower molars restricted to primary (labial) side of lophids.
Upper molars with a labial and lingual pair of roots with a possible
additional voot under the anterior loph. Lingual pair of roots tend
to be fusecl into a single strueture.

Ektopodon serratus’ Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, n. sp.
Holotype: South Australian Museum, P13847; left upper molar.
Poratypes: UCMP 67178, unworn left lower molar; UCMP 67174,
moderately worn left lower molar; CCMP 67176, well worn right lower
molar,

Specific diagnosis: That of genus until other species are deseribed,

Type locality: UCMP Loe. V6213, 1,835 feet north of VS858, east
shore of Lake Ngapakaldi, South Australia,

Horizon; Wipajiri Formation; pebble conglomerate, unit 3 of
measured seetion 6 (Appendix).

ge; Wutjamarpu fauna, middle Tertiary; probably Miocene.

Deseripliou—U pper molar: The tooth has been oriented as though
it were a left upper molar (fig, 6) for reasous whieh will be developed
below, Whether or not this orientation ultimately proves to be
correct, it at least serves to facilitate the present deseription. The
length of the tooth, as measured perpendicular to the flat posterior
surface is 7.2. The greatest transverse width (8.2) was measured
perpendicular to the leneth. The tips of all roots were either abraded
away or broken off.

The oeclusal surface of the tooth is widely triangular in outline,
With the apex of the triangle directed anteriorly (fig, Ga). A fat,
strap-shaped surfaee is present on the posterior side (fig, Ge), This
is Diterpreted as an appression facette caused by wear against an
adjacent tooth in the deutal series, A small flattened surtace on the
anterolabial side of the anterior loph suggests that another tooth was
present in the maxillary anterior to SAM P18s47. The small size and
oblique orientation of the facette indicates that the posterior end of
the tooth which caused it would lave had a different shape from that

Psereetis—aerehe Tn referees fo the nite ot Thee Gepusverse Terpilisy

440 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of SAM P1S847, and may have beet a premolar. Irrespective of which
fogth SAM P1847 actually represents, the enamel-covered crown
eonustsis of three parallel transverse lophs. The erown is supported
by a labial and lingual pair of roots whose basie eonstruction parallels
that of the middle and posterior lophs,

The transverse width of the anterior loph is 3.6, It has our
evescentically arranged cusps with the second from the lingual side
being the largest. The lingualanost cusp slopes laterally against the
second cusp, These two cusps are separated laterally and across the
erest of fhe loph by a wide groove; posteriorly the groove is mueli
Harrower, The two Jablal ensps are smaller and more closely
appressed, Their features are largely obseured by abrasion of their
tuiferior surfaces,

The second loph is 13,0 wide and is composed of mine cusps.
The posterior loph is 138.6 wide and has eight cusps. The largest cusp
on eaeh Joph is found at the lingual tip of the loph, In oeclusal
view, the lingual surface of each lingual cusp is strongly convex.
The eosps of the middle and posterior lophs are elongate antero-
posteriorly, have a blunt, rounded apex, and slant labially from base
io tip. The ¢usps diminish in size labially along each loph to sneh
an extent that the last two are difficull to separate. The anterior and
posterior sides of the cusps slope toward the base of the loph at an
angle of about 45°, then plinge vertically into the deep, but narrow,
lransverse groove which separates cach loph. The anterior and
posterior surfaces of the eusps in the first two lophs slope at about
the same angle, In the posterior loph, the posterior side of the cusps
ig steeper than the anterior, A groove which slants laterally toward
the apex is cut into the anterior and posterior sides of most of the
eisps, These grooves separate an anterior and posterior pair of root-
like ridges on the basal part of each cusp. The grooves terminate just
above the bottom of the transverse valley. The anterior faces of the
three small cusps at the labial end of the middle loph are mnited into
a smooth surface which is direeted anterolingually. The last two
labial cusps of the posterior loph also lack grooves, but the commissure
hetween the cusps is still visible. A flat, clongate, strap-shaped
facette is developed on the posterior surface of the last loph (fig. 6¢).
This is similar to facettes on the anterior surface of the lower teeth
(fig, 7h, 7d) and is interpreted as an appression facette caused by wear
between adjacent teeth,

SAM P13847 has a pair of labial and lingual roots (fig. 6d). The

lingual pair slant lingually away from the tooth and are joined through-
Out their length by an anteroposterior septum. The root-mass thus

STIRTON, TELFORD, asp WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 441
TERTIARY FAUNA

formed tapers distally and is remimisceent of the single internal root
cotumonly found in the upper teeth of maromals. The labial root
niider each loph (fig. 6b) diverges trom its lingual eounterpart. The
aiterioy labial root is oriented anterolingually foward the anterior tip
of the tooth, but also sends off a thin transverse septum toward the
hase of the anterior lingual root, Most of the root below the anterior
loph is broken away, The configuration of the remaining portion
suggests that the anterior loph was supported by a single root whose
huse was conneeted to the labial root under the middle loph, The
posterior labial root is oriented transversely and is composed of a
labial and lingual portion, These bwo parts are mainly swellings in
the basic root-mass and ure broadly connected by a slightly thinner
transverse segment of bone, The root structure thus formed underlies
the labial two-thirds of the hase of the posterior loph,

Lower molars: The lower molariform teeth ave basically like the
type specimen with the exception that they have only two transverse
lophs and are thus trapezoidal in outline, Exe ept for the short anterior
loph of the upper molar, the nearly identical configuration of the
upper and lower teeth is striking, UCMP 67173 and UUMP 67174 are
illustrated in fig. 7. These two teeth are considered to he left last
lower molars because of the appression facettes of their anterior sides
and because the greatest development of the roots occurs on the labial
side of the teeth. The largest enspid in each lophid also occurs on
the labial side,

The anteroposterior length of the tecth was measured perpendicular
to the flat anterior Face. The ereatest transverse width was measured
perpendicular to the length. The height of the roots was taken as the
distance perpendicnlay to a line drawn through the base of the eninel,
The measurements for the various lower teeth are as follows:
UCMP 67173; antevior length is 5.8, width is 7.2; height of anterior
root is 8.0. LUMP 67174; length j is a8, width is 7.0; heieht a! anterior
root is 7.3; posterior root is 7.8. UCMP 67176: leneth and width of
this tooth are approximate because of its extreme st: we of wear ane
aoslight amount of displacement along a erack developed in the trans-
verse Valley, Length is 5.8, width is 8.0; height of anterior root is
7.4, posterior root is 7.5.

In each tooth there are eight enspids in the anterior lophid and
8ix or seven in the posterior. UOCMP 67176, a right last lower molar,
ix foo worn lor an accurate count of ils enspids to he made, Mnough
of the dental pattern remains, however, to indicate that this tooth lad
a similar configuration to the others. All of the lower teeth deseribed

442 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

seem to come from the same position in the jaw, That UMP 6/176
is from the opposite side of the jaw has already been pointed out,

In UCMP 67173, the grooves on the posterior face of the euspids
on the last lophid extend farther toward the apices than in the upper
mohir, On the anterior lophid of the lower molars, these grooves ire
much less developed than in the upper. The anterior and posterior
sides of the cuspids slope toward the base at an angle of about 40".
Although UCMP 67174 is in a later stage of wear, the configuration
of the cuspids and grooves seem to agree with that in UCMP 67173.
Both of these teeth show heaviest wear on the side which we have
oriented as labial. This is also the side of the tooth on whieh the
heaviest development of the roots occurs,

In labial view, the main axes of the two roots are essentially
parallel, although they curve slightly anteriorly (fig. 71). In anterior
view (fig. Tb, @) it can be seen that the tip of the anterior reet is almost
directly under the labial edge of the tooth whereas the greater lingual
curvature of the posterior root causes its tip to lie in a more medial
position, There seems to be no significant difference in the sizes of
the two roots.

The basie plan of the lower teeth is a pair of transverse lophids
which have heen subdivided by a number of cuspids. The orientation
of the roots which support the lophids is also transverse (fig. Te),
Like the upper tooth, the lower molars of EBktopodon are transversely
lophodont, although the coalesced lingual pair of roots in the upper
molars may indicate that such lophodonty developed from a basically
triangular tooth,

Affinities: The structure of the teeth of Hhktopodon is not
paralleled im any rodent known to us, The geologic and paleozoo
reographie setting of the Australian continent indicates, therefore,
that the aneestors of this unusnal animal should be soneht among the
Monotremata, Marsupialia, primitive Placentalia, or even earlier
groups, Based on the present study and those of Butler (1939), Green
(1937), Patterson (1956) and Simpson (1928, 19298 and b) the
configuration of the molars and roots of various therian and non-
therian groups may be summarized as follows :—

Tritylodontidae: Teeth not tribosphenics cuaps areanged in longiludinal rows; more rows

in upper teeth; upper and lower teeth basiewly similar; cither four or five roots

In upper teeth, bwo in lowers; lower roots lie directly under (he crown of the tooth;
ponlerion lower root Jarger than anterior,

Trieonodanta: Teeth not fribosphonic; cusps arranged in longitndiual rows; upper nd
lower teeth basically similar; only two equal roots in either upper or lower teeth;
lower roots lie directly under the erown col the towth,

STIRTON, TELFORD, anb WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 443
TERTIARY FAUNA

Malliiberauketa: Pearh net wribosphonies cusps arranged im longitudinal rows, more rows
in upper teeth; upper and lawer teeth of basically similar construction; upper ind
lower Leeth with two roots; lower roote lie directly ander the tooth drown y lowor
roots yuriable, generally equal in size,

Sytitnetrodonta: Upper teeth triangular, lower teeth slightly so; ensps arranged in
friungular fashions upper and lower teeth relatively similar; two, possibly three,
roots in upper teeth, tava in lowers; lower roots Te directly under the tooth erown;
posterior root large in upper and lower teeth.

Kictopodon: Teeth not tribosphenies cuspx arranged in trvaverse lophs; construction of
upper dad lower wolir crown nearly identical; opper mokie with three (TFour) routs,
lowers with two; lower voots developed yoimarily on labial aide of tooth; lower roots
essentially Sime size,

Oritharhimelus: Teeth degenerate; generally an anterior and posterior moiety separated
Dyvoa transverse valley, upper teebh with prominent lingual cusp from which one or
Iwo ridges pass trausversely to the Inbindl side, lower teeth with prominent labial
enosypid in cagh moiety which tends to be elongated moo Ieimeverga erest; upper aod
lower Loeth basieully similar; ombryologieal stulies suggest that each moiety is
supportod by a transverse root,

DPoeodonta: Upper teeth transversely reetanguliry lowers longitudinally rectangular;
fusps basically in longitudinal rows with secondary transverse orientation; brew routs
in oupper feeth, two in lowers; upper and lower teeth different; lower peoota lie
directly under the crown; lower rooty aqual sized,

Vantotheriu: ‘Toeth tribosphenie; cusps arranged in triangular fashions upper and lower
teoth different; three roots in apper, two in lower teeth: lower roots Tie divest hy Winder
the erown; posterior lower root smaller than anterior.

Mel and Butherias Teeth tribosphenics cusps arrunged in teigmgular fashiows upper and
lower teeth different; three roots in upper, two in lower teeth; lower roots lie directly
wider the erown; lower roots generally equal in sive,

Tritylodontids, triconedonts and multitubereulates possess denti-
tious with low-crowned non-tribosphenic teeth in which the eusps are
arranged in longitudinal rows, The upper and lower teeth of these
forms are of basically similar construction, The fact that tritylodoutids
have een classed as reptiles (Romer, 1956) emphasizes the general
similarity of the dentition of animals near the reptile-tnammal
transition, Although appearing later in time than the others, the
multitnhberculates vetained this primitive type of dentition. The two-
rooted condition of the upper and lower molars found im the
triconodonts persisted into the svmmetrodonts, although there is a
possibility that the latter tended to develop three-rooted upper teeth
in the Cretaceous (Patterson, 1956, p. 11)

The symmetrodonts, contemporaneous with the tritylodontids and
triconodonts, departed from the basic dental pattern by developing
teeth in which the cusps had a triangular orientation. Their upper
and lower molars were, however, still basically similar,

At first glance, the docodont dentition seems to represent a rather
radical departure fvom the primitive manimalian type. A stronply
lransverse, vather than longitudinal, orientation is given to the teeth
by the development of transverse erests in the molars, one in (he
uppers, two in the lowers. Upon closer inspection (see Simpson,

444 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSBUM

1929a, pla. XVITI-XN) it is apparent, however, that docodont molars
consist basically of two longitudinal rows of cusps with secondary
cross-erests, The cross-crests descend from each side toward a median
longitudinal valley; lophodonty is at best incipient. It is also apparent
that the basie construction of the upper and lower molars is similar,
The addition of a median longitudinal emareination in the anterior and
posterior end of the doeodont lower molar would produee a confignra-
tion essentially like that of the upper, The development ol three
roots in the upper molars is a possible advance over the eondition
in triconodonts and symmetrodonts, and the incipient transverse
lophodonty is unique among Mesozoic mammals.

The Pantotheria, Metatheria and Kutheria seem to be too advanced
lo be considered for the ancestry of Wktopodon. The Mesozoic and
early Cainozoic members of these groups elearly have tribosphenie
molars whieh do not even remotely resemble those of Ektopodon. Tt
is true that some marsupials and placentals have developed trans.
versely lophodont dentitions, but not ones in which tle upper teeth
ave as similar in detail to the lowers or in which the anterior loph is
so nearly identical to the posterior.

The most reasonable statement that can be made concerning: the
ancestors of Kikfopodow is that they are not presently known. The
general degree of advancement shown by its dentition suggests thal
Wklopodow represents a pre-therian lineage, Although no reptile has
been known to develop teeth like these, the possibility of basal relation.
ships with the mammal-like reptiles cannot be definitely excluded on
present evidence, The development of three-rooted upper molars and
the incipient transverse lophodonty found in the Docodonta form a
hasis for interesting speculations, but the long interval of time
involved dictates that these remain mere speculations,

Ancestry of the Monotvemalas The origin and plhryletie position
of these animals, so clearly mammalian in some respects and so
obviously reptilian in others, has long been a taxonomie problem,
Tachyglossus 1s Unfortunately excluded from this diseussion by its
lack of dentition. The transient molars of Orni/horhynchus have been
most recently discussed by Simpson (1929b) and Green (1937). From
firnres and descriptions in these two works it is elear that
Ornithorhynchus teeth consist of an anterior and posterior moicty
separated by a transverse valley. In the upper teeth there is a labial
and lingual constriction at the transverse valley, Simpson (1929h)
has provided a detailed deseription of the Ornithorhynchus cheek
teeth,

STIRTON, TELFORD, anp WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 445
TERTIARY FAUNA

Simpson (ibid, pp. 7) considered that the teeth were basically
composed of two transverse halves, each with a primary lingnal upper
aud lower labial cusp, and that the numerous accessory cusps had no
particular siguilicance other than indieating the degenerate nature of
the teeth, After reviewing various possibilities Simpson (ibid,, p. 14)
concluded that the teeth of Ornithorhynchus were probably not
derivable from any known mammalian type, that the only even
remotely possible exception to this might be the triconodonts. A
sunilay conclusion was reached by Green (1987, p. 404) except that
he favours the Watamividae (Microcleptidae) as a possible ancestor.
It is interesting to note that a sufficient number of longitudinal and
transverse elements are present in doeodont molars to fomn the
stroctural basis for the teeth of both Bktupodon and Ornithorhynchus,

Khktopedon and Ornithorhynchus both have a simple lophodont
dentition in which the largest cusp is located on the Hingual side of
each upper loph, the labial side of cach lower lophid. Embryologieal
s{udies sugyest that if any orientation of the roots in Ornithorhynchus
ain be said to he preferred, it is transverse (Green, L987, fiz. 14).
There is also a random proliferation of secondary roots due to the
degenerate nature of the teeth. The eondition of the lower roots in
Kiklopodon, in whieh the lane is vestrieted to the labial or primary
sido of the tooth, may be attributed to the possibility that the dentition
OF this imimal was becoming degenerate, The nearly random prolifera-
tion of cuspules in the teeth of Ornifharhynchus may indicate that the
tewth had degenerated from a dentition in whieh cuspules were present,
but in a move regulated configuration. Such a configuration could
lave resembled the transverse proliferation of euspules seen in
Nhtopodon,

In suumary, the molariform teeth of both Bktopodon and
Ornithorhynchus have a siniple, bilophate strueture which is not closely
approached in any other group of mammals. The teeth of Lktapodon
represent a sttuetural pattern from which the degenerate dentition of
Ornithorhynchus could be derived. In view of the rather limited data
now available it is possible that Ektopodon and Ornithorhynchus are
members of separate, collateral, lineages and are not related
orthoyenctically, Tt Ektopodan is a monotreme if is the first Tertiary
record of the order and points to the long expected hut unrecorded
(diversity of the group. The level of structural development of the
dentition in Bktopodon and Ornithorhynchus is reminiseent of that
found in the Docodonta and suggests that the Monotremata originated
from non-therian rather than therian mammals,

446 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Subclass THERIA
Infraclass Metatheria

Order Marsupialia
Phascolarctidae

Litokoala* Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, n. gen.
(Hig. 8)

Genotypic species: Litokoala kutjamarpensis n. sp.

Generic diagnosis: M*: smaller and labial outline more convex
than in Phascolarctos, length and width 5.7; space between metacone
and hypocone greater than between paracone and protocone; small
anterolingual and posterolingual crests ascending from apices of

Hillis

mun

eh
Is

2mm.

FIG. 8
Labinl and occlusal view of RMI of Litokoala kutjamarpensis, SAM P13845, Kutjamarpu
fauna. Approximately two-thirds natural size,

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 447
TERTIARY FAUNA

paracone and metacone; labial cingulum not extended across hase of
metacone: posterior spur of protoconule directed posterolingually
toward {ransyerse valley where it fades out in posterior part of wide
longitudinal valley between paracone and metacone; low crest cou-
tinuous trom anterolabial corner of protoconule along anterior base
of paracone to labial cingulum; erescentic metaconule present; enamel
sturfaces moderately erenulate between anterior spurs of metaconule,
and on posterior base of paracone; elsewhere in longitudinal and
transverse valleys enamel surface smooth.

Litokoala kutjamarpensis’ Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, n. sp.

Holotype: South Australian Museum, P13845; right upper first
molar in early stage of wear. We have identified this tooth as M! on
the basis of the following features which are similar to that tooth
in Phaseolarctos. Crescentie anterior cingulum; anterior cingulun
continuous with protoloph lingually, widely separating paracone from
anterioy edee of tooth; metacone slightly higher than paracone, and
hypocone Meher than protocone; cingulum continuous aeross labial
base of metacone; erescentie stylar structure at anterior base of
protocone which forms small pocket in that aren,

Speeifie diagnosis: That of venus until other species are described.

Type locality: UCMP Loe, V6218, 1,885 feet No 1° ie. of VorR5k,
vast shore of Lake Neapakaldi, South Australia.

Formation: Wipajiri Formation: pebble conglomerate, unit 8 of
measured section 5 (Appendix).

Age: WKutjamarpn fauna, iniddle Tertiary; probably Miorene.

Descriptions The Wutjamarpu tooth is smaller than in Phasco-
luvctos; its vreatest leneth and width is 5.7. The four principal cusps
are prominent and pyramidal in outline, Although the protocone is
move worm it seems clearly to have been lower than the hypocone!”.
The relative heights of these cusps also prevail in M! of Phascolarctos ;
however in the living koala the cusps are equal in height or nearly so
on M*, but the reverse is true on M* and M! where the paracone and
protocone are higher tli the metacone and hypocone. In the
Kutjamarpu M! the distance between the metacone and bypoeone is
greater than between the paracone and protocone; the reverse is true
Yop ore leremee Lo The oeeurrence of Phe apemies in tie Woah parmaepu Pains,

Wilypacone is used tere only in a tepographic connotation, Thomology with cusps in i
simile position on upper ‘hols of same plavew pil maninals is aot implied. Di aanotties
wets roe the Wut jeter pint founa the evidenee seems elonr that the CUXP I qttest ian os

ovelopes| from the pusherior wing Of The protocone, rather thaw (rem a cingulum oer as a
fwin ig et Ae peohoemne tas lis neared in ust piivontal ramimals,

448 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

throughout the tooth row in Phascolarctos, and probably Perikoala,
The triangular labial surfaces of the paracone and metaecone tn
P1SS845 slope gently to the apices of the eusps.

Other distinetive characters in the Kutjamarpu AM! indicating
phascolaretid affinities are seen in the amterolingual aud posterolingnal
cresis ascending [rom the apices of the paracone and the metacone,
In Phascolarctos only the posterolingual crest of the paracone is
present, These erests do not ocenr in Schotnobates or Psendocheirus.

The pattern of attrition on the molars is apparently the same in
both Lifokoala and Phascolarctos in that the anterior and posterior
edges of the paraselene and metaselene contribute equally to. the
shearing funetion of the tooth. In Psendocheirus and Sehotrobales
most of the shearing is done hy the posterior crests of those selenes,

The labial outline of the Kutjamarpu tooth, in direct occlusal
view, Is somewhat more convex than in M! of Phasecolarclos., The
sloping labial surface opposite the paracone is narrower and more
voncave anteroposteriorly than the surface Opposite the metacone,
Furthermore the base of the paraconal surface is crossed by a
eingulim, Whereas that of the metacone is uobstructed. Phascolarctos
differs in having a cingulum across the base of each of these surfaces
in M’. In Psendocheirus and Schomobates the cingulum on the para-
conal surface is incomplete because a groove passes from the middle
of the surface to the base of the tooth. The metaconal surface of
those venera also differs in that a erest ascends posterodorsally from
mesotyle LT so that the surface is unobstructed only at its posterolabial
corner,

The stylar cusps in Litokeala ave not as prominent as in Phasco-
larclos and can be seen best by their triangular outline from the
labial side, The parastyle, as in Phascolarctos, is tar back from the
anterolabial corner of the tooth and is connected to the paracone by
the anterior wing ol the paraselene. In M! of both Psewlochetrus
and Schoinobates the parastyle is at the extreme auterolabial corner
of the tooth and is separated from the base of the paracone by a
deep cleft.

In Litokoala, the stylar cusps decrease slightly but progressively
front the parastyle to the metastyle, whereas in Phascolarctos the
height of the styles on M' in deseending order are mesostyle TH,
mesostyle L, parastyle and metastyle.

The protoconule is separated from the protoloph in Litokoule
and oecurs at the anterolingual base of the paracone. The posterior
spur of the protoconule is directed posterolingually toward the trans-
verse valley where it fades out in the posterior part of the wide

STIRTON, TELFORD, anp WOODBURNE-—TIRARI DESERT 449
TERTIARY FAUNA

longitudinal valley between the paracone and metacone, — In
Schainobates and Psendocheirus the spur is relatively longer, creseentic,
and is connected to the posterolingual base of the paracone. Phasco-
lavetos also differs from the Kutjamarpu tooth in having a short
crescentic spur that connects to the anterolingual base of the paracone.
A low erest is continuous from the anterolabial corner of the proto-
connle along the anterior base of the paracone to the labial cingnlum.
This structure is not seen in the koalas we have for comparison, In
M' of Pseudocheirus the protoconule is connected directly (o the para-
atvle, whereas in Schoinobales it first joins the anterior cingular
extension olf the protoloph which continues on to the parastyle, The
surface of the protoconule to the Kutjamarpu tooth is smooth whereas
in Phascolarclos ridgelets and vrooves between them give a rather
boldly erennlate offeet to the conule. A low but distinet ridgelet
extends posteriorly from the protoloph im the lingual side of the
longitudinal valley,

A strueture identified by us as a modified metaconnle occurs as a
very low crescentic crest medial to the lingual base ol the metacone,
lis posterior spur extends back into the valley between the metacone
and the Lypocone but is closer to the metacone. This structure is not
present in Phaseolarclos or in the M* of Pertkoala, Anteriorly the
metaconule in the Kutjamarpu specimen divides into two spnrs. One
extonds anlervolabially into the transverse valley between the metacone
and paravone, but does not reach as far labially as in Schomobates or
Pseudocheirus, The other spur ts directed anterolingually and is
separated from the junction of the metaloph erest of the protoeone
amd the anterolabial erest of the hiypocone by a narrow groove, In
Lifokoala there is a short transverse ridgelet connecting the meta-
comme with the anterolabial erest of the hypoeone. The enamel surlace
between the anterior spurs ol the metaconule, on the labial surfaee af
the junetion and on the posterior basal sturface of the paracone, is
erenulate; but elsewhere in the longitudinal valley hetween the main
cusps, the enamel surface is smooth, This is in marked contrast to
Phascolarclos and Perikoula in whieh the longitudinal valley is deeply
erenulate.

The protocone and the hypoeone are much more widely rounded
in the Kutjamarpu tooth than in Perikeala and Phascolarctos,
consequently the anterior and posterior wings of those selenes do not
stand ont as sharply in relief in Litokoala, Another phascolaretid
character is the connection of the metaloph crest ol the protocone and
the anterolahial crest of the hypocone. This closes the transverse
valley area lingnally well in from the inner edge of the teoth, In

450) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Schoinobates and Pseudocheirus the posterior of these crests bypasses
the anterolabial crest of the hypocone. A rather bulbous cusplike
structure oecurs at the anterolingual base of the hypocone. It connects
across to the hase of the protocone forming a pocket between it and
the crest formed by the junetion of the metaloph crest of the protocone
aud the anterolabial crest of the hypocone. The cusplike structure is
subdued in Phascolarctos, and its connection across to the protocone
is more cingulumlike, is longer and fades out at the lingual base of
the protocone. These features are even more subdued in Psendocheirus
and Schomobates. Both Litokoala and Phascolarctos have a short
stylar structure at the anterolingual base of the protocone. It, how-
ever, is more creseentic and forms a deeper pocket in the fossil. In

FIG. 9

Labial yiew of right maxillary fragment of Perikoala palankarinnica, UCMP 44843,
Approximately two-thirds uatural size,

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 451
TERTIARY FAUNA

Phascolarctos this feature diminishes progressively from M!' to M*,
It is not present in Pseudocheirus ov Schoinobates, and is apparently
absent in Perikoala.

Paratype ‘of Perikoala palankarinnica: The paratype of Perikoala
palankarivmca trom the Ktadunna Formation is a right maxillary
fragment (UCMP 45343) with a partial alveolus of P®, roots of M',
M* with the crown partly preserved and an alveolus of M* (figs. 9, 10).

PIG. 1

Ovchusal view of right maxillary fragment of Periipele palankarinniea COMP 4543.
Approximately pyo-thirds natural sive,

Nearly all of the body of M* is present, only the lingual cap is absent
from the paracone and the posterolingual face of the metacone, The
unobstructed labial surface of the metacone and the absence of the
metaconule agree with the M* ot Phascolarctos. Although most of the
lingual base of the paracone is missing, there is no suggestion on the
remaining portion that an anterolingual stylar cusp was present,

452 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This sneeests further agreement with M* of Phascolarctas as compared
with M', The length and width of the tooth are hoth approximately 5.9,

The tooth is essentially unworn as far as can be seen, which may
jo some extent account for the profusely crenulate nature of the erown
enamel, The enamel appears to have been smooth on the lingual
surfaces of the hypocone nd protecone, and is smooth on the labial
surface of the metacone; but on the labial surfaees of the protecone
and hypoeone and the anterior surface of the mefacone and adjacent
areas, the enamel is strongly crenulated, The distribution and
inteusity of crenulation equals that of comparably worn spee ‘imens
of the koala and is thus different to the condition in Lilokoala,

In Létukoula and in Phascolarctos, x ridgelet extends posteriorly
vom the protoloph in the lingual side of the longitudinal valley. In
Pertkoala, Lhe function of a raised structure in this area of the tooth
is mamtained by a series of transverse ridgelets direeted labially from
fhe protocone and protoloph, Kach of these ridgelets terminates
abruptly at the axis of the longitudinal valley in a small, raised conule,
A line connecting the apices of these terminal connles passes
posteriorly from the protoloph in a similar orientation and position
asx does the protoconmle ridgelet in the Kutjamarpu tooth and in
Phascolarctos. Tn RM* and LM*® and LM" of two specimens of
P. cinereus at hand, the contiguration seen in Perikoala is present;
whereas in the other molars of those two speeimens, us well as all the
inolars of two other Recent speeimens, a ridyelet is present, This
snevests that the condition in Perikoala is a variation upon a lunetional
plan, and may also indicate that the function is as important as the
means hy which it is achieved. The laek of this ridgelet im Perikoala
in contrast to the condition in the other animals does not necessarily
remove Perikoala trom the direct ancestry of Phascolarctos,

The labial border of the tooth as seen in occlusal yiew is oblique
anterolabially, which suggests that the transverse diameter across the
anterior half of the tooth was greater than that across the posterior
half. This agrees with the condition in M* of Phascolarctos aud
differs from Litokeala in which the transverse diameter aeross the
respective parts of the tooth is essentially the same, This may be due
to the faet that the Kutjamarpu tooth is M'. M? in Phascolaretos is
more nearly equidimensional transversely across the anterior and
posterior halves than M?.

In Perikoala and Phascolarctos, a metaconule is not present as a
distimet cusp, the enamel being highly erenulate in that area, On the
other hand, the presence of a distinet metaconnle in Litakeala in in

STIRTON, TELFORD, any WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 453
TERTIARY FAUNA
direct contrast to Lhis and if may represent a primitive feature whieh
has heen vetained trom au earlier level of organizatiou.

The imetaloph in Perikoala curves smoothly froin the protocone
posterolabially to meet the anterolabial erest of the hypocone, This
is more typical of M® than M! of Phaseolarctas in which the posterior
arm is direeted posterolabially and then tuens abruptly labially before
joining the arm [rom the metuconnle,

lixe ‘opt for its smaller size those parts of the tooth whieh ean be
compared in Perirodla agree with M? of Phascolarctas, The only
significant similavity to Lifuhaala is size but the move complex enamel
erenulations aml the absence of the metaconule tend to preelude close
affinity hetween Perikoala and the Butjamarpu form, although beth
may have had some pre-Neapakaldi common ancestor,

In ventral view, the auterior root of the zygoma in Perikoala lies
livectly above M4, its anterior surfaee slopes smoothly on to the
nuixillary above M! and its posterior face is concave posteriorly, In
lateral view, the labial edge of the anterior lace is directed antero
dorsally, not vertically as in Phascolarctos, The root of the zygoma
ix essentially symmetrical in lateral view in that the anterior and
posterior surfaces slope equally toward each other aud meet ventrally
8) that a sagittal section through the root would he triangular, with
the apex ventral In Phascolarclos, the anterior surface is vertieal
While the posterior surface slopes anterovenirally, Thus, a sagittal
section through the reot would be asymmetrical with the apex of the
triangle shifted anteriorly. Phascolarclos possesses a veutral boss. at
this apex which is oriented anterolingually in ventral view, is thickest
tuedially and tapers laterally and posterodorsally along the lateral
surface of the areh. The azygoma in Phaseolarctos oceupies the
maxillary from above the midpoint of M' to the rear of M*, its anterior
face possesses a strong antorbital fossa below the infr: aorhital foramen.

As compared to that of Phascolarctos, the anterior root of the
ayvomatio aveh in Perikeata is smaller both longitndinally and trans-
versely, bas no ventral boss, is more symmetrical in the sagittal plane,
apparently lacks a coneave antorbital fossa below the tifraorbital
foramen, anil the anterior face slopes anuterodorsally in lateral view

rathor than being vertical, All of these churacters point to the more
prunitive nature of Perikoala, and may be related functionally to
the musseler being less well developed in Perikoala as compared with
Phascolarctoas,

Remarks: As disenssed by Stirton (1957), the lower dentition of
Perikoala is more primitive than Phascolarctos, and a similar state-
ment van he made concerning the fragmentary upper tooth deserihed

454 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

above, It seems clear, however, that Perikoala and Phascolarctos are
more closely allied than either is to Litokoala, The latter apparently
represents a persistently primitive side branch which diverged, at
some point in the early Tertiary, from the lineage leading toward
Phascolarctos, On the other hand the basic similarity of Phascolarctos,
Perikoala and the Kutjamarpu form shows that these animals repre-
sent a major phyletie braneh, possibly within the Phalangeroidea
excluding Pseudocheirus and Schoinolates. At the present time, the
most reasonable taxonomic assiguinent of the latter two genera seems
to be with the Phalangeridae.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS

Phascolarctos cinereus Litokoula Perikoala
bOMP UCMP UCMP TCMP 5AM CMP

Lengths TGS DMNO I oSSOO vasa PL3sd4 45343

RMI .. we ee te 7.5 7.9 7.8 a7

0 al A a 74 7.8 7.0

KM? TH 7.8 ‘0 7.4 5.0*

LMz .. 7.8 7A 7) 7.9
Widths

RM! .. .. .. + 82 7.8 7.7 7.8 a7

DMt 5. ot te Se I 7.8 7.7 7.8

RM2 3.055 se we RS 7.9 7.9 7.7 3.0%

LM2 ., 8.2 7S 5.0 t9.

* Approximate.

Vombatidae
Rhizophascolonus'! Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, n. gen.
(Fig. 11)

Genotypic species: Rhizophascolonus crowerofti Stirton, Tedford
and Woodburne, 1. sp.

Generic diagnosis: P*; bilobed; anterior lobe round, enamel on
lingual and labial sides; posterior lobe 3.8 wider transversely than long
anteroposteriorly; enamel on rounded lingual side, absent on labial
side; from edge of enamel posteriorly occlusal outline curves obliquely
anterolabially then around into labial inflection; shallow opposing
lingual and labial inflections; height of enamel ahout 16.1 above root
on lingual side, on anterolabial side 4.3; one small labial and two well
developed lingual roots.

Rhizophascolonus crowcrofti'® Stirton, Tedford and Woodburne, n. sp.
Holotype: South Austratian Museum P13846, moderately worn
left P®.

1) pgopaireatoves—in reference to the rodted character of the holotype in comparison with
terth of Phaseolonis,
i2 Jn honour of Dr, W. PB. Croweroft, Direetur of the South Australian Museum.

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 455
TERTIARY FAUNA

Specific diagnosis: That of genus until other species are described.

Type locality: UCMP Loe. V6213, 1,835 feet north of V5858, east
shore of Lake Ngapakaldi, South Australia.

Horizon: Wipajiri Formation; pebble conglomerate, unit 3 of

e

measured section 5 (Appendix).

Age: Kutjamarpu fauna, middle Tertiary; probably Miocene.

Description: This family is represented by a left upper P® that
is Clearly referable to a new genus. It differs markedly from the living
and Pleistocene wombats in having one small labial and two well
developed lingual roots, and in the height of the crown.

The crown is bilobed as emphasized by shallow labial and lingual
inflections. The anterior lobe is essentially round; its transverse width
is 7.5. The transverse dimension of the posterior lobe is 10.6, whereas
anteroposteriorly it measures 6.8. Although the inner half of the
posterior lobe is uniformly rounded, from near the posterior midline
the outline curves obliquely anterolabially then around into the labial
inflection. This part of the occlusal outline is accentuated by the
absence of enamel on the side of the tooth in that area. Otherwise a
1.0 layer of enamel starting at the labial inflection extends around
the anterior lobe into the lingual inflection where it is very thin, then
continues around the lingual side of the posterior lobe to terminate on
the posterior surface,

FIG. 11
Khizophascolonus crowerofti, u. gen. et. sp. a ocelusal view, b posterior view, ¢ lingual
view of holotype, LP3, SAM P13846. Natural size.

One of the most interesting features is a small, liplike, remnant
of enamel that folds back from the anterior edge over a small part of
the otherwise extensive exposure of dentine. The remaining enamel
is slightly grooved at the midline with higher points on each side.

456 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This bit of enamel therefore is suggestive of an enamel covering of
the occlusal surface at and near this level. I! so, the betght of erown
of the tooth in a young animal was little if any higher than in the
tooth at hand,

The tooth is eutved labially and has the greatest exposure of
enamel on the lingual surface, Below the anterior root on the lingual
side the enamel measures 11.8, and below the posterior root it is 16.1,
whereas on the labial side of the anterior lobe the enamel height 1s 4.5.

The lingual inflection widens from about 0.8 at the edge of the
oechisal surface to 4.0 at the base of the enamel. This inflection is
largely filled with eement which coalesees with the dentine of the roots
dorsally, The roots are partly abraded but their tapering outlines
indicate that the longest one was not more than 7.0 in length.

Remarka: The distribution of the enamel and dentine in the
oeclusal pattern, the labial enrvature and the apparent incipient
hypsodonty of its P* indicate that Rhizophascolonus is a wombat.

The bilobed outline and the size of the premolar seems to reveal
that Rhizophascolonus is more closely related to Phascolonus than to
Ramsayia, Lasiorhinus ov Vombatus. The lobes of P* in Phascolonus
are of different shape than in Rhizophascolonus; there is no enamel
on the labial side of the anterior lobe, and the tooth is extremely
hypsodont and rootless. Ramsayia and Lasiorhinua differ from the
other wombats in having P* with a triangular ocelusal outline and in
lacking either a labial or lingnal inflection, but as in Phascolonus,
enamel is absent on the labial side of the anterior lobe. In Vombatas
the ocelusal outline is nearly triangular but there is an anterolingual
groove and the ename] eneircles the tooth.

If Rhizophascolowus is ancestral to Phascolonus, the rate of
evolution in hypsodonty is much lke that which ocenrred in’ the
development of the Pleistocene beaver Castoroides trom Monosaulax,
which lived during the Miocene, even though the inerease in tooth size
in the beaver lineage is much greater than in the wombats.

Kvidence from the P* of Rhizophascolonus seems to indicate that
the Phascolonus lineage extended well back into the Miocene if our
correlations are reasonably correct. Therefore, the common ancestor
for all of the known wenera of wombats may have lived well back in
the Oligocene.

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 457
TERTIARY FAUNA

B

FIG, 12
A. View from Inke of ‘MP toe, V-6213, type locality of Kutjamarpu fauna and
Wipajiri Formation. Quarry is at edge of lake; tractor is standing on dune deposits.
B, Closer view of Wipaji Formation at V-6213 showing eourse dark basal elastic
deposits overlain hy lighter, thinly bedded leaf-bearing shales. Dip of beds indicate channel
configuration, Shovel is approximately horizontal. White 6in. ruler shows scale,

458 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ENVIRONMENT

As indieated in the faunal list the Kutjamarpu is one of the most
diverse Tertiary vertebrate faunas yet uncovered in Australia. The
large number of forest dwelling types indicates that the stream in
which the Wipajiri Formation was deposited passed through a wooded
avea, This is consistent with the setting implied by the abundant
impressions of Bucalyptus leaves found in the upper portion ol the
formation, The riparian situation represented by the Wipajiri
Formation and its contained fossils indicates the former presence of
climates which were more hospitable than those which now obtain in
this part of Australia,

AGE OF THE KUTJAMARPU FAUNA

The peramelids, phascolaretids and macropodids have their closest
affinities with forms in the Ngapakaldi fauna. The wombat is more
primitive than any known Pleistocene or Recent member of the family.
The ancestral position of Neohelos tirarensis to Kolopsis torus from
the late Miocene Aleoota fauna of the Northern Territory (Stirton,
Woodburne, and Plane, 1967), strongly points to a Miocene age for
the Kutjamarpu fauna. On the present evidence, the best estimate
of the age of the Kutjamarpu fauna is post-Ngapakaldi and pre-
Aleoota, probably closer to that of the Ngapakaldi fauna, The
Wipajiri Formation was thus deposited alter the Etadunna Formation
and before the Mampuwordu Sands. The Wipajiri is the second oldest
formation in the five-fold stratigraphic succession of Tertiary rocks
in the Tirari Desert and, as compared with the age assiguments given
to the other faunas in the area, is probably Miocene in age.

APPENDIX A
Mensuredd Section 1

At UCMP Loeality V5858, North-east shore, Lake Ngapakaldiy tepe loeality Of Neapalaldi
Fauna. (See fig, 2.)

(nit Deseription Thickiwss
1 Chupsiforais dearth sand, rca WT sew. of 28 ks 1Sin,

UNCON FORMLTY

ELADUNNA FORMATION

2 (Claoysten:, dark grey; areniceous particles sparsely oA.
distributed throughont. + Grensy?* appearance
ou freshly broken surtace. Basal mtratormas
tional breeein.

a (haystone, dolomitie, light grey. ‘Greasy?! tex. Loin
ture on fresh surfaees Basal intraformeation
conglomerate of green choyvstoue fragments,

} Claystoae, Brey green to green with senttered fine W5in. +
grained quartz suid and silt, Fossil manuals
at top (UCMP Lovality V585s), Nyapakaldi
Jonna. Base not exposed.

alin +

STIRTON, TELFORD, anp WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 459
TERTIARY FAUNA

Measured Seetion 2
1,163’ N. S* W. of Va858 (see fig. 2)

Unit, Deseription Thickuess
1 Gypsiferous drift sand; orange reds. .. ee ee ee sin. +
UNCON FORMITY
ETADUNNA FORMATION
2 Claystone, dark grey; arenaccous particles sparsely 13in.
distributed throughout. Freshly broken surface
has ‘‘ greasy’? appearance.

3 Clayston, light grey, slight greenish tinge; lacks din,
‘yreasy’* appearinee on fresh surface,
4 Claystone, dark grey, as uoit 2, but possibly 30in.

slightly lagher fraction of arenaceous particles,
Greasy’? appearance on fresh surface, Basal
intraformational breccia Gin, thick consisting of
a lighter grey elaystouy matrix enclosing
angular to subrounded partieles of light eal-
earcous mudstone (unit 5) and a dark groy
elaystone., Thin (4in.) layer of gypsum variably
seprurihing units 4 and 4,

a Clhrustone, caleareous (dolomitic), light grey. 12in, +
“Greasy’’ texture on fresh surface. Seattered
oecasional particles of both lighter mudstone and
dark brownish grey claystone. Basal contact
with underlying green elaystone (fossiliferous
at V5858) indieuted by intraformutional con-
slomerate of rounded to subrounded particles of
pebble and coarse sand sized fragments of the
green claystone. Total depth not reached.

62in, +

Measured Section 3

In 24ft. long pit (Pit 1) trending N. 4° E., whose N, end is 40’ 8. 68° E. from eentre of main
quarry (V6213) of Kutjamarpu fauna. See fig. 4.

Unit Deseription Thickness
1 Dart wtih 54 he A We kk we pe be 8b eG SO0in.
UNCONIORMITY
WIPAJIRE FORMATION

2 Shale, dark grey, thinly laminated, with scattered Sin.
gypsum erystals. Leaf remains. Sft. to north
the bed thickens to 30in. Lenses of well sorted
angular white sand grains are interbedded in
lower part in association with turtle remains.
(Corresponds with unit 2, seetion 3.)

Claystone, dark green, with ferruginous partings; 12in,
scaftere| gypsum fragments, clay pebbles amd
rounded duricrust fragments occur throughout.
varger claystone pebbles found near jase
(probably corresponds to unit 3, section 5).

4 Claystone, light green, highly limonitie .. .. .. lin,

5 Pebble conglomerate, green claystone, light cal- 5in,

¢arcous mnudstone and light grey claystoue clasts
of Etadunna formation in light grey elaystone
matrix, Local centres of limonite stain and
gypsum crystals interspersed. Selenite neur base.
Main fossil concentration; numerous remains of
fish, turtle, crocodile and oecasional mammals
(probably corresponds to part of unit 3,
seetion 5).

u>

460 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

UNCONFORMITY
ETADUNNA FORMATION
6 Claystone to siltstone, ight grey; ‘* greasy’* when 2 to bin.
wet (probably corresponds to unit 2, section 4).
Claystone, limonite stained .. 6. 6. ee ee ee ee lin.
Claystonc, culeareous, dark grey. Base not rewehed. 6in. +

(Probably corresponds to unit 3, section 4.)
( b I

66in, ++
Measured Section 4
North end of pit 2, 14° 8. 29° W. of eentre of V6213. See fig. 4
Unit Deseription Thickness
WIPAJIREI FORMATION

1 Sandstone, brown, terruginous, with green elay- 2in.
stone and Jimouitie pebbles: @ypsum purtings.
Thiekens to north-east (corresponds to anit o,
section 5),

UNCON FORMITY
ETADUNNA FORMATION

2 Claystone, light grey, with scattered fine saimd- 24in,
sized arenaceous particles. This apparently com-
bines units 2 and 3 of section 2.

3 Claystone, dark grey, with basal intraformational — 20in,
breecia consisting of angular to subrounded
fragments of light calearcous mudstone and
darker brown claystone in matrix dark grey
claystoue.

4 Cluystone, light grey, ealeareous (dolomitie); 24in.
green intraformational breeeia at base.

5 Claystone, green. Same as fossiliferous unit at 4in.
V585. Base not exposed.

74din.

Measured Section 5

Along line a-b (fig. 4) in main quarry of Kutjamarpu fauna (V6213) 1,835ft. N. 1° E. of
type locality of Ngapakaldi fauna (V5858). See fig. 4 and fig. 12, A.

Unit Deseription Thickness
1 Dine sand .. Pee be te Ses ee Gin.
UNCONFORMITY
WIPAJIRI FORMATION
2 Shale, dark grey, finely laminated, containing plant 3lin,

remains, Limonitic stain at base. Occasional
arennecous partings with limonite stain, and
lenses of tiue sand with green elay balls or
arenaccous green clay associated with turtle
remains,

zn Pebble conglomerate, rounded green, occasionally Tin,
blue, claystone clasts, with seattered ferruginous
sandstone clasts (smaller size than in umit 5),
rounded duricrust fragments, irregular siliceous
clasts. Upper 2in. ferruginized. Main verte-
brate fossil horizon of Kutjamarpu fauna.

STIRTON, TELFORD, ann WOODBURNE—TIRARI DESERT 461
TERTIARY FAUNA

4 Claystone, blue, with seattered large green ¢lay- Sin,
stone clasts and limonite conerctions and pebble-
sized green and brown elaystone clasts. Con-
fins impressions of unionid peleeypods and
vertebrate remains.

5 Conglomerate, pebble to boulder sized clasts, 4in,
mainly rounded green sandstone, cliystone and
subrounded red ferrnginous sandstone frag-
mints in a@ Timonite coated sand matrix. More
angular Jight to dark grey elaystone elasts
derived from underlying Etadunna formation.
Seattored rounded duricrust elasts and angular
fragments of chert. Conspicuous large turtle
fragments usually standing on edge. Contains
fish, reptile and oammal remains,

UNCON FOUMLTY
ETADUNNA FORMATION
6 Claystone, light groy, base not reached .. ..

Slin.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Butler, PL M., 1939: The teeth of the Jurassie mammals, Proe. Zool, See. Lond., B. 109:
329-356, 12 figs.

Green, H. Le TL. HL, 1937: The development and morphology of the teeth of Ornithorhynchus.
Phil. Trans. Roy, Soe. Lond., B. biol. ser., 228: 367-420, 14 figs. 18 pls.

Johns, KR. K. and Ludbrook, N. H., 1968: Investigation of Lake Eyre. Geol Surv. S,
Australia, report of invest. no, 24; 1-104, 17 figs.

Patterson, B. Wo6; Early Cretaceous mammals and the evolation of mammalian molar teeth,
Hieldiana: Geol. 18, 1: 1-105, 17 figs.

Homer, A. S,, 1956: The Osteology of the Reptiles. Chieago: Univ. Press. xxi + 772 Pps
248 figs.

Simpson, G, G., 1925; A catalogue of the Mesozoic mammalia in the geological department
of the Brifish Museum, London, British Museum (Nat. Hist.), x + 215 pp,
12 pls.

129: American Mesozoic Mammalia. Mem, Peabody Mus., 38, pt. 1, pp. ixw +

171, 62 figs. 32 pls.

———— 1W28b: The dentition of Oraithorhynchus as eyidenee of its affinities. Amer. Mus.
Noyit. no. $0; 1-15, 2 figs,

Stirton, R.A. 1999; Late Tertiary Marsupials from South Australia. Ree. 8. Aust. Mus.
ix, 2: 247-268, 11 figs.

——— 1Wdta: Tertiary Marsupials from Vietoria, Australia. Mem. Nat. Mus. Viet., 20:
121-184, 6 figs.

———— WsTh: A New Koala from the Pliocene Palankariona Fauna of South Australia,
Ree, S. Aust. Mus., sili, 1: 71-81, 2 figs.

W67a: The Diprotodontidae from the Neapakaldi fauna, South Australia, Bull.
Bur. Min. Resources no. 83.

67h; A diprotedontid From the Mioeene Kutjamarpu fauna, South Australia.
Tbink.

Stirton, RH. A, Tedford, R. H., and Woodburne, M. O., 1964: A new Tertiary fauna from the
Tirari Desert, South Australia (Abstract). Geol. Sor, Amor, Spec. Pap. no, 82:
241-282,

Stirton, Ry A. Woodbuarne, M. O.. and Plane, M. D., 1967. A phylogeny of the Tertiary

Diprotodontidue and its siguificance in correlation. Bull. Bur. Min. Resources
no, 83,

462 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dr. R. A. Stirton died suddenly on June 14th, 1966 while this paper was in press.
This great loss is keenly felt for ‘‘Stirt’’? was a person of rare ability, enthusiasm and
generosity and an inspiration to all who knew him. The inquiry into the history of the
Australian mammals had been one of his major interests for over a decade and it is largely
through his stimulus that much of the present knowledge concerning the Tertiary vertebrates
of that continent has been brought to light. Our association with Dr. Stirton on these and
other studies has been a thoroughly enjoyable and rewarding experience and it is our
intention to carry on, us far as possible under the circumstances, the Australian projects
he initiated.

R. H. Teprorp and M, O. WoopBurNE.

A REVIEW OF THE STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA (ASTEROIDEA;
GONIASTERIDAE)

BY S. H. SHEPHERD

Summary

The asteroid genus Nectria is reviewed in the light of recent collections and a new species, N.
saoria, from southern Australian seas is described. Notes upon the morphology, ecology and
distribution of each species are included together with a key for the genus.

A REVIEW OF THE STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA
(ASTEROIDEA; GONIASTERIDAE)

By 8. A. SHEPHERD
SUMMARY

The asteroid genus Nectria is reviewed in the light of recent
collections and a new species, N. saoria, from southern Australian
seas is described. Notes upon the morphology, ecology and distribu-
tion of each species are included together with a key for the genus.

INTRODUCTION
The characteristically Australian genus Nectria Gray is widely
distributed in southern Australian seas ranging from the Abrolhos
Islands in Western Australia to Norah Head on the New South Wales
coast. Sladen (1889, p. 318) also reports a specimen from Fiji.

Six species have been described, one of which is endemic to New
Zealand. All the species are benthie and limited to shelf waters.
Until recently the paucity of specimens has severely impeded a
knowledge of the genus with the result that the task of separating
the species has not been easy. Clark (1946, p. 85) summarized the
knowledge of the genus and gave a key. Recent dredgings, and
particularly the advent of the aqualung, have enabled biologists to
collect better series of specimens, and to observe their environment
and habits. It is now possible to dispel some of the confusion with
which the genus has been bedevilled since the time of the early
inadequate descriptions of some species.

In this paper the taxonomic relationships between the Australian
species are examined and the results of a study of the specific
characters for each are given, One new species from South Australia
is described and the variation in the other species is discussed. A
key is supplied and photographs of typical forms added to make their
recognition easier and to assist future workers. The author records
his observations upon the ecology and distribution of the species in
southern Australian seas.

The collections of the Queensland Museum, Australian Museum,
National Museum of Victoria, Hobart Museum, South Australian
Museum and Western Australian Museum have been examined and
the following abbreviations are used for them respectively: Q.M.,
A.M., N.M.V., H.M., S.A.M., and W.A.M.

464 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

Nectria ocellifera (Lamarck)
sterias acellifera, Lamarek (1816), p. 558,
Asterias ovellifera, Oudart, pl. 1 (1815).
fromiodiseus acelliferus, Miller and Trosehel (1842), p. 60.
Neetria ocellifera, Dujardin aud Hupe (1862), p. 406.

In 1963 and 1964 the Diamantina dredged extensively in Western
Australian shelf waters between 21° and 33° South Latitude, As a
result seven specimens of this litthe known species were taken, all
between Al? and 33° Sonth in 120-200 m.

Although the locality of origin of the type is not known it now
seems probable that it was taken in Geographe Bay, Western Australia
hy Peron and Le Sueur who dredged there in 1801. (Peron 1812,
pp. aa, 88.)

lor many vears writers have been perplexed by the similarity
of this species to N, ocellata (Sladen 1889, p. 319 and Mortensen 1925,
p. 293). Clark (1914, p. 189 aud 1916, p. 34) however felt little
hesitation in recognizing each species on the basis of the Endeavour
specimens of 1912 and the recent material amply confirms his opinion
and establishes this as an endemic species of the deeper shelf waters
of Western Australia.

There is little difference between the specimens which range in
size from juveniles in which R = 37 mm. to adults in which R = 61 mm,
and ihe distinctive characters of the species are well marked. The
disk is large and the rays short as indieated by the R/r ratio which in
adults is 2.5, and in juveniles 2.9 to & The granulation upon the
uhoral disk tabulae is uniqne. The peripheral granules are large,
tending to be flattened and form a radiating fringe about the tabula.
In several specimens the peripherals protrude obliquely outwards so
as to give a saw-toothed appearance to the tabula. The inner granules
are quite different in character and are fattened and extremely low,
being raised above the tabula by not more than 0.1 mm, They may
be cireular or somewhat polygonal but not crowded. Pedicellariae
are absent. Orally the spines of the adambulacral or oral armature
have little tendency to be prismatic. As Oudart’s Plate is not available
either in the Paris Museum or the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) (pers,
comm. A, M. Clark) the species is figured here for the first time.

Material cramined, W.A.M.: 2 specimens numbered 4914 between
Fremantle and Geraldton 100-200 m. W.A.M.: 1 specimen N7 locality
tiknown; 6 specimens N2-N5 and N8 dredged hy H.M,A,S. Diamantina

SHEPHERD-——STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 465

for C.S.T.R.O, between 100-200 m. off Lancelin Tsland, Fremantle and
ape Naturaliste. A.M.: J.3055 Kndeavour 40-200 m., between
Geraldton and Cape Nuaturaliste,

Nectria ocellata Perrier
Nectria occellata Perrier (1876), p. 1.
Nectria ocellifera Sladen (1889), p. 319,

There has been mueh nomenclatural confusion between NV, ovellala
and N, multispina, The examination of a good series of specimens
from much of the southern coast of Australia has thrown some light
on the problem. There are two good species. One is essentially a
deep water form having widely separated dorsal tabulae; this is
referred to N. ocellata. The other is a littoral seastar with close or
evowded dorsal tabulae and is referred to N. mallispina,

Perrier’s description of N, ocellata (1876) was apparently based
upon specimens in the British Museun) from Tasmania and Bags Strait,
As is discussed later in this paper there ig some intergradation between
the two species in Tasmanian waters. The specimens examined by
Perrier apparently included both intermediates and at least one
representative of N. aultispina, | have seen a photograph of this
latter specimen Number 1.8,10 1862 taken by Dr. Mulligan, Tasmania
(pers. comm, A. M. Clark), Furthermore, l’errier did not specify a
type but it is relatively clear that his deseription refers primarily to
{hose specimens having widely separated dorsal tabulae, This view
is supported by Sladen (1889) and Clark (1914, on p, 140). Sladen’s
figure is typical of specimens taken along the whole of the southern
Australian coast from Bald Island, Western Australia to Norah Mead,
New South Wales, As the only real differences between the two
species relate to the dorsal tabulae the following description is given
of N. ocellata.

The dorsal tabulae are more or less the same size, cirenlar and
well-spaced, so that the distance between them is varely less than the
diameter of a single tabula. The tabulae are usually eylindrical
although in some speeimens the flaring outwards of the peripheral
granules causes them to appear rather hour-glass shaped; they are
covered with small hemispherieal sub-equal granules which may be
well-spaced or comparatively crowded, In the latter case the granules
are vaguely polygonal by mutual pressure. The peripheral granules
are generally similar in size and character to the internal eranules
and are usually elevated somewhat so as fo form a crown about the

466 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tabula, They may be flared outwards a little, but this may be an
artifact, of preservation. The dorsal granulation is not developed
nearly as much as in N. ocellifera or N, wilson,

Two specimens (J,6775 and W.53898) both from about 100 m. in
eastern Bass Strait are notable for the crowding of the dorsal tabulae
and the unusually enlarged central granules on the distal tabulae, The
specimens from New South Wales (1.7218 and .J.7548) taken in
Sydney Harbour show the same peculiarities and the granules of their
dorsal tabulae are coarse and in some eases bluntly pointed. The
spines and pedicellariae orally are also very coarse and thick.
Although there is some resemblance in these respeets to N. wilsont
comparison of the specimens with that species shows that they are
mueh closer to N. ocellata. J do not think that the differences shown
by these specimens are sufficient to justify specific recognition.
Examination of specimens of N. ocellata from Bass Strait and from
the eastern Australian coast shows that the species is very variable
in the characters referred to and that the specimens from Sydney
Ilarbour represent one extreme of the speeies’ range of variation.

These specimens occur near the northern limits of its geographie
range and it may be that the morphological variation refleets the
vonetie instability ol peripheral populations.

Figure 1 shows the range of N. ocellata trom Bald Island in the
Great Australian Bight to Norah Head, New South Wales. There is
a record of a juvenile specimen (K.654) from Caloundra, Queensland
and a specimen (N.M.Y.) is reported to have been taken off Manritins.

Along the South Australian coast and in the Great Australian
Bi; eht the species’ depth range is from about 30 m. to 200 m, Little
is known of its habitat. Towever the species appears common at
45 in. in Backstairs Passage, South Australia. Tere swift tidal
currerts sweep over the sea floor comprised of roek and eoarse shell
vrit beds, where large sponge colonies grow prolifically. Numerous
apecimens were found upon the sponges on whieh they appear to feed
and others were seen moving across the shell-erit beds. On the sea
bed specimens blended with their grey background but at the surface
they were seen to be a brilliant orange colour with a few dark red
markings scattered irregularly over the dorsal surface, Other speei-
mens have been taken at about the same depth on mud or shell-grit
beds between Rapid Head and Cape Jervis, St. Vincent Gull,

On the Victorian and Tasmanian coasts the seastar invades
shallow water as specimens. are reeorded on jetly piles in Vietoria
and intertidally in southern Tasmania. Tt is found there on both
rocky and sandy bottoms.

SHEPHERD-—-STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 467

, LEGEND

N. ocellifera +
N. ocellata °
N. multispina r)
N. macrobrachia a
N. saoria 4
N. wilsoni

FIG. 1
Map showing distribution of the species of Nectria around Australia.

In New South Wales the species has been taken occasionally from
deep water. Three specimens were taken in Sydney Harbour on rocky
bottom but I am informed by skindivers there that the species is quite
rare in shallow water.

Material cxamined. A.M. (Tas. & Vic.): J.5015, 1.5398, J.6775,
J.5013, J.5424, 1.5362, H.5361, J.5867, J.5424 (3 specimens), J.1202;
(N.S.W.), J.7213, J.7543, J.38466; Gt. Aust. Bight (S.A.), J.1614.
N.M.V.: 2 specimens Westernport dredged 22.11.1911; 1 specimen
Portsea Pier; K.294—(2 spec.) Endeavour. W.A.M.: No. 9676 Bald
Is. No. 46 6-62 55-60 m. Gt. Aust. Bight (D. L. Serventy). Q.M.:

468 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

G. 4; 1.294 off Devonport. H.M.: 2 specimens without label R/r =
64/27 and 59/22 latter intermediate with muliispina; H99. S.A.M-:
(11 specimens). K654 Caloundra, Qld. K585, K596, and K604 from
Cape Jervis (collected by the author).

Nectria multispina Clark

575.

Nectria multispina Clark (1928), p.

The existence of this species was probably first noted by Moebius
(1859). An examination of the description and figures of Chaetaster
munitus Moebius 1859 strongly sugwests that it is identical with
N. multisping, Unfortunately the question cannot he conclusively
settled as the type specimen in the Kicl Museum was destroyed during
World War Il (pers. comm, Dr. P. Ohm, Zoologisches Institut und
Muscum der Universitit, Kiel), The locality of the type (Ost Indien)
is vague enough to include the whole of the Australian region,

Fisher (1911 p. 163) also appears to have seen a specimen of the
species from Westernport, Vietoria, but was uncertain as to its
specific identity.

It is thought worth while to vive a detailed description of the
appearance and granulation of the dorsal tabulae to distinguish if
from N, ocellata with which it has frequently been confused.

The tabulae on the disk and proximally on the ray are elevated,
convex and generally le close together so as to be more or less
polygonal through mutual pressure. In some they are so closely
packed that papular areas cannot be seen but in other specimens the
tabnlae are quite rounded and spaced apart. Where the spaces
between tabulae exceed one-half of the diameter of a tabulae or
thereabouts the specimen is regarded as being intermediate with
N. acellata, The granules on the tabulae are polygonal, usually set
close together and flattened on top. Some diversity exists in their
relative size; for the most part the granules are snb-equal but in some
the central 3 to 4 are considerably enlarged. In oa lew specimens

ric, 2

Upper Lett. Dorsal view of holotype of Neelria saoret.

Upper Right. Enlarged dorsal view of portion of paratype of Neetria sooria WLAM, Nod.
8-64 from Hamelin Boy Leeuwin,

Centre Left, Lateral view of ray of halotype of Neetria saoria,

Centre Hight. Enlarged dorsal view of ray of holotype of Nectria sanvia,

Lower Left, Dorsal view of specimen Nod. KK. 615 of Nectria maerobrachia taken at West
Island Encounter Bay at Tm, R/r is 64/1]imm.

Lower Right. Enlarged dorsal view of rays of specimen Nod. K615 of Neelria macrobrachial.

469

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA

470 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

mostly those considered intermediate with NV. vcellala (he granules are
not crowded but separated by small gaps from their neighbours 80
that the granules are not sharply polygonal but rounded at the
vertices, The peripheral granules apart from being somewhat smaller
ure not different in character and shape from the immer grannies,
Sometimes they form a distinct fringe about the tabula but at other
times they are closely appressed to the other granules as in the firure
of Mortensen (1925) p, 298 fig. 9b of N. pedicelligera. Frequently
their ends are trnneate thus giving to the granulation a neat, chipped
appearance, Other differences olf a statistical nature are shown in
fable 1.

As some differences were observed between the specimens taken
in St. Vincent and Spencer Gults and those taken from the more
exposed coasts of South Australia, the series for each is analysed
separately. Gulf populations show very little diversity in morphology
but specimens from exposed coasts show considerable variation In
the characters set out in table 2 and tend to have larger dorsal tabulae
and coarser granules than gulf specimens. The number of specimens
intermediate with NV. ocellata is not vreat but their exannnation leaves
little doubt that some hybridization occurs on these coasts hetween
N, multispima and N. ocellata,

Specimens from the Gulfs are invariably a wine red in colour
dorsally with some of the prominent tabulae at the base of the arms
frequently darker in colour; below the colour is an orange to bright
red, Specimens from exposed coasts show much diversity in colour
ranving from yellow or orange to a very dark red; their colour below
is usually a lighter shade of that dorsally. Specimens from depths
exceeding 15 m, are usually found to be lighter in colour than those
from shallower water.

The Vietorian specimens show the sane variability as the South
Austrahan specimens from exposed coasts.

A few of the specimens which [ haye seen from Tasmania ancl in
particular from D’*Kintrecasteaux Channel cause difficulty as they show
varying degrees of intermediacy between NV. ocellata and N, waltispine.

FIG. 3
Upper Lel(, Dorsal view of specimen of Nectiia moulbisping Nod, KO94 taken at Christies
Beach, St. Vineent Gulf at 6m. R/r is T1/28mm,
Upper Right. Wnlarged dorsal view of sume specimen of Neotria multiapined
Lower Loft, Dorsal view of specimen of Neetvin ovellifera NT & Rr is 69/2umm,
Photo. Dr. Kh. PL Hodgkin.
Lower Kiycht. Enlarged view of dorsal disk tubulae of same specimen of Neotrin ovellifera,

471

NECTRIA

STARFISH GENUS

ERD—

SHEPHE

A72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The species is characteristically a shallow water seastar and is
found only on rocky substrate. In St. Vincent and Spencer Gulls it
ix Very common on shallow water reefs on their eastern margins where
it ranges bathymetrically from about low water to 15 m, Tt is most
frequently seen in the open amongst the brown algae which characterize
such areas. he starfish is usually taken feeding on rock-encrusting
organisms but its (let also ineludes small shellfish and oeeasionally
red algae,

On the exposed coast the seastar’s habitat is somewhat different;
there is seeks shelter from the force of the swell so that in exposed
locations it is found in deeper water between 10 and 30 m. in caves
and crevices where it feeds on a variety of enerusting bryozoa,
sponges and ascidians. Where there is some protection trom the swell
it may be found in shallower water between 5 and 15 m. among: the
red algae upon which it is sometimes found feeding. The species is
by no means as prolific on the open coast as in the Gulfs.

The known range of the species is from Spencer Gulf eastwards
and along the Vietorian and Tasmanian coasts, It has not been
reported from New Sonth Wales waters,

Discussion: The inter-relationships of N, ocellata and N, multispina
are of some interest.

On the Sonth Australian coasts N. orelluta is typically an
inhabitant of deeper water and appears to be exeluded from the (hulls
and the littoral fringe of the southern coast. Neetria ninlhispind on
the other hand does not occur in deeper water but along the coastal
fringe and in the Gulfs. It is considered that the maintenance of the
two species is well justified on the existing evidence, Tf the morpho-
logical differenees in N, ocellata and N. multispina were ecologically
determined then much more intermediacy would be expected than does
in fact ocenr. Furthermore in the few localities in South Australia
where overlap occurs the correlation between phenotype and habitat
is not invariable. It is thought that the ecological requirements of
the two species are sufficiently different to separate them miero-
geographically with a probable zone of overlap oeeurring on the open
coast, The greater variability of N, multispina and the incidence of
specimens intermediate with N, ocellata on open coasts suggests that

FIG. 4
Dorsal view of specimen of Nectria acellata trom Westernport Victoria. taken 22/11/1911

lodyed in NVM.V. Ki/r is 57/22mm, and enlanged view of dorsal disk tabulae of same
specimen,

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 473

474 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

whilst some gene flow takes place between the species in areas of
overlap, it is negligible in the gulfs where ecological differences are
reintoreed by geographical separation,

The concurrence ol both species on Victorian and Tasmanian
coasts in similar habitats in shallow water and the degree of inter-
gradation observed there suggests a similar reduction of isolating
mechanisms between the species with some consequential interbreeding,

Material examined. A.M.: J.6752, J.6776, J.4558, N.M.V.: 3
specimens Cape Paterson Vie.; 1 specimen Torquay, Coll. D. Watson;
1 specimen Flat Rocks Inverloch 27.1.64; 1 specimen Waratah Bay,
Coll, J. TW. MePherson 1951, @.M.: 2225 St. Vincent Gulf. HLM.:
H.96, TL97. S.ALM. (82 specimens): K19, K589, K590, K592-595,
K624, R655, 8662-667, K669. (Collected by the author.)

Nectria wilsoni Shepherd and Hodgkin
Nectria wilsoni Shepherd and Hodgkin 1966, p. 119.

I have seen mine more specimens of this species, oue numbered
K.51) (S.A.M.) taken at Bunbury, Western Australia and eight
numbered 1-66 (W.ALM.) taken at Two People Bay, Western Australia.
Some of the specimens are juveniles the smallest having R/r =
87/12 1m, but all of them are within the range of variability of the
species. The known distribution of the species as now extended is
from Beagle Island (29° 50° South Latitude) on the Western
Australian coast to Two People Bay in the Great Australian Bight.

Nectria macrobrachia Clark
Nectria macrobrachia Clark (1923), p. 236,

The species shows little variation throughout its range. In all
specimens the arms are relatively long, the tabulae are low and always
excessively crowded together aud usually appear rather concave in
their general facies. The inner granules are invariably irregular,
polygonal, closely packed, very low, and usually subequal, in size.
The peripheral granules are distinetly larger than the inner granules,
and sre elevated and set closely together so as to form a crown around
the tabula,

The two specimens taken off Port Gregory, Western Australia
are notable as they are atypical in the shape of the peripheral granules
which are flared and radiate outwards and are quite different in
character from the inner granules. These show marked affinities with
N. ocellifera.

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 475

Pedicellariae are generally absent; only on one specimen (from
Dunsborough, Western Australia) were any detected, In that case it
was three-pronged, thick at base, stumpy and rounded at the top and
situate orally behind the mouth plate. On many specimens a number
of adjacent oval spines are polygonal and present a flat face to each
other; these appear to be capable of performing the funetion of
pediecllariae, The colour is a partienlarly constant feature; nor is
it fugacions as in the ofher species, It ranges from a light yellow or
fawn to a brown-orange or even pink colour and all specimens except
some from Western Australia show the very ends ol the rays prettily
tipped with a darker brown, The Sonth Australian specimens are
lighter in colour than those from Western Australia, Frequently the
peripheral granules of the dorsal tabulae are paler in colour than the
Itiner granules.

Like other members of the genus this species is an inhabitant of
rocky substrate and feeds similarly upon bryozoan polyps, sponges
and other enerusting organisms. Bathymetrically it ranges from the
infertidal zone down to about 350 m, Along the South Australian
coast if is abundant on the shallow limestone and granite reefs of
sonthern Yorke and Fleurien Peningulas on exposed cousts, It is
equally at home at depths of 50 m. in Baekstairs Passage living on
sponge colomes, The species has not been recorded trom the exlmer
waters ol the two gulls.

Material examined. W.AM.: 1 specimen Hall Bank Fremantle
1.2.68 R/r 54/15, BARW.; 1 specimen Dinsborough on rock 20 m,
154.65, BRW,; 1 specimen Rottnest 26 m. Duttield Ridgwe 18.4.59;
2 specimens Pt, Gregory 120 m, Stn. DM /1/40/64, O.S.1.R.O.; 1 speci-
men Dinshorough Limestone reef 55’ 15.4.65; 1 specimen Dunsborongh
* iniles offshore limestone 25/2/63; 1 specimen Dunsborongh 18,4.60
4 miles offshore BAR.W. rocky beltom CGeographe Bay at 18 m.
S.AM.: KOk6 (1 specimen) Cape servis at 36 m.: KG615 (3 speci
mens) West Island at 10 m.: K6G60 (11 specimens) Pondelowie Bay,
Yorke Peninsula at 5 m. (all collected by the author). N.MV.: 1
specimen Cape Schank 8/6/61,

Nectria saoria n. sp.

Diaqnosis: Disk small, arms loug and tapering. Plates on ahoral
surface of disk form low paxillilorm tabulae very crowded and covered
with small polygonal granules, Distally aboral arm tabulae low and
crowded very variable in size bat similar in shape and appearance 16
ather aboral tabnlae, Paptae are common on the distal part of the
arm and occur intermarginally,

476 RECORDS OF THF S.A. MUSEUM

Superficially the species resembles N. maullispine but differs from
it und other members of the venns in the extreme erowding of the
aboral tabulae, whieh are invariably polygonal through mutual
pressuce, and in the similarity in strueture and appearance between
the distal tabulae of the rays and those of the disk. The other species
(apart from N, macrebrachia) show quite marked differences between
the disk and distal arm tabulae, and there are few or no papulac
distally or intermarginally,

Deseription of holotype: Rays 5, Rév is 56/14 mm, R= 4r. I
is 18 mun. at base, TL mm, at the middle and 8 mm. near the tip of the
ray. Disk relatively small, a little clevated; rays narrow, rounded
somewhat raised proximally and terete for distal half. Aboral plates
form convex tabulae of rather smooth appearance, more or less
ivregularly polygonal, those on the disk near base of arms heing larger
(8-binm. across) and those distally 2-3 mm. across.

v1

Tabulae very crowded and covered by coat of low slightly convex,
closely appressed polygonal granules. On a plate 41mm, aeross there
are 20-30 inner grannlés among which there may be considerable
disparity in size, the centre ones sometimes twice as large being up to
1mm, across. Peripherally, there are trom 30-40 distinctly smaller
eranules about 0.2 mm, across and sometimes flared a little to form a
fringe and often giving a ‘furry’? appearance to the dorsal surface.
Plates on distal part of ray covered by similar if slightly smaller
granules.

Papulae emerve between the aboral tabulac in groups of from
9-15. They are more frequent on disk and proximally on ray than
distally on ray, and are present between marginal plates.

Madvreporite small and inconspicuous, about 2 mm, across midway
between eentrum and tmiearei,.

Marginal plates distinct proximally but distally beeome crowded
and diffiealt to distinguish from surrounding plates; about 24-26 in
each series, proximally twiee as high as long; midway along ray
squarish and flat; distally smaller convex and irregular, All are
covered with a uniform coat of small polygonal granules whieh tend
to be individually distinet and rounded.

Actino-lateral areas small, plates erowded with low coarse
prismatic granules close enough to obscure the outlines of individual
plates.

Adambulacral plates abont 45, each with three furrow spines,
‘arely two, subequal prismatic and blunt. Proximally furrow spines
mov. long and 0.3 mm. across. On the surface of cach plate five or

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 477

xix thick short and prismatic sub-ambulaeral spines; the three longest
of these adjoin the furrow spines and the remaining two or three
behind vesembling the prismatic granules on the first series of
actino-laterals,

Some pedicellariae on aboral tabulae nestling under marginal
granules and comprising three to four slightly eurved flattened spines,
There are none orally.

Oral plates with six or seven thick prismatic spines, the mmermost
stoutest; on surface of each plate there are eight shorter and stouter
spines und distally a group of 2-4 short, thiek, grannliform spines.

Material examined, The holotype (IX670) was taken at 10m. on a
submerged limestone reef between Wright Is. and The Bluff, Eneounter
Bay, Twelve specimens are designated paratypes but show no signifi-
cant differences from the type. Four of them (K628) are from the
sane reel, 4 specimens (K627) from West Island, Eneounter Bay,
2 specimens off Wright Island Encounter Bay and one ( K658) taken
between Thistle and Hopkins Islands, Spencer Gulf on a limestone
reef at 6m. All specimens were taken by the author whilst diving,
The other paratype (No, $-64) from Hamelin Bay, Leenwin, is lodged
in the Western Australian Museum.

The specimens were all a bright rose-red colour in life. The skin
of the papular areas aborally was black and the papulae protruded
hetween the tabulae, so that the tabulae appeared to be outlined prettily
in black, The colouration is constant and quite different from any
other species of the genns. In preserved specimens the papular areas
are concealed under the aboral tabulae,

The habitat of the species is restrieted to rocky reefs on exposed
cousts where it is found down to about 20 m, feeds on rock-
enerusting organisms particularly colonial ascidians on which a slight
groove may be seen where it has grazed the surface, Tt also feeds on
hithothamnia and other red algae; T have observed spechnens engulf
fronds of the delicate red alga Neomonospora griffithsioides Warvey
leaving behind only the colourless cellular structure,

There is no doubt as to the generic location of the species; in
dimensions, shape and habitat it is very similar to N. macrobrachia
whereas the granulation of the dorsal tabulae resembles that of
N, multispina.

478 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

There are seven specimens in the Western Australian Museum
which are referred to this species.

W.A.M. 6-64 R — 67 mm. 60’ near Pilot Rock Yallingup.

W.A.M. 7-64 R — 67.5 mm. near Pilot Rock Yallingnp.

W.A.M, 8-64 R = 59 mm. Hamelin Bay, Leeuwin. Jetty Piles.

W.ALM. 4-62 R — 57 mm, North side of North Twin Peak Is.
Zecherche Archipelago, Intertidal granite, Colour pinkish-red.

W.A.M, 5-64 R = 45 mm. 16m. 3 miles off Dunsborough, Geographe
Bay.

W.A.M, 5-62 R —18 mm. 1 mile east of Frenclhiman’s Bay, Albany
intertidal pool.

Dr. K.P. Hedekin has also two specimens from Cheyne Beach
near Albany taken inter-tidally and one specimen from Shoreham near
Melbourne, Victoria,

From the material before me the species has a distribution from
South Western Australia to Port Phillip Bay, Victoria.

Nectria pedicelligera Mortensen
Nectria pedicelligera Mortensen (1925), p. 201.

| have not seen any specimens of this species. However the
degeription of the type and the figures shown do not disclose any real
difference from N. multispina, The pedicellariae shown by Mortensen
are not an uncommon feature in the genus. The species must be
retained awaiting examination of specimens.

REMARKS ON THE VALUE OF CERTAIN CHARACTERS
The results of morphologieal data obtained from each specimen
are summarized in table 1,

Ror Ratio. The differences between species may be statistically
significant. In three species (N. saoria, N, macrobrachia and N,
ocellifera) the relative size of disk and arms is constant and a reliable
character but is extremely variable in the other species.

Dorsal tabulae. The granular covering of the tabulae on the disk
and at the base of the rays is of value diagnostically, The shape and
appearance of the granules is a constant feature for any species,
although the size of the granules on a tabulae shows some variation
even for a single specimen. For this reason only the observed range
in the number of granules on the prominent dorsal tabulae at the base

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA 479

of the ray is given, In those species where the number of granules
is relatively few the grains are usually large hemispherical and
well-spaced.

The granular covering of the plates distally on the rays is also
of significance. In two species (N. saoria and N, macrobrachia) they
are very similar to the proximal tabulae but in the other species they
are low and covered by a uniform coating of small grains so that it is
diffeult to distinguish individual tabulae,

Papulae. The presence of numerous papulae emerging between the
distal plates of N. sworia and N. macrobrachia is a uselul diagnostic
character. In the other species papulae are rare or wanting beyond
the proximal half of the ray.

Oral spines. Certain statistical differences are noted in the
number of furrow spines and the spines on the mouth plates. Some-
times the number of spines on a plate vary between arms, and in such
cases that number is adopted which is predominant in the specimen
for the purposes of the table.

Pedicellariae. Apart from the two species where they are rare or
absent the occurrence or type of pedicellariae has little significance,
They may be entirely absent or may occur dorsally beneath the tabulae
or on the oral side or both, They usually comprise from three to six
fine spines bent inwards at the tip but sometimes there are two to
three short thick bluntly pointed component spines. Where present
dorsally they are to be found on the tabular shaft (as in Mortensen’s
fig, 9a (1925) p. 293) and orally either on the mouth plate or in the
series behind the furrow spines. Occasionally they are seen in the
oral intermediate areas.

Marginal Plates. The number of marginal plates depends largely
upon the length of the ray. N. ocellifera having shorter rays has
considerably fewer plates than the other species. The character is of
little use.

480 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF NECTRIA

Disk small, rays long and tapering Rr is 3 to 4.
Disk tabulae low and erowded—dorsal tabulae
distally on rays similar in form and granulation
to those proximally. Papulae emerge between
tabulae throughout length of ray ..

Disk larger. Disk tabulae conspicuously elevated.
Tabulae distally on ray low and crowded with
different type of granulation usually a cluster
of small grains. Papulae rare or wanting
distally on ray

Dorsal tabulae crowded, with low closely packed
polygonal granules, the peripherals larger and
provide a raised margin so that each tabula
appears coneave, Colour: Pale yellow to
orange, the tips of rays darker. Papular areas
cannot be seen .. 2. 6 we ee ee oe

Dorsal tabulae convex with covering of tightly
packed polygonal granules, the peripherals
smallest. Colour bright red, papular areas
theta. Ce saleniia Be lgeaide dow} gant papldete eb te oe

Granules of dorsal tabulae very low (elevated
about 0.1 mm.) irregular and flat. Peripheral
granules are large and seale-like and form a
regular radiating marginal fringe .. .. .. ..

Granules of dorsal tabulae not low, but hhemi-
spherical or polygonal, 0.5 to 1 mm, high ..

Distal tabulae with a large dominant central
hemispherical granule, surrounded by a ring of
smaller grains. Disk tabulae with large pro-
tuberant well-spaeced dome-shaped granules

Distal tabulae comprised of group of small
crowded grains, sub-equal in size .

Dorsal tabulae elevated, well-spaced, with cover-
ing of hemispherical granules, the peripherals
forming a radiating fringe .. at agi gst ep Se

Dorsal tabulae elevated and erowded and covered

with closely packed polygonal — flat-topped

granules .. 58 Ao Lit ae!

macrobrachia

sdorta

ocellifera

4

wilsona

Hy)

ocellata

maultis pine

481

SHEPHERD—STARFISH GENUS NECTRIA

|
GB-0% 8Z-ZE 8Z-0Z 08-0 O8-€% Ze-8T sors soquyd
jeursiew-oredng
quosq Vy quosold quosodd quosol | quosol dg quesq Vy cht “oelIe[[ooIpod
%E TVG %LOY FOL | YOL YES YLE | W8E %S %L | WE WES %ES WBE | Wer Vee %Zs%9Z | WEE %Oe WAT |
Lt 9 ¢ F bo Ge de gg GIRLS by tag 6 8 4 9 L 9 ¢ i gale
jo ULSIeUL
| | | yeuurxoad
yore uo sourdg
8 =%Y SF WOL %9 |} %SS VWI %% Ftl WS | YE Wee Wea | wee %z9
& j nr € z ¢ F g g $ € F g “sourds Mor
|
091-09 GL-Gg 08-02 GOT-0¢ | OL-€€ 1-08 fer 30 ae
[repeap!
aRynqey oD1e]
uo sopnueds
| fo dequinu
| | | ul oSueyy
a0 F OE sro TSE | OSO FTE | 870 + BE | IFO + 8% a0 F OL STF weopy
O'F-ZE 0'F-0°S oE-9'% | LE-LS SE-LS ear |e as iar
| ay
29 9L OTT 86 ital 19 oe Curur
| | | Uf) paadasqo
H | yy UMNUIXeyy
Fe 1% LT | zs | &% 6 ofe panos
SUSTIIDOaS
Jo doquinNy
DIYIVLQOLIDUL DIsoDns quospun nuidsiynu Dy0)]990 ntafyyaoo

T ATaVL

piipa xy SnUED oY3 Jo Sefoeds Jo soNstogowavyo ;RolsojoydIoyy

482 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TABLE 2

Morphological differences between specimens of NV. multispina taken in St. Vineent and Speneer
Gulfs and on exposed coasts.

Gulf Specimens Exposed Coast Specimens
Speeimens examined.........-..--++55 | 43 39
R/r- ;
Range oc .cce see saae ccc eeecennes 2.8-3.3 2,8-3.8
Mean R/t + LSD. oo... eee eee eee 3.1 -— O14 3.3 + 0.28
Oral spines on each side of mouth plate 6 7 8 6 7 8 9
15%, = 85%, 20% 31% 47% 19% oe
Furrow spines ...6....6 + eee eee eee 3 4 3 4
92% 8% 73% 23%, 4%,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Lam grateful to the efits of the Museums of each State in making the respective

collections available, Dr. BE. P. Hodgkin and Miss E. Pope read the manuseript and have
given valued criticism.

REFERENCES
(lark, WW. L., 1914: Ree, W.A, Mus., pp. 189-140,
———— 1916: Endeavour Seientifie Results, Vol. TV, 34-35,
———— 1924: Journ. Linn. Soe. Lond., 35: 236-287.
1928; Ree. SA, Mus, a: 475.
—— 1916: Echinoderms of Australia, p. 85-80.
Dujardin, M. FP. and Tupi, M. H., 1862: Suites & Buffon, Echinodermes, p. 406.
Fisher, W. K., 1911: Bull. U.K. Nat. Mus. No, 76, pp. 168, 164.
Gray, J. E,, 1842; Aun, Mag, Nat, Hist, vis 297.
Moebius, K., 1859: Neue See Sterne des Wamburger und Kieler Museums, p. 3. (Abhand1.
ad. Gebietes Naturw, bree. val naturwiss Bad Vo abth. 2.)
Lanmarek, J.B. Px 1816: Anim. s, vert., ii: 590,
Mortensen, Th., 1925: Vidensk Medd., 79, 291-4.
Mulley, J. and Troschel, I. A, 1842: System der Astoriden, p. 60.
Peron, F., 1812: Voyage of Discovery to Australia, 1: 56, 83,
Perrier, H., 1876; Arch. Zool. Mxper., Vs: 1-6.
Shepherd, 8. A. and Hodgkin, BH, P., 1966: Journ. Ray. Soc, W.A., Vol. 48, 4, pp. 119-121.
Sladen, W. P., 1889: Challenger Rep, Asteroids, pp, 319-320,

Nore.—Unfortunately T was not able to see Miss A, M, Clark’s paper on the Echinoderms
of the Port Phillip Survey (Mem, Nat. Mus. Viei., No, 27, p. 298) hefore this paper went
to press, As some confusion between the species is evident in her work T add the following
comments upon table 8 at p. 315.

The first thirteen specimens are probably N. ocellata although two of them (90.4.7443
and] 62.7.952) may be intermediate with N. multisping, The next three speeimens W.AM.
18.50; 19.59; and 2.62) are N. wilson’ (one of them is figured in pl. 1). The next four
specimens are all well within the range of yariation of Ny nultisping and must be referred to
that species (except the type of N. pedicelligera upon whieh judgment is reserved), T hase
this conclusion upon the data supplied and the figures of two of the specimens which are
in print.

Of the last group of specimens, five (W.A.M. 5.62; 4.62; and 1.62 and the two specimens
of Dr, Hodgkin from Rottnest Island), are N. sdoeria and the remainder are N. multispina.

THE DISTRIBUTION OF INTRODUCED SNAILS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY D. E. POMEROY AND HELENE M. LAWS

Summary

With the development of gardens and agriculture in South Australia has come the introduction of a
variety of exotic terrestrial snails; some have settled unobtrusively and are seldom noticed, some
have probably escaped notice completely and are yet to be found, but others have made themselves
felt by their depredations in gardens and crops or by their countless numbers. Record has been made
of species in South Australia on a number of different occasions (Verco, 1922, 1924; Cotton, 1954;
Quick, 1952, 1953; Taylor, 1928) but no account has been given of their distribution in the State. In
the following pages the introduced species and their present distribution will be considered.

THE DISTRIBUTION OF INTRODUCED SNAILS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA
By D, BK. POMEROY axp HELENE M, LAWS
INTRODUCTION

With the development of gardens and agriculture in South
Australia has come the introduction of a variety of exotic terrestrial
snails; sume have settled unobtrusively and are seldom noticed, some
have probably escaped notice completely and are yet to be found, but
others have made themselves fell by their depredations in gardens and
crops or hy their countless numbers, Reeord has been made of species
in South Australia on a number of different occasions (Vereo, 1922,
1924; Cotton, 1954; Quiek, 1952, 1953; Taylor, 1928) but no account
has heen given of their distribution in the State, In the following
pages the introduced species and their present distribution will be
considered,

SNAILS INTRODUCHED INTO SOUTH AUSTRALIA

During the past hundred years, ten species of exotie snail are
known to have become established in South Australia (table 1). Six
of these do oveur naturally in the British Isles but the ranges of all
ten elude the Mediterranean region, All species (except Ferussacia)
are known (Pomeroy, 1966; Laws, unpublished) to have the ability to
survive ina dormant state for several inonths, an ideal attribute for
long range dispersal by man.

Times of arrival and establishment in South Australia are
extremely diffieult to ascertain, The earliest known records for these
species in South Australia are given in table 2 but it is very likely
that some, especially the smaller inconspicuous ones, were established
for a considerable time before they were noted. The earliest recorded
introduction is that of Helix aspersa which was brought to Adelaide
before 1879 and liberated in the West Terrace cemetery in the hope
that it would help in eradicating introduced slugs; it was also thought
to have heen brought in by Sir Samuel Way to provide food for aviary
birds. (Cotton, 1949). The British Isles would be the most likely place
of origin of these importations, Coehlicella ventrosa, Helicella
stolismena and Ferussacia (Section Ferussacia) oeeur naturally only
in the Mediterranean region (including Spain and Southern France)
and most probably came from that area. IH, neglecta the second
earliest recorded species, must have come [rom the Mediterranean
region since the establishment of a colony in Kent in 1915 post-dates
its introduction to South Australia. Uheba oceurs in the British Tsles,

484

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TABLE 1

Snaila introduced into South Australia, their native range and other areas of introduction

Areas of Introduction

Species Native Distribution
World Australia
Ferussacia sp. Mediterranean ...... oo —
(Section Ferussacia) |
Oxychilus alliarius British Isles, Europe, | South Africa, U.S.A... | N.S.W.

(Miller)

Helicella virgata (da
Costa)

H, neglecta (Deaparnaud)
H. caperata (Montagu). .
H. stolismena

(Bourguinat)
Helix aspersa (Miiller) . .

Cochlicella acuta (Miller)

C. ventrosa (Ferussac)

Theba pisana (Miller) ..

North Africa,
Seandinayia
British Isles, West
Europe,
Mediterranean
South France,
Mediterranean
British Isles, Hurope,
East Mediterranean
Spain, South France. .

British Isles, Europe,
West Mediterranean
to Black Sea

West and South West
British Isles, South
West Europe,
Mediterranean

South France,
Mediterranean

Spain, West France,
Mediterranean,
Local only in South
West British Isles

British Isles (in Kent,
1915)

U.S.A., South Africa,
New Zealand,
Mexivo, Chile,
Argentina, Haiti

U.S.A., South Africa .

California (now eradi-
cated), Somaliland,
South Africa

Victoria, Queensland

Victoria, Tasmania

Victoria, Tasmania,
Queensland, West
Australia, New South
Wales

Weat Australia

Victoria, ‘Tasmania

West Australia,
Victoria

TABLE 2

Earliest authentic records of introduced species in South Australia

Species Date Locality Reference
Ferussacia sp... +. .6-+ 1953 Linden Park, Adelaide | Cotton, 1954
Oxychilus alliarius .-... (1935) (Hoye)... fan icee 5s 2204 S.A.M. Coll.

1962 Linden Park.......-- 8.A.M, Coll,
Helicella virgata ....-.. | 1920-21 Millicent .........-- Verco, 1924 (as Helix
| pisanc)
H. neglecta 2.22. s scene \ 1891 Levens, Yorke Cox, in ‘Taylor
Peninsula
H, caperata ....6 45-20 1934. Robe. 44. c4¢cc anes 8.A.M. Coil.
H., stolismena.......-55 1912 Robe .... 4p eeeanee S.A.M. Coll.
Helix aspersa.... 0... ++ Betore 1879 Adelaide .......550 Cotton, 1949
Cochlicella aculty oo... 4. 1953 Minlaton, Yorke 8.A.M. Coll.
Peninsula
GC. ventrosa ... 26... 2s 1921 Mount Gambier ..... 8.A.M. Coll.
Theba pisana .......++ 1928 Port Adelaide .....-. Taylor, 1928

POMEROY ann LAWS—INTRODUCED SNAILS IN S.A, 485

Init locally and in the extreme South West and therefore most probably
also came from the Mediterranean (Quick, 1953). Quick is of the
opinion that 7, virgata is also an introduction from that region sinee
some specimens which he examined are much closer to Mediterranean
forms than to British ones, There is thas evidence of Mediterranean
origin for at least half of our introduced land snails, Similarities of
climate would certainly Yavour the establishment of Mediterranean
species in South Australia,

The most recent introductious are those ol! Cochlicella acula and
Ferussacia sp. Oxychilus alliarius also appeared in the Linden Park
area in 1962 (Laws, in press); a small collection of three similar
shells was made at Hove in 1935 but they cannot positively be assigned
lo this species,

THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE INTRODUCED SNAILS

The distribution of introduced land snails in South Australia is
shown in fig. 1. Centres of establishment are on Yorke Peninsula, in
the Adelaide area, and in the Sonth-Hast of the State where, in each
CaSC, SIX Species occur,

Helia. aspersa, Helicella virgata and Cochlicella ventrosa occur
Widely throughout the agriculiural regions of the State, although
H. aspersa is confined to areas with summer watering. Apart from
the loealities of the earliest records, there is little information on the
spread of 71, virgata and C, ventrosa except that both have become
established on Kauguroo Island within the last 15 years (H. M. Cooper,
pers, comm,), Melia aspersa arrived there considerably earlier, but
if, has only recently been found on southern Yorke Peninsula probably
having been introduced to Kdithburgh within the past two years
(M. Kenny, pers. comm.). Helicella caperata is restricted to the
South Mast and is also abundant in Victoria; H. stolismena, originally
recorded from Rohe in 1912, is now known to ocenr at Murray Bridge
Where if is Joeally abundant in an abandoned quarry along with
H, virgata, C. ventrosa and the native snails Blsolhera murrayana
(Pfeiffer) and Paralaoma stabilis lredale.

‘Ovychilus alliarius and Ferussacia sp. are both recorded only
from the Adelaide area, Helicella neglecta and Cochlicella acuta ave
restricted to Yorke Peninsula; a sinele collection of A, neglecta in the
South Australian Musewm does bear the locality label “Naracoorte”
but this has not been confirmed,

Oryehilus alliarius has roeently, June 1967, been found at Mount Gambier, after thia
paper had Deen set ipoand the figure on p. 486 reproduced, Ll has not been poxsible therefore
fo inehide this ovsurrence on this map.

486 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

STREAKY BAY

EYRE
PENINSULA

\

* Helix aspersa \
E72) or @ Helicella neglecta
Ror 6 H. virgata

¢ =H. stolismena
4 H.caperata
4“ Cochlicella ventrosa
4 C. acuta
2
+
.

x

3

R

Sy
5

Theba pisana
Ferussacia sp.
Oxychilus alliarius

Fig. 1. The distribution of introduced land snails in South Austratia.

It is likely that Theba pisana has reached its present distribution
relatively rapidly over the past few years. Taylor (1928) recorded
it from Outer Harbour, where it is at present plentiful, but the earliest
South Australian collection of this species in the South Australian
Museum is from Port Lincoln in 1956. All other distribution sites
shown on fig. 1 have been established by the authors since 1962.

THE DISTRIBUTION OF HELICELLA VIRGATA AND
HH, NEGLECT A
Of the ten introduced species, Helicella virgata is the most
widespread, its range in the State extending from Ceduna to the
Victorian border, The main concentration is on the Adelaide Plains,

POMEROY ano LAWS—INTRODUCED SNAILS IN S.A, 487

adjacent areas of northern Yorke Peninsula, and the Lower Murray
Valley, AH. neglecta oceurs on southern Yorke Peninsula, During
summer these two species are easily observed on fence posts, telexraph
poles, grass and shrubbery where they spend the dry months m a
dormant state; in winter they are much less ronspienous. Beeause
of this their distribution was studied during the summer.

Method of Survey.

Roadsides provide a favourable habitat for Helicella aud also an
casily accessible habitat where a large number of observations could
he made in a relatively short time. The method used was as follows:
a series of roads and tracks, parallel to each other and each about
5 miles from the next, was plotted on large-scale maps. Stops were
made at S-mile intervals along these routes and the abundanee of
snails estimated at each; about 600 sites were examined in this way.
I! no snails were found at a stopping-point, a continual watch was
kept until they were found again to enable distribution boundaries
to be established as aecurately as possible.

Map of Distribution.

The survey ineluded all the known range of H7, neglecta and the
inain areas where H, virgata occurs. The results sare shown in fie. 2,
the extent of the survey and the overall distribution of H. virgata
being given in fig. 1, along with distribution of other species, The
remainder of the range of H. virgata was covered in much less detail
by a series of transects along approximately 2,500 miles of main roads.
This information, together with records from the Museum Collections,
was used to determine the full extent of the distribution of
TT, virgata (fig. 1).

Figure 2 shows the relative densities of H. virgata and neglecta

in different parts of their ranges, Five distribution ratings were used
us follows -—
Rating 0: no snails found,
Rating 1: snails found af less than a quarter of the sampling-
points,
Rating 2: areas where snails were found at between a quarter
and a half of the sampling-points.
Rating 3: snails found at more than half of the sampling-points.
Rating 4; snails found at every sampling-point, and st a density
of at least 20/m* on both sides of the road at each
sampling-point,

488 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

“ ae KEY TO SHADING
Wi x
‘acs i
WALLARODRN SS SST H. neglecta H. virgata RATING
WARS areas .
SERRE CTT e ee 3
SS MINNIS CJ oo
SARA NT ANNS SANS ASS
outs RR SSS
PES SSNS ANNE SSN AN HESSEN ‘ J
mo PES STIS ISIS Ee 2
= aan RA NADER RE ANS SAAS SSS AS NEDSS r,
<NODE CSOD CEO TY LSS SS eBALAKLava VZZA SSN 3
cena x

XN
: 8 SESE

ANN SANNASS
SANSA yaas yd
RARENS NY
SSee assy sy
AS SASAS SANS
SS sae SSS SY
RNDASSSES
Sussans Sah
~ Swot
ANN ¥
aes

. SS AN WReroorrs

ote Ss aS
NEY aa \

SCALE

SS

o 3 bn Ss mm aS
MILES >

Fig. 2. The distribution and relative abundance of Helicella virgata and H, neglecta.

Since sampling-points were effectively random, fig. 2 indicates
the probabilities of finding snails at any randomly selected roadside
site within the area shown. The survey was, however, made in the
summers of 1963-64 and 1964-65. Some changes in distribution will
certainly occur from year to year and observations of marked yearly
fluctuations haye been made at a single site.

With the exception of three small colonies on Yorke Peninsula,
the ranges of the two species do not overlap; they do, however, show
a remarkable confrontation (fig. 2). It is also clear from the figure
that H. virgata is relatively uncommon over most of its range.

The Spread of “H. virgata’.

Although there is some evidence as to the time of arrival of this
species in South Australia, there is almost no record of its spread from

POMEROY Anno LAWS—INTRODUCED SNAILS IN S.A. 489

then to the present. There is, however, evidence that it is still
spreading. On Eyre Peninsula its distribution is confined to coustal
fowuships which are old ports, This, as well as a marked tendency to
geeur along major roads more frequently than minor ones, suggests
a correlation with man’s activities.

The most striking correspondence between the activities of man
wud the distribution of I. virguta is seen in the Mid-North of the
State, Figure 3 shows the results of a survey in that region, Most
snails are fornd near townships. In the northern part of the area
no snails were found and this part may be unsuitable for them, In
the southern parts of the area, snail distribution tends to join one
fownship to the next. In the central part there are no oceurrences
of snails more than three or four miles from a township. Of the 37
townships shown in fig. 3, 19 are served by both a main road and a
railway, six by a main road only, six by a railway only and six by
neither, The presence or absence of snails at these townships is shown
in table 3. The presence of a main road or railway seems to inerease
the likelihood of H. virgata becoming established, The null hy pothesis
‘hat neither a main road nor a railway increases the probability of
snails being present at a township can be tested, A 2X2 contingency
fest gives a value of Chi? = 4.82, after applying Yates’ correction.
The probability of this value arising by chance is about 0.08 and the
null hypothesis may therefore he rejected,

TABLE 3

The relationship between transport routes and the prosenee of Hebivella virgate in townships of
the mid-north of Sonth Australia

Number of ‘Townships

Transport Routes Serving Townships

Snails Present Snails Absent
Main road only .....22 002.00. e cee eee 4 2
Railway ouly 52... CLV S ES Seta eed 3 3
Railway and main road -.....0....000 0005 16 | 3
Noither railway uor main road ............ 1 5

|

I is thus most likely that MH. virgata has spread and is spreading
hy man’s activities, in the Mid-North. Snails may reach outlying
townships on vehicles and railway wagons which they have previously
climbed during a dry spell. Rain will bring them down from their
means of transport to become established as a new eolony if conditions
are favourable, Townships such as Burra, Spalding and Port,
Broughton are at this stage, Such a township then beeomes a centre

490 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Paratoo

Orrorroo:

Roaps { ~ Snails present
— Snails not found

| Melrose

; Served by railway & main route
[-)Wirrabara .
O On main route

TOWNSHIPS) © Served by railway
O Without railway & main route
ft] Gladstone SCALE
ElGeorgetown © oe i

4 Brinkworth
Junction

Florieton

() Deep Creek
Eudunda

L

Mig. 3. The distribution in the Mid-North of South Australia of Helivclla virgata in
relation to transport routes,

for local dispersal particularly by farm vehicles, and subsidiary
colonies may be started as around Clare, Rhynie and Mudunda.
Eventually the colonies spread over all suitable country and coalesce
as in most of the area shown in fig. 2. It seems clear that H. virgata
is still spreading and it is probable that the spread will continue.

POMEROY ann LAWS—-INTRODUCED SNAILS IN S.A, 49)

Relationships Between the Disivibution of 1, virgata’’ and those of
“H, neglecta” and of Cheba pisana”’

Attention was earlier drawn to the eonlroutation in the distribn-
tions of /T. vingata and TL, neglecta, Many earlier records were based
(nm mis-identification and are wnreliable so that the sequence of events
leading to the present situation is unknown. Tlowever, there are
authentic records, based on South Australian Museum enlloutions, ol
H. neglecta in the Moonta area, where it was apparently common
earlier in the century, and where //, virgata is now abundant. Most
carly records for Yorke Peninsula seem to refer to Jf. neglecta and it
is most likely that JZ. pirgala has arrived more recently; WH. neglecta
was first recorded in the State much earlier than [7, virgata. There
is thus some evidence that the range of I/, neglecta is eontracting: wid
considerable evidenee that 4. virgala is expanding its range but at
present one can only speculate as to whether the two events are related,

In February, 1962, . cirgata was the dominant snail at Outer
Harbour, a few miles north of Adelaide: in November of the same
year Theby jisana appeared to be much more numerous. Tour
permanent quadrats were estallished there in August 1963, in an
attempt to discover if these changes represented a continuous trend.
Hach quadrat was of 1 square metre and when first chosen, two were
in arens where /T. virgata was Cominant, and two where Theba
dominated. Only snails more than 5 mm. in diameter were recorded
and quadrats were visited at approximately monthly intervals. Results
for all Jour quadrats were similar and are shown in fig. 4; the
proportions of JT. virgata are also shown 10 facilitate comparisons.

T, pisana breeds later than /7, virgata, its tmmbers reaching a
peak several months after those of the latter species, The sizes of
the large individuals of 7, pisana were distributed bimodally,
suggesting that the species takes two years {0 reach maximum sive;
IH, pirgata does so in one year. In spite | of these complies ions, the
overall numbers seem to show a trend im whieh 7, pisana is increasing
and //, virgata decreasing. Tn each ease, where a comparison ean be
nade between the two years, the population of 77, virgata was lower
in the seeond year,

H. virgata apparently does not oat green plants; 7. pisana will,
Int the appearanee of the Outer Harbour vegetation does not suggest
heavy ‘serazing: andl it is probably, like J. virgata, largely miero-
phagous in its feeding habits, 7’. pisana may be superseding If. vir gata
by exploiting a limited resource—in this case, food—more effectively,
and the obseryed changes in density could therefore be explained in
terms oO! competition (in the restricted sense defined hy Bireh, 1947),

a

492 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

380

300 075 =
o
S
x
LW
[e)
250 05 5
S
-
[oa
oO
Qa
©
» 200 0.25©
a
<q
a
(4p)
rs}
150 0.0
w
x
uJ
a
=
>
Zz

100

50

SPR SUM AUT WIN SPR SUM AUT WIN SPR
TIME OF YEAR

wig. 4. Numbers of Helicella virgata and Theba pisana at Outer Harbour from 1963 to
1965. Numbers of H. virgata, ©---@©j3 proportion of H. virgata, O.-.CQ}; numbers of
T. pisana, (7 — [.

POMEROY sno LAWS—INTRODUCED SNAILS IN S.A 493

However, there is insuficient evidence at present for this explanation
to be considered as more than tentative,

The next decade or two may show interesting changes in the
distribution and abundance of HW, virgata, H, neglecta and T. pisana
in South Australia,

THE IMPORTANCK TO MAN OF INTRODUCKD SNAILS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA
The introduction of animals to areas where they are not native,
often lias serious eeonomie results; man is, IN most cases, the agent
responsible for the introduction, cither intentionally or not.

Helix aspersa has hecome a serious pest on five continents, but
in South Australia its ravages have so far, been limited mainly to
gardens, The fact that it appears unable to survive in this State
except under vonditions of summer watering, may mean that here it
can only become a pest of irrigated crops and market gardens; control
is relatively simple on this seale. Theba pisana is, as yet, of no
eeonomic importance in this State; at present it is found most nsually
in unenltivated areas and the largest colony is probably that at Outer
Harbour which extends for about 10 km. down the eoast fowards
Grange, The many thousands of dollars spent on eradicating it from
California (Basinger, 1927), and the major attempts to control it in
South Africa (8. 8. Walters, pers. comin.), suggest that if could
become a serious problem here, and should therefore he regarded with

caution, The same may apply to Cochlicella ventrosa, a species which
is much addicted to seedlings. Like 7. pisana, it is capable of
surviving warm dry summers and might well become a pest of
improved pastures and legume erops, as has happened in parts of
South Africa (S. 8. Walters, pers, comm.).

Helicella wirgala is relatively harmless, Tt has, however, some-
times heen uumeroys enough around Moonta (fig. 2) lo cause trouble
on barley crops, Snails aestivating on the ears may be threshed with
the grain and the effect of large numbers of pulverised snails ean be
sullicient to raise the moisture content of the grain above the level
acceptable for bulk storage, Observations in the area suggest that
the problem is largely confined to the edges of the paddocks. The
number of suails per ear (which exceeded 20 in some cases) fell
rapidly, and exeept in a lew instances there were rarely snails more
than 10 or 20 metres from the boundary. Farmers found, however,
that a horizontal bar placed in front of the reaping arms, knocked
off most of the snails without serionsly damaging the crop, ZT. neglecta

494 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

was, in a similar way, a serious pest to some of the barley growers in
the southern part of Yorke Peninsula about 30 years ago but changes
in agricultural practice have largely overcome the problem.

REFERENCES
Basinger, A. J., 1927: The eradication enmpaign against the white snail (2. pisana) at
La Jolla, California, Mon. Bull. Calif, Comm. Mort. 16: 51-76,
Bireh, L. C., 1957: The meanings of competition, Am. Nat., 91: 5-18,
Cotton, B. C., 1949: These snails may invade your garden. J. Agric, 8. Aust., 1949; 561-565.
Ellis, A. E., 1926: British snails, Oxford Univ, Press, Oxford.
1951: Census of the distribution of British non-marine Mollusea. J. Conch,
Lond., “23: 171-244.
Liws, H. M., 1966; The eytology and anatomy of Oxychilus alliarius (Miller) (Mollusea,
Zonitidae), a new introduction to South Australia. Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 15(2):
257-260.
Pomeroy, D. K., 1986; The ecology of Helicella virgata and related species of suails in South
Australia, Thesis submitted for the degree of Doetor of Philosophy m the
University of Adelaide.
Quick, H. E., 1952: migrant British snails. Proc, malac. Soc, Lond., 29; 181-184.
1953: Helicellids introduced into Australia. Proc. malac. Soe. Lond., 307 74-79.
Taylor, J. W., 18941921: Monograph of the land and fresh-water Mollusea of the British
Isles. 4 vols., Taylor Bros., Leeds.
1928: Helic pisana (Miill.) in South Australia. J. Conch., Lond., 18: 208,
Vereo, Sir J., 1922: Record of a European molluse not previously reported from Austrulin.
Ree, S. Aust. Mus., 2(2): 221.
1924: Record of Muropean land molluses introduced into South Australia, Ree. 8.
Aust. Mus., 2(4): 489-490,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The detailed surveys of the distrilution and abundanee of Uelieella virgata and
TT. neglecta and the study of the relationships between I, virgata, H. neglecta and Thehba
pisand, formed part of a thesis by the senior author for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
in the University of Adelaide; to Professor H. G. Andrewartha who supervised the thesia
work, and to the many mentbers of staff of the South AustraJian Museum who in their
travels, gathered snails aml thereby helped oxtend onr knowledge of the distribution of the
exotie species, the authors extend their grateful thanks, They are also indebted to
Mrs. J. Hope Black, Mrs. Julia Greenhill, and Mr. B. Camphell who assisted with information
eoncerning the distribution of the snails in other States.

SUMMARY

‘en species of Innd snail are known to have become established in South Australia.
he present distribution of these species in the State and their probable time of arrival are
discussed. Detailed study is made of the distribution of Ilelicella virgata which oveurs
through much of the agricultural regions of the State including Northern Yorke Peninsula,
and H. neglecta which is found only on Southern Yorke Peninsula. It is eoncluded that
HA. virgata is still extending its range in the State and that it may be replacing Theba pisana
at Outer Harbour. The problem of Helfcella virgata aestivating on barley cars has been
overcome, as has the same problem with AH. negleeta. Helix aspersa is a pest of gardens
with simmer watering, Theba pisana and Cochticella ventrosa, both of which are widespread
in fhe State, are serious pests in other parte of the world and both should be regarded with
enution in South Australia.

THE CYTOLOGY OF SALINATOR SOLIDA (VON MARTENS),
MOLLUSCA, AMPHIBOLIDAE

BY HELENE M. LAWS

Summary

Salinator (Family Amphibolidae) belongs to the group of primitive basommatophoran pulmonates
termed “Archaeopulmonata” by Morton (1955) and also including the Ellobiidae, Otinidae,
Chilinidae, Latiidae, Gatiniidae and Siphonariidae. So few chromosome observations have as yet
been made for members of “archaeopulmonate” families (see table I) that any additional records are
of value. The majority of cytological observations for the Basommatophora have been made within
Morton’s second series which includes the remaining higher limnic families. Within these higher
groups x = 18 is most common, occurring with a few exceptions in cytologically known members
of the Physidae, Lymnaeidae (except Radix where n usually = 17), Planorbidae and Acroloxidae,
although in the Ancylidae n = 15, 30, 60, 17 and 18 are known.

THE CYTOLOGY OF SALINATOR SOLIDA (VON MARTENS),
MOLLUSCA, AMPHIBOLIDAE

3y ITMLENK M. LAWS, Curaror or Marre INVERTEBRATES,
Sourn Austrawan Museum

Salinalory (Family Amphibolidae) belongs to the group of
primitive hasommatophoran pulmonates termed * Archaeopulmonata’’
by Morton (1955) and also including the Ellobiidae, Otinidae,
Chilinidae, Latiidae, Gadiniidae and Siphonariidae, So few chromo-
some observations have as yet been made for members of ‘archaev-
pulmonate?’ families (see table [) that any additional reeords are of
value, The majority of evtologieal observations for the Basommato-
phora have been made within Morton’s second series Whieh includes
the remaining higher limnie families. Within these higher groups
x = 18 is most common, oceurring with a few exceptions in
cytologically known mombers of the Physidae, Lymnaeidae (exeept
Radia where i usually = 17), Planorbidae and Acroloxidae, although
in the Anoylidae n — 15, 30, 60, 17, and 18 are known (Bureh, 1962),

Salmator solida (von Martens) is common. in mangrove and
estuarine situations in Qneensland, New South Wales, Victoria and
South Anstralia. A colleetion of this species was made by
D. . Pomeroy from a brackish creek at Buckland Park, about 30
miles north of Adelaide in August, 1963, The snails were kept in
shallow water in an aquarium for a number of weeks and individuals
were taken from time to time for cytological study. Gonad samples
were squashed in aceto-orcein, and voucher specimens are in the South
Australian Museum collections D.14891,

Mighteen bivalents were present at meiosis of spermatogenesis
(fiz. 1). In most specimens there were, in the gonad, a few meiotic
vells in which n= 36 (fig, 2), but this was never found to be the rule
for any individual and it must be assnimed that if any diploid sperm
did arise, it was very unlikely to result in a viable snail.

The chromosome complement of n —18 tound in Salinator solida
Is the same as that observed by Tnaba (1953) for the J apanese species
S. fake, the only other member of the Amphibolidae which has been
studied eytologically, The same chromosome number is found in other
‘*Archacopulmonate’? species with the exception of Siphonaria in
which n = 16, and two members of the Ellobiidae. The ellobiids are
without doubt the most primitive existing pulmonates and it is note-
worthy that although n— 18 predominates in the family (see table T),

496 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

%
)

%
| 2 ©G

Figs. 1 and 2, Camera lucida diagrams of meiotic figures.
Fig. 1. Meiotie chromosomes of Salinator solida in a normal diploid cell; n = 18.
Fig. 2. Meiosis in a tetraploid cell; n = 26,

Pythia and Cassidula which are in the most primitive section of the
Ellobiidae have n == 17. They share this number with all cytologically
known members of the more primitive opisthobranch groups, lending
support to Morton’s view that there is close affinity between primitive
opisthobranch and basommatophoran groups and that the subclauses
Opisthobranchia and Pulmonata diverged after a common origin from
some unknown prosobranch ancestor,

TABLE 1

CHROMOSOME NUMBERS OF ARCITAROPULMONATA
(Adapted from Burch, 1965)

Haploid
Family. ehromosome Number of
number. species.
Siphonariidae .. 6... ee ee ee ee ee 1H ]
Amphibolidae .. 0.6. 2. ce ee ee ee te 18 1
Pllobiidag 2. 2. fa ee me ee ee oe 17 2
18 4
QGhilinidag «2052 ch ee) 5% ge ibis 18 1
Latiidae 206. oc eel be we oe Be we te 18 1

REFERENCES

Burch, J. B., 1965: Chromosome numbers and systematics in euthyneuran snails. Proe.
First Europ. malac, Congr. 1962: 215-241,

Inaba, A., 1953: Cytological studies in molluses. IT. Chromosomes in basommatophorie
Pulmonata. J. Sei, Hiroshima Univ., ser. B, div. 1, 14: 221-228.

Morton, J. E., 1955: The Evolution of the Ellobiidae with a discussion on the origin of the
Pulmonata. Proce, zool, Soc. Lond., 125: 127-168.

Woolacott, L., 1945: The establishment of Salinator fragilis Lamarck and Salinator solida
yon Martens as two distinet species in Australia, Proe. I. zool. Soc. N.S.W.
1945: 35-38.

HETEROGAMASUS TRAGARDH (ACARDI: RHODACARIDAB),
INCLUDING THE SUBGENUS EVANSSELLUS RYKE, stat. n.

BY DAVID C. LEE

Summary

Heterogamasus Trigardh is redefined to contain two subgenera; Heterogamasus sens. str. from
South America and Evanssellus Ryke from Australasia. A key is given for the identification of the
five species. Two new species (H. (H.) calcarellus and H. (E.) medusa) are described, while the
descriptions of the type-species (H. (H.) claviger Tragardh, H. (H.) spinosissimus (Balogh) and H.
(E.) foliatus (Ryke) are extended.

HETEROGAMASUS TRAGARDH (ACARI: RHODACARIDAE),
INCLUDING THE SUBGENUS EVANSSELLUS RYKE,

stat. n.
By DAVID (. LAE, Curator or AnacitnoLocy, Sourm Austr rantian
MuouskumM
Text fig. 1-83
SUMMARY

Heterogamasus Trigirdh is redefined to contain two subgenera;
Helerogamasus seus. str. from South America and Hvanssellus Ryke
from Australasia, A key is given for the identification of the five
species. Two new species (H, (//.) calearellus and H. (E.) medusa)
ure deseribed, while the deseripltions of the type-species (#7. (41.)
claviger Trigardh), WW. (H.) spimosissimus (Balogh) and TI, (2,)
foliatus (Ryke) are extended.

INTRODUCTION

The genus, Heterogamasus, was established by Traigardh (1907)
with H/, claviger, a single male from the Falkland Islands, as the only
species. Trigardh suggested that the genus was closely related to
Ganmasellus Berlese and commented ‘tthe shape of the first pair of
legs is a quite unparalleled feature’. The first pair of legs are
unusual in being long and as thick as the other legs, bunt mainly in
possessing large, ventral spines, No species had since been added to
the genus, but Hranssellus foliatus Ryke, 1961 and Gamasellus (%)
sprnosissimus Balogh, 1963 are similar to Gamasellus and have unusual
first legs like JTeteroqgamasus. 1 have, therefore, placed these two
species and two new species in Helerogamasus.

All members of the genus have a reasonable number of characters
in common and were collected in cool, wet, temperate areas between
38° and 54° South. In contrast to their similarities, the mites fall
into two distinct morphological groups; one from South America and
one from Australasia. Hvanssellus Ryke, 1961, with the status of
subgenus, is used for the latter, the former being the nominate sub-
genus. Some characters differentiating the subgenera have previously
been ‘‘weighted’’? as important enough to separate genera within the
Rhodacaridae. To support or contradict this is too mach eness-work
until it is possible to consider the large number of undescribed
rhodacarid species and undescribed immature stages of named species,
The similarities of the two subgenera to Gamasellus, with the unusual
adaptation of leg J, which is sensory rather than ambulatory in

A98 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Gamasellus, but presumably in this case is also prehensile, is considered
sufficient to group Heterogamusus and Evanssellus within one genus
until more clearly indicated otherwise.

MATERIAL AND METHODS

Only the type material of 77, medusa and the I, foliatus from
Wellington, belonged originally to the South Australian Museum, One
female paratype of IJ, calearellus has since heen given to the South
Australian Museum by the British Museum (Natural History). The
other type material of J7, calcarellus belongs to the British Museum
(Natural History). The paratype female and paratype male of
H. foliatus were borrowed from the Institute of Zoological Research
of Potehefstroom University. The holotype female of H. spinosissimus
wag borrowed from the Hungarian Natural History Museum, Budapest.
The idiosoma and legs of the male holotype of H. claviger were
horrowed from the Naturhistoriska Ricksmuseum, Stockholm.

The methods are as in Lee (1966) and the terminology is as in
Kvans and Till (1965) and Lindquist and Evans (1965), but
individually labelled idiosomal setae in the figures are numbered as if
their row was complete, The labelling of the ventral and lateral setae
of the genu and tibia of lee T is as advised by Dr. G. O, Evans
(personal communieation, 1966).

Family RHODACARIDAE Oudemans, 1902
Genus Heterogamasus Trigardh

Heteragamasus Vrigardh, 1907, p. 2. Type-species: /elerogamasus
claviger Tragardh, 1907, by monotypy-

Hvanssellus Ryke, 1961, p. 17, New synonymy. Type-species:
Neanssellus foliatus Ryke, 1961, by original designation,

This venus ia confined to the Rhodacarus-group, mentioned by
Kivans (1963, p. 302), by the following characters. The leg chactotaxy
is of the type in which the setal formula of tibia Tis usually (2-6/4-2).
The apotele is three tined, with one tine reduced and without an
associated Iryaline flap. In the female the metasternal setae are on
the sternal shield, except in J/, medusa where they are absent. The
genital shield is truncated posteriorly and separate from a ventrianal
shield. In the male there is a distally free spermodactyl and an
armed leg IT.

Heterogamasus can be separated from all other rhodacarid genera
by having large, spine-like av. and pyz on tibia I.

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAE) 499

The following further characters are probably also shared by the
whole genus. Few setae are simple in form. In most specimens,
especially adult females, parts of the idiosoma and legs are eovered
with an exudate, which is not included in the drawings. A shallower,
inner layer, which is also variable and hyaline, often forms a flap on
the setae and appears to continue over the setal bases and onto the
general hody surface. This second layer, where if occurs on the setae
figured below, has been drawn with a broken line,

Female, Gnathosoma, Anterior margin of tectum curves forward
to central spine with multidenticulate margin. Six or seven rows of
deutosternal denticles. Third pair of lypostomal setae noticeably
longer than others, Valpyenu seta, al, at least slightly pilose. Ventral
setae on palptrochanter and lateral setae on palpfemur somewhat
spine-like, 71 on the former is slightly pilose and al on latter is short,

Idiosoma, Two dorsal shields; posterior one discrete, anterior one
fused anteriorly to peritrematic shield, which is fused posteriorly to
exopodal TV. Single, discrete pair of prae-endopodal shields. Sternurm
only fused to endopodal I], Endogymal shield with convex, eurved
anterioy margin, Genital shield discrete; anteriorly round and hyaline,
posteriorly truncated, Ventrianal shield discrete, Dorsal chaetotaxy :
6), 62, 5s, or; 67,527, 5S, OR. In HW. spinosissimus there are also BUR,
Ten 10 13 setae on venter, plus a pair of paranals and an unpaired
postanal Jer and Zr small and setose, while some other sete on
ventrianal shield always larger and differing in form.

Legs, Anterior legs larger than posterior legs. Chactotaxy as
in Ologamasus (see fig. 1, Lee (1966)), except on wenu LIT and tibia
Ill of Heterayamusus sens. str.

Male, Chelicerae have three teeth on fixed digit and one tooth on
inovable digit. Spermodactyl similar in shape Lo digits, but with
dorsal groove. VPeritrematic shield fused to ventrianal shield. Leg I
is armed, but in 7/7. medusa only av on femur is slightly modified to
a spur,

Devtonymph, Both dorsal shields diserete, Chaetotaxy as adult,
bat some differences in idiosomal setal form,

Protonyumph. Dorsal chaetotaxy; Gy, 82, 2s, 4ry 57, 52, 48, 1,
Might or seven pairs of setae on venter, plus a pair of paranals, an
unpaired postanal and a pair olf minute cuanals, On genn T and tibia 1,
the anterior spine-like seta is a/ (note that only on genn L of the
deutonymiph and adult of Lvavssellus is it also a Jateral seta),

500 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

KEY TO HETEROGAMASUS SPECIES

Since there are few species, and in Heterogamasus sens. str. only
one sex in each case, I have chosen characters which, it is hoped,
apply to both males and females.

1. Genu III and tibia II] chaetotaxy is (2-4/

2-2) and (2-3/2-2). Reduced ambulacrum

I, with small claws but no pulvillus.

Anterior spine on genu I is ave. Vertical
setae (j1) not on prominent protruberance Heterogamasus

sens. str. 2

Genu IIT and tibia III chaetotaxy is (2-4/

2-1) and (2-3/2-1). No ambulacrum I.

Anterior spine on genu I is ah. Vertical

setae (j1) on prominent protruberance .. Hvanssellus 4
2. Dorsal setae short, e.g., in row J setal length
is well under half distance between setae .. claviger Trigardh

Dorsal setae longer, e.g., in row J setal
length is about, or more than, half distance

between setae .. 2. 2. cee ee ee ee ape
3. Setae Zvi, Jii, and row R on integument .. spimosissimus
(Balogh)
Setae Zvi, Jvi, and row R on shields .. .. calcarellus sp. n.
4. Metasternal setae (st 4) present. Most
dorsal setae (all row 8) leaf-like .. .. .. foliatus (Ryke)
Metasternal setae (st 4) absent. Most
dorsal setae (all row 8) tentacle-like . .. medusa sp. n.

Subgenus Heterogamasus Tragardh

The three species belonging to this subgenus are from South
America. The adults range in idiosomal length from 560» to 640p.

The following characters (adult female, unless otherwise stated)
distinguish this subgenus from FHvanssellus. Movable digit of
chelicera has three or four teeth. Central tectum spine bifurcate at
tip. Idiosoma convex dorsally and without anterior protruberance
bearing vertical setae (j1). The second seta in row r is small, while
in most rhodaearids it is larger than the surrounding setae. Postanal
pad fused to ventrianal shield, Paranal setae level with or slightly
posterior to anterior margin of anus. Peritrematic shield clearly
reticulated, except for small area around coxa IV, past which it extends
some way posteriorly. Leg I has pretarsus, plus small claws and, in
the protonymph, a small pulvillus. Chaetotaxy of genu IIT and tibia

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAE) 501

TH is as in Cyrtolaelaps Berlese; 1.e., (2- 4/28) and (2-3/2-2), The
anterior spine on genu [and tibia I, w hich i is lateral in the protonymph,
is ave in the deutonymph and adult. On femur TV, pde (pd on
protonymph) is largest seta. Male genu Ll obviously armed, with av
as a spur. Holoventral shield in male consisting of sternogenital,
ventrianal and peritrematic shields; an unnsual condition when
ventrianal shield is not fused to dorsal shield.

Heterogamasus (H.) claviger Tragardh
1907, Ligheeagarreys claviger Vvagardh, p. 2; text figs. 1 and 2; pl, J,
fig. 1,2, 3, 6 and &.

I have before me the idiosoma and five legs of the single male of
this species, which according ty Dr, E, Kjellander (personal communi-
ention, 1965) is all of the mite still in existence,

Male, Wig. 1-5. [hosomal Jength, 640.

Dorsal plate has retienlations and dimples as shown over limited
area in fig. 3; see pl, 1, fig, 8 in Trigdirdh (1907) for total distrilmtion.
Dorsal setae are short compared with other species, and, as in
IT, spinosissimus, some ave on integument. Reticulations on holo-
ventral shield absent from sternogenital area, and inside ridge running
posteriorly from stigma, Five Je and three Zv setae on side figured,
but on left side the two most posterior setae are replaced by a single
seta in the equivalent of a position midway between them; te. Jv5
is Missing,

Locality. Falkland Tslands: holotype male under stones, east of
Port Stanley, 25th February, 1902, coll. by Swedish South Polar
Kixpedition of 1901-1908.

Heterogamasus (H.) spinosissimus (Balogh) comb. n.
1963, Gamasellus (7) spinosissimus Balogh, p, 489, fig, 18-23.

Female, Not figured. Idiosomal length, 4560p.

Three teeth on movable cheliceral digit. Having examined ihe
holotype,, | regard the idiosomal chaetotaxy as 67, 62, 5s, dr; 5/, 54,
5S, GR, BUR; dst, 4/0, 840. The 80 pairs of setae being the most,
posterior, peripheral setae on Balogh’s drawing (1963, fig. 19) of the
verter. The other characters are in accordance with those of the
subgenius,

Locality, Argentina: holotype female, 1 paratype female, from
sifted litter, Maytenyvs boaris forest with Berberis darwint and
Nothofagus antarctica, near spring, 1,150 m., Mt. Piltriquitron,
I) Bolsén, Rio Negro, 16th November, 1961, coll. by Gy Topal.

502 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Figs. 1-5. Heterogamasus (H.) claviger Trigardh, male.

1, venter; 2, distal segments from leg 1; 3, dorsum; 4, proximal segments from leg IL;
5, lateral view of distal segments from leg TY.

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAE) 503

roreyn

Figs. 6-9. Heterogamasus (1I.) calearellis sp. n., female.
6, dorsum; 7, lateral view of idiosoma; 8, ventral view of proximal segments from leg LV;
9, dorsal view of distal segments from leg IV.

504 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Figs. 10-14. Heterogamasus (II.) calearcllus sp. n.
10-12, female, 10, ventral view of gnathosoma; 11, venter: 12, distal segments from
leg I. 18 and 14, protonymph, 13, venter and dorsum; 14, distal segments from leg T.

LEE—HETEROGAM ASUS (RHODACARIDABR) S505

Heterogamasus (H.) calcarellus sp. 1.

Fomale, Fig. 6-12. Idiosomal length, 620,.

Four teeth on moyable cheliceral digit. Retieulations on pert-
jrematie and ventrianal shields, but dorsal shields have only irregular
dimples, The split between the peritrematic and anterior dorsal
shield terminates just anterior to 88, as it does in H. spinosissimus,
All idiosomal setae are norinally on shields, but paratype female 2
has one Zel on integument of right side, The spines on leg IT are
very well developed. On trochanter TV, pl is a small spur, Holotype
female contained smooth, oval, unpigmented egg, 2604 ~% 200. Cength
is nearly 42% of the length of the female idiosoma),

Profonymph. Wig. 18 and 14, Idiosomal length, 400,

Chaetotaxy as in JT. medusa, except that it is normal in having
selal pair 4f5 present. Unlike the female, r2 is large and similar to
jl. Jv3 and Zv1 are slightly spine-like compared with other ventral
setae,

Locality, Tierra del Fuego: holotype female, morphotype proto-
nymph, two paratype females from Votho/agus forest litter, Cordillera
Darwin, 27th Febrnary and ist March, 1962, coll, KE. Shipton.

Subgenus Evanssellus Ryke, stat. n.

The two species, including a form of one species, are from
Australasia, The adult range in idiosomal length from 420. to 540,

The following characters <cistinguish this subgenus from
Hetcroagamusus sens. str. Movable digit of chelicera has two teeth.
Central, tectum spine has single point at tip. Idiosoma flat dorsally,
with anterior protruberance hearing vertical setae (/1), Postanal pad
discrete, Paranal setae nearly level with posterior margin of auns.
Peritrematie shield not reti¢ulated, only markings are pits, that look
similar to setal bases and in H, /oliatus are mostly m a single line.
Leo To has no prefarsus or ambulaernm im the adults or nymphs.
Chaetotaxy of genu LIL and tibia LIL as in Gamaselluss; ie, (2-4/2-1)
und (2-3/2-1), The anterior spine on genu I of devtonyinph and adult
is lateral (ie. a4), as in the protonymph, but on tibia T it is ave as
in the adult of elterogamasus sens. str. On femur LV, pis (ped in
protonymph) is much smaller than autertor dorsal setae, Male geny
TH not obviously armed, although @@ may be on a slight protruherance.
May be holoventral shield in male as in //elerogamasus, or sterno-
genital shield can be separate from ventrianal shield, but peritremuatic
shield is always lused to ventrianal shield, which is still unnistal when
ventrianal shield ig not fused to dorsal shield,

506 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

'OOp

Figs. 15-17, Heterogamasus (Evanssellus) medusa sp. n., female.
15, dorsum; 16, lateral view of idiosoma; 17, dorsal view of distal segments from leg TV.

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAE) 507

Figs. 18-23. IMeterogamasus (EBvanssellus) medusa sp. ml.
18-20, female, 18, venter; 19, ventral view of gnathosoma;: 20, femur IT and genu IT.
21-23, male. 21, venter: 22, femur TL and genu IT; 23, chelicera,

508

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

heey"

1oou

Figs. 24-26. Heterogamasus (Hvanssellus) medusa sp, 0.

24, female, distal segments from leg I. 25 and 26, deutonymph.

25, venter; 26, dorsum,

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAE) 509

Anad9

\

\
\

100u

Oop

Wigs. 27-33. 27-29, Heterogamasus (Evanssellus) medusa sp. n., protonymph. 27, dorsum;
28, venter; 29, distal segments of leg I.

30-33, Heterogamasus (Kvanssellus) foliatus (Ryke), male. 30, palpgenu; 31, femur IT
and genu IT; 82, distal segments of leg 1; 38, area around stigma.

S10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Heterogamasus (Eyanssellus) foliatus (Ryke) comb. n.

1961, Evanssellus foliatus Ryke, 8, p. 240, fig. 1-9.

! have before me a paratype female and a paratype male from
South Island and a female and three males from North Island, New
Zealand. There are small differences between the mites from North
Island and the types, but until more specimens are seen they are given
infrasubspecific rank. The figures, and the deseription unless other-
wise stated, are of the northern form.

Female. Idiosomal length, 520% (paratype female, 540,).

Besides slight differences in chaetomorphy, the northern form
differs in r3 being on the dorsal shield instead of the peritrematic
shield as in the paratype and the other Teterogamasus species. This
female contains a larva, the claws and setae of which can be seen,
snegesting that if is larviporous.

Male, Fig. 30-38, Idiosomal length, 440,.

The movable digit of chelicera is shorter than fixed digit. On
palpgenu al; is slightly pilose. As in female, r3 is on dorsal shield.
Tn fig. 33 it can be seen that the setae in row r are not as leaf-like as
in Ryke’s (1961) drawing, which is true of the paratype to a lesser
dexree. Another difference is that 74 in the northern form and para-
iype is subequal in length to the surrounding setae. Ryke (1961)
compares the lateral fissure in the venter of the ‘‘Ologamasus-
Gamasiphis group’? males, with the ridge extending posteriorly from
the HH. foliatus stigma, when it should be compared with the broad
fissure between the holoventral and dorsal shields. Seven large setae
on tarsus I, of whieh four are terminal. Genu II has av on a small
protruberance that is not present in the female.

Locality, New Zealand: type females and type males from beech
litter, Queenstown, South Island, Jnly, 1954, coll. not known; one
female and three males trom moss, Botanical Gardens, Wellington,
North Island, 15th December, 1960, coll, D. C. M. Manson,

Heterogamasus (Evanssellus) medusa sp, n,

This species is unusual among the Rhodacaridae in that adults
and nymphs have a pair of sternal setae missing. In the adults and
deutonymph sf4 is missing, but in the protonymph it must be st5 since
st4 is not formed at this stage.

Female, Wig. 15-20 and 24. Idiosomal length, 470z.

LEE—HETEROGAMASUS (RHODACARIDAB) 511

Faint, irregular markings on dorsal shield, All dorsal, idiosomal
setae are on shields, Most dorsal setae are tentacle-like. Lateral
setae 73 is very small. The ventrianal shield terminates anteriorly
some way behind genital shield, leaving Jv. and Zr. on integument,
There are six large setae on tarsus [, with two of them terminal.

Male, Pig, 21-23. Idiosomal length, 420p,

The movable digit of the chelicera is longer than the fixed digit.
Unlike the other two males the ventrianal shield ig separate from the
genitostertal shield. Leg TT is ha rdly armed at all, av on femur being
modified but still spine-like,

Dentonymph, Wig. 25-26. Idiosomal length, 380,.

Vulike the adult, r2 is obviously different from the tentacle-like
form of most of the dorsal setae, Otherwise besides changes in the
shields on the venter, the deutonymph is like the adult,

Protonymph, Wig. 27-29. Idiosomal length, 210p.

oT

Chactofaxy as shown in fig. 27 and 28. Chaetomorphy is also
different from deutonymph. Dorsal setae not fentacle-like. Jv2 and
Jv3 larger than other ventral setae.

Locality, Victoria, Australia: holotype female (LF79M1), allo-
fype male (LF79M2), morphotype dentonymph (LE79M3), morphotype
protonymph (LE79M4), four paratype females (LI79M5-8), and one
paratype male (LE79M9), from moss and litter, among ‘tree ferns’?
and Hucalyptus, near Hordernvale, Cape Otway, 28th August, 1965,
coll, FL. Mitehell,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Dam indebted to Messrs. D.C, M, Manson, F. J. Mitchell and 1, Shipton for collecting
the unrecorded mites and to Dr. 4, Balogh, Dr. G. O, Evans, Dr. BL Kjellander,
Dr KX. Forsshund and Mr. G. C. Loors for making it possible for me to examine the recorded
Wiles mentioned in this paper. Also, T would like to thank Dr. GO, Kvans of the British
Museum (Natural History) and Mr. G.C. Loots of Potchefstroom University for their help eul
correspondence, Miss Brenda EOabbard for assistingg with the drawings, Mrs. J. (C. Murphy
Tor lyping the anpnuseript, and Mr, R. Domrow for trinshating: the Geringn summary,

REFERENCES

Biulogh, 0, 1069: The Zoological results of Gy. Topal’s Collectings in South Argentina,
Anuls. bist-nat. Mus. natn. hung., 55: 487-496,

Nvats, GG. O. und Till, W. M., 1965: Studies ou the British Dermanyssidae (Acaris
Mesostigmata) Part t external Morphology. Bull. Brit, Mus, (nat. hist.) Zool,
Ta(8); 249-204,

hoe, DL, M68: New species of Clogamasus Berlose (Acari: Rhodsearidae) fromm Australia
mud New Zealand. Wee S, Anat, Mus., 15(2)+ 205-235,

Lindquist, E. EB. and Evans, G. O, 1965: Taxonomic coneepts in the Ascilae with a modified
setal nomenclature for the idivsonin of the Gamasina (Acari: Mososhigmats),
Mem. ent. Soe. Can, a7: 1-64,

512 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Oudemans, A. C., 1902: New List of Dutch Acari. Second Part: With remarks on known
and descriptions of a new subfamily, new genera and species. Tijdschr. Ent.,
45: 1-52.

Ryke, P. A., 1961: Evanssellus, a new genus of the family Rhodacaridae (Acarina:
Mesostigmata). Acarologia, 3(3): 245-249.

Yrigardh, I., 1907: The Acari of the Swedish South Polar Expedition. Wiss, Ergebn. schwed.
Subpolar-exped., 5(Zool) (11): 1-34.

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Heterogumasus Triigardh wird redefiniert, und besteht aus zwei Untergattungen:
Heterogamasus sens. str. aus Siidamerika, und Evanssellus Ryke aus Australasien. Hine
Bestimmungstafel fiir die fiinf Arten wird beigefiigt. Zwei neue Arten (H. (H.) calearellus
und H. (E.) medusa) werden beschreiben, und die Beschreibungen der Typenart (JI. (H1.)
claviger Traggrdh), If. (H.) spinosissimus (Balogh) und H, (#.) foliatus (Ryke) erweitert.

ARARIDAE IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, ADELAIDE II.
(HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA)

BY NICHOLAS A. KORMILEV

Summary

The author describes three new genera, 19 new species and one new subspecies, all belonging to the
subfamily Mezirinac Oshanin. They are as follows; Mastigocoris malayensis n. sp., Malay
Peninsula ; Aspisocoris n. g. for A. termitophilus n. sp., West Australia ; Artabanellus mcnamarai n.
sp., New Guinea , Argocoris n. g. for A. grossi n. sp., Queensland ; Aegisocoris n. g. for A.
granulatus n. sp., Queensland ; Neophloeobia tuberculata n. sp.. Queensland ; Artabanus bilobiceps
papuasicus n. ssp., New Guinea ; Artabanus truncatus n. sp., New Guinea ; Artabanus tuberculatus
n. 5p., Malay Peninsula ; Artabanus mcfarlandi n. sp., Fiji ; Ctenoneurus aberrans n. sp., New
Guinea ; Pictinellus papuasicus n. sp., New Guinea ; Pictinellus elongatus n. sp., Fiji ; Picyinellus
longiceps n. sp., Fiji ; Pictinellus malayensis n. sp., Malay Peninsula ; Mezira wilsoni n. sp.,
Australia, Victoria and N.S.W. ; Mezira elegans n. sp., Australia, N.S.W. ; and Mezira enigmatica
n. sp., New Guinea.

Mezira (Mezirella) infantulus Kiritshenko, 1959, previously placed by this author in the genus
Pictinellus Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, is now transferred to the related genus Glochocoris Usinger
and Matsuda, 1959.

The author does not agree with Bléin synonymizing Daulocoris auritomentosa (Kormilev), 1955,
with Daulocoris feanus (Bergroth), 1889, and gives differences for separation of these two species.

I want once more to express my sincere gratitude to Mr. Gordon F, Gross, Senior Curator of
Invertebrates at the South Australian Museum in Adelaide, by whose kind offices I have been
privileged to study the Aradidae in the rich collections under his care.

This paper treats the second and last section of the family sent to me for study, the subfamily
Mezirinae Oshanin, 1908. The assemblage studied here proved to be no less interesting than the
first. Three genera, all from Australia, and 19 species are new, and are described elsewhere in this
paper. Of particular interest is a new termitophilous genus from West Australia, and two aberrant
new species of Ctenoneurus Bergroth, 1887, and Mezira A.S., 1843, repectively, both from New
Guinea.

All measurements indicated in this paper were taken with a micrometer eyepiece, 25 units equalling
1 mm., with exception of Argocoris grossi n. sp., and Aegisocoris granulatus n. sp., in which 10
units equals 1 mm. The first figure in the ratio represents the length, and the second the width of the
measured part. The length of the abdomen was taken from the tip of hypopygium ( ), or segment IX
respectively ( ), with the exception of Aspisocoris termitophilus n. g.. n. sp., where it was taken on
the ventral side,

ARADIDAE IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, ADELAIDE
Il. (HEMIPTERA-HETEROPTERA)

By NICHOLAS A, KORMILEV, Brooxiyn, N.Y., U.S.A.
SUMMARY

The author describes three new genera, 19 new species and one
new subspecies, all belonging to the subfamily Mezirinae Oshanin,
They are as follows: Mastigocoris malayensis n. sp., Malay Peninsula;
Aspisocoris me. for A. termitophilus n. sp. West Australia;
Artubanellus menamarai on, sp, New Guinea; Argocoris n. ge. for
lL, qrossi ue sp, Queensland; deqgisocoris u. g. for A, granulatus n, sp.,
Qucensland ; Neophlocobia tuberculala n. sp., Queensland; Artabanius
hilahiceps papuasious n, ssp., New Guinea; Artabanus truncatus n. sp.,
New Guinea; Artabanus tuberculatus u. sp., Malay Peninsula; dArta-
bonis mefarlandi ne spy Pijis Crlenoneurus aberrans n. sp., New
Gninea; Pictinellus papuasicus n. sp, New Guinea; Pictinellus leai
nosp., Pipi; Pictinellus malurikiensis n, sp., Fiji; Pictinellus elongatus
mn. sp. Piji; Pietimellus longiceps n. sp. Fiji; Piclinellus malayensis
n,sp., Malay Peninsula; Wezira wilson’ n. sp., Australia, Victoria and
N.S.W.; Mezivna elegans on. sp, Australia, N.S.W.; and Mezira
eniqmatica n. sp, New Guinea

Mezira (Mezirella) infantulus Kiritshenko, 1959, previously placed
by this author in the genus Pietinellus Usinger and Matsuda, 1959,
is now transferred to the related genus Glochocoris Usinger and

Matsuda, 1959.

The anthor does not agree with Bléte in synonymizing Daulocoris
anritomentosa (Kormilev), 1955, with Dauwocoris feanus (Bergroth),
IS89, and gives differences for separation of these two species.

I want onee more to express my sincere gratitude to Mr. Gordon
I", Gross, Senior Curator of Invertebrates at the South Australian
Museum in Adelaide, by whose kind offices T have heen privileged to
study the Aradidae in the rich collections under his care.

This paper treats the second anc last section of the family sent
lo me for study, the subfamily Mezirinae Oshanin, 1908, The
assemblage studied here preyed to be no less interesting than the
first®™. Three genera, all from Australia, and 19 species are new, and
are deseribed elsewhere in this paper. Of particular interest is a new

"Soe: Nicholas A, Korniley, Aradidne in the South Australian | “Muselini, Adelnide
(Hemiptera Hefuroplern) ; Revords of the South Austratian Muscum, 1966, 152 275-307,

514 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

termitophilous genus from West Australia, and two aberrant new
species of Ctenoneurus Bergroth, 1887, and Mezira, A.S., 1843,
respectively, both from New Guinea.

All measurements indicated in this paper were taken with a
inievometer eyepiece, 25 units equalling 1 mm., with exception of
Argocoris grossi nu. sp., and Aegisocoris granulatus n. sp., in which
10 units equals 1 mm. The first figure in the ratio represents
the length, and the second the width of the measured part.
The length of the abdomen was taken from the tip of seutellum to
the tip of hypopygium (¢), or segment IX respectively (?), with
the exception of Aspisocoris termitophilus n. g., n. sp., where it was
taken on the ventral] side.

Subfam. MEZIRINAE Oshanin, 1908

Gen, Mastigocoris Matsuda and Usinger, 1957

This genus was established on the base of a single male, but later
Usinger and Matsuda memtioned that they have also seen species from
Java and Sumatra (1959; 222).

|. Mastigocoris malayensis n. sp.

Male, Brachypterous. Similar to Mastigocoris angulatus Matsuda
and Usinger, 1957, from which it differs by the rounded antero-lateral
anvles of pronotnm, neither prodneed forward, nor sideways, and by
the more protruding, and rounded, PE-VI. In the male, PH-L to
PH-IV are not protruding, PE-V barely protruding, PE-VI distinetly
protruding and rounded. In the female, PH-I] to PH-VI are not
protruding, PE-VII with a small tubercle, absent in male.

Measurements: head slightly shorter than width through the eyes,
6—14:15.5, ?—16:17.5; proportions of antennal segments, IT to 1V,
aves §@—7.9:5:7.9:7, 9 —7.5:5:7.5:7; pronotum less than half as long
as maximal width, ¢—11:26, @—14:21; abdomen longer than maximal

width across segment VI (4), or V (2), ¢—87.5:31, ¢—d0-40.

Hemelytra with lateral border carinate basally; dise of corium
with three divergent rows of finely granulate carimae (veins); heme-
lvtva reach to ¥ of seutellum, Spiracles [1 to VI ventral, placed near
the border, VII and VIII lateral and visible from above.

Colour: brown; tihiae and tarsi yellow-brown to yellow; round
callous spots on central dorsal plate reddish brown,

Total length: @—3.0, ¢—3.84 mm.; pronotal width: 4—1.04,
@ —1.24 mm.; abdominal width: ¢—1.24, ¢—1.60 mm.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 515

Hololypes &, Malay Peninsula, Lenggong—A. M. Lea and party
coll,; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Allotype: %, collected with holotype: in the same collection.

Puratypes: & 6, 11 8, and 8 nymphs, colleeted with holo and
allolypes in the same and author's collections,

Aspisocoris new genus
Klongate, with parallel sides; upper surface covered with fine,
setigerous grannlation, setae erect and very short, giving the
appearance of ronghness,

Head as long as width across eyes; anterior process strong,
constricted in the middle, and truneate in front, elypens free, reaching
to } of antennal segment 1, Antenniferous tubercles thick, blunt,
reaching slightly beyond the base of ant, segment 1, Hyes small,
immersed in the head, Postocular borders straight, strongly corverg-
ing backward; postocular tubercles absent. Vertex convex, Antennae
moderately heavy; ant, segment | strongly incrassate, almost pyriform ;
Th and UT slightly tapering toward the base: [V eylindrical, rounded
apically; IT the shortest; [, ITT and TV subequal in length. Segment
IL and TV nearly half fused together (completely fused in nymphs).
Rostral atrium open; vostral groove shallow, open posteriorly; rostrum
reaching bevond fore border of prosternum.

Pronolum convex, half as long as its maximal width; fore border
deeply sinuate; collar liused with dise. Antero-lateral angles angular,
strongly produced forward, but not reaching eyes. Lateral borders
subpar allel, slightly convergent anteriorly; lateral noteh absent; hind
border angularly excavate, Dise divided into two lobes hy a shallow
depression; fore lobe twice as long as the hind lobe, triangularly raised
in the middle, and depressed between median elevation and produced
anterolateral angles, Tlind lobe sloping baekward, and towards the
lateral margins.

Seulelim elongate triangular, strongly raised medially; basal
horder convex; lateral borders barely sinuate, and carinate; tip
nirrowly rounded, reaching alinost to posterior border of tergum IT;
dise deeply depressed between median ridge and lateral borders.

Hemelytra reduced, but still separated into corium, clavus, and
membrane; the latter abbreviated and without veins, Clavus appearing
us a narrow triangle, and separated from corium by a deep sulcus.
Corium longitudinally raised along clavus, and alone exterior border,
depressed between both elevations; ifs exterior border convex

516 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

anteriorly, and slightly sinuate posteriorly, reaching to the middle of
eouinexivam IT. Membrane rounded apically, reaching to the tip of
séntellam. lind wings absent.

Abdomen longer than maximal width. Lateral borders sub-
parallel, slightly convex. Tergum T covered by seutellnm in the middle,
smooth, and separated !rom central dorsal plate by a distinet sulems.
Terga TT to VI completely fused together, forming a rectangular,
slightly convex plate, withont any demarcation between segments,
Fore and hind borders of central dorsal plate simple, not raised ;
lateral borders carinate, Dise, with exception of tergum TT, which is
smooth, covered with a setigerous granulation whieh is slightly finer
than that of the head, pronotum, and seutellum. Tergum VIT is
different in both sexes: in the male, it is trapezoidal, with lateral
borders converging posteriorly; dise raised posteriorly, without granu-
lation, and with two (1 -+ 1) longitudinal ridges produced backward,
aud superimposed over hypopyginn as acute spikes; these ridges are
flat as seen from above, with sharp borders, tapering backward. In
the female, tergum VII is also trapezoidal, slightly raised in the
middle, and with a dense, setigerous granulation like the rest of body.
Counexivum separated from tergum by a deep suleus; connexiva
slightly longer than their imaximal width; dises slightly raised, and
finely setigerously granulate (as fine as on central dorsal plate).
PR-aigles not protruding from I to VI; PE-VIT forms an acute angle
in the male, but is not produced and rounded in the female. Spiracles
very small, 11 to VIL ventral, placed well away from the lateral
margins, VIIT lateral and visible from above. Hypopygiun large,
suhcordate, with a small, triangular ridge on the wpper side medially,
lonvitudinally depressed along the ridge, Paratergites small, clavate,
adjacent to hypopygium. In the female, paratergites short, but wide,
vonnded posteriorly, reaching to the middle of segment TX.

Metathoracie seent gland openings in the shape of a thin, short
‘anal placed just over the middle aectabula, Tergal scent glands seen
as almost obliterated scars between IIL and TV, and between LV and
V segments, Meso. and metasternum with a wide, shallow depression
medially, which is prolonged on to sternum TI. Sternum {11 with
a median, triangular, low, and thin, carina. Sterna with straight
posterior borders; in the male, sternum VIT twice as long as VIL In
the female, posterior border of sternum VI twice sinuate, similar to
Neuroctenus; valves of VILT raised, forming a double carina.

Legs anarmed;: tvochanters semifused with femora; aroha present.

Type species; Aspisocoris lermifaphilus u. sp.

KORMILEY—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE S17

Aspisovoris n, gen. with ils open rostral atrium, and abbreviated
hemelytra, runs in Usinger and Matsuda’s key to Artabanellus, but
is far from it systematically, Tt is quite unique in the Mezirinae by
virtue of the very long seutellum, and the completely fused together
segments of the central dorsal plate, which form a rather flat, shehtly
convex plate.

|. Aspisocoris termitophilus n. sp.
Fig. 1-2

Male. Hlongate, rather convex; brachypterous.

Measurements: head as long as width across the eyes; 6—21:21,
%—20:20.5; proportions of antennal segments, [| to JV, are:
é—7.9:0:7;37, 9 —7.5:4.5:5.5:7. Pronotum hall as long as its inaximal
width: 4 —16:31, %—16:32.5: sentellum longer than basal width:
§ —25:20, @—27:20; abdomen (measured on ventral side because of
the length of seutellum) longer than ifs maximal width: ¢—50:38,
? —93:38; hypopygium shorter than its maximal width: 15:23,

Colour; testaceous; tips of antennal segments IV, tergum TT, and
the middle of ventral side, from prosternum to sternum VI, lighter,
yellow brown to pale yellow brown.

Total length: ¢—4.08, ?—4.52 mm.; width of pronotum: ¢—1.24,
®—1.30 mm.; width of abdomen: ¢—1.52, 9—1.52 mm.

Holotype: &, West Australia, Mundaring—J. Clark coll, in a
termite nest; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Allotype: 2%, collected with holotype; in the same collection,

Pauratypes: 2 8, 7 2 and 11 nymphs, collected with holo- and
allofype; in the same, and author’s collection.

Gen. Artabanellus Matsuda and Usinger, 1957

Artabanellus Matsuda and Usinger was established on the basis
of a single female specimen, from Palau Islands; the specimen
described here, also a female, is from New Guinea (Papui),

1. Artabanellus mcnamarai n. sp.

Female, Ovate, micropterous; all elevations on the head and hody
covered with rufous curled hairs.

Head slightly shorter than width through the eyes (23:25),
Anterior process long, with parallel sides, notched at the tip, reaching
to { of antennal seement [. Antenniferous tubercles dentiform, their
exterior borders subparallel, reaching to 4 of antennal segment J.
Kyes moderately large, protruding. Postocular tubercles absent;

51s RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

postoeular borders slightly eonvergent posteriorly, Vertex with a
high median ridge, covered with curled hairs. Antemmae less than
twice as long as head (38.5:28); segment I thick, clavate, IT narrower,
slightly tapering toward the base, IL] subeylindrical, also slightly
lupering toward the base, [V fusiform. Proportions, I to TV, are;
10:6:13:9.5, Rostral atrium open: rostrum short, does not reach to the
base of rostral groove,

Pronotum § as lone as its maximal width (15:43). Collar fused
with disc; laterad of it are placed two (1 4- 1) small tubercles; antero-
lateral angles are extended into reflexed, rounded lobes; lateral borders
convex; hind border broadly convex. Dise with two (1 + 1) moderately
large tubercles placed laterad of median line, and with two (1 + 1)
high tubercles placed near postero-lateral angles; from these tubercles
rin mesad, along posterior border, two (1 + 1) thin, low carinae,
evanescent before reaching each other.

Scutellum elevated in the form of a hump, shorter than width at
the base (16:23); lateral borders straight, tip rounded,

HTemelytra veduced to small vertical pads,

Melanotum split into two (1 + 1) large plates, elevated in the
middle.

Abdomen shorter than maximal width across segment IT (58:62).
Tergum T split by seutellum into two (1 + 1) transverse plates.
Central dorsal plate consistine of teres IL to VI; median portion.
raised as a wide, moderately high ridge; the latter more raised at
hind borders of terga Il, TV and VI. Laterad of median ridge dise
is more or legs flat, with the exception of two (1 + 1) short longitudinal
ridges placed on terga TTT and TV laterally. Tergum VIT depressed
in the middle, raised at postero-lateral anwles. Connexivum wide
and reflexed. PEH-IT to PH-IV not protruding, PH-V to PE-VIL
progressively protrnding as rounded tips. Paratergites conical, pro-
duced further than IX; the latter is placed at lower level than
paratergites, and truncate posteriorly, Spiracles TT to VI ventral,
placed far from the border; VIP and VIIT lateral and visible from
above. Lateral borders of abdomen are subparallel, but because of
reflexion they appear te converge backward.

Legs unarmed; trochanters free,

Colour: sepia to black; body covered with thin incrustation and
dirt. Antennae, rostrum, legs, and some parts of body are greyish
brown,

Total length, 4.56 mm.; width of pronotum, 1.72 mm.; width of
ahdomen, 2.48 mm,

AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 519

Holotype: %, New Guinea, N.E. Papua, Mt. Lamington—C. T.
McNamara coll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

It is a pleasure to dedicate this species to Mr. C. T. MeNamara
who collected so mauy of the rare species of Aradidae represented in
the collection,

Artabanellus menamarai nw sp. differs from A, infuscatus Matsuda
and Usinger, 1957, by: (1) less converging postocular borders; (2)
raised postero-literal angles of pronotum; (3) vertically raised wing
pads; and (4) abdomen with subparallel borders.

Gen. Chelonoderus Usinger, 194]

Chelonoderus Usinger as now understood ineludes only a single
xpecies from Queensland; the other two species previously attributed
to this genus were transterred by Usinger and Matsuda to two different
genera (1959; 230): for (, hackeri Drake, 1942 they erected the venus
Drakiessa Usinwer and Matsuda, 1959, and the seeond, ©, basilewshyi
Hoberland, 1956, trom Africa, belongs to another genus, yet fo be
described,

|, Chelonoderus stylatus Usinger
Chelonoderus stylatus Usinger, 1941, Pan-Pacifie Ent., 17; 180, fig. 3.

1 é¢ and 3 9, Australia, Northern Territory, Port Darwin—

W. D. Dodd eoll.; 2 2, (Queensland, Mulgrave R,—Hacker coll.; 1 4

and 1 @, Queensland, Cairns Distr.—W. D. Dodd coll., and 1 ?, Cairns
Distr—Darlington coll,

Argocoris 0. gen.

ate, ‘The upper surface, particularly the head and pronotum,
“bert with rough rugulosities and tubercles. Apterous.

Jlead as long as width through the eyes; anterior process strong,
constricted in the middle, wide in front, and slightly notehed, wenae
much longer than clypeus, and contiguous, produced slightly beyond
the tip of antennal segment 1, Antenniferous tubercles strong, denti-
form, blunt, slightly divergent, reaching to the middle of antennal
segment 1. Kyes semiglobose, protruding, but not stvlate. Postoeular
tubercles small, blunt, not renching to outer border of eyes. Vertex
raised and covered with rough tubereles. Antennae slender; segme mt
I clavate, slightly curved outward, I] half as long as I, others missing,
Rostral atrium closed; rostrum short, not reaching to hind border of
rostral groove; the latter wide and deep, open posteriorly,

Pronolum \ as lone as its maximal width; collar raised and
distinetly separated from dise; antero-lateral angles inflated, robust

$20) RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

and produced forward, and slightly inward, though not reaching to
fore border of collar. Lateral borders slightly convex; hind border
convex in the middle, sinuate laterally. Dise with « very deep median
suleus, flanked by two (1 + 1) high ridges, covered with rough
tubercles, and bearing an ‘*L’’-shaped callosity.

Mesonotum slightly wider than pronoium; median ridge high,
with a deep longitudinal suleus, covered with rough tubercles. Laterad
of median ridge, opposite to ridges of pronotum, are placed two
(1 + 1) smaller, robust subtriangular ridges, directed backward, but
not reaching to hind border of mesonotum; mesad of lateral borders
are placed two (1 + 1) robust, ovate ridges, Apexes of metathoracic
seent gland openings visible on lateral margins. Around median
ridges are placed wide, deep, and irregularly shaped, depressions.

Metanolum slightly narrower than mesonotum, separated from
lateral borders by connexivum IL. In the middle it is raised and fused
together with median ridge of mesonotum, and tergum I, Metanotum
is raised laterally as an irregular, deeply punctured trapezoid.
Between median ridge and lateral elevations dise deeply depressed,

Abdomen as long as its maximal width across segment TY,
Lateral borders regularly convex. 'Tergum | raised, with a median
snleus, which is forked posteriorly, running along hind border. Suture
between tergum [ and central dorsal plate deep; the latter consisting
of terga Il to VI fused together and raised, forming a high plateau,
Area ot dorsal scent glands higher, forming a wide median ridge,
surrounded by eight (4 + 4) deep, round depressions; sloping sides
of plateau rugose with irregular, or S-shaped, carinae, Tergum VIL
also highly raised, but depressed in the middle, and posteriorly,
Connexivum wide, and uneven; all segments clearly separated trom
each other; PK-angles not protruding; exterior borders straight from
Il to V, slightly sinnate on V1 and VII, Spiracles IT to VIL ventral,
placed far from the border; VIIT lateral and visible from above,
Paratergites (¢@) short, in the form of tubercles, reaching to middle
of a short, tricuspidate sewment PX,

Proslermom with a high median ridge; meso- and imetasternuni
depressed in the middle. Metathoracie scent glands with long, oblique
canals. Venter with sterna rugose, punctured, depressed medially,
and with six (3 + 8) rows of larger and smaller round, éallons spots.

Legs Unarmed; trochanters free; femora fnsiform, as long as
tibiae; claws without arolia,

Type species: Arqocoris qrossi n. sp.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 521

lr gocoris n. g, in Usinger and Matsnda’s key runs to Chelonoderus
Usinger, 1941, to which it is related, but differs by the different shape
of body, the presence of small postocular tubercles, and in particular
in the different topography of upper surtiace of the body,

1. Argocoris grossi n. sp.
Mig. 3-4
Female. Ovate, with very rigose upper surface, naked and shiny.
Apterous.

Measurements: head as loug as width through the eyes (21:20);
proportions of antennal segments, | to IT, are: 7:4:-: (others
missing). Pronotam much shorter than maximal width (10:31);
mesonotal width—35, metanotal width—33; abdomen as long as

maximal width 50:49,

Colour: reddish brown 1o dark brown; area of dorsal scent glands,
antennae, rostrum, and trochanters, yellow brown.

Total length, 9.10 mm.; pronotal width, 3.10 mm.; abdominal width,
4.9 mim.

ITolotype: %, Queensland, Bowen—A, Simson coll,; deposited in
the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

It is a pleasure to dedicate this species to Mr, Gordon F. Gross,
Senior Curator of Invertebrates at the South Australian Museum,
Adelaide,

Aegisocoris. n. gen.
Ovate; apterous; very convex on upper surlace, covered with
ridges, protruberances, and round tubercles of different sizes; on
salient portions partially covered with rust coloured hairs.

Head shorter than width through the eyes. Anterior process
strong, constricted in the middle, widened in front and incised, genae
being longer than clypeus and contiguous, reaching slightly beyond the
lip of antennal segment. I. Antenniferous tubercles stout, blunt,
slightly divergent, reaching almost to the middle of antennal segment I.
Kyes globose, slightly pedunculate, Postocular tubercles blunt, reach-
ing to outer border of eyes. Postocular margins strongly convergent
backward, Vertex with two (1 + 1) rows of strong tubercles; elypeus
with much finer tubercles. Antennae slender; segment I clavate,
IT and ILI tapering toward the base, TV pyriform. Rostral atrium
closed, placed far from the tip of the head. Rostrum reaching to hind
border of a deep rostral groove which is closed posteriorly.

la
nm
i)

RECORDS OF THE 5.4, MUSEUM

Pronolum very short and wide; collar thin, poorly separated from
dise; anterior borders, slightly receding towards the sides; antero-
luteral angles extended into small, rounded lobes, and reflexed;
posterolateral angles with high, round tubereles (1 -- 1). Dise with
two (1 + 1) high ridges which are divergent backward, each of
them bearing two large tubercles; laterad of ridges dise covered with
moderately large, round granules.

Mesonotum wider than pronotums in the middle with a stout, high
median ridge fused with tergum | posteriorly; median ridge bearing
a longitudinal suleus flanked by two (1 + 1) ridges; laterad of them
with two (1 + 1) large, round tubereles opposed by two (1 + 1)
others which are salient [rom fore border; further toward lateral
horders dise flat, only hind border thinly earinate, On lateral borders
are placed two (1 + 1) large tubercles, slightly inclined posteriorly ;
in front and somewhat lateral to these apices of metathoracic scent
sland openings visible,

Metanotim slightly narrower than mesonotum, but wider than
pronotum, separated from lateral horders by the forwardly produced
connexiva I]. Dise split into two (1 + 1) large, rather flat plates,
hearing in the middle posteriorly a cluster of tubercles,

Abdomen ovate, shorter than maximal width across segment TV,
and strongly elevated on central dorsal plate. Tergum L is strongly
elevated and granulate in the middle, abruptly sloping laterally; it is
separated from mesonotum and central dorsal plate by deep sulei.
Central dorsal plate consists of terga IT to VI fused together, forming
a large hump. This hump in the middle, on terga IL to IV, has a
eross-shaped elevation, covered with rough, round granules, and behind
if, on terga V and VI, a subtrianguwlar ridge sloping backward, Dise
of central dorsal plate covered with rough, round granules.
Connexivum wide and horizontal; hind borders of connexiva Tl to
VI carinate; PR-angles slightly protrnding, rounded. Tergum VII
strongly and rotundly elevated laterally, depressed in the middle and
posteriorly; also covered with rough, round granules. Spiracles IL
to VIL ventral, placed far from the border; VIII lateral and visible
from above, Paratergites (@) small, triangular, reaching to 4 of
segment IX, which is truneate posteriorly.

Prosternum with a longilndinal ridge; pleura and venter with
rough, round granules. Venter strongly convex,

Legs unarmed; trochanters free,

Tupe species: Aegisocoris qranulatus n, sp.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 523

Aegisocoris n, gen, is related to Drakiessa Usinger and Matsuda,
1959, from which it differs by a different topography of the upper
surtace and rough round granules dispersed over the body,

|. Aegisocoris granulatus n. sp.
FIG. 5-6

Female. Strongly convex on upper surface, less so on lower;
covered with smooth, shiny, round granules of different sizes.

Measurements: head shorter than width through the eyes (42:46) ;
proportions of antennal segments, | to 1V, are: 14:8.5:14:12; pronotum
very short and wide (16:56); mesonotaum wider than pronotum (75);
metanotum narrower than mesonotum, buf wider than pronotum (65) ;
abdomen slightly shorter than maximal width (96:100).

Colour: black; antennae, rostrum, and legs, reddish brown; tarsi
vellow brown; curled hairs ferruginous.

Total length, 7.12 mm.; width of pronotum, 2.24 mm.; width of
abdomen, 4.0 mm.

Holotype: ¢@, Queensland, Cairns distriet—A. M. Lea coll;
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Gen. Drakiessa Usinger and Matsuda, 1959

1, Drakiessa hackeri (Drake)
Chelonoderus hackeri Drake, 1942, Pan Pacific Knt., 18: 190.
Drakiessa hackeri Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae; p. 231,

é and7 2, Queensland, Mt. Tambourine—A. M, Lea coll.; 3 2
and 3 ¢, (neensland, Blackall Range—A. M. Lea coll,

2. Drakiessa parva Kormilev
Drakiessa parva Kormiley, 1965, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, 77: 24.
1 4, Queensland, Mt. Tambourine—A. M. Lea coll,

Gen. Neophloeobia Usinger and Matsuda, 1959
Neoploeobia was known from two species, both from Australia,
here 7 describe a third, also from Australia. Usinger and Matsuda
described this genus as apterous, but then later go on to speak about
hemelytra, Actually Neoploeobia is mieropterous, the hemelytra are
present but reduced to very small pads.

a

424 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. Neophloeobia montrouzieri Usinger and Matsuda
Neoploeobia montrouzier’ Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Classif. Aracli-
dae; p, 234, fig. 68.
Usinger and Matsuda mentioned in the generic description of
Neophloeobia that the eyes are small; in N. mantrouzieri they are
slightly stylate.

1 2, Queensland, Mt. Tambourine—A, M, Lea coll.

2. Neophloeobia tuberculata n. sp.
Fig. 7-8
Male, Elongate ovate; opaque, but with shiny yellow brown, round
8 paque, x)

callous spots, and shiny, red hrown, tubercles of different size, similar
to those on slegisocoris tuberculatus WW sp.

Head shorter than width through the eyes (36:41), Anterior
process stout, with subparallel sides, very slightly widening toward
the tip, and deeply notched in front, reaching a little beyond the tip
of antennal segment I; genae longer than elypeas and contiguous,
Antenniterous tubercles strong, blunt, divaricating, reaching to the
middle of antennal seement I. Eyes globose, salient, slightly stylate.
Postocular tubercles dentilorm, acute, directed obliquely backward,
reaching to outer border of eves. Antennae slender; segment I robuat,
clavate; If and HI tapering toward the base, mnch more slender; TV
pyriform, Proportions of antennal segments, I to IV, are:
12.5:9:12:11, The rostrum reaches slightly over the base of a deep
rostral groove, the latter is open posteriorly,

Pronotum very short and wide (15:56); collar thin, but distinet;
fore borders straight, slightly receding posteriorad; antero-lateral
anzles produeed into small, rounded lobes, placed obliquely; postero-
lateral angles bearing two (1 + 1) small tubereles. Lateral borders
between lobes and tubercles short, and deeply incised. Hind border
convex in the middle, sinuate laterally. Dise depressed medially, and
provided with eight (4 -+ 4) low, longitudinal ridges, diminishing from
ner ones to outer ones,

Mesonotum wider than pronotum (60:56), semifused in the middle
with metanotum, but the suture is still discernible. It is raised
medially, and provided with a yellow brown, glabrous median line,
prolonged posteriorly over the metanotum and tergum I. Laterad of
median ridge are placed two (1 + 1) large, round, yellow brown,
callous spots. In the middle of each side dise is raised again but
depressed near lateral borders.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 52

“

Melanohon as wide as mesonotum (60:60), raised medially, and
in the middle of each side, and lused posteriorly with tergum I,
rom lateral borders it is separated by the forwardly produeed
connexivim U1,

Hemelytra vedueed to very small, bean-shaped pads, just behind
whieh are seen the apexes of metathoracie scent gland eanals.

Abdomen slightly longer than maximal width across segment V
(82:80). ‘Tergnm 7 raised medially, and sloping laterally, Lt is
separated from the central dorsal plate by a distinet snleus, Contral
dorsal plate consists of terga ID to VI, which are fused together, Dise
raised medially, and sloping laterally; the highest point being on
lergun Vo Sears of dorsal scent glands placed between terga LIL and
TV. Dise covered with an irregular pattern of shiny, round tubercles,
sometimes forming rows. A series of yellow brown, round, callous
spots are placed in fonr rows with following formula: tergum IT:
=—=——-3, TH: 1 ==93; Weld iileV;-11-—-—.and Viz:-11—
Tergum VIP is raised in the middle posteriorly for the reception of
the hypopyginm: the latter is cordate, with a low, large, triangular
rilee on the upper surfaee. VParatergites small, clavate, reaching
slightly heyond the middle of hypopygium. Spiracles If to VIT ventral,
placed far from border; VIIT lateral and visible from above.

Legs warmed; arolia absent,

Colour: Dark brown, with yellow brown, round, callous spots, and
red brown, shiny tubercles; legs, antenmae, and rostrum yellow brown,
partially infuseate,

Total length 6.16 mm,; width of pronotum, 2.24 mm.; width of
abdomen, 3.20 mim,

Holotype: ¢, Queensland, Cairns distriet—A. M. Lea coll;
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

N, luberculata a. sp. stands a little apart from other two species
of the genus, particularly in that the round, shiny tubercles (similar
ax those ou alagisecoris) are not found in other species, but the
topography of the pronotuim is similar to other species of Neophloeobia.
On the other hand the topography of the abdomen is so different from
that of slegisocoris that NV. tuberculata eannot be congenerie with the
former, and it is hest to place it in Neophloeobia.

All the genera from Chelonaderus to Neophloecabia form a very
distinet group of Australian apterous or micropterous eenera, and
With all their apparent diversity in topography of their hodies they
nevertheless have a few important characters in common, particularly
the shape of (he head, position of spiracles, and in that all segments

526 RECORDS OF THE 3$,A. MUSEUM

of the connexiva are clearly separated from each other. All these
genera save Drakiessa have pronotum depressed, or suleate on
median line,

Gen. Rossius Usinger and Matsuda, 1959
Rossius was established on the base of a single species from New
Guinea, Crimia polyacantha Walker, 1873, previously attributed to the
genus Barcinus Stal, but in reality more related to Arfabanus Stal, as
Usinger and Matsuda have stated (1959; 260).

|. Rossius polyacanthus (Walker)
Fig. 9
Crimia polyacantha Walker, 1873, Cat. Hem. Het. Brit. Mus., 7: 17.
Barcinus polyacanthus Distant, 1902, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., (7) 9: 359,

Rossius polyacanthus Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, The Class. Aradidae,
p. 258, fig. 75.

Rossius polyacanthus (Walker) is a rather variable species
referring to the length of genae and the shape of lateral lobes of
abdominal segments VI and VII. Genae in some specimens are
distinctly shorter than antennal segment I, in other reaching to, or
even produced beyond the apex of the latter. Lateral lobes of segments
VI and VIL vary in width, and even in shape: sometimes they are
similar, sometimes those of segment VI are narrower than VII, some
of them are obliquely truncate, and other not.

1 é and1 ¢, New Guinea, Wareo, Finsch Haven—Rey. L. Wagner
coll.

Gen. Artabanus Stil, 1865
Artabanus is an Oriental genus penetrating into Oceania and
Australia. It is rather heterogenous, but all species have in common
a peculiar stridulatory apparatus.

Tn 1873 Stal described Artabanus sinuatus from New Guinea. In
the same year Walker described Crimia doreica also from New Guinea,
which later was transferred by Distant to Arfabanus (1902: 359).
The description of Stal is pretty good for his time, so that it was not
difficult to identify this species among specimens from New Guinea,
The description of Walker is bad, but I have had an opportunity to
examine his type at the British Museum (N.H.), and it resulted to be
conspecific with A, sinuatus Stil, so that these two species shonld be
synonymized, but I was not able to determine which name has priority,

tt
nv
~~

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE

1. Artabanus bilobiceps (Lethierry)

Brachyrrhynchus bilobiceps Lethierry, 1888, Am. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat.,
Genova, 26: 464.

Artabanus atkinsoni Bergroth, 1889, Ann, Mus. Civ. Stor, Nat., Genova,
27; 724, tab. 12, fig. 5.

Artabanus bilobiceps Bergroth, 1892, Ann, Mus. Civ. Stor, Nat.,
Genova, 32: 715.

1 4, Java, Buitenzore—A. M. Lea eoll.

la. Artabanus bilobiceps papuasicus n. subsp.

Similar to A. bilobieeps from Java, but lateral teeth on the
pronotum reduced to half the size of those of bilobiceps s. str.
Other characters as in parent species.

Holotype 8, allotype °, and 3 @, paratypes—New Guinea, NE.
Papua, Mt. Lamington, 1,300-1,500 feet—C, T. MeNamara coll.;
deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, and (1 paratype)
in author’s collection.

2. Artabanus truncatus n. sp.

Female, Klongate ovate; partially covered with short, curled,
ferruginous hairs.

Related to Artabanus lativentris Esaki and Matsuda, 1951, from
which it differs by: anterotateral angles of pronotum obliquely
truncate, without any teeth and forming a trapezoidal lobe; by different
proportions of antennal segments, segment IIT being relatively shorter,
and by the colour, which is uniformly dark brown; bases of antennal
segment, and legs, reddish brown; rostrnm and tarsi yellow brown,

Measurements: head almost as long as width through the eyes
(33:32); proportions of antermal segments, L to LV, are: 17 712:22:12;
pronotum half as long as maximal width (34:72); scutellum shorter
than width at the base (80:47); abdomen as lone as maximal width
across segment PV (89:88).

Total length, 748 mm.; width of pronotum, 2.88 mm.; width of
abdomen, 3.52 mm.

Holotype: &, New Guinea, Finsch Haven, Wareo—Rev. L. Wagener
coll.; deposited in the Sonth Australian Museum, Adelaide .

Paratype: 1 2, collected with holotype; in author’s collection.

3. Artabanus tuberculatus n. sp.

Female, General aspect of A, gewiculatus Stil, 1870, but the head
is shorter, as long as width throngh the eyes; anterior process with

528 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

contiguous juga, reaches slightly beyond the middle of antennal
segment I, Vertex raised, granniate, flanked by two (1 + 1) oblique,
diverging posteriorly, deep furrows. Pronotum and seutellam similar
to A. geniculalus, Baso-lateral border of eorium carinate, and sinuate.
Abdomen longer than maximal width (as long as wide in if. enwicu-
latus). Posterior borders and postero-interior angles of eonnexiva.
are both inflated. Tereum VI1 semicireularly depressed in the middle,
and with a semicireular ridge around depression (with two lateral
humps and median depression in 1, geniculalus). On ventral side are
dispersed, round, shiny, tubercles of different sizes: a row along
rostral groove, and a few behind eyes; on meso- and metapleura, and
acetabula; a row of finer tubercles on hind borders of sterna 1V and
V, and a group on sterna VT laterally. These tubercles are absent in
other species.

Measurements: head, 81:30; proportions of antennal segments:
15:10;18:12.5; pronotum, 30:67; sentellum, 80:35; abdomen, 80:77.

Colours dark reddish brown; antennal segment Tat base, LT and
TV entirely, and trochanters, are lighter; rostrum and farsi yellow.

Total length, 6.64 mm.; width of pronotum, 2.68 mm.; width of
abdomen, 3.08 min.

Holotype: 2, Malay Peninsula, Gap (Fraser Hill) —A. M. Lee
and wife coll; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

4. Artabanus mefarlandi n. sp.
Fig. 16
Male, Hlongate ovate; partially covered with short, curled yellow
brown hairs.

Head as long as width through the eyes (¢—17:17, ¢—18:18).
Anterior process long and slender, slightly constricted in the middle,
and deeply incised in front, genae much longer than clypeus and
rounded apieally, reaching slightly beyond the tip of antennal segment
1. Antenniferous tubereles dentiform, strong, divaricating, reaching
to the middle of antennal segment [L. Kyes globose, stylate, Post-
ocular borders firstly sinuate, then slightly convex. Vertex with two
(1 + 1) curved carinae. Antennae slender, one and a half times as
long as head (@—25:17, @—265:18). Proportions of antennal seg-
ments, I to TY, are: ¢—7:5:8:5, 2—7:4:8:5, Rostrum reaches to the
base of head; rostral groove deep, open posteriorly; rostral atriam
narrowly open.

FPronotwm much shorter than maximal width (6 —13:82, 9 —13:54).
Collar sinuate in front, distinetly separated from dise. Antero-lateral
angles expanded into large, snbtriangular lobes, produced forward

KORMILEY—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 529

beyond collar, and sideways, Lateral noteh deep, rounded, Lateral
borders of hind lobe convex, rounded; hind border three times sinnate:
in the middle, and laterally, Interlobal depression deep. Fore lobe
with four (2 4- 2) longitudinal ridges, and with a median depression;
hind lobe e¢ranulate,

Seutellum slightly shorter than width at the base (4¢—14;15,
®—14;18); all borders carinate; lateral borders straight, slightly
sinuate before the tip; median carina high and slender, bifureate at.
base, and produced forward, slightly overlapping pronotum, Dise
transversely, toughly rugose,

Hemelytra veach to the middle of tergum VIL (2), or to posterior
border of tergum VI (2). Baso-lateral border of eorium shehtly
expanded, angularly prodneed anteriorly, straight posteriorly; apicsl
angle of eorium rounded; apical border straight exteriorly, deeply,
and roundly, excised interiorly.

Abdomen slightly longer than maximal width across segment LV
in male (89:87), slightly shorter than maximal width across sexment
V in female (42:45). Abdomen slightly widening posteriorly im male,
ovate in female. Connexivum wide and horizontal; PK-angles
angularly protruding from TT te V, rounded in VI, produced as small
vounded lobes direeted backward in) VIT, Tergum VIL raised
posteriorly, aud depressed along hind border, which is raised. Para-
tergites reach to } of hypopygium; the latter transverse, much shorter
than maximal width (5:13), with a short median ridee, ronnded
apically, and surrounded by a sulcus, Inthe female, tergum VU raised
lnterally, and depressed in the middle; paratergites large, rounded,
produced as far as small segment TX; the latter incised posteriorly,
Spiracles IT to Vi ventral, VIL and VII lateral and visible {rom above,
Stridulatory apparains Consists of a high, sharp carina running
obliquely from a lind portion of sternum LLL across sternum LV, and
ol sharp, setigerous granules on hind femora.

Colour; testaceouss hind half of head, fore lobe of pronotum in
the middle, dise of scutellnm, tip of corium, membrane, large spots on
connmexiva Tt and TV, and small on Vand V1, tergum VII, hypopygitim,
and most of ventral surface, and legs, are black, or infuseate,

Total length; ¢—s8.5, 2—9.1 mm.; width of pronotum: ¢—3.2,
9—A4 mim; width of ahdomen; ¢—38.7, ?—4.5 mm,

Holotype: &, Fiji, Viti Levu, Suva—A. N. MeFarland coll. 6th
Nov, 1964; under loose bark of deeaying logs, in an old woodpile on
the ground; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Allolupe: 2%, collected with holotype; in the same collection.

530 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Paratypes: 6 3, 3 %, and 10 nymphs of different instars, all
colleeted with holo. and allotype; in the same and author’s collection.

It is a pleasure to dedicate this species to its collector, Mr.
A, N. MeFarland,

Artabanus mcfarlandi n. sp. belongs to the ‘doreiens group’’, and
is related to A. doreieus (Walker), 1873 (or A. srmatus Stal, 1873,
whichever of these names proves to have priority), but it is smaller,
and the antero-lateral lobes of the pronotum are differently shaped;
abdomen in males with straight borders, not constricted at segment V.

5. Artabanus doreicus (Walker)
Crimia doreica Walker, 1878, Cat. Hem. Het. Brit. Mus., 7: 17.
Artabanus sinuatus Stal, 1878, num. Hem., 3: 141,
Artabanus doreicus Distant, 19028, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., (7) 9: 359.
3.6 and 1 2, New Guinea, N. BE. Papua, Mt. Lamington—C, T.
MeNamara coll: 1 ¢@, New Guinea, Finsch Haven, Wareo—Rev.
LL. Wagner coll,

Gen. Ctenoneurus Bergroth, 1887

Cfenoneurus Bergroth is curiously distributed in two separate
areas: the first extends from New Zealand and Australia northward
across New Guinea to Fiji and New Caledonia, the second area covers
Central Afriea (Ruanda, Congo, Gabon) to Sao Tomé Island in the
Gulf of Guinea and Madagasear. One of the main characters in this
genus is a transverse carina near the fore border of sterna TV, V and
VI. A new species from New Guinea deseribed here has all the other
characters of Crenoneurus save this one, it has no carina on sterna IV,
Vand VI. It has a convex head, with a long and narrow anterior
process reaching to the tip of antennal segment I. Also the general
aspect of the body, rather convex on the ventral side, with small spines
at basal angles of seutellum and most of all the spiracles, large and
placed close to the border, are characters of Cfenoneuwrus, and not of
Mezira AS., | have deemed it better to place it in Clenoneurus.

1. Ctenoneurus bergrothianus Kirkaldy

Clenoneurus bergrothianus Kirkaldy, 1908, Proe, Linn. Soe., Sydney,
33: 590.

2 4 and 2 9, Fiji, Viti Levu—aA, M. Lea coll,
2. Ctenoneurus halaszfyi Kormilev
Ctenoneurius halasefyi Wormiley, 1958, Jour. N.Y. Ent, Soec., 66: 92.

4 4 and 3 2, New Guinea, Finsech Haven, Wareo—Rev. Lb,
Waener coll.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE S31

3. Ctenoneurus aberrans n. sp.
Fie, 10-11
Female, Klongate ovate, rather convex; finely granulate,

Head as loug as width through the eyes (27,5:27); anterior process
long, with parallel sides and slightly notched in front, reaching to the
tip of autennal segment I. Antenniferous tubercles short, aeute,
convex exteriorly, reaching to + of antennal segment I. Eyes semi-
globose, protrading. Postoenlar tubercles form an obtuse angle and do
not reach to outer border of eyes, Vertex convex, granulate; mesad
oO! eyes are placed two (1 -+ 1) ovate eallosities, Antennae strong’;
proportions of antemmal segments, | to TV, are: 10:9:10:12. Rostrum
reaches to hind border of head; rostral atrium closed; rostral groove
deep, open posteriorly,

Provotum half as long ax maximal width (25:52); collar slightly
sinuate in front: autero-lateral angles rounded, produced forward as
faras collar. Lateral borders parallel at humeri, convergent anteriorly.
Hind border broadly sinnate. Depression between the lobes weak,
Fore lobe with two (1 + 1) low, round elevations, and laterad of
them with two (1 + 1) longitudinal, low ridges, whieh are semi-
obliterated, TTind dise granulate.

Seutelon shorter than basal width (25:35); small spines at basal
angles of seutelluin present; lateral borders carinate and slightly
sinuate; tip angularly ronnded; median carina low, tapering back-
ward; dise irregularly, finely rugose.

Hemelytra reach to hind border of tergum VI; apical angle of
corium acute; apical border straight, but slightly receding and rounded
inferiorly. Membrane with anastomosing veins.

Abdomen longer than maximal width across seginent TV (67 60).
Lateral borders subparallel, barely convex; connexivum moderately
wide, sloping inwardly; midlateral area indistinctly separated from
conmexivum, PH-angles not protruding, Tergum VII weakly raised,
and slightly depressed in the middle. Paratergites conical, divergent,
produced beyond tip of simall segment IX, whieh is rounded
posteriorly, Spiraeles IT to VI ventral, large, placed near the border;
VII sublateral but visible from above; VIIL terminal, Sternum V1
once sinuate in the middle; sterna TV to VI without transverse earina
anteriorly,

Legs unarmed; trochanters free; arolia thin and long.

Colour; sepia-brown; anteunae and tibiae lighter, brown; rostrum
and farsi yellow brown,

532 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Total length, 5.70 mm.; width of pronotum, 2.08 mm.,; width of
abdomen, 2.40 mm.

Holotype: %, New Guinea, N.E. Papua, Mt, Lamington—C, T.
McNamara coll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Clenoneurus aberrans n, sp. resembles C, australis Kormilev, 1965,
but is wider, seutellum with almost straight sides; corium not sinuate
interiorly, and carinae on sterna TV to VI absent.

Gen. Neuroctenus Fieber, 1861

Neuroctenus is an almost cosmopolitan genus but does not reach
Europe, or other colder areas. In the South Pacific Islands and New
Zealand it is replaced by Clenonewrus,

1. Neuroctenus hanschini Kormilev
Neuroctenus hanschini Kormiley, 1953, Verh. Naturt. Ges. Basel, 64:
B42,
Distributed in Australia: Northern Territory and Queensland.
Various specimens from Port Darwin, Batchelor, and Stapleton,

in the Northern Territory, and from Somerset, and Bluff, in
Queensland.

2. Neuroctenus majusculus Bergroth
Neuroctenus majusculus Bergroth, 1887, Ofv. Finska Vet. Soc.-Férh.,
29: 181.

1 é@ and 2 °, West Anstralia, Warren R.—W. D. Dodd coll.

3. Neuroctenus proximus (Walker)
Mezira proxima Walker, 1878, Cat. Hem. Het. Brit. Mus., 7: 28

aon

Neuroctenus prowimus Bergroth, 1887, Ofv. inska Vet.-Soe. Férh.,
29: 187.

1 2, Tasmania, W. Tamar.

4. Neuroctenus serrulatus Stal
Neuroctenus serrulatus Stal, 1870, Ofv. Vet. Ak. Férh., 27: 674.

2 9, Queensland, Somerset—C. T. McNamara coll.; 2 ¢ and 1 2,
Queensland, Kuranda—F. P. Dodd coll.; 2 @ and 2 ¢, New Guinea,
Papua, Misima I.—H. K. Bartlett coll.; 3 ¢, Malaya, Singapore—
A, M. Lea and ©, T. MeNamara coll.; 1 ¢ and 8 2°, Malay Peninsula,
Gap (Fraser Ill)—A. M. Lea and wife coll.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 533

5. Neuroctenus meziroides Kormilev
Neuractenus meziroides Kormiley, 1958, Jour. N.Y. Ent. Soc., 66; 94.

3 2 8 9, New Guinea, Port Moresby, Bisiatabu—W. N. Lock
coll.; 2.9, New Guinea, Finsch Haven, Wareo—Rev. L. Wagner coll. ;
5 4 and 5 3, New Guinea, Papua, Misima J.—Rev. H. K. Bartlett coll.

6. Neuroctenus nitidulus Bergroth
Neuroctenus nitidulus Bergroth, 1887, Ofv. Finska Vet.-Noc. Férh.,
29: 177,

& ¢ and 2 ?, Malay Peninsula, Gap (Fraser Hall)—A. M. Lea
and wife coll; 5 6 and 4 @, New Guinea, Finseh Haven, Wareo—
Rev. L. Wagner coll.; 1 ¢, New Guinea, Papua, Mt. Laming‘ton—
C. T. MeNamara coll.

7. Neuroctenus vicinus Signoret
Neuroctenus vicinus Signoret, 1880, Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat., Genova,
15; 542.
48 and 4 ?, New Guinea, N.. Papua, Mt. Lamington—C. T,
MeNamara coll.
Gen. Barcinus Stil, 1873
1. Barcinus truncatus Kormilev
Barcinus truncatus Kormileyv, 1955, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (12) 8: 196.

2 2, New Guinea, N.6. Papua, Mt. Lamington—C. T. McNamara

eoll.; 2.4, New Guinea, Finsch Haven, Wareo—Rev. L. Wagner coll.

Gen. Crimia Amyot and Serville, 1843
!. Crimia tuberculata Amyot and Serville
Crima tuberculata Amyot and Serville, 1843, Hemipt., p. 305.
1 ¢, Malay Peninsula, Gap (Fraser Hill) —A. M. Lea and wife coll.

Gen. Pictinellus Usinger and Matsuda, 1959

Usinger and Matsnda listed only four species of Pictinellus, though
they mentioned that they have seen up to 15 species (1959: 290).

In 1959, almost simultaneously with the appearance of the
Classification of Aradidae by Usinger and Matsuda, Kiritshenko pub-
lished a new species from Japan, which he put into a new subgenus of
Mezira AS., naming it Megira (Mezirella) infantulus Kiritshenko,
1959. From the description and a very good drawing, I could see that
it was not a subgenus of Mezira, but belonged to one of the new genera
of Usinger and Matsuda, so [ transferred it tentatively to Pictinellus.

534 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Later I got, by the kind offices of Dr, I. M. Kerzhner, a paratype of
Mezira (Mezirella) infantulus, and can now see that it belongs not to
Pictinellus, but to a related genus, Glochocoris Usinger and Matsuda,
1959. The new combination is therefore Glochocoris imfantulus
(Kiritshenko), 1959.

In this lot were a few species of Pictinellus from Malay Peninsula,
Fiji, and New Guinea. Below is a key to the Pictinellys species from
Fiji.

Key for species of Pictinellus Usinger and Matsuda from Fiji.

1. Head longer than width through the

eit A Re oe ee ee ie
Head as long, or shorter, than width
through the eyes .. .. -. -. ee ee ee 8

92. Smaller species, female less than 4.25
mim., with segment IX conical; lateral
borders of pronotum distinctly simuate P, elongatus n. sp.,
Viti Levu
Larger species, female over 4.50 mm.,
with segment IX rectangular, truncate
posteriorly; lateral borders of prono-
tum almost straight .. .... .. .... P. longiceps n. sp.,
Viti Levu
3. Lateral borders of pronotum distinctly

Sitter. ae pe Ge PE ER ae han
Lateral borders of pronotum almost
straight, barely sinuate .. .. .. .. .. P. moturikiensis n. sp.,

Moturiki, Viti Levu
4. Spiracles VII sublateral, and slightly
visible from above; antennal segment
Il narrowly fusiform (4.5:2) ........ P. leat ne sp., Viti Leva
Spiraeles VIL sublateral, but not visible
from above; antennal segment If
widely fusiform (3.5:2)).. 0... 0...

~

> fungicola (Kirkaldy),
1908, Viti Levu
1. Pictinellus papuasicus n. sp.
Fig. 12-13

Male. Elongate, subparallel; hind lobe of pronotum finely
eranulate.

Head short, almost as long as width through the eyes. Anterior
process of the head strongly constricted in the middle, slightly notched
in front, reaches to the middle of antennal segment I. Antenniferous
tubercles transversely truncate in front, shghtly convex exteriorly.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 535

Anterior angles of pronotum produced forward, acute; lateral borders
sinnate, Hypopygium cordate, with a high, triangular ridge, reaching
almost to the lip of hypopygium; paratergites long, strongly dilated
and ineised, reaching to the tip of hypopygium, with spiracle placed
laterally,

Measurements: head as long as maximal width (12:12.5);
proportions of antennal segments, [ to TV, are: 5:2.5:6:5.5; pronotum
less than half as long as maximal width (11:24); seutellum almost
as long as basal width (12:13); abdomen much longer than maximal
width (43:27); hypopygium almost as long as wide (8:9). Spiracles:
IT lateral and visihle from above, II] to VI ventral, placed far from
the border; VIL sublateral, but not visible from above; VIII lateral
and visible,

Colour: testaceous; membrane blackish, white at the base.

Total length, 3.28 mim,; width of pronotum, 0.96 mm.; width of
abdomen, 1.08 mm.

Holotype: 4, New Guinea, N.E. Papua, Mt. Lamington—C. T,
McNamara coll; deposited 3 in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Pictinellus papuasicus is related to P. fungicola (Kirkaldy), 1908,
from which it differs by the different shape of its hypopyyium and
paratergites, and by a lighter colouration.

2. Pictinellus fungicola (Kirkaldy)
Clenoneurus fungicola Kirkaldy, 1908, Proe. Linn. Soe., Sydney, 33:

iat) v
de
Pictmellus fungicola Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae;
269
p. 269,
As the description of Kirkaldy dealt mostly with the colouration,
Tam giving a short redeseription.

Heud as long as width through the eyes (6 —12:12, ?—12.5:12.5);
anterior process slightly constricted in the middle, dilated and incised
in front, reaches to the middle of antennal seement 1. Antenniferous
tubercles obliquely truneate in front. Anterior angles of pronotum
produced forward, acute; lateral borders sinuate, Hypopygium
cordate, short, median ridge thin and lower than in preceding species.
Paratergites simple, clavate, not incised. In the female, paratergites
large rounded, reach to 3 of a trapezoidal segment IX. Spiracles:
I] lateral and visible from above, IIT to VI ventral, placed far from
the border; VIL sublateral, but not visible from above; VIITL lateral
and visible. Antennal segment TT wide (3.4:2).

a
te
>

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Proportions of antennal segments, [ to TV, are: ¢—6:4:6:5.5,
? —6.5:3.5:6:6, Pronotum half as long as maximal width ( ¢—12:24,
?—12:26); seutellum almost as long as basal width (@—12:13,
9 —12.5:14); abdomen longer than maximal width ( 4¢—40:25.5,
9 —46:28).

Colour: ferrugineous; connexivum, rostrum, tarsi and ventral
side lighter.

Total length: ¢—8.12, ¢—3.48 mm.; width of pronotum: ¢—0.96,
?—1.04 mm.; width of abdomen: ¢—1.02, ¢—1.12 mm,

1 6 and5 °, Fiji, Viti Levua—aA. M. Lea coll.

3. Pictinellus leai n. sp.
Fig. 14-15

Female, Elongate ovate, widening posteriorly; finely granulate.

Head as long as width through the eyes; anterior process tapering
forward, incised in front, reaching to | of antennal segment I; anten-
niferous tubercles obliquely truncate in front, divergent. Anterior
angles of pronotym produced forward, acute; lateral borders sinuate ;
abdomen with regularly rounded borders. Paratergites large,
rounded, reaching to the middle of segment IX; the latter trapezoidal,
slightly convex apically. Spiracles: U1 lateral and visible from above,
TIL to VI ventral, placed far from the border; VIL sublateral and
slightly visible from above; VIL lateral. Antennal segment I
narrower than in P. fungicola (45:2),

Measurement: head, 14:14; proportions of antennal segments, I
to IV, are: 7.5:4.5:8:6.5; pronotum, 13:28; seutellum, 14:15; abdomen,
95:3).

Colour: ferragineous; membrane blackish, white at the base; tarsi
yellow.

LEGEND TO FIGURES

Fig. 1. Anterior half of Aspisocoris termitaphilus nm. sp.

2. Termination of abdomen of Aspisocoris termitophihis n. sp.
Fig. 3. Tlead and pronotum of Argecoris grossi iu. sp.
Fig. 4. Termination of abdomen of Argocoris grosst nu, sp.
Mig. 5. Head and pronotum of deyisovoris granulatics wu. sp.
Fig. 6. Termination of abdomen of degisocoris qranulatus n. sp.
Mig. 7. Head and pronotum of Neophlocobia tuberculata n. sp.
Fig. §. Termination of abdomen of Neophloeobia tuberculata n. sp.
Mig. 9. Termination of abdomen of Hossins magneri n. sy.
Vig. 10. Head and pronotum of Crenoneurus aberrans nn. sp.
Fig. 11. Termination of abdomen of Ctenonewrus aberrans n. sp.
Fig. 12. Head and pronotum of Pietinellus papuasicus 1. sp.
Fig. 18. Termination of abdomen of Pietinellus papuasicus n. sp.
Fig. 14. Head and pronotum of Piefinellus feat n. sp.
Fig. 15. Termination of abdomen of Pictinellus Teai n, sp.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 537

)

2,
of]
ete
a}

of i
eh Mees

538 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Total length, 3.88 mm.; width of pronotum, 1,12 mm.; width of
abdomen, 1.40 mm.

Holotype: %, Fiji, Viti Levu—A. M. Lea ecoll.; deposited in the
South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

?

Paratypes: 4 9, collected with holotype; in the same, and author’s
collection,

This species is dedicated to Mr. A. M. Lea, who collected so many
new species represented in this lot.

4. Pictinellus moturikiensis n. sp.
Nig, 17-18

Female, Elongate, with subparallel sides; finely punctured.

Head slightly shorter than width through the eyes; anterior
process slightly constricted in the middle, dilated and ineised in front,
reaches ? of antennal sezgment I; antenniferous tubercles obliquely
truncate in front. Anterior angles of pronotum produced forward,
acute; lateral borders straight, or barely sinuate. The hody is wider
than in P. fungicola, Spiracles: II lateral and visible from above,
TIT to VI ventral, placed far from the border; VIL sublateral, but not
visible from above; VIII lateral. Paratergites large, rounded, reach-
ing to 4 of a conical, rounded posteriorly segment IX. Hypopygium
of the male small, cordate; paratergites very small, clavate, reaching
to the middle of hypopygium.

Measurements: head almost as loug as width through the eves
(9—18:16, ¢—12:13); proportions of antennal segments, | . IV,
are; 9—8:5:7:7, 7:4.59:7:7; pronotum short and wide (%—13:31,
@—12:27.5); seutellum shorter than basal width (?—15: 17.5,
3 13:15); : ubdomen longer than maximal width ( ?—53:35,
§—44:30); hypopyginm 6:7.5.

Colour: ferrugineous; membrane white, hyaline, rarely slightly
infuscate; tarsi yellow brown.

Total length: ¢—3.92 to 4.00, ¢—3.92 mm.; width of pronotumn:
g—1.24 to 1.26, mm.; width of abdomen: ¢—1.40,
¢—1.20 mm.

Holotype: 2%, Fiji,
South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Allotype: 2, Fiji, Viti Levu
colleetion,

Lea coll.; deposited in the

A. M. Lea eoll.s in the same

Paratypes: 3 2, collected with holotype, and 2 @, collected with
allotvpe; in the same, and author's collection.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 539

Pictivellus moturikiensis n. sp. is related to P. fungicola
(Kirkaldy), 1908, but is slehtly larger, and distinctly wider; lateral
borders of pronotum straight, ov almost straight, and anterior process
of the head relatively shorter,

5. Pictinellus elongatus n. sp.
Fig. 19-20
Female. Elongate, with subparallel sides; granulation distinct.

Head longer than width through the eves; anterior process with
subparallel sides, incised in front, reaching to 2 of antennal seement
T; antenniferous tubercles dentiform, subparallel exteriorly. Anterior
angles of pronetum produced forward, but blunt apically; lateral
horders distinctly sinuate, Segment IX conical, rounded apically;
paratergites large, rounded, reaching almost to the tip of IX.
Hypopygium of the male stnall, cordate; pavatergites clavate, reaching
slightly beyond the middle of hypopygium, Spiracles: IL lateral and
visible from above, IT to VI ventral; VIT sublateral, but not visible
from above; VIL lateral and visible.

Measurements: head: %—15:12, ¢—13:11; proportions of
antennal seginents, T to 1V, are: 9? —8.5:5:10:8, ¢—7.5:5:8:7.5; Beene
tian: 9 —14,5:26, ¢—18:23.5; seutellum: ¢—15:17, ¢—12:13;
abdomen; §—57 32, a 47529; hypopyginm: 6,5 :6.5.

Colour: light ferrugineous; membrane white, hyaline.

Total length: ¢—4.12, ¢—3.5 mm.; width of pronotum: ¢—1.04,
é—0.94 num.; width of abdomen: ?—1,28, ¢—1.16 mm,

Holotype: &, Fiji, Viti Levu—A. M. Lea coll.; deposited in the
South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

*

lllotype: ¢, collected with the holotype; in the same collection.

Paratype: 1%, collected with holo- and allotype; in author's

colleetion,
6. Pictinellus longiceps n. sp.
Fig. 21-22

Female. Elongate ovate, with indistinet, very fine granulation.

Head longer than width through the eyes; anterior process with
parallel sides, barely incised in front, reaches to ‘ of antennal segment
I; antenniferous tubercles dentiform, acute, subparallel exteriorly.
Anterior angles of pronotum produced forward, aeute with blunt

lip; lateral borders almost straight, barely sinuate. Segment IX
rectangular, truncate posteriorly ; paratergites large, tapering and

540 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

rounded, sinuate outside, reaching to the tip of TX. Spiracles: I
lateral and visible from above, ITT to VI ventral; VIL sublateral, but
not Visible from above; VIIT lateral and visible,

Measurements; head, 17:13; proportions of antennal seginents,
I to IV, are: 10:6:12.5:8; pronotum 18:30; scutellum 15:17; abdomen
GS 158.0.

Colour; dark ochraceous; head, antennal segment I, pronotum,
with exception of lateral borders, scutellum, and corium, infuscate ;
antennal segments Bin to IV pale testaceous; connexivum ochraceous.

Total length, 4.72 mm.; width of pronotwum, 1.20 mm.; width of
abdomen, 1.54 mim.

Holotype: 2%, Fiji, Viti Levu—aA. M, Lea coll,; deposited in the
South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Pictinellus longiceps n. sp. is related to P. elongatus no sp., both
forming together a separate group with a long head; their differences
are indicated in the key.

7. Pictinellus malayensis n. sp.
Fig. 25-25

Female. HMlongate, with parallel sides, roughly granulate.

Head as long as, or slightly shorter than width through the eyes;
anterior process thin, with parallel sides, slightly incised in front,
reaching slightly beyond the middle of antennal segment I; anten-
niferous tubercles small, dentiform, exteriorly parallel, or slightly
divaricating. Anterior angles of pronotum slightly expanded, rounded:
lateral borders parallel at humeri, very slightly sinuate in front.
Segment IX tr anezoidal tricuspidate, apically ; paratergites short,
rounded, reaching to | of IX. Hypopygium of the male large, conical,
inflated on the dise; paratergites very small, clavate, nesicli to £ of
hypopygium, Spiracles: JT lateral and visible from above, ITl to VI
ventral; VIL sublateral, but not visible from above; VIII lateral and
visible.

Measurements: head: %—15:16, ¢@—15:15; proportions of
antennal segments, | to IV, are: 2—7:6:7.5:7.5, ¢—7:4.5:-:- (two
apical segments missing); pronotum: ?—16:35, ¢—15:32; sentellum:
9—16:17, 4—15:15; abdomen: 9—66:58, ¢—62:36; hypopygium;
14:14,

Colour: dark ferrugineous; connexivum pale ferrngineous; mem-
brane infuseate, white at the base; tarsi vellow.

Total length: ¢—4.64, 4—4.40 mm.; width of Seed tire: 2 —1.40,
#—1.30 mm.; width of abdomen : 91.53 2, ¢—1.44 mm.

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 541

Holotype: ¢, Malay Peninsula, Gap (Fraser Tlill)—A. M, Lea
and wife coll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.
Allotype: 3, collected with holotype; in the same collection,

Paratypes: 3 2%, collected with holo- and allotype; in the same,
and author’s collection,

Pictinellus malayensis n. sp. differs from the other species by
having rounded anterior angles to the prenotum, which are barely
produced beyond the fore border of the collar.

Gen. Glochocoris Usinger and Matsuda, 1959
Glochocoris is a small genus, related to Pictinellus, and distributed
in the Oriental Region, Micronesia, New Guinea, and Australia; one
species has been recorded as far w est as the Seychelles,
Glochocoris monteithi Kormilev
Glochocoris montetthi Kormiley, 1967, Proc. R. Soe. ae 79: 77.
2 9, Queensland, Mt. Te

Gen. Arictus Stal, 1865
Arictus is distributed in the Oriental Region, Micronesia, New
Caledonia, New a and Australia,
. Arictus izzardi (Kormilev)
Mezira tzzardi fakiter 1955, Rev, Heuatoriana Mint. Par., 2: 508.
dArictus izzardi Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae, p. 314.
1 4, Fiji, Viti Leyu—aA. M. Lea coll.
2. Arictus beta (Kormilev)
Mezira beta Wormiley, 1955, Rey. Heuatoriana Mint. Par., 2: 501.
Arictus beta Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae, p. 314.
1 4, New Guinea, Finseh Haven, Wareo—Rey. L, Wagner coll.
3. Ariectus lobuliventris (Kormiley)
Mezira lobuliventris Kormiley, 19538, Verh. Naturt. Ges., Basel, 64: 340.
Arictus lobuliventris Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class. Aradidae,
p. 314,
4 6 and 6 ¢, from New Guinea (Mt. Lamington; Finseh Haven,
Wareco; Torricelli Mts.; Mt. Gyrifrie, and Misima Island).
4. Arictus thoracoceras (Montrouzier)

Aradus thoracoceras Montrouzier, 1855, Ann. Soe. Phys., Lyon, (2)
7; 107,

542 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Arietus thoracoceras Stal, Ofv. Sv. Vet. Ak. Forh., 27: 672.
Brachyrhynchus thoracoceras Bergroth, 1886, Verh, Bot. Zool. Ges.,
Wien, 36: 59,
Mezira thoracocera Kormileyv, 1953, Verh. Naturf. Ges., Basel, 64: 340.
Arictus thoracoceras Usinger and Matsnda, 1959, Class. Aradidae,
p. 314.
1h ¢ aud 12 9, from New Guinea (Torricelli Mts.; Mt. Gyrifrie;
Port Moresby; Finsch Haven, Wareo; Mt. Lamington, and Misima 1[.).

5. Arictus monteithi Kormilev
Arictus monteithi Kormilev, 1965, Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, 77: 32.
10 ¢ and 9 ¢@, Australia, Northern Territory, Queensland, and
N.S.W. (Bathurst 1; Port Darwin; Howard R.: Bluff R.; Mackay;

Groote Hyland; Magnetie [.; Bowen; Cairns Distr. and Dorrigo).
It is common in Queensland and the Northern Territory.

Gen. Mezira Amyot and Serville, 1843

A cosmopolitan genus, distributed all over the world, with the
exception of the colder areas. In Europe and Siberia it is rather rare.

1. Mezira australis (Walker)
Crimia australis Walker, 1873, Cat. Hem, Het. Brit. Mus., 7: 22.
Brachyrhynchus australis Distant, 1902, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., (7) 9:
560.

Mezira australis Usinger and Matsuda, 1959, Class Aradidae, p. 379.

This species is distributed from the Northern Territory to South
Australia, but I have never seen it in large series.

3 ¢ and 2 9, Northern Territory, Stapleton—G. FY. Till coll;
4 4 and 1 9, Northern Territory—Tepper coll.; 1%, Queensland,
Bowen—A. Simson coll.; 1. 9, N.S.W., Mnllaley—F. EK. Wilson coll.;
1 3 and1 2, N.S.W., Gunnedah—F. I. Wilson eoll.; 4 4,1 ¢ and
7 nymphs, South Australia, Melrose—A. M. Lea coll.; 2 2, South
Australia, Mt. Remarkable—?F’. KE, Wilson coll.; 2 @, South Austraha,
Flinders Range, Parachilna—H. Hale coll,

2. Mezira wilsoni n. sp.

Male. Closely related to Megira australis (Walker), 1875, and
probably frequently confused with it in the past. The main difference
is in the pronotnm: in M. australis the antero-lateral angles are only
slightly expanded, rounded, but do not reach to the fore border of
the rather well developed collar; the four (2 + 2) longitudinal ridges

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 543

of the fore lobe are less developed, all four are the same height, In
M, wilsont n, sp. the antero-lateral angles ave also rounded, but.
produced forward beyond the collar; the inner pair of the four ridges
are much higher, and superimposed slightly over the collar. The other
characters are as in Mezira australis (Walker).

Measurements: head shorter than width through the eves

(¢—26:30, 9@—27:32), or aeross postocular tubercles ( ¢—26:33,
? —27:34). Proportions of antennal segments, I to TV, are:

§—10:11:15:12.5, 2—10:10:15:12, Pronotum less than half as long
is maximal width (¢—35:73, ¢—86:76); seutellum shorter than basal
width (¢—31:40, 9—34:40); abdomen longer than maximal width
across segment TV ( 3—95:90, 2—103:100). Spiracles all ventral,
placed lar from the border,

Colour; wnitormly black; rostrum and tarsi yellow brown.

Total longth: ¢—7.52, 2—8.40 nm.; width of pronotum: ¢—2.92,
9 —3,04 mm.; width of abdomen: ¢—3.60, ?—4.00 mm.

Holatype: 4, Australia, Vietoria, Lorne—F. EK. Wilson coll.
27,X.18; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Allotype; %, New South Wales, Jindabime—F. KE. Wilson coll.
26 Feb, 62; deposited in the same museum,

Paratypes: 1 é@ and 2 %, collected with allotype; in the same,
and author's collection.

Hi is a pleasure to dedicate this species to ils collector, Mr,
Ko, Wilson,

3, Mezira elegans n. sp.

At first sight this new species looks more like a Neotropical
Mezira than an Australian species, however the hind border of
pronotum is more deeply sinnate than in the Neotropical species.

Female, Hlongate, slightly widening posteriorad; lateral borders
oF pronotum and abdomen finely serrate,

Head shorter than width through the eyes (18:22.5), or seross
postoenlar tubercles (14:24). Anterior process tapering forward (the
apex is slightly mutilated) reaching over the middle of antennal
segment T: antenniferous tubercles dentiform, acute, with parallel
exterior borders, and slightly divergent tips, reaching to 4 of antennal
segment t. Myes semiglobose, protruding. Postoeular tubercles denti-
form, distinetly produced beyond outer border of eyes; infraocular
ciurinae low, granulate, vertex roughly eranulate; mesad of eves ara
placed two (1 + 1) ovate callosities. Antennae robust; antennal
segment [strongly dilated toward the tip; TI tapering toward the

544 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

hase, Other missing; proportions, [to IL, are: 8:9:-:. Rostrum does
not reach to the base of a deep rostral greove; the latter is open
posteriorly,

Pronotum half as long as maximal width (22:44). Collar distinct,
slightly sinuate in front; antero-lateral angles slightly expanded,
rounded, produced as far as collar; lateral borders slightly convex;
lateral noteh absent; hind border deeply sinuate in the middle, convex
laterally. Fore dise with four (2 + 2) low, oblique ridges; depressed
between them. Hind dise evenly granulate; granulation setigerous,
selue very fine and very short.

Seutellum shorter than basal width (22:25); all borders finely
earinate; lateral borders straight, slightly sinuate near the tip; the
latter incised, Dise flat, finely transversely rugose; median carina
thin and low.

Hemelytra reach to 4 of tergum V1; corinm reaches almost fo
posterior border of connexivum LL; basolateral border rarinale,
straight; apical border straight, not sinuate interiorly, and carinate ;
apical angle acute; membrane finely granulate.

Abdomen longer than maximal width across segment PV (81:9) ;
lateral borders evenly rounded; midlateral area half as wide as
counexivum; connexiva longer than wide, flat, dises roughish; exterior
borders of connexiva finely serrate; PE-angles not protruding; PH-VIT
rounded. Paratergites large, rounded, divergent, reaching to } of
IX: the latter tricuspidate, but valves slightly longer than oviduct.
All spiracles ventral, placed far from the border.

Legs unarmed.

Colour: dark ferrugineous; connexivum bicolorous; light ferru-
gineous inside, in sharp contrast, dark ferrugineous at exterior border.
Rostrum and tarsi light ferrngineous. Venter pale ferrngineous;
eenital segments and exterior borders dark ferrugineous.

Total length, 5.80 mm.; width of pronotum, 1.76 mm.; width of
ahdemen, 2.20 mm,

Fig. 16. Head and pronotum of drtabanus mefarlandi n. ap.

Vig. 17. Head and pronotum of Pictinellus moturikiensis a. sp.
Fig. 18. Tormination of abdomen of Pictinellus moturikiensis ne +).
Fig. 19. Head and pronotum of Pretinetlus elongatus 1. sp.

Fig. 20. Termination of abdomen of Pictinellus clongatus n. sp.
Fig. 21. Head and pronotum of Pictinellus longieeps n. sp.

Wig. 22. Termination of abdomen of Pictinellus longiceps n. sp.
Fig. 28. Ulead and pronotum of Pictinellus mealayecnsis u. sp,

Fig. 24. Termination of abdomen of Pictinellus malayensis n. sp. Female.
Fig. 25. Terviination of abdomen of Pietinellnus molayensis n. sp.
Vig. 26, Head and pronotum of Mesira enigmatica n. sp,

Pig, 27. Termination of abdomen of Merira enigmatica n, spy

KORMILEV-—AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE

545

546 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Holotype: °, Australia, New South Wales, Dorrigo—W. Heron
eoll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Mezira elegans n. sp. is quite distinct from all other Australian
species of Mezwra,

4. Mezira suleata Kormiley
Mezira suleata Kormilev, 1958, Jour. N.Y. Ent, Soe., 66: 91.
This curious species is pretty common in Queensland.
2 9, Queensland, Kuranda—F. P. Dodd coll.; 11 2 and 11 &,
Queensland, Cairns Distr—A. M. Lea coll.; 4 ¢ and 6 2, Queensland,
Cairns Distr.—K, Allen coll.

5. Mezira subtriangula Kormilev
Mezira subtriangula Kormiley, 1957, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (12) 10: 269,

Numerous specimens from N, New Guinea and Papua, and also
from Bougainville, Solomon Islands,

6. Mezira membranacea Fabricius
Aradus membranaceus Fabricius, 1803, Syst. Rhyng., p. 118.
Brachyrhynchus membranacens Stal, 1868, Hem, Fabr., 1: 96.
Mezira membranacea Kormiley, 1953, Verh. Naturt, Ges., Basel, 64:
333.

Widely distributed in the Oriental Region, penetrating into New
Guinea, Recently it has been found in Hawaii (imported). This
species breaks up into varions geographical subspecies, one of which
is M. micronesica Wsaki and Matsuda, 1951, from Micronesia. Though
specimens from Micronesia show some small differences to the nymo-
typic form of W. membranacea, including the parameres, saarp limits
between them are impossible to determine.

In this lot were numerous specimens from New Guinea, New
Britain, Solomon Islands, and Fiji, Viti Levu, which I refer to
M, membranacea micronesica Esaki and Matsuda, rather than to
M, membranacea,

Notr.—Recently Bléte published a Catalogue of the Aradidae in
the Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke Historia in Leiden (1965; 1-41) in
whieh he put Daulocoris auritomentosa (Kormilev 1955), into the
synonymy of Daulocoris feanus (Bergroth 1889), With this [ eannot
concur, because they are certainly two different species, and easy to
distinguish: in D, feawys the anterior process of the head only reaches
to the tip of antennal segment I; the antero-lateral angles of the
pronotum have expanded lateral borders placed more longitudinally,

KORMILEV--AUST, AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 547

and the postocular tubercles direeted slightly forward, In
D. auritomentosa the anterior process of ihe head is distinetly produced
beyond the tip of antennal segment 1; the lateral borders of the
anterolateral angles of the pronotum are placed more obliquely, ana
the postocular tubercles are directed sideways,

7, Mezira enigmatica n. sp.
Fig. 26-27.

This species stands apart from all other species of the genus,
purticnlarly in its angular postoeular borders, practically without
tubercles; by its sinuate lateral borders of the abdomen, whieh diverge
posteriorly; all of which are more indicative of the genus Ariefus
Stal, than of Mezira AWS., and by spiracles VIL being ventro-lateral
in position, and clearly visible from above. But the general aspect of
the body is that of Mezira, and this is where Lam putting it tentatively,
if least until a general revision of the genus.

Female, Blongate ovate, widening posteriorly; evenly covered
with fine, black inernstation, looking like dirt, throngh which pass
Inieroscopical, erect, white hairs; under this inerustation the hody is
black and shiny,

Head longer than width through the eves (36:33). Anterior
process long, constricted in the middle, and narrowly incised in front,
produced far beyond the tip of antennal segment [. Antenniferous
tubercles (lentiform, acute, slightly divaricating, reaching to 2 of
antennal segment [. Myes semiglobose, protruding, Postocular
borders angular and not reaching to outer barder of eyes; infraoeular
carina very low, practically absent; vertex with ‘*V'shaped granulate
earinae, obliterated by incrustation. Antennue st rong, more than one
and a half times as long as the head (59:36); antennal seement |
clavate, slightly eurved sideways; 11 and II tapering toward the
hase TV fusiform. Proportions of antennal segments, I to 1 Vy are;
14:14:17:14. Rostrum reaches to fore border of prosternum; rostral
atrium narrowly open: rostral groove wide and deep, transversely
rugose, and open posteriorly,

Provotum shorter than maximal width (34:75), divided into two
lobes by a deep furrow; lore lobe much narrower than hind lobe
(52:75). Collar fine, sinuate in front: antero-lateral angles slightly
expanded, rounded, produced anteriorly as far as collar. Lateral
horders slightly converging posteriorly, strongly converging and
slightly sinuate anteriorly, Hind border widely sinuate in the middle,
and then again shehtly sinuate mesad of romnded posterior angles.

348 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fore dise with two (1 + 1) high, rounded elevations, and a depression
between them; two (1 + 1) smaller longitudinal ridges placed laterally
near lateral borders. Hind dise granulate.

Seutellum shorter than basal width (35:45); all borders carinate ;
lateral borders straight, tip rounded; dise granulate, with cross-shaped
mecian carina,

Hemelytra reach almost to hind border of tergum V1; baso-lateral
border of corium carinate, and slightly sinuate; apical angle acute;
apical border twice shallowly simate. Membrane with anastomosing
veins,

Abdomen slightly shorter than width across segment V (95 98).
Lateral borders divergent, and slightly convex from II to V; slightly
receding at VI; strongly receding, and sinuate at VII. PE-angles
from I to V progressively protruding, rounded; PE-VI form a right
angele with a rounded tip; PE-VIT form a subtriangular lobe, directed
backward; its rounded tip is produced beyond the tips of paratergites.
Paratergites triangular, produced us far as LX; the latter trapezoidal,
truneate posteriorly. Spiracles IL to VI ventral, placed far from
the border; VII ventro-lateral, clearly visible from above; VIIL
terminal,

Metathoracie gland openings short, and wide open, almost reach-
ing the lateral border, Sternum VI widely sinnate posteriorly; sterna
Ill to V with a triangular, VI with an ovate, callous spot medially,

Legs wnarmed; trochanters free; thin, seta-like arolia are present.

Colour: black: rostrum, trochanters, callous spots on venter, tarsl,
and apical half of antennal segment [V, red brown.

Total length, $12 mm.; width of pronotum, 3.00 mm.; width of
abdomen, 3.82 mi,

Holotype: @, New Guinea, N.B. Papua, Mt, Lamington—C. T.
7T i U . . “a ! . y *
McNamara coll.; deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

REFERENCES
Bitte, HL. ., 1965: Catalogue of the Aradidae in the Rijksmmseon van Natuurlijke Historie,
Zool. Verh.; No. 75, pp. 1-41, 37 figs.
Usinger, R. L. amd Matsuda, R., 1959: Classification of the Aradidae, British Museum (N.AT.),
London; 410-VIL yp. 101 figs.

RESUMEN ESPANOL
En Ja segunda parte de los Aradidos del Museo. de Australia del Sur, en Adelaide, el autor
ha tratado la subfamilia Mezirinae Oshanin, 1908. Tres géneros y dievinueve espécies resullaron
ser nuevos para la ciencia y han sido deseritos en este trabajo. De un interés particular os
un género nueva termitéfilo de Australia Occidental, Hamado Aspisovoris termitaphilis
Th fy Te SPs

KORMILEV—AUST. AND PACIFIC ARADIDAE 549

APPENDIX—TYPE REGISTRATIONS

Dune to an oversight when the first part of Mr. Kormilev’s paper
was published, the registration numbers being placed on the new type
material were omitted from the text.

To maintain the same format registration numbers have similarly
been omitted from this, the second and last part of Mr. Kormilev’s
present studies,

The registration numbers for the type material of both papers
are given below.

Registration

Species. Status. Number(s).
dlradus erraticus WKormiley .. .. .. .. Holotype 1 20,280
Arwlus fuscicornis Kormiley . .. .. .. Holotype T 20,281
Allotype T 20,282
Paratypes I 20,283-20,290
Calisius grossi WKormilev . .. .. .. .. Holotype I 20,291
Calisius leai Kormiley. .. .. .. .. .. Holotype T 20,292
Calising magdalenae Kormilev .. .. .. Holotype 1 20,293
Allotype T 20,294
Paratype T 20,295
Calisius notabilis Kormiley .... .. .. Tolotype T 20,296
Calisius septimus Kormilev .. .. .. Holotype T 20,297
Carventus brachypterus Kormilev . .. Holotype IT 20,298
Carventus malayensis Kormilev . .. .. Tlolotype T 20,299
Carventus ovatus Kormilev .. .. .. .. Holotype T 20,300
Paratype T 20,301
Carventus robustus Kormilev .. .. .. Holotype I 20,302
Allotype T 20,308
Paratypes — I 20,804-20,312
Acaraptera dimorpha Wormiley . .- .. Holotype T 20,3813
Allotype I 20,514
Acaraptera minuta Kormiley ... .. .. Holotype I 20,815
Paratypes I 20,816-7

Acaraptera (Lissaptera) denticeps

Kormiley .. 0... 1. .. +. Holotype I 20,318
Mastigocoris malayensis ‘Kornilev ... Holotype 1 20,319
Allotype T 20,320

Paratypes I 20,321-20,331
Aspisocoris termitophilus Kormilev .. Holotype T 20,332
Allotype T 20,333

Paratypes 1 20,334-20,340

550 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Species.

Artabanellus menamarai Kormilev .

Argocoris grossi Kormilev ..

Aegisocoris granulatus Kormiley ..
Neophloeobia tuberculata Kormilev . . -

Artabanus bilobiceps papuasicus
Kormilev ..

Artabanus truncatus Kormiley .. .. -.
Artabanus tuberculatus Kormilev .. ..
Artabanus mcfarlandi Kormilev . -. ..

Clenoneurus aberrans Kormilev ... ..
Pictinellus papuasicus Kormilev . .. -.
Pictinellus leat Kormiley .. .. -. 2...

Pictinellus moturikiensis Kormilev .
Pictinellus elongatus Kormilev .. .
Pictinellus longiceps Kormiley .. .. ..
Pictinellus malayensis Wormiley ... ..

Mezira wilsonit Kormilev .. 2. 2. 2...

Mezira elegans Kormilev .. .. .. 6...

Mezira eniqmatica Kormileyv . ..

Status.

ILolotype
Holotype
Holotype
Tolotype

Holotype
Allotype
Paratypes
Holotype
Holotype
Holotype
Allotype
Paratypes
Holotype
Holotype
Holotype
Paratypes
Holotype
Allotype
Paratypes
Holotype
Allotype
Holotype
Holotype
Allotype
Paratypes
Holotype
Allotype
Paratype
Holotype
Holotype

Registration

Number(s),

I

Se eS

ee ee oe ee oe oe ee ee

20,341
20,342
20,343
90,344

20,357
20,358
2,359-20,360
20,361
20,362
20,363
20,364
90,365-20,371
90,372
20,373
20,374
20,375-7
20,378
20,379
20,380-2
20,383
20,384
20,385
20,386
90,387
90,388-9
20,390
20,391
90,392
20,393
90,394

G. F. G.

CORRECTIONS IN THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF CERTAIN TAXA OF
THE CHALCINOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOIDEA (s.1)*,
WITH NOTES ON SYNONOMY

BY PAUL DESSART, BRUXELLES

Summary

The author describes the taxonomic confusion that has existed in the Proctotrupoidea and
Chalcidoidea (Hymenoptera) and cites examples of species first described as Chalcidoidea and later
transferred to Proctotrupoidea, and visa versa. The author makes the following dispositions and
synonymies: (i) Agonophorus Dahlbohm 1858 is synonymised with Ismarus Haliday 1835
(Proctotrupoidea-Diapriidae-Belytinae). (11) Pseudoceraphron pulex Dodd 1924 is transferred from
Proctotrupoidea-Ceraphronidae-Megaspilinae to Chalcidoidea-Pteromalidae-Diparinae. (ii1) the new
specific name melantatocephalus is proposed for Ceraphron melanocephalus Ashnead 1886, non
Boheman 1832.

CORRECTIONS IN THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF CERTAIN
TAXA OF THE CHALCIDOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOIDEA
(s..)*, WITH NOTES ON SYNONYMY

By PAUL DESSART, Bruxenues

SUMMARY

The author deseribes the taxonomic confusion that has existed in
the Proetotrupoidea and Chaleidoidea (Hymenoptera) and cites
examples of species first described as Chalcidoidea and later trans-
ferred to Proctotrnpoidea, and vice versa. The author makes the
following new dispositions and synonyinies: (i) Agonophorus
Dahlbohin 1858 is synonymised with Jsmarus Haliday 1835 (Proecto-
trupoidea-Diapriidae-Belytinae). (ii) Pseudoceraphron pulex Dodd
1924 is transferred from Proctotrupoidea-Ceraphronidae-Megaspilinae
to Chaleidoidea~-Pteromalidae-Diparinae. (iii) The new specific name
melantatocephalus is proposed for Ceraphron melanoce phalus Ashmead

peyey

1886, non Boheman 1832.

INTRODUCTION

In the past many species, and even genera, of Microhymenoptera
have been shifted from the family or even superfamily in which they
were originally described to another, Between the Chaleidoidea and
Proctotrupoidea particularly there has been a considerable two way
trafic.

The changes are especially common in the last century, or for
species deseribed in the last century, Then, or at least in the earlier
half of the century, the systematies of the higher taxa of the
Microhymenoptera was, to say the least, rudimentary and the super-
fainiles Ichneumonoidea, Cynipoidea, Chalcidoidea, and Proctotru-
poidea not clearly defined, or even erected,

Some examples worth mentioning in order to further elarify the
position are condensed in the following paragraphs.

Cupidosoma melanocephalum Ashmead 1886 was deseribed as a
Pleromalid (Chaleidoidea), In 1893 Ashmead himself decided it was
in fact a species of Ceraphron (Proctotrupoidea-Ceraphronidae).

“Tn the present note the Ceraphronidae are still considered a family of Proctotrupoidea.
After this paper was submitted for publication, Dr, Masner and myself (see Masner, Lubomir
tind Dessart, Pant) have come to the conclusion that the Ceraphronidae are not related to the
Proctotrupoidea but worthy of full superfamily status.

552 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

However the name melanocephalum in Ceraphron is: preoeeupied by
méelanocephalus Boheman 1832, Accordingly Tam proposing the new
nae Ceraphron melantatocephalus nom. nov, lor Ceraphron melano
cephalus (Ashmead 1886) non Boheman 1832.

Chirocerus floridanus Ashmead 1881, described as a Pteromalid
also ig a Ceraphronid and belongs to the genus Lygocerits (fide
Cresson 1887).

Elaptus (laps, calami for Alaptis) alevrodis Forbes 188+ (or
1885?) and Anaphes mellicormis Ashmead 1887 are not Mymarids but
are both junior synonyms of Ametus aleurodinis Haldeman 1800
(Platygasteridac) according to Ashmead 1893 and Gahan 1927.

Paphagus rugosus Provatcher 1881 is not a Pieromalid but is a
species of Stictoteleia (fide Burks in Krombein 1958) and. similarly
Sphalungia aenea Provancher 1887 is a species of Trimorus (fide Burks
loc. cit.), both genera of Scelionidae,

‘The specimens apparently misidentified as Pteromalus aculorum
by Boyer de Fonseolombe (1832, p, 805) have been variously inter-
preted by subsequent authors. In the Addenda (p. 482) to his classic
work on the Microhymenoptera Nees (1834) placed them into the
new genus Myina which he had erected earlier (p. 189) in this same
work. Dalle Torre (1898) in his Catalogus Hymenopterorum cited
them in three different places under three different names ;—On page
264 as a possible synonym of Hacyrins tardits Ratzeburge 1444, on page
426 as a synonym of Polynema ovulorwm Linné 1758, whilst on page
AIS their reference by Nees as Myina ovulorum is erroneously trans-
serihbed Mymar ovnlorum which is given as a synonym of Telenomus
orvnlorum. Bouché 1884, Schmiedekneeht (1926) chose Polynema
opulornm trom the three alternatives presented by Dalle Torre,
however in the same year (1926) Kieffer cited ‘* Mymar O. Noes, 1834,
p. 4827" (Le, Mayme or Pteromalus ovulorian FPonscolombe) as a
possible synonym of Telenomus terebrans (Ratzeburg 1834) a blackish
Seelionid (Monsecolombe actually described his species as ‘@eneus’’).

Diapria coviea (Rabricius 1775) a Diapriid has been suecessively
ealled Ichnenmon conicus (Kabricius in 1775), Cynips erassipes
(Koureroy in 1785), ?Cymipsichnewmon conicus (Christ in 1791) and
Chalcis conica (Fabricins in 1798).

Schulz (1910) redegevibed what he took to be a Jatus cynipseus
Hnliday 1883, a Mymarid, whereas he actually had the Seelionid
Tiphodytes gerriphagus (Marchal 1900) before him (fide Debauche
1948),

DESSART—CHALCIDOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOLDEA 553

In Ashmead’s monograph of Chaleids (1904) he moved into the
Proctotiupids the genera Agonophorus Dalmnan (actually Dahlbom
1868), Macrastigna Rondani i877, and Trichacis Provancher 1887
(p. 207) (aetually Provaneher’s genus was called T'richasins and the
paige reference is wrong, it is actually p. 209; Trichacis is a Forster
genus of 1806). Ashmead placed Trichasius Provancher as a synonym
al Baeus Ualiday 18388 (Proetotrapoidea-Scelionidae). Brues four
years later (1908, . 25) on the contrary considered Trichasins to be
aosynonyin ol Gryan Haliday 1833, another Seelionid genus he knew
through Ashmead’s earlier monograph of 1898. But on the eve of
publication he discovered {hat Kieffer only a few months before had
demonstrated that Ashmead has misinterpreted Gryon and had there-
fore erected the new genus Paragryon for frryou sensu Ashmead non
Halilay 1883 nee Pérster 1856, Brues mentioned this point in the
Appendix 19 his 1908 work (p. 49), Subsequently (1910) Kieffer in
urn published a set of Addenda et Corrigenda to Brues’ work in
Which ho moved Trighasius Proyvancher buek into the synonymy of
Boeus Waliday and reaffirmed his opinion in his posthumous 1926
monograph (where it is misspelt Tricharivs). The further resolution
OY iis status did not come until Muesehbeek (1956) @xamined
Provancher’s type and found that it belongs to Kieffer’s taxon
Paragryon whieh becomes then the junior synonym of Tpehasius
Provancher 1887. Macrostiqma Ronudani 1877 was synonvmiazed with
Megastiqmus Dalman (actually this is an error, which Ashmead
corrected himself, for Megaspilus Westwood 1829). 1 re-examined
One syttype and found that it belones instead in the synonymy of
Lyugocerus Forster 1856 (Dessart 1966). Ashmead was not precise in
placing Lgenophorus Dahlbom 1858 in any particalar position in the
'Proctotrypoidea’’, Reeently on a visit to the Kntomologiska
Institutionen of Lund University T was fortunate to find amongst the
hoxes of Dahthom’s nnelassified material one specimen bearing the
lihel Agonophorus and agreeing with the origiual brief deseription
Daltbom gave for the genus, My examination of this type showed
Clearly that Agonophorus Dahtbon 1858 is a straight junior synonym
oF Tsmarus UWaliday 1835 (Proctotrupoidea-Diapriidac-Belytinae)
(syn, nor.),

As examples of transfers in the opposite direction, from the
Proetotrupoidea to the Chaleidoidea, we may tale the following eases,

Ceraphron destructoy Say (S17 is not a Ceraphronidae, but a
Chaleid and now placed in the wenus Merisns Walker 1824
(Pieromalidae) (Peck 1963), though according to Gaban (1983) the
original series (which has been lost) must bave ineluded also a few

554 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

specimens of Hupteromalus fuliipes Forbes 1889 (now ff. subuplerus
Riley 1885, non fulvipes Walker 1836),

Psilus ciliatus Say 1888, snecessively placed in other genera of
Diapriidae (Galesus, Diapria, Trichopria) is wow considered a species
of Polynema (Mymiuridae ).

Platygastey lecant Piteh 1858 [1859] is not a Vlatygusteridae
hut a misidentification of Coecophagus lycinmnia (Walker 1859)
(Aphelinidae) (Peek 1963).

Serlion (1) lerminalis Say 1828 (who meant Seelio) does not
helove to the Seelionidae at all but to the genus Homalotylus Maye
1875 (Mneyrtidae).

Ceoraphron syrphii Bouché 1834 was erroneously transferred by
Nees (1884) to the genns Mupelmus Dalman 1820; it was later returned
to the Ceraphronidac and passed throngh various genera: Megaspilus
Westwood 1829, then Trichosteresis Wérster 1856 (fide Kieffer 1914).
Diupria cecidomyiarum Bouché 1834 is not a Diapriid but probably
a species of Kulophus Geotlroy 1762 (fide Dalla Torre 1898) or of
Tetrastichus Haliday 1848 (fide Sehmiedeknecht 1909),

The genus Trimicrops Kieffer 1906, originally dleseribed us a
Coraplronid, was reeognized later by Ferriére (in Beier 1980; see also
Masner 1957, p. 83, Dessart 1962, p. 305) as a Chaleidoid (Pteromalidae-
Diparinae). The drawing published by Forriére (1980, p. 402, fig. 41)
leaves no doubt on the matter; the antenna is formed of a scape, the
pedicel, three annuli, five funicular segments and a composite elib in
which from the two sutures one may deduce that it is formed of three
seoments, ie, 13 segments in all (although in fig. 3 of the same note,
there are only two annuli left and thus, 12 segments), * Sensorial
crests” (sensu Debauche, 1948, pp. 25 ef seq.) are present on all
funieuiar and elub seginents, Kieffer (1906, 1907, and 1909) deseribed
the antenna as ten segmented, whieh prompted him to place the
vents in the Ceraphroninae (in the present sense of the term), at least
by implication and based on where he places it among the other genera
| Kieffer in these three publications, did not accept the subdivision
proposed by Ashmead (1898) |. His error in the count of the antennal
seements came about for two reasons: he confused on the one hand
the two first annuli, and on the other hand the three club segments,
as is clearly shown in the drawing published in the three works etted
above. But it is surprising that in his monograph of 1914, next to two
drawings (fig. 63 and 67) showing respectively the appearance of
the insect from above, and the head in profile (both with #en-segmented
antennae), another figure (fig. 66) shows a whole, clecen-seemented
amenna, with the first two annuli clearly distinct, This drawing was

DESSART—CHALCIDOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOIDEA 555

Figs. 1-4. Pseudoceraphron pulex Dodd 1924, after the holotype. 1. Habitus, lateral view.
2, Head, frontal view. 3. Antenna; total length of the scape: 150u, of the club: 138,
4, Habitus, dorsal view; maximum width of the metasoma: 430,,

eG

556 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

probably made by an usher or a pupil of the college of Bitehe where
Kieffer tanght. Whenever he noticed an error of his own making
Kieffer as a role apparently discreetly corrected it (fide Dessart, 1963,
p10), As he said nothing about this discrepancy before he died 11
years later (1924, Dee, 80th) we may deduce that Kieffer did nol
notices this important point, Tf he bad he could not have done other
than to transfer (he genus to the Mewasilinae, beeause from 1914
onwards he had at last aeeepted that the Ceraphronidae should be
divided into two subfamilies,

The history of the preceding case las been developed on purpose,
for T lwve just found a similar one. Thanks to the courtesy of Mr,
CG. ff. Gross of the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, T have had
the opportumty to examine the monotype of Pseudoceraphron pulex
Dodd W924 The slideanounted antenna which TT first received,
eorvineed me immediately that the genus could by no means be
uw Ceraphronid but a Chaleoid, probably best placed in the
Ptevomalidae-Diparinae, according to the original deseription, The
examination of the remainder of the type has confirmed my opinion.
The antenna (fig. 8) is formed not of 11 joints but of a seape, pedicel,
three annuli, five funienlar segments, and a composite eluh, apparently
of hwo segments (for only one transverse snoture ean be detected)
but really of three segments if one aceepts each of the three rows of
sensorial crests as representing a segment, This would make the
antennae 13 seemented. Although to all extents and purposes entirely
correel, just reading the original description without at the same time
secing a specimen one tends not to realize the extreme oddness of this
species (fig, 1,2 and 4), [ft will he noticed, among other things, that
the posterior margin of the eyes nearly reaches the level of the base
of the metasoma; the pronotum is entirely hidden by the very concave
posterior faee of the head, the fore coxae are quite near the very small
tnonth parts; the hind coxae are completely flattened and articulated
initich Higher than the middle and fore ones; the posterior part of the
inesosOma is therefore very redueed; just behind the knees the tibiae
bear two dorsal bifid, thickset spurs; (he ventral surfaces of the hind
fomora are shortly spinulose; the fore legs, deseribed as ‘somewhat
swollen’, with a ‘long, curved, simple apical spur’? at the tibiae, are
unfortunately lost; the median ocellus is qnite flat and broader than
the lateral ones which may not be functional,

Despite these very [lat hind eoxae, whieh are much larger than the
fore ones (characters which are more characteristic of lasmidae,
Torymidae, or Ormyridae), this genus, with its wings apparently
completely absent, its non-anetallie pattern, and big first metasomatic
tergite, seems to be an atypical Dnt true Pteromalidae-Diparinae.

DESSART—CHALCIDOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOIDEA 557

Lam not so well acquainted with the hterature on Chalcidoidea as to
he sure that the genus has not heen deseribed as a synonym elsewhere
and pliced in a more correct taxonomic position by an author not
interested in Proetotrnpoids. In closing, oie may well wonder why
Dodd named the genus Pseudoceraphron, since its appearance does not
in any way resemble the genus Ceraphron and moreover he dil not
even place if im the subfamily Ceraphroninae.

RIBLIOGRAPILY

Ashmead, William TWh: Studies an the North american Chatoidilae, with deveription of new
species from Florida, Trans, mer. ent, Bou, { (1881), pp XXIN-Nxxv; TA
(1886), pp, 125-145,
Stidies of the North-American Proetotyapldae, with descriptions of wen speeies
from Florida, Canad. Ent., 19 (1887), pp. 125-142, 192-198,
———— A Monograph of the North American Proctotrypidee, Ball, U.S, nat Mus,, 45
(1893), 472 pp., 2 figs, 18 pls. 3 pp, refs,

—— — (lussifivation of the Chaleid Flies or the Superfamily Chateidoidea, with descriptions
af now species in the Carnegie Museairm, collested in South cmerica by Herbert
HH, Smith, Mon, Carnegie Mus 1-4 (jan, T9204), pp. ixt, 225-552, pls. 31-89,
11 pp. refs.

Houeh’, PL Mies Neatungeschichte der Insekten, besonders dm Hinsicht ihrer crsten #ustinde

wes Larven und Puppen, Berlin (1884), 216 pp. 1 pls.

Royer De Ponseolombe, Ko Le i. Ws Monographia chaleiditum Callopradineiae circa aquas

sertias degenthom, Ann. Sei, mat. 26 (1882), pp. 274-807,
Brues, Chacha Te: Hymenoptera, Bam, Scetionidee, Gin. lus, 80 (1908), 59 pp. 2 pls.

Burks, B.D. in Krombein, Karl Vii Zymenoptera af America North of Mexico, Synaptic
Cutalng, Hirst sapplenent, U.S. Dept. Agric, Agric, Monogr, 2 (1958), 805 pp.

Christ, 7. Les Naturgeschiohte, Classification wnd Namenclatuy der Lusecten vam Bienen,
Weapon, wid Amevisengeschlecht; . . . Brankfort wm Main (1791), 585 pp,
60 pls.

Uresson, Fl. Tr Synopsis of the Iymenoptera of America North of Menieo, tagether with a
catalogue of the described species, and bibliography. Trans, Amer. ont. Soe.,
suppl vol. (18ST), iv + 350 pp,

Dahthom, AL Gar Svenska Sma-Iehnewmonernay faniljer och aliiqten, Otv. K. Vot-Alcud.
Wirh., 14, 1857 (1858), pp. 289-208,

Dalle Torre, @ G. de (CG. W. vonj: Catalogue Hymenopterernm lreusque deéseriptorwm
systematious et synonymicus, Lipsiae, vol, 4, Chaleldidan et Proetotripidae
(1898), 598 pp.

Dalman, J. We: Pdrsck tilt uppstiltning af dusektfamition Ptoromatini, i synnerhed med
afsoonde pa dea Sverige funne arter. K. Svenska Vet. Acad, 41 (1820), pp.
123-(1749), 340-385, 2 pls,

Debwueho, Habert Robert: &éude sur les Mymarommidac et les Mymaridan da ta Belgique
(Himenoptera Chaleideidea), Mem. Mus. R, Hist, ost, Belgique, 108 (1948),
S48 pp., 10 tigs., 24 pls. (301 figs.).

Deswart, Paul: Contribution @ Uétude des Hyménopteres Proetotrupeidea (1), Nates su
queliynes Coraphronidac africains et tablean dichotomigue des genres, VPeoll. Ann.
Soe, R, Ent, Belgique, 98, no, 17 (aodb 1962), pp. 291-311, 9 fies., 16 refs.

Contribution a@ Tétude des Ceratopogonidae (Diptera) (WIT). Tahloaus dicho-
tumiques ilustrés pour la détermination des Foreipomyia africains. Mém, Inst.
R, Sei. nat. Belgique (20 sér,), 72 (15 aoft 1963), 151 pp. 1 fig, +- 16 pls,
(121 figs.), 96 refs.

———— Contribution a Vélude des Hyménoptércs Proctotrupoidean (IN). Révision du genre
Macrostiama Rondani, 1877 (Ceraphronidar, Mrgaspitinue). Media, 19, 1964-1965
(16 dee. 1965), pp. 157-163, fiys. 11-15, 15 refs.

See also Masner., Lubomir and Dessart, Poul (1967).

S58 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dodd, Alon Pe: Chaleidwdea and Proctotrupoidea from Lord Tlowe and Novfoll: Tslanda, with
deseriptions of new genera and species, Trans. Proc. R. Soe, Bouth Australia,
48 (24 dace, 1924), pp. 162-186.
Fabricius, J. C.: Systema Ratomologtue sistens Insectorwm classes, ordines, genert, HPWChes,
udjectis synonymis, locis, descriptionibus. Tlenshurgi et Lapsiae (1775), [80]
+ 832 pp.
Supplementum Entamologiae systematicae. Watniae (1798), 2 572 pp.
Ferriére, Ch. int Beier, Max: Zoologiache Forschungreise wach den Jonischen Inseln wad dem
Peloponnes, XII, Teil, Hymenoptera parasitica Bearbeitet von Ch. Ferriére.
London, SitzBer, Akad. Wiss. Wien (Math. Nalurw, KL), Abt. T, 189 (1980),
pp. YB406, & figs.
iteh, Asa: Fifth Report on the noriows, beneficial aut other Insects of the State af Now
York Made tu the State Agricultaral Sooiely, pursuant to an approbation for
this purpose from the Legislature af the State, Trans. New York State agrie,
Boe., 1858 [1850], pp. TR1T-S54,
boerster, Aruold: Hymenapterologiselen Studien. V1, Heft. Chaletdiae vid Proctotenpti,
Aachen (185), 1A2 pp
Monseolombes see Boyer De Fonseolomhe,
Forbes, §, A.: (Title unknown). Ann. Rept. Stat. Ent. TW. 1d (1884) [1885], p, 110.
Wirster, Ac: see Foerster,
Poureroy, A. Pre: Entomologia parisiensis, sive catalogus Mnsectorim, qune in agra parisiensi
reperuimtur, . . . Paris (1784), 2 vol. 544 pp.
Gahan, A, B. aud Fayan, Margaret M.: The type species of the genera of the Chaleidoiden
or chaleid-flies, Bull. U.8, nat. Mus., 124 (1923), 178 pp.
Gahan, A.B.; Miscellaneous observations af new parasitic Lymenoptera with some synonyimical
notes. Proe, U.S. nat. Mus., 71, no. 2876 (1927), pp. 1-89, 3 figs., 1 pl.
The serphoid and chaleidoid parasites of the Hessian fly, U8. Dept, Agric, mise,
Publ. 174 (dee. 1938), 148 pp., 32 figs. reds.
Geolfroy, BE, L.; Wistoire abrégée des insectes qui se trouoent awe cnvivons de Paris, dans
laquelle ves animane sont rangés suivant an ordre méthadique. Paris, 2 (1762),
90 pp., pls, 11-22.
Halleman, ® Si: On four new species af Hemiptera of the genera Ploiaria, Chermes, and
Alwnrades; and tira new Hymenoptera paraxitie in the last named genus, Amer,
J. 8ei, (2), 9 (1850), pp. 108-111,
Wtuliday, A. Wee an Kssay on the Classification of the Parasitic Hymenoptera af Britain,
which correspond with the lehnewmones minuti of Linnaeus. Ent. Mug, 1
(183%), pp. 259-276,
——— dddenda vt corvigenda, p. 467, in: Kesey on Parasitic Hymenapterdt (Continied ..).
Of the Lehnewnones Adaeciti, Wat, Mag, 2 (1885), pp. 458-467,
——— Contribution towards the Classification of the Chateldidar, Trans, ent, Soe, London,
4 (1843), pp. 295-301,
Kieffer, de. Deseription de noureaur Tyménopléres, Aun, Soc, sei, Bruxelles, Mém., 10,
1906-1906 (1906), pp. 113-178, 19 fizs,
WNietfer, od, in André; Species des Hyménaptéres d'Rurope et d* Algérie, t+ 10, fe sana
famille, Ceraphroninae (1907), pp. 5-201, pls. 18.
Kieffer, J. Jo: Hévision des Scelionidae (Iyménoptéres). Anw. Boe. sei, Bruxelles, Mam,
82, 1907-1908 (1908), pp, 117-250, 16 figs. 1 pl.
——— Hymenoptera. Fam, Coraphronidas, Qén. Ins, 94 (1909), 27 pp., 2 pls.
Hymenoptera, Fam, Scolionidac, Addenda et carrigenda. Gen. Tns., $0 bis C1910),
pp. 61-112, 1 pl.
Hymenaptera Proctotrupoidea, Serphidae (= Provtotrupiitae) ot Callovratidue
(= Ceraphronidaey, Dax Tierreich, 12 (1914), xvii + 454 pp. 1a figa,,
5 pp. refs,
— (1) Humeneptera Prodtotrupoidea, Seelinnidar, Das Tierreieh, 48 (1926), xxxvi --
ASD pp., 340 figs, @ + 9 pp, mets,
Linné, Carl von.: Systema Naturae . . 2, We 6d. 1 (1758), 828 pp.
Marchal, Po: Sup un nouvel Lyménoptere aquatique, le Limnodytes gerriphagus mn. gen. n. ap.

Ann. Soe. ent. France (se sér.), 69 (1900), pp. 171-376, figs. TI—D-4 af
TL1-LI.3. [

DESSART—CHALCIDOIDEA AND PROCTOTRUPOIDEA 559

Masnor, Lubomir: Bemerkungen cur Gattung Eluseecraphron Szel. (Iyn., Ceraphronoidea),
Nathtrichtenblatt Bayer. Ent., 6 (1957), pp. 81-84, 2 figs., 6 refs.

Masner, Lubomir ot Dessart, Paul: ‘La reclassification des catégories taconomiques supérieure
des Cecaphronoidea’’, Bull. Inst. r, Sei. nat, Belgique, 48 no, 22) (1967),

Mayr, G. Li: Die eurepiiivehen Bneyrtiden, biologisch wad systematisch bearbeitet. Verh,
“ool-bot. Ges, Wien, 25 (1875), pp, 675-778,

Muesebeok, OC. BY Wer New generie synonymy in the Seclionidar (Wymenoptera). Troe. ent.
Soe, Wash, GH (feb, 1956), p. 24

Mueseboek, C. FLW. and Walkley, Luella: Tyge species of the genera and subgenera of
parasitic wasps comprising the superfamily Proctotrupoidean (Order Hymenoptera).
Proe, US, mat. Mus., 105, no, 8859 (1956), pp. 219-419, index.

Nees ab Msenbeck, Cheiat. Godotry.: Maymenaptererum Lehnewnonibus affintum Monographiae,
genera etrapaca et species Mlustrantes, Stuttgartine et ‘Tubingae, 2 (1s84),
44h pp.

Nixon, G, BE. do: Jymenoptera Proctotrupoidea Diapritdae subfamily Belytinae, Yandbook
Identif. British Ins, vol. VITT, Part & (aii) (81 dee. 1957), 107 pp., 314 figs.

Pook, Oswald: A Catalogue of the Nearetic Chaleidoidca (Insecta: Hymenoptera). Cannd,
Mint, Suppl 80 (1963), 1092) pp.

Peck, Oswald, Boueek, Zdenek, and Hoffer, Augustin: Aeyvs to the Chaleidetden of
Crochaslovalia (lisecta: ILymenoptera)., Mem. ont. Soe. Cannda, sd (1964),
121 pp, 280 figs. index.

Vrovancher, Louis: Peavae Canediqine. Lea Inseates-Tymenopteves. Natur. Canad, 12
(1881), pp. 198-207, 225-241, 257-269, YOT-R04, aBT-BSR, 353-262,

————- Additions et corrections an catwme LI de la faune ontomologique du Canada trattant
fleas Hyménopléres, Québec (1885-1889), 475 pp, 87 figs.

Kiley, GQ. Vii On the Parasites of the Tessian ly, Poe, U.S. nat, Mua, & C1885), Pi.
415-482) pl. 28,

Konda, (.: Fesparia parasitica nen vel minus cognita observata et deseripta, Bulle Boe,
ent. ituh, @ (1577), pp. 166-214, pls. 6-6.

Say, The: Some account of the tmseet lenown by the name af Hesscam Ply and of a parasitic
insect that feeds on it J, Acad. nat. Sei, Philudulphia, [ (1817), pp. 44-48,
Obod, 1 pl.

———— Deseriptions af new species of Myumenaptera of the United States, Contrib. Maclar.
Lyceum Philadelphia, 1 (1828), pp. 67-88.

Sehmiedekneeht, Otte: Tiymenoptera, Fam, Chaletdidac, Gen, Tas. 97 (1909), 550 pp. 8 pla.

Behulz, W. Av Neuer Beitrag sur Kenntais der Wisserimmen, Ann. Biol. Jac, 4, 1909-1911
(1910), pp, TR7-193, 4 figs.

Walker, Fr: Monographia Chateiditum. Ent. Mug., 2 (1834), pp. 18-30, 148-179, 286-209,

540-369, 470-502; 2 (1R86), pp. 94-08, 1A2-206, 465-196,

Monographia Chaleiditum. London, | (18389), 333 pp.

Westwood, J. O. in Stephens, J. Fi: The nomenclature of British Tnacets, London (1829),
68 colounes,

ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author is very gratefal to Mr. G. FL Gross for pertinent suggestions and correction
of the Mnaglish text of manuseript.

KESUME

Lfuuteur présente une liste tion exhaustive d'Hyménopiéres déerits comme Chaleidoidea
eh franstérts ensuite aux Proctotrupoidea, et vice verse. Comme nouveaux exemplos, il précise
Ky cas d*dgonophorus Dahtbom L858, qu'il met en synonymie avee Lsmarus Haliday 1835
(Proctotrupoidea, Dinpriidae, Belytinae), syn. noi. et transfore Pseudoceraphron piles
Dodd (924, dea Proetotrupoidea-Cernphronidae-Meyaxpilinae aux Chaleidoiden.Pleromalidae-
Dipnrinas, stuf eb. En outre, il propose Ceraphron malantatocephalis nomen nov. pour
Ceraphron melanecephalus (Ashmead 1886), non Bohensan 1832,

Inatitut Koyal des Sciences naturelles de Belgiqne, Apri) 1966,

AUSTRALITES FROM MYRTLE SPRINGS STATION, SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY DAVID W. P. CORBETT

Summary

A hundred and seventy-five well preserved australites from Myrtle Springs Station are classified
and assessed statistically. The high proportion of flanged forms (66%) indicates protection of the
australites from severe terrestial weathering since fall. Mode of occurrence and method of collection
are described. Limited stratigraphic and archaeological evidence suggests a geologically very recent
date for the fall. The relation of the Myrtle Springs australites to those known from adjacent areas is
discussed.

AUSTRALITES FROM MYRTLE SPRINGS STATION,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By DAVID W, P. CORBETT, Creator or Fossins axp Min erans,
Sourea Ausrranian Musrsum

SUMMARY

A hundred and seventy-five well preserved australites from Myrtle
Springs Station ave classified and assessed statistically. The high
proportion of flanged forms (66%) indicates protection ol the
australites from severe terrestrial weathering since fall. Mode of
oceurrence and method of collection are deseribed. Limited strati-
graphic and archaeological evidence suggests a geologically very recent
date for the fall, The relation of the Myrtle Springs australites to
those known from adjacent areas is discussed.

INTRODUCTION

A collection of 175 australites was made by a South Australian
Musenm party during September, 1964, from Myrtle Springs Station,
12 miles west of Leigh Creek. Although australites had heen picked
up in the avea by station workers oyer a number of years, the first
systematic collecting was carried out by a jomt American-Australian
party in 1968 and again in 1964. Members of the party were Dr. Brian
Mason, then of the American Museum of Natural History, New York;
Mr. K. P. Henderson of the United States National Museom,
Washington; and Mr. 0. Chalmers of the Australian Museum, Sydney.

Several collectors have been in the area sinee 1964, The Myrtle
Springs australites have attracted collectors beeause of their relative
abundanee and good state of preservation in an arena whieh is
comparatively easy of access.

Over the past decade, a large amount of published data has
appeared om tekliles in general and australites in particular, Much
of this information has been of a chemical nature and very little
altention has been given to the field occurrence of australites and their
distribution over the various strewn-fields. A notable exception to
this has been the detailed work of Baker in south-west Victoria (see
references in Baker, 1963), It is characteristic that over most of the
vast Australian strewn-field, the australites are fonnd lying on the
surface of the ground, and localities yielding stratigraphic information
are rare, The Myrtle Springs area is one where with careful study
such information is obtainable. This paper records the results of the
survey by the South Anstralian Museum party.

562 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

THE MYRTLE SPRINGS STREWN-FIELD

Australites are found in an extensive belt of sand ridge country
lying between Lake Torrens and the western margin of the Flinders
Ranges. The collecting area of over 100 square miles is shown in
fig. 1, From the available evidence, distribution of australites within
this area is patchy, with local areas of concentration. No australites
have been found east of Pine Dam, or along the eastern margins of
Lake Torrens, Collections known from adjacent regions suggest that
the Myrtle Springs field is part of a more extensive strewn-field
embracing a large area to the north and south.

Ediacara H.S.
a
Pine Dam Myrtle Springs H.S.

Leigh
Creek

South Australia

MYRTLE SPRINGS
Locality map
Nos. 1-5 Collecting Areas
Scale

LAKE TORRENS O 5

Fig. 1. Locality map showing australite collecting arets.

The general environment of the Myrtle Springs field is one of
longitudinal sand ridges, oriented east-south-east, west-south-west.
The ridges are sinuous and frequently converging, with the interdune
corridors often containing claypans (fig, 2), The sand ridges reach
a height of about 40 feet, and the interdune corridors average 300 yards
in width.

The whole sand ridge system carries a sparse vegetation and is
to a large extent ‘‘fixed’’, although there is evidence that considerable
local movement of sand occurs periodically, A corridor was
completely eut off by drilt during the great drought of 1914.

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES 563

oe

Big. 2. Avrial photograph of area north-west of Pine Dam, The major part of the
collection from Area 1 was made in corridors A-D. | Photo, courtesy the Director, Department
of Lands, Adelaide. ]

THE OCCURRENCE OF AUSTRALITES

All australites were found within the interdune corridors, with a
marked concentration around the margins and with generally ewer
specimens towards the centre. No australites were found within the
sand ridges. It was noticeable after a little time spent in the area,
that the australites were only present in those corridors where deflation
had caused scouring to a sufficiently deep level to expose them, and it
soon became possible to pick the likely corridors in which to search.
It was also found that the australites were associated with a particular
layer of red silt occurring beneath the cross-bedded dune sands. A
concentration of australites along the outcrop of this layer was strongly
evident. The situation is shown diagrammatically in fig. 3.

No australite was found entirely embedded in the red silt layer,
but the concentration of finds at the level of this layer and the complete
absence of australites from the dune sand above, support the view
that the red silt is the layer from which the australites are weathering
out at the present time.

S64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Cencentrotion of australites
a

this level

Red silt horizon

Nig, 3. Done and tlaypan showing oceurreuce of australites along outerop of red silt
horizoi, Diagrammatie seetion—not to senle.

The red silt was found to contain aboriginal stone implements
of a type referable to the Pirrian culture in the culture sequence of
Tindale (1957). The association of pirri-type implements with the
anstralites at the red silt level proved consistent throughout the area
investigated. Search was made in several corridors where deflation
had not exposed the red silt, but no australites were found. Microlith
implements were present, but were not associated with pirris.

Radioearbou dates from two stratified native campsites in the
Murray Valley of South Australia have given ages of 4,250 = 180
for the mid-Pirrian at Devon Downs (ibid 1957) and 4,850 + 100
trom level 10 at Fromm’s Landing, where pirri and microlith
implements were found (Mulvaney, 1960). Although it is not possible
to correlate with any certainty the Pirrian sites in the Murray Valley
with the red silt level at Myrtle Springs, the evidence is sufficient to
suggest that the terrestrial age of the australites is in the order of
4,000-5,000 vears, This assessment is in aceord with the reeent work
of Gill (1965) on a systematic excavation in south-west Victoria,
where a sueeesstul attempt was made to obtain australites im sity for
the purpose of determining their terrestrial ages.

Ii also supports the view of Baker (1960) that the australite fall
was a geologically very recent event taking place some 5,000 years B.P,
it is hopeful that further detailed work at Myrtle Springs will produce
specimens definitely in sity and that refinement of the stratigraphic
succession may provide further evidence for the date of the fall.

Insufficient is known about the post-Pleistocene history of the
area to reconstruct the local environment at the time of australite fall.
‘he fall may have taken place during the time of deposition of the red
silt, or alternatively may have occurred at a time when the red silt
was exposed, prior to burial by drifting sand, The marked contrast
in structure between the red silt and the overlying dune sands

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES 565

indicates the onset of tnereasingly arid conditions after the deposition
of the ved silt. In all probability the dune sands were derived locally
by the reworking of this extensive red silt layer . The acolian sands
have effectively blanketed many anstralites since their fall; others
have become exposed sand snffered some measure of terrestrial
weathering during the recent scouring of the interdune corridors by
Wind dethation,

Charcoal from a naiive hearth diseovered on the outerop of the
red silt Lomile north-west of Pine Dam, has given a radioearbon age
of 1,860 + 110 years B.P., indicatine that exposure of the australite-
hearing layer is not wholly reeent, and that some australites have
suffered weathering: over a longer period of time, or been exposed
infermiltently over several thousand years,

METHOD OF COLLECTION

Australites were collected (rom five areas within the strewn field.
Three of these were more productive than the other two, and this is
indicated by the size of the triangles in fig. 1. Aerial photography was
available for the area to the north-west of Pine Dam, and all locations
of austratites collected within this region were plotted on the photo-
graphs. In certain restricted areas where a concentration of specimens
was found, the scale of the photographs (approximately 1,3 inches to
the mile) did not permil individual plotting. Colleetine areas 2-5
were nol covered by the available photography, but have heen located
on the photo-mosaie of the Myrtle One-mile Sheet area,

All australites were picked up on the surtace of the ground, Two
specimens found partially embedded in the red silt laver are believed
to be weathering out of this bed. A section cut vertically through the
site of one of these specimens passed through 6 inches of red. silt,
overlying 10 inches of calearcous sand, The seetion was completed at
1 loot 4 inches in a hard nodular caleareous layer, This horizon was
encountered in several of the deeply seoured corridors, and appears to
represent the local base-level in the area,

Preyions writers have claimed that australites are more casily
scen On the ground tf the collector advances with the sun behind him,
preferably in the late evening, when the characteristie lustre of the
australites is enhanced (Mawson, 1958). This method may well be
necessary in an area of stony ground where the australites are diffienlt
to detect among the iron-stained gibher pebbles of similar shape and
size. At Myrtle Springs, however, the australites are very conspicuous
because of the paucity of other rock fragments, and collecting was not
confined to any particular method or time of day.

566 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DESCRIPTION OF THE AUSTRALITES

State of preservation: Most of the australites collected show little
evidence of terrestrial weathering, The majority have retained their
flanges, and flow ridges and other surface leatures are preserved.
Those specimens that have been exposed to weathering sinee their lall
show partial or complete loss of flange and the blurring of surface
features dne to abrasion, The general state of preservation of the
specimens collected is consistent with their having been only recently
exposed at the surface, by the erosion of the silt in whieh they oceur,
There has been minimal redistribution since fall, and many are believed
(0 be little removed from their original landing place. Flanged buttons
at three widely separated localities were found split into two parts hy
terrestrial weathering agencies, the separate parts bemg picked up
within a few feet of each other, A large proportion of the flanged
forms were found with their anterior surface uppermost, supporting
the view of Baker (1956) that this is the stable position lor australites
lying on the earth’s surfaee.

dAustralite shape groups: Wxamples of all the major shape groups
listed by Baker (1963) are represented im the collection (see fig. 4
and 5). The wumbers and pereentages of the various groups are
tabulated in table I. Of all the specimens collected, 66.80% were
finged. ‘lwo complete detached flanges were found. These are
particularly rare and no other examples exist in the large South
Australian Museum collection of some 17,000 specimens. The lenses,
which comprise 12.57% of the total Myrtle Springs colleetion, were
originally buttons, which have lost the greater part of their flanges
due to terrestrial weathering, Even when all trace of the flange itself
has gone, the flange sear is still retained, distinguishing this type of
lens from that formed by loss of the flange during flight through the
almosphere. The weathered flanged buttons are indicative of a
moderate amount of terrestrial abrasion and fragmentation, without
these processes having been severe enough to mask the true original
form of the specimens.

Mig, do. Bixamples of the various qustratite shape groups from Myrtle Springs Station,
1, Boat, anterior view, 2 Canoe, anterior view, 3a, Hollow Hanged button, wuterior view
showing (low ridges. 3b, Posterior view of 3a showing large bubble cavity with smaller
bubble nbove, 4a, Core, side view showing cyuatorial flaking. 4b, Posterior view of 4a.
da. Dumbbell, wide view, Sb, Posterior view of 5a, Ga, Teardrop, side view, 6b. Posterior
view of Ga, 7. Complete detached tunge, anterior view. Sa. Manged button, anterior yiew
showing How vidges md babble pit near top left margin, Sh. Posterior view of Sa showing
How dines, 9a, Plinged oval, anterior view, %b. Posterior view of 9a. 10a, Flanged Iulton,
siterior view, TOh. Posterior view of £0, /

fren

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES

568 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. Examples of the various australite shape groups from Myrtle Springs Station

(cont’nued), 1, 2 and 3. Posterior views of three lens forms (originally flanged buttons)
showing progressive Joss of flange due to weathering. 2, Exhibits a bubble crater. 4. Plat
flanged (ise showing flow lines in the eentral core. 5a and 5b, Anterior and posterior views
of a thin flanged dise. 6. Thin teardrop-shaped australite with flow lines parallel to the
length of the speec’men, 7a and 7b, 8a and 8h, Anterior and posterior yiews of two bowl-shaped
autrelites, In both specimens the central core is dominated by the wide flange.

There is a significant percentage (18.86%) of small complete
australites of the flanged dise and bowl groups, the proportion reaching
30.36% in the collection from Area 4. [t has been pointed out to the
author by Mr. FE. P. Henderson* that many of the flanged dise
australites are capable of flotation, and it is possible that the concentra-
tion of these small forms in Area 4 and parts of Area 3 is due to
the shepherdine of these floating australites by gentle wave or current
action to some cuiet backwater where they have been stranded. Such
an hvpothesis implics that the australites fell into shallow water,
possibly at a time when the red silt layer was being deposited, or
subsequently when the outcrop of this layer was flooded. The
local concentration of the flanged dises and bowls can alternatively be
interpreted as representing the original fall pattern, with minimal

(Verbal communication. )

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES 569

redistribution since that time. The absence of these small forms from
most of the collections in the South Australian Mnseum is noticeable,
It is impossible to assess from the available collections the relative
abundance of the smaller australites in the original population from
a given area, because in most cases collections were not made
systematically, Small specimens may frequently have been overlooked,
or regarded as insignificant and discarded. It is also to be expected
that in areas where they have lain at the surface for a long period of
time, the smallest specimens may not have survived the rigours of
terrestrial weathering. Several small specimens, the lightest of
0.15 gm., have been deseribed by Fenner (1934) from the Shaw
collection of australites housed in this Musewn. It is proposed to
deal with the aerodynamic aspects of certain of the more iuteresting
australites in the collection in a subsequent paper.

Weight: The total weight of australite material was 219.49 em., an
average of 1.25 gm. per specimen. Weight statisties are tabulated
below.

TABLE TI

Chasstrication oF THE Myrrur Sprinas AUSTRALITES

| Number of Per Cent
Australite Type Areal | Area 2 | Area Aread Area 5 | Specimens of Total
| Collected Collection
Flanged Kornis— f
Buttons ...... 566 1 | 2 3 3 - 18 10.29
Ovals oe. cece eee 4 | 4 2.29
Dumbbells 0.0... a3 0 | OS L — — 4 2.29
Planged fragments 1A* | — a 8* 2 35 20.00
Dise8........0000- 4 — IO. | fa — 28 16.00
Bowls ........... 1 | = c | 8 — 5 2.86
Lenses with evidence
of original flange. IE} = 5 6 aa 22 12.57
66.30
Non-Flanged Forms—
LLetBBB 24 nes eas 2 — | a} = + 2.29
Dumbbells ....... | 3 =—s | 3 1.71
Boats ...... 0.6205 | : 1 0.57
Nragmentary boats | 5 5 2.86
Cangas aaa es has : - ] = 1 0.57
Teardrops .. 0.2... | 3 — 3 2 — 8 4.57
Cores wo... eee ee 3 - 3 L.71
Others: .....ca.05. 6 _ Il 17 -- 34 19.43
33.71
Totals ....... 72 2 44 55 2 175 100.01

* Ineludes one complete detached fange

570 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TABLE II
Jomplete | Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5
Collection
Total number of specimens . 175 72 2 44 55 2
Total weight of material |
collected—(in grams) ..... 219.49 148.18 7.31 27.82 33.84 2.34
Average weight of individual
specimens .........2-6+5 1.25 2.08 3.66 0.63 0.62 1.17
Weight range ..........0-- 0.08 O10 | OAL 0.08 —
-11.18 | -I11.18 4.53 -6.66

Specific gravity: The specific gravity of all specimens weighing
over 0.5 gm, was determined hydrostatically using a Mettler H5
balance and toluene as the liquid. The total of 89 individual readings
was not sufficient to produce a statistically significant number of

15

Percent

2-40 2:45 2°50
Specific Gravity

Fig. 6. Frequency polygon showing specific gravity of Myrtle Springs australites related
to percentage of the whole collection.

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES 571

points on the frequency polygon (fig. 6) which, because of the wide
range in density, shows an irregular figure. The modal density is
2.40 with minor peaks at 2.44 and 2.47.

Finniss
@ Springs Marree
: e

Witchellina
r)

Myrtle

rings @
ae O)LEIGH CREEK

Arcoona | 31°
bd \ Blinman
‘Lake || e
‘/ Torrens) )) Parachilna

Fig. 7. Australite collections have been made in the vicinity of localities shown on the
map, In the case of Lyndhurst, Blinman and Mern Merna only single specimens are known.

572 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

A vomparison has been made between the Myrtle Springs
australites and those from adjacent areas represented in the South
Australian Museum collection (see fig. 7). The largest group is from
the Marvee-Finniss Springs-Lake Harry region, a total of some 500
specimens, Only two flanged forms oecur in this number, a complete
flanged button from east of Lake Kyre, and a broken flanged button
from Lake Harry. <All other specimens are medium to large, flange
less and highly abraded. Lens cores, boats and dumbbells predominate,

Few australites have been veeorded from the Flinders Ranges
heeause of the ruggeed mature of the terrain where vigorous érosion
and unstable slopes effectively mask any falls, Finds can therefore
he considered fortuitous and there are only three specimens in the
Museum collection, These are three well-preserved flanged buttons
from Lyndhurst, Blinman and Mern-Merna, Details of the oecurrence
of these speeimens are not known, but the degree of preservation and
the general localities of the specimens suggest links with the Myrile
Springs group, [t may be that they were collected on the Torrens
plain, Australites have recently been reported from the Motpena
region of the plain west of Parachilna (N, Bartlett, verb. comm.),
an area previously unreeorded, and these show a similar degree of
preservation to those from Myrtle Springs, and probably indicate a
soulhward extension of this strewn-field,

Collections are also known to have been made in the Witchelina
area to the north of Myrtle Springs, and near Areoona to the west of
Lake ‘Torrens. The absence of australites along the eastern shore of
the lake suggests that the Arcoona group may beloug to a separate
strewn-field, but the Witchelina gronp forms a link between Myrtle
Springs and the Marree area, It would seem therefore that the
Marree, Witehelina, Myrtle Springs aud Motpena angtralites all form
part of one extensive strewn-lield with a possible limit. to the south-
west along the eastern shore of Lake Torrens, but with no definite
boundaries to the north or sonth-east,

Population variations are to be expected in an area of this size,
and there is a striking difference in weight between the populations
from Myrtle Springs and Marree. Tattle statistien] work has been
earried out on the australites from the Marree area, bul the average
Weight per specimen execeds 5 gm, in contrast to the Myrtle Springs
average of 1.25 gm. The heaviest specimens from the Marree area
are lwo dumbbells weighing 8&8 gm, and 50 gm. compared with the
maximum weight for a core of 11,18 gm, fron Myrtle Springs. Fron
measurements made on a small group ‘of 38 australifes from. Marree

CORBETT—MYRTLE SPRINGS AUSTRALITES 573

by Dr. D. R. Chapman* (pers. comm.), the modal density of 2.40
corresponds to that obtained for the Myrtle Springs collection here
described.

Mention has already been made of the limitations imposed on the
study of many existing collections of australites by the insufficient
data accompanying them. These inadequacies are thrown into relief
when comparisons are made with a systematic collection such as that
from Myrtle Springs. The fact that in a relatively small area of some
100 square miles the collection contained examples of all the major
australite shape types, leads to the assumption that an assemblage
of this type could be expected in other areas also. The Myrtle Springs
collection is in effect a natural assemblage representing the original
population of the area, and such an assemblage can be predicted to
occur elsewhere within the Australian strewn-field. Deficiencies in
many existing collections are therefore primarily due to haphazard,
unsystematic collecting, which has resulted in an unrepresentative and
therefore misleading assemblage.

The limitations imposed by unsystematic collecting have been
increased in certain areas where the australites have suffered
appreciable weathering since fall. In these areas the original popula-
tion has already been modified to some extent by the destruction of
small forms,

It is important that particular care should be taken when making
collections of australites to ensure that all the information relating to
the occurrence be documented. his can only be achieved by the
systematic working over of an australite-bearing area. Our know-
ledge of the geological occurrence of australites and their distribution
over the Australian continent is, with the exception of a small number
of areas, extremely scanty. It is only by careful recording of any new
australite localities and by the re-survey of some of the more rewarding
of the collecting areas of the past, that we will be able to assess
the true distribution and the variation in australite populations over
the continent.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes to thank Mr. N. B. Tindale, then Senior Curator of Anthropology at
the South Australian Museum, and Mr. H. Mincham, Information Officer, for their part in
the collection of the Myrtle Springs australites. Mr. Tindale’s knowledge of the culture
succession of the Australian aborigines and of their stone implements was of considerable
value in the field, and his assistance and interest in the project is gratefully acknowledged.
Thanks are also due to Mr. H. M. Cooper, Honorary Associate in Anthropology, for his
helpful discussion of archaeological matters.

* Staff Scientist, National Acronautics and Space Administration, Ames Research Center,
Moffett Field, California.

574 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dr, D. R, Chapman, of the National Acronauties and Space Administration, Ames
Research Center, Moffett Field, California, kindly allowed me to make use of his unpublished
data on australites from Marree.

Professor Kunihiko Kigoshi, of Gakushuin University, Tokyo, made available the radio-
carbon date on charcoal from the native hearth near Pine Dam, which is quoted in this paper.

Finally, the author wishes to thank Dr, B. Daily, of the University of Adelaide, for his
critical reading of the manuscript.

REFERENCES

Baker, G., 1956: Nirranda Strewnfield Australites, South-East of Warrnambool, Western
Victoria. Mem. nat, Mus. Victoria, 20; 59-172.

———— 1960: Origin of Tektites. Nature, 185 No. 4709; 291-294,

———— 1963: Form and Sculpture in Tektites, in Tektites (Ed. J. A. O’Keefe) University
of Chicago Press, Chicago.

Fenner, C., 1984: Australites, Part 1. Classification of the W. H. C. Shaw Collection.
Trans, Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 58: 62-79,

Gill, E. D., 1965: Quaternary Geology, Radiocarbon Datings and the Age of Australites.
Geol. Soc. America, Spec, Paper 84.

Mawson, D., 1958: Australites in the vicinity of Florieton, South Australia, Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Aust., 81: 161-168.

Mulvaney, D. J., 1960: Archaeological Excavations at Fromm’s Landing on the Lower Murray
River, South Australia. Proce. Roy, Soe. Vie., 72(2): 53-85,

Tindale, N. B., 1957: Culture Succession in South Eastern Australia from Late Pleistocene
to the Present. Ree. 8S, Aust. Mus., 13(1): 1-49.

SHORT NOTES

CERCARTETUS LEPIDUS (THOMAS) AN ADDITION TO THE
FAUNA OF KANGAROO ISLAND

Summary

On the 17th of November 1964, Mrs. I. S. Davis of Brookland Park, Kangaroo Island, captured a
juvenile male of the Little Tasmanian Pigmy-possum, Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) 1888. The
animal was taken while escaping from the fire during "burning off" operations, approximately 8
miles north-west of Karatta, on the northern boundary of section 4, Hundred of Ritchie, Kangaroo
Island, South Australia. On the 20th of November 1964, the Pigmy-possum was forwarded to Mr.
C. R. Tidemann of Millswood, South Australia, who kept it in captivity until its death on the 29th
of December, 1965. Mr. Tidemann subsequently presented the specimen to the South Australian
Museum, as a prepared skin and skull in excellent condition. It has since been incorporated in the
Museum's mammal collection, registration number-M6338.

SHORT NOTES

CERCARTETUS LEPIDUS (THOMAS) AN ADDITION TO THE
FAUNA OF KANGAROO ISLAND

On the 17th of November 1964, Mars. I. 8. Davis of Brookland
Park, Kangaroo Island, captured a juvenile male of the Little
Tasmanian Pigmy-possum, Cercarlefus lepidus (Thomas) 1888. The
animal was taken while escaping from the fire during ‘‘burning off’?
operations, approximately & miles north-west of Karatta, on the
northern boundary of section 4, Hundred of Ritchie, Kangaroo Island,
South Australia. On the 20th of November 1964, the Pigmy-possum
was forwarded to Mr, C. R. Tidemann of Millswood, South Australia,
who kept it in eaptivity until its death on the 29th of December, 1965.
Mr. Tidemaim subsequently presented the specimen to the South
Australian Museum, as a prepared skin and skull in excellent condition.
It lias since been incorporated in the Museum’s mammal collection,
registration number—M6338.,

The pelage colouration is exactly as in the original description of
the species (Thomas 1888). Cranial details are set out in table 1.
All measurements are in millimetres, taken under a microscope with
modified Helios calipers. The terminology, unless otherwise stated,
is after Coekrum (1950).

TABLE 1
C. lepidus adult g
Basil Weng 4h co eS eae wh tease 6b lee ae tte Gee She eee ITO

Oceipitonasal length a. ee 6. ee we ee ee ee ee ee ee ee) 194
Zygomatic breadth © oo. 2. ee ee pe ce ee ee ee ee ee ee TD
Oranial breadth* 2. 2. 6 ke ee ae by chee te ce ae ps 102
Interorbital breadth at t4 seoverd: dey rsletiwe til
Maxillary breadth at M2... 6. 4. 6. ee ce ee ee ee ee OO
Deptl-of eranipmes 4. «i208. oo: 23 3b Oh ek Le. §.2
Palatal length - if 20 Mes ct it SS ee oo
Length of incisive foramina . 2. 0. 2. 6. ke ee ek ee ae 1.3
Length of tympanic bulla .. 2. 2. 2. ee ee ee ee ee ee OD
Longth: uf magals o. 0. 2 ce ce ee ne ce we be be ee ed 7.7
Width of masals 2. 2. ck be ge ee ce ee ee ok eb ee ae 2

Length of mandible 2. 0. 6. ae kk ee be cc ee ee ee ee 1
Crown Jength of maxillary molar series (M14) .. 0. 0. 04 3
Crown height of Py ..

This specimen constitutes the first living record of Cercartetus
lepidus to be taken outside Tasmania, Two other reeords both from
the Australian mainland, are confined to fossil and sub-fossil deposits.

* Measured between the squamosal hones, tnumedistely dorsal to the zygomatic processes,

576 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

These are Ride (1960), in cemented limestone breccia of probable
Upper Pleistocene age, from Wombeyan, New South Wales, and
Wakefield (1960), in a sub-fossil deposit at the Pyramids, near Buchan,
Victoria, Ride (1960) attributes the decline of C. lepidus on the main-
land to a progressive change in environmental conditions, resulting
from increasing aridity. Wakefield (1963), suggests a link between
the decline of C. lepidus in the Buchan area and a change in vegetation
from wet sclerophyll forest to dry sclerophyll forest. It is interesting
to note therefore, that the locality on Kangaroo Island from which
the present specimen was obtained, is situated in an area of 32 inch
annual rainfall, ealeulated over the past 10 years, when seasons have
been particularly good. Neighbouring areas within a radius of 12
miles, record averages of between 22 inches and 26 inches, calculated
over 40 years or more. In addition to this the vegetation type
comprises one of the driest selerophyll communities found in South
Australia. Namely, the Hucalyptus cosmophylla-Eucalyptus baawteri
serub, as deseribed by Wood (1937).

PHTER F. AITKEN.

LITERATURE CITED
Cockrum, HE. L., 1955: Manual of Mammalagy.
Ride, W, D. L., 1960; The fossil mammalian fauna of the Burramys parvus breceia from
Wombeyan Caves, New South Wales. Journ. Roy Soc. W. Aust., 43(3): 74-80.
Thomas, O., 1888: Catalogue uf the Marsupialia and Monotremata in the colleefions of the
British Museum (Natural History). British Museum, London.
Wakefield, N. Ay oe Recent mammal jones in the Buchan district—2. Viet, Nat., 77(8):
227-240.
1963: The Australian Pigmy-possums. Vict. Nat., 80(4): 99-116,
Wood, J, G., 1937: The Vegetation of South Australia,

DISTRIBUTION AND FORMS OF ZOSTEROPS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Summary

It is now generally agreed that only one variable species, Zosterops lateralis (Latham), Greybacked
Silvereye, is to be found in temperate Australia (Keast, Gould League Notes (N.S.W.), May, 1958).
Recent collecting has indicated that at least three races should be listed for South Australia. The
first of these 1s Z./.halmaturina Campbell, which is very common in the wetter parts and occurs in
decreasing numbers in the drier areas. There are old records of its presence beyond Cowell and
Kimba on Eyre Peninsula and more recent reports from the Flinders Ranges at Buckaringa Gorge
(1961) and Wilpena Pound (P. Haselgrove, sight obs.-September, 1965). Specimens were taken by
the late W. D. K. MacGillivray, at Broken Hill, New South Wales, in June, 1920. In the south-east,
it is present in the Mount Gambler district.

DISTRIBUTION AND FORMS OF ZOSTEROPS IN
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

li is now generally agreed that only one variable species, Zoslerops
lateralis (Latham), Greybacked Silvereye, is to be found in temperate
Australia (Keast, Gould League Notes (N.S.W.), May, 1958).

Reeent collecting has indicated that al least three races shoul
he listed for South Australia, The first of these is Z..halmaturina
Campbell, which is very common in the wetter parts and occurs in
decreasing numbers in the drier areas. There are old records of its
presence beyond Cowell and Kimba on Myre Peninsula and more recent
reports from the Flinders Ranges at Buckaringa Gorge (1961) and
Wilpena Pound (P. Haseleroyve, sight obs.—September, 1965). Speei-
mens were tiken by the late W. D. K. MaeCillivray, at Broken Hill,
New South Wales, in Jine, 1920, In the south-east, it is present in
the Mount Gambier district.

Latest information indicates that halmatuting ranges in the west
af least to Seeale Bay, just south of Streaky Bay (specimens—
October, 1963) and perhaps to Murat Bay, near Ceduna, as given by
Terrill and Rix (S.d. Orn, 20; 59). Beyond this point it is replaced
by Z...gouldi Bonaparte, the so-called Western Silvereye, specimens
of which have been obtained, “in low sernb’’, near Nullarbor Station,
close to the Head of the Bight (1963) and at a place above Muela,
near the Western Australian border (J. R. Ford, pers. comm., 1966).

The Western Silvereye, which resembles halmaturiva in size and
venereal eoloration, is, nevertheless, readily distingnished in the skin
by its all-green back, dull fawn flanks and bright yellow coloration
on the throat and nnder tail eoverts.

On the other hand, the characters of halmaturiwa are less Gasily
defined, but, as pointed out by Kikkawa (mu, 68: 82-33) some of the
variation is due to sex, with males beine darker on the flanks and,
usally, with more vellow on the throat. As a rule, the throat is drab
grey and the flanks Neht grevish olive in most temales, whereas in
niles the throat is dull olive yellow, not sharply demarcated from the
erey breast as in some castern Australian birds, and the flanks are
various shades of buffy brown, never deep rufous. Specimens from
littoral Myre Peninsula, Flinders, Reevesby and Kangaroo Islands are
known with a greenish wash on the back, whieh seems to indieate
gond-llow with gowdi. As might he expected, similar birds have been
taken on the feet of Yorke Peninsula (Jannary, 1966), but | do not
think the name flmdersensis Ashby (Mmu, 25; 117) should be applied

578 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

to what appears to be an intermediate ‘‘step’? between gouldi and
halmaturina, The latter, as suggested above, is a very variable form
and jlindersensis is, perhaps, best included within it.

Now in eastern Australia, there is increasing evidence that, in
local populations, the often marked seasonal variation in plumage
coloration cannot be attributed to age or sex and must be due to the
presence of nomadie foragine flocks or long distance migrants (Keast,
loc. cit.; Lane, Bird Bander |NS.W.), (1(2): 11-12). Mack (mn,
31: 290), who was unaware of any regular movements within the
species, rejected all described forms. However, there is little doubt
that the birds of eastern Australia and Tasmania are nearly always
more brightly coloured than those in South Australia—the flanks are
either rufous or brownish (but grey around Sydney) and the throat
whitish (Tasmania) or, more often, yellowish.

The occasional observation of dark-flanked individuals in flocks
around Adelaide and the Mount Lofty Ranges in autumn has given
rise to the hope that proof will be forthcoming that these more highly-
coloured birds are yisitors from the east; but, so far, there is no
evidence of this. However, it has been established by C. K, Pawsey,
of Kalangadoo, that brown-flanked, or ‘‘Tasmanian type’? birds visit
the south-east, where two males were colleeted near Mount Gambier
in February, 1966. One bird was yellow-throated and perhaps refer-
able to the southern Victorian breeding population, whilst the other
was white-throated and a typical Tasmanian example. These speci-
mens represent the first recorded occurrence in South Australia of
a third, non-breeding subspecies which Keast (loc. cit.) has defined
under the name tasmanica Mathews. If the type locality of the
nominate form is ‘*Tasmania’’ rather than ‘‘New South Wales’’ (as
generally quoted), then fasmanica would become a synonym of it.

H. T. CONDON.

SURPRISING CAPTURE OF QUAIL-THRUSH BY BARN OWL

Summary

On 4th September, 1966, Master Gilbert Pfitzner found a dead Barn Owl, Tyto alba Scopoli, on the
Port Wakefield Road, near the Light River. On skinning the owl he found the head, complete with
feathers, of a small passerine lodged in the intestine. Cause of death of the owl is unknown. It has
been possible to identify the passerine as a young male (with black and white throat) of the Spotted
Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma punctatum (Shaw), a rather secretive, grounddwelling species that lives
in open forest country in the Mount Lofty Ranges, perhaps 10 or 15 miles away. H.T.CONDON.

SURPRISING CAPTURE OF QUAIL-THRUSH BY BARN OWL

On 4th September, 1966, Master Gilbert Pfitzner found a dead
Barn Owl, Tyto alba Scopoli, on the Port Wakefield Road, near the
Light River. On skinning the owl he found the head, complete with
feathers, of a small passerine lodged in the intestine. Cause of death
of the owl is unknown. It has been possible to identify the passerine
as a young male (with black and white throat) of the Spotted Quail-
Thrush, Cinclosoma punctatum (Shaw), a rather secretive, ground-
dwelling species that lives in open forest country in the Mount Lofty
Ranges, perhaps 10 or 15 miles away.

H. T. CONDON.

CONTENTS

Rock Enproviogs from the Orroroo District
South*Adstratiaw. 52" Jains) ai crane vcs

Aboriginal Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek
Waterhole, St. Vidgeon, Northern Ter-
iteny Of Australia-z,..cesevtathasr toa ints ere

Studies on the Hairy-Nosed Wombat Lasio-
rhinus latifrons (Owen 1845)............0006
1. Measurements and Taxonomy

Cranial and Mandibular Characters of Modern
Mainland Wombats (Marsupialia Vombati-
dae) from a Palaeontological viewpoint,
and their bearing on the Fossils called
Phascolomys parvus by Owen (1872) ......

On Sceparnodon ramsayi Owen, 1884: The
selection of a Lectotype, the clarification
of its Type Locality, and on its identity
with Phascolonus gigas (Owen, 1859) ......

A new Tertiary formation and Fauna from the
Tirari Desert, South Australia ............

A Review of the Starfish Genus Nectria
(Asteroidea; Goniasteridae)..................

The Distribution of Introduced Snails in South
FRUSRREN SY Ae nr etoratie tee 2c 0c Shcanes « tae ehek fe hs

The Cytology of Salinator solida (von Martens),
Mollusca, Amphibolidae .................55

Heterogamasus Tragardh (Acari: Rhodacari-
dae), including the Subgenus Evanssellus
Ry Kewstat Mewar eancctcines samen On actions

Aradidae in the South Australian Museum,
Adelaide Il. (Hemiptera-Heteroptera) ...

Corrections in the systematic position of
certain taxa of the Chalcidoidea and
Proctotrupoidea (s.I.), with notes on
SYNOD YITV Aes snr te Ai tes Octane a ay Bt

Australites from Myrtle Springs Station, South
FUSER i wrleecct Seem sander ane rates

Short Notes—

Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) an addition
to the fauna of Kangaroo Island ......
Distribution and forms of Zosterops in
South Australia ......... cc ceeeeeeen eee

Surprising capture of Quail-thrush by
BanmiOwh econ anes wets eas

H. E. Burrows

C. P. Mountford and

E. Brandl

P. Crowcroft

D. Merrilees

W. D.L. Ride

R. A. Stirton,

weueeneeeneeene

R. H. Tedford, and

M. O. Wood
S. A. Shepherd

D. E. Pomeroy
H. M. Laws

burne ......

and

VOLUME ] Fy No. 4
1968

RECORDS

OF THE
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Adelaide, South Australia.
Printed in Australia by A. B. James, Government Printer.
Registered In Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

A FURTHER DESCRIPTION OF LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER

Summary

This paper refers to some stone implement types found upon certain former native camping grounds
in South Australia.

The figured specimens are discussed in detail and a description is given of the two principal sites
upon which they are found.

Details of a more generalized nature, but relevant to the subject matter in this paper, are also
discussed but no attempt has been made to estimate the age or possible uses of the implements with
the exception, here and there, of a few remarks of an explanatory character.

A FURTHER DESCRIPTION OF LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS
FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H, M, COOPER*

SUMMARY

This paper refers to some stone implement types found upon certain
former native camping grounds in South Australia,

The figured specimens are discussed in detail and a description is given
of the two principal sites upon which they were found.

Details of a more generalized nature. but relevant to the subject
matter in this paper, are also discussed but no attempt has been made to
estimate the age or possible uses of the implements with the exception, here
and there, of a few remarks of an explanatory character,

THE TWO PRINCIPAL SITES
Hallett Cove

A somewhat detailed description of the topography of the Hallett
Cove site was referred to by Cooper (1959), but briefly, it is an ideal one—
loamy soil (now cultivated), sloping gradually inland from the coastal cliffs
and about 220 feet above sea level. A deep gully, with a permanent spring,
adjoins its southern side, There are unobstructed views in all directions.

The practical value of many repetition visits to any one native camping
ground may appear to be dubious and unnecessary if the examinations are
merely the continuity of a casual or perfunctory nature. It became apparent
however, that the correct evaluation of any camp-site with such a wealth
of large type material of various sorts, shapes and sizes, as at Hallett Cove,
could not possibly be made during the course of a few visits, however
carefully they were carried out, Further and more frequent examinations
of a more critical nature were then made, of the large amount of material
still remaining at that time upon the site, This locality, shortly to be
subdivided, is now practically devoid of material, The collection of over
1,700 large implements from the main camp and its two small adjoining
subsidiaries, made in the course of 200 visits spread over a period of 30 years,
has proved to be of great assistance in at least one avenue of research,
namely, that several types, primitive and elementary in design and previously
rejected, passed by unnoticed or considered doubtful were, in fact, genuine
types, There is nothing more valuable to assist in establishing the validity
of any one particular type, deemed to be dubious, than the ability to
produce a considerable number of similar repetitive specimens which the
numerous visits made possible,

* Honorary Associate in Anthropology, South Australian Museum

Shz RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Brent KO Humane

FIGS. 1-3.

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 583

It was instructive, also, to examine blocks struck open and discarded
by the native workmen owing to breakages or faulty primary flaking, and
others rejected because of the inferiority of material exposed after they had
been broken.

A very interesting implement, found upon the Hallett Cove camp-site
(not figured) had been prepared from a block of rather compact Travertine
Limestone, It possesses a circular base with the equivalent of stepped
trimming all around it with the exception of a small portion which appears,
tather indistinctly, as the bulb of percussion. It is of “Horsehoof” design
and the trimming is very good considering the inferior type of stone used,
The base is 4 inches in diameter and as flat as the texture of the material used
would permit. The implement, although core-like, is really a bulky flake.
Lt is, of course, impossible to determine its use.

It was noticed when searching the Hallett Cove site for implements
that they often occurred in patches (with barren ground intervening) as if
{ indicate that they represented the former sites of Wurlies. The ground
is so flat or slightly undulating that they were probably still in situ,

A sprinkling of small fresh-looking trimmed flakes, attributed to recent
cultures, occur upon the site in the shape of end scrapers, saws and udzes.
Pirri, geometric and other microlith lypes are absent although they occur
plentifully upon adjacent camp-sites on the plains and along the coastal
regions. This may ifidicate that at some period or periods the camping
ground may have been unattractive owing to adverse climatic or other
reasons.

Worn implements of the large types were relatively common upon the
site and some, probably highly prized, to such an extent that their useful
life could no longer be prolonged by further treatment,

Melrose

The figured specimens marked Melrose were found upon an extensive
native camp-site which extends along the banks of Willochra (formerly
Mount Remarkable) Creek, with considerable breaks here and there, from
a point where it leaves the ranges at Melrose and thence on to the
adjoining plains.

Thousands of water-worn pebbles and blocks, apparently carried down
and deposited by the creek during earlier periods of higher rainfall, btter
the ground (in places for a distance of half a mile in width), Some of the
short creeks, which drain the ridges and gullies of the eastern side of Mount
Remarkable, have added their quota to this accumulation, while others,
which fail to reach the Willochra, spread out and the rocks which they
have carried down, are distributed in the form of small scree-like masses,

S84 RECORDS OF THE SA, MUSEUM

Resore KO bluennne

FIGS, 4-5

COOPER-—-LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 585

Most of the pebbles and angular blocks consist of country quartzites, chiefly
coarse-grained, There is a sprinkling of tillite, also in the form of blocks
and pebbles. They appear to have been derived from an exposure of that
rock on the south-west side of the mountain,

The implements themselves are scattered widely but are not numerous
and they become scarcer as the distance from the creek is increased,
Collecting on a camp-site of this nature is necessarily a slow and tedious
process but numerous visits assisted in covering practically all the area, 200
large implements being collected,

The existence of so many specimens often partly or completely worn
down by use, proves that the site was 4 permanent one and not a workshop,
The population of the camping ground, considering its extent and the limited
number of implements found upon it, appears to have been small, The
quantity of waste and discarded flakes was surprisingly low but appears to
be mostly due to the minimum of flaking needed to shape the implements,
which are mostly simple in design, An interesting feature of the area was
the discovery, in a nearby field of a faintly discernible shallow depression
with pebbles deposited upon its surface. Its course was traced towards the
Willochra indicating that it was the bed of a former watercourse, since
silted up, It yielded a series of large implements.

The main camp-site is ideal, being flat. above flood level, with the
Willochra Creek flowing through it, The creek flows strongly, often in
flood, during the winter months.

The absence of conventional well-used hammer-stones appears to be
directly associated with the vast number of angular and water-worn blocks
lying so conveniently upon the surface of the camping ground. An
occasional stone was noticed, here and there, with a few pitmarks upon its
surtace, suggesting its employment and then rejection, as a hammer-stone in
shaping another block of appropriate proportions, similarly picked up nearby,
into a large simply trimmed implement. Identical features had been
noticed upon other stony sites, such as referred to by Cooper (1961).

The almost total absence of small trimmed implements, soon apparent,
Was explained by the non-existence of hammer-stones which are essential
in strictly controlling the correct removal of flakes in the preparation of
snialler types. This is a problem which does not arise during the shaping
of large simply designed implements.

No signs Were seen of permanent camping grounds during many
ascents of the rugged ranges nearby, such areas, as elsewhere, being mainly
teserved for brief hunting and food-gathering expeditions. A small group
of large implements was found, however, upon a flat at the edge of the
foothills overlooking the plains. Two others, roughly made and lying upon

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

586

i
2
5
2
x
x
€
&
i

FIGS. 6-9,

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 587

the surface alongside one another were discovered merely by chance, upon
the mountain side, at about 1,700 feet where a stop was made to examine
some vegetation at the same spot. I[t appeared likely that these two
implements had been improvised from blocks, scattered liberally upon the
spot, used for some casual need which had arisen during a hunting expedition,
and then discarded,

A somewhat hasty examination was made of the interior earthy floors
of several large hollow specimens of Eucalyptus camaldulensis (Red Gum)
while collecting upon the Melrose site nearby and a well-defined lower
millstone, with peck marks. was found in one at a depth of about 3 inches. A
similar but more systematic search of other large trees elsewhere, especially
adjoining camp-sites or permanent waler-courses, may yicld interesting
material because such places provided the natives with shelter during rainy,
cold and other adverse climatic conditions,

The Wepowie site, briefly, comprises gently rising loamy soil adjoining
a dry waler-course which, with a few other small streams, combine to form
the Wepowie Creek in which there is permanent water, The site is located
in the Narrien Hills in undulating country near Orroroo, Its height above
sea level (estimated) is about 1,800 feet.

The South Hummocks site, also briefly, comprises fields of loamy soil
which slope gently downwards from the foot of the South Hummocks towards
the sea. The site is intersected by several dry watercourses which, when
running, consist of streams along beds which appear very small compared
with the distance between their banks; this suggests that they were formerly
more considerable streams. The implements, not plentiful. occur near the
banks of the water-courses. Height above sea level (estimated) about
250 feet.

GENERALIZED DISCUSSION

Quality of Rock Available

Brief reference has been made to the rough finish applied to certain
of our stone implement types in some areas compared with the excellent
work apparent on those of similar nature in other localities. This appears
to be closely related to the quality of the local rock available (but not
including traded and transported material),

The skill of the native workman, who by force of circumstances had
no more than tough fine-grained quartzite. milky vein quartz and other
intractable rocks at his disposal, was probably of as high an order as the
maker of the beautifully finished pirri, geometries and other microliths of
Far Northern South Australia,

ZUM

MUSE

S.A

CORDS OF THE

RE

i
$
=
=<
$
z
é

10-13.

FIGS.

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 589

The type of rock available also appears to have some bearing upon
the types of implements constructed, especially those of large size. No
example of the widely distributed “Horsehoof" trimmed core type has been
reported from the South-East of South Australia where flint is readily
available over large surface areas and small implements, derived from it,
occur in thousands.

Flint fractures easily and is extremely brittle and to retain an efficient
work edge, for even a smull space of time on an implement type of this
nature, would virtually be impossible. This muy explain the reason for
its apparent non-existence in that area,

A somewhat similar situation oceurs on Kangaroo Island where the
conventional large stone implements of its former unidentified population
were hand choppers made from hard fine-grained quartzite of which several
thousand have been collected, Water-worn nodules and pebbles of mint
occur in places along the shore, intermingled with those of quartzite
(referred to above), which are notably resistant to wear as indicated upon
the surfaces of those converted into pebble choppers,

As far as it is officially known, however, there is no evidence of a
pebble chopper, made of flint, having been found there.

Here again the brittle nature of this material may have proved to be
unsuitable for use in the construction of pebble choppers, the working
edges of which were subjected to considerable stress and strain,

An interesting situation was found to have existed at Cape Hart,
Kangaroo Island, Cooper (1948), where quartzite and flint pebbles lie
intermingled upon the beach. Two distinct and separated camp sites
existed here, one belonging to the extinct islanders, in association with
their quartzite pebble choppers and the other the site of a party of European
sealers and Tusmanian native women accompanying them, of the carly
1800’s. This site yielded small implements of Tasmanian type and
discarded flakes and cores, all made of flint secured from the beach below.
A careful search failed to reveal the presence of a single implement of
quartzite.

This site, Which includes small glass and tron debris, dates from early
historical times and is contirmable.

Flake Making Core and Trimmed Core Implements

The classification of this material, which has not been thoroughly
examined by the writer, may be more involved than it appears to be. The
two main types (1) deliberately trimmed implements and (2) those
employed to provide suitable flakes for the production of flake implements,
are fairly easy to classify; (1) by the primary and secondary trimming

S90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MOSEUM

Betnon K, Humeare

FIGS, 14-17.

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 591

which has been applied to them and those in type (2) by their lack of
secondary trimming and their shape (which often indicates by the form of
the flakes removed), the type of small implements which it was intended
10 create, such as long end scrapers, discoidal adze stones, microliths
and others,

There remains, however, a considerable intermediate group which
possess “secondary” trimming of a more or less dubious kind around all or
on a portion of their bases, sometimes quite symmetrical, and the difficulty
here is to determine whether this ts, in fact, intentional.

It appears that this may be possibly due to the repetition of ineffectual
blows to remove suitable flakes, especially from blocks of hard, intractable
material which may cause bruising and pseudo secondary trimming, and even
in some cases, stepped trimming.

This flaking seems to possess a subtle and almost indefinable variation
when compared with deliberate trimming but the above impression is some-
what speculative and needs further and more intensive search.

“Horsehoof” Type Core Implements

Two early references to implements somewhat similar to Australian
“Horschoof” type trimmed implements may be of interest,

(1) Gillespie (1877) refers to certain types commonly called “Hoot”
Cores, found in England and France, and considered by him to be trimmed
core implements and not flake making cores, as at that time they were
thought to be, One specimen was figured by him but size is not given,
This is certainly “Hoof” or “Horsehoof” in shape but if it is representative
of others examined by him the scanty trimming around its base hardly
justifies its identity as a trimmed “Horsechoof” implement, at least judged
by Australian standards. In addition, the long narrow flakes apparently
struck from it, especially if repeated upon the other specimens, may indicate
that (hey were intended for conversion into trimmed blades such as knives
or saws in which case it would represent a flake-making core,

(2) Holmes (1895) stutes that implements (sketches of which resemble
Australian “Horsehoof" trimmed cores), Were discovered in considerable
numbers in the cultivated fields around Mitla. They were also seen mixed
with the mortar used in forming the walls and pyramids of the great
buildings of that city, Some of the implements had edges greatly worn
and battered.

It appeared, he continues. that they had been udded to the earthy
adobe material in order to strengthen it but whether they belonged to the
actual builders of the great walls and pyramids or had been left by a previous
people, in the fields, it was difficult to determine, Holmes’ description has
already been referred to by Cooper (1961).

592 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Grenon RO Hussey

FIGS, 18-22.

la

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 59

These references, although lacking in details are nevertheless,
interesting.

Surface Finds

The value of loose finds upon surface camping grounds is modified
because it cannot include material jn situ which is of considerable
significance. The implements collected, however, do represent, at least,
the stone material cultures of the native peoples who successively camped
upon them.

Australian topography, unfortunately, does not lend itself kindly to
stratification in vast areas, including the arid plains and although recent
important finds in rock shelters and also around certain lagoons, swamps
and other places have filled in many gaps, it appears that dependance upon
surface finds in others will still be of considerable value, at least in the
immediate future,

Anadara trapezia

It may be useful to refer, briefly, to the distribution, by man, of
Anadara trapezia shells in other than their original habitats. Anadara
trapezia deposits appear to be of fairly recent origin and associated with
the lower shorelines and raised beaches.

The discovery of some of these shells in the Melton railway yard,
at 376 feet above sea level, however, induced the writer to examine the
lower, that is the earliest used ballast along the line which made it evident
that this was the source from which they were derived.

A detailed and invaluable communication from the South Australian
Railways, to whom the writer is deeply indebted, indicated that this material
was won from railway ballast pits near Port Wakefield as early as 1868
and used along many miles of track. This ballast is now being covered
with crushed quartzite trom the Adelaide Hills. Port Wakefield and the
old ballast pits are about 18 feet above low water Spring Tides.

CONCLUSION
It was thought preferable in preparing this paper, to confine it, mainly,
to a few specific sites, the implements from which, after classification, have
proved to possess much in common,

The Hallett Cove site, owing to its size and wealth of material, has
been of mvaluable assistance but even there the story is no more than
partly told, Nevertheless, it seems fairly safe to assume that some of the
implements collected were shaped by the first arrivals who made this spot
their home.

594 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Bocnpe VW kluegens

FIGS, 23-25,

a

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 59

At present, however, it is impossible to indicate which of the imple-
ments, found upon the site, belong to this early period und those related
to later periods of occupation.

It is apparent that the extent of our knowledge of the individual
sections of the successive material cultures, employed by our Australian
native people, is relatively small in the establishment of concrete, unassail-
able evidence, with the exception of those used, during and a little before,
historical times.

All the tangible proof of important material cultures, derived from
wood, bark, skin, strings, feathers and other perishable substances
vanished long ago.

The absence of the written word is another serious limitation, irres-
pective of whether one excludes or includes their pictorial rock carvings and
rock paintings. The meaning and significance of many of these—more
especially the carvings—are not perfectly understood; this presents an
additional problem.

We are fortunate in the survival, nevertheless, of their almost
indestructible stone material cultures, in the form of a profusion of
implements of many kinds, together with their work-shops, quarries, and
picturesque rock carvings,

These, with the addition of a few relics, composed mainly of shell and
bone, provide a vital and unbreakable link with our stone age communities.

Further work in this and other aspects of Anthropology and
Archacology, relating to the native people of Australia, continues to offer
interesting and instructive fields of research,

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURED SPECIMENS
All implements have been manufactured fron) blocks (cores) unless otherwise stated,

Fig}, An unusually large implement with a simple, straight working edge, Piltings
on the nether side denote casual use as an anvil op blows caused by a hammer-stone.
Weight 12lb. loz. Hallett Cove.

Figs. 2 and 3. Large implements of simple design, Weights 8 Ib, 802, and 7 lb, 8oz,
respectively, Fig, 3 is approxiniately Lt inches in thickness, Both Hallett Cove.

Fie. 4. Secondary stepped trimming confined to a comparatively small “nosed” portion
of the vircurnference of the base which is markedly keeled. Exhibits careful primary flaking
overall. Weight Sib. 1002, Hallett Cove,

Fig. 5, A good example of well-executed secondary trimming (stepped) which extends
around the whole of the circurnference of the base. The existence of this fine specimen was
disclosed accidentally, when dismantling a large heap of rocks, collected on the site lo
facilitale cultivation. Weight 4}b. 307. Hallett Coye,

Fig. 6. An implement with skilful secondary trimming around the whole of its base
which is flat and symmetrically oval (6 inches x 4 inches). The side not shown is
practically similar to that figured, Weight Slb. From a headland overlooking the shore
of Lake Bumbunga.

596 RECORDS OF THE 8$.A. MUSEUM

eee teeta,
.

~~

v

FIGS. 26-30.

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 597

Fie. 7. Made from a walterworn, almost discoidal pebble. The margin of its base,
which is 4 inches in diameter and slightly rounded. has been neajly trimmed wilh the
exception of a smal] portion Whieh had been retained us the under side of a sinking
platform, the top of which is shown ut the rear of the drawing. Weight 4 lb. loz. From
a level paddock. marginal to Beautiful Valley Creek, Wilmington.

Fie, &. A lypical example of many Hallett’ Cove implements which onginaled in
blocks of slone. flon-deseript in shape, They appear lo indicute (hal any stone contd be
used which would provide a simple, single trimmed working cdge. whether it be straight.
curved or irregular. provided the size and shape of the rock were suilable for successful
employment, This specimen, similarly to so many others. possesses pil marks, denoting
cusual secondary usé as a hametnerstone. Hallett Cove.

Fie. 9. Another massive, irregular block but with its basal circumference secondarily
trimmed, tt resembles, very closely. many others of similar form collected al Hallett Cove
and Melrose. From a level field adjoining the foot of South Hummocks.

Fie, 20. Made fron) an angular water-worn stone with fine-grained texture which tends
to explain its superior secondary flaking. IL possesses two distinct trimmed working arews
(a) one reduced by use and re-trimming which has resulted in an “overhang” and (/)
another to replace it Showing less wear. ‘This was achieved by merely turning. the implement
over, sideways, and applying lhe necessary trimming. Melrose.

Fig. 7], Generally irregular in’ shape hut with tolerably good secondary trimming which
extends around three-quarters of the basal margin. This Working edge has been subject to
considerable wear which has caused the development of “overhang” as in the case of
Fig. 10. Diameter of base 9 inches A litle below the foot of South Huoimocks.

Fig. 12. Samewhar similar to Fig Ji except that the “overhan2” in this case has
developed above the whole working edge, good secondary trimming, probably due to the
superiority of the type of rock employed and pot necessarily to (he skill possessed by the
Operator. This aspect ix referred to later in more detail, The excessive wear upon this
implement sigeests that it was highly prized. Melrose,

Fig. 13. An implement provided with an exceedingly simple stvaight but effeient
working edge, ft is Characteristic of many similar examples, which oceur upon camp-siles
referred to in this paper. Wepowie Creek. Orroroo,

Fig. 14. An implement which closely resembles Fig. 13, Hallet) Cove.

Fig. 15. A small implement composed of an indifferent coarse gntty quartzite wiih a
hard horizontal vein of milky quartz which hag been skilfully utilized to provide it with an
eflicient trimmed working edge. Melrose.

Fig. 16, Symmetrical in shape (vectanzular), Mat on both faces and 4 inches in thick
ness. It has one straight trimmed working edge. Both sides exhibit pitting due to oveasional
use as a hamnier-stone. Melrose.

Fig. 17, Chisel-shaped, with a roughly trimmed working end, Considerably weathered
Prominent pit marks Upon both faces, A similar type of implement was found at Halleit
Cove. Muston, Kangaroo Island.

Fig. 18. Vhe trimming technique employed in producing this implement, as wall be
seen, is rough and primitive but it is representative of many others, generally of non-descript
shapes found Upon this camp-site. IL may be i flake implement. Melrose.

Fig, 19, Ap implement of unusual shape with regular primary tfimming on both faces
and also prominent traces of pitting, Its use would be difficul) to determine. Thickness
1 inch. Shape and design could suggest that at some lime il may have been mounted.
Hallett Cove.

Fig. 20. A triangular shaped core implement with well balanced (rimming. Sufficient
Fromples, of this shape have been found lo recognize it as a definite form of implement.
alletL Cove.

Fig, 21. Semi-biface. Constructed from « witler-worn pebble 1} inches in thickness.
Has indifferent flaking of both extremilies but on allernate sides. Melrose.

Fig. 22, A small implement. Simple straight-edged {rimming has been opplied to both
ends of one side only, Pit marks, Weight | Ib. Melrose.

Fig. 23 Angular and retains its natural Shape with the exception of the small trimmed
portion the form of which ts extremely simple. Melrose.

598 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

FIGS, 31-35.

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 599

ip. 24. A large flake implement, Maximum thickness 14 inches. ‘The striking
plkilforn or the remaining portion of it, after possible tomming, 18 4 inch in thickness.
The working edue seems originally t6 have extended around the whole of its marginal edge
with the exception of a little, cach side of the striking platform. This implement appears
to have been subjected to considerable wear and tear, It is composed of tough, fine-grained
quartzite and considerable skill must have been exercised in elfecting the removal of such
u massive flake from a réfractory type of rock. Hallett Cove.

Fiz. 25. Portion of a watereworn flat pebble used oxtensively as a hammer-slone and
also, possibly, as a small anvil, Conventional wern hammer-stones (mostly round and
oval-shaped watereworn pebbles) found on most camping spots are extremely rare upon
Ihis site which extends along both sides of the Willochra Creek at Melrose, This locality 1s
thickly strewn wilh (housands of water-worn angular blocks and pebbles, an occasional one af
which bears uwimistakable pitmarks resulting from its casual utilizahon as a hammer-sione.
This usaye, in addition to the existence of similar pitting on the imploments themselves
(described in this paper) may have some hearing upon the scarcity Of clearly defined
hammer-stones which are a feature of most native camp-sites. The writer has observed
identical conditions where similarly water-worn slones of suitable sfze and mulerial lilter
the ground. Also see Cooper (1961),

Fig. 26. Single valve of the sea shell 4nadara trapesta, showirg wear due to use as
a seraper, the dotted line indicating its former (and nataral) shape. Found upon a narrow
hut fairly extensive cump-site in low whitish sand dunes a little abeye high water spring
lides, near head of Gulf St. Vincent, where Captain Matthew Flinders R.N. HMS,
Javestigater, landed on Mareh 30. 1802, when exploring the coast line and wrote upon his
chart at this spot “Signs of Natives". I: may be identical willr the camping ground where
the lnadara shell s¢raper was found.

Fig. 27. Typicul bul large example of paired Anadara trapezia valves discovered
intact upon the bed of a salt lagoon in the vicinity of Port Wakefield.

Fig. 28 A single valve of exceptional size weighing Goz, ‘The above uverage size
of these cockles al the head of Gulf St. Vincent may be due io ideal living conditions in
that area. From a salt lagoon in the vicinity of Port Wakefield.

Aaadara trapezia, Which appears to be a foss!! form in South Australia, is sull a living
species in certain other parts of Southern Australia, especially along coastal districts in
New South Wales, where it is known as the Mud or Blood Cockle. Large kitchen middens
in those areas indicate its popularity as a favourite food of the natives,

Extensive search at the head of the Gulf, over wu considerable period of tine. failed to
locale similar deposits even on Or near camp-sites, including eroded areas. ft could be
possible, however, that radara kitchea middens did formerly exist there but hive been
dispersed since or overlain by other deposits. On the other hand they may have already
become a fossil form in the Gulf aren before the arrival there of primitive Man,

hi is true that an occasional shell or two may be found upon camp-sites in the vicinity
of Port Wakefield and Port Augusta bul this could be due lo their use for domestic purposes
relating to fuod or water, their robust construction making [hem eminently suitable, One
example, possibly from the head of Spencer Gulf. where they are plentiful, has been found
upon » canp-site in the vicinity of Take Torrens. haying arrived there, apparently. via one
of the atives® traditional trade routes.

Pleuse see Generalized Discussion for additional motes on this subject.

Figs. 29-34. Wt seems hurdly likely that the convenhonal well designed slate scrapers.
Edwards (1963). used by natives during the historical (European) period, which are all
approximately similar in design and shape represent, also, the form or forms of eurher
scrapers used by primitive mun, They could have been crude and helerogeneous in type
amd shape from which the recent improved designs were gradually evolved, in much the
sume Way as his stone and other implements,

Skin cloaks were an important part of the feeds of the Aborigines in South Austraha
for protection from the weather during early historical times und if the antiquity of man
in Australia extends far enough back from the present to earlier periods. climatic conditions
could have been more rigorous during certain phases and the use of protective cloaks may
hove been more necessary and, perhaps. spread over wider areas. Please see Cooper (1959)
for eariier comments.

6v0 RECORDS OF THE §,A. MUSEUM

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 601

Figs. 29 to 34 represent. specimens of many forms found upon well established camp-
sites to which the material appears to have been transported From elsewhere. They are
offered as early forms of potential skin scrapers.

Fig. 29. A scraper possessing the conventional shape including coneavity but irregular
in form. Three miles north of Ardrossan.

Fig, 30, Has a thin und well defined scraping edge, Port Arthur.
Figs. 31 and 32. ‘Implements with prepared straight edges. Hullett Cove,

Fig. 33, Almost discoidal. Both sides were provided, similarly, with neatly prepared
smooth edges. Hallett Cove.

Fig, $4. Trimmed symmetrically to an oval shape. The edges on both sides have been
neatly and lightly trimmed, Robertstown District (north of Eudunda).

The implements represented by Figs. 29-34 are made from fragile slaty shales and
mudstones. They would proye of little use in resisting breakage if employed in work
requiring pressure.

Fig. 35, Made from a wWater-worn pebble of tillite. The Lrimmed working edge,
considering, the intractable, uneven and variable texture of the material used, is remarkably
good. One or two other implements made of fillite but with inferior finish. were found.
A few blocks of the same material, some showing allempts at flaking, and others merely
split open were found, and then apparently discarded because of obyions irregularities in
their interior composition. The only favourable aspect in the use of this material appears
to be its extreme hardness and, in conseyuence, resistance to weir.

li may be of interest to add that a small glacial erratic of Porphyry, with tolerably
good Haking qualities and found at Hallett Cove, had been shaped to form a_ trimmed
core implement.

Large block implements (not figured).
(a) Melrose. 5 Ib. 607,
(b) South Hummocks. 10 Ib,
Both possess stepped trimming.

Some Stone daplements, Possibly Mounted

It is probable that the reader's first iMpression after examining Figs. 36 A-C and
37 D-H, which represent types widely divergent in shape, size. design and technique. will be
one of uncertainty regarding their use as hafted implements,

It can be seen, however, from an examination of the figured specimens already
described, many of which belong to periods remote from the present, that wide diversilications
in shape, size, design and technique also appear amongst them, The employment of
A to H as mounted afnplateienlt irrespective of their possible uses may be strengthened by
(he absence of any widely distributed conventional type with which ihey could be associated,
such as that apparent jn the comparatively recent polished stone axe-head group of the
South-East of South Australia and elsewhere.

Fie. 36, 4. An implement with a deep groove for hafting chipped out Of both edges
A trimmed working ede has been applied to the base on both sides. There are indications
ol considerable wear. The outural surface of the rock is intact elsewhere. Maximuni
Inckness is Th inches. Both sides of the implement are similar, Near Birchmore Lagoon,
Kangaroa Istana,

Fig, 36, B. A massive implement with grooving On both edges. The worn base suggests
wear due to pounding blows. Weight 23 lb. Wepowie Creek, Orroroo,

Pig. 36, C. Roughly rectangular in shape with prepared side grooving, The head of the
Hoplement has rough primary flaking and the straight working edge is trimmed upon one
side only, This implement appears to have been made froma missive flake, Weight 3 Ib
Wepowie Creek, Orroroo.

Fig, 37, DB. Made froma tough quartzite water-worn pebble and has well defined edge-
Naked hafting grooves. The nultiral surface of one side is intact. The lower portion of
the other side has been primarily faked With a clearly defined bul samewhal worn
secondarily trimined working edge. Near Cape Hart, Kangaroo Island.

62 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSEUM

COOPER—LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS 403

Fis. 37, £. Has primary and secondary trimming on the side shown, the reverse almost
similar, This implement, with semi-biface primary trimming, bas the appearance of
possessing an ill-defined hafling groove. F and H may be of interest because they appow
to resemble olhers discovered in England, figured in Evans (1872). Maximum thickpess
J inches. It ts highly improbable that the similarities are more than accidental, Hackham

Fig, 47, F, Rounded trimming along basal working edge on one side only, Flaked
concuyities on both side edges, perhaps for hafling. Reverse side bears deep pil, markings
Well defined primary flaking to shape working platform at head of implement, Hallett Cave,

Fig, 37, G, Both sides of this implement hive been completely shaped by careful primary
fiaking. ‘The base has a well defined (rimmed edge, A deep, carefully worked noreh will
be noticed on the loft hand edge. Tf this were a hafted implement the notch may indicate
that such a feature could be sufficient to ensure the security of a hafting. Five implements
of the same size, with somewhut similar notching on one edge only, have been found at
Hallett Cove und another at Wepowie Creek, Orroroo. Thickness 2 inches, The striking
platform (at apex) has been reduced in thickness by judicious trimming. Halleit Cove,

Fig. 37, H, A semi-biface implement. Roughly trimmed on both sides by the removal
of primary flakes, some of Jurge size, although the natural surface remaing in places.
Striking platform at apex is small due ta the removal of material by flaking. Secondary
trimming is confined to the working edge upon one side only. Maximum thickness
1} inches, For comparison with English types please seo Fig, 37 BE and also Generalized
Discussion, Huckham.

Note. It Was found impossible to provide two or more views of some of the figured
specimens but descriptions of [hem were made as detailed as possible to assist the reader

For further examples of implements, possibly mounted, please see Cooper (1959
ancl 1960),

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

It is desired to acknowledge, with many thanks, the assistance afforded by the
following’ —Mrs, A. E. Stone und Mr. K. Stone, Hallet) Cove, for permission, readily
viven al all limes, to examine OVer a period of many years an old native camping ground
of considerable scientitic importance existing wpon the property; Mr. K. McCallum,
Mrs. L. Arthur und Mr. and Mrs. M. Blinman and Sons, all of Melrose; Mr. and Mrs,
R. R. Underwood of Port. Wakelield; Mr. T. Clark, Pekina;s Mr. V. P. Daly, Wilmington
and many other land owners who generously mado access lo iheit properties possible;
Dr D, W. P, Corbett, Curator of Fossils and Minerals, South Australian Museum, for
assistance in identifying many rock types; the South Australian Railways Commissioner for
inviluable information relating to the use of fossiliferous material as railway ballast and
Miss MP, Boyce, Miss B. Hubbard, South Australian Museum. and Mrs, V. Haley,
forinerly of the same instituhion, for the excellent drawings.

REFERENCES
Cooper, H- M., 1943- Large Stone [Implements from Seuth Australia Ree, 5.4. Museunr,
Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369,
1948: A “Nosed” Scraper. The Sou/li Australian Natiralis!, 25 (1), pp. 5-6-

1959: Large Archaeological Stone Implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia.
Traus Roy, Sac, of S. Aust, Adelaide, 82, pp. 55-60 and plates 1-4,

1960. ‘The Archaeology of Kangaroo Island, South Australia, Rec. Sid. Museuni,

Adelaide, 13° (4). pp. 481-503.

——..—- 1961: Archacological Stone Implemenis along the Lower River Wakefield. South
Australia. Trans. Rey. See. af S. Anse, Adelaide, 64, pp. 105-115.

Eulwards, R., 1963: Preliminary Survey of the Aboriginal Renifarm Slate Serapers of South
Australia. Ree. S.d. Museum, Adelaide, 14 (3), pp. 515-524.

Evans, J, 1872; eis Ancienr Stone fiplemeniy. Weapens and Ornumnents of Greai Britain.
London.

Gillespie, Dr, 1877: Gn Phot Cores as Implements, Roy. Anthrepolegical Inst,, London,
pp. 260-263.

Holmes, W. H., 1895; Archacological Studies among the Ancient Cities of Mexico. Field
Coltanhian Museum, Chicago, pp. 285-288 and plate.

AN ARCHAEOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE IN THE VICINITY OF HALLETT
COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER

Summary

This paper describes an archaeological camping ground inland from Hallett Cove. The unusual type
of rock employed in the manufacture of the large stone implemants found upon it is described and a
comparison is made with those collected upon other sites in the vicinity. The difficulties
confronting any acurate assessment relating to the age and correct cultural succession of the large
stone implements of Australia, owing to the present lack of reliable evidence is discussed in detail.

AN ARCHAEOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE IN THE VICINITY OF
HALLETT COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. M. COOPER*

SUMMARY
This paper describes an archaeological camping ground inland from
Hallett Cove,
The unusual type of rock employed in the manufacture of the large
stone implements found upon it is described and a comparison is made with
those collected upon other sites in the vicinity,

The difficulties confronting any accurate assessment relating to the age
and correet cultural succession of the large stone implements of Australia,
owing to the present lack of reliable evidence, is discussed in detail.

THE CAMP-SITE AND ITS STONE IMPLEMENTS

The land where the camping ground was found, and in its vicinity, is
generally undulating in character and intersected by a few gullies, some stecp,
together with their small associated watercourses which trend westwards
towards the sea, All are dry throughout the year with the exception of
brief periods after heavy rains.

No vestige of the original native flora remains, with the exception here
and there, of a few specimens of Casuarina stricta (Sheoak), Melaleuca
pubescens (Tea-tree), Eucalyptus (Mallee sp.) and Piftosporium phillyreoides
(Native Apricot).

The land, mostly agricultural, is littered in many of its fields with a
mantle of small and large blocks of Travertine Limestone most of which
appear to have been dislodged and brought to the surface during cultivation.

An extensive outcrop of Pliocene Sandstone, highly fossiliferous in
places and about half a mile in length. is exposed a little below the crest
of a ridge which trends, approximately, in the general direction of N.N.E,
and S.S.W. It was from this material that the aboriginal stone implements
described in this paper, were made.

The ridge being officially unnamed, has been designated, for the purpose
of this paper, Sheidow Ridge, in deep appreciation of the owner's courtesy
in readily granting access to his property over a considerable period of years.
Its average height above sea level is approximately 320 feet and its distance
inland from Gulf St. Vincent about three-quarters of a mile,

* Honorary Associate in Anthropology, South Australian Museum

606 RECORDS OF THE $.A, MUSEUM

There occur, upon the gently sloping surface of the field immediately
below the outcrop, many smooth, angular and heavily weathered blocks of
Pliocene Sandstone, derived apparently from the outcrop itself which, after
examination, failed to disclose little if any evidence that it was the direct
source from which the implements were made.

The weathered out blocks upon the ground just below it, however,
included a large number of various shapes and sizes suitable for trimming
into the several forms of large stone implements which were found lying
amongst them, IL would appear beyond doubt, therefore, that here was the
source from which the natives drew their rock material,

The locality of the cump-site as indicated by the presence of the stone
implements strewn upon its surface, is situated towards the S.S.W, extreme
of the outcrop and appeired to cover a comparatively small area. Tt is
bisected by a small but fairly steep gully down the centre of which runs a
dry watercourse with definite evidence, in the form of scour, of water flow
after rains. It is possible that at a remote period it may have been more
or less permanent, There is a commanding view of the surrounding country-
side in many directions from this spot.

The presence upon the site of a large number of Travertine Limestone
blocks, already referred to, made collecting a very slow and tedious operation.

The examination and subsequent confirmation of possible secondary
and even primary, deliberate flaking upon some of the material needed,
during its early stages, great care owing to the unusual lype of weathering
existing upon the surface of the Pliocene Sandstone blocks, a rock type
seldom, if ever, employed consistently in South Australia for this purpose.

Invaluable aid, however, in finally determining that these specimens
were trimmed implements, was forthcoming after comparing them, very
carefully, with well established types from the large camp-site area at Hallett
Cove. It then became. evident that certain types from both locations were
vlearly comparable,

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURED SPECIMENS

Fig. J, A symmetrically-shaped pick-like implement, both edges and pointed base being
neatly tlimmed. The reverse side, strongly keeled, retains its natural surface, A somewhat
similar pointed implement, not yet described, was found near Hackhani. 9 miles distant,
Maximun thickness 13} inches.

_ Fig. 2, Derived from a massive flake. Tt possesses clearly defined primary and secondary
(rimming along portion of its curved basal circumference and a well-defined striking platform
Maximum thickness 14 inches.

Fig. 3, “Horsehoof" type implement made from a highly fossiliferous block. It is
trimmed around most af its base, similarly to the procedure generally adopted in designing
this type of tool. Heavy use is indicated by the battered state of the working edge where
wear in places has resulted in an “overhang”, The base, considering the fossiliferous nature
of the rock, is comparatively flat, Weight 14 th

COOPER—ARCHAEFOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE AT HALLETT COVE 607

608 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The existence, however, of primary and secondary trimming upon many
of these implements from Sheidow Ridge, including those figured in this
paper, is self-evident and did not need any lengthy scrutiny.

No evidence was found of the existence of any of the conventional
well-worn hammerstones, so often associated with most camping grounds,
This seems to indicate that the natives were content to pick up and employ
any casual block of convenient shape and size, amongst the hundreds avail-
able, for trimming and flaking purposes, after which it was discarded, A
Similar absence of conventional hammerstones was noticed at certain other
sites, including Melrose where quantities of weathered out blocks of quartzite
and other suitable rock material litter the surfaces of the camping grounds.
and their immediate vicinities. These were utilized for temporary use in
4 similar manner.

Many large implements found upon Kangaroo Island, the network of
sites at Hallett Cove and elsewhere, carry pit marks, the result of their casual
use as hammers, Some of the specimens from Sheidow Ridge bear similar
scar marks, although a little difficult to detect owing to the charactefistic
weathering of the type of rock employed there,

The camping ground, if one may be guided by the area upon which
the implements were found, appears to haye been comparatively small and
confined, almost exclusively, to a fairly narrow strip just below the outcrop.
It is bisected, as already remarked, by a small gully running east and west.

The implements discovered, with the exception of Fig, 2, which is
u fairly massive flake, have been derived from angular blocks of appropriate
size, their natural shape, apparently, being of little, if any. importance, always
provided that provision could be made for the addition of a simple, straight
or curved working edge, trimmed along a selected natural border of the
stone by the removal of primary and secondary flakes—sometimes primary
only, A few additional flakes were sometimes struck off, here and there,

Fig. 4. Provision for the application of a secondary trimmed working edge (as figured)
Was provided by the removal Of primary Nakes. Portion of the striking platform remains.
The natural sarface Hpon the nether side is intact but scattered pit-marks there are evidence
of jis casual use as a hammerstone.

Fig, 5, A flat-based implement which has been trimmed around the semi-circular’ pirt
OF its circumference. Heavy wear here is indicated by the battered and worn condition of its
working edge. The cutting back of the base has caused the face of the implement on this
Side to become almost vertival, The tool after reaching this condition would have last
most of its usefulness. Many similar worn but interesting large implements may be collected
upon sites elsewhere.

fig. 6. A long massive implement made from a fossiliferous block. Its rough, jagged
working edge is due, principally, to the irregular placement of many bivalve casts, Its weight,
during LR, a have been an advantage, Portion of the striking platform remains. Alsa
sec feXxt, i Ib.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE AT HALLETT COVE 609

61) RECORDS OF 'THE S,A, MUSEUM

lo remove, apparently, portions of the rock inconveniently situated. Some
of the implements possess well defined and, sometimes, massive striking
platforms.

The occurrence at Hallett Cove of large quantities of trimmed core
implements utilizing this simple shaping and trimming technique, including
many worn back by use to a remarkable degree, seems to be proof that they
were successful working tools, at least during the period or periods which
they represent,

It was thought appropriate to confine the comments expressed in this
paper generally to the Hallett Cove area with its extensive network of
camping grounds rather than attempt a wider coverage, which explains the
many references to that locality,

The subject matter discussed however, could apply equally to many
other districts in Australia.

The number of large implements found on the Sheidow Ridge site,
during the course of 15 examinations, amounted to 55 approximately.

It is difficult to explain the reason which prompted the deliberate and
consistent use at Sheidow Ridge of Pliocene Sandstone, an indifferent type
of rock, significantly ignored by the natives elsewhere in the Hallett Cove
urea, It may have been due to its exceptional hardness and consequent
resistance to wear but this seems hardly convincing enough in the presence
of fine-grained quartzites in the neighbourhood, Its use, alternatively, may
have been due to any one of many other causes, possibly a very simple
one but which unfortunately, with the passage of time, il is now too late
to determine,

Several of the implements were trimmed from highly fossiliferous
Pliocene Sandstone blocks including Fig. 6 which is in large part composed
of bivalves and casts. This implement at first sight gave the appearance of
being indifferently made because the trimming applied to it resulted in a
very jagged working edge, made worse by the presence of many irregularly
placed shells,

Fig. 7, Made from highly fossiliferous. material containing shells, casts and small pieces
of miscellaneous rocks, Possesses a pronounced striking platform. The trimming, similarly
to Fig. 6 is rough due to its composition, Its design and shape, similar to others at Hallett
Cove proper seem to indicate its possible use as some primitive form of chopping axe, cither
hafted or held in the hand. Both sides of this implement are almost similar, Maximum
thickness 24 inches,

Fig. 8. An implement of simple design with a well-defined almost straight working
edge, secondarily trimmed, It is comparable with many others found at Melrose, Hallett Cove
proper and elsewhere. The nether side, wilh evidence of pitting due to casual hammering,
retains its natural surface, Possesses a striking platform.

Fiz. 9 An implement of pointed shape with even trimming mostly primary, along both
edges. The natural surface of the reverse side remains untouched.

611

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE AT HALLETT COVE

612 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Indications after a trial test, however, showed that when this implement
was employed for rough scraping, chopping and sawing purposes, it proved
to be a most efficient tool. The choice of material used and the consequent
rough and jagged working edge, produced in consequence, may have been
deliberate. Fig. 7 is a similar comparable example. Others were also found.

The average size of the implements from Sheidow Ridge is a little below
that of those, generally, from Hallett Cove proper and the individual types
are less. No small implements, including microliths, were found.

A comparison between the chosen locality upon the ridge and those at
Hallett Cove is interesting. The usual requirements for a native camp-site
were followed, generally, at Hallett Cove proper, that is, an extensive view,
proximity to a water supply, gradually rising but well drained soil, sandy or
loamy if possible, and devoid of rocks. One disadvantage, but probably a
minor one, necessitated the gathering and transportation to the site of suitable
implement making material.

At Sheidow Ridge however, a site was chosen which provided upon the
spot, in situ as it were, all the rock material required. This site possesses
at the present time, none of the conventional requirements of a camp-site
with the exception of a fairly extensive view in some directions. This
unusual choice of site, therefore, may have been deliberate owing to the
presence of the rock material upon it.

The implements found upon the Ridge Site appear to possess much in
common which seems to indicate that natives of no more than one culture
period resided there. Its dating for the present remains indeterminable.
The site, upon the other hand, may not have proved attractive to others at
a later period.

This apparent sole occupational culture period at Sheidow Ridge is in
marked contrast to the extensive network of sites at Hallett Cove where the
diversity of implement types indicates their occupation at different periods,
probably over a considerable space of time but even here there appear to
have been periods when the sites were deserted. This may account for the
absence of Pirri and other microliths widely distributed elsewhere.

In the apparent absence of local topography, favouring the existence of
rock shelters and other spots suitable for stratification, the importance of
surface material in vast quantities such as that collected at Hallett Cove—
of various types associated obviously with different culture periods—is
invaluable because it includes all the different types of implements, employed
by the people residing there, from their remotest occupational period until
the last.

COOPER—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CAMP-SITE AT HALLETT COVE 613

This does not assist us unfortunately, in arranging in their correct order,
the periods which they represent or their age, Stratified material found in
various areas hag already proved to be of inestimable value in the direction
of assessing their correct sequence and Carbon 14 datings in estimating their
respective ages. This has been especially useful in relation to small
implements, Stratifications relating to large stone implements, however, have
been disappointingly few in number,

Explorations for stratified implements and suitable material for Carbon
\4 datings have been and continue to be carried out by dedicated researchers.
This work is being recognized, more and more, as an indispensable part of
Australian Archaeology.

If the lack of stratified deposits of large early implements, discovered
up to the present persists, it may be due to some obscure cause. such as
the topographical and climatic features existing during those periods or even,
perhaps, to the native population at that time being very small in number
and widely scattered,

All the more recent culture periods seem to have witnessed the gradual
disappearance of the large and bulky material due to the introduction of
various types of medium size including beautifully worked flakes, “Tula”
adze scrapers, knives und others. A need would still remain however for
employing large tools for some purposes of a heavy nature including chopping
down large boughs, cutting out wooden blocks of considerable size and
roughly scraping them in the initial stages of the preparation of domestic
and other articles,

It would be most interesting ta ascertain, therefore, whether any of
the earlier well-proven types of large tools persisted into the more recent
periods, where the small implements appear to have been dominant, for
purposes such as those referred to above. This could be ascertained, in part
at least, by the discovery of some substantial stratified large implement
deposits with associated Carbon 14 datings. These discoveries furthermore,
would enable a beginning to be made in classifying the dominant types, at
least, which exist amongst the vast accumulation of large implements
awaiting attention,

The widely distributed “Horsehoof” trimmed core type, which exists
in many variations of shapes, sizes, simple and more complex trimming
technique and skill in workmanship (after taking into consideration the
degree of suitability of the rock employed) is a possible example if the
exisience of this “overlap” proves to be true,

The stone implement culture of the long extinct Kangaroo Islanders,
believed to be of considerable age, includes conventional specimens of the
“Horsehoof type”.

8

614 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The unfortunate scarcity, up to the present, of stratified large implement
types, the consequent lack of knowledge relating to their culture sequence
and age dating confront us with a serious problem and if, in addition, one
lays aside all assumptions, possibilities, probabilities and hypothetical theories
relating to them the amount of unassailable evidence remaining to us is
extremely small.

If there is one essential and indispensable requirement it is—the
discovery of many more stratified deposits of this material in many and
widely separated areas. This would assist, materially, in placing the more
plentiful and widely distributed types into their correct succession periods
and if correlated Carbon 14 datings are also available the time rate of
diffusion and its directional aspects would prove of value and interest.
This time dating, however, may be approximate only because the particular
deposit being examined would not necessarily be the earliest one for that
locality.

Meanwhile the many thousands of large stone implements in a wealth
of types, weights, sizes and in varying grades of design and workmanship
remain carefully stored in many Australian National Institutions (including
a vast number in the South Australian Museum), until such time when much
more information is available, which it is hoped may not be far away,

It will then be possible to assign to this invaluable material—some
of which must surely represent the earliest stages of the Antiquity of Man
in Australia—their correct succession in the material culture periods of our
former native peoples.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

_ tt is desired to acknowledge. with appreciation, the admirable drawings made by
Miss Brenda Hubbard, South Australian Museum, for this Paper.

REFERENCES
Cooper, H. M., 1943: Large stone implements from South Australia, Rec. S. Aust, Mus.

Adelaide, 7. pp. 343-369,

1959; Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia.
Trans. R. Soc, §. Aust., Adelaide, 82, pp. 55-59,

1960: The archaeology of Kangaroo Island. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., Adelaide, 13,
pp. 481-503.

1968: A further description of large stone implements from South Australia.
Rec, S. Aust. Mus. (in press).

NOMENCLATURE OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURES AND
ASSOCIATED IMPLEMENTS IN AUSTRALIA

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

Principles governing a study of Australian archaeological cultures are given with illustrative
examples.

The importance of named culture phases : the Tartangan, Pirrian, Mudukian and Murundian found
at Tartanga and Devon Downs in 1929 and the earlier Kartan Cultures are reiterated. Some
alternative interpretations are reviewed, and new radiocarbon dates are quoted in support of the
views expressed. An ecloueraa and several geometric microliths from Pirrian and Mudukian levels at
Devon Downs and elsewhere are depicted; also two implements from Kangaroo Island are
illustrated and discussed because their misinterpretation in later writings has led to erroneous
conclusions of far-reaching significance. Geometric microliths from Western Australia, with
remains of resin mountings and made from glass, of modern date, and a hafted knife of pirri type
from Barrow Creek are used to illustrate a statement on the presence of culture gradients in
Australia.

NOMENCLATURE OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURES AND
ASSOCIATED IMPLEMENTS IN AUSTRALIA’

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, SouTH AUSTRALIAN MusEUM
(Submitted October 12, 1965)

Figs. 1-17

SUMMARY

Principles governing a study of Australian archaeological cultures are
given with illustrative examples.

The importance of named culture phases: the Tartangan, Pirrian,
Mudukian and Murundian found at Tartanga and Devon Downs in 1929
and the earlier Kartan Cultures are reiterated. Some alternative interpreta-
tions are reviewed, and new radiocarbon dates are quoted in support of the
views expressed. An elouera and several geometric microliths from Pirrian
and Mudukian levels at Devon Downs and elsewhere are depicted; also two
implements from Kangaroo Island are illustrated and discussed because their
misinterpretation in later writings has led to erroneous conclusions of far-
reaching significance. Geometric microliths from Western Australia, with
remains of resin mountings and made from glass, of modern date, and a
hafted knife of pirri type from Barrow Creek are used to illustrate a
statement on the presence of culture gradients in Australia.

There are two appendices, one a brief history of some of the author's
archaeological activities since his field work began on Groote Eylandt in
1921, and the other a bibliography.

CONTENTS
Page

Culture concepts in Australian Archaeology .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 616
Nomenclature of Cultures and Industries .. .. me fd cet ad uo O25
Functions and recording of archaeological irholetients rieMern, sacks G28
Ulustrations of implements .. .. .. 2... 0. 2. we we we eee) «6631
Archaeological collections .. .. 2. 6. ci ee ee ee te) ee ae) 6631
The archaeological succession in south-eastern Aubtratta ve te we 634
Appendix I. Historical notes on some Australian cultures and their

marker implements . .. 2. 6. 1. be ee ee ee ee ee ee ee =~ 637
Appendix II. References .. .. 2. 6. 1) ee ee ee ee ee ee ee) =—639

1A draft of this paper was read and circulated at a working ‘conference of the Australian
Institute of Aboriginal Studies in April 1963.

616 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CULTURE CONCEPTS IN AUSTRALIAN ARCHAEOLOGY

Several concepts have developed since archaeological studies began in
Australia. These may be called—

The Monocultural Concept.
The Culture Succession Concept.
The Multi-cultural Concept.

The Monocultural Concept

Early interpretations of Australian aboriginal culture stressed its
seeming unity in area and time. Writers, including the late A. S. Kenyon,
gave little heed to an archaeological past and tended to consider everything
they found as belonging to an ethnological present.

The latest exponent of this monocultural concept was the late S. Mitchell
(1949) who had many years of association with Kenyon. In the introduc-
tion to his book he denied the existence of a culture sequence in Australia.
To him all known types of aboriginal artefacts represented a continuing
single culture. He named many local industries, using present-day tribal
names as basis for his nomenclature. He followed a precedent set by
Howchin (1934) who described the implements found on the Adelaide
plains, without regard to any possible time factor, as all of the Adelaide
tribe, Some of the implements collected by Howchin were of Pleistocene
date, upwards of 10,000 years old, whereas the pirri implements were
Mid-Recent in southern Australia, and his stone axes were of even more
modern date,

The Culture Succession Concept

Excavations at Tartanga Island and at Devon Downs (Hale and
Tindale 1930) revealed evidence for cultural shifts in the remains of human
occupation, accompanied by indications of physiographic changes in the
Lower Murray Valley.

A succession of cultural phases Tartangan, Pirrian, Mudukian and
Murundian were named.

FIGS, 1-5. MUDUKIAN TYPE MICROLITHS FROM SEVERAL LOCALITIES

Fig. /, Crescent microlith with reverse retouch, Policeman Poimtl, Coorong, South
Australia, in red earthy layer of exclusively Mudukian site (A.48267 in S.A. Museum),
collected by N. B, Tindale. Fig. 2. Crescent microlith, small example from eroded
surface, Policeman Point (A.48275). Mudukian Culture. Fig. 3. Woakwine Point
in red earthy layer, Policeman Point (A.48270), Mudukian Culture. Fig. @.
Woakwine Point, Site 7, South-East of South Australia, T. D. Campbell (A.48810),
Fig. 5. Woakwine Point, Blundell Valley, west of Canberra, A.C,T., collected by
N. B. Tindale (A.54331).

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 617
NOMENCLATURE

Pit di

YY

Wy jr), Ds Mt
Has
Hl (KOs »

B.K. Hussrap,

618 RECORDS OF THE 8A. MUSEUM

A year later evidence on Kangaroo Island (Tindale and Maegraith,
1931) suggested a still earlier culture phase, afterwards recogmized as
principally of Pleistocene age, This was named the Kartan Culture (Tindale
1941: 145).

During the yeurs after 1930 detailed physiographic studies were made
in the Murray Valley and coastal South Australia with the hope of developing
a time scale, These studies established that the Tartangan deposits were
laid down prior ta what is now called the Older Peronian (Three Metre
Eustatic) Terrace, and were drowned and mineralized by changes in sea
level affecting the river valley upstream beyond Tartanga. Indications that
later climatic chariges had occurred were developed in a series of eight papers
(Tindale, 1931-1963), There was parallel work by Sprigg (1952), Hossfeld
(1950) and others. Time scale of the succession of these happenings is
now controlled by radiocarbon dates.

Since the first discovery of a culture succession on the River Murray
the reality of it has been tested using many thousands of specimens from
rock shelters, surface sites, from lesser excavations, and from test section
controlled open sites, Some of the most useful information has come from
isolated open sites occupied only during a single culture phase. A notable
example is the exclusively Mudukian site situated on u former inlet of the
Coorong at Policeman Point, South Australia. This site was occupied while
sea stood at a height of between 1,5 and 2,0 metres above its present level.
It was abandoned when the lowering of water level and a beach bar
destroyed its advantages. Its implements are comparable with those of
Mudukian levels in Devon Downs Rock shelter. A few key examples are
given (Figs. 1-3).

The new data from many hundreds of sites confirms a conclusion that
each of the cultural units at Devon Downs and Tartanga was widely spread
in Australia. The sequence of the units is the same over wide areas, and the
times of first Occurrence in adjacent areas tend to be comparable, However
it has become evident that there are time lags or gradients to be seen when
the whole Australian area is considered. Thus a culture phase may linger,
sometimes in modified form, in one area long after it has been replaced
elsewhere. These gradients tend to be from north to south and from east
to west suggesting that new cultural influences were tending to come from a
generally north-easterly direction. Areas of culture lag are east of the Great
Dividing Range, the more arid parts of the Great Western Desert, and on the
uplands of the western Northern Territory where, to take an example,
Pirrian styled projectile points are still used in a variety of ways, The knife
shown in Fig, 6 and the well known hafted unifacially worked stone spears
are from this area. There is a culture lag also in the Kimberley Ranges in
north-western Australia, In south-western Australia the last phase of the

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 619
NOMENCLATURE
Mudukian culture had not quite ended at the time of the coming of Western
civilization, as evidenced by a few modern survivals of geometric microliths
characteristic of that phase (Figs. 7-8).
Excavations at Fromm Landing by Mulvaney (1960) confirmed the
succession at Devon Downs from the present day down to an early Pirrian

BK Hussaan

FIGS, 6-9. PRESENT-DAY AUSTRALIAN IMPLEMENTS AND AN
ARCHAEOLOGICAL ONE
Fig. 6. Pirri point hafted with resin as a knife, Barrow Creek (A.4164): similar
specimens are known to be made and traded south from the upper Victoria River,
Northern Territory. Fig. 7. Three of a set of eighteen geometric microliths, in glass,
from Western Australia still retaining blackboy tree resin of haft (A.2356), collected
through Sir Edward Stirling. Fig. 8 Four of the same set restored to hafted position
as indicated by resin surviving on the specimens. Fig. 9. Discoidal microlith from
Pirrian Layer viii, Devon Downs Rockshelter (A.29193): it appeared first as
photographic figure 193 in Hale and Tindale (1930).

620) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

level, The sniall incongruities he found are the historical consequence of
the sites being 20 miles apart on opposite sides of a large river and there-
fore likely to have been occupied by different persons and families, with
individual habits and behaviour patterns. They had access to different
sources of implement stone. Mulvaney’s second excavation, in a shelter
only a hundred yards away from his first presented far greater differences
and at first sight these seemed very strange. In the living culture however,
the differences found in his two sites are of the kind that distinguish a
woman's cooking camp from a residential area frequented by men, Some
details are given in u later paragraph.

Direct comparisons of cullura) material from Devon Downs and Fromm
Landing material show that layer by layer resemblances are impressive and
the association between geometric microliths and the Mudukian culture
phase is clear, although the significant role of these small implements was
Hol Apparent when the muduk implement was chosen by Hale and Tindale
(1930) as a marker for it. At that time geometric microliths as a type had
not been well recognized in Australia. Nevertheless excavations at Devon
Downs recovered nearly as many as were revealed at comparable horizons
in the Fromm Landing excavation, Several of these Pirrian and Mudukian
microliths from Devon Downs are figured here (Figs. 9-12). They include
some recorded in the original report only by photographs and not adequately
noticed by Mulvaney (1961: 79 and 84) and later considered to be absent
from Pirrian layers (Mulvaney 1963: 43), Significant specimens from
some other Mudukian sites are illustrated for comparison (Pigs, 13-14).

The Multi-cultural Concept

In recent years names for archacological culture phases have multiplied
und others may be added since the results of any excavation are likely to
show some differences and there is perhaps a temptation to reduce the status
of earlier concepts so that the new finds may be given significance.

Certain pertinent facts, based on information available from living
uboriginals may give perspective and prevent undue proliferation of archueo-
logical culture terms, and yet allow recognition of the existence of valid
local differences. Some of the differences are a matter of livelihood, In some
areas hunting dominates over fishing activities; desert-versus rainforest-
dwelling encourages different habits; mallee scrub living when compared
with sandhill dwelling is apt fo show unlike patterns since people who live
on water from the roots of trees have no settled living places. Other
differences are historical—some peripheral communities retain material
culture traits seemingly out of phase, Sometimes they are casual local
survivals of older implement types superseded elsewhere

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 621
NOMENCLATURE
Up to the present only three living culture phases have been named in
Australia, the Murundian generally over Australia and particularly in the
west of the Murray-Darling Basin, the Kimberleyan in north-western
Australia and the Milingimbian in Arnhem Land; the last named was
considered by McCarthy at first to be Murundian. A fourth and a fifth
culture grouping probably can be recognized, one in the Western Desert
where very old implement styles survive and the other in the Torres Strait
Islands, where a relatively late intrusive group is living. The Kimberleyan
may be a post-climax survival of the Pirrian Culture in which the chief
marker implement. the pirri projectile point, has been developed by
additional work into a biface pressure-flaked implement, as happens each
lime a new Kimberleyan point is being manufactured. In support of this
conclusion archaeological pirri implements may be found in the sand directly
underlying the present day camp debris at Moolabulla (noted during field
work in 1953, when the whole process of pressure-faking of Kimberleyan
points was Observed and filmed for the Djaru and Kitja peoples). Further
east on the central plateau of the Northern Territory and in the upper
Victoria River area pirri-makiog survived as it did also into the 19th century
in the area near Lake Waukarlykarly in Western Australia,

In coastal Victoria microlith users may have continued their work
almost until modern times, Thus they were very close to the Mudukian/
Murundian transition and il may be correct ta suggest in south-western
Australia that we are seeing a very late phase of the Mudukian. Since the
drawings for the modern glass microliths shown as Pigs. 7-8 were prepared,
Mr, K, Akerman has found similar microlith implements also made from
glass, on a campsite at Walyunga, Western Australia. His suite of
implements shows much of the character of a Mudukian series.

Both McCarthy and Tindale have argued that the edge-ground axe is
a late cultural acquisition, that spread quickly in Australia, Wherever its
use would be of advantage it was adopted but rejected in treeless sand
deserts and in other places where it was without function. One of its
principal uses was in the search for Trigena honeybee nests in hollow trees
(Tindale 1966).

Study of the types of stone axes originating in (he igneous rock
quarries in the Cloncurry district of Queensland has been usetul in giving
an understanding of the way culture change went on in Australia with the
appearance of the edge-ground axe. The evidence for spread of this
particular axe is clear, since the type of stone is highly charucteristiv, and
the source js unmistakable, There is no other basaltic outcrop within a
radius of over 400 miles. Archaeologists find two main types, the flaked-
atid-edge-ground variety and the flaked, hammer-dressed-and-edge-ground
type. At the time of first European contact the hammer-dressed type was

622 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

sill being distributed southward and eastward and west along well recognized
trade routes, the other type had been superseded, Thus all known
authentically hafted axes of Cloncurry stone are hammer-dressed ones.

The hatted edge-ground axe and its known successor, the hammer-
dressed variety, were acquired by Murundian culture users as late innova-
tions in the Lower Murray Valley, without a major culture change taking
place. I consider Murundian culture users as advanced where the new
implement has been accepted because it was a boon, and others as retarded
where it was of little use and not generally adopted. In between were some
transitional areas such as west of the Murray River in South Australia where
the incentive to use axes was limited, the mines far away and axes so scarce
that over a century of gleaning has revealed fewer than half a dozen
archaeological axeheads (Tindale 1933, 1936). In contrast an area of
about equal size east of the River, particularly in the well-wooded south-
eastern area of South Australia has yielded several thousand archaeological
examples of edgeground type, In addition a dozen hafted examples have
survived to show they were in use in the living culture. Some of the
difference between advanced and retarded Murundians can be ascribed to
remoteness of sources of supply of types of basaltic rock preferred for hafted
axes, Barriers to trade imposed by a schism, like that between circumcising—
and non-circumcising tribes-people may have helped to prevent the later day
westward spread of the axe,

The trend of evidence indicates a measure of cultural unity over large
areas in Murundian times.

However, let us consider the possibility of an extensive fragmentation
of the living Australian cultural scene, Subdivision might be made in several
different ways. A sample list could include: —

Coastal people of the Northern Territory;

Inland people of Arnhem Land;

People of the Kimberley Ranges in Western Australia:

South Western Australians, the -wp people;

South Western Australians, the -ing people;

The non-circumcizing people of the West Coast of Western
Australia;

Western Desert peoples;

Canning Basin peoples;

Central Australian tribes—people east of the Aranda/Kukatja
boundary;

Cape York Peninsula people;

North Eastern Queensland—the rain forest tribes-people;

North Bastern Queensland—the dry forest and grasslands people;

Murray-Darling Basin tribes;

m
w

TINDALE—ARCHAROLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 6
NOMENCLATURE

Western Queensland tribes;
Coastal New South Wales tribes:
Gippsland people:

Tasmanian aborigines,

To these 17 major groups one might add smaller groups such as the
isolated Kaiadilt of Bentinck Island, the Tiwi of Melville Island, the Djaui
of Sunday Island and the Bidawal of the mountains of the New South
Wales-Victorian border. These 21 groups may have some pretensions to
differentiation.

A further degree of subdivision, if considered necessary, might involve
the tribal one, of the approximately 650-700 discrete tribes present in
Australia,

Whatever type of framework we might seek, there is not sufficient data
to differentiate material culture trait blocks on a tribal basis, even when all
perishable material is taken into account. One might be hard put to define
living material cultures even ip terms of a score of regional types. It would
not be possible to proceed thus far, particularly if actual stone remainders
of present day tools only and similar imperishable objects could be taken
into consideration.

Working from the known to the unknown it is clear there is room in
present day Australia for only a few concurrently functioning cultures;
perhaps only for a single culture, with peripheral late survivals from one or
more earlier ones. namely the traces of the microlith-using peoples in several
places, the peaples in the Western Desert who use jimari Knives of Tartangan
and Tasmanian form, the pebblechopper users along the Queensland coast
(Jackson 1939), the Kimberleyans, and of course the Tasmanian aborigines.

Within the small number of cultures which we can postulate with a
measure of certainty there may be recognized a somewhat greater number
of local industries, reflecting different economies and determined by the use
of different local varieties of stone, each with its own special characteristics
and capacities for use, sometimes demanding local adaptations in modes of
hafting and handling such as the use of animal skin bindings in place of
resins in some areas of Queensland. Clear differences exist between the
industrial habits of Walpiri and Pintubi men and suggest that these may
reflect long-standing differences in tool-making techniques between Central
Australian and Western Desert peoples (Tindale 1956), The fist axe Users
of the islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria also retain anomalous tools and
tool using techniques. Any given industry tends to spread however over
a wider area than a single tribe, for not every area is equally blessed
with a source of supply of raw materials and the material from any one
mining area fs likely to have travelled many miles to its users. For example

624 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kimberley biface spear points may become circumcision knives after having
been traded for a distance of upwards of 600 miles ina southerly direction
(Tindale 1965).

Let us try and make a case for as many discrete industries as possible,
using as a test area that occupied by the 60 tribes living in the Murray-
Darling Basin. Using all aspects of culture including language we might
differentiate fewer than half a dozen distinctly different units; using material
culture items alone, perhaps no more than a single unit, The major
distinction is that in one-half of the area the spearthrower is not used.
Thus there are po bone spearthrower pegs to become part of an archaeo-
logical record, This situation would not be greatly improved if we used
only the stone and bone remainders of implements in developing our
analysis of the situation, Within the one industry there is a gradient,
northerners possessing quality stone axes. Edgeground stone chisels are
common in the south,

In Australia there is in general direct physical contact between tribes
to the extent of approximately 15% intermarriage (Tindale 1953). Sharing
a common riyerine environment and material culture as they do this degree
of contact ensures that cultural novelties would be rapidly transmitted about
the Murray-Darling Basin. Any new implement type soon would become
common near any place of manufacture, with a gradient away from
this source,

Transects across the Basin in several directions cut through a maximum
of eight tribal areas, and because the Kamilaroi and the Wiradjuri are wide-
ranging, a line through their territories would be only four tribes long,
Ideas and practices evidently would become common property in a
relatively few generations.

Thus if we study living peoples we are in a better position to assess the
archaeology of an area. I quote an example where this type of evidence has
been a help in making a correct assessment. It relates to the culture phase
called Tartangan. Mulvaney (1961) raised objections to the use of
implements of similar types from Noola, Lake Menindee, Devon Downs
and the South-East of South Australia to confirm the existence of a common
Tartangan type. Similar ones have now been found at Kenniff Cave in
Queensland and at Keilor in Victoria, The objections were trivial and now
seem even less valid since intermediate archaeological sites have become
‘available and disappear when consideration is given to the close relationships
existing between the living peoples who replaced the Tartangans,

T have already referred to the marked differences encountered by
Mulvaney (1960 and 1964) in archaeological evidence from two adjoining
shelters at Fromm Landing. Very obviously these cannot be interpreted as
indicating the simultaneous presence of two industries. When living people

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 625
NOMENCLATURE
are consulted (and there is one aboriginal person still living who in his
childhood days camped at both Fromm Landing and Devon Downs) a
likely explanation is forthcoming. Cooking fires and the gathering places
for women are at a little distance from places where men tend to
congregate,

Milerum, the last of the Tanganekald of the Coorong, who spent his
childhood in the bush, also has described women’s camps to me. The
women of his tribe were forbidden to handle stone for cutting purposes,
Far such work they depended chiefly on sharp edges of mussels and on
knives made trom solid Eucrassatella valves, Their only other implement
was the edge of their thumbnail which, from constant use and periodic
sharpening became thick and strong: it served in trimming basket reeds,
opening fish and in scraping roots, Under such circumstances women’s
cooking fire hearths would yield quite different archaeological traces than
would those occupied by males.

Bearing in mind the long Murundian tradition, of at least two millenia
in the Lower Murray Valley, it seems clear to me that the absence of all
but mussel shells, scarcely distinguishable as knives when discarded in
places where many others are being cooked in fires, is a clear indication
that the use made of the southern rock shelter at Fromm Landing was that
of a women’s camp.

NOMENCLATURE OF CULTURES AND [NDUSTRIES

A sound system of nomenclature, preferably based on priority seems
desirable to solve the nomenclatorial contradictions developing among
Australian workers in prehistory. Part of the misunderstanding which exists
may be based on differing interpretations of the role of the terms indusiry
and culture in the naming of archaeological units. These are not synonyms.

An archaeological culture is named from a specific suite of implements
ov other relics. Spatially and temporally it preserves a common facies or
character, suggesting an underlying unity; it tends to be widespread and is
a major unit. The relics which denote it may appear at a given place either
through migration or evolution. A cullure may persist for a long time,
sometimes measurable in thousands of years; it matures or wanes and
ultimately either disappears or is replaced by another. By culture contact
and by mutation it may change into another newer one. If we had perfect
knowledge of history, the whole process in any one place would seem like
a flowing stream of events. Breaks in sequence, sometimes caused only by
deficiencies in the archaeological record, enable development of a nomen-
clature for the principal preserved sections. In the living cultures we can

b26 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

ste stages in these changes as if they were clines, for example the changes
in Australia due to the coming in of edge-ground axes mentioned earlier
in this paper,

The term industry is used with a somewhat more local significance.
Within a given area local differences can be detected, based on the exploita-
ion of differing classes of raw materials. For example pebbles instead of
angular blocks of stone, Matthews (1966) gives an interesting example of
this difference. Differing local demands, following dependence on lacally
varied econonnes may lie behind differences in industries, Sometimes the
effects are merely seasonal duc, for example, to the exploitation of a
seashore area in summer and an inland one in winter, with differing needs
in tools and varied activities at two seasons. A series of industries can be
contemporaneous und fall into a common culture phase. Among living
people we can see fisher-folk along rivers living fear inland kangaroo
hunters; shore-dwellers and desert-frequenters; mallee scrub nomads and
sedentary exploiters of rain forest areas have differing needs. A series of
industries therefore are the local and contemporary expressions of a wider
single culture phase, Each industry is removed from the next in space, but
is linked by the possession of underlying similarities indicating cultural unity.

In an analogy with zoological terms a culture would correspond to a
species, an industry would be a Jeca/ race, All the local races together
comprise the species and following zoological practice the first named race
becomes the nymotypical one. I does not have to be the most characteristic
or common one, for this may not be determined and appreciated for many
years after the initial discovery and naming of the species.

A specific example may now be given where confusion between culture
and industry has led to difficulties. There is in Australia a widespread
culture whose most characteristic stone implements are microlithic crescents
and other geometric forms. It was first recognized at Devon Downs, where
it is rather impoverished, because of the local paucity of good stone for
implements. It was named the Mudukian Culture. This name has priority,
It occurs also at Fromm Landing. There are other sites near North West
Bend, and an even richer suite has already been mentioned from Policeman
Point, South Australia (the Policeman Point Industry, to give it a name),
Along the east coast it reappears as the Bondaian Industry and it appears
also with similar suites of implements at intermediate places, 1 list
Blundell's Valley, near Canberra and show a specimen (Fig, 5), Mornington
Peninsula, Victoria (Fig. 13), and Noola near the headwaters of the
Macquarie River, New South Wales, Most of the implements of this
Mudukian Culture reappear in other parts of Australia, There is 4 200d
site, with many particularly fine specimens, some made from. difficult-to-
work quartz crystal, at Halcombe Creek, north of the MacDonnell Ranges

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 627
NOMENCLATURE

uN

B. K. Huaaarc.

FIGS. 10-14. MUDUKIAN AND PIRRIAN MICROLITHS FROM DEVON
DOWNS ROCKSHELTER AND ELSEWHERE

Fig. 10. Bondi type microlith from Pirrian Layer viii, Devon Downs (A,29198);
it appeared in photographic figure 198 of Hale and Tindale (1930). Fig. //. Broken
crescent microlith in quartz. Mudukian Layer yi, Devon Downs (A.29019); not
figured in original report. Fig. 72. Crescent microlith of chert from native mine
near Berri, from Mudukian Layer vi (A.29043); not figured in original report.
Fig. 13. Mudukian microlith of bondi type, Cape Schank, Mornington Peninsula,
Victoria (A.51337), collected by Miss U. S. Teague. Fig. /4. Mudukian microlith
of bondi type, Murramurang, New Sonn Wales (A.51280), collected by Miss
U. S. Teague.

428 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in Central Australia. Prof. J. B. Birdsell found sites with characteristic
bondi points associated with other geometric microliths in the Kalgoorlie
area of Western Australia, Approximately 200 places are listed in the
records filed in the South Australian Museum indicating the presence of
the microlithic implements of the Mudukian Culture. They are present in
all of the Australian States. Tt is probable that when local differences are
evaluated many of the suites of implements can be given local names as
industries, since the people who used them must have had different economic
backgrounds and [ think that local styles can be detected. Yet underlying
linity of form and suite must bring them together as local expressions of an
overall Mudukian Culture.

Microliths first appear in the Pirrian culture phase, but their great
period of elaboration is in the Mudukian phase where they are dominant,
and serye as convenient marker implements.

FUNCTIONS AND RECORDING OF ARCHABOLOGICAL
IMPLEMENTS

A fixed nomenclature for archaeological implements is desirable and
should be developed, as far as possible on the basis of priority, leading to
# stable nomenclature.

In developing a nomenclature for Australian archaeological implements
one must take into account the almost unique situation we have in which
our archaeological specimens can be linked directly with observations on
simtlar ones being made and used by living people. Archaeologists there-
fore should not insist on any artificial frame of reference or on any concept
which does not take into consideration data on the living, recognizing that
they are likely to be cognate, There are a few types for which a living
example has not been identified but these may well be fitted into gaps in
the range of types since in any given area it is reasonable to eXpect certain
basic functions to be performed with stone tools at hand, Thus there are
tools used for chopping, scraping, cutting, piercing, wedging off, pressing,
heating, ironing. hammering, ubrading and milling,

Some people relegate archaeologically discovered artefacts whose
function is not immediately apparent to a class called “ceremonial”. In
Most instances in Australia further information has revealed a positive tool
function for such implements. An example of such a discovery is the
ooyurka (ujurka), which is warmed near a fire and used in the making
of composite spears as an ironing and smoothing tool for resin joints and
splices, The reniform slate tools once claimed to be “ceremonial” are skin
flensers, and the interesting high-backed discoidal scrapers for which no
apparent function could be suggested, were shown to be chisel stones when

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 629
NOMENCLATURE

Prof. J. B. Birdsell observed one in use near Balgo, in North Western
Australia. It had been set in resin on the end of a stick. He saw the
specimen in the act of its being removed and discarded in favour of a
fresh stone, and retrieved it. It is now in the South Australian Museum
collection.

Archaeologists should recognize that every stone tool may have a
variety of uses in addition to its principal one. Besides its well advertised
role as a knife and adze has anyone visualized the kandi stone on the handle
of a Western Desert spearthrower as being on occasion, a toothpick? It
may also be replaced in a few localities. Thus among hunting boomerang
users in the area north of the MacDonnell Ranges the fire-hardened and
deliberately sharpened proximal end of the boomerang may take the place
of the stone of the spearthrower for the purpose of opening the belly of
game animals when extracting the intestines. This may account for the
lessened frequency of occurrence of tula and kandi on some archaeological
sites north of the MacDonnell Ranges. (It is to be noted that while never
reported many North American Indian boomerangs, the so-called rabbit
sticks, have this same knife-like feature. )

It is the duty of students of the living cultures to describe, figure and
record as far as possible with exact aboriginal terminologies, all tools,
processes of uses and manufacture and all ideas associated with implement
utilization. A worker should neither be expected to force his observations
into archaeological terms, nor have to conform to any system to which there
are valid objections. He should describe and define his type specimens and
illustrate them in good detail, with all possible terms and names associated
with them, as objects of living culture.

Early reports on implements, sometimes derived from the accounts of
the original explorers, often are casual and may be in more than one
language. If a system of priority is adopted for archaeological nomen-
clature two questions arise immediately—(a) Should non-English terms be
adopted when they have priority and (6) should there be a time limit?

Zoologists give us a precedent. They use a specific edition of the work

of Linnaeus in 1767, as a starting point for their system of priorities in
zoological nomenclature.

Possible starting points for an Australian archaeological implement
naming system are the year of Captain Cook’s landing at Botany Bay or
the Conference on methods of recording arranged by the Governor of
South Australia, Sir George Grey, at Adelaide in 1841. If a more modern
date were considered it would be desirable to include the observations of
Carl Strehlow, of Walter E. Roth, and Spencer and Gillen: this would
require a starting date before the end of the 19th Century,

630 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Implements similar to those found in Australia have been named from
other parts of the world, It is a point for debate as to how far these terms
might be applied in Australia, A case for a local term, rather than an
introduced one, even of prior date would be strong if the Australian term
reflected observations based on the living culture, rather than the dead,

Some of the earlier sources are not of high merit and there are some
difficulties in deciding what is a recognizable type of publication. While
some old original sources should be recognized, it may be desirable to set
standards for the future. Many sources are available.

Formal reports with adequate illustrations.
An example is the excellent technical description of the lamma
implement by Roth; this has tended to be overlooked in favour
of tula.

Less formal reports with or without adequate illustrations.
Reports in magazines and travel books.
Printed record cards, distributed to those interested.
South Australian Museum record card, 1937 to date (Fig. 15).
Reports in newspapers and other ephemeral publications,

Much primary data in Australian ethnography is preserved only in
such sources, An example is Falkinder’s report in the Sydney
Morning Herald of 14 June 1930, recording archaeological
finds of what he calls Tasmanoid types in New South Wales.

with a proposed terminology based on Tasmanian words. No
more formal record has ever been published.
Research motion picture films,

There are 50 published 16 mm. films of the Board for Anthropo-
logical Research, University of Adelaide (1930 onwards) in
which many implements are illustrated in use. These are used
in teaching at Universities in many parts of the world and their
names are already widely known.

Printed labels displayed in and sometimes circulated between Museums.

Unpublished communications between researchers,
Should old journals and correspondence in State Archives be
accepted?

A stable nomenclature can be assured only if an implement is
accurately described, with a type specimen which is figured so that it can
be recognized. The name itself, if of aboriginal origin, should be
transcribed in some recorded phonetic system. An approximation to this
should be capable of being printed in standard works without use of special

TINDALE—ARCHAFOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 631
NOMENCLATURE
type, Since 1941 the Geographic II system has become mandatory in
transcriptions of non-traditional place names in the United States. England,
France, Canada and I believe also in Australia.

Technical terms are necessary in the description of a stone implement,
and its proper orientation is of the utmost importance if a sound description
is to be given,

Earlier workers tended not to use any fixed orientation. In Australia
it was the lute H. V. V. Noone who first encouraged the development of a
sound descriptive terminology. This system was first applied in a paper
in the Records of the South Australian Museum (Tindale and Noone 1941),

ILLUSTRATIONS OF IMPLEMENTS

As early as 1926 many South Australian workers agreed informally to
publish adequate illustrations of each object they described and avoid
exclusively verbal description. Adherence to this voluntary agreement is
manifest in many hundreds of illustrations,

Not all illustrations are satisfactory; too often one is left with the
problem of determining the nature of the third dimension, and of deducing
the appearance of the opposite face; in general it is often impossible to tell
the difference between uniface and biface trimming because no mention 1s
made of the side not depicted. From three to five views of each implement
are necessary for a proper appreciatiion of its form, and a few such sets of
illustrations are better than pages of description.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL COLLECTIONS

Mulvaney (1960) was critical of archaeological collections preserved
in certain Museums, Jt should be indicated that such remarks cannot be
applied to the collections in the South Australian Museum.

The specimens relied on in these studies have been carefully and
accurately processed, numbered and labelled in English. There is systemati-
cally recorded data present for specimens from 2,393 sites, as determined
by a count made in 1962. These collections include 74,499 specimens
sufficiently characteristic to fall into recognizable implement classes according
to the South Australian Museum Record card, of which a current sample
is illustrated (Fig, 15), This five by eight inch card was first printed and
distributed by the South Australian Museum in 1937 as a result of studies
and enquiries made in Europe and America during 1936, The card enables
a preliminary sorting of material from each site,

632 RECORDS OF THE 5A, MUSEUM

The Museum has reasonably large collections from Australian States
other than South Australia and figures stand at: New South Wales (4,600
specimens from 264 sites); Tasmania (1,394 examples from 110 sites);
Western Australia (4,574 from 196 sites); Queensland and Northern
Territory (2,721 specimens from 248 sites); these are in addition to the
very extensive series from South Australia (61,750 examples from 1,575
sites). The secondary material from each site, amounting in the aggregate
to many additional thousands of lesser specimens, is kept apart for study
of materials, especially for considering ratios of type of rock and for
determining methods of manufacture.

Detailed listing of the specimens has been principally the work of
Mr, Harold M. Cooper, Honorary Associate in Anthropology, who first
volunteered his assistance in 1934 and since then has made the maintenance
of these records part of a life's work, as well as a basis for his own out-
standing studies on Australian stone implements.

Mr. Cooper also recorded specimens collected by members of the
Anthropological Society of South Australia, by members of kindred
organizations, and by other interested persons. Most of these auxiliary
specimens have been marked and after noting returned to the finders.
Many collectors have made the Museum the ultimate repository for such
specimens,

Parts of this large collection have been examined, from one aspect or
another by many members of the Adelaide school and by others, for example
in papers by Campbell 1924, 1960; Campbell and Noone 1943; Campbell,
Cleland and Hossfeld 1946; Cooper 1941, 1943 (two papers), 1947, 1948,
1950, 1954, 1959, 1960, 1961 (two papers); Cooper and Condon 1947:
Davidson 1935; Edwards 1963, 1964, 1965; Hale and Tindale 1930;
Harvey 1941; Howchin 1934; Matthews 1966; McCarthy, Bramell and
Noone 1946; Mountford 1938, 1939, 1940, 1941; Noone 1945; Pretty
1962; Stapleton 1945; Tindale 1926, 1932, 1936 (two papers), 1937,
1940, 1941 (three papers), 1945, 1949, 1950, 1951, 1955, 1956, 1957
(two papers), 1959 (two papers), 1960, 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966; Tindale
and Maegraith 1931; Tindale and Mountford 1936; Tindale and Noone 1941,

The South Australian collections are rich in specimens from the present-
day culture, for in addition to the archaeological material, the hafted
implement series available from the living may be far larger than present in
any comparable collection, The late Sir Edward Stirling first, in the 1890's,
theo E. R. Waite made large collections and since 1921 we have specialized
in bringing such material together in association with first hand observations
on their use, derived from aborigines still employing or knowing how to
use them, In this way the collection has more than trebled in size with
ethnological objects of the living culture since 1921,

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 633
NOMENCLATURE
Site FN AR ies esesscsiconsetsceteritioy Australian Campsite Period
SECtterrannansetieiiiieiits als Hundr PUBL tea saps eac cerca seeshigastt otmsanqup)eéce chine choca rendedeesanze option enamel ccennitdle
Owner VO GARESS§ correc cE Conca lad pettin adauiah etna Desuctnd doh Sota Satan hone eee eA neat seleg so del ears
Sketch Plan Sketch Section
Scale
Scale ]
Ww——+——-E _ n. _
| No. Date Collector Notes
a S
Description of site
Site No. A.
CHOPPING Cores AXES Eage-grouns perales ADZE STONES Marked stones

Corer ena Ungrooved .. ‘Adelaide’ TUUPANB A SFr ores ycvscke ,
Sumatra 0.0... CFP BOVE eo sosesvesacseenenetteage: Discoidal Cylindroconical stones........
Pebblechopper Discoidal (microlith) .... unmarked «00.2...
Karta oooccce. Percussion-dressed pebble Long (endscrapers).......- marked
‘horsehoof . Un grooved oo.ccccccccccevcesseeevseess Endscrapers (microlith) , Cornute stones ......

“coup de poing’ e Grooved | cow. Double ended 2.0.0.0... Incised stones ..,

Pebble end . wae | AXES Edge-ground flake Semi-biface........c0600.00- Throwing ball ...

Cc. HOPPING. Fl lakes Ungrooved VOHCAVG ~s:sysssssnecearesaz Red ochre ..........

Simple flakes ooeccccceccccc, | GROOVOM oie tees essettes tes teee Nosed ...... Yellow ochre

Kodja ....... iam Trre gular o.c.ccccccceeceeeese Mn02

AVAPIO ooo6 oop ceccccpessecy sees _ Percussion-dressed flake Edge ground -

POINTS Ungroaved ed scptenerets WOPN oooccccpccecepesecpeesennes

Pirri.. cece GROOVE Ac tuityreceereiserssitarettiaacs Slug (kandi) =burren..

N. WA. ‘pressure e flaked | Keeled Slug (tula) ..,,....

Butted blade... cee. | KNIVES and SAWS Fire flints 0.0.00... LIST OF FOOD

Bondi! Woak wine. | Abrupt-trimmed with— Hammer stones ..........-- REMAINS

Microlith blades .. Right handed flake...................- Upper mill oo.

DOP S ce ccsimys ripe tmaneny spine Left handed ©..........0.. .. | Lower mill ....

Triangular flake Rolling mill,

CRESCENTS ‘womans Knife oo... ccc. RASPS oo.ooccs ccc iecseeteeeeenee

*Newcastle” ..................... | Pressure flaked dressed Slate scraper

Microlith ... .. . Irregular chipped ©.......... sie |* COPEL srments sitar soontpascioresay

7 2) [111 1g: rrr rrr Long blades..2 csc. :.::cisssasccemss Miscellaneous.............,

|

FIG,

15,

Text of the obverse and reverse of the South Australian Campsite Record Card, in use

since 1937. The original measures 8 inches by 5 inches,

634 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

THE ARCHAEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION IN SOUTH EASTERN
AUSTRALIA

From a study of all the specimens listed in earlier paragraphs and the
archaeological record there is an increasingly strong corpus of data to support
the conclusion that the succession of cultures in South Australia and more
particularly in the Murray-Darling Basin and its surroundings as far east
as the Continental Divide, from at least 31,000 BP to date, will prove to be
as follows:—

The modern | Murundian | Present day to Probably with a time gradient sa that
cultures — Peronian times Cultures are later in time towards the
Mudukian south-east and towards the west
| Pirrian

The older | Tartangan Pre-Peron Terrace | Modern times in Tasmania: extensively
cultures on the mainland from Late Pleistocene

to Mid-Recent
Kartan Late Pleistocene Kangaroo Island probably until Early
Peronian times; present on the Bass

Strait Islands

Each of these terms validly denotes a major culture phase in the
sequence, The terms have many years of priority over any other ones which
have been proposed.

Radiocarbon dates have now been obtained from mass samples. set
aside during the excavation of the type site at Devon Downs in 1929,
Others have been obtained from the Noola excavation. These support the
above interpretation.

The Devon Downs ones enable clear cut time comparisons to be made
with complementary results from Fromm Landing and elsewhere in the
Murray-Darling Basin. They indicate that the transition from the Mudukian
of Layer V at Devon Downs to the Murundian of Layer IV happened after
2980 + 90 BP (GaK 2980). The Mid-Mudukian of Layer VII was at
3460 + 100 BP (Gak 1022) and the Pirrian to Mudukian transition was
after 4250 + 180 BP (Lamont Lab.), At Fromm Landing the latest pirri
occurred at 3740 = 85 BP (P, 308). The Pirrian occupation evidently
was intense and both Layers VIII and TX at Devon Downs have closely
matching dates, that for Layer VIII, being formally given as 4360 + 110 BP
(GaK 1023), Mulvaney’s date of 4840 + 100 BP (R-456/1) for his
eurliest occupation with pirri implements at Fromm Landing is now
confirmed by a date of 5180 + LOO BP (GaK 1024) for Devon Downs
Layer XI. This stratum was laid down prior to the beginning of the
Pirrian tn Devon Downs Rockshelter.

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 635
NOMENCLATURE
A date of 6020 * 150 BP (L 271E) marks a late Tartangan horizon
(Bed C) at the type site at Tartanga. Beds D and E, above it registered
a rapid rise of sea level. This marked the onset of the Older Peronian
(Three Metre Sea level) and also the termination of the Tartangan
occupation on ‘Tartanga Island,

Three related dates from Noola Rockshelter, in New South Wales, show
Tarlangan implements were present between 11,500 BP and a terminal date
prior to 5320 © 8&8 BP (V 36), A single Kartan type pebble side chopper,
identical in form with classic side chopper ones from Kangaroo Island,
occurred in the 11500 BP horizon. <A definitive report on the Noola
material is in preparation, This will discuss the detailed significance of
three Late Pleistocene dates GaK 1025, V-35 and GaK 334 from Noola.

Unfortunately the record was confused when Mulvaney (1961) by an
accidental reversal of facts considered that the specialized arapia implement,
made on a striking platform like the tule, was present as the dominant type
in the Kartan culture of Kangaroo Island, whereas in reality only karta
implements, made on random blocks, and on large flakes are present, The

B.S romnrer

BIGS, 16-17. LARGE STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM KANGAROO ISLAND,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA, OF THE KARTAN CULTURE,

Fig. 16. Three views of a karfa implement from Hawk Nest (A.20430), made on a

block without evident striking platform; all but One of the uniface chopping toals

from the island conform to this type, Fie, 17. Three views of an q@rapia or arapia-

like implement /rom Kingscote, 500 yards north of the town on lop of cliffs, collected

by H. M, Cooper, August, 1949 (4.30283): the prominent striking platform places

it in the wrapia class. It is the Only arapia-like specimen found on Kangaroo Island
and may be a pseudomoerph

636 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

mare advanced arapia type is represented on the island only by a single
example which is possibly only a pseudomorph. These two implement types
are shown as Figs. 16 and 17, The error was compounded (Mulvaney
1963; 40, paragraph 3) and led to an untenable conclusion that the
Kangaroo Island implements were different from ones on the mainland.

FIGS, 18-21, BLOUERA IMPLEMENTS FROM VARIOUS LOCALITIES,

Fie. 18. Upper Pirrian example from Layer viii, Devon Downs Rockshelter

(A.29195), appeared us photographic figure 195 in Hale and Tindale (1930).

Fig, 19, Woakwine Range, South-East of South Australia (A.28522), collected by

1, D. Campbell. Fig. 20. Corunna Station via Port Augusta, South Australia

(A.44920), collected by J. B. Johnson. Fig. 2/. Bellambi, New South Wales
(A21165), collected by CC. Towle.

TINDALF—ARCHABOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 637
NOMENCLATURE

When misunderstandings such as this ace cleared up it is evident that
the Kartan Culture is firmly established on geological grounds as of Late
Pleistocene date in South Australia from sites at Fulham, Hallett Cove, the
Wakefield River (interpretation of studies made by Cooper (1961)), at
Port Augusta. and in the Flinders Ranges, as well as on Kangaroo Island.
On Kangaroo [sland the culture survived until just before the Mid-Recent.
Implements were found in situ in a terrace deposit now identified as Early
Peronian, at Rainy Creek (Tindale 1937), This section was re-examined
and additional material collected in company with the late Prot, F, B, Zeuner-
The importance of this section is re-emphasized. No implements of the
Kartan culture have been found on Post-Peronian sand dunes despite a
quarter century of searching during which Mr. H. M. Cooper added many
sites to his formidable list from the island,

APPENDIX I—HISTORICAL NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN ARCHAEOLOGICAL
CULTURES AND THEIR MARKER IMPLEMENTS

Since the care of the archaeological collection at the South Australian Muscum has now
passed from my charge | feel that a few historical details on the growth of these collections
Would be in order here,

Learly Aerie

The first archaeological excavation made by me was in a shell mound af Yetiba near
the mouth of the Emerald River, on Groote Eylandt, in early 1922. Assistants ane
interpreters of evidence were Men of the Ingura tribe. (Another name, supplied by a later
generation of men. has come into vogue for these people, namely the term Wanindiljaugwa
This is a valid name of only one of the principal hordes of the tribe.) These men were
then meeting white men ut close quarters for the first time and must have wondered. at the
Purpose Of Such w proceeding ‘the resulis of this dig were enlightening chiefly as supplying
me with details for the appreciation of the living culture.

The beginnings of systematic archaeological excavation in Australia have heen described
by Mulvaney (1957, 1961), He gives credit to work al Turtunga and at Devan Downs in
1929 as being the first definitive siudy (Hale and Tindale 1930), ‘This study had been
preecded by less productive exploratory work,

From 1924 onwards { had made smal} excavations and surface collections at Pedlar
Creek, now culled Moana, south of Adelaide (Tindale 1926), Work at this. site has
conlinued lo (he present diy with detailed results which hive been utilized in the interpreta.
tion of results at other places, hut have not yet been published. In 1928 several sections
were dug on a property near Como on the St. George River. New South Wales and sections
were noted by me ut several coustal sites along the ocean shore east und south of Botany
Bay, Sites at Como and Boal Harbour yielded evidence for A Post-Glacial eustatie marine
lerrace: the significance was then little understood. Recent visits to the sites confirm that there
uve Peronian Perrace assoviationy and that The camp-sites are ‘younver (han that event

In the late twenties, Mr, Harold Sheard and 1 examined several sites along the River
Murray, and among these we duy a shallow trial trench af Fromm Landing, where Mulvuney
and others fave since dug more deeply and wilh such useful restilfs.

None of these excavalions prior to 1929 had given evidence of any succession of culture
phases, although in retrospect it ean be seen thal unpublished results from Fromm Landing
run parallel with Mulvanev’s findings. Our excayation went down into a layer which |
consider now to be Mudukian, but the Small yield did not allow us to see that we had
passed) into an earlier cullure phase. Fallen roeks und limited resources discouraged us from
going deeper,

Past-1930 Wark in Seat Australia

In 1932 some 80 rock shelter sites were visited in company with the late B.C. Cotten,
ihe then Conchologist of the SA. Museum, A journey was made hy a simall ladnch from
Miray Beldoe to Blanchetrwn. Many sites were drilled ta pock boltom with a posthole

#38 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

borer, This insttument could be extended to reach a depth of 15 feet, Smuke-blackened
cliff fiees led us to several important sites, These remain to be excavated when further
Wetuilod studics are considered to be desirable in the Lower Murray Valley.

The Tirlingw and Devon Downs discoveries led to detajled studies on the climute,
fustery and physiography of the lower Murray Valley, and of the coustal shorelines to the
south, ‘The thon prevailing ideas of (he faultline nalure of local shoreline development were
challenged and aseribed ty the effects of eustatic changes in sea-level (Tindale 1935, 1936,
1937, 1941, 1947, 1949, 1952, 1953, 1954. 1985. 1957 (two papers), 1959 (two papers).
1962), Aboriginal oceupational sites were linked with eustalic lerrace deposits.

Radiocarbon dates now. available for various Peronian and Abralhos terrace phenomena
confirm the results oblained by these custatic lerrace sluilies.

Al Tartanga the dominant taked implements found fr sine ape very much re-used
examples of the sane jimari types as ure characteristic of Ihe Tartangan of the Somh-East
of our State, at Like Menindee aod at Noola, New South Wales. heir degree of wear
reflects the relatively great poverty of the Lower Mucray peaple because of absence of
implement stone in (their area, necessitating importations from the South-Bast, from the
Mount Lofty Ranges and the Berri area upstream, Despite the presence of implements whose
slane must have originated in these three areas Mulvaney (1961) was not then inelined to
admit that any relationship could be traced between (he Tartangan of the South-East at
comparable dates and that at the original Tartanga Island site. He dismissed the term
‘Tartiagan on this ground, Lately he has used the term “Tasmanoid” for Tartangan Culture
finds, Existenee of sites in intermediate localities and of better specimens near native mines
in the Berri trea und many widely dispersed finds now cut the ground from under his
areument for the restri¢tion of the Tartungan to the one site on the Lower Murray River
The Tartangan of Cape Martin is now known to extend, with the same types of implements.
lo five other sites to the north, including ones being studied at Snapper Point, Five Mile
Rocks, Three Mile Rocks, Burk Island, and in the Hundred of Kennion. Similar implement
sites are also present near Swan Reach and two native mine sites ure in the Berri distrler,
One at Erawirung of Post-Tartangan limes and the other seemingly nat worked since Turlungan
tines, because these ure the latest implement types present on (he weathered surface of the
workings. Surface finds are sporadically distributed throughout (he Murray Mallee aren.

AL Vartanga pre-Peron terrace implements are all Tartangan, and they do not melide
nda which have been obtained only fram the post-Tartangan horizons which overlie em
with a disconformity, Misinterpretation of this led McCarthy (1957) into @ baseless
isstimpbon thal the Tartangan was o a possessing cullure and in his exhibit at the
Australian Museum, Sydney, he shows a cast of the example figured as No. 39 hy Hule and
Tindale (1930) from the surface of an Upper Bed. as if it were Tartangean.

At Tarlanga only the Post-Peronian beds (G. Mand 1) yield mle. The one mentioned
above (Fiz. 39 in original peport) is wv classic example of uw much re-used sila Made from
a particular ruby-coloured chert which is now known to have originated in the native mine
a Erawiring, 1 should be on record that this mine site has been acq\ired by the National
‘Trist of South Australin and dedicated ax a national monument. The facts are cleue tat
luiq ape indiculors of the passige of the later waves of cullure down the wide plains of
infand easter Australia from the north, In the lower Murray Valley they are of Pirrian
and of later times.

In outhning recent history of work in South Australia mention should be made of other
studigs, At a road culling ip the Hundred of Noarlunga a site has been found Where
aborigines exploited Brachyodontes und other estuarine shells. These appeared in the
estuarine valley of {he Onkaparinga River as soon us its tidal peaches were drowned by the
rise of Water level which accompanied the ovctipation of the Older Peronian enstatic terrace.
“\ well defined foodshell-containing horizon marks the beginning of a Mul-Recent occupation
und ix dated by Prof. K. Kigoshi (GuK 674) as at 5820 4 SD BP. Kartan Ciltire
implements were unearthed from (he yellow, slightly indurated sand which tnderties (his
horizon with an unknown hiatus in time. The occupational debris above this horizon. Is
Pirriin and younger.

Ac Pine Dam on the eastern side of Lake Torrens charcoal from a Pirrian horizon, has
been dated at 1860 -+ (10 BP (Gak 675), indicating. the possibility that the Pirrian culture,
whieh in the Murray Valley was replaced by the Mudukian culture phase around 3800 BP
lingered Jonger in the area to the west. As elsewhere [t is overlain by beds containing
honzons in which occur geometric microliths of well developed forms.

TINDALE—ARCHAEOLOGICAL CULTURE AND IMPLEMENT 639
NOMENCLATURE

At Burk Island, in the Hundred of Symon, a cattle property inland from Beachport,
South Australia, a single pebble side chopper of transported basaltic stone was unearthed
while digging into a dark clay at a depth of 5 feet, during the making of a stockyard.
The find was made by the owner, Mr. T. McCourt. Surface material on the rise of Burk
Island is chiefly of Tartangan types. Isolated finds of this type often point the way to

important discoveries and suggest that a Kartan horizon may underlie the Tartangan of
that area.

APPENDIX II—REFERENCES
(The numbers of figures of implements quoted are for originals only)
Campbell, T. D., 1924: Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., Adelaide, 48: 74-78 (3 original figures
of implements).
1960: Rec, S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 13: 509-524 (7 figures).

Campbell, T. D., Cleland, J. B. and Hossfeld, P. S., 1946: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 8:
445-502 (4 figures).

Campbell, T. D, and Noone, H. V. V., 1943: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7: 371-395
(117 figures),

Cooper, H. M., 1941: South Aust. Naturalist, Adelaide, 21 (1): 1-4 (3 figures).
———— 1943: Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., Adelaide, 67: 224-225 (4 figures).
1943: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7: 343-369 (96 figures).
1947: Mankind, Sydney, 3: 292-298 (23 figures).
1948: South Aust. Naturalist, Adelaide, 25 (1): 1-8 (8 figures).
1950: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 73: 220-222 (11 figures).
1954: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 11: 91-103 (26 figures).
1959: Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., Adelaide, 82: 55-60 (22 figures).
1960: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 13: 481-503 (48 figures).
1961: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 14: 1-18 (29 figures).
1961: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 84: 105-113 (18 figures).

Cooper, H. M. aoe Condon, H. T., 1947: South Aust. Ornithologist, Adelaide, 18: 66-68
(1 figure).

Davidson, D. S., 1935: Journ, Roy, Anthrop. Inst., London, 65: 145-183 (45 figures).
Edwards, R., 1963: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 14: 515-524 (20 figures).
1964: Rec. S, Aust, Mus., Adelaide, 14: 643-651 (6 figures).
1965: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 15: 9-27 (6 figures).
Fairbridge, R., 1958: Trans. New York Acad. Sci. New York II, 20 (6): 471-482.
1960: Scientific American, San Francisco, 202 (5): 70-79.
Hale, H. M. eng ane N. B., 1930: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4: 145-218 (209
gures).
Harvey, Alison, 1941: Rec, S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 6: 363-368 (14 figures).
Hossfeld, P., 1950: Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 73; 232-279.
Howchin, W., 1934: Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe of aborigines now extinct.
Adelaide. Gillingham & Co., v and 94 pp. (148 figures).
Jackson, G. K., 1939: Mem. Queensland Mus., Brisbane, 11: 289-295.
Matthews, J. M., 1966: Archaeol. and Phys. Anth. in Oceania, Sydney, 1 (1): 5-22.
McCarthy, F. D., 1941: Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 21: 21-26 (27 figures).
1949: Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 22: 1-34, 141-154 (10 figures).
1957: Mankind, 5: 163-168.
McCarthy, F. D., Bramell, E. and Noone, H. V. V., 1946: Aust. Mus., Sydney, Memoir 9
(with bibliography ).
Mitchell, S. R., 1949: Stone-age Craftsmen, Melbourne, 211 pp., 270 figures (original).
Mountford, C. P., 1938: Vict. Naturalist, Melbourne, 55: 144-146.
1939: South Aust. Nat., Adelaide, 19 (4): 12-14 (8 figures).
1940: Mankind, 2: 336.
1941: Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aust., 65: 312-316 (14 figures).
Mulvaney, D. J., 1957: Historical Studies—Australia and New Zealand, 8 (29): 32-43.

640) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1960: Prac, Roy. Soc, Victoria, Melbourne, 72 (2); 53-85 (36 figures).
1961: Proc, Prehist. Soc. London, 27: 56-107,
Mulvaney, D. J., Lawton, G. H. and Twidale, C. R., 1964: Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria,
Melbourne, 77 (2): 479-516,
Noone, H. V. V., 1943: Rec, §\ Aust. Muy., Adelaide. 7: 271-280 (28 figures ).
Pretty, G., 1962: Ann. Mayvazine Lincoln College, Adelaide, 2 (4): 12-16 (5 figures)-
Ride, W. D. L., 1958: Mest Aust, Naturalist, Perth, 6 (7): 162-179 (19 figures),
Sprigg, R., 1952: Int. Geol. Congress 18th session, 13% 226-237.
Stapleton, R. de S.. 1945; Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 8: 281-287 (9 figures),
Thorpe, W. W. and McCarthy, F, D., 1933: Ree. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 19: 23-27 (33 figures)
Tindale, N. B.. 1926: Souh Australian Naturalist, Adeluide. % (l= 10.
———_ 1928: Trans. Roy, Soe. 8, Aust., Adelaide, 52: 223-224 (2 figures).
1933: Trans, Roy, Soe, S. Aust., Adelaide, 57: 130-142.

1933: in Fenner, C. Bunyipsy and billabongs. Sydney, p. 51-152 (8 figures)
(published previously by Fenner, in Ausiralasian, Melbourne, 27 Dec. 1930),

1936: in Centenary History of S. Australia, Adelaide (stone axe distribution ),
1937; Rec. §. Aust, Mus,, Adelaide, 6: 29-37 (6 figures).
1937: Ree. 8, Aust. Mus,, Adelaide, 6: 39-60 (7 figures).
1938: Trans, Roy. Soc, 8. Aust., Adelaide, 62: 18-23 (1 figure).
1940: South Aust, Naturalist, Adelaide, 20 (2): 26 (1 figure).
1941: Mankind, Sydney, 3: 37-41 and 69-71,
1941: Aust. Journ, of Science, Sydney, 3: 144.147,
1942; Pap, and Proce. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, Hobart, 1941; 1-2 (1 figure),
1945; Queensland Natiralist, 12 (5): 83-84 (1 figure),
1947: Rec. §. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, $: 619-652.
1949: Ree. §. Aust, Muy., Adelaide, 9: 143-155 (climatic discussion) und 157-166
(6 figures),
——— 1950: Ree. §. Aust. Mus,, Adelaide, 9: 257-274 (10 figures),
——— 195]: Ree, 8, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 9: 371-374 (2 figures),
1952; Rept. Aust, and New Zealand Assoc. Ady. Sci., Sydney, 336.
1953: Ree. §. Aust, Mus., Adelaide, 11: 43-68 (climatic discussion),
1953: Human Biology, Baltimore, 25: 169-190,
1954: Aust. Journ, Sei., Sydney. 228-229,
1955: Rec. 8. Aust. Muy., Adelaide, 11: 269-298 (38 figures).
1956: Aust. Mus, Mag., Sydney, 12: 115-120,
1957: Ree. S. Aust. Muys., Adelaide, 13: 1-49 (14 figures).
1957: Trans, Rey, Soc, 8, Aust, Adelaide, 80+ 109-123 (10 figures).
L957: A.G.M.A. News Bulletin, Brisbane, pp. 4-5,
1959: in Keast, A. editor, Biogeography and Ecology in Ausirilia, 36-51,
1959: Trans, Roy. Soe. S. Aust., Adelaide, 82) 119-120.
1960: Colorado Quarterly, Boulder, Colorado, 8: 229-245.
1961: Rec. S, Aust, Mus., Adelaide. 14: 193-196,
1963: Annual Report, South Aust. Mus,
1964: Aust. Journ, Sei, Sydney, 27 (1): 24.
1965: Ree, §, Aust, Mus., Adelaide, 15: 131-164 (23 figures),
1966: Aust. Natural History, Sydney, 15 (6): 179-183.
——— 1967: Colorado Quarterly, Boulder, Colorado, 15: 339-353,
Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G.. 1931: Ree. §, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4: 275-289
(LO figures),
Tindale, N. B. und Mountford, C. P,, 1936: Rec. S. Aust. Mus, Adelaile, 5: 487-502
(8 figures).
Tindale, N. B. and Noone. H. V. V., 1941: Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust, Adelaide, 65:
116-122 (10 figures).

OBITUARY NOTICE

Summary

Professor Thomas Draper Campbell, who died at his home at Tusmore, on December 8, 1967, at the
age of 74, was a scientist with an international reputation. He was also a member of the Museum
Board from 1932, Honorary Assistant Curator of Anthropology from 1923-1926, Honorary Curator
of Anthropology from 1927-1939, and Honorary Associate in Physical Anthropology from 1940
until the time of his death.

OBITUARY NOTICE

Professor Thomas Draper Campbell, who died at his home at Tusmore,
on December 8, 1967, at the age of 74, was a scientist with an inter-
national reputation. He was also a member of the Museum Board from
1932, Honorary Assistant Curator of Anthropoligy from 1923-1926,
Honorary Curator of Anthropology from 1927-1939, and Honorary
Associate in Physieal Anthropology from 1940 until the time of his death,

T. D, Campbell was born at Millicent in the South-East of South
Australia and educated at Prince Alfred College and the University of
Adelaide, From 1916-1919 he served in the Dental Unit of the C.M.F. in
South Australia. Jt was during this period that he completed the Dental
Board Course which immediately preceded the establishment of the B.D,S,
degree of the University of Adelaide in 1919, In 1921 he was one of the
first to be awarded the new B.D.S. degree. He gained the D.D.Sc. degree
by thesis in 1923 and the D.Sc. degree in 1939.

In 1919 Professor F. Wood-Jones joined the staff of the University of
Adelaide as Professor of Anatomy. His enthusiasm stimulated the young
Campbell and led to his intense interest in the Australian aboriginal. The
thesis for his D,D.Sc. degree, published by the University of Adelaide in
1925, is titled Denrition and Palate ef the Australian Aboriginal. The late
Sir Arthur Keith, one of the world’s outstanding anthropologists said,
“His monograph in its method, scope, statement and exhaustiveness is a
model which other workers will do well to follow, It supplies anatomists,
anthropologists and dentists with data they stand much in need of and
supplies them in a most acceptable form”.

Soon after his graduation in 1921, Campbell entered the Dental
Department of the Royal Adelaide Hospital as the first Dental House
Surgeon, and in 1926 he was appointed to the position of Superintendent,
In 1938, he was elected Dean of the Faculty of Dentistry, a position he held
until his retirement. In 1949 he was appointed to the full-time University
post of Director of Dental Studies and when the Chair of Dentistry was
established in 1954 he became the first professor, On retirement in 1958
he was made Professor Emeritus.

During his professional career Prof. Campbell received high recognition
for his work, In 1948 he was made F.D.S.R.C.S. (London); in 1950,
P,D.S.R.C.S. (Edinburgh); in 1952 he was elected an Honorary Member of
the Odontological Section of the Royal Society of Medicine, London, and
in 1966 a Fellow of the Australian College of Dental Surgeons.

N42 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The foundation of the Anthropological Society of South Australia was
due largely to the enthusiasm and effort af Prof. Campbell who, with
Dr. R. H. Pulleine, sent out the initia! circular letter calling a mecting of
interested persons on June 28, 1926. At this meeting the Society, the first
of its kind in Australia, was formed. Prof, Campbell contributed to its
success for over 40 years, being a regular lecturer, member of the Council
for many years and president in 1928, 1929, and 1944. He was a Life
Member at the time of his death,

In December 1926 he was associated with the formation of the Board
for Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide, und played a leading
role in its various research activities, As organizer and leader of some 15
expeditions to Central Australia in the 1920’s and 30's he was responsible
for the collection of a vast amount of important data and material on many
aspects of the traditional life of the aboriginals. Prof. Campbell was
chairman of the Board at the time of bis death.

Well known as an amateur film producer, Prof. Campbell first used a
movie camera in May 1926, when he recorded scenes of aboriginal life
during a field trip to Ooldea, in the far west of South Australia, These
were the forerunners of many important South Australian films made during
the 1930's and the more recent colour-sound series on aspects of aboriginal
technology, These films, produced on a meagre budget, have been accepted
widely and are used for educational purposes in many universities and
colleges in the U.S.A, and Europe, Prof, Campbell made one film for the
Institute of Aboriginal Studies and was an adviser for the production of two
recent films on Central Australian ceremonies,

Prof. Campbell’s interest in the aboriginals was not confined to his own
specialized field of dentistry or to the production of movie records, Stone
technology fascinated him and he spent countless hours searching for and
making a very detailed study of aboriginal stone implements, Always proud
of his birthplace in the Lower South-East many of his investigations were
carried out in that region of South Australia. A comprehensive series of
papers on the life of the aboriginals of this area, their stone implements and
camip-sites provides an important basis for further studies. The culmination
of this work came in 1963-65 when he led an Australian Institute of
Aboriginal Studies sponsored investigation of archaeological sites, A rock
shelter at Mount Burr was excavated and many stone implements and large
quantities of fauna] remains were found in the fourteen-foot deep trench,
Charcoal from the lower levels has been radiocarbon dated to about 8,600
years. Important among the finds was evidence of the dingo in this region
over 7,000 years ago,

Prof, Campbell held many official positions in connection with his
lifelong interest in anthropology. Among these were: Fellow, Australian

OBITUARY OF T. D. CAMPBELL 643

Professor Thomas Draper Campbell, D.Sc., D.D.Sc., F.D.S.R.C.S. (Lond.),
F.D.S.R.C.S. (Edin.), 1893-1967.

644 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Research Council; Museum representative on the Aboriginal and Historic
Relics Advisory Board; Foundation Member of the Australian Institute of
Aboriginal Studies and a member of its Advisory Committee on Film
Production; a Fellow of the Royal Society of South Australia from 1922,
Councillor 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45, Vice-President 1932-34 and President
1934-35,

Prof, Campbell was well known as a keen debater and enjoyed nothing
better than to engage in lively discussion on stone technology, artefact
nomenclature, and other reluted subjects. Besides having numerous scientific
papers and films to his credit perhaps his greatest contribution to anthro-
pology was his intense desire to arouse interest in others. There are few
South Australians working in anthropology or allied fields who have not been
stimulated by his enthusiasm and encouragement.

Prof. Campbell belonged to a generation who had the benefit of
extensive experience with nomadic aboriginals. Such opportunities are
no longer available and today’s researchers rely greatly on the recorded
observations of Prof, Campbell and his contemporaries.

SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Campbell, T. D., 1924: An account of a hitherto unrecorded type of aboriginal stone object.

Trans. R. Soc, §, Aust,, Adelaide, 48: 74-78,

1925: Dentition and Palate of the Australian Aboriginal, Adelaide.

1925: A Dental anomaly in the skull of an Australian aboriginal. ‘Trans. R. Soe.
S. Aust,, Adelaide, 49: 99-[00,

1925: Detailed notes on the aboriginal intaglios near Burra. ‘Trans. R. Soc. S,
Aust., Adelaide, 49: 123-127.

1928: Dental Notes, Adelaide University Field Anthropology; Central Australia
No. 5. Trans, R. Soe, S. Aust., Adelaide, 52: 28-30,

tee: nt progress in Ethnology in South Australia. Aust, Geogr, Sydiey,

(1): :

1934: Notes on the aborigines of the South-east of South Australia. Parr L.
Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust., Adelaide, 5X: 22-32,

1936; Anthropology und the Royal Society (Centennial Address No. 2). Trans.
R. Soc. S, Aust, Adelaide, 60: xix-xxiv.

1937: Observations on the ‘Teeth of Australian Aborigines, Hermannsybure, Central
Australia. Aust. J. Dent., Melbourne, 41 (1)! 1-6,

1938: Observations on the Teeth of Australian Aborigines. Cockatoo Creck,
Central Australia. Aust. J. Dent., Melbourne, 42 (2): 41-47,

1938; Observations on the Teeth of Australian Aborigines. Mt. Liebig, Central
Australia. Aust. J. Dent.. Melbourne, 42 (3): 85-89.

1938: Observations on the Teeth of Australian Aborigines. River Diamantina,
South Australia, Aust. J, Dent... Melbourne, 42 (4): 121-124,

1938: Notes on some teeth of an Australian aboriginal infant. Aust. I. Dent.,
Melbourne, 42 (5): 167-168.

———-— 1939: Notes on the aborigines of the South-eust of South Australia, Part 2,

Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust., Adelaide, 63 (1): 27-35,

1939; Food, food values and food habits of the Australian aborigines in relation

to their dental conditions, Aust. J, Dent. Melbourne, 43: 1-15, 45-55, 73-87,
141-156, 177-198.

Campbell,
Campbell,
Campbell.
Catpbell,
Cumpbell, T,

Campbell,

Campbell,

Campbell, ||

Campbell,
Campbell,

Campbell,
Campbell.

Campbell,

Campbell,

SELECTED BIBLLOGRAPHY 645

1939; Dentil conditions of aborigines compared with civilized groups, Mankind,
Sydney. 2 (7): 228-224.

1940: The drama and theatre arts of the aborigines. Mankind. Sydney, 2 (9):
329-330,

1942: A Sugeested reeonstruction of the missing unterior teeth of the Cohuna
specimen, Ree, S, Aust, Muis,, Adelide, 7 (2): 235.

1944; The dental condition of a skull from the Sikyatki site, Arizona. J, Wash
Acad. Sei; Washington, 34 (10): 321-322

1947; Notes on aboriginal camp sites on Yorke Peninsula, South Australia.
Mankind, Sydney, 3 (11); 334-340.

1947; Joint South Austratia-Vietoria expedition lo the lower South-cuslern pegian,
South Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 3 (12)+ 380,

1949) ‘The Krefft tooth—is it a human molar? Ree. Aust. Mus. Sydney. 22 42)5
20)-2.06,

(960: The pitvi—an interesting Australian aboriainal implement. Ree, S. Aust,
Mus.. Adelaide, 13 (4): 509-524,

1962: Aborigines, dentition, Aust. Freye. Sydney, 2nd ed. bs 12-13.

T. D. and Barrett. M. J. 1953: Dental observations on Australian aborigines:
uv changing environment and food pattern. Aust, J, Dent, Melbourne. 57) 1-6.

T. D. and Cleland, J. B., 1946: The aborigines and their culture and the Half-caste
problem. Rep, Aust, N.Z, Ass, Advmt. Sei, Sydney, 25th Meeting: 25-31.

1. D., Cleland. J. B. and Hossfeld, P. 8., 1946: Aborigines of the lower South:
eust of South Australia, Ree. S, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 8 (3): 445-502.

YD. and Edwards, Robert, 1966: Stone Implements. Aberiginul Alan in South

wnd Central Austalia, Part 1, Adelaide: 159-220,

D. and Gray. J, H. 1936: Observations on the teeth of Australian aborigines.

Aust. J. Dent., Melbourne, 40: 290-295,

T. D.. Gray. J. H. und Hackett, C. J., 1936: Physical Anthropology of the
aborigines of Central Australia, Part 1. Anthropometry, Oceania, Sydney,
7 (1): 106-139,

1936; Physieal Anthropology of the aborigines of Central Australia. Part 2.

Non-metrical Hs ge of surface Analomy. Oceania, Sydney, 7 (2): 246-261.
D. and Hackett, C. 1927: Adelaide University Field Anthropology: Central
Australia, No. 1. Bescrni and anthropometric observations, ‘Trans, R.
Soc. S. Aust, Adelaide, 51: 65-75,

. BD. and Hossfeld, P. S.. fea, Aboriginal stone circles. Mankind, Sydney,
6 (4): 181-183,

1966: Australian aboriginal stone urrangements in north-west South Australia.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 90: 171-176.

YT, D, and Howchin, W., 1933: A rejoinder to some recent ethnological papers.
Ree. 8. Aust, Mus., Adelaide. 5 (1) 1-11,

T. D. and Lewis, A. J., 1926: The aborigines of South Australia: anthropometric,
descriptive und other observations recorded at Ooldea, Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust,
Adelaide, 50; 183-191,

T. DBD, and Moore, A, P. Re 1930: Adelaide University Field hathropology:
Koonibba, South Australia, Aust. J. Dent. Melbourne, 34: 123-

T, D. and Mountford, C, P., 1939: Aboriginal arrangements of be in Central
Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.. Adelaide, 63 (1): 17-21.

T. D. and Noone, Fl. V. V.. 1943: South Australian microlithic stone implements.
Rec, S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7 (3): 281-307,

1943: Some aboriginal camp sites in the Woukwine Runge Region of the South-
east of South Australia. Ree. S. Aust. Mus, Adelaide, 7 (4): 371-395,

T. D, and Walsh, G, D., 1947; Notes on aboriginal camp sites on Yorke Peninsula,
South) Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 3 (11): 334-340,

1952; Aboriginal implements from camp siles in the South of South Australin
and Victoria. Mankind, Sydney, 4 (8): 339-342,

Ward, L,. K., Campbell, T. D., Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1936: Fossil man in the

0

State of South Australia. Rep, Wash. geol, Cong., Washington, 16: 1271-1273.

646 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Wood-Jones, F. and Campbell, T. D., 1924: Six hitherto undescribed skulls of Tasmanian
natives. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 2 (4): 459-469.
1924: Anthropometric and descriptive observations on some South Australian
aboriginals, with a summary of previously recorded anthropometric data, Trans.
R. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 48: 303-312.
1925: A contribution to the study of Eoliths: some observations on the natural
forces at work in the production of flaked stones on the Central Australian
tablelands. JL, R. anthrop, Inst., London, 55; 115-122.

MOVIE FILMS

_ Professor Campbell, in association with the Board for Anthropological Research,
University of Adelaide, was responsible for the direction and production of many monochrome
and colour/sound movie films on various aspects of traditional aboriginal life. The following
is a selected bibliography of the most recent productions.

‘So They Did Eat (1953). Food and food habits, gathering and hunting food supplies,
preparation and cooking. 900ft.

‘The Boomerang’ (1958). A record of aboriginal technology showing the making and
various uses of the ordinary type of boomerang of Central Australia. 420ft.

‘The Woomera’ (1958). A record of aboriginal technology showing the stages of the
making of the spearthrower and the many uses it serves. 560ft.

‘Nabarula’ (1958), A brief film story of the life of an aboriginal girl, from her
babyhood in the bush to her young adult years and motherhood. 900ft.

‘Palya’ (1963). Prepared spinifex gum—the collection, cleaning, preparation and heat
treatment of the grass resin; some of the uses of the gum. 420ft.

‘Aboriginal Spears’ (1963). Illustrating the manufacture and use of two main types of
spears, 650ft.

‘Aboriginal Hair String’ (1963). A record of the manufacture and uses of aboriginal
human hair string; showing the raw material, construction and use of the spindle-
bobbin, teasing and spinning the string thread, 900ft.

‘Aboriginal Axes’ (1965). Old time aboriginal stone axe quarry, grinding un axe
“blank”, mounting a ground stone axehead, 500ft.

“Ngoora’ (1965). An enactment of the movement of a small group of aboriginal people

to a new camping site. Various activities on the journey and the preparation of the
new camp are depicted, 1,830ft.

R. E.

PREHISTORIC ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT THOMAS RESEVOIR,
CLELAND HILLS, WESTERN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper records prehistoric rock engravings at Thomas Resevoir in the remote Cleland Hills in
western Central Australia. A brief account is given of the discovery of the site and the events
leading to its detailed examination. The engrave designs and a small series of ochre paintings are
described and illustrated, their significance is discussed and a comparison is made with other sites
in Central and South Australia. A number of unique designs depicting human facial details is
recorded and their origin considered. Camping places and associated stone implements are also
noted.

PREHISTORIC ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT THOMAS RESERVOIR,
CLELAND HILLS, WESTERN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS, Curator oF ANTHROPOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Figs. 1-9

SUMMARY

This paper records prehistoric rock engravings at Thomas Reservoir
in the remote Cleland Hills in western Central Australia. A brief account
is given of the discovery of the site and the events leading to its detailed
examination. The engraved designs and a small series of ochre paintings
are described and illustrated, their significance is discussed and a comparison
is made with other sites in Central and South Australia. A number of
unique designs depicting human facial details is recorded and their origin
considered, Camping places and associated stone implements are also noted.

INTRODUCTION

The early Australian explorers blazed trails across the continent leaving
vast regions to be examined in detail by later investigators. Central
Australia was one such region where large areas remained unexamined long
after McDouall Stuart had opened the way to the north in 1862 and the
Overland Telegraph Line had been constructed ten years later. It was not
until 1889 that the Cleland Hills were discovered by Tietkens in the course
of a detailed exploration of the Centre. His party set out from Bond
Springs, north of Alice Springs, headed westward along the Macdonnell
Ranges, passed Mount Sonder and Mount Solitary (Map, Fig. 1), and
ultimately set up its twenty-seventh camp on May 13, 1889 at the south-
eastern end of a low range, named by Tietkens the Cleland Hills after his
friend, Dr. W. L. Cleland, father of the South Australian scientist Professor
Sir John Cleland. By making its approach from the south the party missed
the large natural rockhole located in one of the gullies on the north side of
the range. The discovery of this permanent water, of great value to later
explorers, is credited to Maurice and Murray who were the first to explore
the north side of the Clelands. In the winter of 1902 Maurice organized
and led an expedition from Fowlers Bay in South Australia across the centre
of Australia to Wyndham on the north-west coast. The party, travelling by
camel, camped south-east of the Cleland Hills on July 18. Maurice (1902a)
records “. . . very heavy and continuous sandhills crossed today .
blacks promised to show us a water tomorrow”. They “. . . never came,

648 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

but we managed to find it ourselves and a tremendous rockhole it was. . .”
(1902b). The party had worked its way around the hills and discovered a
creek outlet where several Aboriginals were seen to run off; the party followed
their tracks up the creek and discovered the rockhole. “We were
surrounded by blacks, but they would not come anywhere near us, and so
we could not get in touch with them at all”, Maurice remarked in a later
account of the expedition (Maurice, 1902b).

The name “Thomas Reservoir” was given to the rockhole in honour of
Sir Robert Kyffin Thomas, a grandson of the founder of the South Australian
Press, and President in 1902 of the South Australian Branch of the Royal
Geographical Society of Australasia which assisted the project.

Explorer R. T. Maurice and his surveyor companion W. R. Murray
also made the first discovery of Aboriginal art at Thomas Reservoir.
“| we came across some native drawings and a curious native hiero-
glyphic on a tree” is the brief and inadequate description given by Maurice
(1902b). Murray examined the hills to the south of the rockhole and found

PAPUNYA
e

MT. LIEBIG
A™ ZIEL

HAASTS@
- BLUFF A

MT. uDOR &

ooseee’

—

s,

e Mee
of MT. SOLITARY &

®
THOMAS
RESERVOIR TUKULNGA

MT, SONDER

®
HERMANNSBURG
AREYONGA

6
TEMPE DOWNS

we . CURTIN SPRINGS
e Ps
AYERS ROCK

FIG. 1.
Map showing the location of the Thomas Reservoir site in Western Central Australia.

FDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 649

other paintings, remarking. “The soft sandstone readily forms into caves
which the natives use for camping places in wet or windy weather, There
are native drawings in many of them, but they sre very poor and indistinct”
(Murray, 1902), Examination of these rock shelters in 1967 showed that
there is now no trace of the paintings nor any accumulated occupation
deposit.

While at Thomas Reservoir, the explorers marked two gum trees, one
near the waterhole with \\" and the other a short distance away with a
large M. Although partly covered by regrowth the latter blaze still survives.

Many years later H, H, Finlayson called at the rockhole during his
Central Australian journeys, and initials on a cliff-face testify to other visitors
to this remote oasis, Prospectors, survey teams and parties in search of
Lusscter’s elusive gold finds have made Thomas Reservoir a stopping place.
No-one has provided an account of the rock engravings and quite probably
they were unnoticed by these visitors.

For 60 years, until 1961, when explorer, prospector and author, Michael
Terry, of Sydney, visited Thomas Reservoir, the references in the unpublished
reports of Maurice and Murray were the only records of what has proved
to be one of the most important prehistoric art sites in Australia. This was
Terry's second visit to the Cleland Hills, He called there fitst on camels in
September-October 1932 while prospecting (Terry, 1932), but on that
occasion did not notice any of the art or other indications of past Aboriginal
occupation, This is not surprising, for rock engravings can easily be over-
looked. They are frequently difficult to see unless the sun is at an
appropriate angle to provide strong cross lighting which emphasizes the relief,

In his later published accounts Terry compared the engravings with
Egyptian and Assyrian art and claimed an association, but the photographs
he published and the evidence he provided were unconvincing, and so his
plans for a full and immediate investigation were largely ignored, Realizing
his own limited knowledge of prehistoric art, Terry sought a sponsor for an
expedition, including an anthropologist famihar with rock engravings, to
make a detailed record of the site and report on its significance. Six years
later, between September 7-19, 1967, Terry guided a joint Australian
Institute of Aboriginal Studies and South Australian Museum expedition to
the Cleland Hills. This paper records the results of that investigation,

DESCRIPTION

The Cleland Hills are just over 200 miles due west of Alice Springs
(Map, Fig. |). Fortunately they ure situated on the Central Australian
Aboriginal Reserve and so are afforded 4 measure of protection from

Hal RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 651

vandalism, as a permit is necessary to enter the area. Isolated amongst
vast loose ted sand-dunes the Clelands were more easily accessible to the
explorers’ camels than they are to four-wheel drive vehicles,

The expedition approached from the northern side which presents an
escarpment. Access to the site is by way of a rocky gorge with precipitous
sides. The bed of the gorge had been scoured by heavy rains of two good
seasons following the prolonged Central Australian drought of the early
1960's. Once through the gorge the country opens out to an undulating
Sandy area between hills and associated gullies. The rockhole is hidden by
undergrowth at the end of an inner gully (Fig. 2A), Progress is impeded
by a watercourse which takes the overflow and has cut a channel exposing
a continuous bed of large boulders. There is a scatter of Ghost Gumi trees
(Encalyptus papuana), and native tobacco (Nicotiana invulba) flourishes
throughout the area,

The rockhole (Lat. 23 deg. 42 min. S: Long, 130 deg. 49 min. B) is
the Main topographical feature in this part of the hills. It is &5ft. in length,
21ft, deep, and is very impressive, with cliffs rising sheer from the water's
edge to a height of about 45ft, (Fig. 3A). It has a calculated capacity of
half a million gallons. There is no asseciated spring, but the surrounding
hills provide an efficient catchment during periodic (hunderstorms. The
clifls and dense trees shade the rockhole, keeping evaporation to a minimum.
Such a water supply in the midst of an arid desert region would have
provided a strong inducement to the Aboriginals of recent and no doubt of
long past times to frequent the site,

The hills of this region are composed mainly of fine, evenly-grained
sandstone although there is some conglomerate, Because of iron oxide in
the matrix the rock surface is a slightly mottled buff and brown, Many
Tocks have separated along joints and large blocks have been dislodged and
have fallen from the cliffs down the hillside; pavements are broken, flat
slabs have slipped out of place along the bedding planes and boulders are
strewn on the hills and floor of the gully. All have been weathered
extensively, It would not be surprising if such unusual features, adjacent to
a permanent water supply, had considerable mythological significance for
the Aboriginals, as the formation of physical features is usually attributed
by them to totenvic ancestors of their Dreamtime. It is unfortunate that
efforts to obtain reliable informants who know the myths ussociated with the
site have not so far been successful.

FIG, 2.
A. The large permanent rockhole is hidden by dense undergrowth (centre) at the end of
an inner gully.

BK. These simple engravings represent a kangaroo sitting with tail and fore-paws on the
ground.

a
w
tN

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 653

Besides the explorers’ observations of Aboriginals at the site, there is
tangible evidence of comparatively recent occupation in the form of ochre
paintings, cainp-sites and scars on the gum trees where bark dishes have been
removed, The numerous engravings on the surface of the rocks surrounding
the rockhole ure survivals of the activities of man at a much earlier period.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS

On arrival at the Cleland Hills, after a prolonged and difficult journey
across the seemingly endless red sand-dunes, Terry guided the party to the
rockhole, where he pointed out the large engraved block of stone which had
led to his extravagant claims for the site (Fig. 4A). The engravings on
this stone are mainly abstract linear designs und small dots which do not
appear to conform to any general pattern or depict any identifiable animal
or object. The most interesting design is a heart-shaped face (Fig. 4B) of
owl-like appearance und quite different from any other recorded Aboriginal
motif, Weathering of the front of the rock, including the engravings, is
more advanced than on the other surfaces, indicating that it had been
engraved before being lodged in its present position.

Nearby was another of the engravings Terry figured in his account.
The published photograph had been heavily retouched and showed little of
the fine detail of this unusual and well-preserved engraving (Fig. 5A), Tt
is on o fallen rock quite close to the other heart-shaped face. Two small
horn-like protrusions extend from the top of the head and the mouth is
more definite than on the other example. The eyes of both engravings are
similar, being formed by two concentric circles around a central pit.

There is a third engraving of the same type but of a different style
located in an inaccessible position high on the cliff overlooking the water.
This engraving could have been made only when a rock ledge, since broken
away, provided access, These three unusual engravings showing facial
features left no doubt about the importance of Terry’s find. Other engravings
on fhe nearby cliffs were not so obvious and a close search was necessary
to locate them,

FIG, 3

A. Cliffs tower above the large waterhole. The arrow indivates the position of the red

ochre paintings.
Simple engravings including aw fully pecked lizard in plan. The engrivings have

re-weuthered to natch the natural colour of the rock surface.

©. Two unusual designs which may be a simple form of the heart-shuped face designs,
Scale in centimetres.

A Unigue engraving with individualistic facial details suggesting expression, Scale in

centimetres,

Go

654 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 655

Using the rockhole as a central point a detailed examination was carried
out in ever-widening circles, and an area of about one square mile was
covered before the full extent of the site could be determined. Descriptions
of the various rock-faces were recorded, engravings listed, photographs taken
and latex impressions made,

The greatest concentration of engravings is on the cliffs and broken
hills forming a rough amphitheatre around the rockhole, One occurrence
of particular interest is on two rocks on top of tbe cliff immediately above
the rockhole. Most of the designs are abstract (Fig. 6A-B) but there are
some kangaroo tracks. Two designs which may be ‘elated to the heart-
shaped faces were found on one badly fractured surface (Fig. 3C), They
have the distinctive heart-shape, and engraved circular areas giving the
impression of eyes. Other unusual combinations of cireles and linear designs
were found on nearby cliff, Tdentitiable designs in this area include emu,
kangaroo and bird tracks, a small human figure, 4 star-like motif, circles
aid a number of linear engravings, Circles are sometimes linked to form
interesting abstract designs, When arranged in pairs they give the impression
of being an early stage in the development of the unusual face designs
Which are a feature of the site. The extreme weathering of the rocks made
classification of many designs very difficull, and there are large vertical areas
with indications of many elaborate engravings which are too weathered to
decipher, In one place the branches of several large trees have been rubbing
agiinst the cliffs and have combined with natural fretting to obliterate the
outline of Many engravings.

As the search extended beyond the rockhole area new and interesting
finds were made on the adjoining hills. On one vertical rock-face there are
two engraved faces complete with eyes, nose and mouth but lacking full
facial outlines. One of these remarkable engravings (Fia, 7D) has no
forehead although the line of the chin has been shown, The eyes are formed
by simple circles with central pits to represent the eye-balls. There is an
economy of line as the circles forming the eyes also provide the outline of
the face. The nose and mouth are quite distinctive und there is clearly
a cheerful expression. Two small triangles have been made near the base
of the face and two long lines extend below, These may have been intended
as ut stylized representation of a body (Fig, 7C).

The second face is even more remarkable in that its features form a
distinct expression of sadness (Fig. 3D), This face also lacks a forehead

FIG. 4
A. A large block of stone dislodged from the elif! where it Was originally engraved. Scale
in centimetres,
B. This heart-shaped, stylized face, engraved deeply into the soft sandstone, was one of ihe
first engravings to be found at Thomas Reservoir,

M

MUSEU

Ee SA,

CORDS OF THI

RE

56

6

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 657

but nose and mouth are distinctive and have been given quite individual
treatment. The eyes are formed by two concentric circles and a central pit,
a style identical to that of the heart-shaped faces near the rockhole. In this
example, however, the outside circle forms part of the facial outline and
indeed continues on to depict the nose. There is a small crescent-shaped
design below the face. On an adjacent boulder there is a smaller face,
round in shape and only 4in. in width but with the distinction of having a
complete outline.

Another of these intriguing engravings was found on a vertical rock
surface a short distance away. In this instance the face is attached to a
peculiar body, separate from the arms and legs which are arranged in such
a way as to suggest movement (Fig. 7B). The face has a complete outline
and eyes are formed inside this by two circles with central pits. Nose and
mouth are again clearly depicted but in an individualistic style. The facial
expression, which is unmistakably one of happiness, demonstrates the skill
of the prehistoric craftsman in achieving such detail by a comparatively crude
technique. Indeed, the portrayal of feeling in many of the Cleland Hills face
designs is a unique feature in Australian Aboriginal art which, in rock
engravings, is usually very simple and often abstract.

A stylized human figure is engraved on the same rock surface as the
unusual, elaborate example (Fig. 7A). The two display a striking similarity
in pose but the styles are quite different. Weathering of the surface is even
indicating that the two diverse forms may be contemporary or at least closely
associated.

In this same area, as on the cliffs near the waterhole, there are other
designs of a type common to most engraving sites in the centre of Australia.
These designs include the usual animal tracks, one depicting a kangaroo
sitting with fore-paws and tail on the ground (Fig. 2B), circles, a crescent
in outline, and two plan aspects of lizards (Fig. 3B), one of them with
individual toes depicted.

As the examination extended beyond the tops of the cliffs and adjoining
hills the engravings diminished, finally petering out about 400 yards from
the rockhole. Here the country tends to flatten out although there are many
suitable rock surfaces which do not appear to have been engraved. Another
line of broken and weathered hills extends further on but a search of these
failed to produce any evidence of engravings, thus indicating that the site
is limited to a relatively small area around the waterhole. This association

FIG, 5
A. A remarkable engraved face on a fallen block of stone. Scale in centimetres.

B. Weathering has almost obliterated this face from the surface of the rock. It is only
visible when the sun provides strong cross lighting to emphasize the relief.

658

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 659

of rock engravings and permanent water supplies is a constant feature at
most recorded Australian sites (Edwards, 1965). The engravings on the
fringe of the site are mainly animal tracks occurring singly or in small groups.
Several of the track designs are incomplete and seem to show only the initial
work for engravings. Apparently the outline was first marked on the surface
by light pecking and then the central portion was chipped out by the repeated
action of a piece of sharp stone, presumably struck with another, as with a
hammer and chisel. By this means sufficient control could be maintained
to form the more precise designs, ‘This pecking technique has had a wide
application throughout Australia, The only exception at Thomas Reservoir
was found in a series of shelters weathered into the soft rocks along the
escarpment of the hills which form the entrance to the reservoir gully
(Fig, 8A), In one of these shelters there are two large boulders eut with
deep abraded grooves (Fig. 8B). These markings also have a wide
distribution and in some regions are believed to be associated with rain
increase rites (Arndt, 1962),

There are a few engravings on the rocks in the bed of the creek which
takes the overflow from the rockhole, Most of these have been worn by
the erosive effects of water-borne sand. Some are extremely faint. lt may
well be that others have been completely obliterated.

The advanced weathering of the rocks has had a devastating effect on
the engravings and made compilation of a complete inventory of individual
designs impossible. Each rock surface had to be examined at several
different times of the day to take advantage of the effects of cross lighting
and enable identification of some of the faint designs. Even after several
days of intensive study yet another engraved face was noticed on the surface
of a large outcrop a short time before departure from the site. This
engraving, which again exhibited individualistic treatment of detail, has been
almost completely erased by weathering (Fig. 5B).

In many instances throughout the site broken pavements occur with
only portions of designs intact. The missing pieces have completely
disappeared, indicating advanced movement and disintegration of the rocks,
Identification of designs und estimates of the frequency of their occurrence
can only be made with the qualification that the sample available is but a
small proportion of a once elaborate and extensive site.

PIG, 6

A. Unusual abstract designs engrived on a lurge rock at the lop of the cliff,
breaking Up und many of the designs are in danger of being dislodged,
B. Centuries of weathering have almost removed the simple markings trom this surluce.

The surface is

SEUM

CORDS OF THE S.A, MU

RE

ont

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 661

Identifiable designs at the Cleland Hills number 387. The following
table shows the relative frequencies of the various designs, and the results
from similar analyses carried out at Tukulnga rockhole, 50 miles to the east
in the Gardiners Range (Map, Fig. 1), and at four sites about 850 miles
away in South Australia.

Percentages
Site Units - - - -

Tracks | Circles Total hee
Plofiits = act eeetiyactas 985 483. | 399° s2 «1B
Panaramitee. 22522000. 1,003 57.6 F 26.7 4.3 | 15.7
TiVO ac.rore ce ees . | 2mn6 |) 7 7 |CRTC‘(]TUSSCOW
Winninionie .....5..++ 323602073 16.7 88.0 12.0
Tihulhigay 0.5 encneou es 3186 71.3 24.4 05.7 4.3
Cleland Hills ..,,....... | 387 “50.0 3.0 | 83.0 17.0

The figures show that 50% of the engravings at Thomas Reservoir
are animal tracks. The largest proportion are emu, which occur
more than twice as often as all other tracks. The total proportion
is similar to that at Florina in South Australia. Circles account for
another 33%, and all other designs 17%. Although the percentage of
tracks and circles is lower than at any of the sites considered it is still
high and generally comparable with the other sites. The unique face
designs are only about 4% of the total, This is consistent with other
recorded sites which usually have a small percentage of highly unusual
designs, in most instances abstracts.

This analysis will be extended as percentages become available for
other sites.

ROCK PAINTINGS

On the cliff-face immediately above the waterhole there is a series of
red ochre paintings consisting of 55 large emu tracks. 12 small ochred circles

FIG. 7

A unique human figure on a vertical rock-face. A nearby stylized figure (right) has a
similar body attitude.

The prehistoric rock engravers achieved a happy expression on the face of this strange
human figure. Scale in centimetres.

Two engraved lines below this face may be a simple representation of a body. Scale
in centimetres.

With a minimum of engraving and by the use of a simple pecking technique this
remarkable facial expression was permanently recorded on stone many centuries ago.
Scale in centimetres.

5 Oo F Pp

662 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 163

and some oblong marks, Five of the emu tracks are very large, Access
to the area where the designs have been painted is provided by a narrow
ledge (Fig. 3A). The paintings are very faded and it is difficult to decide
Whether the surviving composition is complete, As the cliffs shelter the
paintings, and the surface is hard and well preserved, the rate of deterioration
has probably been comparatively slow, A photograph of the rockhole taken
by Maurice in 1902 shows a similar group of paintings in the same position
but in slightly better condition.

CAMP-SITES
It was customary for the main living camps of the Aboriginals ta be
located at a discreet distance from ceremonial sites, as most of the rituals
were prohibited to all but initiated males and any infringement brought
immediate and drastic punishment.

A close search was made for caump-sites and associated artefacts,
Three main camping areas were found: one at the entrance to the gorge
on the north side of the range, a second on the open flat between the entrance
gorge and the rockhole, and a third on sandhills about half a mile beyond
the site.

There were few stone implements considering the permanence of the
waterhole and evidence of considerable human activity, A broad scatter
of stone flakes was found on the three camp-sites. A few of irregular shape
have secondary trimming along the margins. One of the only implement
types of pre-determined shape was the adze stone, of which 35 worn examples
were collected, Large grinding stones were a feature of all camp-siles.
Constant grinding of seeds to make flour for “cakes” had produced a single
depression on most, others were worn on both sides while a few had three
hollows. Small top grinders were also found. The prevalence of these large
and heavy artefacts on all camp-sites is an indication that they were left
there permanently and used during periodic visits.

The only implement found which is likely to have any great antiquity

yas a large trimmed flake, of a shape commonly known as a “horsehool”,
It has a base 3 inches in diameter and is 2 inches high, This implement was
found partly buried in the soil between rock outcrops at the top of the hill
a short distance from the unusual engraved human figure. Tt is made from
a Jarge flake, and evidence of the percussion point and conchoidal fracture

FIG. &
A. Two hirge boulders with grooves abraded deeply into their surfaces lie in one of the
rock shelters formed along an escarpment in the Cleland Hills,

B. These abraded grooves are more Concentraled and deeper than those foutid af other
recorded sites.

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

FIG. 9
Side, base and front Views Of the (fimmed core implement found near the engravings at
Thomas Reservoir,

can be seen on its base (Fig. 9B). Step-trimming has been developed along
the distal margin (Fig. 9A) and there are indications of re-sharpening.
The working edge is sharp and still capable of useful work.

Other evidence of Aboriginal activity was provided by the scats on gum
trees near the rockhole and in the vicinity of the camp-sites. These have
been caused by the removal of pieces of bark for use as carrying dishes.
No sooner is the bark removed than the tree begins to repair the damage.
New growth gradually heals the scar, ultimately leaving only a callus on
the bark. All the scars at Thomas Reservoir are completely healed,
suggesting that Aboriginal occupation of the site ceased many years ago,
The rate of regrowth has not been established but a control tree was cut
at Yuendumu in 1965 and records are being kept of the annual healing rate.
It is interesting to note that the tree blazed with a large “M” by Maurice
in 1902 has still not completely healed.

DISCUSSION

The location of sacred painting sites near water supplies with camping
places at a convenient distance is characteristic of the known traditional
nomadic way of life of the Central Australian Aboriginal. To him painted
tracks usually represented the totemic ancestors of the Dreamtime who
travelled across the landscape and formed its features. As the emu is the
subject of many myths and rituals, the red ochre paintings of emu tracks
at Thomas Reservoir no doubt belong to one of these ceremonies, The
presence of a large number of engraved emu tracks at this site may indicate
that the emu ceremony dates from a period when rock engraving was a
living art.

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 665

An almost identical situation has been recorded at Tukulnga rockhole
(Edwards, 1966) where a ceremonial site is associated with large rock
cisterns and camping places. Here the engravings are said by the Aboriginals
to belong to the Dreamtime while ochre paintings are part of present-day
emu ritual. As the Cleland Hills are on the boundary of the Pintubi and
Kukatja tribes (Tindale, 1940), and as there is only about 50 miles between
the two sites, they may well be concerned with the sane emu myth.

The significant feature of the Cleland Hills site is the 16 engraved
faces, Not only are these unique in Australian rock art but they are more
advanced than the pecked engravings recorded in Europe (Kuhn, 1956),
North America (Heizer and Baumhol?, 1962), Southern Africa (Slack.
1962) and the other continents.

The origin of these designs is a mystery, They could have been brought
to Australia by prehistoric man, developed at a series of sites within the
country, or be a unique occurrence at Thomas Reservoir. Although attempts
to find a source outside Australia have mot been convincingly successful the
possibility of diffusion from Melanesia cannot be discounted as there is a
number of rock engravings at Likding on New Hanover, Territory of
Papua-New Guinea, which depict facial details (Biihler 1948-1949, Abb. 11,
atoq). Some of these are heart-shaped, have been made by the pecking
technique, and are very weathered—all factors consistent with some of the
face engravings at Thomas Reservoir,

A study of Central Australian sites has not produced any parallels.
The art of this region is highly stylized, the main symbols being simple and
concentric circles, spirals, U-figures. straight and curved lines, tracks and
small stylized human figures, In cave paintings these vomparatively few
basic units are arranged in yarious patterns and executed in different colours
to form a great variety of extremely impressive and pleasing compositions,

Mountford (1960) records rock engravings at Ewaninga a few miles
south of Alice Springs, where tracks, circles and abstract designs are
concentrated on rock outerops near a small claypan. He also refers to
engravings at ten other sites in Central Australia but without any description.
During the survey of urt sites in the Northern Territory sponsored by the
Australiin Institute of Aboriginal Studies in 1965-67 the author carried
out detailed studies at N’Dahla and Roma Gorges, Areyonga and Tukulnga
Rockhole (Edwards, 1966). Examination of all these sites indicates that
the great majority of engravings io Central Australia falls within the normal
ringe of designs, There are a few exceptions but none bears any similarity
to the new finds at Thomas Reservoir

No link has been found m the regions to the norih where detailed
study of engraving sites is also just beginning, Sites have been exatnined
in the Katherine district and at Willcroo, Delamere, Mainoru, Inaesvale

666 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and O.T, Stations but the engravings at these sites are mainly simple, Tracks
ure common, as are ubraded grooves, The most elaborate designs were
found at a new site on Delamere Station where large intaglios of animals
in silhouette, similar to those recorded at Mootwingee in western New South
Wales (McCarthy and Macintosh, 1962, pl, 23, 2), occur on lurge broken
pavements. There are vast regions to the north yet to be examined and an
extension of the present survey will provide additional comparative material
of great value in solving the mystery surrounding the origin and antiquity
of Australian rock engravings,

At Port Hedland, on the Western Australian coast, some 800 miles
from the Cleland Hills, there are an estimated 15,000 engravings forming
one of the largest concentrations on the continent (MeCarthy, 1962).
There is a great diversity of style from simple tracks and circles to naturalistic
portrayals of animals and stylized human figures, a number reaching |2 feet
in height, Although some of the human outlines have eyes, nose and mouth,
they are shown very simply and are far removed from the comparatively
sophisticated art form of the face engravings. The possibility of diffusion
from the west therefore seems unlikely,

If the face designs were a local development by an individual craftsman
or group, there is not yet evidence of diffusion in the adjacent regions,
Perhaps the reason for this lies in the rigid adherence to traditional forms.
Strehlow (1964) records that", , , all breaches of the rules regulating the
transmission of the sacred traditions . . . and the artistic use of the
decorative patterns and combinations of totemic motifs, were punishable
by death in Central Australia’, Such control would have inhibited the
diffusion of new styles, Ay the development of such customs and the links
between paintings and engravings are unknown it is difficult to estublish
whether such prohibitions had any effect on rock engraving distribution,

The fact that the face designs are all different suggests they did not
atise by the simple repetition of accidentally developed elements. The style
ulways seems deliberate, Each facial detail is placed with precision and
assurance. This is surprising in view of the Central Australians” persistent
use of predetermined patterns in their art, Gach element usually had a
fixed position and meaning. The individual treatment of the face designs
may mean that the rock engravers were intending to portray specific
expressions, emotion Or at least variations in their designs. However their
intention must remain a Matter of speculation, It may be that the freer
style of the faces is a relic of an earlier period before ceremonial art became
rigidly formalized.

The antiquity of rock engravings has been a matter of considerable
speculation, Suggestions of great age have been supported largely by

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 667

circumstantial evidence such as the general deterioration of engraved out-
crops, the patination of engraved rock surfaces, and association with anctent
stone industries.

Surface weathering has been used as a criterion for age determination
of tock engravings in Australia and overseas. For instance variations in
re-weathering or patination shading of the engraved portions of rocks m the
arid Negev region of [srael supplied Anati (1963) with information on the
relative dates of various styles found on the same or adjacent surfaces. His
work indicates that in this particular region it took a minimum of 2,500
years for on engraving to reach the natural colour of the rock, The surfaces
at the Cleland Hills are weathered to a constant depth of only a fraction of
a millimetre, All the engravings would have originally penetrated this dark
surface layer to reveal the white rock beneath, Subsequent re-weatheriny
has restored the engraved portions to the natural surface colour, Thin
sections have been prepared, and the surface and core of rock samples are
being analysed, to determine the nature of the weathering process, its cause,
and if possible its rate of development. These samples have been taken
from sites in southern, central and northern Australia so that the effects of
different climatic conditions can be taken into account,

There is no apparent variation between the surface colouring of the
simple and advanced designs at Thomas Reservoir, Had the face designs
been made at a later period they would exhibit less patination indicated by
a lighter shade of colour. Even the variation in the condition of the various
designs is consistent as there are both well preserved and badly weathered
tracks, while some face engravings in a vertical position are sound and others
are almost obliterated,

The first phase of rock engraving in Australia 1s believed to be
represented by abraded grooves (McCarthy, 1964). Confirmation of
considerable age for these simple marks came first when they were found
on the back wall of the Devon Downs rock shelter at a depth of between
10 and 13 feet (Hale und Tindale, 1930). Datable engravings were
first discovered in an excavation at Ingaladdi on Willeroo Station, nearly
{00 miles south-west of Katherine in the Northern Territory. The work,
carried out in July 1966 under the leadership of Mr, D. J. Mulvaney,
Senior Fellow in Prehistory at the Australian National University, produced
several fragments of rock with ubraded grooves and also kangaroo and emu
tracks, These engravings were found between a level with an approximate
depth of 3 feet 7 inches to 3 feet 10 inches and dated (ANU. 58) at
4920 © 100 (2970 B.C.) and a lower level at approximately 5 feet 7 inches
to 5 feet 10 inches and dated (A.N.U, 60) at 6,800 + 270 (4850 B.C.),
The fragments are badly weathered and most of the designs are inconiplete.
suggesting that they may have originally been pecked or abraded into the

668 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

adjacent cliff and been dislodged after many years of weathering. These
finds are the most positive advance made in the study of Australian rock
engravings, They lend strong support to the general hypothesis of great
age for these attempts of prehistoric man to record aspects of the environment
in which he lived,

The stone implements found on the three camp-sites associated with the
Cleland Hills engraving site provide additional evidence of antiquity. The
adze stones are only an indication of recent activity as such artefacts were
in common use at the time of European settlement. Usually mounted in
spinifex gum on the end of a curved piece of mulga they served for making
a Variety of wooden utensils and weapons (Spencer and Gillen, 1899). As
supplies of stone were short in this region the examples found had all been
repeatedly re-sharpened until they were of no further use, These implements
were used over a wide area of Australia and have become known by the
Wonkonguru term fuila (Horne and Aiston, 1924),

Lurge trimmed core implements have been found at several rock
engraving sites in South Australia (Edwards, 1964). Although the one
example from near the engravings in the Cleland Hills does not provide
substantial evidence of a direct connection it does justify a close search for
these large. crude implements on camp-sites associated with Central
Austrahan engraving sites. Cooper (1943) records u range of triinmed
cores, some identical to the figured specimen (Fig. 9), concentrated on many
South Australian sites, including Hallett Cove (Cooper, 1959), Kangaroo
Island (Cooper, 1960) and the River Wakefield (Cuoper, 1961). This
industry is called Kartan in South Australia and is believed to be one of
the earliest on the continent (Tindale, 1957), Its recognized distribution
area has now been extended to the Macdonnell Ranges where a number have
been found during recent field work, These finds will be the subject of a
further paper.

Claims thai the face engravings at Thomas Reservoir may be the
product of a lost civilization are largely unsupported because of the
predominance of motifs common to other sites aiid the lack of evidence of
any age difference between the simple and detuiled styles. These engravings
add an exciting new style to the range of motifs recorded at Australian
sites. This is hot stirprising for although consistent patterns of designs have
been firmly established for some parts of the continent there remain vast
regions yel to be examined in detail, Interpretation of the remarkable face
engravings is made difficult by this lack of detailed studies. Further sites
are certain to be found in the vast mountain ranges yet to be investigated
in Central Australia, The discovery of these unique engravings illustrates
in ¢ dramatie way that an extension of the present field work could produce
Important results,

EDWARDS—CLELAND HILLS ROCK ENGRAVINGS 669

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Ihe recording wf the Thomas Reservoir site was initially due to Mr. Michael ‘Terry
whose persistence and enthusiasm led to the Cleland Hills expedition of 1967, His assistance
and companionship in the field were much appreciated. My thanks are due to the Australie)
Institute of Aboriginal Studies for sponsoring the field work and inviting me to lead the
investigations, ‘(he Principal, Mr, F. D, McCarthy, has given every encouragement to the
project and made muny helpful sugzestions. A subsidy was provided by the Institute to
enable publication of an adequate number of plates. The Director of Welfare, Northern
Territory Administration, Mr, H, C. Giese, wave permission for the investigalion, Invaluable
assistance was rendered by Mr. Trevor Milikins, Superintendent of Areyonga Settlement,
Mr. M. S. Mitidns of Areyonga and Mr. D. G, Boerner of Alice Springs. Mr, D. J, Bannear
of Cobdoula, South Australia, accompanied the expedition in a second Landrover at his
own expense und provided valuable assistance in the field, Mr. Harry Bowshall made
impressions of the engravings and Dr, D. W. P. Corbell identified the rock specimens,
Mr. D. J. Mulvaney of the Australian National University kindly supplied details of dates
obtained from the Tngaladdi Excavation, ‘The South Australian Arehives made uyailable the
manuscript journals of Mfurice itnd Murray, Mr, Bruee Guerin read the manuscript and
offered constructive critivism. The South Australian Museum provided equipment, salaries
for two olficers, and contributions lo field expenses.

REFERENCES
Anati. B, 1963: Pulestine before the Hebrews, London.
Armull, W., 1962: The interpretation of the Delamere Lightning paintings und rock engravings.
Oceunin, 32 (3).
Biihler, A., 1948-44: Steingertite, Steinskulpturen und Felszeichniigen aus Melunesien wnd
Polynesien. Anthropas, 41-44,

Couper, H, M,, 1959: Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett Cove, South
Australia, ‘Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust, 82,

—__— }960)! The archucology of Kangaroo tsland, South Australia, Ree. S. Aust, Mus.
13 (4).

— —— 961: Archacological stone implements along the Lower River Wakelield, South
Australia, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 84

Edwards, R., 1964: Rock engravings and stone implements of Pitcairn Station, North-eastern
South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus, 14 (4),

—__— 1965: Rock engravings and aboriginal occupation at Nackira Springs in the North
eust of South Australia. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 15 (1).

i968: Comparative study of rock engravings in South and Central Australia,
Trans, R. Soc. S, Aust., 90.

Hile, H, M, and Tindale, N. B.. 1930; Notes on some human remiins in the lower Murray
‘Valley, South Australia, Ree, S. Aust, Mus., 4 (2),

Heiver, Ro F. and Baumboff, M. A., 1962: Prehistoric Rock Arr of Nevada and Fastern
California, Berkeley.

Horne. G. and Aision, G., 1924: Savage Life in Central Australia, London,
Kilhn, H., 1956: The Rock Pictures of Europe. London,

Maurice, R, ‘T., 1902a: Exploration journal from South to North Coast, Manuseript, 5,
Aust, Arch., Adelaide.

1902b: Across the great thirst land. Manuseript, S. Aust. Arch., Adelaide,

McCarthy, F. D., 1962: The rock engravings at Port Hedland, North-western Australia,
Pap. Kroeber anthrop. Soc.. 26,

1964: The Art of the Rock-faces. Australian Aboriginal Art. Sydney, 3.

McCarthy, F. D, and Macintosh. N. W. G., 1962: The Archaeology of Mootwingee Western
New South Wales. Rec. Aust. Mus., 25 (13).

Mountford, C. P., 1960: Simple rock engravings in Central Australia. Man, 60 (192),

Murray, W. R., 1902: Exploration of R, T, Maurice, Fowlers Bay to Cambridge Gull,
Western Australia. Manuscript, 8, Aust. Arch,, Adelaide,

670 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J., 1899: The native tribes of Central Australia. London.
Slack, L. M., 1962: Rock engravings from Driekops Eiland. London.

Strehlow, T. G. H., 1964: The art of circle, line and square. Australian Aboriginal Art.
Sydney, 4.

Terry, M., 1932: Erldunda Station—Laverton, Letter Book containing company corres-
pondence. Manuscript, S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide.

Tietkens, W. H., 1890: Journal of Mr. W. H. Tietkens Central Australian exploring expedi-
tion. S. Aust. Parl. pap., Adelaide, 3.

Tindale, N. B., 1940: Distribution of Australian Aboriginal tribes: a field survey. Trans.
R. Soc. S. Aust., 64 (1).

1957: Culture succession in South Eastern Australia from late Pleistocene to the
Present. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 13 (1).

EXCAVATION OF ABORIGINAL GRAVES AT GIDGEALPA, SOUTH
AUSTRALIA

BY GRAEME L. PRETTY

Summary

Four aboriginal graves exposed by wind erosion were evacuated. Two skeletons, one of them
excavated from a bed of vegetation lining the grave, were dated by radiocarbon analysis. Some
features of bone pathology are noted. A brief report of a fifth skeleton found at another site 30
kilometrs distant is given.

EXCAVATION OF ABORIGINAL GRAVES AT GIDGEALPA,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GRAEME L. PRETTY, Curator oF ARCHAEOLOGY,
SouTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

SUMMARY

Four aboriginal graves exposed by wind erosion were excavated. Two
skeletons, one of them excavated from a bed of vegetation lining the grave,
were dated by radiocarbon analysis. Some features of bone pathology are
noted. A brief report of a fifth skeleton found at another site 30 kilometres
distant is given,

INTRODUCTION
Through the courtesy of Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd., I spent from
19-21 May 1964 at their Gidgealpa Location, accompanied by the Curator
of Mammals, Mr. P. F. Aitken. We had been flown up to investigate a

report of skeletons at Gidgealpa Water Hole.
On Wednesday, 20th, with Mr. Aitken, Dr. H. Wopfner (South
Australian Department of Mines) and Mr. E. Siebel (Delhi Australian
Petroleum) we travelled to the water hole, some 124 km. north from the

40°30'E

7
com) @ Innomincka
om’

fy

y Wattothoolendinnia waterhole

scole in kilometres

FIG. 1.
Part of Cooper Creek region showing localities mentioned in this paper.

672 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

drilling camp. Gidgealpa Water Hole (27° 49’ S, 140° 08’ E) is a remnant
billabong of Cooper Creek which fills after flooding (see Fig. 1). It is
part of the tribal territory of the Yandruwanta (Tindale 1940, p. 185, map)
and the name is a corruption of Kilyalpa [’kiljalpa] which means “to stand
in the shade of a grey rain-cloud”, a reference to an incident in their creation
stories (Vogelsang’s translation of Reuther’s MSS., Vol. 7, p. 112, No, 614).

EXCAVATION

There were four burials exposed in a deflated area of dune just beyond
the southern bank of the water hole (Fig. 2). One was so badly broken up
for its presence to be shown only by a scattered heap of bone fragments.
The other three were about 5 m. apart and oriented in the same direction.

S

bank of waterhole
20m, approx.

_
—==™ ae
me) human bone fragments
oe
te at ~

-. A 42198 in

fragments

A42|97

ey,
3s S

2 metres

FIG. 2.
Plan of graves, Gidgealpa Water Hole.

All had been weathered and the bones were in a chalky, fragmentary state.
The surrounding area and probably the full extent of the water hole banks
would have been camped on by Aborigines, Stone implements and struck
flakes were scattered through the sand and an old hearth was found on the
surface among bushes not far from the graves.

PRETTY—GIDGEALPA ABORIGINAL GRAVES 673

Burial A42196* was of a male fully extended in a supine position, the
skull having fallen forward until the chin rested on the sternuni, Upon
removal of the skull and upper vertebrae, a thin layer of dark vegetable
matter appeared immediately beneath the backbone. It showed up in
section as a gently curved layer (see Fig. 3A). The sand above it was
flecked with dark humic matter which further clearing showed to be a dark
oval extending from the skull to patellae. It would appear that the body
had been laid on a matting of leaf brush before filling the grave. The dark
mould was analysed and reported to contain predominantly leaf and twig
remnants bearing a strong similarity to Atalaya hemiglauca F.v.M. The
same plant still grows around the water hole (see Table 1), A sample of
this material has been dated to 250 + 90 B.P. by the Gakushuin Laboratory
(Gak 678; see Table 2),

TABLE 1

LIST OF PLANTS COLLECTED AT GIDGEALPA WATER HOLE IN JULY 1964
BY J, GREER (DELHI! AUSTRALIAN PETROLEUM)

Acacia oswaldii FVM.

Acacid Victoriae BENTH.

Atalaya hhemiglauca FyM.

Bauhinia carronii FvM.

Eucalypins nicrotheca FyM.

Morgania glabra R.BR.

Muehlenbeckia cutninghamii (MEISN.) FyM.

Identifications courtesy Mr. P, G. Wilson, State Herbarium of Sourh Australia,

Examination of the bones showed malunion of a fracture to the left
radius and ulna. The interior of the calvarium contained a brown crumbly
matter attached to the bone, the sandy contents of the skull having fallen
away to expose it during cleaning. The absence of any similar material in
the sand excavated from the outer surface would argue against its derivation
from root matter. To test the possibility that it was tissue a strong extract
was subjected to a Coomb’s inhibition test. No trace of human globulin
was detected.

Some fragments of flaked stone were found in the sandy fill of the grave,
but as it is on a camp-site, they are more likely to have been part of the
fill than to have been deliberately buried, No implements were recovered.

Burial A42197 was of a female and was also in a supine position.
The skull was turned to the side facing towards its left. No layer of
vegetation was detected beneath the skeleton. The grave lay close to the
eroded edge of the original dune surface, marked by tufts of dry grass.
If this can be taken as the dune surface at time of burial, then a line along
the slope of the uneroded surface and directly over the skeleton gives an
estimated grave depth of some 20 cm. Fragments of carbon from the fill

© The numbers cited are from the Museum Register.

674 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

have been dated to 320 + 90 B.P. (Gak 679) by the Guakushuin
Laboratory, It must be emphasized that this date was derived from lumps
of charcoal collected from the sand between the bones. It is reasonable to
suppose that it derived from campfires lit at the same time and swept into
the grave with the sand, but it is possible that older carbon had been mixed
with the sand, contaminating the grave. However, contiguity, conformity
of alignment and mode of disposal, together with comparable condition of
the weathered and exposed bones, combine to group these burials together.
We may conclude that their time range would run from 250 to 320 B.P. 4
90 years.
TABLE 2
LIST OF Cl4 ASSAYS OF SAMPLES FROM GINGEALPA WATER HOLE
Age (years

Code No. Sample before 1950)
Gak-678 ©, No, AS55838, yveyetuble matter lining grave pit of skeleton A42196 250 -—- 90)
Gak-679 .. No, A§5838, charenal frony grave fill of skelelon Ad2197, ,, .. 320 +90

Estimates from Prot. K. Kigoshi, Gakushuin University, Tokyo, in letler dated
Tih October, 1965,

Examination of the skeleton shows lesions which suggest bone infection,
There is a platform with osteophytes on the lower right tibia and some
expansion in the proximal third of the left tibia. Tn the skull there is a
noticeable depression of the sagittal suture accompanied by some porosity
of the adjacent parietals. The suture fusion may be due to age. Although
the lesions are not strongly characteristic, together they may raise the
suspicion of treponemal infection.

No. A42198, 4.5 m. to the west of A and B, was also in the supine
position, with the skull fallen to its right side. The bones were too
fragmentary for successful removal, and only the skull was recovered.

GRAVE AT WATTATHOOLENDINNIE WATER HOLE

An unexpected insight into the actual shape of grave pits in this area
came from a graye discovered late in the same day at Wattathoolendinnie
Water Hole some 30 kilometres east of Gidgealpa Location. Here, north
of the track, sheet wash had swept away the overlying sand from the dune
core (Wopfner and Twidale, 1967) exposing a fragmentary skeleton in a
sub-rectangular pit, 180 cm, x 80 cm. (see Fig, 3B). The pit had been

FIG, 3.

A. Pelvis of A42196 exposed on a block to show the underlying
matting of vegetation appearing in section us a gently curved
dark band.

B. Grave at Wattathoolendinnié Water Hole showing the shallow
depression left after erosion of the less compact fill. The
matchbox near the head of the pit will serve as a scale,

PRETTY—GIDGEALPA ABORIGINAL GRAVES 675

676 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

dug into the indurated sandy loam, with differential crosion revealing
its original shape. This can be seen from the photograph with the bone
fragments appearing as scattered projections from the shallow depression.
The skull, eroded away to expose its outline in section, ean be seen to the
right of the matchbox. The bones were too weathered to be removed and
were left undisturbed. Basedow (1925, p. 205) refers to burials im oblong
pits for this region,

Wattathoolendinne had ulso been a camp-site and a surface collection
of stone implements included flaked tu/a chisels, worn tula slugs, long end.
scrapers and grinding stones.

DISCUSSION

Yandruwanta burial customs are described by Howitt (1904, pp. 446-
449), Basedow (1925, pp. 206-207) and Elkin (1937, pp. 280-289).
Those for the neighbouring Dieri on the west are described by Gason
(1874, p. 22), Berndt and Vogelsang (1939), and for the Wongkonguru
to the north-west by Horne and Aiston (1924, pp. 152-153). The only
reference to burial of the body on a matting of vegetation is for the Dieri
hy Berndt and Vogelsang (1939, p. 170). Basedow (1913) reports
excavating a male skeleton covered with vegetation and lengths of wood at
Bobinoony Well, east of Beltana (30° 48’S, 138° 25°E). This would be
in the territory of the Kuyani, southern neighbours of the Yandruwanta
(Tindale, 1940, p. 179, map),

According to MacPherson (1939, p. 177) branches of the water
mallee (Eucalyptus dumosa) were buried at the feet of a body during burial
at Ooldea, Nullarbor Plain, South Australia,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

{ am thankful fo Mr. G. Greer and Mr. George Higinbotham. Delhi Australian
Petroleum, for arranging the visit, and to Dr. H. Wopfner (South Australian Department of
Mines) for his assistance and information, The C14 estimates were obtained through o grant
from the Board of Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide, Dr. R. N. Ibbotson,
Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science, University of Adelaide, arranged for the
Coomb’s inhibition test and Mr. P. H. Smith, Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,
analysed the humic matter from beneath A42196, T am indebted to Dr. C. J. Hackett,
Royul National Orthopaedic Hospital, London, for examining the skeletons for bone pathology,
and to Dr. D. R. Brothwell. British Museum (Nat. Hist.) for his comments,

REFERENCES

Basedow, H., 1913: Burial Customs in the Northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia,

Man, 1913, No, 26, pp. 49-53, pl. D.

1925: The Australian Aboriginal, Adelaide (pl. 25, opp. p. 196, pp. 206-207).
Berndt, R. M.. and Vogelsang, T.. 1939: Notes on the Dieri Tribe of South Australia.
Trans, Roy. Soe. §. Aust,, 63 (2), pp, 167-171.

Elkin, A, P., 1937: Beliefs and Practices connected with Death in North-eastern and Western

ts Australia, Oceania, 7 (3), pp. 275-299, plates I-ll, map. (March

AT.)

PRETTY—GIDGEALPA ABORIGINAL GRAVES 677

Gason, S. (ed. Isaacs), 1872: The Dieyerie Tribe of Australian Aborigines, Adelaide.

Horne, G., and Aiston, G., 1924: Savage Life in Central Australia, London.

Howitt, A. W., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-East Australia, London.

MacPherson, J., 1939: The Eucalyptus in the Daily Life and Medical Practice of the
Australian Aborigines. Mankind, 2 (6), pp. 175-180, May 1939.

Reuther, J. G.: Manuscript and Map on the Tribes in the district east of Lake Eyre
(translated from the German by T. Vogelsang) held in the South Australian
Museum.

Tindale, N. B., 1940: Distribution of Australian Aboriginal Tribes: A field Survey. Trans.
Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 64 (1), pp. 140-231, with map.

Wopfner, H., and Twidale, C. R., 1967: Geomorphological History of the Lake Eyre Basin

in Landform Studies from Australia and New Guinea (ed. Jennings, J. N., and
Mabbutt, J. A.), Canberra.

ZUSAMMENFASSUNG

Vier durch winderosion freigelegte Graber von Eingeborenen wurden ausgegraben.
Zwei Skelette, eines davon auf einer Pflanzen-schicht ruhend, wurden mittels des Radio-
Carbon Prozesses datiert. Anzeichen von Knochen-Pathology sind festgestellt worden. Ein
kurzer Report eines fiinften Skeletts, an einer dreissig Kilometer entfernten Localitat
gefunden, ist ebenfalls beigefiigt.

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS AND ROCK MARKINGS AT INGLADDI
ROCK SHELTER, WILLEROO, NORTHERN TERRITORY OF
AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD AND ERHARD J. BRANDL

Summary

This paper records cave paintings and rock markings on the walls and ceilings of a sandstone
outcrop (Fig. 1), about 17 miles north, north-east of the Willeroo homestead, which in turn, is 70

miles south-west of the Katherine railway station (Fig. 2).

ABORIGINAL CAVE PAINTINGS AND ROCK MARKINGS AT
INGALADDI ROCK SHELTER, WILLEROO, NORTHERN
TERRITORY OF AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD ann ERHARD J. BRANDL

This paper records cave paintings and rock markings on the walls and
ceilings of a sandstone outcrop (Fig. |), about 17 miles north, north-east
of the Willeroo homestead, which, in turn, is 70 miles south-west of the
Katherine railway station (Fig. 2).

These paintings have recently been photographed in detail by one of
the authors (E. B.), and the illustrations and data prepared for publication
by the companion author, Mr. J, Mulvaney and Mr. Robert Edwards have
since carried out an archaeological excavation on this site.

Fig. |. Cave painting site, Willeroo.

680 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

_/+ Milingimbi_ :

Oenpelli
e

Arnhem Land

|

Katheri R.
a ecine ott

© St. Vidgeon

Willeroo @
* Delamere

Fig. 2, Map of Northern Australia,

Although these examples of aboriginal art have been known for some
time, there is not, to the best of our knowledge, any reference to them in
anthropological literature.

DESCRIPTION OF CAVE PAINTINGS

Figure 3 illustrates three of the larger groups of cave paintings at
Willeroo.

Painting A can be identified as a male kangaroo by the long tapering
tail, protruding genetalia, and the shape of the head and ears. The artist
has also shown both eyes on one side of the head. Below the kangaroo
are two curious male figures. B, with body decorations and lines radiating
from their heads (N, Fig. 4, and N, Fig. 6 are similar). As both the
kangaroo and these two human figures appear to have been painted at the
same time, they may be associated with an identical myth.

C, is an incomplete kangaroo, over-painted by the larger kangaroo at A.
On the surface of C is a fresh-water tortoise. D, is a male dancing figure
with protuberances on his shoulders and hips‘, and E an emu.

F, is a white man, probably a policeman, indicated by the hat and the
two revolvers at G. In many other parts of the world the white man and
his death-dealing gun have been linked together in the art of primitive man.

(1) These. are “joint-marks” and will be discussed later,

MOUNTFORD jnb BRANDL—WiILLEROO CAVE ART 681

Lips (1937, Chap. 4), has illustrated many examples; Mountford and
Berndt (1939, p. 189), a Fijian bamboo flute on which soldiers and guns
form the main decorations, and Mountford (1956, Fig. 49), a cave painting
in western Arnhem Land illustrating a white man with a gun.

H and S,. are large paintings of emus, their bodies decorated with
splashes of white paint. On the body of each bird is a curious male dancing
figure in white, i.e., J, on the left-hand emu, and W, on the right. At K,
is a White man riding a horse (see hat)'*’; the small figure to the right may
be a foal,

Fig. 3. Cave paintings, Wi leraa,

L, is a tortoise with its head obscured by the spiny ant-eater or echidna
M. The bird N, is also partly covered by the echidna. At O, is a distorted
and reyérsed dancing figure, Similar human designs have been recorded at
Delamere (Davidson, 1936, Fig. 51); Beswick (Macintosh, 1952, p. 75,
Fig. 2); Mountain Creek Waterhole (Mountford and Brandl, 1968, Fig.
5M), and Cape York (Mountford and Edwards, 1963 Field Notes). There

(2) In Australian aborigival art a white man is usually identified by a hat (Moustford, 1955,
Fig. 3, H and J)

682

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 4. Cave paintings. Willeroo,

MOUNTFORD jwp BRANDIL—WILLEROO CAVE ART 6383

is another human being at Q'*', and another with a large bent penis at R,
U, is a dancing figure with up-rajsed arms and lines radiating from his head;
T, an indecipherable design; Y, probably a kangaroo, and X a frog. V and
Z, over-painted by the large emu design, are probably human figures.

The incomplete design at AA represents some form of reptile; BB, a
footprint; CC, another footprint with six toes; DD, a human being with
up-raised arms, and FF, a conventionalised drawing of an emu, EB, is an
interesting and well-executed cave painting of a herd of 13 goats. These
creatures are kept by the siation owners to provide them with milk.

Figure 4 illustrates a number of isolated paintings at Willeroo.

A and B, are two faint human figures with their arms up-raised, and C,
probably an echidna painted over a wheel-like design. Another eroded
human figure D, is divided into three parts, the arms and legs on either side
of a central line with a swelling at each end!*’,

E, ts a man and a woman holding hands; F. a long-necked bird,
probably an emu: G, an unidentified creature; H, a fresh-water tortoise, and
J a simple and incomplete human figure with up-raised arms.

K, is an unidentified bird-like design; L. a figure of indeterminate sex
that partly obscures M, a cockatoo, and N, is a cave painting of two women
with body decorations, although the breasts are not indicated, ©, is a
series of crescents and circles that may represent 1 human face, and P, an
unidentified marsupial.

Painting A, on Fig. 6, is of unusual interest. In the first place it is
a “heraldic woman” with the legs stretched upwards displaying the vulva
(a deep gash cut in the soft rock), und secondly il has “joint-marks”
(protuberances on both shoulders and knees). and a jine extending from
the fingers of each hund.

Similar figures holding loops of string between their fingers have been
found in the rugged plateau country of western Arnhem Land by Mountford
(1956, pl. 43E—two central figures—and pl. S7A).

According to the mythical stories of the aborigines, this rugged plateau
is the home of many spirit people, They are of two kinds; the Mitis, shy,
kindly folk of whom the aborigines are not afraid, and the Mamandis, who,
being ill-disposed toward the natives, are always planning to do them harm,

One group of the Mamandis are the tall, thin-bodied Namarakains who
are for ever seeking to steal the spirits of sick people to provide themselves
with a meal (Mountford, 1956. p. 199). These people, mostly women,
spend much of their time playing games with a Joop of string between their

CO The chevron designs on the body of this figure probably refer to body paintings, and the
protuberances on the shoulders and hips to “joint-marks” (7.690),

()) ‘The “three-part” figure 4D, and the heraldic woman” design 6A, Will be discussed later.

684 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. Examples of three-part figure design: A, Tattooing pattern, New Guinea:
B, Embossed clay plate, Mexico; C, Rock engraving, Papua; D, Cave painting,
Sleisbeck, Australia; E, Stamp design, Vera Cruz, Mexico,

fingers, During the hours of darkness the women use the same loop of
string to transport them from place to place. The painting (Fig. 6A)
probably refers to a Namarakain woman.

B, a man and a woman copulating, has been painted over C, a faint
human figure with a radiating head-dress. D, is an incomplete figure; E and
J, eroded paintings of fresh-water turtles, and H a “heraldic woman” with
characteristic “joint-marks” on a shoulder and knee.

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDL—WILLEROO CAVE ART O85

Fig. 6, Cave paintings, Willeroo.

686 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

F, is another “heraldic woman” with circles on her body, and wearing
a radiating head-dress; G, a crocodile, probably the fresh-water species; K,
a badly-drawn and faint design of a kangaroo, and L, two incomplete
human figures,

Design R, is a human figure, holding a stick; Q, is indecipherable;
O and P, probably long-necked wading birds; M, a fresh-water tortoise, and
N, a group of three men wearing body decorations and radiating head-
dresses. These are similar to those associated with the kangaroo on Fig. 3,
and the two at N, Fig. 4.

TECHNIQUES USED IN CAVE PAINTINGS

The techniques employed for painting the designs on the walls of the
caves at Willeroo are probably as simple as those employed elsewhere, the
pigments being red, yellow, and white ochres, and powdered charcoal or
some black ore such as manganese or hematite. The brushes are likely to
be similar to those used by the aborigines of Arnhem Land in the production

Fig. 7. Straight-line markings, Willeroo.

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDL—WILLEROO CAVE ART 687

of their bark paintings (Mountford, 1956, Fig. 3), with the possible
exception of the small flexible brush (Fig. 3, D, G, and H). There was no
evidence that the finger was used as a brush at Willeroo, as it is in central
Australia (Mountford, 1937, p. 435).

THE ROCK MARKINGS

There are also a large number of rock markings at Willeroo, the
majority of them being groups of “straight-line markings”, although there
are a number of deeply-engraved footprints, and one of a boat.

Figure 7 illustrates a typical rock face covered with “straight-line
markings”, Many are arranged in groups of parallel lines (the usual form),
and others with a number of cuts radiating from a common centre,

This type of rock marking is wide-spread. Basedow (1914, pl. 17)
records a group at Mallett; Mountford (1928, p. 362) at Wabricoola and
Winnininnie; Edwards (1964, pl. 14B) at Pitcairn, all in South Australia.
Mountford (1960, Fig. 7) illustrates others at Ewaninga. central Australia;
and Davidson (1936, p. 7, Fig. 2) at Delamere, south-west of Willeroo.

Fig. &. Deeply engraved footprints, Willeroo,

688 RECORDS OF THE SA, MUSEUM

Figure 8 shows a number of footprints, up to | inch deep, three human,
three groups of wallabies or kangaroos, and one (on the extreme left),
probably those of a wombat. Deeply engraved footprints such as these, have
not been recorded from any other site in Australia.

Figure 9 is an engraving of a boat that does not resemble either an
aboriginal canoe, the praus of the Malay trepangers, or any watercraft
belonging to the white man. It is likely that the artist had never seen a
boat, but made the engraving from a description given by another aboriginal.
The two semi-circles on deck probably represent the hatches leading to the
cabins beneath.

Fig. 9. Engraving of watercraft, Willeroo.

TECHNIQUES USED IN ROCK ENGRAVINGS
There is litthke doubt that the “straight-line markings” have been made

with a stone axe, one of the authors (C. P. M.), having made identical
marks with that tool (Mountford, 1928, p. 338). Also, as there is no

MOUNTFORD ano BRANDL—WILLEROO CAVE ART 689

evidence of indentations suggesting that the “pecking techniques”'”’ had
been used to produce the other rock markings at Willeroo, it is likely that
the deep footprints on Fig. 8, and the hull and the mast on Fig. 9, were
made by pounding or rubbing the soft rock surface with a rounded pebble,
and the rigging of the ship cut with a stone axe.

INTERPRETATIONS OF DESIGNS

Previous experience has shown that it is impossible to accurately
inferpret any example of aboriginal art, except the obvious representations
of the creatures, without the aid of either the artist who produced them, or
an informant fully conversant with the myth associated with the paintings,
As there were no aborigines at Willeroo at the time these vave paintings and
tock markings were photographed, we have only described the creatures,
and drawn comparisons with identified paintings elsewhere. A great deal
of harm has already been done by observers either recording their personal
interpretations of cave paintings they have found, or by accepting the state-
ments of aborigmes who, haying no first-hand knowledge of the meanings of
the designs, were merely expressing their opinions. Recent experience has
shown the danger of this form of enquiry (Mountford, 1965, p. 102);
Mountford and Edwards (1964, p, 55).

There is no reasonable explanation, as yet, of the meanings and use of
the multitude of “straight-line markings” at Willeroo and elsewhere,

DISCUSSION

The examples of aboriginal art at Willeroo, lying as they do, almost
centrally between three major art areas, western Arnhem Land, central
Australia, and the Kimberley region of north-western Western Australia,
are of special interest.

There are no traces at Willeroo of the X-ray art of western Arnhem
Land, nor of the curvilinear art of central Australia, /,e,, concentric circles,
or meandering and loop-like designs. The only evidence of links with the
Wandjina art of north-western Australia, are the lines radiating from the
heads of some of the figures. This link, however, is doubtful because figures
with radiating head-dresses have been found in such widely separated places
as Gallery Hill, Western Australia (Mountford, 1965, Figs. 4, 6, etc.);
Ayers Rock, central Australia (Mountford, 1965, Figs. 30, 36, 42); and
northern Queensland (Field Notes, Mountford and Edwards, 1965).

(9! Most Australian rock engravings have been produced by stnking the rock surface with a
sharp-edged boulder, thus producing 4 serics of pits or indentations that make up the
design. (Mountford and Edwards, 1963, pls. | and 2),

690 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

There are, however, designs at Willeroo indicating an exotic origin,
i.e., the “joint-marks” (Fig. 6H); “heraldic woman" (Fig. 6A); and the
“three-part figure” (Fig, 4D),

Schuster (1951, pp. 1-51), has recorded that these “joint-marks”, in
varying forms, extend from south-eastern Asia across the Pacific into central
America, reaching their highest development in south-eastern Alaska, where
each “joint-mark” becomes a human face (Schuster, 1951, Fig. 49).

These “joint-marks” appear to have a limited distribution in Australia
having been found only at Cape York, Mountain Creek Waterhole, Oenpelh,
and Willeroo, They are not, to the best of our knowledge, present at Beswick
or Sleisbeck.

Frazer (1966, pp. 36-81), has recorded that the design of the
“heraldic woman” who ts usually shown with her legs apart exposing the
pubic area, has a world-wide distribution. It is caryed on the front of some
English churches, and, in various forms it has been recorded throughout
Burope, Africa, Asia, the Pacific area, and the Americas.

The same design has been found in the rock shelters of Cape York
(Mountford and Edwards, 1963, Field Notes); the Oenpelli region of
western Arnhem Land (Mountford 1956, pl. 52B, Fig. 29); Mountain
Creek Waterhole (Mountford and Brandl, 1968, pl. 9J), and at Willeroo
(Fig. 6A). We are using Frazer's term “heraldic woman”, because it has
already been established in literature.

The faint and somewhat eroded “three-part” human figure (Fig. 4D)
also appears to be exotic in origin, Some years ago Mountford located and
described a more complete figure of the same type (Mountford, 1958,
pl, 91), ut Sleisbeck, except that the left leg had been extended to a tail
(sec Fig. 5D). As, at the time, the design had not been recorded elsewhere
in Australia, the author illustrated the painting without comment. Sleisbeck
is about 80 miles north-east of Willeroo.

A few yeurs later, one of us (C. P. M.), purchased a Mexican clay dish
embossed with a design (Fiz. 5B) having many of the characteristics of the
cave painting at Willeroo, and particularly at Sleisbeck, This suggested a
link between the Australian “three-part” figures and those in other parts of
the world,

On enquiring from Dr. Carl Schuster of New York about this particular
motif (his famous collection of photographs of primitive art totals many
thousands), be was able to locate a Mexican pattern recorded by Enciso
(1947. pl, L18), asa “Flat stamp from Vera Cruz, They (the local artists),
all use the monkey (Oxomatl), as a motif’. The many points of
resemblance between this design and the cave painting at Sleisbeck, are
remarkable, separated as they are by about 8,000 miles of the Pacific Ocean,

MOUNTFORD ann BRANDL—WILLEROO CAVE ART 691

Later, Dr. Schuster, when searching through his Melanesian collection
of photographs, located two designs that appear to be somewhat related ta
the Australian examples, i.e., Fig. 5C, a rock marking lightly engraved on a
loose stone in the Wedau village of Papua (Williams, 1931, p. 134, Fig. 5),
and a tattooing motif (Fig, 5A) in New Guinea (Schmitz, 1960, p. 160).
Dr. Schmitz was unable to find out cither the meaning or the name of
the design.

As these three exotic designs in the cave paintings, i.e., the “joint-
marks”, the “heraldic woman”, and the “three-part human figure”, have only
been recorded from the north-eastern corner of Australia, it is reasonable to
suppose that they reached this Continent through Melanesia, rather than
through Indonesia, It is also possible that future research will show that
these exotic designs will not extend much further west than Willeroo
or Delamere.

SUMMARY

This paper describes cave paintings and rock markings at Willeroo,
Northern Territory of Australia. The designs are illustrated, the probable
techniques of production discussed, and where applicable, their origins and
ineanings noted,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

We wish to acknowledge [he assistance we have received trom several sources: to
Mr. Hedley Brideson, the State Librarian of South Australia for the photographs thal
illustrate (his article, and for the assistance of members of his staff, Mrs. Olga Hardy for
preparing the drawings, and Mrs, Peggy Mountford for typing the Manuscript; to Mr,
Robert Edwards for the photograph of the Willeroo outcrop: to Dr. Curl Schuster for his
assistince jn locating the exotic designs on Fig, 3, and to Dr. Peter Croweroft, the Director
of the South Australian Museum, for accommodation and the facililies of his Museum

REFERENCES
Basedow, H., 1914: Aboriginal Rock Engravings of Great Antiquity in South Australia,
Ji R. anthrop. Inst., 44,

Davidson, D..S., 1936; Abonginal Australian aod Tasmanian Rock Carvings and Paintings.
Mem, Am, phil, Soc,, 5.

Edwards, Rober, 1964: Rock Engravings and Stone Implements of Pitcairn Station, north
easiern South Australia, Rec. S$. Aust. Mus., 14 (4),

1966: Field Work in the Northern Territory, Friends of the South Australian
Museum Newsletier, 3.

Enciso, J,, 19472 Sellos del Antiguo Mexico, Mexico,
Frazer, Douglas, 1966: The Many Faces of Primitive Art. New Jersey,

Goddard, R, H., 1941: 1p aatiainal Rock Sculpture and Steneilling in the Carnarvon Ranges,
Oceania, (4). 7

Lips, Julius, 1937: The Savage Hits Back. Tondon,

McCarthy, F. D., 1960; The String Games of Yirkalla. Records of ihe Almerican-Australian
Scientific Expedition ta Arnhem Lane. 2.

Macintosh, N. W. G,., 1952; Paintings in Beswick Creek Cave, Northern Territary Oceania,
4),

22

692 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Mountford, C. P., 1928: Aboriginal Rock Carvings in South Australia. Rep. Australas. Ass.
Adymt. Sci., 19.

1937: Rock Paintings at Windulda, Western Australia. Oceania, 7 (4).

1955: An Unrecorded Method of Aboriginal Rock Markings. Rec. S. Aust. Mus.,
11 (4).

1956: The Art, Myth and Symbolism. Records of the American-Australian
Scientific Expedition to Arnhem Land, 1.

1958: Aboriginal Cave Paintings at Sleisbeck, Northern Australia. Rec. S. Aust.
Mus., 12 (2).

1960: Simple Rock Engravings in Central Australia. JI R. anthrop. Inst., 70,

1965: Aboriginal Rock Poundings on Gallery Hill, north-western Western Australia.
Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 15 (1).

Mountford, C. P. and Berndt, R. M., 1939: Ornamentation of a New Hebridian Flute.
Victoria Nat., 55.

Mountford, C. P. and Brandl, E., 1968: Aboriginal Cave Paintings, Mountain Creek Water-
hole, St. Vidgeon, Northern Territory of Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 15 (3).

Mountford, C. P. and Edwards, Robert, 1964: Rock Engravings in the Red Gorge, Deception
Creek, Northern South Australia. Anthropos, 59.

Schmitz, Carl, 1960: Die Ornament der Komba auf New Guinea. Ethnologica, 2.

Schuster, Carl, 1951: Joint Marks as Possible Cultural Contact between America, Oceania,
and the Far East. Royal Tropical Institute, Amersterdam. Commun. 44. Dept.
Cult. and Phy, Anthrop., 39.

Schultz, R. S., 1956: North Western Australian Rock Paintings. Mem. natn, Mus. Vict.. 20.

TWO MORE PREHISTORIC STONE ARTIFACTS FROM WESTERN
PAPUA

BY GRAEME L. PRETTY

Summary

In a paper contributed to an earlier number (Pretty 1965), I have described two stone pestles from
the Western District of Papua, discussing their possible place in the complex of stone implement
distribution routes in this region, and their affinities with similar artifacts from elsewhere in
Melanesia. Through the courtesy of Mr R. D. Mackay, Preparator-in-Charge Papua-New Guinea
Public Museum and Art Gallery, two more specimens from this district have been brought to my
attention. Both specimens are now in the Museum collections at Port Moresby.

TWO MORE PREHISTORIC STONE ARTIFACTS FROM
WESTERN PAPUA

By GRAEME L. PRETTY, Curator OF ARCHAEOLOGY,
SouTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

In a paper contributed to an earlier number (Pretty 1965), I have
described two stone pestles from the Western District of Papua, discussing
their possible place in the complex of stone implement distribution routes
in this region, and their affinities with similar artifacts from elsewhere in
Melanesia. Through the courtesy of Mr. R. D. Mackay, Preparator-in-
Charge, Papua-New Guinea Public Museum and Art Gallery, two more
specimens from this district have been brought to my attention. Both
specimens are now in the Museum collections at Port Moresby.

ENGRAVED BOULDER FROM OLSOBIP

Figure 1 shows an engraved boulder somewhat elongated and gently
tapering at each end. It measures 26 cm. x 18 cm. wide and weighs
6,576 gm. (14.5 lb.). There is no evidence of it being shaped in any way
other than the engraving of a motif on one surface. This consists of two
rude triangles opposed and joined at the apex where they frame a pair of
circles. These latter have been formed in high relief by engraving around
one rim and gouging out the centre. There is a small fleck 1.7 cm. long
projecting from between them. The circles are quite deeply engraved but
the lines of the enclosing triangles less so. Evidently the intention was to
represent a human face.

The rock material is a poorly compacted soft siltstone with a limonitic
stained crust yellow-brown in colour. The surface is faintly cracked and
there are no clearly defined bedding planes.

It was presented to the Museum by Cadet Patrol Officer G. R. Leeson
who recovered it while supervising the making of an airstrip at Olsobip
(Olsivip) in October, 1964. Excavation of a deep hole disclosed the
engraved stone beneath a large 1.2 m. diameter boulder from a depth of
2.4 m. Boulders of similar rock material are plentiful both in and on top
of the surface but the bulk of the soil is made up of coralline encrusted
boulders in a matrix of clay. The local people, the Faiwolmin, knew nothing
about it. They claim relationship with the Telefolmin people and claim to
have come south to Olsobip some time in the past (see map in Craig 1967).

Olsobip (5° 22’ S, 141° 31’ E) is 28.8 km. south of Telefomin in the
Gum gorge. This gorge is part of the headwaters system of the Fly River.

694 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM.

Fig. 1. E1189 (Papua and New Guinea Public Museum and Art Gallery):
Engraved boulder from Olsobip, Slightly less than one-half natural size,

PRETTY—TWO PAPUAN STONE ARTIFACTS 695

Mulvaney (1965) has described an engraved face chiselled into a
boulder from the lower Sepik region. However it is a fairly complete
delineation of the facial features and is quite distinct from the specimen
described here where the treatment is highly schematic. Stylistically, the
enclosing of the eyes in triangles in representations of the face is quite
consistent for the woodcarving of the Huon Peninsula (Bodrogi 1961,
pp. 159-161).

An archaeological stone pestle also front Olsobip, was described in the
previous paper (Pretty 1965),

STONE BOWL FROM MOUNT BOSAVI

Figure 2 shows a deep stone bowl, or mortar, with a flattened base
28-30 cm. diameter and with sides sloping in to a rim 21-23 cm. diameter.
Height from base to rim varies from 12-18 cm. It is hollowed out in the
form of a cylinder with comparatively straight sides, of depth 9-11 cm., and
a flat bottom 14 cm. diameter. It weighs 14,070 gm, (31 lb.).

The outside rim shows the faint traces of a shallow furrow encircling
it 2.25 cm, below, For more than a third of its circumference it has been
flaked away by a series of evenly directed blows along its edge. This has
resulted in sub-conchoidal bulbar scars of fairly even dimensions. There is
no evidence of flaking on the inside of the rim,

The rock material is a vesicular volcanic containing small crystals of
dark minerals, The surface has weathered to an even grey. It is covered
with what are judged to be pits of percussion left from hammer-dressing it
to shape, ‘There is no trace of finishing by grinding,

It was collected in April 1953 from the vicinity of Mount Bosavi
(6° 35’ S, 142° 50’ BE) by Patrol Officer C. T. Terrell of the then, Depart-
ment of Native Affairs, Terrell found it beside the track on the further side
of that branch of Wawi Creek which is closest to the village of Oparie
(6° 44° §, 142" 40° S), The two Wawi creeks run from the south-western
slopes of Mount Bosavi to join the Wawoi River, which flows south-eastward
into the estuary of the Bamu. Opaiie is on Ugo Creek which also runs
into the Wawoi system,

Inquiries of the local people, the Wauru, elicited nothing in the way ot
information about the specimen. However, several similar objects were
known of in the area.

This is the first report of a stone bowl from Western Papua.
Presumably it is a mortar, and part of the prehistoric mortar and pestle
complex now well known from Melanesia. One distinctive feature which
separates 1 Owl trom these is the cylindrical form of its hollowed out centre,

696

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2, E1291 (Papua and New Guinea Public Museum and Art Gallery): Stone bowl! from

Mount Bosavi. Slightly less than one-half natural size.

PRETTY—TWO PAPUAN STONE ARTIFACTS 697

as against the semispherical to conical cup more usual for these artifacts.
Its weight points to it having been still-standing not portable and in this it
accords with the size and weight range of the prehistoric mortars. The
series of flakes removed from the rim is curious. Perhaps they have been
removed for use in sorcery which makes much use of unusual stone objects.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am grateful to the Board of Trustees, Papua and New Guinea Public Museum and
Art Gallery for the loan of specimens and permission to publish this description. The
drawings are by Brenda Hubbard.

REFERENCES
Bodrogi, T., 1961: Art in North-East New Guinea, Budapest.

Craig, B., 1967: The houseboards of the Telefomin Sub-district, New Guinea. Man (New
Series), Vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 260-273.

Mulvaney, D. J., 1965: A carved stone face from the Sepik. Journal of the Polynesian
Society, Vol. 74, No. 1, pp. 76-77, 1 pl.

Pretty, G. L., 1965: Two stone pestles from Western Papua and their relationship to
prehistoric pestles and mortars from New Guinea. Records of the South
Australian Museum, Vol, 15, No. 1, pp. 119-130, 2 pls.

HONEYAEATERS RELATIVE TO NECTAR FEEDING ON KANGAROO
ISLAND

BY J. ALLEN KEAST AND HERBERT T. CONDON

Summary

A widely held fallacy is that most Australian honeyeaters are largely nectarivorous. This belief
partly stems from observers being quick to record concentrations at times of peak flowering, but not
providing data on feeding habits at other times.

HONEYEATERS RELATIVE TO NECTAR FEEDING ON
KANGAROO ISLAND

*By J. ALLEN KEAST anp HERBERT T, CONDON

A widely held fallacy is that most Australian honeyeaters are largely
nectarivorous, This belief partly stems from observers being quick to record
concentrations at times of peak flowering, but not providing data on feeding
habits at other times.

During December, 1967 a comparative study was made of the feeding
behaviour of nine species of honeyeaters (Family Meliphagidae) occurring
on Kangaroo Island, South Australia. The Island was covered by means of
transects and observations were made at about 70 different points, equal
attention being paid to Mallee, Mallee heath, and forest habitats,

The species on which observations were made are listed in Table IL
Additional forms have been recorded for Kangaroo Island, some being
casual visitors und others open to doubt. In the first-named category are
Spiny-cheeked Honeyeater (Acanthagenys rufogularis) which was first
observed during the RAOU campout in 1959, the nomadic White-fronted
Honeyeater (Phylidonyris albifrons), and possibly the White-naped Honey-
cater (Melithreptus lunatus) three specimens of which were collected by
Zietz in the year 1901. Doubtful records are of the White-plumed Honey-
eater (Meliphaga penicillata), which was claimed by J. B. Cleland and
accepted by Sutton (1926) and the Singing Honeyeater (M. virescens),
which may have been seen in Mallee near the south coast (Condon Ms,,
1967). Notable absentees include the Noisy Miner (Myzantha melano-
cephala), Yellow-faced (Meliphaga chrysops), Yellow-laced (M. ornata)—
a widespread Mallee species, and Black-chinned Honeyeater (Melithreptus
eularis), which is a common species on the adjacent mainland.

Up to the present it has been generally accepted that members of the
Island population of the Purple-gaped Honeyeater (M, cratifia) constituted a
separate subspecies, which could be recognized by the presence of a yellow
gape in adults. Specimens examined by the writers have shown that
lilac-gaped individuals occur also,

Kangaroo Island is moderately rich in nectar-producing trees and shrubs
of use to birds of many groups, including the Meliphagidae. According
to a list of Plants of Kangaroo Island (unpublished, August, 1967) by
Sir John Cleland, there are 23 species of the genus Eucalypius but only two
of Banksia, one of Callistemon, and one of Amyema (mistletoe). As in
other areas, only a proportion of eucalypt species is of significance to birds.

~ Queen’s Liniversity, Kingston, Ont., Cunada and South Australian Museum. Adelaide

700 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

At the time of the survey, several of the major nectar-producers (namely
Eucalyptus diversifolia, E, pileata and E. cladocalyx) and one of the bottle-
brushes (Banksia marginata) were in full blossom, so that the responses of
the birds to the availability of nectar might be regarded as typical for a
flowering season. On the other hand, it was noted that most Banksia
marginata and Callistemon macropunctaius were dry and with little neetar.
Feeding from them was depressed accordingly,

Most numerous of the melipbagids on Kangaroo Island are the Purple-
gaped and Yellow-winged Honeyeaters, the first-named in the remaining
stands of dense Mallee and the latter more widely distributed but most
cammon in Mallee heath. Least nurnerous are the Tawny-crowned Honey-
eater, which is confined to low heath, and, rather surprisingly, the Little
Wattle-Bird, only a few individuals of which were seen in the dry sclerophyll
forest areas,

The results given here represent a summary of about 90 hours” field
work at different times of the day, although most of the feeding data was
obtained in morning and late afternoon,

At each study point, the species of honeyeaters present were located
and their feeding behaviour assessed for periods of approximately three
minutes, Where there were flowers, particular attention was paid to the
response of each species to the blossoms. The major objective was to
determine, quantitatively, the time cach species spent in nectar- as opposed
to insect-feeding, Where birds were visiting flowers, attention was given to
whether individuals were actually holding the bill in a flower, that is drawing
up nectar, or merely pecking in or around the bloom, as would be expected
if only insects were being sought.

The proportion of time that a bird spends in taking nectar compared
fo insects does not, of course, necessarily give a true indication as to the
dietary or nutritional importance of the two food items, A bird may be
able to fill its stomach with nectar in a much shorter tine than it can with
insects or, On Occasions, the reverse may be the case. Thus, whilst it is
conceded that the data obtained might not always be valid, the observational
method employed is the best available. Furthermore, it is difficult to sum
the short periods of feeding activity in such quick-moving and erratic nectar-
seekers as the Yellow-winged Honeyeater and Spinebill, both of which are
continually on the move from flower to flower and tree to tree,

Results of observations made according to the methods outlined above
are given in Table IT, Tt should be pointed out that these observations were
sufficiently comprehensive to arrive at a balanced assessment of nectar-
relative to insect-feeding for the time of year, for all species listed except
the Tawny-crowned Honeyeater and Little Wattle-Bird.

KEAST anp CONDON—NECTAR FEEDING OF HONEYEATERS 701

The Yellow-winged Honeyeater enierges as the most nectarivorous
species and the Purple-gaped and White-eared Honeyeaters as the least,
The difference in feeding habits between the two first-named was dernon-
strated on several occasions when they were together in blossoming trees,
the Yellow-winged species working the flowers and the Purple-gaped
Honeyeater concentrating on the leaves. At one clump of profusely
blossoming Eucalyptus pileata, near Seal Bay, on the south coast, a dozen
“Yellow-wings”, four Red Wattle-Birds, and about 20 Rainbow Lorikeets
(Trichoglossus haematodus meluccanus) were feeding on nectar, but a
dozen Purple-saped Honeyeaters, some with young recently out of the nest,
never went near the blossoms, The White-eared Honeyeater, which occurred
in Mallee and was common in the sclerophyll forest, was likewise never seen
near blossoms. though at times it perched in Banksia marginara, from which
a Spinebill was taking nectar and there were clumps of blossoming Evcalyprus
diversifolia, acended by many nectar-feeders, nearby. The Brown-headed
Honey-cater, which was moderately common in the Mallee and forest. paid
no attention to blossoms, except for a solitary mdividual on one occasion;
the species occurred without regard to flowering trees.

Contrary to what might be expected from its long bill, the Spinebill
spent much more time obtaining insects from amongst the leaves of shrubs
and saplings than it did at flowers, In contrast with the Yellow-winged
Honeyeater, the Spmebill did not concentrate where there was blossoming,
but was found to be dispersed throughout the forest, with only single
individuals associating with the nectar-feeds on Eucalyptus diversifolia and
Eucalyptus pileata, The Spinebill proved to be a somewhat “secretive”
nectar-feeder, individuals commonly feeding from solitary nectar-producing
trees or shrubs such as Banksia marginata in the forest and Callistemon
macropunctatus in the heathland, At one site, a single flower head of a
stunted Banksta was repeatedly visited by the birds.

Plants visited by the various honeyeaters are given in Table I, Rainbow
Lorikeets occurred in flocks of Up to several dozen on Eucalyptus diversifolia
and smaller numbers obtained nectar from Eucalypius pileata.

The wide variety of nectar-producing trees and shrubs attended by
Yellow-winged Honeyeaters confirms the general impression that this is one
of the most highly nectarivorous of the Australian honeyeaters, It contrasted
With other species in that almost all individuals were concentrated in areas
of flowering and in almost all groups of flowering gum trees. Even plants
with small flowers and containing little nectar had some of (hese birds. in
the vicinity, Yellow-wings were very common also in Banksia marginata
areas although, as noted, these blossoms contained little nectar at the time,
the birds must have been feeding, to a considerable extent, upon insects

702 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

A stand of the heathy shrub, Adenanthos sericea, situated on a barren hill-
side, had a community of these birds feeding extensively from the long,
tubular flowers.

A search of back issues of The Emu and The South Australian
Ornithologist, covering a period of 67 years, reveals a paucity of nectar-
feeding observations on the Purple-gaped and White-eared Honeyeaters,
there being only four records for the first-named—on Mallee eucalypts
(Chandler, 1913; Ryan, 1951; Jones, 1952; Storr, 1947) and two for the
last-named (Learmonth, 1958; Hunt, 1965). It may be mentioned also that
the White-eared Honeyeater takes nectar from Banksia and Angophora, in
the Sydney heathlands, on occasions. All the evidence suggests that these
two species, without doubt, are mainly insectivorous.

Thanks are expressed to Mrs. M. Kenny, of the South Australian
Museum staff, for kindly identifying the various plant species on which the
honeyeaters were feeding,

TABLE 1

Brown-headed Honeyeater, Melithreptus brevirastris—Feeding on Eucalyptus cladocalyx.

Crescent Honeyeater, Pilrylidonyriy pyrrhoptera—Feeding on Eucalyptus cladocalyx, Eue,
diversifolia.

Yellow-winged Honeyeuter, Phylidonyris novaehollundiae—Feeding on Kucalyprus diversifolia
(many places), Ewe, landsdowneana, Euc. leptophylla, Euc. pileata, Banksia marginata,
Callistemon macropunctatus, Adenanthos sericea,

Tawny-crowned Honeyeater, Gliciphila melanops—Feeding on Callistemon macropunctutus,

Eastern Spinebill, Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris—Feeding on Eucalyptus diversijolia (various
places), Callistemon macropunctalis, Banksia marginata.

Red Wattle-Bird, Anthochaera carunculata—Feeding on Eucalyptus diversifolia, Eve, pileata.

TABLE Il
Total %
Number of feeding time feed-
individuals Number of observations ing else-
Species observed occasions (in minutes) % time at where, /e.,
feeding observed (approx.) blossoms on insects
|, Purple-gaped Honeyeuter,
Meliphaga cratitia . ., .. 120 43 65 oe 100
2. White-eared Honeyeuter. ;
Meliphaga leucotiy . , PZ 18 40) — 100
3. Brown-headed Honeyeater,
Melithreptus brevirostris .. 38 15 40 2 98
4, Crescent Honeyeater,
Phylidonyris pyrrhaptera .. 17 7 15 5 845
5. Yellow-winged Honeycater,
Phylidonyris novaeholandiae 110 40 30 2(60) 40
6. 'Tawny-crowned Honeyeater,
Gliciphila melanops. .— .. 3 3 1 100 —_—
7. Eastern Spinebill,
Acanthorhynchus tenuirestris 45 32 40 20 80
§. Little Wattle-Bird,
Anthochaera chrysoptera 3 2 L —(*) 100
9. Red Wattle-Bird,
Anthochaera carunculata .. 25 li 20 15 BS

(*) This species is normally nectarivorous, but the few Individuals seen were not at. blossoms.

KEAST ann CONDON—-NECTAR FEEDING OF HONEYEATERS 703

LITERATURE CITED
Chandler, L. G., 1913: Bird-Life of Kow Plains (Victoria). Emu, 13: 43.
Hunt, A. C., 1965: Birds at a honeyflow. Emu, 64: 323.
Jones, J., 1952: The Hattah Lakes Camp-out, 1951. Emu, 52: 252.
Learmonth, N., 1958: Honeyeaters near Portland. Emu, 58: 257.
Ryan, J. V., 1951: Honeyeaters in the Bendigo district, Victoria. Emu, 51: 175.
Storr, “A M., 1947: Some birds observed on southern Eyre Peninsula. South Austr. Orn.,

ADDITIONS TO THE FROG FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY DAVID §. WOODRUFF AND MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

In a review of the frogs of South Australia Tyler (1996) reported 17 species occuring within that
State and postulated that further species awaited discovery. The present contribution places on
record collection of two species representing additions to the fauna of South Australia.

ADDITIONS TO THE FROG FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
By DAVID S. WOODRUFF! anp MICHAEL J. TYLER*

In a review of the frogs of South Australia Tyler (1966) reported 17
species occurring within that State and postulated that further species awaited
discovery. The present contribution places on record the recent collection
of two species representing additions to the fauna of South Australia,

Crinia laevis (Gunther)

A single specimen of this species was collected at Mount Burr near
Millicent in south-eastern South Australia on 6 August, 1966 by Mr.
H. Mincham (South Australian Museum R. 8118), One of us (D, S, W,)
has subsequently been able to visit this locality and collect an additional
specimen (Melbourne University Zoology Department 220/67). Study of
a recording made of the mating call of a second individual which could not
be collected confirms the identity of these specimens,

Crinia laevis had previously been known to exist in four disjunct
populations in south-eastern Australia: Tasmania, King Island, and in the
Grampians and extreme south-west of Victoria (Littlejohn and Martin 1964,
1965), Mount Burr is approximately 50 miles west of ihe nearest locality
at which the species had been collected in Victoria (Dartmoor). In the
absence of intensive collecting between these localities it remains uncertain
whether C. /aevis occurs throughout the intermediate area, or whether the
South Australian population represents a fifth isolate,

The only Crinia previously known to occur in the lower south-eastern
portion of South Australia was C, signifera (vide Tyler, 1966). From that
species ©, laevis can be readily distinguished by its smooth ventral surface.
The ventral surface of C, signifera is granular. C. laevis may also possess
distinctive light pink markings on the groin and legs. These spots, which
are not invariably present in C. laevis, are never seen on C, signifera. The
mating call of C. daevis has been characterized by Littlejohn and Martin
(1964) and described verbally as “cra-a-a-a-a-ack, cra-a-ack, era-a-ack,
cra-ack, cra-ack . . -”, At Mount Burr the males of this species were
calling from beneath grass tussocks in ditches and clearings in the pine
plantations,

Pseudophryne semimarmorata Lucas

Mr. E. R. Worrell collected this species at Dismal Swamp in South
Australia several years ago (Worrell, 1963, pers. comm, to M, J, Littlejohn).

i Department of Zovlogy, University of Melbourne.
* South Australian Mutsewum.

706 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

MILES BORDERTOWN

&
O
Se 8 %
@ KINGSTON &

© S
37°5 O Oe NARACOORTE
“Oi © &

©
O
O

O
O

MT. BURR @

%

MT GAMBIER @@

38°S & P. bibroni
O P. semimarmorata
e Hybrids

140°E 14 1°E

Fig. 1. Distribution of Pseudophryne in the lower south-east of South Australia.

WOODRUFF ann TYLER—ADDITIONAL S.A. FROGS 707

Specimens have subsequently been collected at several localities in that State,
and these records have been plotted in Fig. 1. The material is in the
collections of the Zoology Department, University of Melbourne, and the
South Australian Museum.

P. semimarmorata is restricted to south-eastern Australia having four
disjunct populations, It has previously been recorded in east and central
coastal Victoria, from Melbourne east to Orbost; in Tasmania; Flinders
Island; and in western coastal Victoria from the Otways west to the
Grampians and Portland district (Littlejohn and Martin 1965). The
collections reported here constitute a range extension of approximately 130
miles and a new record for South Australia. The species is probably
distributed in suitable habitats throughout the region.

To the north of the range of P. semimarmorata in western Victoria and
in South Australia the closely related P. bibroni occurs. The ventral surface
of P. bibroni is dark-brown or black mottled with white. In P. semimarmorata
the undersides of the limbs and to a varying extent the throat and groin are
not mottled but yellow or flesh-coloured (Fig. 2). In both species the
pattern and degree of mottling on the ventral surface is highly variable. In
Victoria the ranges of these two species are contiguously allopatric and a
narrow zone of hybridization characterized by frogs of intermediate colora-
tion has been found (Littlejohn 1963, 1967). A similar situation evidently
occurs in South Australia with the site of the zone of hybridization currently
based on specimens from the four localities recorded in Fig. 1. Three
specimens from one of these localities are shown in Fig. 2.

The breeding behaviour, life history and larval morphology of

P. semimarmorata and P. bibroni are essentially similar (Littlejohn 1963,
Martin 1965).

DISCUSSION

The discovery of the westernmost populations of Pseudophryne
semimarmorata and Crinia laevis is of zoogeographical interest in that it
supports the general pattern of the distribution of Bassian faunal elements
west into the south-east corner of South Australia. Such distribution patterns
characterize the western boundary of the Bassian subregion and are seen in
a variety of organisms including several other anurans (Littlejohn 1967).
These peripheral populations are of ecological and evolutionary significance
in that they represent the present-day adaptational limits of Bassian taxa.
The apparently disjunct populations of C. laevis suggest that its distribution
may have been more extensive in the past and that environmental factors
are limiting today. On the other hand the persistence of the hybrid zone
between P. bibroni and P. semimarmorata suggests that the northern
extension of the latter is limited by biotic factors in the main.

708 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

WOODRUFF ann TYLER—ADDITIONAL S.A. FROGS 709

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

One of us (D. S. W.) is indebted to Dr. M. J. Littlejohn for advice and guidance and
was assisted by a Melbourne University Research Grant and later a Commonwealth Post-
graduate Award. The following have given field assistance: M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin,
R. A. Rawlinson, I. J. Crick and D. Von Behrens.

LITERATURE CITED
Littlejohn, M. J., 1963: Frogs of the Melbourne area. Vict. Nat., 79: 296-304.
1967: Patterns of zoogeography and speciation in south-eastern Australian
amphibia. Chapter in A. H. Weatherley (ed.) Australian Inland Waters and
Their Fauna: Eleven Studies. A.N.U., Canberra.
Littlejohn, M. A. and Martin, A. A., 1964; The Crinia laevis complex (Anura: Lepto-
dactylidae) in south-eastern Australia. Aust, J. Zool., 12: 70-83.
1965: The vertebrate fauna of the Bass Strait islands: 1. The amphibia of
Flinders and King Islands. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 79: 247-256.

Martin, A. A., 1965: Tadpoles of the Melbourne area. Vict. Nat., 82: 139-149,
Tyler, M. J., 1966; Frogs of South Australia, South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Fig. 2. Ventral markings of the two species of Pseudophryne known from South
Australia. A, P. bibroni. B. P, semimarmorata. C, D, E. Ventral view of the Pseudophryne
hybrids collected 2.5 miles east of Reedy Creek, South Australia. Ventral coloration is
intermediate between P. bibroni and P. semimarmorata, Wybrid populations are also
characterized by increased morphological variation.

E

A TAXONOMIC STUDY OF HYLID FROGS OF THE HYLA LESEURI
COMPLEX OCCURRING IN NORTH-WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY MICHAEL J, TYLER

Summary

The Hyla lesueri complex as defined by Moore (1961), comprises a group of terrestial species
exhibiting a sequence of habitus, “that begins with stout-bodied and broad-headed forms and
gradually passes to those with extremely slender bodies, long legs and narrow heads”. Moore was
primarily concerned with the five members of the complex occuring in New South Wales:
booroolongensis, freycinetti, latopalmata, lesueri, and nasuta, but examined species from other
States and drew attention to several taxonomic problems associated with the identity of specimens
from the Northern Territory identified as nigofrenata by Kinghorn (1931) and, although unwilling to
associate them with that species, considered that they differed in certain respects from lesueuri to
which Copland (1957) had referred them. Accordingly, Moore’s list of the representatives of the
complex occurring in northern Western Australia and the Northern Territory recorded latopalmata
and nasuta in both areas plus either nigrofrenata or lesueri in the latter.

A TAXONOMIC STUDY OF HYLID FROGS OF THE HYLA
LESUEURL COMPLEX OCCURRING IN NORTH-WESTERN
AUSTRALIA

By MICHAEL J. TYLER, Honorary AssociAlE IN HERPETOLOGY,
Soutn AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

The Ayla lesueuri complex, as defined by Moore (1961), comprises a
group of terrestrial species exhibiting a sequence of habitus, “that begins
with stout-bodied and broad-headed forms and gradually passes to those with
extremely slender bodies, long legs and narrow heads", Moore was
primarily concerned with the five members of the complex occurring m New
South Wales: booroolongensis, freycinerti, latopalmata, lesueuri, and nasuta,
but examined species from other States and drew attention to several
taxonomic problems associated with the identity of specimens from northern
Australia. Moore had examined specimens from the Northern Territory
identified as nigrofrenata by Kinghorn (1931) and, although unwilling to
associate them with that species, considered that they differed in certain
respects from Jlesueuri to which Copland (1957) had referred them.
Accordingly, Moore's list of the representatives of the complex occurring in
northern Western Australia and the Northern Territory recorded latopalmata
and nasufa in both areas plus either nigrofrenata or lesueuri in the latter.

Hosmer (1964) described Hyla spaldingi a new species of the complex
from the Northern Territory and suggested that material examined by Moore,
and other records of leswveuri from this region, were probably based on
spaldingi.

Several large collections of Hyla from northern parts of Western
Australia and the Northern Territory were found to include four widely
distributed species that were clearly members of the lesweuri complex. As
one represented what appeared to be an undescribed species, the type
specimens of species of northern Australian origin synonymised within the
complex were examined to confirm their status, The only Queensland and
New South Wales members of the complex reported here are those common
to Western Australia and the Northern Territory, thus minimizing repetition
of data presented by Moore (1961).

MATERIALS AND DESCRIPTIVE METHODS
The 310 specimens reported here are lodged in museum collections
abbreviated as follows:—Australian Museum (A,.M.); American Museum
of Natural History (A.M.N.H.); British Museum (Natural History) (B.M.);

712 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Museum of Comparative Zoology (M.C.Z.); Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet
(N.R.); South Australian Museum (S.A.M.); United States National
Musetm (U,S.N.M.); Western Australian Museum (W.A.M.), Letters
preceding registration numbers refer to departmental catalogue references,
and numbers in parentheses following registration numbers indicate
specimens catalogued collectively under a single number.

The following abbreviations appear in the text and tables: —E-N/IN
(ratio of the eye to naris distance to the internarial span); HL/HW (head
length to head width ratio); HW/S-V (head width to snout to vent length
ratio); and TL/S-V (tibia length to snout to vent length ratio). Methods
of measurement and descriptive techniques conform to those employed for
Hyla by Tyler (1968).

Most literature references cited in the synonymies refer at least in purt
to Western Australian or Northern Territory specimens,

MORPHOLOGICAL CRITERIA

All of the 13 morphological features by which Moore (1961, p, 310)
distinguished New South Wales members of the /esueuri complex, are equally
suitable for distinguishing those occurring in northern Australia, However,
even in those species which have the most distinctive habitus (¢.g., Ayla
nasuta) there are few unique characters and it is necessary to compare at
least three or four to provide an objective identification, ‘Thus it is desirable
to draw attention to the advantages and disadvantages of some of them.

In each species the posterior surface of the thighs bears an irregular
pattern of light and dark markings. These markings are liable to fade in
preservative for Andersson (1913) reported that in a/finis they were, “more
or less marbled with black and white”, whereas the same specimens are now
marbled with light brown on a dull yellow background, It was Andersson's
descriptive notes which led Copland (1957) to erroneously conclude that
the specimens were examples of Jatepalmata watjulumensis. In at least one
member of the complex the thighs are marbled with brown on a yellowish
background in freshly preserved material,

There is frequently considerable intraspecific variation in the ratios of
head length/head width, tibia length/snout to vent length, etc., as iustralted
in Tables | and 2, However, plotting series in the form of point frequency
diagrams during initial studies (e.g., Fig. 3) provided means of separating
populations prior to more detailed examination.

The extent of development of terminal digital discs and the presence or
absence of circum-marginal grooves differs markedly between some species,

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 713

Particular emphasis has been placed upon this feature, as it proved of
considerable value in distinguishing the sexually immature specimens which
formed the bulk of most collections, No indications of ontogenetic trends
have been noted,

ACCOUNT OF SPECIES
Hyla wotjulumensis Copland
Ayla lesueurii, (part) Copland (1957), p, 92,

Hyla latopalmata watjulumensis (part) Copland (1957), Proc, Linn. Soc.
NS.W., 82 (1), p. 96,

Hyla spaldingi Hosmer (1964), Amer, Mus, Novit., No, 2182, p. 2, figs, 3-4.

Emendation of Specific Name: The spelling of the stem of the sub-
specific name and the type locality from which it is derived are in error in
the original description, Glauert (1959) refers to the locality as Wotjulum
and it is spelt that way on maps. The taxon is therefore emended to
wotjulumensis in accordance with the provisions of Article 33a of the
International Code of Zoological Nomenclature,

Types: Regrettably none of the 36 specimens examined by Copland are
specifically designated as types, Howeyer, in a discussion following a list
of the specimens examined and literature records considered to be based on
this subspecies, he refers to “Watjulum Mission”, as “the type locality”,
Twenty-nine specimens are listed from that locality and these are subse-
quently referred to here as the syntypes: W.A.M, 11195-9, 11633-5,
11638, 11896-11907, 11932-9, One (R.11195) is an extremely dehydrated
specimen of Hyla peroni, and three more (R.11197, 11638, 11939) are
representatives of a new species described in the present paper; these are
therefore excluded from further consideration. Another complication is
caused by two specimens bearing tags with identical registration numbers
(R,11897). There is no indication which was examined by Copland, and
the total of 29 precludes one of them. One has therefore been allotted a
new catalogue number (R,29763) and is not regarded a syntype. Selection
for re-registration was purely arbitrary and does not materially affect the
definition of the species in any way, Several further specimens have not
been found wilh the result that the following data ure based on only 18 of
the syntype series, namely: W.A.M. R.11198-9, 11633, 11896-9, 11901-3,
11906-7, 11932-3, 11935-8, The syntypes were collected by K. G. Buller
und A, M, Douglas. The dates of collection are unknown.

Seventeen of the syntypes are females with a snout to vent length range
of 45.7-54.1 mm. The TL/S-V, E-N/IN and HL/HW ranges and means
are recorded in Table 1,

714 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
TABLE |
Ratios and Measurements of flyla wotjulumensis, Hyla nasuta and Ayla coplandi
| Adult Size
F TLIS-V E-N/IN | HL/HW - (S-V in mm.)
3d ge
wotjulumensis
Syntypes ..,.....55- 18 .593-.704 (.654) 1.000-1.178 (1,069) | 1,056-1,260 (1.144) — 45.7-54.1
Kalumburu....--...- 4 .633-.714 (.673) 1.000-1.044 (1,019) | 1.057-1,220 (1.148) 33.8 45.2
Katherine .....-...- 6 672-,699 (.686) 929-1025 ( 962) | 1.120-1,169 (1.146) —_ —
90m... of Mainoru .. 15 603-732 (683) 918-1,170 ( 2994) | 1,080-1.204 (1.148) | 33,3.-35.7 45.4-51.8
nasty
All specimens ....... 13 643-779 LOR) 1.000-1.188 (1.139) | 1,206-1,429 (1.285) 31.4-32.1 36.2-42.8
coplandi |
Inyerway Station .... 7 555-618 C581) 949-1120 (1.020) 1,042-1.131 (L075) 33,3-34,7 38.8
is _ . }
Wave Hill ........4. 9 .525-.641 (584) 920-1.077 (1.009) 1.025-1.144 (1,067) | 33.4-335 40-402
Kalumburu.........- 4 (577-631 (.608) 1,000-1.118 (1.065) 985-1, 105 (1.030) 33.8-34.8 | 35,2
— — — - — F
Bugle Gap ,....... 5. | .542-,634 (.602) .974-1.088 (1.030) | 1.035-1,093 (1.069) 31.2 | 35.7-37.9
33m.8.S.E. Wyndham, | 5 | 592-630 (610) | 1,000-1,063 (1.031) | 1,014-1.097 (1.043) | = 38.3
| | }

Synonymy: The holotype of Hyla spaldingi Hosmer (1964) has been
examined and the species is referred to the synonymy of wotjulumensis.

Additional Material Examined: 83 specimens:—

Western Australia—
Kalumburu—W.A.M. R.13752D, 13754, 13759A, 13759C-G,
13761.
Noonkanbah, Fitzroy River—W.A.M. R.26199.
Parry Creek—W.A.M. 29568.
Wotjulum Mission—W.A.M. R.29763.

Northern Territory—
Coomalie Creek (16m. N. of Adelaide R.)—W.A.M. R.26245.
Elizabeth River (50m. S. of Darwin)—W.A.M. 23886
(formerly A.M.N.H. 67835), holotype of H. spaldingi.
Katherine—S.A.M. R.4876; W.A.M. R.26136-40.
55m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9132(13).
73m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9038-40.
90m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9046-60,
98m, N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9041-45, 9086-96.
Yam Creek—A.M. R.4914, 4916, 4918, 4921, 4926.

Descriptive Notes: Measurements of several of the series listed above
are included in Table 1. The combination of fully webbed toes and a broad
continuous lateral head stripe, uninterrupted behind the tympanum, dis-
tinguishes this species from other members of the complex. The pre-ocular

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 715

portion of the head stripe extends from the tip of the snout, and continues
as a narrow line along the inferior margin of the tympanic annulus, and
proceeds in a straight line to a point beyond the axilla. The superior
margin of the postocular portion is on a level with the position usually
occupied by a supratympanic fold (absent in this species), The head stripe
is black, the contrast against the background being determined by the
density of the chromatophores.

The dorsum varies from pale olive to dark grey with or without faint
suffusions or mottling of darker pigment. A trace of a faint, broad trans-
ocular bar is visible in most specimens. The throat is white or stippled with
isolated melanophores, densest on the mandibular border where they are
interrupted by a few large, circular islands of very pale cream. The backs
of the thighs are usually pale yellow heavily reticulated with irregular black
or dark grey markings.

Distribution: The known geographic range of wotjulumensis extends
over a distance of approximately 1,000 miles between Wotjulum and
Red-Bank Mine near Wollogorang (cited for spaldingi by Hosmer, 1964),

Triangles = Hyla coplandi

Circles = Hyla wotjulumensis (open circles are literature based records)

FIG. 1,
Distribution of Hyla coplandi and H. wotjulumensis.

716 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

In the absence of any geographical or environmental barrier the extension
of its distribution eastwards into Queensland seems likely. The only
literature based locality records included in the distribution map (Fig. 1)
are those cited by Hosmer (1964) for spaldingi specimens examined by
that author.
Hyla coplandi new specics
Hyla latopalmata watjulumensis (part) Copland (1957), Proc. Linn. Soe,
N.S.W., 82 (1), p. 96.

Holotype: W.A.M, R.13722G. A gravid female collected at Inverway
Station, Northern Territory by K. G. Buller on 8 August, 1960,

Definition; A moderately sized species with a maximum snout to vent
length of 41.8 mm., characterized by the combination of the following
features; unwebbed fingers, fully webbed toes, dilated terminal digital dises,
apposable first finger, large tympanum and a prominent gland at the angles
of the jaws.

Description of Holotype. The head is longer than broad (HL/HW
\.054), its length equivalent to considerably more than one-third of the
snout to vent length (HL/S-V 0.402). The snout projects only slightly;
it is rounded when viewed from above and evenly rounded in profile. The
nares ure high and oblique, their distance from the end of the snout less than
that from the eye, The distance between the eye and the naris is slightly
greater than the internarial span (E-N/IN 1.053). The canthus rostralis
is very poorly defined and straight. The loreal region is slightly concave.
The cye is not prominent, its diameter equal to the eye to naris distance.
The tympanunt is prominent, its diameter equivalent to almost seven-eighths
of the eye diameter, and separated from the eye by a distance equivalent to
otie-third of its own diameter. The vomerine teeth are situated on each
side of the midline on two rounded elevations on a ridge overhanging the
anterior margins of the choanac. The tongue is broadly cordiform with a
fecble posterior indentation,

The fingers ure long and slender with narrow lateral fringes and very
large sub-articular tubercles. [In decreasing order of length 3> 4> 1> 2,
There is no inter-digital webbing. The terminal dises are dilated (Fig. 2).

The hindlimbs are long and slender with a TL/S-V ratio of 601. Toes
in decreasing order of length 4> 5 = 3> 2> 1, The interdigital webbing
reaches the base of the terminal dises of all toes except the fourth where
it extends as far as the sub-articular tubercle at the base of the penultimate
phalanx, and is united to the disc by a narrow lateral fringe (Fig, 2).

There are numerous small, rounded granules on the entire dorsal surface
of the head and body. At the angle of the jaws is a small but prominent,
roughly circular gland composed of a group of large granules, and the sides
of the body are covered with granules, more numerous than on the dorsum.

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 717

There is a very poorly developed supra-tympanic fold, a skin fold on the
outer edge of the forearm, a sharp fold on the outer surface of the tarsus
and a fold across the chest. There is an extremely prominent oval outer
metatarsal tubercle. Supernumerary tubercles on the foot are well developed.
The throat is smooth but for a few very small isolated granules, and the
abdomen and posterior thighs very coarsely granular.

FIG, 2.
Foot and hand of Hyla coplandi.

Dimensions: Snout to vent length 38.8 mm.,; tibia length 23.3 mm.;
head length 15.6 mm.; head width 14.8 mm.; eye to naris distance 4 mm.;
internarial span 3.8 mm.; eye diameter 4 mm.; tympanum diameter 3.4 mm.

In preservative the dorsal surface of the body and limbs is a dull brown
with extremely obscure and irregular darker markings. The posterior
surface of the thighs is a very dark brown bearing small creamish patches.
The gland at the angle of the jaws and most of the granules on the sides of
the body are dull yellow. The undersurface of the tarsus and foot are
charcoal grey.

718 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Variation: There are eight paratypes: W.A.M, 13722E-F collected
with the holotype at Inverway Station and W.A.M. 13724A-D, 137241,
S.A.M. R.9103 (formerly W.A.M. R.13722D) collected at Wave Hill,
Northern Territory by K. G. Buller on 11 August, 1960. Males in the
paratype series bearing nuptial pads have snout to vent lengths of
33.5-34.7 mm., and the females are 37.3-40.2 mm. In their proportions
and coloration they do not differ markedly from the features of the holotype
(see Table 1] for measurements and ratios of types and topotypes),

A further 47 representatives of this species have been examined:
Northern Territory—
Inverway Station—W.A.M, R.13722A-C.
Wave Hill—W.A.M. R.13724E-H.

Western Australia—

Bugle Gap—W.A.M. R.21354-8, 26235-7.

Kalumburu—W.A.M. R.13762, 13764A-B, 13775B, 29547,
29550-1,

Kununurra—S.A.M, R.5083.

Moolabulla—S.A.M. R.5537,

Mt, Anderson—W.A.M. R.29558-60,

Parry Creek—W.A.M. R.29570-2.

Wotjulam—W.A.M. R.11197, 11939, 11638 (syntypes of
latopalmata watjulumensis).

23m. S.S.E. of Wyndham—W.A.M. R.26122-3, 26125, 26127,
26134,

The smallest male bearing nuptial pads (W.A,M, R.21357) has a snout
to vent length of 31,2 mm. A gravid female (S.A.M. R.5083) is the
largest examined, measuring 41.8 mm. A specimen from Parry Creek
(W.A.M. R.29571) is depicted in Fig. 5.

Comparison with Other Species: Hyla coplandi differs from all other
species of the /esweuri complex occurring in north-western Australia in
lacking anterior and posterior lateral head markings. Hyla wotjulumensis
is the only species sharing with coplandi tully webbed toes but, in addition
to possession of broad, and usually particularly conspicuous head stripes,
wotjulumensis has a more elongated snout and a correspondingly longer
head than coplandi, as indicated by comparison of the HL/HW ratios
(1.056-1.260 in wotjulumensis and 0.985-1.063 in coplandi), In Ayla
coplandi the terminal digital discs are strongly dilated and usually approxi-
mately twice the width of the penultimate phalanges, whereas in
wotjulumensis the discs are only slightly broader than them. The latter
feature also distinguishes latopalmata and nasuta trom coplandi. These
three species may also be distinguished by differences in HW/S-V
proportions (Fig. 3).

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURL COMPLEX IN N.W, AUSTRALIA 719

Of the species confined to eastern Australia, Hyla booroolongensis
shares with coplandi similarly extensive webbing between the toes and
dilated terminal discs, The former species differs from coplandi in the
following respects: The first finger is shorter than (not longer than) the
second; the head is consistently broader than long (longer than broad in
55 of 56 coplandi); the vomerine teeth are set more posteriorly im relation
to the position of the choanae, there is no gland at the angle of the jaws
and the outer metatarsal and supernumerary tubercles are not as well
developed. Hyla boeroolongensis evidently attains a larger size than
coplandi, for the maximum snout to vent length recorded by Moore (1961)
was 50,5 mm,, Whereas the largest coplandi measures 41.8 mm,

Distribution: The known geographic range of coplandi extends us far
south as the Fitzroy River in Western Australia, and east to Wave Hill near
the source of the Victoria River in the Northern Territory (Pig. 1). The
eight Western Australian localities at which it has been collected lie in a
cirele, which may be more of an indication of the accessibility of certain
localities than a true representation of the distribution of the species. No
specimens of coplandi have been included in several large collections
examined from the northern portion of the Northern Territory; much of this
material was from Amhem Land.

Hyla latopalmata (Gunther)

Peledytes affinis Gray (1842), Zool. Misc. p. 56,

Hyla affinis, Boulenger (1882), p. 413; Andersson (1913), p, 24,

Litoria latopalmata Gunther (1867), Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. Ser. 3, Vol. 20,
p. 55.

Hyla latopalmata, Boulenger (1882), p. 414; Loveridge (1935), p. 52;
Moore (1961), p. 298.

Hyla tornieri Nieden (1923}, Das Tierreich No, 46, p. 228.

Hyla lesueurii, Mitchell (1955), p. 404; Copland (1957) (part). p. 89;
Mitchell (1964), p, 339,

Hyla latepalmata latopalmata, Copland (1957), p, 94,

This species either exhibits greater morphological variation than any
other member of the complex or comprises two populations meriting distinct
taxonomic recognition, Evidence obtained in the present studies favours
the former hypothesis but the latter cannot be completely excluded, How-
ever, it is considered that biological data are more likely to establish the
matter and at the present time none are available,

The geographic range of latopalmata extends in the form of a continuous
arc from New South Wales to Western Australia—a distance of approxi-
mately 3,000 miles. Comparison of adult specimens from Western
Australia (previously reported as Ayia affinis by Andersson, 1913) with

720 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SNOUT TO VENT LENGTH (mm.)

KEY=— Closed circles=Hylg coplandi
Open circles=Hyla latopaimata
Triangles=Hyla nasuta

5 lO I5
HEAD WIDTH (mm)

FIG. 3.
Head width/snout-vent length in three species of Hyla.

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 721

adults from southern Queensland and New South Wales reveals striking
differences (see Table 2 for a comparison of measurements). The Western
Australian frogs are smaller than those from the eastern States, have shorter
limbs and are always dull brownish dorsally (never the dull grey common
to most preserved eastern specimens). The lateral head stripes are only
slightly darker than the background coloration whereas in eastern frogs
they are black and extremely conspicuous. The terminal digital discs of
Western Australian frogs are always undilated and no broader than the
width of the penultimate phalanx, whereas eastern individuals invariably
exhibit dorso-ventral flattening and, in those instances where they are
distinctly broader than the penultimate phalanges, a circum-marginal groove
is detectable.

There are further minor points of divergence in the extent of inter-
digital webbing and development of supernumerary tubercles on the plantar
surface.

As indicated by the data presented in Table 2, at intermediate localities
there is a wide range of variation in the proportions of individuals. Of the
characters considered above the only consistent geographic trends noted
involve terminal digits and interdigital webbing. Dilation with or without
lateral expansion beyond the penultimate phalanges has not been observed
in any frogs collected north or west of central Queensland, and the webbing
is definitely most extensive in frogs from southern Queensland and New
South Wales. Frogs with dilated and undilated terminal phalanges evidently
occur in the latter area as evidenced by comparison of Moore’s (1961) line
figure of the hand, with the hand of the individual illustrated in his plate 45.

TABLE 2
Proportions of Hyla latopalmata

Adult Size
F TL/S-V E-N/IN HL/HW (S-V in mm.)
3d 22
Port Essington, N.T.
(affinis holotype) ... 1 547 1,167 1.025 34.3 a
|
Bowen, Qsld. |
(latopalmata syntype) 1 614 1.072 1,045 — 36.3
Vicinity of Fitzro:
River, W.A, ...... 5 .518-.548 (.532) -936-1,000 ( .978) | 1.062-1.091 (1.077) _ 32.1-36.3

Kununurra, W.A. ... 8 -531-.571 (.545) 921-1.095 ( .997) | 1.173-1.311 (1.222) | — —

dort iiaey 46 -606-.673 (.633) -906- .971 ( .951) | 1.131-1.262 (1.189) — —

Tessie tet eh Fe art Rt ime -604-.686 (.644) -897-1.000 ( .950) | 1.074-1.271 (1,168) — —

Doomadgee Station,
Qeidn on ge% shea shi he 2 -610 (.610) -920- .964 ( .942) | 1,139-1,189 (1.164) = =

Seen eit: 7 .585-.664 (.632) -892-1.107 (1.038) | 1.054-1.124 (1.078) | 31,9-32.8 37.3-42.4

NUT. sey retest seer 8 -574-.617 (.597) -920-1.087 (1.019) | 1,083-1.205 (1.137) _ —

722 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Material Examined: 139 specimens:—

Western Australia—
Kununurra—S.A.M. R.5827 (9).
Noonkanbah—N.R. 1578.
Parry Creek—W.A.M. R.29567, 29569.
St. George Range—N.R. 1579-80; M.C.Z, 18000.
23m. S.S.E. of Wyndham—W.A.M. R.26124, 26126, 26128-33,
26135.
Yeeda—N.R. 1577.

Northern Territory—

7m. S. of Adelaide River—W.A.M. R.26249-50.

Berry Springs, 15m. S.S.E. of Darwin—S.A.M. R.8983-5.

Bulman Waterhole—S.A.M. R.8174 (11).

Coomalie Creek—W.A.M. R.26244.

Ingaladdie Waterhole—S.A.M. R.8174 (11).

Katherine—W.A.M. R.13951, 26141-4.

Katherine Gorge—S.A.M. R.4874 (7).

Koolpinyah Stn.—A.M.N.H. 43835.

78m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9064-71.

83m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9062-3

98m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9072-3.

90m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M. R.9105,

Mt. Bundy Stn.—S.A.M. R.4878 (2).

Newcastle Waters—S.A.M. R.4873 (2).

Oenpelli—U.S.N.M. 128719.

?Port Essington—B.M. 1947.2.22.73 (holotype of Pelodytes
affinis).

Wilton River Crossing, 68m. N. of Mainoru—S.A.M.
R.9135(6).

Queensland—
Brisbane—S.A.M. R.3643, 6321 (2).
Doomadgee Stn.—S.A.M. R.5013 (2).
Mornington Is.—S.A.M. R.4935 (46).
St. George—S.A.M. R.3692, 3737,
Woodridge—S.A.M. R.3648.

New South Wales—

Darling River—S.A.M. R.5470 (3).
Macquarie River—S.A.M. R.5464 (3).

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 723

Distribution: On the distribution map of Moore (1961) there are very
few records from Western Australia and the Northern Territory, and there
is a wide gap between the most eastern Northern Territory record and the
east coast of Queensland, Figure 4 provides a more detailed picture of the
distribution of the species in the northern portion of the continent.

OLD

FIG. 4.
Distribution of Hyla latopalmata in Northern Australia.

Hyla nasuta (Gray)
Pelodytes nasutus Gray (1842), Zool. Misc., p. 56.

Hyla nasuta, Fry (1914), p. 210; Mitchell (1955), p. 405; Copland (1957),
p. 100; Moore (1961), p. 305; Mitchell (1964), p. 340.

In view of the extensive literature on this species comments are
confined here to details of the specimens on which the data in Table 1 are
based, a comparison with other members of the /esueuri complex occurring
in north-western Australia and details of distribution.

Material Examined: 13 specimens:—

Western Australia—
Kalumburu—W.A.M. R.13752A-C, 13777, 29541-2,
Kununurra—S.A.M. R.5082 (2).

Northern Territory—
7m. S. of Adelaide River—W.A.M. R.26248.
Cape Don—W.A.M. R.26680,
Coomalie Creek (16m. N. of Adelaide River) —W.A.M.
R.26243.
Groote Eylandt—S.A.M. R.3253 (2).

724 RECORDS OF THE 8$.A. MUSEUM

Comparison with Other Species: Pronounced elongation of the head
producing a very high HL/HW ratio (Table 1), the extreme reduction of
webbing between the toes and the presence of Jongitudinal skin folds and
stripes on the body, are a combination of features not shared by any other
member of the complex occurring in Western Australia and the Northern
Territory,

Distribution: The only specimens of nasuta previously collected in
Western Australia are three from Napier Broome Bay reported by Fry
(1914), One of these was seen by Moore (1961) and the locality was
represented on his distribution map, Kalumburu is situated on Napier
Broome Bay and the only further Western Australian specimens known to
be in existence are those from Kununurra on the Ord River near the State
boundary,

Hyla nigrofrenata Gunther

Hyla nigrofrenata Gunther (1867), Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., Ser. 3, Vol, 20,
p. 56; Boulenger (1882), p. 413; Moore (1961), p. 312.

Moore (1961) examined the syntypes of nigrofrenata and resurrected
the species from the synonymy of lesweuri to which it had been referred by
Loveridge (1935). One of these syntypes (B.M. 1947.2.23.46) and other
material reported in the literature as nigrefrenata have been re-examined,
and the conclusion reached that no specimens clearly conspecific with the
types have been subsequently examined. It is possible that the species will
ultimately prove to have a limited geographic range within Queensland,

This species can be distinguished from those occurring in the Northern
Territory and Western Australia as follows:

The webbing on the foot of nigrofrenata extends midway up the
penultimate phalanx on the fifth toe, This feature distinguishes the species
from cepland’ and wotjulmensis where the webbing reaches the base of the
disc, The presence of lateral head stripes distinguishes nigrofrenata from
coplandi and its form (disrupted behind the eye) is unlike that of nasuta
and worjulumensis, Although /atopalmata shares a disrupted posterior head
stripe, in nigrofrenata the posterior portion is as broad as the portion
immediately behind the eye (as depicted in the illustration of Boulenger,
1882) wheras in /atopalmata it is very much narrower, None of the 139
specimens of /atopalmata examined bear the slightest resemblance to
nigrofrenata in this respect,

Ayla nigrofrenata is evidently a larger species than Ja!opalmata, for
the syntype is an adult male with a snout to vent length of 42,3 mm, This
is as large as the largest female /ateopalmata examined by the writer
(42.4 mm.) and Moore (1961) (42.5 mm.).

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W. AUSTRALIA 725

FIG. 35.
Ayla coplandi.

KEY TO THE HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX OF WESTERN
AUSTRALIA AND THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

1. Webbing reaches base of terminal disc on fifth

toe .. ey ee te oly et Fh CD ULE DB
Webbing does not extend beyond a_ point

approximately midway up penultimate phalanx

On fifff tO 25 ia 4s be our} dere ee 3

2. Finger and toe discs distinctly dilated and
approximately twice the breadth of penulti-
mate phalanges; lateral head stripe absent:
S-V length of gravid females less than 45 mm. Ayla coplandi

726 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

Finger and toe discs slightly dilated and scarcely
broader than penultimate phalanges; broad
lateral head stripes present; S-V length of
gravid females greater than 45 mm, . .. .. Hyla wetjulumensis

3. Disc and two phalanges of fourth toe free from
web; head markedly elongate with HL/HW
ratio exceeding 1.275; broad continuous
longitudinal stripes and narrow skin folds on
OOdY ay ve ee ae ge ey an oe as pe ae. Ayla nasuta

Disc and no more than penultimate phalanx of
fourth toe free from web; head, if elongate,
with HL/HW ratio less than 1.275; neither
longitudinal stripes nor skin folds on body .. Ayla latopalmata

SUMMARY

Four species of the Hyla lesueuri complex are reported from Western
Australia and the Northern Territory: Hyla coplandi new species.
H. latopalmata, H. nasuta and H. wotjulumensis. The morphological
variation of each species is discussed and tabulated and distribution data
presented. Hyla nigrofrenata is compared with these species and excluded
from the Northern Territory fauna,

The following nomenclatural changes are proposed:

Hyla latopalmata watjulumensis Copland — Hyla wotjulumensis Copland.
Hyla spaldingi Hosmer = Hyla wotjulumensis Copland.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to record my sincere thanks to Dr, G. Storr of the Western Australian Museum
for making a large number of specimens available to me and for answering numerous queries
about them. Additional material was provided on loan by Miss A. G. C. Grandison
(British Museum, Natural History), Dr. J. A. Peters (United States National Museum),
Dr. G, Vestergren (Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet), Dr. E. &, Williams (Museum of
Comparative Zoology), and Dr. R. G. Zweifel (American Museum of Natural History).
Mr. H. G. Cogger kindly permitted me to examine specimens at the Australian Museum.
| am greatly indebted to Mr. W. Harrington for preparation of Figs. 1, 3 and 4 and to
Mr, R, Ruehle for the photographic plate.

My thanks are also due to the Director and Board of the South Australian Museum for

the provision of laboratory facilities and other forms of assistance, and to Mr, F. J, Mitchell
for his constructive criticism of the manuscript,

REFERENCES
Andersson, L. G., 1913; Results of Dr, EB. Mjoberg’s Swedish Scientific Expeditions io
Australia 1910-1913. Amphibia. Svenska Vetensk.—Akad. Handl,, 52 (4):
1-26,
Boulenger, G, A,, 1882: Catalogue of the Batrachia Salientia s. Ecaudata in the collection
of the British Museum. 2nd Ed., British Museum, London, 503 pp,

Copland, 8. J., 1957: Australian tree-frogs of the genus Hyla, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S,
82 (1); 9-108.

TYLER—HYLA LESUEURI COMPLEX IN N.W, AUSTRALIA 727

Fry, D. B., 1914: On a collection of reptiles and batrachians from Western Australia.
Rec. W. Aust. Mus., 1 (3): 174-210.

Glauert, L., 1959: Herpetological Miscellanea 9. Ablepharus wotjulum, a new skink from
West Kimberley. W. Aust. Nat., 6 (8): 192-3.

Hosmer, W., 1964: A new frog of the genus Hyla from Northern Territory, Australia.
Amer. Mus. Novi. (2182): 1-7.

Kinghorn, J. R., 1931: Herpetological notes No. 2. Rec. Aust. Mus., 18: 85-91.

Loveridge, A., 1935: Australian amphibia in the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge,
Massachusetts. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool., 78 (1): 1-60.

Mitchell, F, J., 1955: Preliminary account of the reptilia and amphibia collected by the
National Geographical Society-Commonwealth Government-Smithsonian Expedi-
tion to Arnhem Land (April to November, 1948). Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 11 (4):
373-408.

1964: Reptiles and Amphibians of Arnhem Land. In: Records of the American-

Australian Scientific Expedition to Arnhem Land, Vol. 4, Zoology, Ed. R. L.
Specht, Melbourne Univ. Press, pp. 309-343.

Moore, J. A., 1961: The frogs of eastern New South Wales. Bull Amer. Mus, Nat. Hist.,
121 (3): 149-386.

Tyler, M. J., 1968: Papuan hylid frogs of the genus Hyla. Zool. Verh., 96: 1-203.

THE SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERM FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
PART I: THE ASTEROIDS

BY SCORESBY A. SHEPHERD

Summary

At the time of the paper by Cotton and Godfrey (1942) and the monograph of H. L. Clark (1946)
observation of the habits of seastars was limited to intertidal species.

THE SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERM FAUNA OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Part I: The Asteroids
By SCORESBY A. SHEPHERD, c/o SouTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

At the time of the paper by Cotton and Godfrey (1942) and the
monograph of H. L. Clark (1946) observation of the habits of seastars was
limited to intertidal species.

Scuba equipment now permits direct observation to a depth of
about 60 m.

Since 1958 the author has been engaged in underwater surveys of
South Australian coastal waters and the observations recorded in this paper
are a result of these efforts.

Simplified descriptions and keys are given to assist the field collector
in the identification of the 31 species occurring down to 60 m, As man’s
range is continually being extended into even deeper water all species so far
recorded from the Continental shelf of southern Australia are listed in
Table 6.

In the formal parts of the text the ordinal classification adopted by
Fisher (1930) as modified by Fell (1963 and 1966) is used. Where
necessary the status of a species is discussed but otherwise only synonyms
and references later than Clark’s work (1946) are given.

Finally, biogeographic notes are made, and a summary is given
(Table 5) of the species according to habitat.

The following abbreviations are used:—A.M., Australian Museum;
N.M.V., National Museum of Victoria; T.M., Tasmanian Museum;
S.A.M., South Australian Museum; and W.A.M., Western Australian
Museum.

KEY TO THE ASTEROID GENERA OF THE CENTRAL
FLINDERSIAN REGION
1. Arms long tapering and strap-like, flattened
above and below; tube feet hepa with-
out sucking disk .. .. 2... ee. we 2

Not as above; arms not + fluttened. Tube ‘eet
with sucking disk .. .. 2... 2.4.4, 3

730

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

. Arms 7 ..

ATMS 3 ate tu ch ve adnak De 20 tie we

. The margin thick or rounded, formed by

marginal plates usually prominent.
Dorsal skeleton of paxilliform plates or
with tubercles or flat tesselate plates . .

Marginal plates usually not large and con-
spicuous; dorsal skeleton not composed
of true paxilliform plates and not in form
of pavement, more usually imbricated or
reticulated .

. Dorsal, marginal, and ventral plates covered

and obscured by a smooth skin .
Plates not covered by a smooth skin ..

. Marginal plates large and few, not more

than 20 across an interbrachial arc;
dorsal plates smooth . > Ris RAS

Marginal plates very numerous, more than
20 across an interbrachial arc; dorsal
plates paxilliform with extensive granu-
lation, or with tubercles ..

. Interbrachial arcs usually fairly deep.

Colour bright yellow to orange ..

Body pentagonal or nearly so. Colour
brown, dull red ..

. Dorsal plates paxilliform, without tubercles

and covered with layer of granules.
Pedicellariae inconspicuous . . am ein

Dorsal plates bear numerous large tubercles
(one to a plate) .

. Tubercles conically pointed. Large valvate

pedicellariae ..

Tubercules large and rotinded pédicellatue
inconspicuous ..

. Arms webbed; margin thin ..

Arms distinct; almost round in cross-section;
not webbed .

Luidia australiae
Astropecten spp.

Petricia vernicina
5

Pentagonaster duebeni

Tosia spp.

Nectria spp.

8

Anthaster valvulatus

Asterodiscus truncatus

10

12

10.

13.

14,

15.

16,

17.

18.

19,

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS

Dorsal plates of about the same size, round
and with very fine peripheral spinelets . .

Dorsal plates of two sizes, primary ones
crescentic; spinelets or granules cover
their surface ..

. Ventral plates each have a cluster of fine

spinelets . me ot eee ee
Ventral spines coarse and only one or two
to a plate ..

. Dorsal and ventral plates covered with

minute granules or spinelets . _
Dorsal plates form an open network bearing

isolated or irregular spines, spinelets or

granules (not forming a continuous coat)
Yellow in life, papulae appear as black dots
White or nearly so, or faintly pink .. ..
Two series of tube-feet along each furrow ..
Four series of tube-feet along each furrow .

Dorsal plates form a coarse network with
large meshes . . :

Dorsal plates form an stidiatitict setworlk,
the meshes bearing small pointed spines
singly or in clusters .. ogee

Arms 6 to 14 often unequal in size through
regeneration ..

Arms 5 . ghsipies sree mt vole qi see

Dorsal spines prominent and _ isolated,
surrounded by wreath of fine crossed
pedicellariae; arms 7-14 .

No prominent isolated spines; dorsal nidtis
and spinelets form a regular longitudinal
series; arms 6 to 9 usually ae

Dorsal skeleton forms a network with coarse
blunt spines. Ventral spines chisel-like.
R up to 80 mm.

Dorsal plates bearing fine spinelets.
less than 45 mm.

R is

Colour dull brown .. ,
Colour mottled dark and light ret”

731

Asterina atyphoida

ll
Paranepanthia grandis
Patiriella spp.

13

14

Austrofromia polypora
Nepanthia troughtoni
15

16

Plectaster decanus

Echinaster spp.

17
18

Coscinasterias calamaria

Allostichaster polyplax

Uniophora spp.

19

Allostichaster regularis
Smilasterias irregularis

732 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Class STELLEROIDEA
Subclass ASTEROIDEA

Order PLATYASTERIDA
Family LUIDITDAE
Genus LUIDIA Forbs

Luidia (Maculaster) australiae Déderlein
Luidia australiae Déderlein (1920), p, 266.
Maculaster australiae Fell H. B, (1963), pp. 433-4.

Description: Arms 7 in number, long tapering and strap-like, flattened
above and below. Arms and disk dorsally covered with squarish or
polygonal paxilliform plates covered with minute granules. Photographed
in Dakin (1960) Plate 82. Maximum R. is 200 mm.

Remarks: In his monograph on the phylogeny of seastars Fell (1963)
removed the Family Luidiidae from the order Phanerozonia to an eurlier
phylogenetic order Platyasterida; he also divided the genus Luidia into
9 genera and referred the species australiae to a new genus Maculaster.
In view of Fell’s uncertainty as to whether his new divisions should warrant
any higher status than that of sub-genera, I adopt a trinomial classification.

This Luidia is usually seen at depths of 15 m. or more upon a fine
sand or silt bottom where the angiosperm Halophila ovalis is often dominant.
Thus it is common in the deeper parts of Spencer and St. Vincent Gults.
Its diet includes molluscs and ophiuroids and it frequently buries itself in
the sand by lateral arm movements, probably in search of its prey. A
specimen taken 2-3 miles off Pt. Noarlunga, St. Vincent Gulf at 20 m.
contained remains of the ophiuroid Ophiomusium sp.

On expostire to air the animal autotomizes readily. The range of the
species is from Fremantle, Western Australia to Moreton Bay, Queensland,

Order PHANEROZONIA
Family ASTROPECTINIDAE
Genus ASTROPECTEN

This complex cosmopolitan genus is represented in South Australian
seas by three or possibly four species. The following key and figure are
offered to distinguish the species. A photograph of Astropecten pectinatus
appears in Dakin (1960), Plate 81.

Description: Five tapering arms, flattened above and below, Dorsal
surface covered with tightly packed elevated paxilliform plates each bearing
a cluster of small spinelets. Marginal plates conspicuous and form outline
of arms. Infero-marginal plates with long spines,

SHEPHERD—S.A, SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 733

Key to Species:
J, 20-40 ven(ro-lateral plates in each intermediate
area 2. ke ee te ee ee ee ee ee ee PeCtinatus
Single series only of ventro-lateral plates com-

rising 2 or 3 plates .. 2
p g Pp

2, Supero-marginal plates without spines .. .. .. — preisst

Supero-marginal plates with spines. ., .. .. 3
3. Usually 1 or 2 (sometimes 3) supero-marginal
spines to a plate 2. 6. 6. eee ee ee ee) Pappa
Occasionally | or 2, usually 3, sometimes 4
supero-marginal spines to a plate. .. ,, ., — friveriarus

Astropecten pectinatus Sladen
Fig. | d,e

Astropecten pectinatus Sladen (1883), p. 251; D, D, John (1948), p, 497;
A. M. Clark (1962), p. 98.

Astropecten schayeri Déderlein (1917), p. 60.
Astropecten syntomus H, Ll. Clark (1928), p. 372.

A consequence of Sladen’s failure (1883 p. 251) to see all the ventro-
lateral plates in the intermediate areas in Astropecten pectinatus was the
description of a new species A. schayeri from Tasmania by Déderlein.
Clark (1938 at p. 66) reiterated the differences between the two species
noting that A. schayeri had a greater number of ventro-lateral plates, longer
spines on the infero-marginal plates and a greater number of adambulacral
spines. John (1948 p, 497) detected Sladen’s omission and discounted the
remaining differences,

Examination of specimens from southern Australia and comparison of
them with the specimen of A. schayeri in the N.M.V. which H. L. Clark
(1938) examined and stated was very similar to Déderlein’s type shows thal
the character differences are subspecific. J find in general that the specimens
from Victoria and Tasmania tend to have coarser granules on the dorsal
paxillae, longer and coarser spinelets on the infero-marginal plates, a
greater number of prominent spines on the infero-marginals (see Fig. 1)
and coarser adambulacral spines; these differences may be attributable in
part but not wholly to the larger size of these specimens. Other differences
are tabulated in Table 1, John (1.c.) was probably correct when he inferred
that Déderlein (1917) in stating that the adambulacral armature of
A, schayeri contained up to 17 spines, included in his count the spines on
the intermediate plates, In the specimen of A. schayeri from N,M.V,
referred to above, the adanibulacral armature comprises up to 14 spines but

734 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

immediately behind on the intermediate plate there are 3 or sometimes 4
spines very similar in shape and size giving the appearance of a dense group
of spines numbering up to 17. The spines on the intermediate plates of
specimens from New South Wales and Western Australia are smaller and
finer, and hence it is not difficult to distinguish them from the adambulacrals.

The specimens from Port Arthur Bay, Tasmania are of exceptional
interest as they indicate that A. pectinatus may have an additional row of
! to 4 large spines on the proximal infero-marginal plates. (See Fig. 1.)
Thus it is evident that A. syntomus is within the variation of A. pectinatus
and must be referred to that species. I am not able to find any significant
differences between the specimens from New South Wales and those from
Western Australia,

On the New South Wales coast the habitat of A. pectinatus is fine sand
or sandy mud: in Bass Strait it is recorded on sand and shelly bottom and
in Port Arthur Bay, Southern Tasmania on sandy mud. In South Australia
the species is rare; it has been taken at 30 m. near St. Francis Island, Great
Australian Bight and has been dredged by Verco, presumably in St. Vincent
or Spencer Gulf. The colour of New South Wales specimens is recorded
as a fleshy pink. The species ranges from 30-280 m. and has a southerly
distribution around Australia between Rottnest, Western Australia and
Newcastle, New South Wales.

TABLE I
The variation in Asfropecten pectinatus

Range in Number of
Range in R in mm. Range in Number of Snines
Material Runge in R{r Armature of Supero- =, Number of Large Comprising
Mean R/r marginal Plates Ventrolatera! Infero- = Adambu-
Plates marginu) lacral
Spines Armature
10 specimens from off 3040 Most plates carry | small 17-29 3-5 9-12
Rottnest, W,A. at 160m. 3.4-4.0 spine, rarely larger
3.7 than 1 mm,
7 specimens from Baas 48-60 All plates with 1 20-36 493 9-14
Strait and southern 3.3-1.8 (occasionally 2) spines.
Tasmania at 30m- 3.6 At arm angle may be
up to 3mm. long
5 specimens of? Cronulla 29-49 Most plites with | spine 21-29 3-5 Sit
and Newcastle N.S.W. at 32-438 up to 15mm, long
80-280m, 35
Type specimen of Al | Most plates without 50 4-8 y
A, synramus 3.0 spines |

Astropecten preissi Miiller and Troschel
Fig. 1 b
Astropecten preissi Miiller and Troschel (1843), p. 119.

There is some yariation in the number of prominent spines of the
intero-marginal plates; Fig, 1 shows the armature of a typical South

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 735

Australian specimen. Some specimens from Shark Bay have up to 3 or 4
fewer such spines.

This Astropecten is a common seastar of deeper water between 15 and
30 m, in St. Vincent Gulf where it is found on a bottom of fine silty
calcareous sand. It is common 2 or 3 miles off Port Noarlunga, St. Vincent
Gulf,

The species is known to feed on small bivalves and probably ingests
other sand-dwelling animals as well. The feeding habits of a congener from
the South Carolina coast U.S.A, has recently been studied by Wells and
others (1961), The species ranges from Shark Bay, Western Australia to
St. Vincent Gulf down to 35 m. In colour it is generally a reddish brown
or fawn above and a lighter shade below.

Astropecten vappa Miiller and Troschel
Fig. Lc
Astropecten vappa Miiller and Troschel (1843), p. 119.
Astropecten hartmeyeri Déderlein (1917), p. 156.
Astropecten zebra Sladen (1883), p. 261.

A series of specimens of this species taken from the east and west
coasts of Australia mdicates that the spination of the supero-marginal plates
both with respect to size and number is a variable character. Ddéderlein
(1917, at p. 126) noted that Astropecten triseriatus was closely related to
A. vappa differing only in the armature of the spines upon the supero-
marginal plates. Whether A. ¢triseriatus is an extreme form of 4. vappa or
is specifically distinct awaits examination of more material from the south-
west of Western Australia. The variation in A. vappa, summarized in
Table 2 is given as a contribution to the solution of the question,

The only reported specimen of A. triseriatus from southern Australia
taken in Bass Strait (John, 1948 at p. 500) I would refer to 4. vappa.

The colour of the species is recorded as silver grey dorsally with orange
supero-marginal plates for New South Wales’ specimens and reddish-brown
or fawn dorsally for South Australian specimens.

The habitat of the species is sandy bottom at depths of 3-80 m. In
South Australia the species has only been taken in Spencer Gulf and at

12 m. in St. Vincent Gulf off Somerton Beach. It probably ranges right
round Australia.

Material Examined;
A. pectinatus

W.A.M, Number 15-66. Ten specimens from west end of
Rottnest Island.

736 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

T.M. 4 specimens from Pt. Arthur Bay at 30 m.
N.M.V. Number H52 labelled A. schayeri from Portland, Victoria
and Number H.50.
A.M. J.5420, J.5141, J.7342, J.7091, J.7416 (8 specimens).
S.A.M. K.45 (A. syntomus) K.38.
A. preissi
S.A.M. K.697. Thirteen specimens 14 miles off Pt. Noarlunga,
St. Vincent Gulf.
W.A.M, 30 specimens from Shark Bay to King George Sound
numbered 61/39, 2-66, 4-66, 5-66, 8-66, 11-66, 14-66,
17-66, 22-66.
A.M. 5 specimens numbered J.7411, 1.7420, J.6215 from Garden
Island or Green Island, Oyster Harbour.
A. vappa
W.A.M. (13 specimens) Numbered 18-66, 19-66, 20-66, 3-66
from Shark Bay and Rottnest.
A.M. 8 specimens numbered J,.7443, J.7340 from Cronulla.
S.A.M. 3 specimens numbered K.44 and K.696.
A. triseriatus
W.A.M. Numbers 832-32, 11-32.
A.M. Number J.7428.

Z mm,

Fig. |. Typical armature of third or fourth inferomarginal plates of some
species of Astropecten. a. A. polyacanthus. b. A, preissi. ¢. A. vappa.
d. A. pectinatus (specimens from New South Wales and Western Australia).
e. A. pectinatus specimens from Tasmania showing additional spines.

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 737
TABLE 2
Variation in Astropecten vappa and Astropecten triseriatus
Number of Supero- Length of | Number of
Range in R in marginal Spines Supero- Spines in
Specimens mm. Range in P.—on proximal third marginal Adambu-
R/r of arm. M.—on medial | Spines along lacral
third of arm, D.—on | arminmm.)| Armature
distal third of arm
12 specimens of vappa 33-117 P. Usually 1, sometimes 0-3.5 8-12
from Shark Bay, 3,3-4,9 0,2 o0r3 usually 2.0
W.A. on sand at R/r increases M. Usually | or 2 some-
2-4 m. with size times 3
D. Usually 1, sometimes
| 2
“specimens of vappa 46-98 P. Usually 1, rarely 2 1,0-2.5 7-10
from Cronulla, 3.9-4.9 M, Usually 1 sometimes | — usually
N.S.W. on sand at R/r increases 0 or 2 1.5-2.0
10-20 m. with size D. Usually 1 rarely 2
1 specimen of yappa $1 [ One spine per plate. 1.5-2.5 9-11
from Somerton, St. 4.3 Rarely on outer usually 2.0 |
Vincent Gulf on maryzin a second
sand at 12m. | smaller spine |
| specimen of vappa 53 P. Usually 1, rarely 2 05-10 | 8
from Lindeman 4.5 M. None
Island Queensland D. None
1 specimen of 63.5 P. | or 2 0,5-2,0 8-9
triseriatus from W.A, 4.9 | M, 2
(J 7428) D. 3
2 specimens of 62 P. Lto3 1.0-4.0 8-9
triseriatus from near 4.4 M, 2,3 0r4 |
Fremantle, W.A. | D. Usually 1 or 2,
occasionally 3

Family OREASTERIDAE
Genus ASTERODISCUS Gray
Asterodiscus truncatus Coleman

Asterodiscus truncatus Coleman (1911), p. 699.

Description: Body large (R may be 150 mm.) with 5 stubby arms.
Dorsal surface covered with very large rounded grains up to 6 mm. across.

Remarks: This species known as the “fire-brick seastar” is included
here on the basis of one specimen taken in the Great Australian Bight; it
it was in poor condition and was dredged at 55 m. off St. Francis Island.
In New South Wales the species is known only from rocky bottom and its
colour is recorded as purple and red,

738 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The species typically has warm temperate affinities and occurs down to
400 m. along the east coast of Australia as far south as the Tasmanian east
coast in deep water. There are also a few records from the Great Australian
Bight and Bass Strait in deep water.

Family GONIASTERIDAE
Genus NECTRIA Gray
This genus is represented by four species in South Australian seas.
The systematics of the genus were reviewed by Shepherd (1967a) to which
account the reader is referred for further information upon the ecology of
the several species.

Description: Arms 5. Dorsal surface covered with paxilliform plates,
which are densely covered with low granules. Marginal plates not
conspicuous and covered with coating of granules.

Key to Species:

1. Dorsal plates distally on arms individually dis-
tinct and similar in form and ie a to
those on disk .. .. .. . 2

Not as above: dota plates distally difficult to
distinguish individually; covered with coating

OE LOW eS ys sede pod uy pe eee A
2, Colour pale Ngee to orange. Hes of arms
brown .. .. . . oe. 4. 2+ macrobrachia
Colour bright fad: naptriad ‘black Lease a SOFIA

3. Dorsal paxilliform plates well- spuded, covered
with hemispherical granules .. ., .. .. . ocellata

Dorsal paxilliform plates very érawdad and
covered with closely packed Pep eames flat-
topped granules .. .. .. -. . . 2. 2. multispina

Nectria ocellata Perrier
Nectria ocellata Perrier (1876), p. 4.

As yet the species has only been taken in Backstairs Passage,
St. Vincent Gulf at 30-50 m.

Nectria macrobrachia H. L. Clark
Nectria macrobrachia H. L, Clark (1923), p. 236.

The species is common along the exposed rocky coasts of South
Australia down to 60 m,

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 739

Nectria multispina H. L, Clark
Nectria multispina H. L. Clark (1928), p. 375,

This species is common both on exposed rocky coasts and on the more
sheltered reefs of Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs. It is variable in colour
ranging from yellow to dark red.

Nectria saoria Shepherd
Nectria saoria Shepherd (1967), p. 463.

Saoria has some superficial resemblance with Nectria multispina. How-
ever, the black colour of its papulae and their occurrence throughout the
length of the arms makes it readily distinguishable. In the field, multispina
is rarely found in the surge zone in exposed localities, whereas saoria is
restricted to this habitat.

Family GONIASTERIDAE
Genus PENTAGONASTER Gray
Pentagonaster duebeni Gray
Pentagonaster diibeni Gray (1847), p. 79: A. M. Clark (1953), p. 400,

Description; Five arms, Body form more or less pentagonal but with
extended vertices. Body flattened above and below and covered with
rounded plates forming a firm pavement. Marginal plates large and
prominent, 4 (rarely 3) to 10 on each side of each arm (/.e., 8 to 20 across
each tnterbrachial arc). Maximum R is 73 mm,

Pedicellariae present with 2-3 narrow valves on dorsal and ventral
plates.

Remarks; There is now no doubt that the South Australian form is
conspecific with the form from Western Australia, the locality of Gray’s
type. A series of specimens from St. Vincent Gulf between Aldinga and
Cape Jervis shows a range of variation which embraces the forms formerly
known as P. crassimanus, P. stibarus and P. gunni. In the South Australian
specimens the number of marginal plates increases in general with size,
although there is some variation in individual specimens (see Table 3).
Furthermore, it is observed that specimens tend to increase in size with depth
so that the gunni-like form with longer and more pointed arms occurs
predominantly in deep water of 30 m, or more,

The form whose distal supero-marginal plates are grossly enlarged as
in the figure of A, M. Clark ((1966), p. 355, pl. 4) is a variant common
in South Australia’s Eastern Bays and in Victoria in shallow submarine
caves. It has not been recorded elsewhere on the South Australian coast.

740 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TABLE 3
Variation in Pentagonaster duebeni
Number Range Extreme 5
of Locality in R | Range in R/r| Supero-marginals °/, occurrence
Specimens (in mm.)! Mean R/r | in Sample
| +18.D |
| | i
| [3 4 5 6 7810
15 Port Noarlunga to North 41-73 2.0-2.9 — 6% 56% 26% 6% 6%
Coast Kangaroo 2.4 + 0.24
Island St. Vincent
Gulf
15 Port Noarlunga to North 25-42 19-22 | — 40% 51% 9% — —
Coast Kangaroo 2.08 + 0.1 |
Tsland St. Vincent
Gulf
3 Robe, S.A. 39-44 1.8-2.2 66% 338% -— — — —

The colour of the species is always bright and ranges from yellow through
orange to red. Sometimes the plates are outlined prettily in milk white but
more commonly in a dull green or yellow.

The habitat of the seastar is on reefs or rocky bottom and among an
association of encrusting organisms comprising sponges, bryozoa and com-
pound ascidians. Thus it is usually found on vertical rock surfaces and under
overhanging ledges where such encrusting organisms become dominant.
The starfish is often taken grazing on these organisms encrusting the rock
face. On exposed coasts subject to strong wave action the species is only
found below the zone of strong surge, i.e., below about 10 m, but on more
protected shores it may occur in shallow water of 1 or 2 m, depth.

The species ranges from Western Australia to Queensland around the
southerly half of the Continent and is reported down to 200 m._ It probably
occurs on most of the South Australian rocky coastline except in the upper
reaches of the Gulfs and in sheltered bays.

Genus TOSIA Gray

The confused nomenclature of this genus has now been satisfactorily
resolved by Clark (1953, p. 403). There are two species from South
Australian seas. The second of them (7. magnifica) is doubtfully included
here as it has not yet been taken in depths accessible to a diver in South
Australia.

Description: Five arms; pentagonal in shape or nearly so. Body

flattened above and below and covered with rounded plates forming a firm
pavement.

Marginal plates conspicuous forming outline of body.

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 741

Pedicellariae resemble a split granule but are infrequent.

Key to Species:
3 plates on each side of arm (or 6 along each side) australis
4-8 plates on each side of arm (8-16 along each
side ) ke magnifica

Tosia australis Gray

Tosia australis Gray (1840), p. 281; Livingstone (1932), p. 375;
A. M. Clark (1953), p. 379.

Tosia astrologorum Cotton and Godtrey (1942), p. 198.

A large series has been collected by the author and it is now clear that
the variation in the species is ecological in origin. Recent collections do
not support H. L. Clark’s suggestion (1946 at p. 94) that widely different
forms may be found in the same locality. Populations from any one place
have been found to be homogeneous but comparison of samples from
populations of differing habitats shows that there are many intermediate
forms between the extremes. This is illustrated in Table 4 where three
population samples are analysed.

The morphological variation relates to the degree of convexity of the
dorsal plates and the degree of swelling of the terminal supero-marginal
plates (see Table 4). These differences are not apparent in juvenile
specimens,

TABLE 4

A comparison of 3 population samples from different habitats. Only adult specimens where
R > 25 mm, are used.

The degree of swelling of the terminal supero-marginal plates is estimated by taking the ratio of
the surface area of the plate to that of the innermost supero-marginal plate.

| Extreme | Swelling of terminal

Number of | Range in Supero-marginal
Specimens | Locality Depth Habitat R/r Plate (a2) Extreme
| Mean R/r| range (b) Mean +
} | 18,D.
|
13 West Island 10-15m. | Strong to 1.4-1.8 | (a) 2.8-5.4
Encounter Bay | extreme L165 | (b) 3.9 + 0.95
(astrologorum- wave action Very swollen
like form)
22 Glenelg breakwater 2-5m. Slight to 1.4-1.7 (a) 1.5-2.8
St. Vincent Gulf moderate 1.52 (hb) 2.2 + 0.44
Wave action | Slightly swollen
8 Kingscote jetty 4-7m. Very calm 1.2-1.7 (a) 0.9-2.1
Kangaroo Island | water 1.4 (hb) 1.65 + 0.40
Not swollen
|

742 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In localities of strong to extreme wave action the astrologorum-like
form occurs but only at depths below about 8 m. Like Pentagonaster
duebeni it prefers vertical or slightly overhanging rock surfaces, although it
is occasionally found on horizontal or sloping rocky surfaces under the algal
canopy. Specimens from this habitat are not highly coloured but are
usually varying shades of brown.

In less exposed localities, us in the sample from the Glenelg Break-
water, St, Vincent Gulf, the form with only slightly enlarged distal supero-
marginals commonly occurs on reefs down to about 10 m. often under a
canopy of the laminarian Ecklonia or other brown algae. Such specimens
are usually highly coloured, the dorsal surface presenting a kaleidoscopic
mosaic of purples, mauves, oranges and salmon pink colours. The ventral
surface is a cream or light salmon colour.

In calm waters and land-locked bays the form without enlarged
(although sometimes elongated) terminal supero-marginal plates occurs in
large numbers on sandy bottoms in Halophila and Zostera beds typical of
calm conditions, Specimens from this habitat ure not multicoloured but
are a uniform salmon, mauve or brown colour, It ranges here from just
below low tide to about 10 m. This form is commonly found in Port
Lincoln Harbour, Edithburgh, Nepean Bay on Kangaroo Island and the
upper sheltered waters of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs. ‘The species feeds
variously on detritus, molluscs and rock-encrusting ascidians and bryozoa,

Tosia australis ranges from the region of Streaky Bay, South Australia,
lo the New South Wales coast and occurs around Tasmania.

Tosia magnifica (Miller and Troschel)
Astrogonium magnificum Miller and Troschel (1842), p. 53.
Tosia magnifica A, M. Clark (1953), p. 408.

As yet this species has only been dredged in deep water off the South
Australian coast. The only specimen which T have seen was taken by the
Soviet vessel Akademik-Berg at about 200 m, off the south coast of Kangaroo
Island in 1966. It was a light salmon colour, As it is known from water
of 5 m. depth in D’Entrecasteaux Channel, Tasmania, and is common in
Port Phillip Bay, Victoria it may yet be found at less than 60 m. in the
Eastern Bays of South Australia. The Port Phillip Bay specimens are a
uniform dull brown and occur on a sandy or mud bottom,

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 743

Family ANTHENEIDAE
Genus ANTHASTER Déderlein
Anthaster yalvulatus (Miiller and Troschel)
Oreaster valvulatus Miller and Troschel (1843). p. 115
Anthaster valvulatus Déderlein (1915), p. 27

Description: Body large and convex dorsally, 5 stubby arms. Marginal
plates prominent forming outline of body. Plates on dorsal surface covered
With fine granules. 5-12 large smooth tubercles protrude from some plates
usually radially along line of arm. Maximum R is about 120 mm.

Remarks: Anthaster valvulatus is common along the eastern margin
of Spencer Gulf on reefs between Wardang Island and Point Riley near
Wallaroo from 3 to 10 m., and further north on the opposite coast at
Point Lowly,

At Goose Island, near Wardang Island, Anthaster was found in areas
of moderate surge where the rock was encrusted with sponges, compound
ascidians and lithothamnia. Observations indicated that it fed on such
encrusting sponges and ascidians. Elsewhere the species, although
uncommon, does occur on muddy bottom at 40 m. and in Posidonia beds
at 10 m, in St. Vincent Gulf and on rocky substrate in Investigator Strait
at 20-40 m,

In colour it is a brick red sometimes with mottling above with the
lower surface a cream or light salmon colour.

The range of the species is from Fremantle, Western Australia to
St, Vincent Gulf, South Australia.

Family ASTEROPIDAE
Genus PETRICIA Gray
Petricia vernicina (Lamarck)
Asterias vernicina Lamarck (1816), p. 554
Petricia yernicina Fisher (1908), p. 357.
Petricia obesa H. L. Clark (1923), p. 241,

Description: Arms 5, short stubby and rounded at tip. Body and
arms covered by thick smooth skin concealing marginal plates.

Remarks: This seastar is ubiquitous on South Australia’s rocky shores.
On exposed coasts it may be found under crevices and ledges in a similar
habitat to that favoured by Pentagonaster duebeni and is the only species
of asteroid which penetrates the extremities of submarine caves, On less

744 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

exposed coasts it occurs commonly on shallow reefs often under the canopy
of Ecklonia or Cystophora spp. at 1 or 2 m. The species has also been
taken at depths of 60 m. on rocky bottom dominated by a sponge
association,

This species’ favourite diet seems to be encrusting sponges on which it
is Often found grazing, but it probably also feeds on other rock encrusting
organisms and detritus.

Petricia is usually mottled in colour and varies from dull brown to a
brilliant orange or red. Specimens taken in places of reduced illumination
such as from the back of caves or in deep water are a much brighter colour
than others taken in shallow water.

I regard Petricia obesa as a synonym of P, vernicina (see A. M. Clark
1966, p. 318) so that the range of the species is from the Abrolhos
Islands, Western Australia to Caloundra, Queensland (Endean, 1957),

Family OPHIDIASTERIDAE
Genus AUSTROFROMIA H, L. Clark
Austrofromia polypora (H. L. Clark)
Fromia polypora H. L. Clark (1916), p. 51.
Austrofromia polypora H. L. Clark (1946), p. 114.

Description: Arms 5, long, slightly tapering and round in cross-section.
Surface covered with irregularly arranged plates which are coated with low
granules. Maximum R is 80 mm.

Remarks: Austrofromia is always associated with rocky areas encrusted
by sponge growth, and its feeding habits parallel those of Penfagonaster
duebeni,

On the open coasts it is not uncommon in deeper rocky areas below
about 20 m. and in St. Vincent Gulf it occurs on the numerous off-shore
reefs from 5 to 20 m, between Aldinga and West Beach. However, Bennett
and Pope (1953) report its occurrence intertidally on the cooler Victorian
coasts,

The colour of the living animal is bright yellow and its black papulae
protrude individually between the plates giving it a distinctive speckled
appearance; specimens I have seen from Port Hacking, New South Wales,
were a dark red in colour. The species has a distribution from Rottnest,
Western Australia around the Victorian and Tasmanian coasts to Port
Hacking, New South Wales and has been dredged down to 160 m.

SHEPHERD—S,A, SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 745

Order SPINULOSA
Family ASTERINIDAE
Genus ASTERINA Nardo
Asterina atyphoida H. L. Clark
Asterina atyphoida H. L. Clark (1916), p. 57; A. M. Clark (1966), p. 324.

Description: Arms 5, pentagonal in shape. Dorsal surface covered
with small round or oval plates with fine peripheral spinelets on them,
Maximum R is about 12 mm.

Remarks: Little more is known of this seastar since Dr. Verco dredged
extensively in Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs. The lack of specimens from
depths less than 40 m. suggests that it is largely confined to waters deeper
than this. I have taken several specimens at 30-40 m. among sponge
material on rocky bottom in Backstairs Passage, St. Vincent Gulf. This
asterinid is small and inconspicuous; specimens are usually discovered
concealed among sponge or rock while bottom material is being sorted out
on deck. The colour in life is usually a pale cream, yellow or light brown.
Its known range is from the South Australian Gulfs to Port Phillip Heads,
Victoria,

Genus PATIRIELLA Verrill
This genus is represented in South Australian seas by four species.

Description: Disk large arms and body more or less flattened. Sides
only slightly concave if at all. Dorsal surface covered with crescentic plates
which are covered with low granules. Three species are figured in Dakin
(1960) plates 80, 81.

Key to Species:

1, Pentagonal in form. Five arms, size small (R
up to 10 mm.), colour blue-green or green .. exigua

ATS 6 vot BB Be ies eg ae tt Ce sake et ett ae

2. Arms 8. Interbrachial arcs deeper than other
species. Ventral plates carry only one spine.

Vari-coloured .. .. 2. 1. 1. es ee ae es = © Calear
PUIG LG fa te de ee) OE AE oh Lb ne ee pee 8
3. Dorsal colour rich purple. Tube feet orange .. brevispina

Dorsal colour blue, dark and light red, brown
or cream; tube feet cream or white .. .. .. gunni

746 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM

Patiriella carcar (Lamarck)
Asterias calear Lamarck (1816), p. 357.
Patiriella calear Verrill (1913), p. 484.

This species is one of the few seastars which is limited to the intertidal
or immediately sub-littoral zone. It is gregarious in habit and flourishes in
great numbers in protected rock pools on exposed coasts but becomes
progressively less common up the Gulfs; in St. Vincent Gulf it is rarely seen
north of Port Willunga and in Spencer Gulf north of Corny Point. This
species appears to be omnivorous and feeds on detritus, algae (in particular
Laurencia sp. and Gelidium sp.) gastropods and pelecypods. It also
scavenges moribund animals which may be washed within its reach,

The seastar is remarkable for its diversity of colour and may be seen
in combinations of white, yellow, orange, red, brown and grey. Its
coloration is well illustrated by Dakin (1960, pl. 82).

The range of the species is from King George Sound, Western Australia
around Tasmania to Currumbin, Queensland.

Patiriella exigua (Lamarck)
Asterias exigua Lamarck (1816), p. 554.
Patiriella exigua Verrill (1913), p. 484.

This curious little seastar might easily be overlooked in shore collecting,
Like P. calcar it appears to be restricted to an intertidal habitat and occurs
in shallow rock pools on sheltered coasts and also in very shallow water
among mangrove roots in the upper reaches of Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs.
It is able to withstand surprisingly high summer temperatures often in the
region of 30-35°C. in water sometimes only 1 or 2 cm. deep. It 1s
gregarious and in suitable conditions many hundreds may occur within a
single pool. The species is uniformly dark blue-green dorsally with a
lighter colour below. Whitelegge (1889 at p. 201) describes the breeding
of this species in New South Wales.

In addition to the localities mentioned by Cotton and Godfrey (1942)
the species has been found at Port Minlacowie, Yorke Peninsula and at
numerous localities intertidally between Port Gawler and Port Wakefield,
St. Vincent Gulf.

Exigua occurs along the southern Australian coast from Spencer Gulf
to Tasmania and along the eastern coast of Australia to Torres Strait.

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS TAT

Patiriella gunni (Gray)
Asterina gunnii Gray (1840), p. 289.

Patiriella gunni (Gray); Verrill (1913), p. 484; A. M, Clark (1966),
p. 320.

This Paririella is small and secretive, and occupies a discrete habitat
under rocks from just below low tide in protected areas down to about
10 m, Specimens have occasionally been taken in deeper water down to
30 m. Its feeding habits are similar to those of Paranepanthia grandis.

The species is almost as diversely coloured as P. calcar and appears in
mottled shades of red, pink, blue, light brown, or cream,

The species is abundant at Wedge Island, Spencer Gulf in shallow
waler near the jetty under rocks at | m., at Port Noarlunga at 6 m. to the
north of the reef, and at Port Willunga reef in shallow water under rocks,

Gunni is found along the southerly half of the continent from Dongarra
on the western coast of Western Australia around Tasmania to Long Reef
Collaroy New South Wales.

Patiriella brevispina H. L. Clark

Patiriella brevispina H. L, Clark (1938), p. 166; Bennett and Pope (1953),
p. 149,

In morphology this species is indistinguishable from the preceding
although it does grow to a considerably larger size (maximum R is up to
70 mm.), In the field, however, the two species cannot be confused; they
occupy very different habitats and brevispina is always a rich purple in
colour whereas gunni never is.

Brevispina is a common seastar of shallow water occurring both on
rocky and sandy bottom along the margins of St. Vincent and Spencer
Gulfs down to 10 m. and in sheltered locations along the exposed coasts,
Large numbers are washed ashore annually on the sandy beaches of South
Australia during November and December,

This species is a voracious feeder and has been observed feeding on
red algae (Laurencia sp. and Spyridium sp.) pelecypods and gastropods.
It will also scavenge decaying animals and bottom detritus. The species’
range is from Fremantle, Western Australia to Sydney Harbour, New South
Wales and it is recorded from the north coast of Tasmania.

TAR RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus PARANEPANTHIA Fisher
Paranepanthia grandis (H. L. Clark)

Nepanthia grandis H. L. Clark (1928), p. 393.
Paranepanthia grandis H. L. Clark (1938), p. 159.

Description: Arms 5; more or less pentagonal. Dorsal surface covered
with small rounded plates bearing fine spinelets. Maximum R for South
Australian specimens is about 45 mm.

Remarks: Judging from the specimens dredged by Verco, Paranepanthia
is not rare in deeper water and [ have taken a number of specimens at
30-40 m. on rocky bottom in Backstairs Passage. In shallow water the
species is seldom seen but may occasionally be found on open coasts well-
hidden under rocks in places locally protected from the swell. Specimens
taken at West Island, Encounter Bay at 2-3 m. were found feeding on small
gastropods and on compound ascidians which encrust the undersurface
ot rocks.

The species is a pale pink to orange above sometimes with mottling.
and cream below.

It has a southerly distribution around Australia from Point Peron
Western Australia to Sydney Harbour New South Wales, and occurs also in
Tasmanian waters.

Genus NEPANTHIA Gray
Nepanthia troughtoni (Livingstone)

Parasterina troughtoni Livingstone (1934), p. 179.
Parasterina occidentalis H. L. Clark (1938), p. 180.
Parasterina sp. ? troughtoni A. M. Clark (1956), p. 379.
Nepanthia hadracantha A. M. Clark (1966), p. 289.

Description: Disk small; 5 long slightly tapering or cylindrical arms.
Surface of seastar closely paved with more or less rhombic plates, often
imbricated, which in turn are densely covered with a coat of minute spinelets.

Remarks: The comparison of specimens from Western Australia,
Victoria and South Australia enables me to clarify the confusion in the
name of this species.

There is some variation in both Western Australian and South
Australian specimens in

(a) the relative size and crowding of the dorsal plates on the
disk and at the base of the arms and
(b) the degree of taper of the arms.

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 749

In some specimens the plates are not at all crowded and the papulae may be
easily seen between them. In others the plates are distinctly rhombic and
densely crowded. The tapering of the arms ts a variable character, In
most adult specimens lupering is quite evident but in some juvenile specimens
the arms taper very little or not at all, As the differences between
P. troughtoni and P, occidentalis are based on these variable characters and
are in any event vague 1 have no difficulty in following A, M. Clark's
suggestion (1956 at p. 380) that P. occidentalis is a synonym of
P, troughtoni.

The specimens examined also agree well with the descriptions of
Nepanthia hadracantha (A, M, Clark (1966), p. 289) and Parasterina sp, ?
troughtoni both taken in Victorian waters. The figures of the dorsal
Spinelets of Nepanthia hadracuntha (A, M. Clark (1966), p. 321) are
typical of the spinelets of both the Western Australian and South Australian
series. There is however rather more variation in the spinelets in the
species than appears from the figures, In some specimens in addition to
the typical spinelets there may also occur spinelets having several sharply
pointed needle-like projections instead of the usual single enlarged conical
or blunted process in the centre of the spinelet, lt is clear that Nepanthia
hadracantha is a synonym of Parasterina troughion.

As to the generic location of the species, apart from the doubts cast
upon the usefulness of retaining the genus at all by Fisher (1941, p. 66)
the ubsence of secondary dorsal plates indicates that this species falls more
naturally into the genus Nepanthia.

Like Nectria saoria the species is restricted to areas of strong wave
action and is found between depths of 5 and 30 m. The species occurs so
consistently in this habitat that it may be considered an indicator organism
of such conditions, It may be expected anywhere alony the exposed coast
but does not penetrate far up Spencer or St. Vincent Gulfs. In St. Vincent
Gulf it has pot been recorded north of Rapid Head nor in Speicer Gulf
nofth of Goose Island near Port Victoria, In Western Australia however,
the species shows some diversity of habitat and is recorded on sandy bottom
and also under rocks,

This Nepanthia grazes over the rock face and feeds on lithothamnia,
encrusting bryozoa, sponges and compound ascidians,

The colour of South Australian specimens is usually an off-white or
very pale pink but Western Australian specimens are much brighter being
frequently a rose red in colour, The known range of the species fs from
Fremantle, Western Australia to Wilson's Promontory, Victoria,

750 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

Material Examined:

W.A.M. 20 specimens numbered 9508, 20-59, 29-59, 23-66 to
28-66, 47-32, taken on the Western Australian coast between
Trigg Island and King George Sound, Western Australia.

S.A.M. 26 specimens numbered K680, K616, K606 from West
Island and Wright Island, Encounter Bay; Troubridge Point,
Yorke Peninsula; Goose Island, Spencer Gulf; and the north
coast of Kangaroo Island.

N.M.V. H. 53 from Wilson’s Promontory, Victoria.

Family ECHINASTERIDAE
Genus ECHINASTER Miiller and Troschel
Description: Disk small; 5 long tapering arms, round in cross-section.

Dorsal surface covered with skin and bearing spines either isolated or in
clusters.

Key to Species:
Dorsal spines in clusters, Dark red colour. Maxi-
mum R— 90mm... .... .. .. ., .. .. glomeratus

Dorsal spines isolated and forming coarse meshes.
Colour dull yellow to red. Maximum R =
ASO MiG GSAS NE a CaS

Echinaster arcystatus H. L. Clark
Echinaster arcystatus H. L. Clark (1914), p. 148.

This Echinaster is a large and well marked species inhabiting rocky
boitom below 30 m. It is only occasionally seen in shallow water.

The species has been observed to feed on encrusting sponges and less
often on molluscs and detritus. As sponges are usually dominant in rocky
areas of 30 m. or more it is likely that this constitutes a substantial part of
its diet.

Living specimens are variable in colour ranging from a rather dull
yellow to dark red; their characteristic slipperiness to the touch is imparted
by the dense groups of papulae which protrude from within the meshes
over the surface of the animal. The species has been recorded from most
of the off-shore reefs in St. Vincent Gulf south of Halletts Cove in depths
of 10 to 30 m., from West Island at 30 m. and from Investigator Strait.

It ranges from Western Australia, south of Geraldton to Encounter
Bay, South Australia.

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 751

Echinaster glomeratus H. L, Clark
Echinaster glomeratus H. L. Clark (1916), p. 62.

This endemic South Australian species is rarely encountered by skin-
divers. Like E. arcystatus it occurs on rocky bottom but has only been
taken in the region of Cape Jervis at 20-30 m, In colour it is a dark
wine ted. Nothing is known of its feeding habits or its distribution.

Genus PLECTASTER Sladen
Plectaster decanus (Miiller and Troschel)
Echinaster decanus Miller and Troschel (1843), p. 114,
Plectaster decanus Sladen (1889), p. 535,

Description; Arms 5, tapering, round in cross-section. Low thick
granules form the outline of a coarse prominent meshwork over the surface
of the seastar, Photographed in Dakin (1960), pl 81.

Remarks: This unusual species is a little better known than the
preceding; it may be expected, although not commonly, on reefs in the
lower half of Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs. The only place where large
numbers are known to occur is at Goose Island, Spencer Gulf on exposed
reefs at 2 to 6 m. Limited observations suggest that it feeds on encrusting
sponges and ascidians. This Plectaster ranges from the Great Australian
Bight to Newcastle, New South Wales, down to 200 m.

Family ASTERIDAE
Genus COSCINASTERIAS Verrill
Coscinasterias calamaria (Gray)
Asterias calamaria Gray (1840), p. 179.
Coscinasterias calamaria Perrier (1894), p, 106,

Description: Arms 7 to 14. Small specimens usually 9 and adults 11.
Dorsal spines isolated and prominent. Figured in Dakin (1960), plates
79, 80. Maximum R is 250 mm.

Remarks: This, the largest and most ubiquitous seastar of South
Australian areas, occurs on rocky, sandy or muddy bottom provided there
is some protection from the surge of the ocean swell. In Spencer and
St. Vincent Gulfs it is common on shallow water reefs along the coastal
margins, and on Halophila beds, Pinna beds and muddy bottom at 20-50 m,

Specimens from shallow water are usually blue or grey, often mottled,
but deep water specimens are bright orange to red. Coscinasterias is an
avid predator and will attack a variety of molluscs including the razor shell
Pinna dolobrata and the elephant snail Seutus; it will also prey on moribund

752 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

animals and scavenge debris. Bennett (1927) discusses the behaviour and
autotomy of the species in New Zealand water. In southern Tasmania it is
recorded by Olsen (1957) as the main predator of the scallop.

The species ranges from South Africa to New Zealand; on the
Australian coast its known northerly limits are Rottnest Western Australia
and Pt, Danger, Queensland (Endean 1965).

Genus ALLOSTICHASTER Verrill
Description: The two species are small; R seldom exceeds 35 mm.

Dorsal surface covered with spines in definite longitudinal series. Figured
in Dakin (1960), p. 179.

Allostichester polyplax (Miiller and Troschel)
Asteracanthion polyplax Miiller and Troschel (1844), p, 178.
Allostichaster polyplax Verrill (1914), p. 363; A. M. Clark (1962), p. 102.

This small and rather secretive seastar is abundant in rocky areas on
protected coasts, It is usually to be found concealed under boulders and
occurs most commonly from the intertidal zone down to about 10 m. Small
gastropods and pelecypods are included in its diet.

It is commonly seen intertidally at Port Willunga and at Port Noarlunga
Reef, Glenelg Breakwater at 3 m. and Halletts Cove at 5-10 m.

In addition to normal reproduction the species is fissiparous and very
often specimens are taken with two, three, four or five regenerating arms.
This phenomenon has been studied by Bennett (1927). In colour the
species is more or less a uniform dull brown to grey. The species ranges
from Rottnest Western Australia to New Zealand down to 128 m.

Allostichaster regularis H. L. Clark
Allostichaster regularis H, L, Clark (1928), p. 400.

In contrast to the preceding species A. regularis is regularly
pentamerous. The slight morphological differences between the two species
are given by A. M. Clark (1962 at p. 102). The species although seldom
taken, appears to occupy a similar habitat to A. polyplax.

Genus SMILASTERIAS Sladen
Smilasterias irregularis H. L. Clark
Smilasterias irregularis H. L. Clark (1928), p. 402.

Description: Arms 5; spinelets scattered over dorsal surface but in
no regular series, Maximum R is about 50 mm,

Remarks: This species is as secretive as Allostichaster polyplax but is
much less frequently encountered, It autotomizes readily and specimens

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 753

are often found with one or more arms missing or regenerating. It is found
in a similar habitat to that occupied by A. polyplax and has been observed
to feed on small gastropods and chitons which are similarly concealed
under rocks.

In colour the species is a pretty variegated dark and light red dorsally.
It is superficially very similar to Allostichaster regularis but may be
distinguished from it in that its disk is more plainly convex and distinct
from the arms and its colour is quite different.

Specimens haye been taken at Sunken Brother Rock, Port Lincoln
Harbour at 6 m., Bamboo Reef near Balgowan, Yorke Peninsula at 5 m.,
and Port Noarlunga Reef and Port Willunga Reef, St. Vincent Gulf. The
range of the species is from Spencer Gulf to Port Phillip Bay, Victoria.
Rither it or a closely related species is recorded from Macquarie Island
(A. M. Clark, 1962, at p. 87).

Genus UNIOPHORA Gray
This genus was recently revised by Shepherd (1967b) and the notable
variability of the two species and their ecology is there discussed.
Key to Species:
Dorsal surface covered by a network of spines,

often capitate. Longitudinal series along centre
of ray prominent, (Figured in Dakin (1960),

pl. 81 .. ~ ae Se granifera
Few spines dorsally. Where existing they are short
and pointed .. 1. 0. ee ee ye pe vy ee ey) td

Uniophora granifera (Lamarck)
Asterias granifera Lamarck (1816), p. 560; Shepherd (1967b), p.
Uniophora granifera Bell (1881), p. 497: H. L. Clark (1928), p. 403,

This is one of the most abundant of the asteroids of the rocky reefs
in St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs. It occurs in places of moderate wave
action and commonly feeds on the ascidians Pyrura irregularis and Micro-
cosmus stolonifera.

Uniophora nuda (Perrier)
Asterias nuda Perrier (1875), p. 335,
Uniophora nuda Fisher (1926), p. 198; Shepherd (1967), p. 1.
Further collecting may yet show that this species intergrades com-
pletely with granifera, At present the morphological and habitat differences
are sufficient to justify the separation of the two species. The species is

754 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

most commonly seen on Halophila beds down to 60 m, where it feeds on
solitary ascidians and molluscs. Jt is known only from the lower regions
of the South Australian Gulfs.

BIOGEOGRAPHIC NOTES

The Flindersian biogeographic province is considered to be a
transitional warm temperate region extending from the south-western
corner of Western Australia to the region of Robe, South Australia according
to Knox and others (see Knox 1963, p, 375); Womersley and Edmonds
(1958) however consider that the eastern bays of South Australia and the
Victorian and Tasmanian coasts comprise a sub-province with marked cool
temperate affinities within the Flindersian province extending to the far
eastern Victorian coast,

The distribution of the 31 species of asteroids in the Flindersian region

is as follows:

1. Endemic to central region (/.e., from Streaky Bay to Robe)
(Uniophera nuda, Allostichaster regularis, Echinaster
glomeratus)’s) ase vel gy ss oe aN Et Oe EE Oe OD

. Eastern and énteal region (i.e., not extending west of the
head of the Great Australian Bight) (Smilasterias irregu-
laris, Nectria multispina, Patiriella exigua, Asterina
atyphoida, Tosia australis, Uniophora granifera; the latter
two species have related allopatric species in Western
Austral), tan acs Ee bemahe +t od CR Se oe ae oe dee

3. Central and western region (i.e., not extending east of

Encounter Bay) (Astropecten preissi, Anthaster valvulatus,

Echihaster_artyslatus)* 5; 30 seats aves th oe Le oe 3

4, Eastern region (i.e., not extending west of Robe, South

Australia) (4ustraliaster dubius, Asterina inopinata, Tosia

te

PUGET Aw cas at hs Oe > DE le Games NE we” HE 3
5. General southern Australian disivibution (except in some
cases southern Tasmania) . 2. 2. 6. 6. ee ee ee ee ee) (19

It is evident that two critical regions in the biogeography of shallow
water asteroids are the region westward from the head of the Great Australian
Bight, and the south-eastern coast of New South Wales. The differences on
the cooler Victorian and Tasmanian coasts are comparatively minor.

The distribution of asteroids emphasizes the homogeneity of the whole
of the southern Australian coast as far as this group is concerned and
provides no evidence for the creation of a separate and distinct biogeographic
province for the Victorian and Tasmanian coasts as advocated by Bennett
and Pope (1953),

SHEPHERD—S.A. SHALLOW WATER ECHINODERMS 755

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am grateful to the officers of the Museums referred to in this paper who made
ayailable their respective collections, and to Mr. A. J. Dartnell who supplied distributional
data from Tasmania.

TABLE 5
A summary of the species according to habitat on South Australian coasts
INTERTIDAL ROCK SUB-LITTORAL ROCK
Allostichaster polyplax (a) Sheltered Localities
Coscinasterias calamaria Allostichaster polyplax
Patiriella calear Allostichaster regularis
Patiriella exigua Anthaster valvulams
Patiriella guani Coscinasterias calamaria
Nectria multispina
: = “ Paranepanthia grandis
SUB-LITTORAL SAND OR MUD Patiriella brevispina
Anthaster valvulatus Patiriella guani
Astropecten pectinatus Pentagonaster duebeni
Astropecten preissi Smilasierias irregularis
Astropecten vappa Uniophora granifera
Coscinasterias calamaria smite®
Luidia (Maculaster) australiae (b) Exposed Localities
Patiriella brevispina Austrofromia polypora
Uniophora nuda Echinaster areystatus
Echinaster glomeratus
Nectria macrobrachia
SUB-LITTORAL SAND OR ROCK Nectria multispina
(found only over 30 m.) Nectria saoria
Asterina atyploida Nepanthia traughtoni
Asterodisceus truncatus Pentagonaster duebeni
Nectria ocellata Petricia vernicina
Tosia magnifica Plectaster decanus
TABLE 6

Species recorded on the southern Australian continental shelf. (See H. L. Clark (1946)
and A. M. Clark (1962).)

Australiaster dubius Nymphaster penfagonus
Cosmasterias dyserita Odinia australis
Crossasier multispinus Pseudophidiaster rhysus
Dipsacaster magnificus Psilaster acuminatus
Henricia hyadesi Pteraster tetracanthus
Lonchotaster forficifer Radiaster gracilis
Lonchotaster magnificus Srylasterias reticulata
Marginaster c.f. paucispinus Zoroaster macracantha

Mediaster australiensis

REFERENCES

Bell, F. J.. 1881: Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 497.
Bennett, E, W., 1927; Rec. Canterb. Mus., 3, p. 125.
Bennett, I. and Pope. E. C., 1953: Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 4. pp. 105-159.
Clark, A. M.. 1953: Bull, Br. Mus, (nat. Hist.), Zool. 1, pp. 379-412.
———— 1956: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12) 9, pp, 374-383,

1962; B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. Rep. Ser. B., Vol. 9, pp. 1-102.
————. 1966: Mem. Nat. Mus. Vict., No. 27, pp, 289-351,
Clark, H. L.. 1914: Ree. W. Aust. Mus., Vol. 1 pp. 132-173.
—— 1916: Endeavour Rept., pp. 1-123.

1921: Ech. Torres Strait, pp. 1-224.

1923: Jour. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), Vol. 35, pp. 229-251.

1928; Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Vol. 3, pp, 108-142,

1938: Mem, Mus. Comp. Zool., 55, pp. 1-597.

1946: “The Echinoderm Fauna of Australia’. Publ. Carneg. Inst., 566, 1-567.

756 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Coleman, H. L., 1911; Mem, Aust, Mus., 14, p. 699.
Dakin, W. J., 1960: Australian Seashores (Revised Edition).
Déderlein, L., 1915: Jahrb. Nassau Ver. Naturk. Wiesbaden, Vol. 68, p. 27.
1917: “Siboga” Ast: pp. 1-191.
1920: Siboga Rep. Ast., p. 266.
Endean, R., 1957: Aust. J. mar. Freshw. Res., 8, pp. 233-273,
1965: Pap, Dep. Zool. Univ. Qd., 2, p. 230.
Fell, H. B., 1963: Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond. Ser B 246, pp, 381-435.
1966: Oceanogr. Mar. Biol, Ann. Rev., 4, 233-245.
Fisher, W. K., 1908a: Zool. Anz., Vol. 33, pp. 356-359,
———— 1908b: Smithsonian Misc. Coll., Vol. 52, p. 90.
1917: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser, 8, Vol. 20, p. 172.
1926: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. 18. p. 198.
1930: Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 76: 1-81.
——— 1941: Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 90, pp. 447-456, p. 170, Fig. 2.
Gray, W. E., 1840: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. 6, pp. 175-184, 275-290.
———— 1847: Proc. Zool. Soc. London Pt. 15. p. 79.
John, D, D., 1948: Novit. Zool., 42; pp. 485-508.
Knox, G. A., 1963: Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Ann. Rey. 1, pp. 341-404,
Lamarck, J. B, P., 1816: Anim, sans vert., Yol. 2, pp. 522-568.
Livingstone, A., 1932: Rec. Aust. Mus., Vol. 18, p. 375.
1934: Rec. Aust. Mus., Vol. 19, p. 177.
Miiller, J, and Troschel, F. H., 1840: Arch. f. Naturgesch, Vol. 6: 1: pp, 318-326.
1842: System der Asteriden, pp. 1-135,
1843: Arch. f. Naturgesch, Vol. 9: 1: pp. 113-120.
1844: Arch. f. Naturgesch, Vol. 10, p. 178.
Olsen, A. M., 1957: Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 8, pp. 392-409,
Perrier, E., 1875: Arch. Zool. exp., Vol. 4, p. 335,
1876: Arch. Zool. exp., Vol, 5, p. 4.
1894: Stell. “Travailleur’ et ‘Talisman’ p. 106.
Shepherd, S. A., 1967a: Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Vol. 16, p. 463.
1967b: Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., Vol. 91, p. 1.
Sladen, W. P., 1883: Jour. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), 17, pp. 214-269.
1889: Challenger Ast., Vol. 30, pp. 1-893.
Verrill, A. E., 1913: Amer. Journ. Sci., 35, pp. 477-485.
1914: Shallow water starfishes N, Pacific Coast, p. 363.
Wells. H. W., Wells, M. J., and Gray, I. E., 1961: Biol. Bull., 120: pp, 265-271.
Whitelegge, T., 1889: J. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 23: pp. 163-323.
Womersley, H. B. S. and Edmonds, 8. J., 1958: Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res., 9, pp. 217-260.

SOME CAVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA FROM AUSTRALIA
AND NEW CALEDONIA

BY M. BEIER

Summary

Eight species and subspecies of Australian and New Caledonian cavedwelling Pseudoscorpionidea
are treated and five of them are described as new: Austrochthonius cavicola (South Australia),
Morikawia troglophilia (New Caledonia), Pseudotyrannochthonius hamiltonsmithi (Victoria),
Protochelifer naracoortensis (South Australia), and Protochelifer cavernarum ssp. Aitkeni (West
Australia). Ideobisium antipodum (Sim.) from New Caledonia is redescribed.

SOME CAVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA FROM
AUSTRALIA AND NEW CALEDONIA

By M. BEIER*

SUMMARY

Eight species and subspecies of Australian and New Caledonian cave-
dwelling Pseudoscorpionidea are treated und five of them are described as
new: Austrochthonius cavicola (South Australia), Morikawia troglophila
(New Caledonia), Pseudoryrannochthonius hamiltonsmithi (Victoria),
Protochelifer naracoortensis (South Australia), and Protochelifer cavernarum
ssp. aitkeni (West Australia), IJdeobisium antipodum (Sim.) from New
Caledonia is redeseribed,

The paper is based on a small, but very interesting collection of cave-
dwelling species, made by E. Hamilton-Smith, P, Aitken, B, P, Moore,
G, Sinclair, and J, Davidson in several caves of Australia and New Caledonia.
Most of the species are new to science, because the cavernicolous fauna ot
Australia is poorly known at the present time. The holotypes of the new
species ure in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, the paratypes in the
Biospeological Collection of the same Museum and in the Museum of Natural
History, Vienna,

Sathrochthonius tuena Chamberlin, 1962

Two nymphs, Punchbowl Cave, Wee Jasper, N.S.Wales, 22.VI.1963,
B. P. Moore (BS0407), belong probably to this species, and many ¢ ¢
und ° %, Southern Limestone Cave, Jenolan, N.S.Wales species, ex Guano,
3.1X%.1967, B. Dew leg.

Austrochthonius cayicola, sp. nov.
Fig. |

Pale brownish yellow, chelicerae somewhat darker, Carapace as long
us broad suborally, smooth, but reticulate in the hind corners and along the
posterior border, with 18 bristles of approximately the same length, of which
6 are on the oral border and 2 on the posterior border; anterior border near
the epistome, and epistome itself very roughly dentate, the epistome broken
up almost entirely by these long and acute teeth. Eyes and eye-pigment
absolutely wanting. Abdominal tergites | to 4 each with 4, those following
with 6 bristles, Ultimate tergite with a pair of long tactile bristles, Palm
of chelicerae with 5 bristles. Fixed cheliceral finger with about 8 teeth,
movable one finely toothed, male without spinneret hump. Palpal femur
a little longer than carapace, smooth. Hand narrow, 1.8 times as long us

* Naturhistorisches Museum, Rurering 7, Wien 4, Austria,

758 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

broad, sharply granulate dorsally. Chela 5.2 times longer than broad.
Fingers 1.8 times longer than hand, straight, very densely toothed, the teeth
obliquely truncate terminally, Fixed finger with about 60 teeth. Teeth of
the movable finger smaller than those of the fixed one. Tactile seta sh
of the movable finger nearly twice as far from 6 as from st, which is also
twice as far from sb as from ft, Coxae of first pair of legs broadly rounded
orally and with two short bristles. Coxae of the second pair of legs with
4-5 finely dentate coxal spines, Intercoxal tubercle wanting. Genital
opening of the male with 7 marginal bristles on each side.

Body: length ¢ 1.2 mm.
Carapace: length and breadth 0,37 mm.

Pedipalps; length femur 0.40 mm.; length hand 0.24 mm.; breadth
hand 0.13 mm.; length fingers 0.44 mm,

Holotype—1I @, Cathedral Cave, Naracoorte, S. Australia, 1.0X.1962,
E, Hamilton-Smith, dep. S, Austral. Mus. N196828.

This new cavernicolous species differs from the related 4, australis Hoff
by the absence of eyes, the absence of the two short lateral bristles on the
posterior border of carapace, the shape of the epistome, the chaetotaxy of
4th tergal sclerite, the relatively slender chela and hand of pedipalps, more
teeth on the fixed palpal finger, and fewer coxal spines,

Morikawia troglophila, sp, nov.
Fig. 2

Chelicerae intensively reddish brown, carapace and abdominal tergites
olive-brown, pedipalps pale reddish yellowish-brown. Carapace scarcely
shorter than broad anteriorly, strongly narrowed caudally, and neck-shaped
constricted basally, smooth, but reticulate basally; with 16 long bristles and a
pair of small preocular bristles; two of the anterior border bristles stand at the
base of the epistome, the others before the eyes; two bristles on the posterior
border, Epistomal process big and broad, tongue-shaped, narrowed distally,
rounded terminally, and irregularly garnished with some fine prickles,
Anterior eyes small, with their lens vaulted, posterior eyes reduced to pale
spots, The two anterior abdominal tergites desclerotized, with the exception
of a narrow transverse clasp, and finely transversely reticulate, the others
smooth, Tergites I-4 with 4, those following with 6 bristles. Ultimate
tergite with 2 tactile bristles. Palm of chelicerae with 5 bristles and with
fine prickles medially, Fixed cheliceral finger with a big tooth subapically,
and with a row of small teeth proximally. Movable finger finely denticulate,
without spinneret hump, Palpal femur about as long as carapace, smooth,
with a row of 5 bristles medially, which gradually increase in length distally,

BEIBR—CAYVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA 759

and with a long bristle dorsodistally. Hand relatively stout, 1.6 times longer
than broad, with a single split-bristle mediodistally, which is comparatively
short and reaches only to $the length of the fingers. Chela 4,8 times longer
than broad. Fingers twice as long as hand. Fixed finger with 16 rather
short and broad triangular teeth, which are somewhat retroclinate, and
with similar, but much smaller intercalary teeth. Movable finger with 8
similar teeth in the distal half and also with small intercalary teeth, and with
a serrate or undulate lamina in the proximal half, Tactile setae in common
position, sb of the movable finger halfway between b and sr. Coxae of the
first pair of legs with a stout digitate process orally, which bears a small
bristle subapically. Coxae of the second pair of legs with a row of 6 broad
and flat coxal spines, which are fringed terminally. Coxae of third pair of
legs with 4, those of fourth pair with 3, discal bristles and with a longer
apical bristle. Intercoxal tubercle wanting,

Body: length @ 1.1 mm.

Carapace: length 0.37 mm., breadth anteriorly 0.40 mm., posteriorly
0.27 mm,

Pedipalps: length femur 0.37 mm.; length hand 0.21 mm,, breadth
hand 0,13 mm.; Jength fingers 0.42 mm.

Holotype—! ? Grotle de Ninrin-Reu, near Poya, New Caledonia,
26,.X11,1965, E. Hamilton-Smith, dep, S, Austral, Mus., N196829.

The new species, which is, probably only trogloxenous, is well
distinguished from M. zonata Beier from the same island by the smaller
body. by the big and broad epistome, which is terminally rounded and
garnished with some fine prickles, by the much shorter palpal hand, which
bears a single relatively short split-bristle mediodistally, by the much longer
fingers, and by the less numerous coxal spines,

Psendotyrannochthonitis hamiltonsmithi, sp, nov,
Fig. 3

Carapace and abdominal tergites olive-brown, chelicerae and pedipalps
pale reddish brown. Catapace a litthe broader than long, moderately
narrowed caudally, densely alveolarly reticulate everywhere, with 14 long
bristles and a pair of small and short preocular and mediolateral bristles
respectively, the anterior border with 4, the posterior border with 2 bristles,
Epistomal process prominent, broadly rounded, broader than long, thoroughly
und densely covered with short prickles. Both pairs of eyes with vaulted
lens. Abdominal tergites distinctly transversely reticulate. First tergite
with 2, second and third with 4, fourth with 4 long and 2 shori (lateral)
bristles, the following tergites with 6 bristles of equal length. Ultimate

760 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tergite without tactile bristles, Chaetotaxy of sternites irregularly, 9th and
10th sternite with 2 or 4 longer bristles, ultimate sternite with 2 bristles.
Palm of chelicerae with 8 bristles, of which are the both lateral bristles very
fine and short. Fixed cheliceral finger with 3 big teeth near the middle,
and finely denticulate proximally. Movable finger with about one dozen
denticles, the basal ones smaller, without spinneret hump, Palpal femur
about 1.4 times longer than carapace, finely reticulate. Hand reticulate,
1.7 times as long as broad, weakly swollen dorsally, Tactile setae ib and
ish situated dorsodistally, near the base of the fingers. Chela 5 times longer
than broad. Fingers 1,8 times longer than hand, the fixed with about 20
mostly long and narrow, well spaced and erected teeth, Movable finger
distally with 7-8 broadly triangular teeth, which are broader than long and
shortly spaced, than with a shallowly serrate lamina, Tactile setae sh, sf,
and + of movable finger far distad, spaced nearly equidistantly, sb about 3
times further from b than from ¢. Coxae of first pair of legs with median
corner boil-shaped, and with a row of 7-8 distally pennate coxal spines,
which arise orally from an oblique ridge. Bisetose intercoxal tubercle
present, Both tarsal joints of hind legs with a tactile bristle sub-basally.

Body; length ? 1.7-2 mm.
Carapace: length 0.51-0,52 mm., breadth 0.54-0.55 mm,

Pedipalps: length femur 0,74 mm.; length hand 0.38 mm., breadth
hand 0.22 mm,; length fingers 0.70 mm,

Holotype—l ° Mt, Widderin Cave, Skipton, Victoria, 16.XI.1964,
E, Hamilton-Smith, dep. §. Austral. Mus. N196830,

The new species is closely related to P. solitarius (Hoff) and P.
bornemisszai Beier, both from Victoria, but not cave-dwelling. It is easily
recognizable by the presence of 7-8 very broad distal teeth of the movable
palpal finger, P. hamiltonsmithi differs, moreover, from solitarius by the
size being twice as big, the long and finely prickled epistome, fewer teeth of
movable palpal finger. and more coxal spines, and from bornemisszai by
smaller size, by the dentation of the fixed cheliceral finger, relatively longer
pulpal fingers, more teeth of movable palpal finger, and by the chaetotaxy
of abdominal tergites 3 and 4,

Fig. l. Austrochthonius eavicola Sp. noy,, @, chela laterally,

Fig. 2, Morikawla traglophila sp. nov., , chela laterally, :

Fig, 3, Pseudotyrannuchthonius hamiltonsmithi sp. nov,, 9, chela laterally.
Fiz, 4. Ideobisiuin antipadum (Sim.), 2. lett pedipalp,

Fig. 5. Prerochelifer naracoortensis sp. nov., & and P. left pedipalp,
Fig. 6, Protechelifer cavernarum aitkeni ssp, nov., 2) right pedipalp.

BEIER—CAVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA 761

Tee RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ideobisium antipodum (Simon)
Fig. 4
Obisium antipodum Simon, 1880, Ann, Soc. ent. Belgique 23 CR: 174.
Ideohisium antipodum, Beier, 1932, Das Tierreich 57: 160.

One 2, Grotte de Ninrin-Reu, near Poya, New Caledonia, 28. XI1,1965,
EB, Hamilton-Smith (BS1310),

The single male specimen before me belongs certainly to this species
described more than 80 years ago and since never recorded. The original
description can be completed as follows:

Relatively big, Carapace and pedipalps intensively reddish brown,
abdomen pale reddish yellowish-brown, Carapuce a little Jonger than broad,
smooth; its integument with an irregular and broad transverse zone of
windows near the middle, a transverse row of small windows between the
latter and the posterior border, which ends on both sides with a big window,
and with a double longitudinal row of windows in the prozona; disc with 18
bristles, of which 4 are on the anterior and posterior border respectively;
anterior border with a broad ridge roundly projecting orally. Eyes very
close together, the anterior ones shallowly vaulted and about 14 diameters
distant from the anterior border, the posicrior ones flat, but scarcely smaller,
Abdominal tergites 1-4 and 10-L1 each with 6, the others with 8 bristles.
Ultimate tergite with tactile bristles laterally. Palin of chelicerae with 5
bristles, ES short. Fixed cheliceral finger finely and sharply denticulate,
movable finger with 7 big teeth distally and 2 small denticles proximally,
Galea long and slender, simple, slightly curved. Galeal bristle reaches the
tip of the galea, Pedipalps robust, absolutely smooth. Femur very shortly
and abruptly pedicellate, 3 times longer than broad, thickened laterobasally,
Tibia 2.2 times longer than broad, with the pedicel slender and rather long
and the club strongly swollen, Hand 1,6 times, chela with pedicel 2.9 times,
without pedicel 2.7 times longer than broad, Fingers as long as hand
without pedicel. Distribution of tactile setae as typical for the genus. Sub-
terminal bristle of tarsi with a very fine denticle subapically.

Body: length ¢ 2 mm.
Carapace; length 0,56 mm,, breadth 0,51 mm,

Pedipalps: length femur 0,58 mm,, breadth femur 0.19 mm,; length
tibia 0.55 mm., breadth tibia 0,25 mm.; length hand 0,55, breadth band
0.34 mm.; length fingers 0.48 mm,

The species is distinguishable from /, peregrinum Chamberlin from
New Zealand by the chaetotaxy of carapace, the better developed and
contiguous eyes, stouter palpal joints, longer stalked tibia, longer fingers, and

BEIER—CAVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA TAS

almost simple subterminal bristle of tarsi, It differs from / pugil Beier from
the Solomon Islands by the much bigger size, the smooth palpal femur, and
the longer fingers.

Protochelifer naracoortensis sp. nov,
Fig. 5

Carapace, pedipalps, and legs rather pale reddish-brown, abdominal
tergites brownish. Integument very densely and uniformly granulate. Vesti-
tural bristles relatively long in general, the dorsal bristles of body and the
medial bristles of palpal trochanter and femur distinctly clavate, the others
finely dentate apically. Carapace distinctly (nearly 1,3 times in the male)
longer than broad, very densely granulate, without bigger granules, with the
bristles clavate and dentate, rather short, but the anterior and posterior
border bristles longer: both transverse furrows rather deep, the anterior one
sharply incised, the sub-basal one more than twice as far from the anterior
furrow as from the posterior border; the latter with 13-15 bristles; postertor
corners not angulate in the male, Eyes well developed. Abdominal
tergites densely transversely granulate, all divided in the female, the first
undivided jn the male, but without spines, Half tergites mostly with 9
posterior border bristles, the third (2) or fourth (2) and those following
with an additional lateral border bristle. Ultimate tergite with about 10
marginal bristles, 2 discal bristles, and 2 rather short tactile bristles discally
near the middle of each half tergite, The vestitural bristles distinctly clavate
and gradually longer on the posterior segments. Sternal bristles acute, but
dentate or slightly clavate on the posterior segments, Ultimate sternite with
2 short tactile bristles discally, Palm of chelicerae regularly with 5 acute
bristles (occasionally with a supernumary bristle), ES very long, longer than
B or SB. Galea almost simple in the mule, with 5 acute apical branches in
the temale. Pedipalps very slender, densely and rather coarsely granulate,
with numerous rather Jong bristles, which are distinctly clavate on the inedial
side of trochanter and femur, but dentate only elsewhere, Trochanteral humps
round. Femur weakly pedicellate, gradually clavate distally, in the male
6-6.2 times, in the female 5.7-5,8 times longer than broad. Tibia also
gradually clavate behind the short pedicel, broadest distally, 4,4-4.6 times
longer than broad. Hand narrowly ovate, especially in the male, 2.2 times
(9 )—2.6 times (2), the whole chela with pedicel 4.3 times ( ¢)—S5.|
times (2), without pedicel 4 times (% )—4.8 times (¢) longer than
broad. Fingers as long as hand with pedicel or (2) scarcely shorter,
Disposition of tactile setae typically for the genus, ist, therefore. almost
Opposite est near the middle of the fixed finger, it far distally, st of the
movable finger approaching ¢, Hind coxae of male densely setose medially,
without coxal sacks, but with a pore, which bears a short membranaccous

764 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tube, Ramshorn organs scarcely developed. Legs very slender, hind femur
but slightly broadened proximally. Hind tarsi without tactile bristle. Sub-
terminal bristle and claws simple.

Body: length 3 2.7 mm., ? 3.3-3.4 mm.

Carapace: length male 0.95 mm., female 0.98 mm., breadth male
0.75 mm., female 0.85 mm.

Pedipalps: length femur male and female 1.20 mm,, breadth femur
male 0.20 mm., female 0.21 mm.; length tibia male 1.06 mm., female
1.1] mm., breadth tibia male 0.23 mm., female 0.25 mm.; length hand
male 0.85 mm., female 0,89 mm., breadth hand male 0.33 mm,, female
0.40 mm.; length fingers male and female 0.85 mm.

Holo- and allotype: 1 ¢@, 1 2%, Bat Cave, Naracoorte, S. Australia,
16.V1.1962, E. Hamilton-Smith, dep. S. Austral. Mus., N196831 and 32,

Paratypes: 12 ¢,5 %, 6 nymphs, Bat Cave, Naracoorte, 5.X1.1961,
16,0, 1L6.VIL., and 9.1X.1962. E. Hamilton-Smith (BSOO31, BSOO32,
BSOO33, BSOO34, BSOO35, BSO197); 2 @, 2 nymphs, Bat Cave,
Naracoorte, 5.VIII.1962, P. Aitken (BSO246).

The new species is closely related to P. cavernarum Beier from
N.S.Wales, Victoria, and W, Australia and agrees with it in the clavate
tergal bristles, It differs, however, from the latter in the relatively longer
carapace, which does not bear larger granules, in the somewhat less slender
pedipalps, and in the much longer, thicker, and stronger clavate medial
vestitural bristles of pedipalps.

Protochelifer cavernarum Beier

2 4, Cliefden Caves, N.S.Wales, 27.1.1963, J. Davidson (BSO240);
24, 3 2%, 3 nymphs, Ashford Cave, N.S.Wales, 1963 and 8.11.1964,
K. Angel and E. Hamilton-Smith (BSO509 and BSO505); | «6, 2 nymphs,
Clogg’s Cave, East Buchan, Victoria, 24.X1.1962 and 13,1V,1963,
E. Hamiton-Smith and G. Sinclair (BSO167 and BSO318); | 4, 39,
13. nymphs, Gooseberry Cave, Jurien Bay, W. Australia, 11,1.1965,
E. Hamilton-Smith (BSO878).

This species was hitherto only known from N.S.Wales,

Protochelifer cavyernarum ssp, aitkeni nov.
Fig. 6
Carapace and pedipalps pale reddish brown, abdominal tergites
yellowish brown. Carapace and pedipalps, the hand inclusively, very
densely granulate, abdominal tergites finer squamosely sculpturate. Vesti-
tural bristles short and relatively sparse, the dorsal bristles of the body

BEIER—CAVE-DWELLING PSEUDOSCORPIONIDEA 765

dentate and slightly clavate, the medial bristles of pedipalps blunt and with
a subapical denticle, the lateral bristles of pedipalps shorter, very thin, and
acute. Carapace 1.2 times (¢) to 1.3 times (2) as long as broad basally,
slightly narrowed orally; the submedian transverse furrow sharply incised
and deep, the subbasal one shallower, granulate, and more than twice as far
from the anterior furrow as from the posterior border; hind corners simple
in the male, Eyes with lens flatly vaulted. All abdominal tergites divided.
Half tergites of the two anterior segments each with 6 marginal bristles, the
others mostly with 5 posterior border bristles and 1 lateral border bristle,
without median border or discal bristles. Half tergites of ultimate segment
with 4 marginal bristles, of which the second one from the median line a
moderately long tactile bristle. Ultimate sternite with short tactile bristles
in the same position. The other sternites mostly with 6 acute posterior
border bristles. Palm of chelicerae with 5 acute bristles, ES longer than B
or SB. Galea with 3 terminal and 1 subapical branches. Galeal bristle
reaches almost to the end of the galea. Pedipalps very slender. Trochan-
teral humps flatly rounded, Femur indistinctly pedicellate, gradually
broadened to the end, broadest distally, 6.2-7 times, tibia 5-5.4 times, hand
2.7-2.8 times, chela with pedicel 5.3-5.7 times, without pedicel 5-5.4 times
longer than broad. Fingers as long as hand with pedicel or but a little
longer. Disposition of tactile setae as in the nominate form. Tibia of fore
legs straight.

Body: length ¢ 2.5-3 mm.
Carapace: length 0.98-1 mm., breadth 0.75-0.85 mm.

Pedipalps: femur length 1.18-1.22 mm., breadth 0,18-0,19 mm,, tibia
length 1,12-1.13 mm., breadth 0.21-0,.22 mm.; hand length 0,88-0.91 mm.,
breadth 0.31-0.33 mm.,,; fingers length 0.89-0.95 mm.

Holotype: 1 ¢, Abrakurrie Cave, Nullarbor Plain, W. Australia,
13.1.1964, P. Aitken, dep, S, Austral. Mus., N196838.

Paratypes: 2 °, | Tritonymph from the same locality.

Differs from cavernarum gs. str. in the smaller size, less numerous tergal
bristles, the flat trochanteral humps, and the straight tibiae of the fore legs.

CATALOGUE OF METEORITES IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM
(EXCLUDING TEKTITES)

BY DAVID W. P. CORBETT

Summary

The South Australian Museum house the largest collection of meteorites in the State — 90 separate
finds and falls are represented, including 26 main masses. No catalogue of the collection has
previously been published. The only other importanrt collection in South Australia is held by the
Museum of the Geology Department of the University of Adelaide. A third extensive collection,
formerly in the private museum at Kyancutta on Eyre Peninsula, is now in the Australian National
University, Canberra.

CATALOGUE OF METEORITES IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN
MUSEUM

(Excluding Tektites)

By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, Hon. AssociATE IN MINERALOGY,
SouTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

The South Australian Museum houses the largest collection of
meteorites in the State—90 separate finds and falls are represented, including
26 main masses. No catalogue of the collection has previously been
published. The only other important collection in South Australia is held
by the Museum of the Geology Department of the University of Adelaide.

FIG. 1.
A section of the meteorite display at the South Australian Museum.

76K RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

A third extensive collection, formerly in the private museum at Kyancutta
on Eyre Peninsula, is now in the Australian National University, Canberra.

The first meteorite recorded at the Museum was a polished slice of the
Barratta (N.S.W.) aerolite, acquired by exchange in 1852, The second
acquisition was the Yardea iron, found in 1875 by James Martlew. This
was the first meteorite found in South Australia. Further discoveries
followed—the Rhine Villa iron in 1900 and the Murnpeowie iron in 1909.
The main mass of the Rhine Villa was sent to Germany, but the Museum
obtained a small slice, The Murnpeowie (the State's largest meteorite)
was transferred to the Museum in 1963 from the South Australian School
of Mines, where it had been on display for many years,

In 1908 Douglas Mawson (later Sir Douglas Mawson), Professor of
Geology and Mineralogy at the University of Adelaide, began his long
association with the Museum as Honorary Curator of Minerals, and the
steady growth of the meteorite collection was in large measure due to his
efforts. By 1914 the nucleus of the collection had been formed with the
addition of the Arltunga iron (1908) and three stones, the Cadell (1910),
Kulnine (1911) and the Carraweena (1914), Over a period of nearly 50
years he was successful in acquiring for the Museum almost all new
meteorite discoveries within the State.

Probably the most significant additions were made following discoyeries
during the 1930's—a very active period in meteorite research in South
Australia. The fall of the Karoonda meteorite in Novernber, 1930, aroused
widespread general interest as well as adding a chondrite of unique character
to the State collection, As a direct result of the publicity over the Karoonda
fall, the Museum commissioned A. R. Alderman (who later succeeded
Mawson as Professor of Geology and Mineralogy at the University) to
investigate a report of crater-like depressions at Henbury in the Northern
Territory. Alderman’s discovery of the Henbury Craters and associated
iron masses created world-wide interest, and the results of his survey made
an important contribution to the theory of crater formation,

Dr, C, T. Madigan, during one of his many expeditions to Central
Australia, discovered the Boxhole Crater in 1937, and collected meteoritic
iron from the area. A few weeks later he found the Huckitta stony-iron
meteorite only 40 miles to the north-east of Boxhole. It is the largest
pallasite so far discovered,

In 1953 Dr. W, Cassidy, of the University of New Mexico, came to
South Australia as a Fulbright Scholar, and during a two-year association
with the Museum, studied our meteorite and tektite collections and
organized a meteorite display in the public gallery. Together with
G. F. Gross of the Museum staff, he made an extensive field trip to the

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 769

Wolf Creek Crater in Western Australia and brought back over 1,000 Ib.
weight of iron shale balls. He also visited the Boxhole and Henbury
craters, and collected impactites from the latter. Under Cassidy’s direction,
a large saw for cutting meteorites was designed and constructed by
Mr. A, Rau of the Preparatorial Staff in 1954, and has proved of great
value in slicing the larger meteorites.

Before leaving the Museum, Cassidy compiled information on all
meteorites then in the collection with a view to publication. This work was
continued by Dr. Brian Daily while Curator of Fossils and Minerals. The
present author is greatly indebted to these two workers for much of the
information in this catalogue.

The Museum has been fortunate in that many of its acquisitions,
particularly in recent years, have been presented by the finders with no
thought of financial gain, Quite outstanding amongst meteorite collectors
is J. BE, Johnson of the Geological Survey of South Australia, During many
years of outback prospecting he has picked up five meteorites in widely
separated parts of the State, All have been donated to State collections.
The discoveries of Mrs. B. McDonald of Murray Bridge demonstrate the
value of the keen amateur collector with an eye for the unusual, Within
the space of a few months she found five separate stones—representing two
distinct falls—in remote sand-dune country in the south-east of the State.
The latest acquisition (at the time of writing) is a stone from Ki Ki in the
Upper South-East, found in January, 1967, by R. Goodall, and presented
by him to the Museum. This meteorite has proved to be part of the
Coomandook fall first discovered in 1939.

CATALOGUE

Australian meteorites represented in the collection are listed alpha-
betically according to States. For each meteorite the name, with synonyms,
is given, together with co-ordinates, staling where these are approximate
only. The classification of the meteorite is followed by particulars of the
find, including geographical location, the total weight and details of
material housed in the collection. Published references are listed for all
South Australian meteorites, and also where the main mass of an interstate
find is held by the S.A, Museum. Foreign meteorites are dealt with less
fully, and no details of occurrences are given,

Tn several instances it has been found that published co-ordinates for
certain South Australian meteorites do not agree with the given geographical
location, In these cases it has been assumed that the location is correct
and the co-ordinates have been recalculated. The corrected co-ordinates
are given together with those appearing in the 3rd Edition of Hey’s
Catalogue of Meteorites, 1966,

770 RECORDS. OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Where weights were originally recorded in British units, these are
given together with a conversion to the metric scale, All new weights are
recorded in metric units only.

A considerable amount of unpublished data is incorporated in this
catalogue (see acknowledgments) .

Classification

The classification used in this catalogue follows that of Hey in the
3rd Edition of the “Catalogue of Meteorites”, 1966, British Museum,
London, with certain minor modifications,

Irons (Siderites )
Nickel-rich ataxites
Octahedrites (fine, medium and

coarse )
Hexahedrites
Metabolites

Stony-irons (Siderolites )
Pallasites
Siderophyres*
Lodranites*
Mesosiderites

Stones (Aerolites )
Enstatite chondrites
Olivine-bronzite chondrites
Olivine-hypersthene chondrites
Olivine-pigeonite chondrites
Carbonaceous chondrites*
Enstatite achondrites*
Hypersthene achondrites
Olivine achondrites*
Olivine-pigeonite achondrites*
Diopside-olivine achondrites*
Augite achondrites*
Pyroxene-plagioclase achondrites

* Not represented in the S.A.M. collection.

The South Australian Museum holds the following main masses:—

South Australia

Accalana
Cadell
Carraweena
Cocunda
Coomandook
Coonana
Crockers Well
Karoonda
Kaldoonera Hill
Lake Bonney
Murnpeowie
Nora Creina
Vincent
Wilbia
Yardea

Northern Territory
Alikatnima
Arltunga
Boxhole
Huckitta
Mt. Sir Charles

Other States
Cartoonkana (N.S.W.)
Yandama (N.S.W.)
Dimboola (Vic.)
Kulnine (Vic. )

Lake Grace (W.A.)
Wingellina (W.A.)

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 771

South Australian Meteorites
At the time of writing 30 meteorites have been recorded from South
Australia. They may be grouped as follows:—

Finds Falls Total

TROfi ica eS pmet TAS da ed 7 — 7
Stony-iron . 2... 2. oe ] — 1
Stone pe nee, 46 aut 2 1 22

TOfal np us ee ee te BY 1 30

This table includes the Forrest Lakes chondrite, which would seem to
be a South Australian find (McCall and de Laeter, 1965). Accalana and
Carraweena are considered a paired fall, but are tabled as separate finds
(Mason and Wiik, 1966). The Glen Osborne Meteorite has been discredited
by Alderman (1936) and is not included.

The main masses of 15 of these 30 meteorites are held by the S.A.
Museum (See List p. 770). Other main masses are distributed as follows:—

University of Adelaide, Geology Department Museum—
Artracoona, Cowell, Kielpa*, Moorumbunna, Pinnaroo
and Mitchelling? on. ws ere ne 4g ee emg bd 6

Australian National University, Canberra—
Kyancutta and Lake Labyrinth .. .. .. 6. eee 2

South Australian Geological Survey—
Monte Colina 40 ee le Uletgs ¢ptea ver thee ae 1

National Museum of Victoria—
Caroling 293i. Sica eb ae esa cw SE es a8 1

Australian Museum, Sydney—
Weekerog® cia ae 4g Red et a aes Ee aes 1

Government Chemical Laboratories, Perth—

Forrest Lakes™) os. ae ca et Ri oa ae a OS ab 1
Unknown—Rhine Villa, Kingoonya and Kappakoola* . .. 3
15

* Not represented in the §.A.M. Collection

772 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN METEORITES

ACCALANA 29° 15'S, 139° 59°F
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite,
Found prior to 1917. Purchased from C. Schunke in 1925,
Total Weight: 6b. 80z. (2.94 kg.). One mass.
S.A.M, Collection: Main mass
G5665 Sib. 80z. (2.50 kg.).

Remarks; Accalana is now considered to be part of the same fall as Carraweena.
References:

Spencer, L. J., 1935, Min, Mag., 24 (148), p. 14.

Spencer, L. J., 1936. Min. Mag., 24 (154), p. 361.

Alderman, A. R., 1936. Rec. S. Aust, Mus.. 5, p. 537.

Mason, B., and Wiik, H. B., 1966. Am. Mus. Novit. 2273.

ARTRACOONA 29° 04’ S, 140° 00’ E

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite,

Found 1914, by G. Amesbury, on the Carraweena run 8 miles north-west of the old
Carraweena Head Station. and 6 miles west of Artracoona Hill.

Total Weight: 45 |b. l4oz. (20.81 kg.). One mass. Main mass in the University of Adelaide
Collection,

S.A.M. Collection: G7940 502 gm,

Reference:
Kleeman, A. W., 1936. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., 60, p. 73.

CADELL 34° 04'S, 139° 45° E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1910, by C. H. Bannear, 3 miles from Morgan, Hundred of Cadell, South Australia,
on the east side of the Murray River. Presented to the S.A, Museum by C. H. Bannear,.

Total Weight: 7b. 407. (3.2 kg.). One mass,
5.A.M. Collection: Main mass

G5666A Sib. (2.27 kg.).

GS666B 1 1b, 240%. (538 gm.).
References:

Anderson, C., 1913. Rec. Aust. Mus., 10, p. 57.
Alderman, A. R., 1936. Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 5, p. 537.

CAROLINE 38° 00'S. 140° 55°E
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Found before 1941, by S. McEachern, on a native camp-site about 7 miles south of Caroline
near the Glenelg River, South Australia.

Total Weight: 800 gm. One mass. Main mass in National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne.
S,A.M. Collection: G7715 33.5 gm.
Remarks: Stone highly weathered,

Reference:
Stillwell, F. L., 1941. Mem, Nat. Mus. Vict., 12, p. 41.

CARRAWEENA 29° 10'S, 140° 00’ E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1914, by G. Amesbury, about 6 miles south-west of old Carraweena Station, north-
east of South Australia.
Total Weight: 63 lb, 8oz. (28.8 kg.). One, almost complete, stone.
S.A.M, Collection: Main mass
G5691 48 lb, (21.77 kg.).
G5691A 3 1b. 4oz. (1.47 kg.).
G5691C_ 10402, (297 gm.).
G5691B 72 gm,

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 773

Remarks: Carraweena is now considered to be part of the same fall as Accalana.
References:

Alderman, A, R., 1936. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, p. 537.

Mason, B., and Wiik, H. B., 1966. Am. Mus. Novit. 2273.

COCUNDA 32° 49'S, 134° 48° E

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1945, by B. Polomka, three-quarters of a mile west of Cocunda Rocks, Eyre Peninsula,
South Australia. Presented to the S.A. Museum by B. Polomka in 1946.

Total Weight: 1b. loz. (482 gm.). One mass.

S.A.M. Collection: Main Mass
G5988 1407. (396.9 gm.).

COOMANDOOK Fig. 2B 35° 25'S, 139° 45° E
Recalculated 35° 29'S, 139° 50° E

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite,

Found 1939, by G. Ninnis, 8 miles due east of Coomandook, Section 21, Hundred of Roby.
Presented to the S.A. Museum by G. Ninnes in 1940. A second stone, of 10 |b, weight,
was found on a cleared paddock, 43 miles north-east of Ki Ki in January, 1967 by
R. Goodall, and also presented to the S.A. Museum.

Total Weight: 11\b. 840z. (5.23 kg.). Two masses.

S,A.M, Collection: Main Mass

G5996B lb. 3402. (4.18 kg.).
G5996A) 2 Ib, (907.2 gm.).

Remarks: The two masses were both found on the surface when clearing stones. The sile
of the 1967 find is less than 10 miles from the original discovery. The stones are similar
in external appearance and mineralogical composition (B, Mason, pers, com,).

COONANA 29° 20'S, 140° 45° E
Recalculated 29° 51'S, 140° 45° E

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite,

Found 1962 by J, Rattus in sand dunes 3+ miles west of Coonana bore, north-eastern South

Australia,
Total Weight: 15 \b, (6.80kg.). One shattered mass, One-fifth of the stone was not collected.
S.A.M,_ Collection: Main Mass

GT417A Yb, Doz. (4.36 kg.).
G7417B 1So0z. (425.2 gm.).
G7417C 154.5 gm.
Remarks: Oxidized condition of stone suggests a fall of some antiquity,

COWELL 33° 20'S, 130° 03'E

Iron, medium octahedrite.
Found 1955, 30 miles north-west of Cleve, Eyre Peninsula. Main mass in University of
Adelaide Collection,

Total Weight: 5.72 kg.
S.A.M. Collection: G7944 128 gm. Slice in plastic,

CROCKER’S WELL 32° 01'S, 139° 47° E
Stone, chondrite (unclassified ),

Found 1956, by J. BE. Johnson, on a granite hill one-quarter of a mile north of East Crocker
uranium prospect. Presented by J. E. Johnson, 1956.
Total Weight; 3.8 gm. Only one fragment found.
§,A.M. Collection: Main Mass
G5909 3.8 gm.

G

774 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

KALDOONERA HILL 32° 30'S, 134° 57° RB

Stone, olivine bronzite chondrite. ;

Found prior to 1956, on the property of Mr. Voumard near Kaldoonera Hill, Fyre
Peninsula, South Australia. Acquired by the S.A, Museum from Mr, Beck, Poochera,
South Australia.

Total Weight: 16 1b. 8oz, (7.49 kg.). Two masses,

S.A.M. Collection: Main mass

GS910A 10lb. (4.54 kg).
GS9IUB 41b, lioz. (1.86 kg.).

Remarks: The finder reports that the plough occasionally strikes rock, whieh could indicate
furiher meteorite pivees, as there is no solid rock in the area other than the surface
travertine limestone (kunkar).

KAROONDA Fig. 3B 35° 07'S, 139° 53° EB
Recalculated 35° 06°S, 139° 56’ E

Stone, olivine-pigeonite chondrite.
Fell 1930, at 10.53 p.m, on 25 November. Found in sandy, fallowed wheat field, 2} miles
east of Karoonda, South Australia, Material presented to the S.A, Museum by Professor
Kerr Grant. The fall was preceded by a brilliant fireball seen over a radius of 250

miles.
Total Weizht: 92\b. (41.73 kg.). Numerous fragments. Mass shattered on impact.
S.4.M, Collection: Main mass

G5674A 7 Ib, 1202. (3.51 kg.).
G5674B 41b, 7oz. (2.00 kg-).
Plus fragments of under 1 1b. weight. Total weight 879 gm.
Remarks: Karoonda is unusual in containing no metallic phase, suggesting links with the
carbonaceous chondrites. It does not contain carbon or organic compounds. The
principal sulphide phase is pentlandite,
References;
Grant, K., and Dodwell, G. F., 1931. Nature, 127, pp. 402-403 and 631.
Mawson, D., 1934. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.. 58 p. 1.
Wahl, W., 1950. Geochim. et Cosmochin. Acta 1, p. 28.
Mason, B., and Wiik, H. B,, 1962. Am. Mus, Novil.. 2115,

KINGOONYA (Synonym—Kingooya) 30° 57'S, 135° 20°E

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1927, near 204-mile peg. on Transcontinental Railway, Nullarbor Plain. South
Australia, Co-ordinates place it 4 miles south-east of Kingoonya.

Total Weight: About 61b. (2.7 kg.). Location of main miass unknown,

§.4.M. Collection: G6074 87 gm.

Remarks: The stone was broken into three pieces by the finders and sent to S. F.C, Cook
in Kalgoorlie, Western Australia, The S.A, Museum specimen was acquired as part of
the Cook Collection of Minerals in 1945. Formerly believed to be identical with Lake
Labyrinth, Now shown to be a separate fall by B. Mason (pers. com.).

Reference:

Spencer, L. J., 1936. Min. Mag. 24 (154). p. 361.

KYANCUTTA 33° 10°S, 135° 25’ E
Recalculated 33° 17'S, 136° 00° E
Iron, medium octahedrite.
Found 1932, by L, G, Gardiner, in a sandy paddock 28 miles east-south-east of Kyancutta.
Total Weight: 72 Ib. (32.6 kg.). One mass. Main mass in Australian National University,
Canberra.

FIG. 2.
A, Left: The main mass of the Nora Creina meteorite. Right: The main mass of the
Lake Bonney meteorite.

B. The two stones of the Coomandook find. The original (1939) discovery is shown
on the left and the 1967 find on the right.

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE

2.5 inches

inches

775

776 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

S.A.M. Collection: G5682 1 1b. i4oz. (850.5 gm.).

Reference:
Spencer, L, J., 1933. Min. Mag. 23 (140), p, 329,

LAKE BONNEY (Fig. 2A (part)) 37° 45'S, 140° 18’ E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1961, by Mrs. B. G. McDonald, near Jacky Point, Lake Bonney, south-cast of South

Australia. A total of four masses were found in 1961 and 1962 by Mrs. McDonald.
The main mass and two other stones were presented to the S.A. Museum by the finder

in 1962,
Total Weight: 2.75 kg., in four masses.
S.A.M, Collection: Main mass

G7345 1.96 kg.
G7346 517 gm.
G7347 56.70 gm.
Remarks: A stony meteorite found 42 miles to the north-west of Jacky Point in 1962 was
included in the Lake Bonney group, but is a separate fall. (See Nora Creina.)

References:
Corbett, D. W. P., 1964. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 14 (4), p. 695.
Corbett, D. W. P., 1967. Min. Mag. 36 (278), p. 293.

LAKE LABYRINTH 30° 20’ S, 134° 45’ B
Recalculated 30° 32’S, 134° 45'°E
Stone. olivine hypersthene chondrite,
Found 1924, by Billy Austin, a fortnight after the probable fall, 8 miles north of Peela Well,
Wilgena Station, South Australia. (16 miles N.N.F. of Tarcoola.) Collected by
R. Bedford, 1934.

Total Weight: About 57 lb. (25.85 kg.). Main mass in Australian National University,
Canberra.

S.A.M. Collection: G5681 3b, Stoz. (1.5 kg.),
Reference:
Spencer, L. J., 1936. Min. Mag. 24 (154), p. 353.

MONTE COLINA 29° 24'S, 139° 59'E approx.
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite,

No details of the discovery are known. The iain miss is in the collection of the South
Australian Department of Mines, Adelaide.

Total Weight: 116.8 gm.

S.A.M. Collection: G7941 10 gm,

Remarks: Probably same fall as Accalana and Carraweena.

Reference:
Mason, B., and Wiik, H. B., 1966. Am, Mus. Novit. 2273.

MOORUMBUNNA 28° 55’S, 136° 14°E
Iron, medium octahedrite,
Found 1943, 74 miles due west of William Creek Railway Station, South Australia.
Presented to the University of Adelaide by G. K. G. Warren.
Total Weight: 169 |b. 140z. (77 kg.). Main mass in the University of Adelaide Collection.
S.A.M. Collection: G7942 584 gm. Slice,
Reference:
Edwards, A. B., 1946. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust., 70 (2), p, 348.

FIG. 3.
A. The Murnpeowie siderite.
B. The main mass of the Karoonda meteorite.

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE TTT

778 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

MURNPEOWIE Fig. 3A 29° 35'S, 139° 54'E
Iron, metabolite.
Found 1909, about 16 miles north-east by east of Mount Hopeless, South Australia.

Presented to the S.A. School of Mines (now Institute of Technology), On permanent
loan to the S.A. Museum,

Total Weight: Slightly over 2,520 Ib, (1,143.1 kg.). One mass. A small portion has been
cut off.
§.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G7956 2,520 Ib, (1,143.1 kg.).
Remarks: Probably fell between 1905 and 1909—was in very fresh condition when found.
References:
Smith, L. L., 1910. Am. J. Sci. 30, p. 264.
Spencer, L. J., 1935. Min. Mag. 24 (148), p. 13.

NORA CREINA (Fie. 2A (part)) 37° 19S, 139° 51'E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1962, by Mrs. B. G. McDonald of Millicent, at Nora Creina Bay, 12 miles south-

south-east of Robe, South-East of South Australia, Presented to the S.A. Museum by
Mrs. McDonald.

Total Weight; 283.5 gm. One mass.
S.4.M. Collection: Main mass
G7579 283.5 gm.
Remarks: Originally described as a member of the Lake Bonney fall, but subsequent work
on the pyroxenes (B. Mason, pers. com.) shows it to be a separate fall.
References:
Corbett, D. W. P.. 1964. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 14 (4), p. 695.
Corbett, D. W. P., 1967. Min. Mag., 36 (278), p. 293.
Mason, B., 1967. Geochim. et Cosmochim, Acta, 31, p. 1100.

PINNAROO 35° 17'S, 140° 55'E

Recalculated 39° 19°S, 141° 04° E
Stony-iron, mesosiderile.

Found 1927, by Mr. S. Hamilton about 9 miles south-south-east of Pinnaroo,
Total Weight: 39.4 kg. Main mass in the University of Adelaide Collection.
S.A.M. Collection: G7943 61 gm.
Reference:

Alderman, A. R., 1940. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust., 64, p. 109,

RHINE VILLA 34° 20'S, 139° 10° E
Tron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1900, by H. W. Payne, at Rhine Villa (now Cambrai), about 50 miles north-east
of Adelaide,

Total Weight: 3.325 kg. Main mass sent to Germany.
S.A.M. Collection: G5672B 30z. (85 gm.).
References:
Goyder, G. A., 1901, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.. 25, p. 14.
S.A. School of Mines and Industries, Annual Report, 1900, p, 227.

VINCENT 35° 07’ S, 139° 53° E
Stone. olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1926, approximately 6 miles N.N.E. of Karoonda, Section 34. Hundred of Vincent,
South Australia, Presented by Mr. E. A. P. Hoff in 1956.
Total Weight: \5oz. (425.2 gm.). One mass.
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
GS5908 I1toz. (318 gm.,).

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 779

WILBIA 26° 27'S, 131° 00'E
Chondrite, unclassified.

Found May, 1965, by J. E. Johnson, on a sand dune at the east end of Wilbia Hill,
Musgrave Ranges, South Australia,
Total Weight: 94 gm, One mass.
S.A.M, Collection: Main mass
G7902 94 gm.

YARDEA 32° 25’ S, 135° 30'E
Recalculated 32° 27'S, 135° 33’E
lron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1875, by J. Martlew, 4 miles south of Yardea Station, Gawler Ranges, South

Australia.
Total Weight: 7\b, 4o0z. (3.29 kg.).
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass

G5673 6 lb. 40z. (2.83 kg.).

Remarks; Originally slightly heavier, but a small piece was broken off prior to its arrival
at the Museum.

References:
Cloud, T. C., 1883. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., 6, p. 82.
Anderson, C,, 1913, Rec. Aust. Mus., 10, p. 66.

NORTHERN TERRITORY METEORITES

ALIKATNIMA 23° 20'S, 134° 07'E
Iron, nickel-rich ataxite.

Found 1931, about 45 miles north-north-east of Alice Springs, Northern Territory. Acquired
by the S.A. Museum from B. Webb, Alice Springs.
Total Weight: Over 35 lb. (15.87 kg.). Believed to have been one mass originally,
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G5683A 20 1b. (9.07 kg.).
G5683B 12 lb, 1202. (5.78 kg.). Originally 15 Ib.
G5683C 145 gm. Slice.
Reference:
Alderman, A, R., 1936, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, p, 537.

ARLTUNGA 23° 20'S, 134° 40’ E
Iron, metabolite.

Found 1908, 2 miles north of the Government Cvanide Works, Arltunga goldfields, Northern
Territory. Found by D, Pedler. Purchased by S.A, Museum from J. Woodford, 1908.
Total Weight: 40 1b. (18.14 kg.).

3.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G5692A 28 Ib. (12.70 kg.).
G5692C 12402. (354.4 gm.). Slice.
G5692D 474 gm.

Remarks: A recent fall when discovered. Had ploughed a groove about 5ft. deep in soft
ground,
References:
Smith, L. L., 1910. Am. J. Sci. 30, p. 264,
Anderson, C., 1913. Rec. Aust. Mus., 10, p. 54.
Mawson, D., 1934. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust,, 58, p. 1.
Edwards, A. B., 1943, Rec. Aust. Mus., 21, p. 154

780 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BOXHOLE 22° 37'S, 135° 12° E

Iron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1937, associated with crater and shale-balls, three-quarters of a mile north of Boxhole
Station, Plenty River, Northern Territory, 120 miles north-east of Alice Springs.

Total Weight: Unknown. It is believed that the 368 Jb. iron in the S.A. Museum is the
largest single mass of Boxhole ever found.

S.4.M, Collection: Irons:
G5992A 368 Ib. (166.92 kg.).
Gé014 16|lb. 407. (7.37 kg.).
G6015 5b. Soz. (2.49 ke.).
G5992D 1 Ib. Boz. (680.4 gm.).
G5992E 1 Ib. 2oz. (510.3 gm.).
G60I5SA 460 gm.
Shale balls:
G6061A-D 1 lb. T4oz, (661.4 gm.).
Remarks: The large iron mass was acquired by the S.A, Museum from the Webb Brothers.
Mt. Riddock Station, Northern Territory, in 1949,
References:
Madigan, C, T., 1937. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 61, p. 187.
Madigan, C. T., 1940, Min. Mag, 25 (168). p. 481.

Slice,

HENBURY 24° 34'S. 133° 10°
Iron, medium octahedrite,
Found 1931, by H. A. Ellis, 7 miles west-south-west of Henbury Station, Finke River,
Northern Territory. Associated with craters and impactites.
Total Weight: Well over 910 kg. in numerous masses. Many pieces show distortion.
S.A.M. Collection:
Iron: 133 ky. 107 pieces, largest weighing 59 |b. (26.76 kg.).
Shale balls; 2.83 kg.
Impactite: 2,94 kg.
Silica glass; 18 gm.
References:
Alderman, A. R., 1932. Min. Mag. 23 (136), p. 19.
Alderman, A, R., 1932. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 4, p. 555.
Spencer, L. J.. 1933. Min. Mag. 23, p. 387,

HUCKITTA (Synonyms—Alice Springs, Huckitte) 22° 22'S, 135° 46°E

Stony-iron, pallasite.

Found 1937, by C. T.. Madigan, approximately 20 miles north-east of Huckitta Station,
north of Dulcie Range, Northern Territory. Presented to the S.A. Museum by
W. Burdett. of Basket Range, South Australia, 1937.

Total Weight: Over 2 tons (2,032.1 kg.) surrounded by over 900 kg. of iron shale.

§.4.M, Collection: Main mass
G6916A Approx. I ton (916 kg.).
G6916C 4ewt. (203 kg.).
G5990B 22 1b. (9.98 keg.).
G5990A 21 |b. (9.53. kg.).
G5990 41b. 2o0z. (1.87 kg.).
GS5990E 2\b, 30z. (928 gm.).
The collection also includes 1,935 1b. (877 kg.) of iron shale, the
largest piece weighing 287 Ib. (130.18 kg.).
Remarks: A mass of 1,084 gm, found in 1924 near Alice Springs by H. Basedow, is believed
to be a transported fragment of Huckitta.
References:
Spencer, L. J., 1932. Min. Mag. 23, p. 38.
Madigan, C, T., 1937. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., 61, p. 187.
Madigan, C. T., 1939. Min. Mag. 25, p. 353.

Ee

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 781

inches

FIG. 4,
The Mount Sir Charles siderite.

782 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

MT, SIR CHARLES (formerly Bond Springs), Fig. 4 23° 50'S, 134° 02’ E

Iron, fine octahedrite.

Found 1942, by T, Williams, 7 miles east of Bond Springs Station, Northern Territory.
Acquired by the S.A. Museum through N. C. Bell, Alice Springs, in 1942.

Total Weight: 50 1b. 80z, (22.91 kg.). A fragment of about 1 1b, was broken off the main
mass after discovery and cannot be accounted for,

S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G5994 49 1b, (22.23 kg.).

Remarks: The name Bond Springs, formerly given to this meteorite, has already been
applied to a small chondrite found in the same area before 1898. (See Baker, G., and
Edwards, A. B., 1941, Mem. Nat. Mus. Vict., 12, p. 49.)

TAWALLAH VALLEY 15° 49°S, 135° 40°E
Iron, nickel-rich ataxite,

Found 1939, about 48 miles north-west of Borroloola, Northern Territory.

Total Weight: 75.75 kg. Main mass in Australian Museum, Sydney.

S.A.M. Callection: G7945 552 gm. Slice.

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN METEORITES

COCKLEBIDDY 31° 55°S. 126° 15'E

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Found 1949. 3 miles north of Nallah Nallah Rockhole, which is 10 miles east-norih-east of
Cocklebiddy on the Eyre Highway, Western Australia.

Total Weight: 19,5 kg. (431b.), Main mass in Western Australian Museum, Perth,

S.A.M, Collection: G7700 151 gm.

DALGARANGA 27° 43'S, 117° 15° EB

Stony-iron, mesosiderite.

Found 1923, associated with crater and shale balls, on Dalgaranga Station, north of Yalgoo,
Western Australia.

Total Weighi: Over 1.09 kg. (207 masses plus fragments).

S.A.M. Collection: G7105 282 gm, Shale balls.

HAIG (Synonym—Rawlinna) 31° 30'S, 125° 05’ B
Tron, medium octahedrite.
Found 1951, 36 miles south-south-west of Rawlinna, Western Australia. on the ‘Trans-

Australia Railway Line. Presented to the S.A. Museum by A, J, Carlisle, Rawlinna,
W.A., in 1952.

Total Weight: 480 kg. (1.057 1b.). Main mass in the Western Australian Museum, Perth.
S.A.M,. Callection: G5991 18 gm.

LAKE BROWN (Synonym—Burracoppin) 31° OOS, L18° 31'E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1919, at Lake Brown, County Avon, South-west Division, Western Ausiralia.
Purchased with the H. G. Stokes collection of minerals.

Total Weight: 9.75 kg. Main mass in Western Australian Museum, Perth,
§.4.M. Collection: G6066 142 gm, (with fusion crust),

LAKE GRACE 33° 04S, 118° 13'B

Stone. ohvine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1956, by T. Griffin, 3 miles north-north-west of Tarin Rock Siding, Western
Australia, Presented to the S.A. Museum by Mr. C. Griffin in 1959,

Total Weight: 10.5 kg. (23 1b, 20z.), Originally one mass the size of a football, now
fragmented.

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 783

S.A.M. Collection: Main mass 16 pieces plus fragments.
G6084A 1 1b. 15o0z. (878.8 gm.).
G6084B 1 Ib, (453.6 gm.),
G6084G Ob. 74o0z. (4.29 keg.).
G6084H 3 1b. Iloz. (1.67 kg.).
G6084l lb. 3402. (552.8 gm.).
G6084K 3 1b. I4oz. (1.40 kg.). . ;
Plus nine pieces under 1 Ib, in weight—total weight 487.7 gm.

WINGELLINA 26° 03'S, 128° 57’ E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1958, by J. E. Johnson, on stony ground 4 miles south-west of the intersection of
the South Australian, Western Australian and Northern Territory borders, north of the
Hinckley Range, W.A. Presented by J. E. Johnson, 1959,

Total Weight: 200 gm. One mass.

S.A.M. Collection: Residue of main mass.
G6082 28.5 gm. (two fragments).

WOLF CREEK 19° 18'S, 127° 46°E
Iron, medium octahedrite.
Crater recognized in 1947 from the air. First visited in 1949.

Total Weight: Iron shale (shale balls) weighing several thousand kilograms in numerous
masses has been collected from around the crater. In 1965 an A.N.U. party collected
1.3 kg, of nickel-iron fragments.
S.A.M. Collection: Iron—G7955 34 gm,
Shale ball—G5995 336 1b. (152.40 kg.).
The collection also includes numerous smaller masses, many showing
bread-crusting, of total weight 73 Ib. (33,11 kg.).
Remarks: The shale balls in the S.A.M. Collection were obtained by W. A. Cassidy and

G. F, Gross in 1954. The sample of nickel-iron was presented by Dr. S. R. Taylor of
the Australian National University in 1965,

NEW SOUTH WALES METEORITES

BARRATTA (Synonym—Baratta or Deniliquin) 35° 18'S, 144° 34° E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1845, 30 miles north-west of Deniliquin, N.S.W. Other finds were made in 1852
and 1899,

Total Weight: 202.7 kg. (447 1b.). Five masses. Main masses of Ist, 2nd, and 3rd stones
in the Australian Museum, Sydney, N.S.W. 4th and Sth masses in the Field Museum
of Natural History, Chicago, U.S.A.

S.A.M. Collection: G5676 (68 gm.). Slice.

CARTOONKANA 29° 20'S, 141° 05'E
Stone, enstatite chondrite.
Found prior to 1914, by T. F. Gill, on Yandama Station. Presented to the S.A. Museum
by T. F. Gill in 1924,
Total Weight: About 1202. (340 gm.). One mass.
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G5694 10407. (290 gm.),
Remarks: Very like Yandama, but shows some differences,
Reference:
Alderman, A. R., 1936. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, p. 537,

GILGOIN 30° 23'S. 147° 12’B
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite,

Found 1889, on Gilgoin Station. 40 miles cast-south-east of Brewarrina, N.S.W. Another
specimen was found in 1920 (No, &.)

784 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Total Weight: 144.7 kg. (3191b.). Eight masses, Main masses of Nos. 1, 2, 6, 8 and
part of 7 in the Australian Museum, Sydney. No. 5 in the Field Museum of Natural
History, Chicago, U.S.A.

S.A.M,. Collection: G4984A 4 1b. 130z. (2.18 kg.).

G4984B 59 gm. Slice.
G4984C 2b. 1202. (1.25 kg.) (Gilgoin No. 7).

MOLONG 33° 17'S, 148° 53’E
Stony-iron, pallasite,
Found 1912, 12 miles west of Orange, N.S.W.

Total Weight: 105.22 kg. (2321b.), Main mass in Australian Museum, Sydney, N.S.W.

5.A.M. Collection: G6055A 6lb. S5oz, (2.86 kg.).
G6055B 20 gm.

Remarks: Specimen in an exceedingly weathered and fragmentary condition.

MORDEN (Synonym—Mardan) 30° 30’S, 142° 20°E
Tron, hexahedrite,

Found 1922, in the Koonenberry Range, 5 miles from Morden Station, N.S.W., and 100
miles north-north-east of Broken Hill. Purchased by the S.A. Museum from the finder,
J. W. Wickham, Cockatoo Valley, Gawler, S.A.. in 1922.

Total Weight: 531b. (2.72 kg.).

S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
GS5671A 4b. 120z. (2.15 kg.).
G5671B 189 gm,
G5671C 42 gm.
Reference:
Alderman, A. R., 1936, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, p. 537.

YANDAMA 29° 20'S, 141° 05° E
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite,

Found prior to 1914, at Black’s Camp, Big Plain, Yandama Station, north-west of N.S.W.
Purchased by S.A. Museum from T. F, Gill in 1924,

Total Weight: Over 5.68 kg. (12 |b. 9oz.).

S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G5693A 8& lb. (3.63 kg.).
G5693B 379 gm.
Reference:
Alderman, A. R., 1936. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, p, 537.

VICTORIAN METEORITES

DIMBOOLA 36° 30’ S, 142° 02'E
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Found 1944, in a ploughed paddock near Dimboola, Victoria. Purchased by the South
Australian Museum from C. F. Kurtze, Victoria, in 1944.

Total Weight: 361\b. 80z. (16.6 kg.). One mass. The original mass has been sliced into
nine pieces.
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
GS987A_ 15 1b. (6.80 kg.).
GS5987B 13 1b. 40z. (6.01 kg.).
G5987C 141b. 120z. (2.15 kg.).
G5987D 308 gm.
G5987F 11b. 240z. (524.4 gm.).
G5987G_ 105 gm.

CORBETT—S.A, MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 785

34° 06'S, 141° 47° E

KULNINE
Recalculated 34° 09'S, 141° 47'E

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found about 1886, re-located 1911 by G. Crozier, on Kulnine Station, Victoria. Actual
locality about 9 miles west of Wentworth and 3 miles from the Murray River, Purchased
by the South Australian Museum from G, R. Annells in 1911.
Total Weight: 122 1b. (55.34 kg.). One mass.
S.A.M. Collection: Main mass
G569SA_ 65 lb. 40z. (29.59 kg.)-
G5695B 361b. 8o0z. (16.56 kg.).
G5695C 3 1b. 40z. (1.47 kg.).
G5695E 182 gm.
G5695F 40 gm.
G5695G 83 em.
GS5695H 278 gm.
Remarks: Previous catalogues have claimed Kulnine as a N.S.W. meteorite. <A letter in
the South Australian Archives from G. R. Annells to the South Australian Museum
authorities, dated 21 July, 1911, states that the find was made in Victoria,

FOREIGN METEORITES

ADAMS COUNTY, Colorado, U.S.A. 39° 58’ N, 103° 46° W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Found 1928.

S.4.M,. Collection: G5687 106 gm.

AINSWORTH, Brown County, Nebraska, U.S.A. 42° 33’ N, 99° 48'W

Iron, coarse octahedrite.
Found 1907.
S.A.M. Collection: G6123.

ARRIBA, Lincoln County, Colorado, U.S.A, 39° 18’ N, 103° 15° W
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1936,

§.A.M. Collection: G6120 250 gm.

BEARDSLEY, Rawlins County, Kansas, U.S.A. 39° 49'N, 101° 14° W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Fell 1929,

S.A.M, Collection: T1112 55 gm.

BEENHAM, Union County. New Mexico, U.S.A. 36° 13'N, 103° 39° W

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1937.

S.A.M. Collection: T1116 134 gm. (2 pieces).
BLUFF, Fayette County, Texas, U.S.A. 29° 55’ N, 96° 50’ W
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found about 1878.

S.A.M, Collection: G7101 750.2 gm.
BONITA SPRINGS, Lee County, Florida, U.S.A. 26° 16' N, 81° 45’ W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.
§.A.M. Collection: G7961A 402 gm.
G7961B 261 gm.
BRENHAM, Kiowa County, Kansas, U.S.A. 37° 38'N, 99° 05° W
Stony-iron, pallasite.
Found 1882.

S.A.M. Collection: G5677 168% gm.
G7103 5,100 gm,
T1120 23 gm.

786 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BREWSTER, Thomas County, Kansas, U.S.A. 39° 15’ N, 101° 20° W
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1940.

S.A.M. Collection: G6117_ 20 gm,

CAMPO DEL CIELO, Gran Chaco, Gualamba, Argentina 27° 28’ S, 60° 35° W
Iron, hexahedrite.

Found 1576.

S.A.M. Collection: G7965 17 gm.

CANYON DIABLO, Coconino County, Arizona, U.S.A. 35° 03’ N, 111° 02° W

Iron, coarse octahedrite.

Found 1891.

S.A.M,. Collection: G4982 3,231.8 gm,
G7104 4,082.3 gm,
G4983 (iron shale) 443 gm.
G6086 (impactite) 7.5 gm.
G6087 metallic spheroids.
G6088 metallic spheroids.
G7964 139 gm.

CLOVER SPRINGS, Coconino County, Arizona, U.S.A. 34° 27' N, 111° 22’°W
Iron, mesosiderite.

Found 1956,

S.A.M. Collection: G6119 44 gm.

DIMMITT, Castro County, Texas, U.S.A. 34° 35’ N, 102° 10°W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Found before 1947,

S.A.M. Collection: G6él118 10 gm,

DUCHESNE, Duchesne County, Utah, U.S.A. 40° 23’ N, 110° 52° W
Iron, fine octahedrite.

Found 1906.

§.A.M. Collection: G5684 25 gm.

EL CAPITAN, Lincoln County, New Mexico, U.S.A. 33° 30’ N, 105° 30’ W
Iron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1893.

5.A.M. Collection: G7102 1,147 gm.

FOREST CITY, Winnebago County, Iowa, U.S.A, 43° 15'N, 93° 40° W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Fell 1890,

S,A.M. Collection: GS680 567 gm,

FORSYTH COUNTY, North Carolina, U.S.A. 36° OS'N, 80° 15° W
Tron, hexahedrite.

Found about 1891,

S.A.M, Collection: G6121 499 gm.

HOBA, Grootfontein, South-west Africa. 19° 35’S, 17° 55°E
Iron, nickel-rich ataxite,
Found 1920.
S.A.M. Collection: G7966A. Iron shale 256 gm.
G7966B_ Iron shale 90 gm.
G7966C_ Iron shale 347 gm.

HOLBROOK, Navajo County, Arizona, U.S.A. 34° 54'N, 110° 11° W
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite,

Fell 1912,

S.A.M,. Collection: G5688 43 gm.

CORBETT—S.A, MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 787

IDER, De Kalb County, Alabama, U.S.A.
Iron, coarse octahedrite.

Found 1957,

S.A.M. Collection: G7963 201 gm.

JOHNSON CITY, Stanton County, Kansas, U.S.A,

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1937.
S.A.M. Collection: G6l15 178.5 gm.

JOHNSTOWN, Weld County, Colorado, U.S.A.
Stone, hypersthene achondrite.

Fell 1924,

S.A.M. Collection: G6126 494 gm.

KENDALL COUNTY, Texas, U.S.A.
Iron, hexahedrite.

Known 1887.

S.A.M. Collection: G6124 625 gm.

KESEN, Iwate, Honshu, Japan.

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Fell 1850.

S.A.M. Collection: G7100 309 gm.

KINGFISHER, Kingfisher County, Oklahoma, U.S.A,

Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1950.
S.A.M. Coilection: G7348 87.5 gm.

MELROSE, Curry County, New Mexico, U.S.A.
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found before 1933.

S.A.M. Collection: T1122 38 gm.

MODOC, Scott County, Kansas, U.S.A.
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Fell 1905.

S.A.M. Collection: G6125 453.6 gm.

MONAHANS, Ward County, Texas, U.S.A.
Iron, nickel-rich ataxite,

Found 1938.

S.A.M. Collection: G6116 66 gm.

NESS COUNTY, Kansas, U.S.A.
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.
Found 1894.

S.A.M, Collection: G6114 89 gm.

ODESSA, Ector County, Texas, U.S.A.

Iron, coarse octahedrite.

Found before 1922.

S.A.M. Collection: G6052A 5.90 kg.
G6052B 7.26 kg.
G6052C_ 8.16 kg.
G6052D 2.27 kg.

PARAGOULD, Greene County, Arkansas, U.S.A,
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Fell 1930,

S.A.M. Collection: G5993 190 gm.

34° 41’ N, 85° 39° W

37° 33'N, 101° 41° W

40° 21° N, 104° 54° W

29° 24’ N, 98° 30° W

38° 53’ N, 141° 35°E

35° 50° N, 97° 56’ W

34° 23’ N, 103° 377 W

38° 30'N, LOL 06’ W

31° 50'N, 102° 55’ W

38° 30’ N, 99° 36’ W

31° 43’ N, 102° 24° W

36° 04' N, 90° 30° W

788 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PASAMONTE, Union County, New Mexico, U.S.A. 36° 13’N, 103° 24° W
Stone, pyroxene-plagioclase achondrite.
Fell 1933.
S.A.M. Collection: GS770 +124 gm,
T1119 30 em.

PLAINVIEW, Hale County, Texas, U.S.A. 34° O7'N, 101° 47° W

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.
Found 1917.
S.A.M, Collection: Tl113. 765 gm.

PUENTE DEL ZACATE, Monclova district, Coahuila State, Mexico.
28° 42'N, 102° 51’ W
Iron, medium octahedrite.
Found about 1904.
S.A.M. Collection: G5689 35 gm,

RICHARDSON, Stark County, North Dakota, U.S.A. 46° 53’ N, 102° 19° W
Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite.

Fell 1918,

S.A.M. Collection: G5689 160 gm.

ROY, Harding County, New Mexico, U.S.A. 35° 57° N, 104° 12° W
Stone, olivine-hypersthene chondrite.

Found 1933,

S.,A.M, Collection: G5769 186 gm.

SANTA APOLONIA, Nativitas, Tlaxcala, Mexico. 19° 13’ N, 98° 18° W
Iron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1872.

S.A.M, Collection: T1115 281 gm.
T1124 22 gm. (oxidized scale),

SARDIS, Burke County, Georgia, U.S.A. 32° 56’ N, 80° 51’ W
Iron, coarse octahedrite.

Found 1940.

S.A.M, Collection: G7962 1,570 gm.

SELMA, Dallas County, Alabama, U.S.A. 32° 24’ N. 87° 00° W

Stone, olivine-bronzite chondrite,
Found 1906,
S.A.M. Collection: G6122 503 gm.

SPRINGWATER, Saskatchewan, Canada. 52° 00'N, 108° 18° W

Stony-iron, pallasite.
Found 1931.
S.A.M. Collection: G5686 198 gm,

TOLUCA, Mexico State, Mexico. 19° 34'N, 99° 34’ W

Iron, medium octahedrite.
Known before 1776.
S.A.M, Collection: G5678 274 gm.
G5678A 794 gm.
T1121 21 gm,
T1128 13 gm. (oxidized scale).

WABAR, Rub’al Khali, Arabia, 21° 29’ N, 50° 28’E

Iron, medium octahedrite.

Found 1932,

§.A.M. Collection: G6053A 13.5 gm. (iron).
G6053B 24.5 gm, (iron-shale),

WILLAMETTE, Clackamas County, Oregon, U.S.A. 45° 22’ N, 122° 35'W

Iron, medium octahedrite.
Found 1902—associated with craters.
§.A.M. Collection: T1125 30 gm. (oxidized scale),

CORBETT—S.A. MUSEUM METEORITE CATALOGUE 789

LIST OF METEORITES ACCORDING TO CLASS

Jrons (Siderites):
Nickel-rich ataxites:
Alikatnima, Hoba, Monahans, Tawallah Valley.
Coarse octahedrites:
Ainsworth, Canyon Diablo, Ider, Odessa, Sardis.
Medium octahedrites:

Boxhole, Cowell, El Capitan, Haig, Henbury, Kyancutta, Moorumbunna, Puente
del Zacate, Rhine Villa, Santa Apollonia, Toluca, Warbar, Willamette, Wolf
Creek, Yardea.

Fine octahedrites:

Duchesne, Mt. Sir Charles.
Hexahedrites:

Campo del Cielo, Forsyth Co., Kendall Co., Morden.
Metabolites:

Arltunga, Murnpeowie.

Stony-irons (Siderolites):
Pallasites:
Brenham, Huckitta, Molong, Springwater.
Mesosiderites:
Clover Springs, Dalgaranga, Pinnaroo,

Stones (Aerolites):
Enstatite chondrites:

Cartoonkana.

Oliyine-bronzite chondrites:

Adams Co., Beardsley, Bonita Springs, Caroline, Cocklebiddy, Coomandook,
Coonana, Dimboola, Dimmitt, Forest City, Gilgoin, Kaldoonera Hill, Kesen,
Plainview, Richardton, Selma.

Olivine-hypersthene chondrites:

Accalana, Arnba, Artracoona, Barratta, Beenham, Bluff, Brewster, Cadell,
Carraweena, Cocunda, Holbrook, Johnson City, Kingfisher, Kingoonya, Kulnine,
Lake Bonney, Lake Brown, Lake Grace, Lake Labyrinth, Melrose, Modoc,
Monte Colina, Ness Co., Nora Creina, Paragould, Roy, Vincent, Wingellina,
Yandama.

Olivine-pigeonite chondrites:

Karoonda.

Chondrites—unclassified :
Crockers Well, Wilbia.

Hypersthene achondrites:
Johnstown,

Pyroxene-plagioclase achondrites:
Pasamonte.

MISCELLANEA

Several undocumented meteorites were included in the S. F. C. Cook Collection of
minerals and tektites purchased by the S.A. Museum in 1945. With one exception, it has
not been possible to establish the relationship of these meteorites to previously described
BEGGS, but it is probable that all are of Australian origin. The undocumented specimens
are as follows:—

G6062 ...., -. -- 347 gm... .. Stone.

G6063 2. 2. we

G6064 . .. 2... 281.5 gm. ., .. Stone, oliyine-bronzite chondrite. Three
GEOG. ite te pieces.

G6067 . .. .. ws ee 38 gm, ... .. Iron.
G6069-6072 .. .. .. 261.5 gm... .. Iron. Four pieces.

790 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Other meteorites of unknown origin in the Museum Collection are:—

G6075 ... .. 2... I7lgm.... .. Stony-iron (acquired from H. A.
Lindsay ).
GGO092~.- ied Q9em...... Iron, New Mexico.
GS679 . .. 6... 5.) «146 em... .. .. Tron, Mexico.
Casts of the following meteorites are also included in the collection: —
Adelie Land (Antarctica) Mangwendi (Southern Rhodesia)
Arltunga (N.T.) Moorumbunna (S,A.)
Artracoona (S.A.) Morden (N.S.W.)
Bingera (N.S.W.) Nocoleche (N.S.W.)
Boogaldi (N.S.W.) Rhine Villa (S.A.)
Bustee (India) Roeburn (W.A.)
Carraweena (S.A.) Rowton (England)
Cartoonkana (N.S.W.) Tenham (Q.)
Coomandook (S.A.) Wilbia (S,A.)
Cowell (S.A.) Wold Cottage (England)
Eli Elwah (N.S.W.) Yandama (N.S.W.)
Kulnine ( Vic.) Yardea (S.A.)

GENERAL REFERENCES
Hey, M. H., 1966: Catalogue of Meteorites, 3rd Edition, London, British Museum
(Natural History),
Hodge-Smith, T., 1939; Australian Meteorites. Mem. Aust. Mus., No, 7, pp. 1-84.

McCall, G. J. H., and DeLaeter, J, R., 1965. Catalogue of Western Australian Meteorite
Collections, Spec. Publ, W. Aust. Mus. No. 3.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The undescribed meteorites in the collection were loaned to Dr. J. F. Lovering of the
Australian National University, Canberra, for a number of years, and descriptions of these
will be published in due course. The author wishes to thank Dr. Lovering for information
pertaining to those meteorites which are included in this catalogue.

Thanks are also due to Dr. B. Mason, Curator, Division of Meteorites, U.S. National

Museum, Washington, for permission to include unpublished data on several South Australian
meteorites.

The assistance of the Director of Lands in checking certain inconsistencies in the locations
of a number of South Australian meteorites is here acknowledged,

Finally, the author offers his grateful thanks to Miss J. Scrymgour for her invaluable
assistance during all stages in the preparation of the catalogue.

SHORT NOTES

FURTHER ADDITIONS TO THE FISH FAUNA OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Summary

The following ten marine species are added to the fish fauna of South Australia as listed by Scott
(1962) and Glover (1966).

All have previously been recorded elsewhere in Australia.

Each specimen referred to constitutes a first record for the State and is preserved in the South
Australian Museum. Of the three species illustrated herein Petraites johnstoni has not been figured
previously in the Australian literature.

SHORT NOTES

FURTHER ADDITIONS TO THE FISH FAUNA OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By C. J. M, GLOVER, SoutTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

The following ten marine species are added to the fish fauna of South
Australia as listed by Scott (1962) and Glover (1966).
All have previously been recorded elsewhere in Australia.

Each specimen referred to constitutes a first record for the State and
is preserved in the South Australian Museum. Of the three species
illustrated herein Petraites johnstoni has not been figured previously in the
Australian literature.

Family SQUALIDAE
Squalus megalops (Macleay)

Acanthias megalops Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, vi, 2, Sept. 12,
1881, p. 367.

A female specimen was taken by hand line off Normanville on March
20, 1966; L.C.F., 44.5 cm.; S.A.M. Reg. No, F3430,

Family SYNGNATHIDAE
Yozia trigris (Castelnau)
Syngnathus tigris Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, iti, 4, May 1879,
p. 397,

A single specimen, lacking a brood pouch, was collected near the
Port Pirie jetty by Mr. W. T. Wehrman on October 1, 1967; T.L., 25.8 cm.;
S.A.M. Reg. No, F3438.

Maroubra perserrata Whitley
Maroubra perserrata Whitley, Rec. Austr. Mus. 22 (1): 74-95, 1948.
Two specimens, lacking brood pouches, were collected at Port
Noarlunga reef by Mr. B. G. Brawley on September 7, 1967, at a depth

of approximately 9.0 m,; T.L.’s 5.9 cm, and 6.8 cm. respectively; S.A.M.
Reg. No, F3439.

792 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ichthyocampus runa (Whitley)
Festucalex (Campichthys) runa Whitley, Austr. Zool., 6; 1931: p. 313.

A specimen, lacking a brood pouch, was collected in shallow water
at Aldinga reef by Mr. B. Saunders on December 8, 1965; T.L., 6.8 cm.:
S.A.M. Reg. No, F3440.

Lissocampus affinis Whitley
Lissocampus affinis Whitley, Austr. Zool. 10, 1944, p. 266.

A male specimen, with brood pouch developed, was collected by the
author at Sceale Bay on October 7, 1964; T.L., 8.2 cm.; S.A.M. Reg. No.
F3245.

Nannocampus ruber Ramsay and Ogilby

Nannocampus ruber Ramsay and Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, x, 4,
Apr. 3, 1886, p. 757.

A specimen, lacking a brood pouch, was taken from a craypot at
Cape Jaffa by Mr. I. R. McInnes on February 19, 1964; T.L., 13.7 cm.:
S.A.M, Reg. No. F3220.

Urocampus carinirostris Castelnau
Urocampus carinirostris Castelnau, Proc. Zool. Acclim. Soc. Vict., 1, July
15, 1872, p. 200.

A specimen was collected in shallow water at Davenport Creek, near
Ceduna, by Mr. B. Taylor on September 30, 1965; T.L. 6.5 cm.: S.A.M,
Reg. No. F3441,

Family TERAPONTIDAE
Therapon humeralis Ogilby

Therapon humeralis Ogilby, Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxiv, 1, Aug. 8,
1899, p. 177.

Two specimens were taken by line in the surf zone at Streaky Bay
by Mr. J. Lampard in January, 1968; S.L.’s 23.0 cm. and 27.0 cm.
respectively; S.A.M. Reg. Nos. F3442 and F3443 (Fig. 1).

Fig. Therapon humeralis Ogilby; S:A.M. Reg. No, F3443.
Fig. Petraites johnstoni (Saville-Kent); S.A.M. Reg. No. F3444.
Fig. 3. Echinophryne glauerti Whitley; S.A.M, Reg. No. F3429.

Ne

tad

SHORT NOTES 79

794 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Family CLINIDAE
Petraites johnstoni (Saville-Kent)

Clinus johnstoni Saville-Kent, Rept. Fish. Dept. Tasm., 1886, p. 13,

A specimen (Fig. 2) was speared at Carpenters Rocks, in the South-
East, by Mr. K. J. Pulford in May 1967; S.L. 29.0 cm.; S.A.M. Reg.
No. F3444.

Family ANTENNARIIDAE
Echinophryne glauerti Whitley

Echinophryne glauerti Whitley, Austr. Zool. 10, pt. 3, 1944, p. 272.

A specimen (Fig. 3) was taken by Mr. M. Leech from a craypot that
had been set at a depth of approximately 62 m. off Pearson Island (S.W. of
Elliston) on January 15, 1967; S.L. 11.5 cm.; S.A.M. Reg. No. F3429.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The author is grateful to Mr. R. J. McKay (The Western Australian Museum),
Dr, J. R. Paxton (The Australian Museum) and Mr, A, P. Andrews (The Tasmanian
Museum) for making available comparative material and comparing certain specimens.
Appreciation is also expressed to officers of the South Australian Fisheries and Fauna
Conservation Department and others who have co-operated in forwarding specimens to the
Museum,

REFERENCES

Glover, C. J. M., 1966: Three Fishes Previously Unrecorded from South Australia. Rec.
S. Austr. Mus,, 15 (2).

McCulloch, A. R., 1929-30: A Check-List of the Fishes Recorded from Australia. Austr.
Mus, Mem., 5 (1-4): i-x and 1-534,

Scott, T. D., 1962: The Marine and Fresh Water Fishes of South Australia. Adelaide:
Govt. Printer.

Whitley, G. P., 1948: A List of the Fishes of Western Australia. W.A. Fisheries Dept.
Bull., 2: 1-35 and map.

Whitley, G. P., 1964: A Survey of Australian Ichthyology. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales,
Ixxxix, 1, pp. 11-127.

REDESCRIPTION OF TUCKERELLA SPECHTAE WOMERSLEY

BY CLIVE D. JORGENSEN, BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY, PROVO, UTAH

Summary

Womersley (1957) described a new species of Tuckerella from South Australia, for which only one
specimen was available. The number of caudal flagellate setae (seven) and the relative sizes of the dorsal
hysterosomal setae formed the basis of the new species. Miller (1964) examined the type specimen and
found it to be male rather than female as described by Womersley (1957). A species (coleogynis)
endemic to North America was described by Jorgensen (1967) and it too had seven caudal flagellate
setae and the dorsal hysterosmall setae were similar to those described for spechtae.

REDESCRIPTION OF TUCKERELLA SPECHTAE WOMERSLEY
By CLIVE D. JORGENSEN, BricHAM YouNnG UNrversiry, Provo, UTAH

Womersley (1957) described a new species of Tuckerella from South
Australia, for which only one specimen was available. The number of
caudal flagellate setae (seven) and the relative sizes of the dorsal hystero-
somal setae formed the basis of the new species. Miller (1964) examined
the type specimen and found jt to be male rather than female as described
by Womersley (1957), A species (coleogynis) endemic to North America
was described by Jorgensen (1967) and it too had seven caudal flagellate
setae and the dorsal hysterosomal setae were similar to those described for
spechtae,

An examination of the type specimen revealed some errors made in
the original description and some of the most diagnostic characters had not
been adequately considered. Also the specimen was rather badly mashed
and broken in the process of mounting, and the cover glass had been
cracked, thus, remounting is not possible, Because of the inadequate
description and the possibility of the specimen drying out and becoming
useless, a te-description seemed necessary. It also seemed advisable to
describe the female even though it is without adequate collection data,
I am grateful to Mr. D, C, Lee, South Australian Museum, for the loan
of the type specimen and the female of spechtae.

Male (Figs. | and 3)—The type specimen is male rather than female.
Measurements are not especially useful because of the mashed condition of
the specimen, Colour in life red. Body semi-oval; divided with sutures
between propodosoma, metapodosoma, and opisthosoma; weak suture
immediately posterior of the anterior transverse row of dorsal palmate
opisthosomal setae; integument reticulate. One pair of eyes: if second pair
is present it is obscured in the mounting, Four pairs of palmate
propodosomal setae, the fourth (postero-lateral) being largest and flared
out posteriorly, Four pairs of palmate dorsal metapodosomal setae, and
three -pairs of laterals; all are subequal in size. Seven pairs of palmate
dorsal opisthosomal setae; three pairs on anterior margin (the lateral pair
being much smaller than the two interior pairs); and four pairs arranged
posteriorly. Posterior four dorsal opisthosomal setae arranged in transverse
row and smaller than all other dorsal setae. Four pairs of lateral
opisthosomal setae, with posterior pair being slightly smaller than the other
three. Seven pairs of flagellate caudal setae, ciliated on proximal end
only; one pair of small medio-caudal, foliaceous setae; all caudal setae
arising from distinct tubercles; third caudal setae from the outside less than
one-half the length of all others. Palpus with a well developed thumb and

796 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SHORT NOTES 797

claw; thumb with five setae about equal length. Legs short and stout with
pulvillus and two well developed claws; tenant hairs originating from lateral
margin of claws and pulvillus; tarsus I-[V each with one sensory rod, rod
on tarsus I slightly narrower and longer than others, Setae on dorsal
surface of legs palmate, with four simple setae on tarsus I and Il. Four
pairs of simple setae in genito-anal region; although the fifth (most anterior)
is probably present and simply lost in the mounting.

Female (Figs. 2 and 4)—Body semi-oval, divided with suture, between
propodosoma, metapodosoma, and opisthosoma; integument reticulate.
One pair of eyes. Number of dorsal palmate setae same as male; posterior
two pairs of dorsal opisthosomal setae not in transverse row as in male,
second and third dorsal palmate setae on propodosoma flattened and flared
out rather than rounded as in the male. Caudal flagellate setae weakly
plumose on distal end; one pair of small medio-caudal foliaceous setae;
third caudal setae from outside short and not plumose on distal end. Palpus
similar to male, Legs similar to male except tarsus [ has two sensory rods,
the distal almost twice as long as the proximal; tarsus [I-IV each with
one sensory rod subequal in length to the proximal on tarsus I. Two long
and three short simple setae on tarsus I, Nine pairs of simple setae
in genito-anal region.

The type data are precisely the same as reported by Womersley (1957),
except the holotype is male rather than female. The female has no data,
but was considered to be spechtae because of the length of the third
flagellate caudal setae. This character separates spechtae from all other
species of Tuckerella The holotype (N196839) and the single female
specimen (N196840) are at the South Australian Museum,

REFERENCES
Jorgensen, C, D., 1967; A new species of Tuckerella (Acarina; Tuckerellidae) from Nevada.
Entomol. News, 78: 141-146.
Miller, L. W., 1964: A new species of Tueckerella (Acarina, Tetranychoidea, Tuckerellidae)
from Tasmania. Papers and Proc, Roy. Soc, Tasmania, 98: 79-84.

Womersley, H., 1957: A new species of Tuckerella (Acarina, Tetranychoidea, Tuckerellidae)
from South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Australia, 80: 73-75.

Figs. 1-4, Yuckerella spechiae Womersley, 1 and 3, male: 1, dorsal surface of
idiosoma; 3, genilo-anal region, 2 and 4, female: 2, dorsal surface of idiosoma; 4, genito-
anual region.

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE
aberrans, Ctenoneurus . .. 513, 534, 532,
§36, 550

aberrans. Ologamasus , .. 205, 208, 209, 226

absimilis, Holochila .. 166, 168, 170, 17)

abundans, Retrodrymus . .. 45, 63, 78

Acacia: Ss te me 2) 135, 175, 310

Acuruptera oo. 6. 56 6. . 302, 303

acuminata, see aspersa acuminata,
Helix

acuminatus, Psilaster .. 2... 755
acuta, Cochlicella .. -. 79, 82, "$3, 85-87.

484-486
weutus, Calisuug - 2. 6. 0. ee. 282, 291
adelaidae, Ceratosoma . is gr 255

adelaidensis, Amphibolurus . 180, 183, 184.
185, 186, 187, 188

Aegisocoris ., ;. .. ». 4. S43, F201, 525
ane, Sphalangia ae “beet Seem (Oe
acneus, Trimorus .. . - 552
aflinis, Aphelodoris ,. ., ,- -- -- 337
affinis, Calisius 5, 26). 0) 2. -- 282
alfinis. Myla. . 712. 719, 721
affinis, Lissocampus . . st ac 792
affinis, Pelodytes .2 0. 0... .. 719, 722
Agonophorus ., .. .) -- -- -» SSI, 553
Agunga te ‘ re: 64

aitkeni, see cavernarum aitkeni,
Protochelifer

alba, Tylo .. oid d, dh on eh 2S
albicornis, Aradus 277, 278, 279. 284
albicornis. Mevzira -. fala et se
ulbifrons, Phylidonyris .. . 699
albina, see donnysa albina, Hesperilli

albovenata, Anisyntt .. . - - 75, 177
albovenito weemala, Anisynta .. .. “477
aleurodinis. Atmitus -. font to “Soe
aleurodis, Elaptus & Aluplus = $52
alhacius, Oxyehilos 257-2460), ag. 486
Allostichaster 5... . a wae
Amphibolurus 179, 185, 18s, 190
Amyem@ .. 0. 6.00. ee ee eee 6699
Anadiura . - Re. .'< . 499
unuemus, Calistuy . 2. 6. y . 282
androphymus, Aneurus .. .. ., ,. 293
ANGUIMS: 2 ee ¢ 293
ungiwsi, Bullaen .. 2. 2. 2.2L. B31
amgasi, Philine .. .. 2. 2. .. 351, 332
anginna, Hyla .. 6. 0. 6. 0... 2.) BST
Angophora 22... “i 702
angulatus, Anetris -. 22 2 2. 293
unvulatus, Mustizocoris 2. ., .. .. S14
angustidens, Phascolomys , . .. -. 405
annulicornis, Calisius . ., 283. 284, 287
antaretica, Nothofagus . .. .. -. . 501
antennalis, Calisius .. 2. 2. 2... 2R2
untennatus, Aradus .. .. .. .) .. 279
Anthaster .,. ify = if 743
antillensis, Aphelodoris ‘ +4 Me 336, 337
untipodum, Ideobisium —. ,. 757. 760, 762
antipodum, Obisium .. .. -. . 762

apetala, Pomaderris .- -, .- -. ., 165

Pace
Aphelodoris .. . .. 329, 336, 337
Appolonius 40, 42, 61, 64, 74
Aradacanthia ,. 2... . .. 2RO, 251
Aradus .. .. a. 276, 277, 279
araklai, Calisius oe ae 282
sircystatus, Echinaster , . 750, 751, 754, 735
APOGCG@PiS oo a ee ae ce aes SND
ATIETOISS oh ete ante ee os Ce teen “OA
Arlabanellus .. 0. jee ee. dd
Artabanus .. 0.0 1. - 526

aspersa, Helix .. 79, BI, 85. 86, 87, 483,
484, 485, 486, 493, 494
aspersa acuminata, Helix St

Aspisocoris. - - 513, 515, 517
Asterina 00 ou tue ee ae : 745
Asterodiscus 2... 2.06.0 ., 46 «- 737
austrologorum, Tosia . .. .. .. 741, 742
Astropecten .. .. .. .. 730, 732, 735, 736
atkinsoni, Artabanus .- - .. . .. $27
atyphoida, Asterina ., 731, 7458, 754, 755
aurea, Doriopsilla . - - 347, 350, 35]
iturea, Doris .. . ». 01 3. 2350
auyitomentosa, Daulocoris .. 513, S46, 547
australiae, Luidia .. .) 2. .. 730, 732, 755
uustraliae, Maculaster , ., ..., -, 732
australasiae, Paranura .. .. .. .. ., 274
dustralica, Lobella . ., 261, 264, 265, 274
australicus, Aneurus , 2, ., 294
australiensis, Mediaster , ste eee TOS
australis, Aradus .. —. 277, 279, 280, 284
australis, Austrochthonius .. .. 2... 758
australis, Brachyrhynehus ,. .. 0. -. 542
australis, Calisius .. 2. .. 283, 284, 287
uustralis, Carventus . - tet =SIG
australis, Crimia .. , . S42
australis, CtenOneurus 5 ee ary, $31
australis, Lsopeltus 45, Sl, 54, 435, 78
australis, Mezira.. , . ,. .. 442, 543
australis, Odinia .. . . 755
australis, Taphropeltus 34, 40, 60, 51
australis, Tosia ,. 0. |, 741, 742, 754
Austrodrymus .. ,. 0, .. 42, 7l, 74
Austrofromia 2. —- -, 744
balticus, Calisius. . 1 5 eB
Banksia .. . 72. 699, 702
burbatus, Amphibolurus it <p wo aoe LEI LBS
Burcinus .. .. vw tom ane 526, 533

barnardi, Lasiorhinus ». 394, 395, 396, 397
barnardi, see latifrons harnardi,
Lasierhinus

basitewskyi, Chelonoderus . 2 .- . 519
buxteri, Eucalyptus .. .. .. .. .. S76
becki, Hyla .. .. .. .. -. ve 359
berghi, Aphelodoris 324. 337, 343,

345, 34k
bergrothianus, Clenoneurus .. .. .. 530
beta, Arictus .. .. |. es _. Sal
beta, Mevira -, - 0 ores SS
bibroni, Pseudophryne Se fee Pos 707, 709
bilobatus, Calisius 2...) oye 282

800 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE
Bilobella .. .. notes Fee ae ZET
bilobiceps, Artabanus .. .. .. _. .- 527
bilobiceps, Brachyrrhynchus .. .. .. 527
bilobiceps papuasicus, Artabanus - "$13, oR
55
Birouna ., .. phd Sea Pe S03
biroi, Carventus . , ent oo. 300
bizona, see ventrosa bizona,
Cochlicella
boaris, Maytently .. .. ., 2... .. SOM
boodroolongensis, Hyla .. , TU, 719

bornemisszai, Pseudoty rannockthonius 760

Brachydrymus le fe ee Wee) AL, (PR, *h4
Brachyodontes -. . fs) Sots Go O28
brachypterus, Carventus . . 299, 301, ahi

49
Brentiscerus .. ., 40, 42, 54, 55, 61, 74
brevicaudatum, Ceratosoma — - 333
brevirostris, Melithreplus .. .. .. .. 702
breVispina, Patiriella 745, 747, 755
brunnea, Aphelodoris .. 2. 2... .. 337
Burgeonia oo 0... sow ae 9S
cuerulea, Hyla \ att nol ee OU
calamuria, Coscinasterins . F3l, 751, 755
culear, Asterias ,, , Tat see ne!) PAG

calear, Patiriella ., ., "145, 746, 747, 755
calcarellus, Heterozamasus (Hetero-

gamasus) ., 497, 498. 500, S03, 304, 505
Calisiopsis ... a 281
Calisiiys ret aed dy Ee BOSE 281, 286

‘allistemon .. ~. 699
amatdulensts Fucalyptas eee ee 89, 587
Camerarivs .. 6 aye 25
Cundalides ., 5°16 On omer oa 8186
cuperata, Helivella,, ., 80, 484. 485, 486
carinirostris, Urecampus .. —. -. F92
carneola, Doriopsilla a . 347, 350
curnedla, Doris ea a 350
carroni, Bauhinia... aim - , 673
cirtinculata, Anthochaera ,, .. 702
Curventus 2. ., 275, 295, 300, 301, 302
carvi, Neodorix .. .. i) ws 96
Cassidtila 2), yi tae .. 496
CUstOPOldes: chance cele &: Goose B56
Casuarina... coy! en = ine 71
cavei, Ologamusus | “te ~ Se ne Se 200
eavernarum, Protochelifer ., _. Tha, 765
cavernarum atitkeni, Protochelifer . 757,

760, 764

cavicola, Austrochthomus , . . 757, 760
cecidomyiarum, Diapria .. .. .. .. 484
cellarius, Oxychilus .. -. .. 0. 2. 260
Cepea ., . g- BO; 85
cephalus gizas, “Tymipanoeryptis .. 181, 183,
184, , 188

Ceraphron ., -. .. 4. 4. +) «: SSL. 557
cetratus, Aneurus .. 4, .) 2. -. .. 294
Chelonaderus ., ., 2, 2, .. .. 519, 525
Chlamydosaurus -. ., .) .. .- 181. 183
Chloritobadistes .. 2. 02 | chs 84
chrysoderma, Neodoris . ~ ane St] 3336
chrysops, Meliphaga .. .. .. ,. .. 699

chrysoptera, Anthochaera . nf -. 702

PAGE

ciliatus, Psilus .. ., er ier . 354
cineticornis, Appolonius oF ys Oe, 65
cincticornis, Ophthalmicus . . - yp tte
cf. cirrata, Neanura .. ,. 261, 266, 247,
270, 273

cirratus Achorutes .. - --.. 266

cirratus, see hirtellus cirratus,
Achorutes
citiatus, Polynema ., .. .. 2. 5, 4. 554
cladocalyx, Eucalyptus. - 700, 702
claviger, Heterogamasus .. .. .. 497, 501
claviger, Heterogamasus (Hetero-
gamasus) .. .. 497, 498, 500, 501, 502

cneorifolia, Eucalyptus .. .. 2, .. 310
cognatus, Calisius .. .. .. .. .. 282, 293
cognatus, Scolopostethus ap hc frcun 68
coleogynis, Tuckerella ., .. 6... 795
coleoptratus, Ologamasua , 4 at 206
completa, Acaruptera .. -. -- , 307
confusus, Calisius ,. -, vesleg ne CBE
conica, CHAI CIE ede we Meo claw i 552
conica, Diapria |... 1 i SSE
conicus, °Cynipsichneumon , 552
conicus, Tehneumon ., , ,. .. .. S52
consimilis, Holochila =, ., 16m, 168, 1469
conspurcata, Helicella ., 2. 2. :. 84
constrictus, Prosympiestus ., — , 276
contraria ser thersites contrario, Zoila

contubernalis, Calisius ,. 282

714, TAS, 716, 7N7,

coplandi, Hyla
718, 719, 720, 724, 725

Correa .. ., ; ; ree BID
Coscinastenas .. aan Oeil) 751
cosmophylla, Eucalyptus. i} a8 “310, S76
crassimiunus, Pentagonislter - ~ wi £7739
crassipes, Cynips , . (wm te S52
crassus, Appolonius ., , . 65
cratitia, Meliphaga .. .. -. ..649, 702
crenulatus, Aneurugs .. 2.2 2 ., 294
Crimia . . 2 os yk yy pe yy SDB
Crinia .. ,. 3 ye ty os TOS
cristutus, Amphibolurns ., 180, 184, 187,

188, 189
crowcrofti, Rhizophaseolonus ,. 454, 455
Ctenoncurus .. -, .- ,, ., 514, 530, 532
cunninghamii, Muehlenbeckia ., ., 673
cunninghamii, Mopirotdess viewer ot eae
Cupania .. . etic gi imo: PIFT
cymosus, Ologamasus: .. 205, 206, i)

210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 216, 218,

ecynipseus, Lituy .. , 552
Cyrtolaelaps , 1 205, 206, 208, 501
Cystophora .. .. oS eee os le del
darlingtoni, Amphibolurus +, LBRO, 184,

185, 187
darwini, Berberis .. -, - -- -. ~ 501

decanus, Echinaster .. .. ., ., 7451, 758
decanus, Plectaster .. ., .. .. 731, 751
decresii, Amphibolurus ,, 180, 183, 184,
187
denticeps, Acaraptera .. 299, 306, 307,
549

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 801

PAGE

destructor, Ceraphron -. )) 6. 5) 553
destructor, Merisus .. .. .. «. 553
Diapria .. We ate ade SOM
diemensis, Amphibolurus ., 180, 181, 183,
184, 185, 187

diffusus, Brentiscerus .. .. .. 56, 60, 78
dilaticeps, Calisius .. , -, - 282
dimidiatus, Mizaldus ,. .. 0... -) 43

dimidiatus, Rhyparochromus— ;

dimorpha, Acaraptera 299, 403.

dimorpha see helenita dimorpha,
Holochila

ots 43
305, 549

Pace
farri, Calisius ..,. 2. 2) ae . 282
feanus, Daulocorns —- 513, 546
ferox, Calisius ., 2.2 2... -. 282
Ferussacia ... ; Ru, 483-486

fionii, Amphibolurus rhe he 180, 184, 187

fiindersensis, Zostereps .. . 377, 578
fiindersi, Austrodrymus .. .. 45, 72, 78
forestalis, Pseudodrymus 45, 70, 78
floridanus, Chirocerus . 22 .. .. ., 3552
floridanus, Lygocertis . » 52

foliatus, Evanssellus .. .. 497, 498. sw
foliatus, Heterogamasus (Evangsellus) 347,

diosmifolium, Hislichsyyom et pet ole 52 498, 500, 505, SOY, STO
Diplodactylus .. .. 189 folliculus, Ferussacia .. .. 0... 80
Diprotodon ., 6... 419, 420, 422 forcififer, Lonchotaster .. .. 735
discutatus, Ologamasus .. ‘205, 206, 207, forticornis, Scolopostethus . . . “45, 68, 78
209, 210, 211, 212, 225. 226, 227, 228, freycinetli, Myla oo 6. uw, ee ye oT
230, 231, 233 friendi friendi, Zoila . .. ., .. .. 252
diversifolia, Eucalyptus 310, 700, 701. (riendi vereoi, Zoila . - :4 1, 252
702 fulvipes, Eupteromalus .. —. —. .. $54
dolobrita, Pinna -. oe 751 fungicolu, Clenoneurus , . ... S34
donnysa albina, Hesperilla . -. 74 tingicola, Pictinellus .. 534, 5a5: 536, 539
doreica, Crimia .. , ; . £26, 530 fuscata, Anisyota albovenata .. . 176, 177
doreicus, Artabanus ,, ,. 2. ., 9. 530 fuscicornis, Aradus .. .- 277, 278. 284. 549
dorsalis, Limnoidynastes = - yy ~~ 360
Drakiessit .. | ; >. 925, 526 Golesus v0.18 ef ap ia SS
DryMuis soe <5 apt 7h, me Gamiuselliphis. . . 206, 209
diibeni, Pentagonaster es 739 Gamasellus .. 205, 209, 226, 497. 498. SUS
dubius, Australiaster , 754, 755 Gamasiphis ’ 4 4
2 Ssiphis _ 20h, 208, S10
duebeni, Pentagonaster .. 730. 739, 740, Gamasiphoides 308
7 742, 743, 744, 755 Gastrodes gal Jar Te Sh 8
dumosa, Bucalyplus ,. .. 6. . .- 676 Gastrodomorpha. . - 42. 61. 74
dumosus, Ologamasus 205, 2) 218, Geligium ee "146
dyserita, Cosmustert 219, 220, 232 veniculatus, Artabanus - 527, 328
yscrita, Cosmustertits ~ gerriphagus, ‘Tiphodytes toni” aoe
gestroi, Carventus . . e 296
: ghiliani, Calisius 281
Echinaster .. 731, 750 gigas, see cephalus gigas, Tympano-
Ecklonia .. .. 742, 744 cryptis
Ektopodon .. .. 438. 442, 443, 444, 445 gigas, Phascolonus . 420, 422, 424
elegans, Eurynome . 29, 35. 36, 37 gilberti, Holochila .. —- 4 173
elegans, Mezira .. ., 513, 543, 346, 350 aillespiei, Lasiorhinus - _ 383, 392, 393, 395,
elegantulus, Calisius .., . 282 396, 397
elongutus, Pictinellus 513, "534, 539, 540, glabra, Morgania .. = ele ATS
S44, 550 glauerti, Echinophryne -. .. . ~. 792, 794
enigmatica, Gastrodomorpha .. 61, 62, 78 Glochocoris .. - .. ,- S13, 534, S41
enigmutica, Mezira .. 513, a4, eit 550 vlomeratus, Echinaster . 750, 751, 754, 755
enodis, Chorizandra -. - ' 312 ulycinoides, Clematis ., we AAT
erinacea, Neodoris - 1. 336 eoliath, Procoptodon . ., 420
erraticus, Aradus 271, 2R0, “284, 549 goodingi, Holochila , 166, Bae 168,
essingtonensis, Cyrena .. 158 . 174
Eucalyptus 233. 287, 427, “428, 429, gouldi, see lateralis eouldi, Zosterops.
432, 433, 436, 458, 605, 699 gracilis, Calisius . - . 282
Eucrassatella . 625 uracilis, Lamellaxis ., ‘6 79
Fuepicrius .. .. 0... * 206, 208 gracilis, Radiaster , 755
Eulophus |. . S554 grandidieri, Philaemon - 356
Eupelmus .. fo se ge, Ss: grandis, Nepanthia .. .. .. .. .. 748
Eurynome .. . ale’ 29 et seq grandis, Paranepanthia . 731, 747, 748, 755
Buryparasitus .. 205, 208 pranifera, Asterias Bie lye «hh TSS
Evanssellus .. 206. "497, 498, “499, 500, 505 pranifera, Uniophora . ., ,, 753, 754, 755

exigua, Asterias 4
exigua, Patiriella ..

exilirostris, Paradrymus ,

“ 746 pranulatus, Aegisocoris -
: 745, 746, 754, 755

39, 45, 49, 78

granulosa. Eurynome

+» 513, $14, 522,
523, 536, 550

29 et seq

802 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE

_ 329, 337, 342,
343, 345
griffithsioides, Neomonospora , .. .. 477
grossi, Argocoris . 513, 514, 520, 521,

vreeni, Aphelodoris ,

536, 550

grossi, Calisius . , . 283, 284, 287, 549
erossi, Neanura .. .. . 261, 272, 273
Gryon .. . 553
gularis, see maculatus. gularis,

Amphibolurus
gularis, Melithreptus .. 2... 0. 699
gunni, Patiriella . . , 745, 747, 755
gunni, Pentagonaster .. .. .. .. .. 739
gunnii, Asterina .. .. .. 2. 2. .. TAT
hackeri, Calisius ., .. 283, 284, 287, 28%
hackeri, Chelonoderus , ,. .. .. S19, 523
hackeri. Drakiessa .. .. .. .. .. 519, 523
Hadra .. . Be 4h fei) 8&4
hadracantha, Nepanthia = 748, 749
haematodus moluccanus, Tricho-

glossus .. ., RB) tec. ae Oe
haluszfyi, Ctenoneurus ., , 530
halmaturina, see lateralis halmaturina,

Zosterops
Balen’ oe 84081 gree 341
Halophila .. ., 742, 751. 754
halyaetus, Hypochrysops ae oa 176
hamiltonsmithi, Pseudotyrannoch

thonius .. . ., 757, 759, 760
Haminoea . 1 : : 33)
hanschini, Neuroctenus om . §32
hartmeyeri, Astropecten -. 2 ., . 735
helenita, Holochila .. .. » ae 172, 173
helenita dimmarpha: Hotochila nw i tpl PBR
Helicella 2 ce. oa. .. 82, 85, 487
Helix... . ; *.. ot fx 85
hemighauca, Alalaya tie 673
Heterogamasus ., 206, 497, "498. 500, 510

Heterogamasus (Heterogamasus) . 497, 499,

500, 505
hirsutus, Vombatus . . 399, 401-417
hirsutum, Opossum... 398

hirtellus cirratus, Achorutes _ .. .. 266-267
hirtellus schoetti, Achorutes .. .. 273, 274
hirtellus wellinglonia, Achorutes . .. 268
Halociittla s. ie Oye ee . 168; 166
horvathi, Calisius .. 0. 22 22 2, 5, 282
humeralis, Therapon ., 9, .. 4, .. 692
hvadesi, Henricia ,. ,. ,- Tc 755
ali dalam Cane: - 206
Flylas f= : a _. TH, 7L2, 720
idmo idmo. Agyris .. - 176
inermis, see reticulatus inermis,

Amphibolufus
infantulus, Glochogoris ,. -. 313, 534
infuntulus, Mezira (Mezirella) .. S13, $33,

534

infantulus, Pictinellus . S13, 533
inflata, see ventrosa. inflata,

Cochlicella
infuscatus, Calisits ., ,. ., y. .) 282

ingulba, Nicoliana ,. .- .) 4, 4) 2. 65Y

Pace
inopina, Asterina 2; a; ts ec 1 ve 754
insignis, Calisius ., ,. .. 2. -) 4, 282
insulare, Myoporum ,, ct ae ee SIO

intervenius, Calisius .. 280. 283, 284, 287
intima, Tympanocryptis -. 181, I84, L&S,

186, 187, 188

ifregularis, Pyrura .. ,. 753
irregularis, Smilasterias . - 7a. 754, 755
IStATUS 2: oe ee ee ee OST, 583
Isodermus 2. 2... | 275
Isopeltus ., 42, 49, 55. 61, 74
izzardi, Arictus 1... tg 341
iazardi, Mezira . .. .. .2 .- .. 2 Sd
johnsonii, Crocodiluy -. -. ._ . 377
jobnstoni, Clinus ., 2, 2, 2...) 2.) 794
johnstoni, Petraites .. 791, 792. 7a4
juliae, Aphelodoris . 329, 337, 341,
342, 343

kirkaldyi, Carventus ,. . . 3 oo 939i
kreftii, Phascolomys .. 2 _. - . 409
kuljamurpensis, Litokoala , "446, 447
laevis, Crinia 2 , 705, 707
Lamprohaminoea .. .. ., . 331
lanceolatus, Masturus _. .. 353, 354. 355
landsdowneana, Eucalyptts .. 2. . 702
Lasiorhinus . - i . 390, 405, 456
lasiorhinus, Phascolomys ae ae 390
lateabundans, Brachydrymus |. ‘45, 73, 78
lateralis, Zosterops .. .2 2. 6. 1.) 577
luteralis gouldi, Zosterops + we ct 7%
lateralis halmaturina, Zoslerops . . 577

lalifrons, Lasiorhinus | -. 383 ef seq, 39%,
401-417, 425
latifrons barnardi, Lasiorhinus ., 383, 392
latifrons, Phascolomys ., .. 390, 407, 409
laliventris, Artabanus ,, .. .. ,. .. 527
lativentris, Calisius 2... . 282
latopalmata, Hyla .. 711, 718, “719, 720),
721, 723, 724, 726

latopalmata latopalmata. Hyla ,. ., 719
lalopalmata watjulumensis, iva a 712,
. 71h, 718, 726

latopalmata, Litorin .. 2... i 719
Laurencia .. Se 746, 747
luwsae, Apheladoris a; 329, “334, 337, 338,
341. 342, 348

leai, Calisius ., .. 283, 284, 290, 291, 549
leai, Pictinellus .. -. 513, 534. 536, 550
lecanii, Platygaster .. ._ - 554
lepidus, Cercartetus . a "575, 376
leptophylla, Eucalyptus 2, . 702
leptosceles, Ologamasus . . 05, ‘240, 221A,
217

lesueuri, Hyla . - 74, 712, 713, 719,
724, 725

leucotelus, Aradus .. ~. ~, 277, 279, 284
leucotelus, Mezira -. - |) ., wy 5.) 279
leucotis, Meliphaza 702

lineata lineata, Tympanoeryptis ‘ 181, 183,
184, 185, 186, 187, 188
Lissaptera ., 4, 0. ee ft 4 302

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 803

Pace

Litokoala .. - _ .. 446, 448-454
litoprothrix, Ologamasus ., 205, 210, 225,
227, 229

littoralis, Parasiliphis ~~ vn ot 206
Lobella’.. .. .. ate te ete “SGA
lobuliventris, Arietus oon ae hee oe 54
lobuliventris, Mezira ., 541
longiceps, Pictinellus - ' 513, 534, 539, 540,
544. 550

Jongi¢ornis, Calisius ; . -. 382
longifolia, Buculyplus .- -, -. .- - 429
longiventris, Calisius ., ., .) .) ~, 282
luctuosa, Aphelodoris _. .- .. .- 337. 343
luctuosa, Doris .. .. .- 2... oe 343
lugubris, Aradus ,. -. -. -. -. 277, 279
Luidia .. Yessy +) 732
lunatus, Melithreptus wo ere et op 699
lycimnia, Coccophugus -. .. 2 -. = 554
Lygocerus Ce ete ate oe ot “IS
macracantha, Zoroaster, 755
macrobrachia, Nectria . .. 467, ‘468, 474,

476-481, 738, 755
macropunctutus, Callistemon , .. 310, 700,

701, 702
Macrostigma ., .) 4. 4. 6 353
Maculaster - - ee Es

maculatus gularis, Amphibolurus ~ TRO, 181,
184, 185, 186, 187, 189

maculosi, Atiphiboluctis vpexl be 179,) 190
maculosa, Tymnpanoeryplis ., 179, 180, [B1,
183, 184, 185, 187, 188. 190

magdalenue, Calisiuy .. .. 283, 284, 288,
290, S49

magnifieu, Tosia ,, 740, 741, 742. 754, 755
magnilicum, Astrogonium .. . = 742
magnificus, Dipsacaster — . . 755
magnificus, Lonchotaster .. -. ., .. 755
major, Brenliscerus ,. 9, . 45, 55, 36, 78
major, Calisius .) 6. ce ee ve ee ey BRD
majuseulus, Neuroctentts at oe) =592
malayensis. Carventus . .- 295, 296, 298,
299, 549

malayensis, Mastigocoris . .. 513, 514, 549
mualayensis, Pictinellus 513, 540, S541,
344. 550

Manatanus .. .. “=. . 68
mansoni, Ologamasus - .. 205, 210, 241,
213, 215

Marvurila, Holochila sheet aw S22, U25
maryinata, Banksia. 2, 310, 700, 701, 702
marginata, Eucalyptus... ....., 492
marginata, Zoila ., 251, 252, 253, 256
Mastigocoriy . .. ee ae
maugeansis, Haminoea 329, 330, 331, 334
mayeri, Melivella .. 2, 2... we en 84
mefarliandi, Artabanus , ., 513, 528, 530.
544. 550

menamarai, Artabanellus .- SL3. SIT. 519,
550

mcoyi, Liasiorhinus . - 383, 390
medius, “Phascolomys”™ .. ,. ,. 422, 425

medusa, Heterogamasus f{Evanssellus)
497-5), 505-510

PAGE
Megadrymuls . . - 4. .. -. 41, 46, 74
megalops, Acanthias -. _. _- 79)
megalops, Squalus... 0... 0, 5. 79
Meuzuspilus .. .. .. ,... .. .. 553, S54
Megastigmus 2. -. 2 2. 2. 4. 1) S53
Melaleuca... ~ ee dd
melanocephala, Myzantha sf fi ae a 699
melanocephalum, Ceraphron ., 2... 552
melanocephalum, Copidosoma .. .. S51
melanocephalus, Ceraphron .. ,. 551, 552
melanops, Gliciphila .. ., fad she FQZ
melantatocephalus, Ceraphron. .. 551, 552
mellicornis, Anaphes -. .. -. .. ,.. 552
membranacea, Mezira ,. S546
membranacea micronesica, Mezira .. 546
inembranaceus, Arudus . . i. 546
membranaceus, Brachyrhynehus -. .- 546
Meracomelon .. .- cA tig 8A
Mezira cote tbe Me rent = SOD 533, 34S
Mezirella .. . 2. oy, 2.) $33
meziroides, Neurovtenus _ . - x. 533
Micronesica Mezira -. .. ~. ., .. S546
micronesicus, Aneurus ,. ,, ., .. 294
micronesicus, Calisius .. ,. .. 2... 282
microtheca, Kucalyptus .. .. - 673
minuta, Acaraptera - +» 305, 549
minutus, Carventus ., ., ,. .. , 300
mitchelli, Phascolomys . . _. 405, 415
Mizaldus . - . 40, 41, 42, 46, 73, 74

moluccunus, see haematodus molue-
canus, Trichoglossus

Monosaulax .. ,. 2.) 2. . 1. .. 4456
monteithi, Arictus .. 2... .., 542
monteithi, Glochocoris — , ot fhe DAE
montrouzieri, Neophlochia .. ., 524

maturikiensis, Pictinellns .. 513 (misspelt),
534, 538, 539, 544, 550

mullispina, Nectria 465, 467, 468, 470,
472, 476-478, 480-482, 738, 754, 7355

multispinus, Crossaster . - - 755
munetus, Chaetaster -. -. , - .. 468
murrayana, Elsothera oy ey ARS
muscorum, Achorutes ,. ., , .. 266
muscorum, Neanura ' . .. 261, 266
myersi, Acataplera .. .. —. —. 303, 305
Myina .. . em Bs ar teqe-ciy 2 4552
myomphala, ‘Satsuma 7 a 84

Tamicoortenis, Protochelifer 757, 760, 763
nasuti, Hyla 711, 712, 714, 7ER, 720, 723,

724, 726
nasutus, Pelodytes .. ,. .. -0 .. -) 723
nasulus, Eroteraicsine te ot th as) B76
Neanura ., | - . 261

Nectria ... 4, 463, 467, ARO, 730, 738
neglecta, Helicella 79, 83, 85- 87, 483-488,
491, 493, 494

Neophloeobia 523, S524, 525
Nepanthia .. 2. 6.2 62 wk en ee ee) AD
Nephrurus .. 0. -. 2 Le ee, 189
Nesiapitont as ca ae fe teers oo SOR
Neuroctenus ., .. Mele t te ee te IS
newmani, Achorutes te 262

newmani, Lobella —. -. 261, 262, 263, 264

804 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE

nigra, Dendrodoris .. .. .. .. «. 349
nigra, Doris .. 1...) ie ee
nigrofrenata, Hyla oe ee TE, 724, 726
niphophila, Eucalyptus... 4. 0. 231
nitidulus, Neuroctenus ,. .. .. .. 533
noltabilis, Calisius 282, 284, 291, 293, 549
Nothofagus .. ,. Flay eR » SOF
cf. novaecaledoniue, T Jeanura , 261, 266,
267, 268, 273

novaehollandiae, Phylidonyrigs .. .- 702
nucilis, Ologamasus ., .. 205, 210, 220
nuda, Asterias 2... . os be _ 753

nuda, Uniophora ., 753, 754, 755
nypelsi, Calisiuy 2. 6. 22 2. . 282
obesa, Petnecia - i 743, 744
oblongum, © eratosoma ‘ oe «BRB
obseurus, Isopeltus .. .. 51, 32, 34, 78
obvia, Helicella .. 85
ocellata, Nectria . _ 464- 468, 470), 472, 480-
482, 738, 755

ocellifera, Asterias . 464
ocellifera, Nectria 464, 464, 467, “470, 474,
474-441

ocelliferus, Goniodiscus .- .. 1. .. 464
oceidentalis, Parasterina .. .. 748, 749
octona, Sabulina .. _ 79, RU, 8S. BH. 87
Ologamasellus .. oo... | 208
Ologamasus .- 205, 206, 208, 209, 499, S10
Onychitirus 2. 6. 8, . 264
Ophiombsium 2. 20 2. 7. ee eee 732
Orectolobus .. 2. 05. s LB ow sy 375
ornmata. Banksia... 4. ee ee ee ee S10
ornala, Meliphaga .. -. -. , 699
Ornithorhynchus .. _. .. 443, 444, 445
oswaldii, Acacia .. ,. HP ae 73
ovalis, Halophila ., .. .. -- 732
ovatus, Carventus .. . 296, 298, aes $49
ovulorum, Myina .. .. .. - bd 552
ovulofrum, Mymar .. .. .. 0. 0. - S52
ovulorum, Polynema . -. . -. - 552
ovulorum, Pteromalus ., , +4 . S52
ovulorum, Telenomus .... ., .... 552
Oxyehilus 2. 65 54 FS fe we, ey) ey «259
pucificus, Calisius ., ., . se; wood
pacificus, Regalecus .. 2, .. .. .. 353
palankarinnica, Perikoula . ., .. 450. 451
pallidus, Brentiscerus -. .. 45, 55, 58%, 78
pallipes, Calisius .. 2. 0. 0. 2. 2.) 282
pupusa, Nyctimystes - “cs as; Oe
pitpuana, Eucalyptus .. ., .. .. .. 651
papuanus, Calisius .. .. ., 282

RS 13, 534, 535,
536, 550
papuasicus, see bilobiceps papuasicus,
Artabanus

papuasicus, Pictinellus . -

Paracalisiopsis .. .. ., 280, 281
Paradrymus .. .. . 40, 41, 48, 74
Paragryon .. 1... ee ee ee ee ee) 6553
Paranepanthia .. -. .. 5.) 6) ws +) «6748
Parasitiphis . . » eve: eta: 206
parkeri, Cophixalus White jen le le = 986

Pach

parvus, Phascolomys | , 399, 414. 415,
41h, 417

Paliriella .. 200. 2, - 731, 745, 747
ef, paticispinus, Marginaster wp oh ae) VET
pectinatus, Astropecten . .. 732, 733, 734.

735, 736, 755

pedicelligera, Nectria , - 470, 478. 482

penicillata, Meliphaga . .. .. .. .. 699
Pentagonaster ., . yo as ots 7349
pentagonus, Nymphaster sd se t3 aah | Oe
peregrinum, Ideobisium ... .. 762
Perikoala . - a “449, 451-454
Pepiseigis- oe ttf ph! uve cele peg) 208
peroni, Hyla -. A 3 :) ¥3
perserrata, Maroubra OYE eke pel ele 28 oh]
persimilis, Holochilia 166, 168, 169,
WO. 171

POU we ce. . on em 44
Prascolarctos ~ 447-454
Phuscolomys .. . ro S90
Phascolanus —. “420, 422, 424. 454, 456
Philaemon ... . . 356
phillyreoides, Pittosporum sein a Oto
Pictinellus 2... 314, 543, 534, S41
picturatus, Appolonius gemte ts) amen 2-65
picliratus, Calisius . lea : 282
pictus, Aniphibolurus ,. ,. 180, 183, 185,
186, 187

pileata, Fucalyptus . . ' 700, 701, 702
Pitethia -. e .. W76
Pinan “Ge op eee ee ow .. 751
pisunu, Theba 79, 81, 82, 85- 87, 4k4,
486, 491-494

placidus, Calisits .. 2. |. ih 382
planus, Isodermus .. .- - 275
platyrhinus, Phascolomys . 405, 407, 409,
415

Pleotaster ee ee eee ee ee ace ty PSL
Pleuroxia 2. 6). +S 84
polyacantha, COmia f4°.9.0:4 ie i 528
polyacanthus, Astropecten . .. .. .. 736
polyacanthus, Barcinus .. .. 526
polyacanthus, Rossius .. .... .. +. 526
polyplax, Allostichaster , ., 731, 752, 753,
755

polyplax, Asteracanthion .. .. -, .- 752
polypora, Austrofromia . .. 731, 744. 755
polypora, Fromia .. .. .. .. .. .. 7d
porosus, Crocodilus 6 the we ta. he
Posidonia . .. .. 2) 6. ey yee) 330, 743
Praegliscita ., -. . 2.2.2... 2. 3936
practenera, Doris .. .. .. .. -. .. 347
preissi, Astropecten ,. ., 733, 734, 736,
754, 755

Propeanura .: ; -. 2. . 261, 266
propinqua, Eucalyptus: )-:- ---.. -429
Prosympiestus .. .. -. .. .. -. -. 276
proxima, Mezira .. _, 1a ielie 532
proximus, BS eacrenye ' it" 332
Pseudoceraphron ., 55ST
Pseudocheirus .. _ 448, 449, 450, 454
Pseudophryne .. .. .) .: - 706, 709
Pseudodrymus .. .. ., . 42, 69, 74

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 805

PAGE

pubescens, Melaleuca .. .. -, ., .- 605
pugil, Idéeobisium .. 2. 2. 0. 2. 1.) 763
pulchellus, Gamasiphig -. .. -. .- 206
pulex, Pseudoceraphron ,, ,. 551, 555, 556
punctatum, Cinclosoma .. -. -. .- 578
putoni, Brentiscerus -. .. .. .. .. SS
putoni, Scolopostethus .- .. ,. .. 55
Pythia ., .. fot. 4e un 496
pyrenvides, Ologumasus ». 205, 206, 209,
210, 222. 223. 224

pyrrhoptera, Phylidonyris -. . - .- 702
quadratus. Appolonius , a ae 65
Radix .. .. pate O04 495
ramsayi, Sceparnodom . 20, 422
Rumsayis PO fe den =; 456
regius, Lamprius -. 2, -, .) vy .. 353
regius, Pleuronectes ., .. 1. 2. 353
regnans, Eucalyptus va, mete he 52
reularis, Allostichaster .. .. 731, 752, 753,
754, 755

reini, Chionognathus , ,, 29, 30, 35, 36, 37
reinwardtii, Verrenuxia .. 00 0. 0... O76
reticulatus, Armphibolurus .. .. .. I84. 187
reticulatus inermis, Amphibolurus . 180,
181, 183, I87, 188

reticulata, Stylasterias 6... 0. 2.0. 75S
relrodrymus . ot _ 42, 55. 61, 62
Rhizophaseolonus .. 62. . 454, 456
Rhodacarus .. .. 205. 208, 498
rhysus, Pscudophidiaster f-.ty etic a:, WSS
robustus, Aneurus .. tect 293, 294
robustus, Appolonius . . “65, AA, 78

robustus, Carventus . . 298, 20%, 300, 549

Rondalesia SS at Mat att op 2 ' 57
rosacea, Lobella .. .- ., 261. 262
rosacea, Neunura 22 22, ... 265
rosaceus, Achorutes -. .. .2 . - 262
rosselli, Zoila .. -) be eO ti woe
Rossius ... Mm ott ba | Sah
rossquicki, Aphelodoris - . .» 329, 3497, 338,

339, 341, 342. 343, 348
ruber, Nannocampus .. -. 2. _. 792
rufogularis, Acanthagenys -. 2) ,, 699
rugosus, Paphagus we ly te wee DIA
rugosus, Stictoteleia ., , 552
vuna, Festucalex (Campichthys) - - “FOZ
runa, Ichthyocampus .. .. . 792
sabdaniffa., Hibiscus... - 5 66
saintvincentius, Hypselodoris tty ae 332
saipanensis, Calisius ., 2, ., ,. .. 282
salicis, Calisius .. 2. 2, 5.0.) 2.0 2. RI
Salinator . 4, . Sat ow tk ee 405
salinus, Hydrogamasus 6, 206

suoria, Nectria 2. .. 463, 467, 468, 474,
478-482, 738, 739, 749, 755

Scelio .. Te chee WE ees spec te pt me OO
Sceparnodon ' 419, 420, 422, 424. 425
schayeri, Astropecten cooee -- wr e233, 736
schoetti, see hirtellus schoetti,

Achorutes
schoetti, Neanura .. .. -. .. . o 2h]

Pace
Schoinobates . .. 448, 449, 450, 451, 454
schoutedeni, Calisiugs -, -. -, -. ~. 282
Scolopostethus . , .. 4 40, 42, 67. 74
Sculus ... oo 251

semimarmorata, ’Psedophryne . 705, an

oy
seplimus, Calisius .- _- ats 284, 288, 549
sericea, Adenanthos ., .. wa 702
serratus, Ektopodon ,, .- _ 437, 438, 439
serrulatus, Neuroctenus .. .. .. .. 332
Sessiluncus —. ,, me ot oe he 08
signifera. Crinia .. ,. 2.) 0) 4 705
simplicior, Ologam: as » .. 206
sinuatus, Artabanis ~. 2. ,. ., 326, 530
Sinumelon 2. 2. 2. ee eee ee 4
Sphtadtias,: asa: en-r ats at aos
Smiijlaslerias ., 26 es eh ta 4 752
solida. Salinator .. .. . x 495, 496
soljtarrus, Pseudoly.rannochthonius .. 740

sorrentensis, see Vvenusta sorrentensis,
Zoila

southeotti, Ologamasus . ,, 205, 210. 211.
232, 233

spaldingi, Hyla .. 711, 713, 714, 715, 726

spechtae, Tuckerellit , 795, 797

spinosissimus, Gamasellus (2?) , 497, SO|

spinosissinius, Heterozamasus | Helero-

fAMASUs) ». 6, wy ye 497-501
spinulosus, Calisius .. 0, > ot EA 28a
Spyridium 2... it bl eT OT) asd
stabilis, Paralaoma =f - ABS
stappersi, Calisius .- - -- 82
stibarus, Pentagonaster ~, .2 . .. 739
Slictoteleia 2... .- 552
stolismena, Helicella ., 79. 84. &7, 4N2-4R6
stalonifera, Microcosmus 2...) . 753
stricta, Casuarina -. .. .e 310, 605
striolatus. Ologamasus .. 2) , . 206
stvlatus, Chelonoderus .. .. .. 2. S19
Stylogamusus 2... .. .. 206, 208
subapterus, Eupteromalus. at, ae 554
subaustrilis, Neodoris .. —. 329, 334, 336
subparallelus, Prosymipiestus .0 .. 2, 276
subtriangula, Mezira .. .. 2, .. 2, 346
sulcata, Mezira .. . 2... v2 2.) S46
Sylvadrymus .. 0... 0... -. .2.. #74
syntomus, Astropecten ., 733, 734, 736
syrphii, Ceraphron .. .. 2. 0, .,) S54
Tuchyglossus ,. .. 0. . . 444
tukii, Salinator , . tg te oe ADS
Taphropelfus .. 2. 2. -, ,- , 40
lardus, Eneyrtus . .. , ,. ,. .. 552
tasmanica, Zosterops .. ., .. . 57%
tasmanicus, Calisius . 2. 283, 284, 287
taxsmaniensis, Chrornodoris 329, 332, 333,

334
tasmaniensis, Glossodoris ., .. - 332
taleana, Xanthorrhoea .. .. -. .. -. 310
tenera, Haminoea ,. _. .. "330, 331
tenuicornis, Isopeltus - - 50, 34. 78

tenuirostris, Acanthorhynchus olen 102
terebrans, Telenomus .. ,. -. .. ,. 9452

806 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

PAGE
terminalis, Serloin ., .. .. 1.) .. .. S54
terminatis, Homalotypus .. .. .. .. 554
terracreginae, Megadrymus 45, 47, 78

territorialis, Appolonius 45, 65, 66, 67, 78
termitophilus, Aspisocoris 513, 514, 516,
517, 536, 549

tetracanthus, Pteraster .. . 755
tetraporophora, Tympanocryptis. 179, 1&1,
184, 185, 186, 187, 188

Tetrastichus .- .. 554
Theba .. .. AE th. _ 82, "RI. 483
thersites, Zoila ae . 252
thersites contraria, Zoila .. pte i 259
thomsoni, Phascolomys . .. .. -- 401
thoracocera, Mezira .. .. .. .. .. 4542
thoracoceras, Aradus .. .. -, ., -- 541
thoracoceras, Arictus ... 541. 542
thoracoceras, Brachyriynehur sagt “S42
tigris, Syngnathus .. .. at ee TROT
VBTIS OV OZ a calle ee epee TPO
tindalei, Ologamasus . 205, 210, 211, 226,

230, 231
tinianensis, Culisius .. .. .. .. 282, 290
tirarensis, Neohelos .. ., ., 436, 458
tornieri, Hyla 2. 2... ue eee ee FD
torus, Kolopsis .. -. -. .. .. .. 458
Tosia .. .. ea asHloBnainsl dele inte “ESM; 240
trapezia, Anadra .. .. .- .- .. 593, 599
DTTP AGIS fos p at jetty foe atein ete cetaete OSS
EDFA TUS. 08m aap ee te ta wae ee a OD
TGACESI fs oie ake ale fem alle eee | SOND
Prichopryia 4, a: es i eh ee ee oe | O54
Trichosteresis .. 2... .. .. 2. .. S554
tricolor, Neodoris -. .- .. «, .. «. 336
BRiganale 6 ee. ee Ae ee Be bw WAZ
Trimicrops .. 6. 2 2. uw. we ew.) 6SS4
Trimorus .. . 552

triocelluins, Brentiscerus 45, 56, 59, ‘60, 78
Triodia 132, 133, 135, 144, 145, 147, 149,

153
triscriatus, Astropecten 733, 735, 736, 737
Tritomacera .. See ER St op 68
troglophila, Morikawia .. 757, 758, 760
troughtoni, Nepanthia .. .. 731, 748, 755
troughtoni, Parasterina .. .. .. 748, 749
trukensis, Calisius .. .. 2... 2. .. 282

truncatus, Artibanus
Irunciutus. Asterodiscus

513, 527, 550
730, 737. 755

truncatus, Barcinus .. 2. 1. 4, 4. 833
luberculata, Crintia . . 533
tubsrculata, Neophlaeobia _. 513, 524, 525,

536, 550
tuberculaltus, Artubanus ., .. 513, 427, 550
Tuckerella .. . at od of Yo, 797
tuena, Sathrochthonius . .. .. .. 757
turamicus, Calisius — - 282

Tympanocryptis . . 179, 184, 188, 189, 190

PAGE
uniformis, Tympanocryptis shire - =89
Uniophora .. .. .. .. ’ 731, 753
validus, Ologamasus 205, 210, 212,

22.1, 222

valvulatus, Anthaster .. 730, 743, 754, 755
valvulatus, Oreaster .. .. ine 74S
vappa. Astropecten . . "733, “735, 736,
737, 755

329, 337, 339, 341,
345, 3H, 348, 349

varia, Aphelodoris

varia, Archidoris ., .. i] 4 337
vatias Dorit .£ bse nn poe Bone "337, 347
variabilis, Doris .. .. 2. 2. ©. 347
varus, Asteronotus . .. nats 347

79, 82, 83. 85-87,
483-486, 493, 494

ventrosa, Cochlicella . .

ventrosa, bizona, Cochlicella .. .. —. 83
ventrosa inflata, Cochlivella ,, .. .. 83
venusta sorrentensis, Zoila . .. .. ,. 252
venusla venusta, Zoila .. - +e ot BSD
vercoi, see friendi vercoi, Zoila
vernicina, Asterias .. . “SH 8. Ta3
vernicina, Petricia .. .. 730, 742, 744, 755
verruciger, Calisius . 2... .. ., .. 282
vicinus, Neuroctenus -. .. .. .. .. 433
victoriae, Acacia .. .. .. .. .. .. 673
virescens, Meliphaga .. ._ .. 699
virgata, Helicella .. ., 79, &1, "83, '85- 87,
484-494
virgosus, Ologamusus .. 205, 210, 233, 234
Vombatus .. re - 405, 456
vombatus, Phascolomys co ete | SS
wagneri. Rossius 2. |. .. S36

weemala, see alboyenata Wweemala,
Anisynta

wellingtonia, see hirtellus wellingtonia,
Achorutes

wellingtonia, Neanura _. 261, 266, 268, 269

wilsoni, Mezira . S513. 542, 543. 550

wilsoni. Nectria .. .. 466. 467, 474, 480,

d 481, 482
Wisterif. 4) As te ed oe SAL
Wombalula . o. 0. 6) fn, 392
womerslevi, Neanura .. .. 261, 270, 271
woodwardi, Mizaldus .. .. .. 39, 43, 78
wotjuumensis, Hyla .. 713, 714, 715, 718.

724, 726
Xanthomelon .. Laie oe &4
xanthospilos, Candalides ahaa 166
zebra, Astropecten ., 2... ., 735
Zoila.. .. + te ; 252, 253
zonata, Morikawia te athe wae 759
Aasteta 2. je te ae ee .. 330, 742
FStOrOps> wel dae ee a of 577

CONTENTS

A further description of large stone imple-
ments from South Australia ...........0...

An archaeological camp-site in the vicinity of
Hallet Cove, South Australia ...............

Nomenclature of Archaeological cultures and
associated implements in Australia .........

Ooituaty: Notices nectou erie avakrsetei hve nascan aen seas aeunen kegs ake ene

Prehistoric rock engravings at Thomas Reser-
voir, Cleland Hills, Western Central
Austral tases ities sas ies ee etree

Excavation Of Aboriginal Graves at Gidgealpa,
SOUCHAUSttaliartrysteccussarwarasess seeps

Aboriginal cave paintings and rock markings
at Ingaladdi rock shelter, Willeroo,
Northern Territory of Australia ............

Two more prehistoric stone artifacts from
Wwesterh Rapa eesti ele ene ys:

Honeyeaters relative to nectar feeding on
Kangarcovlslqndecatn. critic tareressaamcrvncs

Additions to the frog fauna of South Australia

A Taxonomic Study of Hylid Frogs of the Hyla
lesueuri Complex occurring in North-
Western Australia ........ccccccecessersveseeaes

The Shallow Water Echinoderm Fauna of South
Australia. Part I: The Asteroids.........

Some Cave-dwelling Pseudoscorpionidea from
Australia and New Caledonia ...............

Catalogue of Meteorites in the South Australian
Museum (Excluding Tektites) ...............

Short Notes—

Further additions to the Fish Fauna of
Souther Austral lan eV Awude pues kare ts rae

Redescription of Tuckerella spechtae
Womersleyer: caer eavesntasts: he gets st

Robert Edwards ..

Graeme L. Pretty ..

Charles P. Mountford and

Erhard J. Brandl

Graeme L. Pretty ..

J. Allen Keast and

wneene

Herbert T. Condon ...
David S. Woodruff and

Michael J. Tyler..

Michael J. Tyler.....

Scoresby A. Shepherd ...

MeBelere S80,

Meee

Index Genetasand:Speclesan ats uryscste cutest sca seed es eace cuanar sean G

679

699

705

711

729

757

767